JP2014207925A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine characterized in module configuration.SOLUTION: The CPU of a game machine is able to perform the operation in which when a first jump command is accepted, a command stored in a first jump destination address is accepted subsequent to the first jump commandment. The CPU of the game machine is able to perform also the operation in which when a second jump command is accepted, a command stored in a second jump destination address is accepted subsequent to the second jump command. The ROM of the game machine stores at least a first module that uses the first jump destination address as a beginning address. The last address of the first module is greater than the second jump destination address.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

  A conventional gaming machine is known which is composed of a plurality of modules (processes) in order to execute various game controls and effect controls (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in the module configuration.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in a module configuration.

  The present invention is a gaming machine comprising a microprocessor including at least a CPU and a ROM, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and when the CPU receives a first jump instruction, The CPU can execute at least an operation of receiving an instruction stored in the first jump destination address after the first jump instruction. When the CPU receives the second jump instruction, The ROM can execute at least an operation of receiving an instruction stored in a second jump destination address after the second jump instruction, and the ROM has a first address with the first jump destination address One module is stored at least, and the last address of the first module is the second jump destination address. It is larger than it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the module configuration.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing only a main part of a basic circuit 302 extracted from a main control part 300. (A) It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU304. (B) It is the figure which showed the detail of the RWM area | region of the memory map shown to (a). (C) It is the figure which showed the I / O map of CPU304. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initialization process. It is a time chart of the starting process after a system reset. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the T-registration check process performed by the initial setting 1. FIG. (B) It is an example of the program list of T cash register check processing. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the T cash register check process which concerns on a modification. (B) It is an example of the program list of the T cash register check process concerning a modification. It is the figure which extracted and showed only the LD command from the program list of FIG.11 (b). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of data stored in a ROM 306. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of instruction data of a main control unit 300. FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed the high-order bit and the low-order bit of the instruction data of the main control part 300. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the instruction data table. An example of the movement of the address by the CALL instruction is shown conceptually. It is the figure which showed an example of the command data and supplementary data of a CALL command. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the structure of the EXESUB instruction. FIG. 20B is a diagram showing an instruction data table in which an EXESUB instruction is assigned to the empty area in FIG. It is the figure which showed notionally an example of the movement of the address by an EXESUB instruction. It shows an example of calling of the top address of a subroutine by the EXESUB instruction. It is the figure which showed an example of the instruction data and the supplementary data of the EXESUB instruction. It is the program list which showed an example of the control program of the main control part timer interruption process. It is the figure which showed the case where the ROM area was comprised so that the ROM control area in which the control program data was memorize | stored might become larger than the area | region which can be called by the EXESUB instruction. (A) (b) It is the figure which showed an example at the time of expanding the area | region of the head address of the subroutine which can be called by the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn). (A) A part of the control program of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process is extracted. (B) A part of the control program for the normal state update process is extracted. (C) A part of a conventional memory read process is extracted. (D) It is the figure which showed a part of variable area | region provided in RAM area (RWM area | region). (E) A part of the memory read processing according to the present embodiment is extracted. It is the figure which compared the machine language of the conventional memory reading process shown in FIG.29 (c), and the machine language of the memory reading process which concerns on this embodiment shown in FIG.29 (e). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for table selection. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st fluctuation pattern selection table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd fluctuation pattern selection table. (D) It is the figure which showed the reservation number storage area, the random number 1 storage area, and the random number 2 storage area which are provided in the storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the addresses F040H to F042H of the RWM area. 3 is an example of a program list showing a part of a definition of a data table stored in a ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and a part of a definition of a variable storage area provided in a RAM 308. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special symbol fluctuation | variation time lottery process. It is an example of a program list of special symbol variation time lottery processing. It is the figure which showed a part of command with which the control part 300 (CPU304) is provided, and its description. (A) It is the figure which showed the high-order bit and the low-order bit of the instruction data of the main control part 300. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the instruction data table. It is the figure which showed the modification of the table for table selection, the 1st fluctuation pattern selection table, and the 2nd fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special symbol fluctuation | variation time lottery process which concerns on a modification. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the initial setting data table memorize | stored in ROM306. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of storage area of RAM308 after the initialization process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an initial setting process. It is an example of the program list of an initialization process. (A) It is the figure which showed a part of 2nd special command with which the main-control part 300 is provided. (B) It is the figure which showed the state of the flag register before and behind performing a 2nd special instruction. It is a figure showing an example of processing using a CPJR instruction. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the program using the conventional command. (B) An example of a program using a CPJR instruction. It is a figure showing an example of other processing using a CPJR instruction. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of another process using a CPJR instruction including a process V. It is a figure showing an example of processing using a CPRT instruction. (A) An example of a program using a CPRT instruction. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the program using the conventional command. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a part of a third special instruction included in the main control unit 300. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a “RESmZ n, r” instruction. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction. It is the figure which extracted and showed the part applicable to a RES command from the command map of the main control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a RES instruction according to Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a RES instruction according to Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program using a RES instruction according to Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a RES instruction according to Modification 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a RES instruction according to Modification 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a RES instruction according to Modification 2. It is the figure which extracted and showed the part applicable to the RES command which concerns on the modification 2 from the command map of the main control part. It is the figure which showed the other modification of the RES instruction. (A) It is the figure which showed the instruction map at the time of providing the RES instruction which prohibits the access of a predetermined bit, and the instruction map when provided with the RES instruction which prohibits the access of a predetermined bit. (B) It is the figure which showed the example which made the magnitude of the numerical value of the 1st operand of a RES instruction differ, and the arrangement | sequence order of the instruction map of a RES instruction. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the program starting setting process which is a part of user program. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the power-on setting process which is a part of user program. It is the figure which showed a part of user program equivalent to a main control part timer interruption process. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the contents of a fourth special instruction included in the main control unit 300 and the ROM area of the main control unit 300. It is the figure which extracted and showed the part applicable to the RST command which concerns on a 4th special command from the command map of the main control part. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the slot machine as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a front view showing the slot machine in a state where the front door is opened. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) It is the figure which expanded and showed the arrangement | sequence of the symbol given to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) planarly. (B) It is the figure which showed the kind of winning combination (including an operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU1404 of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU1504 of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 2nd sub control part. It is the figure which showed the other example of application of this invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a basic circuit 302 when a microprocessor 3000 is used. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of reset. FIG. 76 is an internal configuration diagram of a random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 75. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing by a noise filter 3185 illustrated in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing details of a random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG. 77. It is a figure which shows the range of the random number output when the maximum value of the random number generation range is not set. It is a figure which shows the range of the random number output when the maximum value different from FIG. 80 is set. It is a figure which shows the range which can acquire a random number in the random number generation range which set the maximum value and the minimum value. It is a figure which shows the derivation source of the random number used with the game machine of this embodiment with a table | surface. 5 is a diagram for explaining a first internal information register prepared in an internal register 3101 of an interrupt control circuit 3100. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of abnormality detection in a frequency monitoring circuit 3182. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of detection of abnormality in the random number monitoring circuit 3184. It is the figure which compared the cycle in which a random number makes a round, and the cycle of a timer interruption. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initial setting 2 in a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the random number generation circuit initial setting process in step S1053. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a common drawing relevant lottery process. (B) It is a figure which shows a common drawing lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure related lottery process. (A) It is a figure which shows a special drawing lottery table. (B) It is a figure which shows a stop symbol lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. It is the figure which showed the flow of the process which acquires a special figure winning random number and a common winning random number among winning prize reception processes in step S217. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation | movement in the case of power-off. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation | movement in the case of a momentary interruption. It is a figure which shows the problem of a random number generation range. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a modification of the random number update circuit 3183 described in FIG. 79. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part timer interruption process. 6 is a diagram for explaining a second internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a third internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a fourth internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. It is a figure which shows the flow of a system reset including the relationship with random number update. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the process performed by the initial setting of a game control program. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the concept of the process of (a). 76 is a diagram showing a modification of the reset control circuit 314 of the microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. 75. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example when a timeout of WDT 3141 occurs only in main control unit 300 out of main control unit 300 and first sub control unit 400. (A) It is the figure which showed the 1st modification of the structure of the main control part. (B) It is the figure which showed the 2nd modification of the structure of the main control part. (C) It is the figure which showed the structural example of the reset circuit comprised including the random delay circuit 317, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, and WDT314. (A) It is the figure which showed the 1st modification of FIG. 109 (c). (B) It is the figure which showed the 2nd modification of FIG. 109 (c). (A) It is the figure which showed the 3rd modification of the reset circuit shown in FIG.109 (c). (B) It is the figure which showed a part of various IC connected to CPU304. It is the figure which showed the 1st modification of the connection of the reset signal output terminal XRSTO shown in FIG.111 (b). FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a basic circuit 302 described with reference to FIG. 4 and a part of various ICs connected to the basic circuit 302; (A) An example of setting a fixed extension time is shown. (B) A setting example of the random extension time is shown. An example of setting the timeout time of WDT 314 is shown. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed the change of the output signal of a reset output terminal XSRSTO terminal, and the state change of a security mode. (A), (b) It is the figure which showed the example from which the end timing of a fixed extension process and the timing which outputs the signal of H level from reset output terminal XRSTO correspond, but differ in random extension time. (C), (d) It is the figure which showed the example which the completion | finish timing of a fixed extension process and the timing which outputs the signal of H level from reset output terminal XRSTO correspond, but fixed extension time differs. It is the figure which showed the example which changes a reset output signal on the occasion of a fixed extension process. It is the figure which showed the change of the state of an address signal, a data signal, a control signal, and a reset output signal, and a security mode. (A) It is the figure which showed the state change of the other output signal after an external reset. (B) It is the figure which showed the state change of the other output signal after internal reset. (A) It is the figure which showed the other example of the state change of the other output signal after an external reset. (B) It is the figure which showed the other example of the state change of the other output signal after internal reset. (A) It is the figure which showed the example of the start timing of the security mode after an external reset. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of the start timing of the security mode after internal reset. It is the figure which showed the basic concept of this invention. (A) It is the figure which showed the example of a connection of the power supply board | substrate 182 demonstrated using FIG. 2, the payout board | substrate 170, and the main board | substrate 156. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed the conventional connection aspect corresponding to (a). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process which concerns on a modification, and is a flowchart corresponding to the said FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initial setting 2 in a main control part main process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the signal output of the predetermined | prescribed output terminal which concerns on this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the signal output of the predetermined | prescribed output terminal which concerns on this invention. It is the figure which showed the change of the system clock signal at the time of a user reset, a data signal, a control signal, and a reset output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process at the time of a power failure in a main control part. It is a flowchart of the initial setting process in step S2101 of FIG. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a timer circuit 311 shown in FIG. 75. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a counter circuit 312 shown in FIG. 75. It is a figure for demonstrating the control register 3121 in detail. FIG. 8 is a timing chart for explaining read / write timings of an internal RAM area and an internal register area on the memory map shown in FIG. FIG. 8 is a timing chart for explaining read / write timings of a built-in register area on the I / O map shown in FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing only the flow of signals to the counter circuit 312 in the microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. 75. It is the figure which showed the example which makes the counter circuit 0 update irregularly. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a first modification in which the counter circuit 0 is an update source of the counter circuit 1; It is the figure which showed the modification 2 which makes the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1 function as a 2-byte counter. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a modification 31 in which the update source of the counter circuit 0 is the update source of the counter circuit 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a fourth modification in which the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1 are cascade-connected to each other. 10 is a timing chart for explaining reading and writing chip select timings of an external memory outside a microprocessor 3000 (basic circuit). 5 is a timing chart for explaining external I / O reading and writing chip select timing. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing only the flow of signals to the counter circuit 312 in the microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. 75. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command setting transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of command transmission processing for jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a block transfer process. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed an example of the command table referred during a jackpot game. It is the flowchart which extracted and showed only the characteristic part of this invention. (A), (b) It is the flowchart which showed the characteristic part of this invention from the viewpoint different from the said FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the process of the prior art corresponding to the characteristic part of this invention, and is a flowchart corresponding to the said FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed the required time in the case of performing block transfer in the jackpot middle command transmission processing which concerns on this invention. (B) It is the figure which showed the required time in the case of performing block transfer in the jackpot middle command transmission processing which concerns on a prior art. It is the flowchart which showed the example of the arrangement | positioning place of correction | amendment time waiting | standby process. It is the figure which showed the flow of interruption processing typically. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command setting transmission process. (A)-(f) It is the figure which showed an example of the command table referred during a game. It is the figure which showed a part of 5th special command with which the main-control part 300 is provided, and its description. It is the figure which compared the number of bytes of a 5th special instruction, and the number of states. It is the figure which showed an example of the instruction | command which changes Z flag and SZ flag. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a timer update process. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the program of the timer update process which concerns on this invention. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the program of the conventional timer update process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a display symbol lottery. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a lottery preparation process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a data selection process. It is the figure which showed an example of the program of the lottery preparation process which concerns on this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a lottery process. It is the figure which showed an example of the program of the lottery process which concerns on this invention. It is the figure which showed an example of the program of the conventional lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout request number transmission process. It is the figure which showed an example of the program of the payment request number transmission process which concerns on this invention. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention. It is the figure which showed the modification of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other outline | summary of this invention. It is the figure which showed the modification of the WARU instruction. It is a schematic diagram explaining the process using a flag change command and a flag determination command. It is a schematic diagram explaining the process using a flag change command and a flag determination command. It is an example of a program using a flag change instruction and a flag determination instruction. It is an example of a program using a flag change instruction and a flag determination instruction. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) An example of a special display stop display mode is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a normal stop display mode is shown. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. It is an internal block diagram of a basic circuit. It is a circuit block diagram showing an example of a wiring pattern of a random number crystal oscillator and a system crystal oscillator connected to a basic circuit. It is an internal block diagram of a random number circuit. It is an internal block diagram of the frequency monitoring circuit with which a random number circuit is provided. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure state update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part main process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part timer interruption process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a strobe interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a sub control part main process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of command input processing. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a fluctuation pattern selection process. (D) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a symbol stop process. (E) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a strobe interruption process. (F) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a chance button interruption process. (G) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a variable update interruption process. It is an external appearance perspective view of the package in which a basic circuit is mounted, The figure (b) is a side view which shows the vicinity of the visual recognition non-easy part of a package. (A) It is a top view of the package in which a basic circuit is mounted. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view which extracts and shows only the terminal and lower board | substrate of a package. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows a part of lower board | substrate of the package which concerns on the modification 1. FIG. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows a part of lower board | substrate of the package which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows a part of lower board | substrate of the package which concerns on the modification 3. FIG. (D) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows a part of lower board | substrate of the package which concerns on the modification 4. FIG. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the package which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the package which concerns on the modification 6. FIG. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view of the package which concerns on the modification 7. FIG. (D) It is an external appearance perspective view of the package concerning the modification 8. (A), (b) It is the external appearance perspective view which showed an example of the package in which the slit-shaped notch part was formed. (A) It is the external appearance perspective view which showed an example of the package which formed the circular arc-shaped notch part. (B), (c) It is the elements on larger scale which expand and show a notch part. (A) It is the external appearance perspective view which showed an example of the package with which the seal | sticker was stuck on the upper surface of a notch part. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows a mode that the package was bent. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the package after bending. (A)-(e) It is a top view of the package which concerns on a modification. (F)-(g) It is the side view which looked at the package concerning a modification from the longitudinal direction. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of IC socket. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the state which mounted the package in IC socket. It is a top view which shows the example of terminal arrangement | positioning of a package. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the IC socket which concerns on the modification 1. FIG. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the state which mounted the package in IC socket. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the IC socket which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. (B) It is a top view of the board | substrate with which the socket terminal of IC socket is mounted. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the cross section along the AA in FIG. 208 (a). (B) It is the figure which showed typically the cross section along the BB line in Fig.208 (a). It is the figure which showed typically the cross section of the connection part which concerns on the modification 1, and a socket terminal. It is the figure which showed typically the cross section of the connection part which concerns on the modification 2, and a socket terminal. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the IC socket which concerns on the modification 3. FIG. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the IC socket which concerns on the modification 4. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view of the IC socket which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. It is the external appearance perspective view which showed the example which mounted the IC socket in the board | substrate. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the signal line which connects the land in which IC socket is mounted, these lands, the crystal oscillator for random numbers, and the crystal oscillator for systems. (B) It is the elements on larger scale near the land. It is a figure for demonstrating the outer edge of IC socket. It is the side view which looked at the board | substrate 1002 from the side. 10 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern according to Modification 1. FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed the wiring pattern which concerns on the modification 2. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed the wiring pattern which concerns on the modification 3. FIG. It is the figure which showed the wiring pattern which concerns on the modification 4. (A) It is the figure which showed the wiring pattern which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. (B), (c) It is the figure which changed the wiring pattern which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern according to Modification 6. It is a top view of the board | substrate which mounts the above-mentioned IC socket. 10 is a plan view of a substrate according to Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a plan view of a substrate according to Modification 2. FIG. 10 is a plan view of a substrate according to Modification 3. FIG. An external perspective view of the slot machine is shown. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a main control unit. The circuit block diagram of a sub-control part is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game medal insertion process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a timer interruption process. 5 is a diagram showing an example of power supply among a power supply board 182, a payout board 170, and a main board 156. It is a figure which shows the example of a power supply in the main board | substrate 156. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of power supply in a power supply board 182 and a main board 156. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a power supply in the main board | substrate 156. FIG. 3 is a time chart of a startup process after power-on of the pachinko machine 100. 237 is a diagram illustrating a monitoring voltage obtained by enlarging a range surrounded by a broken-line ellipse O in FIG. It is a figure which shows the drive method (the 1) by which the first restart process of WDT314 was performed after the time T-low voltage. It is a figure which shows the drive method (the 2) by which the first restart process of WDT314 was performed after the time T-low voltage. It is a figure which shows the drive method (the 3) by which the first restart process of WDT314 was performed after time T-low voltage. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the delay process in the main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the delay process in the main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the delay process in the main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the device monitoring process in the main control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows the procedure which takes in 16-bit random number value from the random number generation circuit to RAM308. It is a figure which shows the procedure which takes in 16-bit random number value from the random number generation circuit to RAM308. FIG. 25A is a flowchart showing random number acquisition determination processing executed in the random number acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIGS. 249 and 250. FIG. 25B is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process executed in the random number acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIGS. 249 and 250. (A) is a flowchart for explaining in more detail the random number acquisition determination processing shown in FIG. 251 (a) executed in the random number acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIGS. 249 and 250. (B) is a flowchart for explaining in more detail the random number acquisition process shown in FIG. 251 (b) executed in the random number acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIGS. 249 and 250. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method for directly taking in a 16-bit random value sequentially input from a random number generation circuit 9006 into a predetermined soft latch random value register. 252 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition determination / acquisition processing executed in random number direct acquisition shown in FIG. 253. 258 is a flowchart for explaining in more detail the random number acquisition determination / acquisition process shown in FIG. 254 executed in the random number direct acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a program code describing a procedure for fetching random number values shown in FIGS. 249 and 250. FIG. 253 is a diagram showing an example of a program code describing a procedure for direct fetching of random number values shown in FIG. 253. It is a figure explaining the advantage of using a 3rd command. (A) is an example of a jackpot determination table, (b) is an example of a high probability state transition determination table, and (c) is an example of a timer number determination table. (A) is an example of a payout request number table, (b) is an example of a payout processing table, (c) is an example of a timer control data table, (d) is an example of a jump table, and (e) is restored. It is the figure which showed an example of the data table, respectively. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the main control part reset interruption process of the same pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the function limited weight process of the pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the payment request number transmission process of the pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the timer update process of the same pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the command setting transmission process of the pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the basic command setting transmission process of the pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of command transmission processing of the pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the return command setting process of the same pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the payout control part reset process of the pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of command analysis processing of the pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of command reception interruption processing of the pachinko machine. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the payout control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine. It is an internal block diagram of a 16-bit random number circuit. It is an internal block diagram of an 8-bit random number circuit. FIG. 276 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of program activation setting processing, and FIG. 276 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of power-on processing. FIG. 276 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the initial setting 2. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the delay process in the main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the device monitoring process in the main control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows the derivation source of the random number used with the game machine (pachinko machine) of this embodiment with a table | surface. It is a figure which shows the derivation source of the random number used with the game machine (slot machine) of this embodiment with a table | surface. (A) is a top view of the package 10100a and the package 10100b on which the basic circuit 5302 is mounted. (B) is a top view which shows the shape which connected the package 10100a and the package 10100b using the connection member 10100c. (C) is the side view. (D) is the perspective view. (A) is a top view which shows the shape which connected the package 10120a and the package 10120b in which the basic circuit 5302 is mounted by the connection wiring part 10120c. (B) is the side view. (C) is the perspective view. FIG. 282 is a diagram showing a state where the package 10100a and the package 10100b shown in FIGS. 282 (b), (c), and (d) are integrated with a connection member 10100c and covered with a storage case 10103. 283 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the package 10120a and the package 10120b illustrated in FIGS. 283 (a), (b), and (c) are integrated with a connection wiring portion 10120c and covered with a storage case 10104. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the state of a special figure start port, and random number acquisition. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the state of a special figure start port, and random number acquisition. It is a figure explaining the counter circuit 312 used for the pachinko machine (game table) which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 7. FIG. It is a figure which shows the process A-the process D performed by CPU304. It is a figure which shows the process A-the process D performed by CPU304. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of an interruption initial setting register. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the jump destination address when an interrupt request is generated and the jump destination address in the RST instruction. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification of the RST instruction | indication. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of module arrangement in the ROM area of the main control unit 300. (A) It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of the module 03 and the module 04 in ROM area | region. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of the module 03-1, the module 04, and the module 04-1 in ROM area | region. . (A) It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of the module 03-2, the module 03-2, and the module 04 in ROM area | region. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of the module 03-5, the module 03-4, and the module 04 in ROM area | region. (A) It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of the module 03-6 and the module 05 in ROM area | region. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of the module 03-7 and the module 04 in ROM area | region. (A) It is the figure which showed a part of command group which collected the command which has a 1st function among the commands with which the main control part 300 is provided. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of the modules 1 and 2 in ROM. (C) It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of the modules 3 and 2 in ROM. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the jump table. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of module arrangement in the ROM area of the main control unit 300. It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of the module 21 and the module 22 in ROM. It is the figure which showed the example of arrangement | positioning of module 21-A, module 21-B, and module 22 in ROM. (A) It is the figure which showed the structural example of the jump table and reference destination data. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of reference destination data and release classification. (A)-(c) It is the figure which showed an example of the open | release pattern referred from the jump table used for the open / close control of the variable winning opening 240. FIG. (A) It is the flowchart which showed the example which adds a variable as an offset value to an address and determines a reference destination. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the reference destination data. (A) It is the flowchart which showed the example which adds the offset value acquired from the offset table to an address, and determines a reference destination. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the offset table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the reference destination data. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the eighth embodiment. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side. It is an external appearance perspective view of the state which opened the front frame door of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the state which opened the front frame door of the pachinko machine. It is the front view seen from the back side of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a schematic front view of a game board for explaining the route of the circulating game ball and the position of various sensors. It is a block diagram which shows the connection of a pachinko machine and a management apparatus. It is a schematic top view of a ball number UI part. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a ball number control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a ball number control part. It is a flowchart of the interruption process of a ball number control part. It is a sequence chart which shows the communication procedure of a pachinko machine and a management apparatus. It is a sequence chart which shows the communication procedure of a pachinko machine and a management apparatus. It is a sequence chart which shows the communication procedure of a pachinko machine and a management apparatus. It is a sequence chart which shows the communication procedure of a pachinko machine and a management apparatus. It is a sequence chart which shows the communication procedure of a pachinko machine and a management apparatus. (A) It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the image is displayed on the decorative design display device. (B) It is a schematic top view of the ball number UI part. It is a figure which shows the state which switched the display image of the ball number UI part, Comprising: (a) It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the image is displayed on the decorative design display device, (b) of the ball number UI part It is an upper surface schematic diagram. It is a figure which shows the other form of the state which switched the display image of the ball number UI part, Comprising: (a) It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the image is displayed on the decorative design display device, (b) It is an upper surface schematic diagram of several UI part. The circuit block diagram of other embodiment of a control part is shown. (A) It is a block diagram explaining the communication process of a main control part and a ball number control part. (B) It is a block diagram explaining a serial communication circuit. (A) It is a flowchart of a prize mouth counter update process. (B) It is a flowchart of a serial command management process. (C) It is a flowchart of a serial command reception process. (D) It is a flowchart of a serial command transmission process. (E) It is a flowchart of a number-of-a-balls display process. (A) It is a flowchart of a prize mouth counter update process. (B) It is a schematic diagram of a winning number storage area. (A) It is a flowchart of a serial command management process. (B) It is a flowchart of a serial command reception process. (A) It is a flowchart of a serial command transmission process. (B) It is a schematic diagram of a winning number storage area. (C) It is a schematic diagram of a winning number storage area. (A) It is a schematic diagram of a winning number storage area. (B) It is a schematic diagram of a winning number storage area. (C) It is a schematic diagram of a winning number storage area. (D) An example of a prize ball command. (A) It is a flowchart of a prize ball number display process. (B) It is a schematic diagram of a winning number storage area. (A) It is a flowchart of a main control communication error management process. (B) It is a flowchart of a game ball number subtraction process. (C) It is a flowchart of a game ball number display process. (A) It is a flowchart of a serial command management process. (B) It is a flowchart of a serial command reception process. (C) It is a flowchart of a serial command transmission process. It is a timing chart of the communication processing between a main control part and a ball number control part. It is a timing chart of the communication processing between a main control part and a ball number control part. It is a timing chart of the communication processing between a main control part and a ball number control part. It is a timing chart of the communication processing between a main control part and a ball number control part. It is a timing chart of the communication processing between a main control part and a ball number control part. It is a block diagram explaining a launch control process and a ball feed control process. It is a flowchart explaining a ball | bowl feed control process. It is a flowchart explaining a discharge control process. (A) It is a flowchart explaining a ball | bowl feed control process. (B) It is a flowchart explaining a discharge control process. It is a flowchart explaining a ball | bowl feed control process and a discharge control process. It is a timing chart of a ball feed solenoid and a launch solenoid. It is a timing chart of a ball feed solenoid and a launch solenoid. It is a timing chart of a ball feed solenoid and a launch solenoid. It is a schematic diagram explaining the other form of a game media path | route. It is a flowchart explaining the stored ball number management process. It is a timing chart of a ball feed solenoid and a launch solenoid. It is a timing chart of a main control part, a ball number control part, and a launching solenoid. It is a schematic diagram explaining the state of the pachinko machine at the time of a power failure / power recovery. It is a schematic diagram explaining the state of the pachinko machine at the time of a power failure / power recovery. It is a block diagram explaining a power supply control part. It is a schematic diagram of the backup area provided in RAM. (A) It is a flowchart explaining a ball number control part main process. (B) It is a flowchart explaining a ball number control part command reception interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart explaining a command analysis process. (B) It is a flowchart explaining an electric disconnection process. It is a flowchart explaining a ball number control part interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart explaining an error management process. (B) It is a flowchart explaining a game ball number management process. (C) It is a flowchart explaining the number-of-spheres management process in a field. (A) It is a flowchart explaining a game media path | route management process. (B) It is a flowchart explaining a ball polishing apparatus control process. (C) It is a flowchart explaining a lifting apparatus control process. It is a figure explaining the state determination of an insertion detection sensor and a discharge | emission detection sensor. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect at the time of error generation. It is a schematic diagram explaining an example of an error alerting | reporting aspect. It is a time chart until the error alerting | reporting in a 1st error alerting | reporting aspect. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st error alerting | reporting aspect, Comprising: (a) It is a front view of a pachinko machine, (b) It is a top view of a ball number UI part. It is a flowchart explaining the (a) command analysis process of the ball number control part which concerns on a 2nd error alerting | reporting aspect, (b) It is a flowchart of a power interruption process. It is a flowchart of the ball number control part interruption process which concerns on a 2nd error alerting | reporting aspect. It is a time chart until the error alerting | reporting in a 2nd error alerting | reporting aspect. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd error alerting | reporting aspect, Comprising: (a) It is a front view of a pachinko machine, (b) It is a top view of a ball number UI part. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd error alerting | reporting aspect. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning Embodiment 10 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. It is the figure which showed the example of a connection of a main board | substrate, a payout board | substrate, an external terminal board, and an external device (hall computer). (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the external terminal board signal output from a main board | substrate. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the external terminal board signal output from a payout board | substrate. (A) A connection example in which the arrangement of the main board and the payout board is reversed with respect to the connection example shown in FIG. (B) A connection example in which both the main board and the payout board are directly connected to the external terminal board. It is the block diagram which showed the connection aspect of the main side microcomputer and the payout side microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the delay process in the main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize reception process. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of a structure of the number-of-balls storage area | region 308a-308d provided for every winning opening and starting opening. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command management process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize ball command setting process. It is the figure which showed an example of the change of the number of prize balls of (a)-(c) prize ball number storage area 308a-308d. (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the prize ball command table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the device monitoring process in the main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the external output signal setting process in the main control part timer interruption process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the mask process of the external output signal information in step S306. It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the external output signal setting process. It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of the external output signal setting process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which a payout control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a payout control part. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command analysis process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of main control communication confirmation command reception. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a timer update process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a timer update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout management process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a signal output process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a transmission command process. It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of a transmission command process. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a command transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the change of the variable in the timing chart of the example 1 of communication of the main control part 300 and the payout control part 600, and a predetermined timing. (A) It is an enlarged view of the time chart at the time of prize ball command transmission. (B) It is an enlarged view of the time chart of the period shown to t3 of FIG. (A) It is an example of the time chart at the time of detecting the some winning of a start opening or a winning opening in one main control part timer interruption process. (B) It is a time chart which shows the modification of the communication confirmation command from the payout control part 600. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the output example 1 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 2 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 3 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 4 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 5 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 6 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 7 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 8 of an external terminal board signal.

  <Embodiment 1>

Hereinafter, the game machine (pachinko machine 100) according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the progress of a game (for example, detection of an operation by a player, transition of a game state, game medium payout control, determination of success / failure, etc.) In response to a command signal transmitted by the main control unit 300 (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”), the first sub control unit 400 that mainly controls the production and the command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 A second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on it, a payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls in accordance with a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a launch that controls the launch of game balls A control unit 630 and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (details will be described later).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  <Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 5C, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.
<Basic circuit of main control unit>

  Next, the basic circuit 302 of the main controller 300 will be described in detail. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing only the main part of the basic circuit 302 extracted from the main control part 300.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes a CPU 304 that controls the entire main control unit 300, a ROM 306 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 304 and various data referred to by the CPU 304, and the CPU 304 temporarily stores data. RAM 308 for storing.
<Built-in register of CPU of main control unit>

  The CPU 304 is a control register for controlling a counter circuit, a timer circuit, a serial communication circuit, a random number circuit, an arithmetic circuit, a reset / interrupt controller, and the like, and a built-in register such as a register used when the CPU 304 executes a control program Is provided. The built-in registers include a T register (special register), a general purpose register, a program counter (PC), an instruction register, etc., which are one of the features of the present invention. The type of general-purpose register is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, an 8-bit register including an I register, an A register, an F register, a B register, a C register, a D register, an E register, an H register, and an L register is provided. The B and C registers, the D and E registers, and the H and L registers also function as 16-bit registers (pair registers) of the BC, DE, and HL registers that can perform 16-bit operations, respectively. It is configured.

  In this embodiment, the value of the interrupt vector (interrupt vector read from a predetermined device) output from the built-in device is the lower 8 bits, and the content of the I register (interrupt vector register, interrupt register) is the upper 8 bits. A 16-bit address is read as an interrupt processing address, and is branched (jumped) to an interrupt processing to be described later. For example, when an interrupt processing request is generated when the value of the I register is 00H and the value of the interrupt vector is 60H, this is indicated by 0060H (the upper byte is 00H of the I register and the lower byte is 60H of the interrupt vector). A 2-byte address (for example, 0412H) is loaded to the PC with the value (for example, 12H) stored at the address to be stored as the lower byte, and the value (for example, 04H) stored at the address indicated by 0061H as the upper byte. Thus, a branch (jump) is made to an interrupt process using this address as the head address.

  When an instruction is executed, the F register sequentially executes the S flag (sign flag), Z flag (zero flag), SZ flag (second zero flag), H flag (half carry flag) from bit 7 in the F register according to the execution result. , Bit 3 (empty bit), P / V flag (parity / overflow flag), N flag (subtract flag), and C flag (carry flag) change to 1 or 0 or do not change Or The SZ flag changes in the same way as the Z flag for instructions that change the Z flag, and all LD instructions of Z80 compatible instructions, all 16-bit arithmetic operation instructions (including INC instructions and DEC instructions), and RLCA of rotate shift instructions. It changes with an instruction, an RLA instruction, an RRCA instruction, an RRA instruction, and an “INA, (n)” instruction.

  Note that the 16-bit arithmetic instruction ADC instruction and SBC instruction change the Z flag, the other instructions do not change the Z flag, and the 16-bit arithmetic instruction changes the SZ flag. In addition, in the “INA, (n)” instruction, the SZ flag changes and the Z flag does not change. The position of the SZ flag or empty bit in the F register may be a bit other than the above-described bits. Note that the SZ flag may not be changed in the case of a special instruction described later.

  In the present embodiment, A ′, F ′, B ′, A ′, F ′, B ′, A ′, F ′, B ′, A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L are used as auxiliary registers (back registers) corresponding to the general-purpose registers (main registers). Each of the general-purpose registers C ′, D ′, E ′, H ′, and L ′ is provided, but only the T register that is a special register is not provided with an auxiliary register. Therefore, the usage of the T register is limited, and the usage frequency of the T register is lower than that of the general-purpose register. Therefore, a situation in which the value of the T register is inadvertently rewritten (the contents of the T register are destroyed). Situation) can be prevented in advance. Note that the value of the auxiliary register cannot be directly read / written by various instructions, and only the value of the main register and the value of the auxiliary register are allowed to be exchanged by a special exchange instruction (EX instruction, EXX instruction). Here, for convenience of explanation, a register whose register value can be easily changed by an instruction such as a PUSH instruction / POP instruction is a general-purpose register. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and special registers such as an A register (accumulator) and an F register (flag register) are used. It is not necessary to include a register having a special role in the general-purpose register.

  Although an example in which the T register is built in the CPU 304 is shown here, for example, the T register may be provided outside the CPU 304 or may be provided in a part of the RAM 308 separate from the CPU 304. That is, it is preferable that the T register is provided at a location physically different from storage means (ROM 306 in the present embodiment) for storing the control program. Furthermore, it is preferable that a control unit that performs a process of writing a specific value (described later) in the T register is different from a control unit that reads a control program from the ROM 306 and performs game control. This is because it is possible to make it difficult to perform both modification of the control program and illegal acquisition of a specific value by making the control unit different.

  <Memory space and I / O space of CPU of main controller>

  Next, the memory space and I / O space of the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU 304, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an I / O map of the CPU 304.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in registers, ROM 306, RAM 308, etc., and an I / O space for inputting / outputting control signals to / from the above-mentioned I / O 310. doing. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 6A, the address / data signal line of the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 is the ROM area of the memory space (0000H to 2FFFH (H is 16 in this embodiment)). 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 304 reads the data from the ROM 306 by designating this ROM area. In the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to a register area in the memory space (in this embodiment, FE00H to FEBFH), and the CPU 304 reads data from the built-in register to this register area and sends it to the register. Write the data.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 308 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 304 designates this RWM area and reads data from the RAM 308, Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

Also, as shown in the I / O map of FIG. 10B, the I / O 310 of the main control unit 300 is assigned to the work area of the I / O space (in this embodiment, 00H to BFH). The control signal is input / output to / from the I / O 310 via the I / O space. In addition, the other area | region (C0H-FFH in this embodiment) is made into the non-use area | region.
<Initialization process>

  Next, the initialization process of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of initialization processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (system reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes this initialization process before shifting to a security mode or a user mode described later.

  Specifically, in step S51, a specific value (in this embodiment, F0H, which is the upper byte of the start address F000H of the RWM area described above) is stored in the T register built in the CPU 304. In step S52, an initial value is set in a register other than the T register, and then the process proceeds to step S53 to execute a main control unit main process described later.

  Needless to say, the specific value stored in the T register is not limited to F0H. For example, FEH, which is the upper byte of the start address of the register area (FE00H in this embodiment), is stored in the T register. If configured, the access efficiency to the built-in register may be improved by the same principle as the access to the RAM 308 described later. At the first timing, the upper byte of the head address of the RWM area is set in the T register, and the upper byte of the head address of the register area is set in the T register at the second timing thereafter (or before). You may comprise. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an L level signal is input to a predetermined terminal), the upper byte of the leading address of the RWM area is set in the T register, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. If not, the upper byte of the start address of the register area may be set in the T register.

  In this initialization process, the upper byte of the start address of the RWM area is set in the T register (or / and the upper byte of the start address of the register area is set in the T register) without depending on the control program. Then, after this initialization processing, the start address of the register area in the T register (manually) by a control program (for example, initial setting 1 processing in step S101 described later, initial setting 2 processing in step S107, initialization processing in step S113, etc.) May be configured (or / and / or the upper byte of the start address of the RWM area is set in the T register).

  Here, the above-mentioned reset interrupt includes a system reset interrupt (a reset interrupt caused by an external event such as inputting a reset signal for a certain period to the system reset terminal) and a user reset interrupt (a user reset terminal). There are two types of reset interrupts that are triggered by an external event, such as inputting a reset signal for a certain period, and reset interrupts that are triggered by an internal event, such as a WDT timeout or access outside a specified area) There is an interrupt. In a reset by a system reset interrupt, all internal circuits including a control register and a general-purpose register are initialized (for example, an initial value corresponding to the register (for example, 00H is set in the I register)). A part of the internal circuit is initialized.

  FIG. 9 is a time chart of the startup process after system reset. After executing an initialization process by a system reset (when an H level signal is input after an L level signal is input to the XSRST terminal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of four cycles of the system clock)) When the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an L level signal is input to a predetermined terminal), the process shifts to the security mode, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the process shifts to the user mode. Here, the security mode is a mode for authenticating the user program. Specifically, when the system reset is input, re-calculate whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the result (security check result) is OK (no abnormality), this mode is terminated. When the security check result is NG (abnormal), the CPU 304 is configured to stop. The authentication code is written in the ROM 306 together with the user program (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “control program”) when writing into the ROM.

  After the security check is finished in this security mode, when the fixed extension process (hereinafter also referred to as “fixed delay function”) waiting for a certain period of time is finished, an H level reset output is output from the XRSTO terminal, and thereafter When the random extension process (hereinafter also referred to as “random delay function”) that waits for the passage of a random period is completed, it is configured to shift to the user mode (a combination of the fixed extension process and the random extension process) Security mode extension processing ”or“ security mode extension function ”). The user mode is a mode in which the user program is executed from the ROM reset address (0000H, which is the first address of the first area of the ROM area described above), and a main control unit main process described later is started. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 executes the user program, the byte length of data read into the instruction register in one process (one state) is 1 byte (8 bits). The data length is not particularly limited, and may be 16 bits or 32 bits, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described initialization process is configured to be executed (automatically (regardless of the control program)) before shifting to the security mode or the user mode. You may comprise so that it may be performed after transfer to user mode. Further, the initialization processing execution timing may be different depending on the type of reset (the type of interrupt factor in the case of a user reset interrupt).

  Specifically, referring to a register (one of the built-in registers) for managing the reset factor that occurred immediately before, whether or not the reset factor that occurred immediately before is (1) a system reset. (2) It is determined whether or not a user reset is caused by a timeout of WDT, and (3) whether or not a user reset is caused by access outside the designated area, and the execution timing of the initialization process is determined according to the determination result. You may comprise. In addition, the specific value and the initial value set in the initialization process may be configured to be different depending on the type of reset and the type of register (for example, a general-purpose register has 00H as an initial value in both system reset and user reset). The T register is set such that F0H is set as a specific value at the time of system reset, but may not be initialized at the time of user reset).

The security mode time can be extended by a set time or can be extended by a random time. By extending by a random amount of time, it may be difficult for the fraudster to aim at the start timing of the user program. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can set the time from user reset (for example, reset by timeout of WDT) to the start of execution of a user program to random time. With such a configuration, there is a case where fraud aimed at the start timing of the user program can be prevented in advance.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT 314 Start-up, timer out time setting, T-registration check processing (details will be described later), and the like are performed. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value as the timeout time of the WDT 314. In this example, the WDT 314 is activated and the timeout time is set immediately before entering the main loop of the main control unit main process. However, for example, it is performed in other processes such as the initialization process described above. May be. In step S103, the counter value of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In addition, although the example which performs clear & restart of WDT314 immediately after a main loop start was shown, you may perform regularly in the main control part timer interruption process mentioned later, for example.

  Although not shown, the basic circuit 302 includes a start register and a clear register as registers for controlling the WDT 314. The start register is an 8-bit register for controlling start / stop of the WDT 314. When starting the WDT 314, a value (for example, CCH) instructing start is set (written), and when the WDT 314 is stopped Is configured to set a value (for example, 33H).

  This start register is valid when “start by software” is set (selected) in the program management area at the time of resetting. In this case, a stop instruction value (for example, 33H) is set as an initial value. Is set. Therefore, in order to activate WDT 314 when “activation by software” is set (selected), it is necessary to set a value (for example, CCH) instructing activation by the game control program (manually). On the other hand, when “activation by software” is not set (selected) at the time of resetting, a value (for example, CCH) instructing activation in the start register is an initial value (automatically) regardless of the game control program. The WDT 314 is activated (automatically) regardless of the game control program.

  The clear register is an 8-bit register for controlling clearing and restarting of the WDT 314, and after setting a predetermined first value (for example, 55H), a predetermined second value (for example, AAH) Is set, WDT 314 is cleared and restarted immediately after. When the value of the clear register is read, a predetermined fixed value (for example, FFH) is read. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the time-out time of the WDT 314 can be freely set by presetting any of the 4-bit length setting value data 0000B to 1000B in the predetermined storage area of the CPU 304. (See FIG. 115). Even if the first value and the second value are set in the clear register in the order of the first value and the second value before the WDT is manually started (in a stopped state), the WDT 314 performs the above-described clear and restart processing. It is configured not to.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, When the voltage is less than 9V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). Also, as will be described later, the values of predetermined registers stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption are read out, reset to these registers, and then the interrupt permission (EI) is set. Do. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption.

The CPU 304 according to the present embodiment includes a “PUSH TI” instruction, a “PUSH ALL” instruction, and a “PUSH GRP” instruction as PUSH instructions. The “PUSH TI” instruction is an instruction for saving the values stored in the T and I registers to the above-described stack area. Specifically, when the stack pointer at the time of executing the PUSH instruction is SP, the PUSH instruction is executed. Sometimes the value stored in the T register is saved to the address indicated by (SP-1), and the value stored in the I register when the PUSH instruction is executed is saved to the address indicated by (SP-2). . Further, "PUSH ALL" instruction, T at PUSH instruction is executed, I, A, F, B , C, D, E, H, L, IX H, IX L, IY H, stored in the IY _L register This is an instruction to save values in the stack area in this order. The “PUSH GRP” instruction is an instruction for saving the values stored in the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers in the stack area in this order when the PUSH instruction is executed.

In addition, the CPU 304 includes a “POP TI” command, a “POP ALL” command, and a “POP GRP” command as POP commands. The “POP TI” instruction is an instruction that restores the value stored in the stack area to the T and I registers (loads data from the storage area of the RAM 308 to the T and I registers). When the stack pointer at the time of execution is SP, the value stored at the address indicated by (SP-1) is restored to the T register when the POP instruction is executed, and the address indicated by (SP-2) when the POP instruction is executed. The value stored in is returned to the I register. In addition, the “POP ALL” instruction uses the values stored in the stack area when the POP instruction is executed as T, I, A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX _H , IX _L , IY. _This is an instruction to restore the _H and IY _L registers. Further, the “PUSH GRP” instruction is an instruction for returning the value stored in the stack area to the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers when the POP instruction is executed.

  In order to restore the T register from the stack area, it is necessary to use the “POP TI” instruction. However, even if the I register is not used, the value of the stack area is also restored to the I register. Become. In this way, by eliminating the generality of the instruction using the T register as an operand (making it difficult to use), it is possible to prevent the instruction using the T register as an operand from being frequently used. May be rewritten inadvertently (a situation where the contents of the T register are destroyed).

  The CPU 304 includes an instruction that permits acceptance of an interrupt request (EI instruction) and an instruction that prohibits acceptance of an interrupt request (DI instruction). The above-described “POP TI” instruction is an interrupt request by a DI instruction. It is configured to execute only when reception of the request is prohibited, and is configured not to execute when reception of the interrupt request is permitted by the EI instruction. As described above, if the “POP TI” instruction is not executed when the acceptance of the interrupt request is permitted, the execution of the “POP TI” instruction causes the interrupt register to function as an interrupt vector register or an interrupt register. In some cases, an unexpected value may not be restored from the stack area, and reliable game control can be performed by reliably executing the interrupt processing.

  In addition to the above-described instructions, the CPU 304 also loads an 8-bit load (transfer) instruction, a 16-bit load (transfer) instruction, a stack operation instruction (a kind of 16-bit load instruction), an 8-bit arithmetic logic operation instruction, 16 bits Arithmetic logic operation instruction, multiplication / division instruction, accumulator operation instruction, MPU control instruction, exchange instruction, block transfer instruction, block search instruction, bit operation instruction, rotate / shift instruction, unconditional jump instruction / conditional jump instruction, call instruction・ Return instructions, input / output instructions, compound instructions, etc. are provided.

  In this embodiment, when power is interrupted, the values of the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that do not include the T and I registers are saved (stored) in the stack area by the “PUSH GRP” instruction. When power is restored, the “POP GRP” instruction is used to restore the values of the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers from the stack area, not including the T and I registers. The T register is configured so that both saving by the “PUSH GRP” instruction and restoration by the “POP GRP” instruction cannot be performed (the T register cannot be specified as an operand of these instructions). In this embodiment, the T register cannot be specified as an operand of an addition instruction (INC instruction) or a subtraction instruction (DEC instruction). As will be described later, the T register is a special register that plays an important role in accessing the RAM 308. However, a situation in which an unexpected value is set in the T register due to a coding error or the like can be surely avoided. Stable game control is possible. In addition, since the T register is not both saved by the PUSH instruction and restored by the POP instruction, the processing at the time of power interruption or restoration may be accelerated.

  The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. In step S116, if the RAM is cleared, the RAM is cleared. If not, the WDT 314 is started after the data is restored to each register.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, interrupt prohibition (DI) setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. In step S114, if the RAM is cleared, the RAM is cleared. If not, the WDT 314 is started after the data is restored to each register.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<T cash register check processing>

  FIG. 11A is a flowchart showing the flow of the T registration check process performed in the initial setting 1, and FIG. 11B is an example of a program list of the T registration check process.

  In step S131 of the T registration check process, the value of the T register is set in the A register (LD A, T). In the next step S132, whether or not the value of the A register matches a specific value (F0H). (SUB F0H, JP Z, SEIJYOU) If they do not match (in case of abnormality; the value obtained by subtracting a specific value (F0H) from the value in the A register becomes a value other than 0 and the Z flag becomes 0) ) Proceeds to step S133, and if they match (if normal; the value obtained by subtracting a specific value (F0H) from the value of the A register becomes 0 and the Z flag becomes 1), the value of the T register Is determined to be normal, the T registration check process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the subsequent process. In step S133, after determining that the value of the T register is abnormal and setting a specific value (F0H) in the T register (LD T, F0H), the T registration check process is terminated and the process proceeds to the subsequent process.

  Note that the T-registration check process is not limited to the process shown in FIG. 11, and may be a process shown in FIG. 12, for example. FIG. 12A is a flowchart showing a flow of a T-registration check process according to the modification, and FIG. 12B is an example of a program list of the T-registration check process according to the modification.

In the T-registration check process according to this modification, the error process in step S135 is performed instead of the process in step S133. Specifically, when it is determined in step S132 that the value of the A register does not match the specific value (F0H) (in the case of abnormality; the value obtained by subtracting the specific value (F0H) from the value of the A register is other than 0) If the value becomes Z and the Z flag becomes 0), the process proceeds to step S135 and error processing is performed (SUB F0H, JP NZ, moError). The content of this error processing is not particularly limited. For example, the error processing is configured not to enter the infinite loop and execute the subsequent main control unit main processing, or to use a liquid crystal display device or a speaker in the subsequent main control unit main processing It may be possible to report an error. The execution timing of the T registration check process is not limited to the initial setting 1. Further, the execution timing of the T registration check process may be executed only at the initial setting 1 (before WDT restart, low voltage signal to before process).
<LD instruction>

  Next, the LD command provided in the main control unit 300 will be described. The LD instruction (LD OP1, OP2) is stored in the register indicated by the first operand OP1, the value stored in the register indicated by the second operand OP2 (or the immediate value (immediate value or immediate value) indicated by the second operand OP2. For example, when the instruction “LD A, T” is executed in a state where F0H is stored in the T register before the execution of the T-registration check process described above. The value stored in the T register indicated by the second operand, that is, F0H is stored in the A register, and when the instruction “LD A, F0H” is executed, the second operand is also stored in the A register. Is stored, that is, F0H is stored.

  On the other hand, in the LD instruction using the first operand OP1 as a T register, the second operand is limited to an immediate value, and setting a register in the second operand is prohibited (in the process of being assembled into a machine language). Error and cannot be assembled). The error occurs in the assembler for the CPU 304 because the instruction is not provided in the CPU 304. As in the case of the LD instruction, for example, both the saving by the “PUSH GRP” instruction and the returning by the “POP GRP” instruction relating to the T register described above are configured (the T register as an operand of these instructions). Is an error in assembly, and cannot be specified as an operand of an instruction for the CPU 304, that is, the CPU 304 does not specify the “PUSH GRP” instruction and the “POP GRP” for the T register. There is no command.

  Therefore, as described in the above-described T-registration check process, programming (coding) of an LD instruction (“LD T, F0H” in the above example) having the second operand as an immediate value is permitted, but the second operand Programming (coding) of an LD instruction (eg, “LD T, A”) that sets a register is not allowed. As described above, the LD instruction using the first operand OP1 as the T register is configured to transfer data as a direct value to the T register, so that the set data may be easily confirmed. Further, since data is not transferred to the T register via another register, the value of the T register cannot be inadvertently changed, thereby reducing the occurrence of coding errors. There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 13 shows only the LD command extracted from the program list. In this example, five LD instructions are used. For example, let us consider a case in which tracing is performed by debugging with respect to a value stored in the B register after execution of the LD instruction “LD B, A” in (4). In this case, it is necessary to trace back the program list for the A register which is the second operand of the LD instruction “LD B, A”. For example, the search of the program list can be performed using the search key “LD A”. If this is done, the LD instruction “LD A, H” in (3) will be hit in addition to the LD instruction “LD A, B” in (1). That is, the LD instruction with the A register set to the first operand is frequently used because it is permitted to set the register to the second operand and to set the second operand to an immediate value. This can contribute to a reduction in the efficiency of review work and debugging (for example, tracing of the A register). Although the A register having the highest use frequency has been described here, the same can be said when other registers other than the T register are used.

On the other hand, the LD instruction in which the T register is set in the first operand is prohibited from setting the register in the second operand, and only the second operand is allowed to have an immediate value. The frequency of use is relatively lower than that of the LD instruction, and it becomes possible to increase the efficiency of coding review work and debugging (for example, T register tracing), and the control program development efficiency may be improved. Note that the T register may change the value of the T register with an INC instruction or a DEC instruction (arithmetic logic operation instruction).
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. The timer interrupt cycle can be changed as appropriate according to the setting.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information. The winning determination pattern information is not limited to the above example, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, as the winning determination pattern information, there may be no detection signal in the previous time, the previous detection signal, the previous detection signal, the current detection signal, or the previous time. The detection signal may be present, the detection signal may be present twice before, the previous detection signal may be present, and the current detection signal may be absent.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226 and 234 and starting holes 230, 232 and 228 have been won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read and 1 is added to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

  In addition, in the RAM 308 determination result storage area of the main controller 300, the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first off flag, second off flag, special figure probability A flag for each of a variation flag and an ordinary probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, information that can specify the type of command, such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command) Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of the strobe interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  If it is detected in step S311 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S <b> 319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in S <b> 309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to S703.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<ROM of main controller>

  Next, the types of data stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows an example of data stored in the ROM 306 described above.

  The ROM area corresponding to the storage area of the ROM 306 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area from 0000H to 2FFFH) is a ROM control area (in this embodiment, 0000H to 0BB0H), a non-use area (in this embodiment, 0BB1H to 0FFFH), ROM data area (1000H to 18FDH in this embodiment), and other areas (18FEH to 2FFFH in this embodiment). The storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to this ROM control area contains instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 304 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 304 to execute each instruction. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is stored, and a specific value (00H in this embodiment) is uniformly set in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the non-use area. In the storage area of the ROM 306 that is stored and corresponds to the ROM data area, reference data (for example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) referred to by the control program is stored. Also, management data for managing the control program (for example, data indicating the final address of the control program data) is stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the other area. In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to each address in the ROM area, and each of the above-described data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the ROM control area. doing.

  Further, the control program is composed of a plurality of subroutines, and it is possible to move to the top address of the subroutine by a CALL instruction, an EXESUB (EXECUTE SUBBROUTINE) instruction, which will be described later, and execute the subroutine sequentially. .

  By the way, in the field of gaming machines, it is necessary to limit the storage area for storing control program data from the viewpoint of improving the inspection efficiency of the control program. In this embodiment, the ROM control area is limited to 0000H to 0BB0H as described above. doing. In addition, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, it is necessary to store control program data in a young address in the ROM control area so that no unused area or unused data is provided between control program data. In order to fill the storage area of the control program data that is not used at the stage, work such as dividing and assigning another control program data occurs, and as a result, a lot of control program data for calling a subroutine is required. Furthermore, since subroutines are frequently used to improve control program development efficiency and to simplify maintenance work such as control program debugging, a large amount of control program data is required to call the subroutines. .

  In order to enhance the interest of the game in such a development environment, conventional control program data stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area (for example, calling the above subroutine) It is necessary to secure a storage area where new control program data can be added to the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area.

  In particular, a control program for executing a timer interrupt process for executing a predetermined process at a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms) includes a plurality of external information randomly generated from a plurality of game control processes (for each sensor). Control for invoking many subroutines, such as processing for detecting changes (for example, input port state update processing (step S205)) and processing based on detection results of external information (for example, device monitoring processing (step S237)) Since the program data is included, it is necessary to compress the control program data for calling a subroutine included in the control program for executing the timer interrupt process.

In addition, in order to be able to perform stable game control, the above-described timer interrupt processing must be focused and stabilized. Specifically, it is indispensable to suppress coding mistakes and to improve processing speed in order to execute predetermined processing at predetermined intervals (for example, 10 ms) (to ensure real-time performance). Therefore, it is necessary to devise a control program for calling a subroutine (details will be described later).
<Command data of main control unit>

  Next, the command data of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of instruction data of the main control unit 300. FIG. 19A is a diagram showing upper and lower bits of instruction data of the main control unit 300, and FIG. 19B is a diagram showing an example of an instruction data table.

  For example, when the instruction data is composed of 1-byte (8-bit) data, the instruction data of the main control unit 300 can be defined up to 256 patterns. Note that the defined instruction data is not stored in the ROM 306 but is incorporated in the CPU 304 in hardware. Further, when the 1-byte instruction data is classified according to the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits, the relationship between the pattern and the instruction data is as shown in FIG. For example, INC (instruction data) used for “INC BC (instruction for adding one BC register)” is assigned to upper bit 0H (0000B) and lower bit 3H (0011B), and “DEC B (B register DEC (instruction data) used for “an instruction for subtracting 1 from” is assigned to the upper bit 0H (0000B) and the lower bit 5H (0101B).

  In addition, as a method of allocating instruction data having a pattern number exceeding 256 patterns of instruction data that can be defined by 1 byte length, for example, a new one byte is added to one pattern among the 256 patterns defined by 1 byte. There is a method of defining instruction data of up to 511 patterns (255 patterns (1 byte instruction data) +256 patterns (2 bytes instruction data)) by associating 256 patterns to be defined. Since this instruction is used because it is composed of byte data, the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area is compressed rather than using the above-described one-byte instruction data.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the region surrounded by the thick line in FIG. 19B, that is, the combination of the upper bit 1H (0001B) and the lower bits 8H (1000B) to FH (1111B), and the upper bit 3H (0011B) An area formed by a combination of the lower bits 8H (1000B) to FH (1111B) is set as a special area for assigning an EXESUB instruction to be described later. As described above, a limited hardware resource (for example, 1 byte) can be used by using, as a special area, an empty area from which instruction data has not been allocated or the allocated instruction data has been deleted. A definable pattern (256 patterns)) can be used effectively, and compression of the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area by instruction data can be suppressed.

Also, the instruction data is grouped by role (an area consisting of a combination of a plurality of lower bits consecutive to one upper bit or one lower bit for easy checking of the machine language after assembly. An instruction data having the same system role is assigned to an area composed of a combination of a plurality of consecutive upper bits with respect to a bit and assigned to an instruction data table (for example, upper bit 8H (1000B) and lower bit 0H (ADD instruction in a part defined by a combination of (0000B) to 7H (0111B)). In recent years, in order to reduce the development burden of the chip, the instruction data allocated to the conventional instruction data table has been reduced, or new instruction data has been added to the part to which the reduced instruction data has been allocated. Develop. For this reason, it is necessary to assign the instruction data of the same system to be added as a group when newly adding instruction data for data compression while simplifying checking the machine language after assembly. In the present embodiment, the problem is solved by allocating the EXESUB instruction as a group to a special area. Furthermore, in order to efficiently allocate new instruction data to the subdivided special area, it is necessary to allocate the instruction data group to be added as a subdivided group. In this embodiment, the EXESUB is further allocated. The problem is solved by assigning instructions to sub-groups and assigning them to special sub-regions.
<CALL instruction>

  Next, a CALL instruction which is one of the above control programs will be described. FIG. 20 conceptually shows an example of address movement by the CALL instruction, and FIG. 21 shows an example of instruction data and supplementary data of the CALL instruction.

  For example, when the address of the control program being executed is 0700H and the start address of the transfer destination subroutine is 03FFH, the relative addresses of the two (the transfer source address and the transfer destination address) are indicated by the symbol X in FIG. The address difference is 0301H (= 0700H-03FFH), and this relative address can be expressed by 2-byte data. Here, when this control program is expressed by a CALL instruction, as shown in FIG. 21A, a total of 3 bytes of control is performed with 1 byte of instruction data indicating the CALL instruction and 2 bytes of supplementary data indicating the destination address. Program data is required.

  Further, when the address of the control program being executed is 0700H and the start address of the destination subroutine is 075FH, the relative address of both is 005FH (= 075FH-03FFH), as indicated by the symbol Y in FIG. The relative address can be expressed by 1-byte data. Even in this case, if this control program is expressed by a CALL instruction, as shown in FIG. 21B, a total of 1 byte of instruction data indicating the CALL instruction and 2 bytes of supplementary data indicating the destination address is added. 3-byte control program data is required.

  That is, the control program for executing the CALL instruction requires 3 bytes of control program data regardless of the destination address (any address in the storage area (0000H to FFFFH) that can be defined by 2 bytes). Become.

When executing the CALL instruction, the CPU 304 specifically executes the CALL instruction after executing the process of storing the data (2 bytes) stored in the PC register (program counter) in the stack area. Subroutine can be called by executing a process (moving to the start address of the subroutine) that stores the supplementary data (data indicating the start address of the transfer destination subroutine (2 bytes)) in the PC register (program counter) It becomes.
<EXESUB instruction>

  Next, the EXESUB instruction, which is one of the above control programs, will be described. FIG. 22A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the EXESUB instruction, and FIG. 22B is a diagram showing an instruction data table in which the EXESUB instruction is assigned to the free area of FIG. 19B. It is.

The EXESUB instruction is the same as the above CALL instruction in that it can call a subroutine, but the structure of instruction data / supplementary data and the storage capacity required for control program data are different (details will be described later) ).
<EXESUB instruction / instruction data>

  In the present embodiment, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction includes 0 (fixed value) of bit 7, 0 (fixed value) of bit 6, bit, in order from the most significant bit 7 (MSB) to the least significant bit 0 (LSB). 5 for α (variable value), 1 for bit 4 (fixed value), 1 for bit 3 (fixed value), β for bit 2 (variable value), γ for bit 1 (variable value), δ for bit 0 (variable) Value) is a total of 8 bits (1 byte). That is, the EXESUB instruction becomes instruction data of a pattern (2 4 = 16 patterns) defined by changing the above-described variable value. Note that m, which is a total of 4 bits of data of α of bit 5, β of bit 2, γ of bit 1, and δ of bit 0, can represent a numerical range of 0H to FH, and represents the start address of the subroutine to be called It is a part of identification information (binary format) that can be identified.

  Further, as described above, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction is an area surrounded by a thick line in the instruction data table shown in FIG. 5B, that is, the upper bit 1H (0001B) and the lower bits 8H (1000B) to FH ( 1111B) and a free space consisting of a combination of the upper bit 3H (0011B) and the lower bits 8H (0111B) to FH (1111B) (in the past, no instruction data has been assigned or assigned instruction data Allocated to the deleted area).

  As described above, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction is configured such that a fixed value bit is inserted between the variable value bit and the variable value bit, thereby grouping the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction. , It becomes possible to allocate to the above-mentioned free space. Therefore, the machine language of the EXESUB instruction data can be easily checked and coding errors can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction has a variable value bit number (for example, 1 (above 1) described above) with one or more fixed value bits (for example, the above bit 4 and bit 3) interposed therebetween. Compared with bit 5)), the number of lower-order variable values (for example, 3 (bit 2, bit 1, bit 0 above)) across the fixed value bit is increased (the storage capacity is increased). ), The instruction data of the EXESUB instruction can be grouped and finely allocated to the above-described free area. Therefore, limited hardware resources (for example, patterns that can be defined by 1 byte (256 patterns)) can be used effectively and stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area by compressing instruction data. The conventional control program data can be compressed. It should be noted that the number of bits of the upper variable value across the fixed value is larger than the number of bits of the lower variable value across the one or more fixed value bits (the storage capacity is increased). Even if it is comprised, it has the above-mentioned effect.

  Note that the correspondence relationship between the above-described variable values α, β, γ, and δ and the bit 7 to 0 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction is not limited to the above-described correspondence relationship. , Bit 2 may be associated with variable value β, bit 1 may be associated with variable ground γ, and bit 0 may be associated with variable value δ.

Furthermore, the order of the variable values α, β, γ, and δ constituting the instruction data may be any order, but the above-described order (α, β, γ, δ in order from the upper bit), that is, an address described later. By setting m in mn to an order that can be defined by arranging α, β, γ, and δ in order from the upper bits, it is possible to easily check the machine language of the EXEBUS instruction data and suppress coding errors.
<EXESUB instruction / supplementary data>

  In the present embodiment, supplementary data for the EXESUB instruction is composed of n that is 8-bit data indicating a numerical range of 00H to FFH.

Therefore, the EXESUB instruction has a total of 12 bits configured by arranging m, which is 4-bit data included in the instruction data, and n, which is 8-bit supplemental data, in this order (m is a higher order and n is a lower order). This is an instruction that can call a subroutine having a head address in an address area (0000H to 0FFFH) definable by the address mn. That is, n is at least a part of information obtained by removing a part (m) of the identification information from the identification information (binary format) that can identify the head address of the subroutine to be called.

  <EXESUB instruction / subroutine call>

  FIG. 23 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of address movement by the EXESUB instruction. In this embodiment, m (4-bit data) indicates the lower 4 bits (0H to FH) of the upper 1 byte among the addresses 0000H to 2FFFH in the ROM area, as shown in FIG. (8-bit data), as shown in FIG. 4B, when the storage area of 100H units (0m00H to 0mFFH: m = 0H to FH) expressed by the upper address m is one block, This is a value indicating an address (00H to FFH) in one block.

  Note that even if the address area where the destination address can be set is defined as either n or m data as upper address data, the effect of reducing the control program data described later can be obtained. By defining m included in the instruction data as upper address data, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction can be grouped and associated with the address area as shown in FIG. can do.

  In addition, since the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction is configured to include m which is a part of the head address of the subroutine to be called, even if the destination address data is wrong, If erroneous data is included in the instruction data, execution of the control program is stopped, so that coding errors can be suppressed.

  FIG. 24 shows an example of calling the top address of a subroutine by the EXESUB instruction, and FIG. 25 shows an example of instruction data and supplement data of the EXESUB instruction.

  For example, suppose that the address of the control program being executed is 0700H and the start address of the transfer destination subroutine is 03FFH. When this control program is expressed by a CALL instruction, as described above, the relative address (the difference between the source address and the destination address) indicated by the symbol X ′ in FIG. 24 is 0301H (= 0700H−03FFH). This relative address can be expressed by 2 bytes of data, and requires 1 byte of instruction data and 2 bytes of supplementary data for a total of 3 bytes of control program data.

  On the other hand, when this control program is expressed by an EXESUB instruction, the movement to the destination address is conceptually indicated by X ″, and this relative address is 00FFH (= 03FFH-0300H) that can be expressed by 1-byte data. ) That is, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the EXESUB instruction requires 1 byte of instruction data represented by 0101101B and 1 byte of supplementary data represented by 11111111B, which requires 2 bytes of control program data. .

  Further, a case where the address of the control program being executed is 0700H and the start address of the subroutine to be called is 075FH will be described. In this case, even if this control program is expressed by either a CALL instruction or an EXESUB instruction, as shown above, the relative address of both can be expressed by 1 byte, as indicated by the symbol Y ′ in FIG. 005FH (= 0C5FH-0C00H), and this relative address can be expressed by 1-byte data. However, when this control program is expressed by a CALL instruction, a total of 3 bytes of 1-byte instruction data and 2 bytes of supplementary data are provided. Byte control program data is required.

  On the other hand, when this control program is expressed by an EXESUB instruction, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), a total of 2 bytes of control including 1-byte instruction data represented by 00001111B and 1-byte supplement data represented by 0101111B. Program data is required, and the data per instruction can be reduced by 1 byte compared to the CALL instruction described above.

  Therefore, the control program for executing the EXESUB instruction requires control program data of 2 bytes regardless of the destination address (any address in the storage area (0000H to 0FFFH) that can be defined by 12 bits). As compared with the above CALL instruction, the control program data per instruction can be reduced by 1 byte.

  That is, by using the above EXESUB instruction for a control program for calling a subroutine, a control program (for example, a CALL instruction) for calling a conventional subroutine can be compressed and stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area. The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  Note that when executing the EXESUB instruction, the CPU 304 specifically executes the EXEBUS instruction after executing the process of storing the data (2 bytes) stored in the PC register (program counter) in the stack area. Subroutine can be called by executing a process (moving to the start address of the subroutine) that stores the supplementary data (data indicating the start address of the transfer destination subroutine (2 bytes)) in the PC register (program counter) It becomes.

  Further, by using the above EXESUB instruction for the control program for calling the subroutine, the processing speed of the control program for calling the subroutine is improved (the number of states is reduced) than the conventional (for example, CALL instruction) due to the compression of the control program. Less).

  Further, as described above, the ROM area stores all control program data in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the area (0000H to 0FFFH in the present embodiment) that can be called by the above-described EXEBUS instruction. ROM control area (0000H to 0BB1H in this embodiment) is provided, and at least a ROM in which control program data is stored from an area (0000H to 0FFFH in this embodiment) that can be called by the above-described EXEBUS instruction The area (0BB1H to 0FFFH in this embodiment) excluding the control area (0000H to 0BB1H in this embodiment) is configured to be a non-use area, and the ROM data area follows the non-use area. It is configured as follows.

In the gaming machine having the ROM area as described above, the CPU 304 is used by using the EXESUB instruction described above as a control program for calling a subroutine (the control program data of the EXESUB instruction is stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area). However, since data other than control program data and non-use data is not directly read as instruction data, malfunctioning of the CPU 304 due to a coding error in supplementary data may be prevented.
<Example of control program>

  FIG. 26 is a program list showing an example of a control program for the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process. “**” indicates supplementary data for the EXESUB instruction.

  When starting the timer interrupt process, the CPU 304 first executes a process for restarting the WDT, executes a predetermined process (details omitted), and then uses the EXESUB instructions (1) to (18), respectively. The following subroutine is read out. Input port status update processing, basic random number initial value update processing, basic random number update processing, production random number update processing, timer update processing, winning a prize counter update processing, winning acceptance processing, payout request number transmission processing, general drawing state update processing, Figure-related lottery process special figure prefetch control process, special figure 2 state update process, special figure 1 state update process, special figure 2 related lottery process, special figure 1 related lottery process, command setting transmission process, external output signal setting process, device Monitoring processing is executed, and other processing (details are omitted) is executed. Although not described in detail, the start address of the subroutine called by the above-described EXESUB instructions (1) to (18) is included in the ROM control area (0000H to 0BB0H in this embodiment).

  In this way, the above EXEBUS instruction is used for the control program that calls the subroutine in the timer interrupt processing (the control program data of the EXESUB instruction is stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the timer interrupt processing area in the ROM control area). Thus, timer interrupt processing can be stabilized.

  By the way, in the development of a gaming machine, a new gaming machine is generally developed by changing (deleting or adding) a part of a conventional control program. In particular, it is desirable to avoid changing the control program as much as possible in order to stabilize game control.

Therefore, it is not necessary to use the above EXEBUS instruction for all the control programs that call subroutines in the ROM area (for example, the timer interrupt processing area), depending on necessity (for example, whether or not the above-described control program data is requested to be compressed). May be used as appropriate. Furthermore, the above-described EXESUB instruction is a conventional 3-byte instruction control program data (for example, CALL instruction) composed of 1-byte instruction data and 2-byte supplement data, and 1-byte instruction data and 1-byte supplement. Although the control program is compressed into control program data of 2-byte instructions composed of data, any control program that compresses the control program composed of instruction data and supplemental data may be used. In other words, the EXESUB instruction includes instruction data including a part of identification information (binary format) that can identify the start address of a subroutine to be called, and the identification information included in the instruction data is excluded from the identification information. The control program is composed of supplemental data composed of at least a part of information, and more specifically, each of the above-described instruction data and supplemental data has a data length (for example, read by the CPU 304 in one process). It may be an integer multiple of 8 bits).
<Modification of ROM control area>

  FIG. 27 shows a ROM control area (in this embodiment) in which control program data is stored rather than an area (0000H to 0FFFH in this embodiment) in which the ROM area can be called by the above-described EXEBUS instruction (EXESUBmn). , 0000H to 11B8H) is a diagram showing a case where it is configured to be wide. FIGS. 28A and 28B are diagrams showing an example in which the area of the top address of a subroutine that can be called by the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn) is expanded.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 27, the ROM control area (0000H to 11B8H in this embodiment) is the area of the top address of a subroutine (0000H to 0FFFH in this embodiment) that can be called with the EXEBUS instruction (EXESUBmn). When the area is wider, the ROM control area is composed of an EXESUB target area (0000H to 0FFFH in the present embodiment) and an EXESUB non-target area (for example, 1000H to 11B8H).

  In this case, even if the above-mentioned CALL instruction is used to supplement the instruction for calling the subroutine having the address corresponding to the EXESUB non-target area with the above-mentioned CALL instruction, as described above, it is possible to improve the fun of the game while being stable. It is possible to realize game control.

  However, as shown in FIG. 28, the above effect can be further enhanced by expanding the area of the top address of the subroutine that can be called by the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn).

  As specific means, as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, a variable value σ, which will be described later, is used to maintain the storage capacity required for the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn) and to execute the EXEBUS instruction (EXESUBMn). The command data is expanded. In the following, the variable value σ newly added to the figure will be described.

  The variable value σ is used to extend the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm′n, which will be described later). As shown in FIG. 28A, the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm′n, which will be described later) is used. 8 bits), which changes according to the value of m ′ of the address m′n indicating the start address of the subroutine to be called.

  In the instruction data table, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm'n) expanded by the variable value σ is an area surrounded by the bold line shown in FIG. It is allocated to an empty area consisting of a combination of bit 5H (0101B) and lower bits 8H (1000B) and 9H (1001B).

  Here, m ′ is data having the same role as m shown in FIG. 22A, but the above m is α of bit 5, β of bit 2, γ of bit 1, and δ of bit 0. In contrast, m ′ is a total of 5 bits of data of σ of bit 6, α of bit 5, β of bit 2, γ of bit 1 and δ of bit 0. However, m ′ is data that can express a numerical range of 00H to 11H, and is part of identification information (binary format) that can identify the head address of a subroutine to be called.

  As described above, the address area (000H to FFFH) definable by the address mn is expanded by using the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm'n) in which the variable value σ is provided in the bit 6 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn). (By making the address area definable by the address m′n into 0000H to 11FFH), the subroutine having the address corresponding to the above-mentioned EXESUB non-target area as the head address is called using the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm′n) Can do.

  The correspondence relationship between the above-described variable values σ, α, β, γ, and δ and the bits 7 to 0 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm'n) is not limited to the above-described correspondence relationship. Similarly, the variable value α may correspond to the bit 4, the variable value β to the bit 2, the variable value γ to the bit 1, the variable value δ to the bit 0, and the variable value δ to the bit 0, and the correspondence described with reference to FIG. It may be the same as the relationship.

  Furthermore, the order of the variable values σ, α, β, γ, and δ constituting the instruction data may be any order, but the above-described order (σ, α, β, γ, δ in order from the upper bit), that is, By making the m ′ of the address m′n, which will be described later, the order that can be defined by arranging in the order of σ, α, β, γ, δ from the upper bits, it becomes easy to check the machine language of the EXESUB instruction data. Coding mistakes can be suppressed.

  In this way, by providing the above-mentioned EXESUB instruction (EXESUBm'n) corresponding to the above-described ROM control area (for example, 0000H to 11B8H), it is stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area. The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 27, the ROM control area provided for each developed game machine may be different among the limited ROM control areas. In addition, it is wasteful from the viewpoint of development man-hours and costs, and development of stable game control is not only from the viewpoint of development man-hours and costs, but also to develop using different CPUs each having the above-mentioned EXESUBmn or EXESUBmn'n as instruction data. It will be difficult to realize. Therefore, even in the gaming machine having the ROM control area shown in FIG. 17, it is desirable to use EXESUBm′n for the EXESUB instruction.

  Even in this case, the ROM control area (0000H to 0BB1H in this embodiment) stores control program data rather than the area (0000H to 11FFH in this embodiment) that can be called by EXESUBm'n. Therefore, at least the area that can be called by the above-mentioned EXEBUSm′n, except for the ROM control area in which the control program data is stored (in this embodiment, 0BB1H to 11FFH) ) In the hituka area and the ROM data area may follow the non-use area.

  <Special drawing state update processing, general drawing state update processing>

  Next, a part of the control program for the above-described special figure 2 state update process (step S225), special figure 1 state update process (step S227), and general figure state update process (step S221) will be described with reference to FIG. To do. FIG. 8A shows a part of the control program for the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process, and FIG. The part is extracted.

  For example, in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 6A, first, by executing the instruction “LD L, Low.vbTokuzuStatus”, the address defined as vbTokuzuStatus in FIG. In the example, the lower byte (60H in this example) of F060H which is an address indicating the special figure status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is stored in the L register.

  Subsequently, by executing the instruction “JP moReadMemory”, the process moves to the moReadMemory (memory read process) shown in FIG. In this memory read processing, F0H is first stored in the H register by executing the instruction “LD H, F0H”, and then indicated by the HL register by executing the instruction “LD A, (HL)”. The content (in this example, F060H) of the address (in this example, F060H) is stored in the A register. Subsequently, after executing the instruction “AND A”, the process returns to the special figure state update process of the reading source. It should be noted that the common figure status update process shown in FIG. 5B also uses the common subroutine moReadMemory (memory read process) to read the common figure status stored in the common figure status storage area of the RAM 308. I do. As described above, when the conventional memory reading process shown in FIG. 5C is used, an instruction “LD H, F0H” causes the upper address of the special figure status storage area or the general figure status storage area to be higher. (F0H) is analyzed, and there is a risk of causing fraud. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the memory read process shown in FIG. 5E is adopted instead of the conventional memory read process shown in FIG.

  In the memory read processing according to this embodiment, the value of the T register is stored in the A register by executing the instruction “LD A, T”. As described above, a specific value ( Since F0H) is stored, F0H is stored in the A register. The subsequent processing is the same as the conventional processing, but since the T register is used instead of using the immediate value, the upper address (F0H) of the address of the special status status storage area or the normal status storage area is In some cases, there is little risk of analysis and fraud can be prevented. Further, when the immediate value is used, the possibility of a coding error increases, for example, when F0H is mistakenly input as F1H. However, if the T register is used, the coding error may be prevented in advance.

FIG. 30 is a diagram comparing the machine language of the conventional memory reading process shown in FIG. 29C and the machine language of the memory reading process according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. When the “LD H, F0H” instruction on the first line in the conventional memory read processing is assembled, the machine language is “26F0H” and includes “F0H”. Therefore, in the conventional memory read processing, There is a risk that the upper address (F0H) of the address in the storage area for the normal status is analyzed. On the other hand, when the “LD A, T” instruction on the first line in the memory read processing of the present embodiment is assembled, the machine language is “ED01H” and does not include “F0H”. Therefore, in the memory read processing of the present embodiment, There is a very low possibility that the upper address (F0H) of the special figure status storage area and the general figure status storage area will be analyzed, and it may be possible to prevent fraud.
<Special drawing 1 related lottery processing>

  Next, the special figure 1 related lottery process in the above-mentioned main control part timer interruption process is demonstrated using FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process.

  In step S1001, special symbol random number transfer processing is performed. In this special symbol random number transfer process, the random value stored in the primary is transferred (stored) to the special symbol related lottery random number storage area provided in the RAM 308. In step S1002, a special symbol per lottery process is performed. In the lottery processing per special symbol, the above-mentioned special symbol random value (the special symbol 1 random value, the special symbol 2 random value) is compared with the special symbol lottery data stored in the ROM 306 in advance, and the lottery result The 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. Set and set the special symbol gaming state while fluctuating.

  In step S1003, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, a lottery for comparing the display symbol determination random number stored in the RAM 308 with the display symbol lottery data stored in advance in the ROM 306 is performed, and according to the lottery result, the 15R special jackpot symbol (special Figure A), 15R jackpot symbol (Special Figure B), Sudden Probability Variation (Special Figure C), Sudden Short-Time Design (Special Figure D), Hidden Probability Variation (Special Figure E), Sudden Normal Design (Special Figure F), No. One small symbol (Special G), second small symbol (Special H), first off symbol (Special I), and second off symbol (Special J) are set. .

  In step S1004, a special symbol variation time lottery process is performed (details will be described later). In step S1005, a special symbol variation time setting process is performed. In this special symbol variation time setting process, a timer corresponding to the variation pattern (pattern number) acquired in the special symbol variation time lottery process in step S1004 is set (stored) as a special symbol variation timer. In step S1006, special symbol on-hold information migration processing is performed. In this special symbol hold information transfer process, the special symbol hold information is transferred (stored) to the previous storage area in the order of change, and then the process ends.

  Here, as an example, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process has been described. For example, the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the common figure related lottery process Similar processing can be applied to (step S223).

  <Data table and variable storage area of main controller>

  Next, a part of the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and a part of the variable storage area provided in the RAM 308 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. <Table selection table>

  FIG. 32A shows an example of the table selection table. FIG. 33 shows a part of the definition of the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and the variable storage area provided in the RAM 308. It is an example of the program list which showed a part of definition of.

In the table selection table shown in FIG. 32 (a), the destination address indicating the address of the ROM 306 in which the first variation pattern selection table (to be described later) is stored is 0 for each number of special figure variation games held. It is divided and stored in four for individual use. Specifically, 174FH is stored in the 2-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1600H to 1601H of the ROM data area as the destination address of the first variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the number of holds is 0. (1600 DEFB 174FH). In addition, 174FH is stored in the 2-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1602H to 1603H of the ROM data area as the destination address of the first variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the number of holds is 1 ( 1602 DEFB 174FH). Further, 174FH is stored in the 2-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1604H to 1605H of the ROM data area as the destination address of the first variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the number of holds is 2 ( 1604 DEFB 174FH). In addition, 1755H is stored in the 2-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1606H to 1607H of the ROM data area as the destination address of the first variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the number of holds is 3 ( 1606 DEFB 1755H).
<First variation pattern selection table>

FIG. 32B is a diagram showing an example of the first variation pattern selection table. This first variation pattern selection table stores the difference (offset) between the address of the table and the address where the second variation pattern selection table described later is stored, and the number of random numbers. Specifically, AEH is stored as an offset in the 1-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the address 1750H of the ROM data area, and the 1-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to 1751H that is continuous with this address. 32 stores 20 as the number of random numbers (1750H DEFB AEH, 20), and the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1752H to 1759H of the subsequent ROM data area is as shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 33. In addition, an offset of 1 byte length and the number of random numbers of 1 byte length are alternately and continuously stored. In the first variation pattern selection table, the number of random numbers is indicated by a decimal number.
<Second variation pattern selection table>

FIG. 32C is a diagram showing an example of the second variation pattern selection table. The second variation pattern selection table stores a pattern number and the number of random numbers. Specifically, 01H is stored as a pattern number in the 1-byte storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the address 1800H in the ROM data area, and the 1-byte area indicated by 1801H that is continuous with this address is stored in the 1-byte area. , 255 is stored as the number of random numbers (1800H DEFB 01H, 255), and the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the addresses 1802H to 180FH of the subsequent ROM data area is as shown in FIG. 32 (c) and FIG. A pattern number of 1 byte length and the number of random numbers of 1 byte length are stored alternately and continuously. In the second variation pattern selection table, the number of random numbers is indicated by a decimal number.
<Variable storage area>

FIG. 32D is a diagram showing a reserved number storage area, a random number 1 storage area, and a random number 2 storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the addresses F040H to F042H of the RWM area. A 1-byte storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the address F040H of the RWM area is provided with a reserved number storage area (F040 vbHoryuSP1 DEFS 1), and the reserved number is stored in this reserved number storage area. A random number 1 storage area is provided in the 1-byte storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the address F041H (F041 vbRndHendou1 DEFS 1), and the random number 1 is stored in the random number 1 storage area. Further, a random number 2 storage area is provided in the 1-byte storage area of the RAM 308 corresponding to the address F042H (F042 vbRndHendou2 DEFS 1), and the random number 2 is stored in the random number 2 storage area.
<Special symbol variation time lottery processing>

  Next, the special symbol variation time lottery process in the special figure 1 related lottery process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special symbol variation time lottery process, and FIG. 35 is an example of a program list of the special symbol variation time lottery process.

  In step S1101, effect random number acquisition processing is performed. In this effect random number acquisition process, the special figure 1 random value (0 to 255) acquired in the special figure 1 related lottery process is stored in the random value 1 storage area (RWM area address F041H). The special figure 2 random value (0 to 255) acquired in the special figure 2 related lottery process is stored in the random value 2 storage area (address F042H of the RWM area).

  In the next step S1102, the start address (1600H in this embodiment) of the table selection table (FIG. 32A) is transferred to the HL register (LD HL, tableSelectTable). As a result, 1600H is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S1103, the number of reservations stored in the above-mentioned reservation number storage area (address R040H of the RWM area) is transferred to the A register (LDT A, (40H)). Here, as shown in FIG. 36, the “LDT A, (n: immediate value)” instruction is an instruction for loading data at an address indicating the T register in the upper order and the immediate value in the lower order into the A register. In this embodiment, since F0H is stored in the T register, when the “LDT A, (40H)” instruction is executed, an address (F040H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order and the immediate value (40H) as the lower order. ), That is, the number of holds stored in the hold number storage area is loaded (transferred) to the A register. For example, when the hold number stored in the hold number storage area is 2, 02H is loaded (transferred) to the A register.

  In the next step S1104, the value of the A register is added to the value of the A register (ADD A, A). In the above example, 04H is stored in the A register by adding the value (02H) of the A register to the value (02H) of the A register. In the next step S1105, the value of the A register is added to the HL register (ADDTWOONE HL, A). Although details will be described later, the ADDTWOONE instruction (ADDTWOONE HL, A) is an instruction for adding the 1-byte length value stored in the A register to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register. In the previous example, 1604H is stored in the HL register by adding the value (04H) of the A register to the HL register (1600H).

  In the next step S1106, the value of the address indicated by the HL register is transferred to the DE register (LDTWO DE, (HL)). Here, as shown in FIG. 36, the “LDTWO DE, (HL)” instruction is an instruction for loading data at the address indicated by the HL register into the DE register. In the above example, 174FH is stored in the DE register by transferring the value (174FH) of the address (1604H) indicated by the HL register to the DE register.

  In the next step S1107, the value of the DE register and the value of the HL register are exchanged (EX DE, HL). In the above example, 174FH is stored in the HL register and 1604H is stored in the DE register by exchanging the value (174FH) of the DE register with the value (1604H) of the HL register.

  In the next step S1108, the random number 1 (special symbol variation time determination random number 1) stored in the random number 1 storage area is transferred to the A register (LDT A, (41H)). In this embodiment, since F0H is stored in the T register, when the “LDT A, (41H)” instruction is executed, an address (F041H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order and the immediate value (41H) as the lower order. ), That is, random number 1 stored in the random number 1 storage area is loaded (transferred) to the A register. For example, when the random number 1 stored in the random number 1 storage area is 250, 250 is stored in the A register.

  In the next step S1109, the values stored in the two consecutive addresses next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register are transferred to the BC register (INCTENSOU BC, (HL)). As will be described in detail later, the “INCENSOUBC, (HL)” instruction adds 1 to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, and 1 stored in the address indicated by the value of the HL register after the addition. After the byte length value is stored in the lower C register of the BC register, 1 is further added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, and the address indicated by the value of the HL register after the addition is added. This is an instruction for storing the stored 1-byte value in the upper B register of the BC registers. In the above example, 1 is added to the 2-byte length value (174FH) stored in the HL register, and the 1-byte length value (AEH) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (1750H) after the addition. ) Is stored in the lower C register of the BC register, 1 is further added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, and the address indicated by the value (1751H) of the HL register after the addition is added. The stored 1-byte value (20) is stored in the upper B register of the BC registers.

  In the next step S1110, the value of the B register is subtracted from the value of the A register (SUB B). In the above example, the value (20) of the B register is subtracted from the value (250) of the A register. In the next step S1111, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred as a result of the subtraction in step S1110, that is, whether or not the result of the subtraction has become a negative value. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1112. Are repeatedly executed until the condition is satisfied (JP NC, LOOP01). In the previous example, a carry is generated by repeating the processing of steps S1109 to S1111 three times, and when proceeding to step S1112, the value of the B register is 8, the value of the C register is B0H, and the value of the HL register is 1755H. Become.

  In the next step S1112, the value of the C register is added to the value of the HL register (ADDTWOONE). In the above example, 1805H is stored in the HL register by adding the value (B0H) of the C register to the value (1755H) of the HL register. In the next step S1113, the random number 2 (special symbol variation time determination random number 2) stored in the random number 2 storage area (F042H in the present embodiment) is transferred to the A register (LDT A, (42H)). In this embodiment, since F0H is stored in the T register, when the “LDT A, (42H)” instruction is executed, an address (F042H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order and the immediate value (42H) as the lower order. ), That is, random number 2 stored in the random number 2 storage area is loaded (transferred) to the A register. For example, when the random number 2 is 148, 148 is stored in the A register.

  In the next step S1114, the values stored in the two consecutive addresses next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register are transferred to the BC register (INCTENSOU BC, (HL)). In the previous example, 1 is added to the 2-byte length value (1805H) stored in the HL register, and the 1-byte length value (04H) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (1806H) after the addition. ) Is stored in the lower C register of the BC register, 1 is further added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, and the address indicated by the value (1807H) of the HL register after the addition is added. The stored 1-byte value (128) is stored in the upper B register of the BC registers.

In the next step S1115, the value of the B register is subtracted from the value of the A register (SUB B). In the above example, the value (128) of the B register is subtracted from the value (148) of the A register. In the next step S1116, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred as a result of the subtraction in step S1115, that is, whether or not the result of the subtraction has become a negative value. If so, the process proceeds to step S1117. The processing of steps S1114 to S1116 is repeatedly executed until it corresponds (JP NC, LOOP02). In the previous example, a carry is generated by repeating the processing of steps S1114 to S1116 twice, and when proceeding to step S1117, the value of the B register is 32, the value of the C register is 05H, and the value of the HL register is 1809H. become. In step S1117, the process ends after other processes are performed. Here, as an example, the processing related to special figure 1 and special figure 2 has been described, but the same processing can be applied to, for example, the number of reserved figures and random numbers in a normal figure.
<Special instruction of main control unit>

Next, a special command provided in the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a part of the commands included in the main control unit 300 and a description thereof. FIG. 37A is a diagram showing the upper and lower bits of the instruction data of the main control unit 300, and FIG. 37B is a diagram showing an example of the instruction data table.
<Special instruction / LDT instruction>

  The “LDT A, (n: immediate value)” instruction, which is one of the special instructions, is an instruction for loading data at an address indicating the T register in the higher order and the immediate value in the lower order as described above. In step S1103 of the special symbol variation time lottery process described above, by executing the “LDT A, (40H)” instruction, the address (F040H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order and the immediate value (40H) as the lower order. Data, that is, the hold count stored in the hold count storage area is loaded (transferred) to the A register.

  Although not shown, the main control unit 300 further uses “LDT (n: immediate value),” for loading the data stored in the A register into an address indicating the T register as the upper and the immediate value as the lower. A "instruction. On the other hand, an instruction (for example, an instruction such as “LDT A, H”) for loading data at an address indicating the T register as a higher order and a general-purpose register (for example, an H register) as a lower order is stored in the A register. An instruction (for example, an instruction such as “LDTH H, A”) for loading the data into an address indicating the T register as the higher order and the general-purpose register (for example, the H register) as the lower order is not provided.

That is, the lower byte of the address that can be specified by the LDT instruction is limited to an immediate value, and it is prohibited to specify a general-purpose register (an error occurs during the assembly into the machine language and the assembly cannot be performed). . For this reason, the LDT instruction makes it easy to check the address when checking the program list and the like, and the value of the T register (the upper byte of the address) cannot be changed carelessly. And the occurrence of malfunctions may be reduced.
<Special instructions / LDTWO instructions>

  As described above, the “LDTWO OP1, (OP2)” instruction, which is one of the special instructions, loads the data at the addresses indicated by the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2 into the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1. The “LDTWO (OP2), OP1” instruction is an instruction to load the data of the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1 to the address indicated by the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2, for example, In step S1106 of the special symbol variation time lottery process described above, by executing the “LDTWO DE, (HL)” instruction, the value (174FH) of the address (1604H) indicated by the HL register is loaded (transferred) to the DE register. Thus, 174FH is stored in the DE register. When OP2 is a BC register or DE register that is not an HL register, OP1 becomes a BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, and only when OP2 is an HL register, OP1 becomes a BC register, DE register, HL register, AC register, AE register, BD register, IX register, IY register. The LDTWO instruction is suitable for protecting the A register and the HL register.

  In the LDTWO instruction, the required number of states is 14 and the required number of bytes is 2 bytes. On the other hand, when the same processing as the LDTWO instruction is performed by the conventional instruction, as shown in FIG. 36, the required number of states is 14 (= 4 + 6 + 4) and the required number of bytes is 3 (= 1 + 1 + 1). . Therefore, if the LDTWO instruction is used when the address data indicated by the HL register is loaded into the DE register, the processing time of the control program can be shortened and the control burden can be reduced, and the amount of program code can be reduced. In some cases, the storage area of the ROM having a limited memory capacity can be used effectively. Further, even if the program code is increased in order to improve game play, an increase in program capacity and a decrease in processing speed may be suppressed. Also, by reducing the program capacity, it is possible to reduce developer coding errors and check mistakes, facilitate debugging, increase development efficiency, and whether or not it has an appropriate function as a game machine. Even when an external organization confirms, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming table that can prevent mistakes in confirmation work and allow a player to play a game with peace of mind.

  <Special instruction / ADDTWOONE instruction>

  The ADDTWOONE instruction (ADDTWONE OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, is stored in the register indicated by the second operand OP2 into a 2-byte length value stored in the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1. This is an instruction for adding a 1-byte value (or a 1-byte immediate value indicated by the second operand OP2). The upper 1 byte of the instruction code of the ADDTWOONE instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is a combination of the upper bit 4H (0100B) and the lower bits 0H (0000B) to 2H (0010B) of the instruction data table. It is assigned to a combination of the upper bit 4H (0100B) and the lower bits 4H (0100B) to 7H (0001B), 9H (1001H) of the instruction data table. In this way, by using an instruction area that has been considered as a free area in the past, it is possible to effectively use limited hardware resources and to embed an illegal instruction (hidden instruction) in the free area. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to ensure the fairness of the game. In this embodiment, the instruction code of the special instruction is 2 bytes long, but the byte length of the instruction code is not particularly limited, and may be 1 byte, for example. Further, only a specific instruction (for example, “ADDTWOONE HL, A” instruction) among the ADDTWOONE instructions may have a shorter instruction code (for example, 1 byte length) than other ADDTWOONE instructions. Further, only a specific instruction (for example, “ADDTWOONE HL, A” instruction) in the “ADDTWOONE OP1, A” instruction may have a shorter instruction code (for example, 1 byte length) than other ADDTWOONE instructions. In this case, the convenience of the command can be improved.

  Taking the “ADDTWOONE HL, C” instruction as an example, a value of 1 byte length stored in the C register indicated by the second operand is added to a value of 2 bytes length stored in the pair register HL indicated by the first operand. For example, in step S1112 of the special symbol variation time lottery process described above, by executing “ADDTWOONE HL, C”, a 2-byte length value stored in the HL register The value of the HL register is updated to 1805H by adding the 1-byte length value (B0H) stored in the C register to (1755H). It should be noted that the ADDTWOONE instruction (ADDTWOONE OP1, OP2) is less likely to carry, but the 2-byte length value (eg, FF01H) stored in the HL register is the 1-byte length value (eg, FF01H). When adding (FFH), carry occurs. That is, when a carry occurs after execution of the ADDTWONE instruction (ADDTWOONE OP1, OP2), it can be determined that the H register is FFH.

  Further, in the “ADDTWOONE HL, C” instruction, the required number of states is 8 and the required number of bytes is 2 bytes. On the other hand, when processing similar to that of the “ADDTWOONE HL, C” instruction is performed using a conventional instruction, as shown in FIG. 36, the required number of states is 22 (= 4 + 4 + 10 + 4), and the required number of bytes is 6 bytes ( = 1 + 1 + 3 + 1). Therefore, if the “ADDTWOONE HL, C” instruction is used to add the 1-byte length value stored in the C register to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, the processing time of the control program can be shortened. In addition, the control burden can be reduced and the amount of program code can be reduced, so that the storage area of the ROM having a limited memory capacity can be used effectively. Further, even if the program code is increased in order to improve game play, an increase in program capacity and a decrease in processing speed may be suppressed. Also, by reducing the program capacity, it is possible to reduce developer coding errors and check mistakes, facilitate debugging, increase development efficiency, and whether or not it has an appropriate function as a game machine. Even when an external organization confirms, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming table that can prevent mistakes in confirmation work and allow a player to play a game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the case of an 8-bit arithmetic instruction that is conventionally provided in the CPU, the addition result (subtraction result in the case of the “SUB A, E” instruction) is input to the A register as in the case of the “ADD A, E” instruction. However, by executing the ADDTWOONE instruction and changing it to the “ADDTWOONE HL, E” instruction, “ADD L, E” is enabled, and it can be preserved without using the A register. As a result of using a wide A register for other instructions, the program capacity may be reduced). In addition, after executing “LD H, 00H” instruction and transferring 00H to the H register, “ADDTWONE HL, E” instruction is executed, the value of the E register is added to the L register, and the “SRL H” instruction is issued. Executing and checking whether or not the L register has overflowed can be saved without using the A register by checking whether or not the carry flag is set (use the A register which is widely used for other instructions) As a result, the program capacity may be reduced.

  In other words, the “ADD A, L” instruction can be executed, the “ADD L, A” instruction cannot be executed, but the “ADDTWONE HL, A” instruction can be executed. By increasing the number of instructions in the instruction set by one, it is possible to increase the number of registers that can store the addition results of 8-bit operations and also enable 16-bit to 8-bit operations. Two functions can be realized.

  In other words, the addition instruction “specific register pair ← specific register pair + specific register” is included in the instruction set, and the lower register of the specific register pair is different from the 8-bit arithmetic accumulator.

  Conventionally, since it was not desired to increase the number of instructions in the instruction set, only 16-bit arithmetic and 8-bit arithmetic are mounted. Further, the 16-bit accumulator is only a specific register pair among a plurality of register pairs, and the 8-bit accumulator is Although only a specific register among a plurality of registers is used, a plurality of functions can be realized with a small increase in the number of instructions.

  Also, in order to check whether the HL register is 0, conventionally, after the value of the H register is transferred to the A register with the “LD A, H” instruction, the “OR A, L” instruction is executed and then the 0 flag is set. Whether or not the HL register is 0 is confirmed. That is, since an 8-bit operation is executed to check whether it is 0, an 8-bit operation accumulator (in this case, the A register) has been used. However, it is not necessary to use the A register by checking whether or not the 0 flag is set after the “ADDTWOONE HL, n (00H)” instruction. That is, the “ADDTWONE HL, n” instruction has a function of adding an 8-bit direct value to a 16-bit register pair, a function of checking whether the 16-bit register pair is 0, and a function of preserving the A register. I have. Further, since direct values are used for the instructions, the readability of the program source can be improved.

  <Special instruction / INCENSOU instruction>

  The INCTENSOU instruction (INCTENSOU OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, adds 1 to the 2-byte length value stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2, and the value of the two registers after the addition The 1-byte length value stored at the address indicated by is stored in the lower register of the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1, and then stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2. 1 is further added to the 2-byte length value, and the 1-byte length value stored in the address indicated by the two register values after the addition is added to the higher order of the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1. This is an instruction for storing in a register. The upper 1 byte of the instruction code of the INCENSOU instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is a combination of the upper bit 1H (0001B) and the lower bits 8H (1000B) to 9H (10001B) of the instruction data table, The higher order bit DH (1101B) and the lower order bits 4H (0100B) to 6H (0110B) are assigned to the instruction data table. In this example, the code of the machine instruction including the accumulator in the first operand OP1 is a serial number (for example, the code of the “INCTENSOU AC, (HL)” instruction is EDD4H, the code of the “INCTENSOU AE, (HL)” is EDD5H). ing. Also, a machine instruction code of a specific INCENSOU instruction (for example, the code of “INCENSOU AE, (HL)” instruction is EDD5H) among instructions including an accumulator in the first operand OP1, and an accumulator is included in the first operand OP1. Among the non-instructions, the machine instruction code of a specific INCENSOU instruction (for example, the code of “INCENSOU BD, (HL)” instruction is EDD6H) is serialized. In addition, a machine instruction code of a plurality of INCENSOU instructions (for example, “INCTENSOU BC, (HL)” instruction code is ED18H, “INTCENSOU DE, ( HL) "instruction code is ED19H) and the machine instruction code of a specific INCENSOU instruction among the instructions that do not include an accumulator in the first operand OP1 (for example, the code of the" INCTENSOU BD, (HL) "instruction is EDD6H) And the numbers apart. In this way, by using an instruction area that has been considered as a free area in the past, it is possible to effectively use limited hardware resources and to embed an illegal instruction (hidden instruction) in the free area. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to ensure the fairness of the game.

  For example, in the case of the “INCENSOU BC, (HL)” instruction, 1 is added to the 2-byte length value stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand, and the value is indicated by the value of the pair register HL after the addition. After the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) is stored in the lower register C of the pair register BC indicated by the first operand, 2 stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand Further, 1 is added to the byte length value, and the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the value of the pair register HL after the addition is the higher order of the pair register BC indicated by the first operand. This is an instruction for storing in the register B. The INCENSOU instruction is suitable for transferring a value stored in an address subsequent to the address indicated by the value of the HL register to the register. In addition, the INCENSOU instruction determines whether to repeat the instruction based on the value stored in the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register after execution of the instruction. It is suitable to use the instruction because the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register can be set to the next address by adding 1 to the HL register by the instruction.

  For example, in step S1109 of the special symbol variation time lottery process described above, 1 is added to the 2-byte length value (174FH) stored in the HL register by executing “INCENSOUBC, (HL)”. The 1-byte length value (AEH) stored at the address indicated by the value (1750H) of the later HL register is stored in the lower C register of the BC register, and then the 2-byte length stored in the HL register. 1 is added to the value of 1 and the 1-byte length value (20) stored at the address indicated by the value of the HL register (1751H) after addition is stored in the upper B register of the BC registers. Yes.

  In the “INCENSOUBC BC, (HL)” instruction, the required number of states is 14 and the required number of bytes is 2 bytes. On the other hand, when the same processing as the INCENSOU instruction is performed by the conventional instruction, as shown in FIG. 36, the required number of states is 26 states (= 6 + 7 + 6 + 7), and the required number of bytes is 4 bytes (= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1). . Therefore, when the value stored in the next two consecutive addresses after the address indicated by the value of the HL register is transferred to the BC register, the processing time of the control program can be obtained by using the “INCTENSOU BC, (HL)” instruction. In addition, it is possible to reduce the control burden and reduce the amount of program code, and in some cases, it is possible to effectively use the storage area of the ROM with a limited memory capacity.

  Further, even if the program code is increased in order to improve game play, an increase in program capacity and a decrease in processing speed may be suppressed. In particular, in the present embodiment, the INCENSOOU instruction is repeatedly executed in the loop process of steps S1109 to S1111 or the loop process of steps S1114 to S1116, so that the effect of reducing the processing speed is high. Also, by reducing the program capacity, it is possible to reduce developer coding errors and check mistakes, facilitate debugging, increase development efficiency, and whether or not it has an appropriate function as a game machine. Even when an external organization confirms, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming table that can prevent mistakes in confirmation work and allow a player to play a game with peace of mind.

  <Special instruction / TENSOUINC instruction>

  The TENSOUINC instruction (TENSOUINC OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, indicates the 1-byte length value stored in the address indicated by the two register values indicated by the second operand OP2 by the first operand OP1. Two registers indicated by the second operand OP2 after adding 1 to the 2-byte length value stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2 The 1-byte length value stored at the address indicated by the value is stored in the upper register of the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1, and is stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2. This is an instruction for adding 1 to a 2-byte length value. The upper 1 byte of the instruction code of the TENSOUINC instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is a combination of the upper bit 1H (0001B) and the lower bits 6H (0110B) to 7H (0111B) of the instruction data table. The higher order bit DH (1101B) and the lower order bits 0H (0000B) to 2H (0010B) of the instruction data table are assigned. In this example, the code of the machine instruction including the accumulator in the first operand OP1 is serialized (for example, the code of “TENSOUINC AC, (HL)” instruction is EDD0H, the code of “TENSOUINC AE, (HL)” is EDD1H). ing. Also, a machine instruction code of a specific TENSOUINC instruction (for example, “TENSOUINC AE, (HL)” instruction code is EDD1H) among instructions including an accumulator in the first operand OP1, and an accumulator is included in the first operand OP1. Among the non-instructions, a machine instruction code of a specific TENSOUINC instruction (for example, a code of “TENSOUINC BD, (HL)” instruction is EDD2H) is serialized. Also, the machine instruction code of a plurality of TENSOUINC instructions (for example, “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction code is ED16H, “TENSOUINC DE, ( HL) "instruction code is ED17H), and a specific TENSOUINC instruction machine instruction code (eg," TENSOUINC BD, (HL) "instruction code is EDD2H) among instructions that do not include an accumulator in the first operand OP1. And the numbers apart. In addition, the TENSOUINC instruction and the INCENSOU instruction have the same number of instructions in the first operand OP1 in the TENSOUINC instruction than the INCENSOU instruction (for example, the code of “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction is ED16H, “INCTENSOU BC, (HL) "instruction code is ED18H). Also, the machine instruction code of the TENSOUINC instruction including the accumulator in the first operand OP1 (for example, the code of “TENSOUIC AC, (HL)” instruction is EDD0H) and the machine instruction of the INCTENSOU instruction including the accumulator in the first operand OP1 Codes (for example, the code of the “INCTENSOU AC, (HL)” instruction is EDD4H) and / or before and after the machine instruction code of the instruction other than the TENSOUINC instruction and the INCENSOU instruction (for example, the code EDD3H) Yes.

  Taking the “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction as an example, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the value of the pair register HL indicated by the second operand is indicated by the first operand. The value of the pair register HL indicated by the second operand is stored in the lower register C of the pair register BC and 1 is added to the 2-byte length value stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand. 1 byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by is stored in the upper register B of the pair register BC indicated by the first operand, and is stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand. This is an instruction for adding 1 to a 2-byte length value. The TENSOUINC instruction is suitable for transferring a value stored in an address after the address indicated by the value of the HL register to the register. In addition, when the TENSOUINC instruction determines whether to repeat the instruction depending on whether the value of the B register is 0 or not after the instruction is executed, if it is determined to repeat, the HLSOINC instruction adds 1 to the HL register before the determination. Is suitable for using the instruction. Even when the repeated processing is not performed, after the TENSOUINC instruction, the next process can be performed in the state in which the value of the HL register is incremented by 1, so that the instruction is suitable.

In the “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction, the required number of states is 14 and the required number of bytes is 2 bytes. On the other hand, when the same processing as the TENSOUINC instruction is performed by the conventional instruction, as shown in FIG. 36, the required number of states is 26 states (= 7 + 6 + 7 + 6), and the required number of bytes is 4 bytes (= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1). . Therefore, when transferring the address indicated by the value of the HL register and the value stored at the next address to the BC register, the processing time of the control program can be shortened by using the “TENSOUINC BC, (HL)” instruction. In addition to reducing the control burden, the amount of program code can be reduced, and the ROM storage area with limited memory capacity can be used effectively. Further, even if the program code is increased in order to improve game play, an increase in program capacity and a decrease in processing speed may be suppressed. Also, by reducing the program capacity, it is possible to reduce developer coding errors and check mistakes, facilitate debugging, increase development efficiency, and whether or not it has an appropriate function as a game machine. Even when an external organization confirms, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming table that can prevent mistakes in confirmation work and allow a player to play a game with peace of mind. Note that both the INCENSOU instruction and the TENSOUINC instruction may be provided to be executable in the CPU, or only one of them may be provided to be executable.
<Special instruction / CPT instruction>

  The “CPT A, (n: immediate value)” instruction, which is one of the special instructions, is an instruction for comparing the contents of the A register with the data at the address indicating the T register as the upper level and the immediate value as the lower level. When “CPT A, (40H)” is executed while F0H is stored in the T register, the contents of the A register are compared with the data at the address (F040H) indicating the T register as the upper level and the immediate value as the lower level. .

  <Special Instruction / ADDONETWO Instruction>

  The ADDONETWO instruction (ADDONETWO OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, is stored in the two registers indicated by the second operand OP2 in the 1-byte length value stored in the register indicated by the first operand OP1. This is an instruction for adding a 2-byte length value (or an immediate value of 2-byte length indicated by the second operand OP2). The upper 1 byte of the instruction code of the ADDONETWO instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is assigned to a combination of the upper bit 4H (0100B) and the lower bit AH (1010B) of the instruction data table. In this way, by using an instruction area that has been considered as a free area in the past, it is possible to effectively use limited hardware resources and to embed an illegal instruction (hidden instruction) in the free area. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to ensure the fairness of the game. Note that the ADDONETWO instruction (ADDONETWO OP1, OP2) is easy to carry, and a 1-byte length value (eg, 00H) stored in the A register is a 2-byte length value (eg, 0100H) stored in the HL register. ) Adds a carry. That is, when the H register is other than 00H, a carry can be generated by executing an ADDONETWO instruction (ADDONETWO OP1, OP2). Note that both the ADDTWOONE instruction and the ADDONETWO instruction may be provided in the CPU, or only one of them may be provided.

  <Special instruction / SUBTWOONE instruction>

The SUBTWOONE instruction (SUBTWOONE OP1, OP2), which is one of the special instructions, is stored in the register indicated by the second operand OP2 from the 2-byte length value stored in the two registers indicated by the first operand OP1. This is an instruction for subtracting a 1-byte value (or a 1-byte immediate value indicated by the second operand OP2). The upper byte of the instruction code of the SUBTWOONE instruction is a fixed value (EDH in this example), and the lower byte is assigned to a combination of the upper bit 4H (0100B) and the lower bit 8H (1000B) of the instruction data table. In this way, by using an instruction area that has been considered as a free area in the past, it is possible to effectively use limited hardware resources and to embed an illegal instruction (hidden instruction) in the free area. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to ensure the fairness of the game. The SUBTWOONE instruction (SUBTWOONE OP1, OP2) is difficult to carry, but a 2-byte length value (for example, 0001H) stored in the HL register to a 1-byte length value (for example, 0001H) When subtracting (FFH), a carry occurs. That is, if a carry occurs after executing the SUBTWOONE instruction (SUBTWOONE OP1, OP2), it can be determined that the H register is 00H.
<Modification of data table>

  Next, a modified example of the above data table will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows a modification of the table selection table, the first fluctuation pattern selection table, and the second fluctuation pattern selection table, and corresponds to FIG. 32 described above.

  In the first variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 32B, the item of the number of random numbers is changed to the item of the upper limit of the random numbers with respect to the first variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Further, in the second variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 11C, the value of the number of random numbers is changed with respect to the second variation pattern selection table shown in FIG.

  <Modified example of special symbol variation time lottery processing>

  Next, a modified example of the special symbol variation time lottery process shown in FIG. 34 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special symbol fluctuation | variation time lottery process which concerns on a modification.

  In the special symbol variation time lottery process according to this modified example, the process of step S1109 and the process of step S1114 using the “INCTENSOU BC, (HL)” command of the special symbol variation time lottery process shown in FIG. The process is changed to the process of step S1150 using the “AC, (HL)” instruction or the process of step S1152, and the above-described CPT instruction is used in steps S1151 and S1153.

  Specifically, in step S1150, the values stored in the two consecutive addresses next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register are transferred to the AC register (INCTENSOU AC, (HL)). For example, when the value of the HL register is 174FH, the value stored in the two consecutive addresses (1750H, 1751H) next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register is transferred to the AC register, so that the A register 19 and AEH are stored in the C register.

  In the next step S1151, by executing “CPT A, (41H)”, the contents of the A register, the data of the address (F041H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the upper level, and the immediate value (41H) as the lower level, That is, the random number 1 stored in the random number 1 storage area is compared (the random number 1 is subtracted from the value of the A register). In the next step S1154, it is determined whether or not a carry occurs as a result of the comparison (subtraction) in step S1151, that is, whether or not the result of the subtraction has become a positive value. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1112. If not applicable, the processing of steps S1150 to S1151 is repeatedly executed until it is applicable.

  In step S1152, the values stored at the two consecutive addresses next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register are transferred to the AC register (INCENSOU AC, (HL)). For example, when the value of the HL register is 17FFH, the value stored in the two consecutive addresses (1800H and 1801H) next to the address indicated by the value of the HL register is transferred to the AC register, so that the A register 255 and 01H are stored in the C register.

In the next step S1153, by executing “CPT A, (42H)”, the contents of the A register, the data of the address (F042H) indicating the T register (F0H) as the higher order, and the immediate value (42H) as the lower order, That is, the random number 2 stored in the random number 2 storage area is compared (subtracts the random number 2 from the value of the A register). In the next step S1155, as a result of the comparison (subtraction) in step S1153, it is determined whether or not a carry occurs, that is, whether or not the result of the subtraction has a positive value. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1117. If not applicable, the processing of steps S1152 to S1153 is repeatedly executed until it is applicable.
<Initial setting process>

  Next, the initial setting process executed in the initial setting 2 (step S107) of the main control unit main process described above will be described using FIG. 40 and FIG. 40A shows an example of the initial setting data table stored in the ROM 306, and FIG. 40B shows a part of the storage area of the RAM 308 after the initial setting process. FIG. 6C is a flowchart showing the flow of the initial setting process. FIG. 41 is an example of a program list for initial setting processing.

  In step S1201, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the value of the HL register by the above-described TENSOUINC instruction (“TENSOUINC BD, (HL)”) After adding 1 to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the HL register value is 1 is added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, for example, the initial address of the initial setting data table shown in FIG. In this case, F0H is stored in the D register and 3 is stored in the B register.

  In the next step S1202, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the value of the HL register by the above-mentioned TENSOUINC instruction (“TENSOUINC AE, (HL)”) After storing 1 in the 2-byte length value stored in the E register and the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, the 1-byte length value stored in the address (HL) indicated by the HL register value is stored in the AE register. 1 is added to the 2-byte length value stored in the HL register, for example, in the above example, the E register has a value 17H stored in 100FH. The A register stores 01H, which is the value stored in 1010, and the value in the HL register is updated to 1011H.

  In the next step S1203, the value of the A register is stored in the address (DE) indicated by the value of the DE register. In the previous example, 01H, which is the value of the A register, is stored in F017H of the RAM 308, which is an address indicated by the value of the DE register (see FIG. 5B).

  In the next step S1204, 1 is subtracted from the value of the B register, and the processing of steps S1202 to S1203 is repeatedly executed until the subtraction result becomes 0 (relative jump to the processing address of step S1202 is executed). If the subtraction result is 0, the process proceeds to step S1205.

  In the above example, when the B register is 2, 20H which is the value stored in 1011H is stored in the E register and the value stored in 1012H is stored in the A register by the processing in step S1202. 16H is stored, the value of the HL register is updated to 1013H, and the value of 16H, which is the value of the A register, is stored in F020H of the RAM 308, which is the address indicated by the value of the DE register, by the processing of step S1203 (same figure). (See (b)).

  If the B register is 1, 3AH which is the value stored in 1013H is stored in the E register and 06H which is the value stored in 1014H is stored in the A register by the processing in step S1202. The value of the HL register is updated to 1015H, and the value of 06H, which is the value of the A register, is stored in F03AH of the RAM 308, which is the address indicated by the value of the DE register, by the processing of step S1203 ((b) in the figure). reference). The game settings (various information used for game control) stored in F017H, F020H, and F03AH include, for example, power status, payout control command processing type, display display status, etc., and the number of game settings is There may be more than one or only one. In addition, the initial setting process (moDataSet) is performed by setting the value of the HL register at the start of processing (the address set in the HL register is set to the head address of another table different from the initial setting data table). Therefore, it may be handled as a general-purpose data setting processing module that can be called from a plurality of processes (for example, can be called using an HL register as an argument). In this case, the program capacity can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved.

  In this initial setting process, since the TENSOUINC instruction is used in steps S1201 and S1202, the number of states can be reduced from the conventional 26 states to 14 states, the processing time can be shortened, and the number of bytes can be reduced. Can be reduced from the conventional 4 bytes to 2 bytes, and the program capacity can be reduced. In particular, in this example, since the TENSOUINC instruction is repeatedly executed in the loop processing of steps S1202 to S204, the effect of reducing the processing speed is high.

  Also, among the TENSOUINC instructions, the instruction (in this embodiment, TENSOUINC AC, (HL), TENSOUINC AE, (HL)) having a pair of the A register (accumulator) and another register as an operand is the value of the A register. At the same time, the upper byte register (B register and D register in this embodiment) of the pair register (BC register and DE register in this embodiment) is fixed, while the lower byte register (this embodiment) of the pair register is fixed. In the embodiment, only the values of the C register and the E register can be changed, so that more advanced programming than before can be performed, and the program capacity can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved.

  Among the TENSOUINC instructions, the upper byte register (B register in the present embodiment) of the first pair register (BC register in the present embodiment) and the second pair register (DE register in the present embodiment) ) Instruction (TENSOUINC BD, (HL) in this embodiment) having a pair of registers (D register in this embodiment) as operands is higher in the first pair register and the second pair register. Since only the byte register value can be changed, more advanced programming than before is possible, and the program capacity can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved.

  Also, among the TENSOUINC instructions, the instruction including the B register in the operand (TENSOUINC BC, (HL), TENSOUINC BD, (HL) in this embodiment) is used, and steps S1202 to S1204 of the initial setting process described above are used. If the B register is used to determine the number of times loop processing is performed as in the case of loop processing, the program capacity of the loop processing can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved.

  Note that the CPU 304 can execute both a TENSOUINC instruction and an INCENSOU instruction, and the game control program executes both a table search by the first instruction (TENSOUINC) and a table search by the second instruction (INCTENSOU). Also good.

  The “table search” may have a meaning according to a general term, for example, a table composed of one or more rows and one or more columns (for example, the first variation pattern selection table of FIG. 32 and FIG. 38). The second variation pattern selection table (initial setting data table of FIG. 40) may be used to search for a corresponding row, and the process of extracting the value of one or more columns of the row may be indicated. It is good also as processing which derives the position (for example, line number). Similarly, a process for finding a corresponding column and extracting a value of one or a plurality of rows of the column may be indicated, or a process for deriving a column position (for example, a column number) in the table of the searched column. Good.

The process of finding the corresponding row here corresponds to the specific row when the value or values you are looking for match or relate to the value of one or more specific columns in the specific row in the table. It is also possible to perform processing such as making a line to be executed. The process for finding the corresponding column may be the same.
<Second special instruction of main control unit>

  Next, the second special instruction provided in the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 42A is a diagram illustrating a part of the second special instruction included in the main control unit 300. FIG.

  <Second special instruction / CPRT instruction (operation + return instruction)>

  The “CPRTZ r” instruction (or “CPRTZ (rr)” instruction), which is one of the second special instructions, is a register indicated by the operand r (or an address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). 0 is subtracted from the value stored in, and when the Z flag is set to 1 (when the subtraction result is 0, the same applies hereinafter), the data stored in the stack area SP indicated by the stack pointer SP is After loading (returning) the data stored in the lower address of the program counter PC and in the stack area SP + 1 indicated by the stack pointer SP to the upper address of the program counter PC, two stack pointers SP are added and then the Z flag Is set to 1 and the Z flag is cleared to 0 (when the subtraction result is other than 0. The same applies hereinafter) ), The address of the subsequent processing is set in the program counter PC, and then the Z flag is cleared to 0. It should be noted that the timing for setting the program counter PC and the timing for clearing the Z flag to 0 may be reversed or simultaneous.

  Also, the “CPRTNZ r” instruction (or “CPRTNZ (rr)” instruction) is 0 from the value stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). When the Z flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in the stack area SP indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored in the lower address of the program counter PC and in the stack area SP + 1 indicated by the stack pointer SP. When the stored data is loaded (returned) to the upper address of the program counter PC, the stack pointer SP is added by two, the Z flag is cleared to 0, and the Z flag is set to 1. Set the Z flag to 1 after setting the address of subsequent processing in the program counter PC It is an instruction to do. The register indicated by the operand r includes B, C, D, E, H, and L registers, and the pair register indicated by the operand rr includes BC, DE, and HL (the next CPJR instruction) The same).

  <Second special instruction / CPJR instruction (operation + jump instruction)>

  The “CPJRZ r, e” instruction (or “CPJPZ (rr), e” instruction), which is one of the second special instructions, is stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). 0 is subtracted from the value stored in the stored address), and when the Z flag is set to 1, the Z flag is jumped to the address indicated by the program counter PC + e (e is a value from +127 to -128) Is set to 1 and the Z flag is cleared to 0, the address of the subsequent processing is set in the program counter PC and then the Z flag is cleared to 0. The “CPJRNZ r, e” instruction (or “CPJPNZ (rr), e” instruction) subtracts 0 from the value stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the pair register indicated by the operand rr), When the Z flag is cleared to 0, after jumping to the address indicated by the program counter PC + e (e is a value from +127 to -128), the Z flag is cleared to 0 and the Z flag is set to 1 In this case, the Z flag is set to 1 after the address of subsequent processing is set in the program counter PC.

  The “CPJRC r, n, e” instruction (or “CPJRC (rr), n, e” instruction) is an address stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). ) Is subtracted from the value stored in (8-bit immediate value), and when the C flag is set to 1 (when the subtraction result is 0, the same applies hereinafter), the program counter PC + e (e Jumps to the address indicated by +127 to -128) and then sets the C flag to 1 and the C flag is cleared to 0 (when the subtraction result is other than 0. The same applies hereinafter) This is an instruction for setting the C flag to 0 after setting the address of the subsequent processing in the program counter PC. Further, the “CPJRNC r, n, e” instruction (or “CPJRNC (rr), n, e” instruction) is an address stored in the register indicated by the operand r (or the pair register rr indicated by the operand (rr)). ) Is subtracted from the value stored in (8-bit immediate value), and when the C flag is cleared to 0, the address indicated by the program counter PC + e (e is a numerical value of +127 to −128) This instruction clears the C flag to 0 after the jump and sets the C flag to 1 after setting the address of the subsequent processing in the program counter PC when the C flag is set to 1.

FIG. 42B is a diagram showing the state of the flag register before and after executing the second special instruction. The main control unit 300 includes an 8-bit flag register having an S flag, a Z flag, an SZ flag, an H flag, a P / V flag, an N flag, and a C flag. The S flag, Z flag, SZ flag, H flag, and C flag included in this flag register are set to 1 or cleared to 0 by execution of the second special instruction or execution of other arithmetic logic operation instructions. .
<Process using CPJR instruction>

  Next, processing using the CPJR instruction will be described. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of processing using the CPJR instruction. In the first module shown in the figure, after executing the process X, the CPJR instruction is executed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the process jumps to the process Z. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the subsequent module Processing for executing processing Y is performed.

  Here, “when the predetermined condition is satisfied” means that the Z flag is set to 1 if the above-mentioned “CPJRZ r, e” instruction (or “CPJRZ (rr), e” instruction) is used. If the above-described “CPJPNZ r, e” instruction (or “CPJRNZ (rr), e” instruction), the Z flag is cleared to 0. If the above-mentioned “CPJRC r, n, e” instruction (or “CPJPC (rr), n, e” instruction) is used, the C flag is set to 1, and “CPJRNC” In the case of the “r, n, e” instruction (or “CPJPNC (rr), n, e” instruction), the C flag is cleared to 0.

  When the contents of the flag register in the process X performed before the execution of the CPJR instruction are the first contents α, the contents of the flag register in the subsequent processes Y and Z are changed to the second contents α by executing the CPJR instruction. The content changes to β. However, in this embodiment, in addition to not referring to the contents of the flag register during the execution of the CPJR instruction, the contents of the flag register changed by the CPJR instruction are also referred to in the processes Y and Z after the execution of the CPJR instruction. It is configured to perform the processing without doing.

  In this way, in addition to not referring to the contents of the flag register during the execution of the CPJR instruction, the contents of the flag register are changed by the execution of the CPJR instruction. If the processing is performed without referring to the contents, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of the program execution can be eliminated, the analysis of the program becomes difficult, and unauthorized program tampering can occur. Can be prevented. In this example, the contents of the flag register are not referred to during the execution of the CPJR instruction. However, the contents of the flag register are referred to during the execution of the CPJR instruction, and in a predetermined process performed after the execution of the CPJR instruction. Even if the processing is performed without referring to the contents of the flag register changed before the execution of the CPJR instruction, the same effect may be obtained (the same applies hereinafter).

  FIG. 44A shows an example of a program using a conventional instruction, and FIG. 44B shows an example of a program using a CPJR instruction. For example, when a program for determining whether the value of the A register is 0 or other than 0 and jumping to a predetermined process when the value of the A register is 0, the conventional program shown in FIG. Then, it is necessary to realize by two instructions of an AND instruction (AND A) shown in (1-1) and a JR instruction (JRZ, ITmrRnwCtl020) shown in (1-2). In the program of this embodiment shown, the same processing is realized by only one CPJR instruction (CPJRZ A, ITmrRnwCtl020) shown in (2-1).

  In this way, if the CPJR instruction is used to determine whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied and a program that jumps to a predetermined process when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the program code can be reduced as compared with the conventional case. In some cases, limited memory can be used effectively.

  In the program of this embodiment shown in FIG. 5B, in the processing Y and the processing Z after execution of the CPJR instruction (CPJRZ A, ITmrRnwCtl020) shown in (2-1), the flag register changed by the CPJR instruction is changed. Processing is performed without referring to the contents at all. As described above, if the contents of the flag register are changed by the execution of the CPJR instruction, the predetermined process performed after the execution of the CPJR instruction is performed without referring to the contents of the flag register. The relationship between the change in the contents of the program and the flow of execution of the program can be eliminated, the analysis of the program is difficult, and the analysis of the illegal program can be prevented in advance.

  In the process V following the process Z of the program of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 6B, the flag register changed by another instruction (in this example, the “OR (HL)” instruction) after the execution of the CPJR instruction. Processing (in this example, a JR instruction) based on the contents (in this example, the contents of the Z flag) is performed. In this way, if the process Z that does not refer to the contents of the flag register and the process V that refers to the contents of the flag register are continued, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of program execution may be complicated. In some cases, it is difficult to analyze a program, and an unauthorized program can be prevented from being analyzed.

  Furthermore, in this example, the LD instruction (load instruction) is executed in the process Z. However, since the LD instruction is one of the instructions that changes the SZ flag without changing the Z flag after the instruction is executed, “ After execution of the “LD A, (HL)” instruction, the Z flag does not change, but the SZ flag changes. On the other hand, in the subsequent process V, “JR Z, ITmrRnwCtL040” is executed. Here, the branch process is performed by referring to the Z flag that has not changed by the execution of the “LD A, (HL)” instruction of process Z It is carried out.

  In this way, a first instruction (for example, CPJR instruction) that changes the values of a plurality of flags including the SZ flag and the Z flag is executed, and a second instruction (for example, a DEC A instruction) that does not refer to the flag is executed. Execute a third instruction (for example, an LD instruction) in which only one of the Z flag and the SZ flag changes, and a fourth instruction (for example, refer to the flag that has not changed (changed)) , JR Z instruction), the relationship between the contents of the flag register and the flow of program execution can be complicated, making it difficult to analyze programs and analyzing illegal programs. There are cases where it can be prevented.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of another process using the CPJR instruction. In the first module shown in the figure, after the process X is executed, the CPJR instruction is executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the process jumps to the second module different from the first module and performs the process Z. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the subsequent process Y is executed. As described above, when a program that jumps to a predetermined process when a predetermined condition is satisfied using the CPJR instruction, the program may be jumped to not only the process in the same module but also the process of another module. .

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of another process using the CPJR instruction including the process V described above. In the second module shown in the figure, after executing the process Z, an arithmetic logic operation instruction is executed, and a branch process is performed based on the content γ of the flag register changed by the execution of the instruction. In this way, processing based on the flag register changed by execution of the CPJR instruction is not performed, and processing based on the flag register changed by execution of an instruction other than the CPJR instruction (in this example, an arithmetic logic operation instruction) is performed. With this configuration, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of program execution can be complicated, making it difficult to analyze the program and preventing unauthorized program analysis in some cases.
<Process using CPRT instruction>

  Next, processing using the CPRT instruction will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of processing using the CPRT instruction. In the first module shown in the figure, the CALL instruction is executed to call the second module, the process X is executed in the second module of the call destination, the CPRT instruction is executed, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Returning to the first module of the caller, the process Z is performed. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the subsequent process Y is executed.

  Here, “when the predetermined condition is satisfied” means that the Z flag is set to 1 if the above-described “CPRTZ r” instruction (or “CPRTZ (rr)” instruction) is used. If it is the above-mentioned “CPRTNZ r” instruction (or “CPRTNZ (rr)” instruction), the Z flag is cleared to 0.

  When the contents of the flag register in the process X performed before the execution of the CPRT instruction is the first contents α, the contents of the flag register in the subsequent process Y and process Z are changed to the second contents α by executing the CPRT instruction. The content changes to β. However, in addition to not referring to the flag register during execution of the CPRT instruction, processing Y and processing Z after execution of the CPRT instruction are performed without referring to the contents of the flag register changed by the CPRT instruction. It is configured.

  In this way, in addition to not referring to the flag register during the execution of the CPRT instruction, the contents of the flag register are changed by the execution of the CPRT instruction, while the contents of the flag register are determined in a predetermined process performed after the execution of the CPRT instruction. If the processing is performed without referring to, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of the program execution can be eliminated, making the analysis of the program difficult and the analysis of the illegal program in advance. Sometimes it can be prevented.

  FIG. 48A shows an example of a program using a CPRT instruction, and FIG. 48B shows an example of a program using a conventional instruction. For example, when it is determined whether the value of the A register is 0 or other than 0, and a program that returns (returns) to a predetermined process when the value of the A register is 0 is shown in FIG. The conventional program needs to be realized by two instructions, ie, an AND instruction (AND A) shown in (1-1) and a RET instruction (RET Z) shown in (1-2). In the program of the present embodiment shown, the same processing is realized by only one CPRT instruction (CPRTZ A) shown in (2-1).

  In this way, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a program that returns (returns) to a predetermined process when a predetermined condition is satisfied is used, a CPRT instruction is used, so that the program code is reduced as compared with the conventional case. In some cases, limited memory can be used effectively.

  In the program of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 11A, in the processing Y and processing Z after execution of the CPRT instruction (CPRTZ A) shown in (2-1), the contents of the flag register changed by the CPRT instruction are displayed. It is configured to perform processing without referring to it at all. In this way, if the contents of the flag register are changed by execution of the CPRT instruction, while the predetermined process performed after the execution of the CPRT instruction is performed without referring to the contents of the flag register, the flag register The relationship between the change in the contents of the program and the flow of execution of the program can be eliminated, the analysis of the program is difficult, and the analysis of the illegal program can be prevented in advance.

In the process V following the process Z of the program of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 6A, a process based on the contents of the flag register changed by another instruction after the execution of the CPRT instruction is performed. In this way, if the process Z that does not refer to the contents of the flag register and the process V that refers to the contents of the flag register are continued, the relationship between the change in the contents of the flag register and the flow of program execution may be complicated. In some cases, it is difficult to analyze a program, and an unauthorized program can be prevented from being analyzed.
<Third special instruction of main control unit>

Next, the third special instruction provided in the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a part of the third special instruction included in the main control unit 300.
<Third special instruction / RES instruction>

  One of the third special instructions, “RESmZ n, r” instruction (m is a numerical value of 0 to 7), of the values stored in the register indicated by the second operand r, of the bit indicated by m. This instruction prohibits access and resets the bit n (n is a numerical value of 0 to 7 excluding m) indicated by the first operand to 0. In addition, the “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a numerical value of 0 to 7) is a value stored at the address stored in the address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the second operand (rr). In this instruction, access to the bit indicated by m is prohibited, and n bits (n is a numerical value of 0 to 7 excluding m) indicated by the first operand are reset to 0.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the “RES2Z 2, L” instruction has a bit (in this example, a bit) indicated by m among values stored in the L register indicated by the second operand L. 2) is an instruction for prohibiting access and resetting bit 2 indicated by the first operand to 0. In this instruction, bit 2 of the L register is not reset to 0. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, the “RES2Z 4, L” instruction is a bit indicated by m (in this example, bit bit) among the values stored in the L register indicated by the second operand L. 2) is an instruction that prohibits access and resets bit 4 indicated by the first operand to 0. In this instruction, access to bit 2 of the L register is prohibited, but bit 4 is reset to 0. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51A, the “RES2Z 2, (HL)” instruction is stored in the address (F010H in this example) stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand (HL). Among these values, this is an instruction that prohibits access to the bit indicated by m (bit 2 in this example) and resets bit 2 indicated by the first operand to 0. In this instruction, the instruction is stored in F010H. Bit 2 of the value being set is not reset to zero. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, the “RES2Z 4, (HL)” instruction is stored in the address (F010H in this example) stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand (HL). Among these values, an instruction for prohibiting access to the bit indicated by m (bit 2 in this example) and resetting bit 4 indicated by the first operand to 0 is stored in F010H in this instruction. Access to bit 2 of the current value is prohibited, but bit 4 is reset to 0.

  According to such a RES instruction, while prohibiting access to a predetermined bit, other bits can be reset to 0 at the same time, so that the numerical value of the predetermined bit can be protected, and the predetermined bit can be expected. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a malfunction occurs due to a change to a numerical value that does not occur.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an extracted part corresponding to the RES instruction in the instruction map of the main control unit 300. As described above, the “RES2Z 2, L” instruction and the “RES2Z 2, (HL)” instruction are instructions that access to bit 2 is prohibited and bit 2 cannot be reset (because they are substantially meaningless instructions). ), As indicated by the thick-lined square in the figure, the 25H portion corresponding to the “RES2Z 2, L” instruction and the 26H portion corresponding to the “RES2Z 2, (HL)” instruction are free areas. . Thus, by providing an empty area in a part of the instruction map, it may be difficult to analyze a program (machine language) using the instruction map.
<Modification 1 of RES instruction>

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a RES instruction according to the first modification. A “RESmZ n, r” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254), which is a modification of the RES instruction, has a decimal number m of 1 among the values stored in the register indicated by the second operand r. Access to a bit that is set to 1 when converted to a binary number of bytes is prohibited, and bit n (n is not set to 1 when m is converted to a binary number of 1 byte) Bit) is reset to 0. The “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254) is a decimal number among the values stored in the address stored in the pair register indicated by the second operand rr. Access to bits that are set to 1 when m is converted to a 1-byte binary number and n bits (n is set when m is converted to a binary number) indicated by the first operand This is an instruction to reset the bit number (not yet) to 0.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the “RES2Z 4, L” instruction converts a decimal number 2 from a value stored in the register L indicated by the second operand L to a 1-byte binary number. This instruction prohibits access to a bit that is set to 1 (bit 1 in this example) when converted, and resets bit 4 indicated by the first operand to 0. Also, as shown in FIG. 5B, the “RES3Z 4, L” instruction converts the decimal number 3 from the value stored in the register L indicated by the second operand L to a 1-byte binary number. This is an instruction that prohibits access to bits set to 1 when converted (bit 1 and bit 0 in this example) and resets bit 4 indicated by the first operand to 0.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a program using the RES instruction according to the first modification. As described above, the “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254) is a value stored at the address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the second operand (rr). Among them, access to a bit set to 1 when a decimal number m is converted to a 1-byte binary number is prohibited, and n bits (n is a value converted to a binary number) indicated by the first operand This is a command for resetting the bit number (sometimes 1 is not set) to 0.

  Therefore, the “RES251Z 2 (= ebCS20pnSGt), (HL)” instruction shown in (3-1) in the figure is an address stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand (HL) (in this example, Of the values stored in F096H (= v0ptCS2)), bits that are set to 1 when the decimal number 251 is converted into a 1-byte binary number (in this example, bits 0 to 1, 3 to 7) This instruction prohibits access and resets the bit (bit 2 in this example) indicated by the first operand to 0.

According to such a RES instruction, while prohibiting access to a predetermined bit, other bits can be reset to 0 at the same time, so that the numerical value of the predetermined bit can be protected. (For example, CLR instruction, SET instruction, RES instruction, BIT instruction, etc.) It is possible to prevent a situation in which a predetermined bit is changed to an unexpected numerical value due to a coding error or the like, and debugging or test work can be prevented. May be shortened, and stable game control may be performed. In addition, since the bit for which access is prohibited can be designated by a decimal number, analysis of the program may be difficult.
<Modification 2 of RES instruction>

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a RES instruction according to the second modification. A “RESmZ n, r” instruction (m is a numerical value of 0 to 7), which is a modification of the RES instruction, is a bit indicated by m among the values stored in the pair register including the register indicated by the second operand r. And the bit n (n is a numerical value of 0 to 8 excluding m) indicated by the first operand is reset to 0. In addition, the “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a numerical value of 0 to 7) is stored in an address stored in the pair register rr indicated by the second operand (rr) and an address consecutive to this address. An instruction that prohibits access to the bit indicated by m in the 2-byte length value and resets the bit n indicated by the first operand (where n is a numerical value of 0 to 8 excluding m) to 0. is there.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 57, the “RES2Z 8, L” instruction is a bit (bit 2) indicated by 2 among the values stored in the pair register HL including the register L indicated by the second operand L. Is an instruction that resets bit 8 (in this example, bit 0 of the H register, which is the upper byte of the HL register) indicated by the first operand to 0.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the “RES2Z 8, (HL)” instruction includes an address (F010H in this example) stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand (HL), and this address. Of the 2-byte length values stored in successive addresses (F011H in this example), access to the bit indicated by 2 (bit 2) is prohibited, and bit 8 indicated by the first operand (in this example) , Bit 0 value of the value stored in F011H consecutive to F010H) is reset to 0.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a portion corresponding to the RES instruction according to the second modification extracted from the instruction map of the main control unit 300. As described above, the “RES2Z 2, L” instruction and the “RES2Z 2, (HL)” instruction are instructions in which access to bit 2 is prohibited and bit 2 cannot be reset. Instead of these instructions, a “RES2Z 8, L” instruction and a “RES2Z 8, (HL)” instruction are assigned. Thus, by making the order of arrangement of a part of the instruction map irregular, it may be difficult to analyze the program (machine language).
<Other Modifications of RES Instruction>

  FIG. 60 shows another modification of the RES instruction. For example, in the RES instruction shown in FIG. 5A, in the “RESmZ n, r” instruction or “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254) in the above-described modification example 1, The numerical value m is changed so that 0 can be designated. When 0 is designated, access to all bits is permitted. In the RES instruction shown in FIG. 5B, in the “RESmZ n, r” instruction or the “RESmZ n, (rr)” instruction (m is a decimal number from 1 to 254) in the above-described modification 1, The numerical value m is changed so that the specification can be omitted. When the specification is omitted, access to all bits is permitted.

  FIG. 61A shows an instruction map when an RES instruction that does not prohibit access of a predetermined bit is provided, and an instruction map when an RES instruction that prohibits access of a predetermined bit is provided. As described above, by changing the order of arrangement of a part of the instruction map between the case where the RES instruction that does not prohibit the access of the predetermined bit is provided and the case where the RES instruction that prohibits the access of the predetermined bit is provided, the program (machine Word) may be difficult to analyze.

FIG. 5B is a diagram showing an example in which the numerical order of the first operand of the RES instruction is different from the arrangement order of the instruction map of the RES instruction. Thus, by assigning the RES instruction to the instruction map so that the numerical values of the first operand of the RES instruction are irregularly arranged as 8 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7, the program (machine language) May be difficult to analyze.
<Specific examples of user programs>

  Next, a specific example of the above user program will be described. As described above, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the user mode, instructions stored after 0000H, which is the first address of the first area of the ROM area, are sequentially executed to start the user program.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing an example of a program start setting process that is a part of the user program, and FIG. 62B shows an example of a power-on setting process that is a part of the user program. It is a figure. In the user program shown in the figure, a program start setting process (instructions stored at addresses 0000H to 0005H) is first executed to set a stack pointer and an interrupt mode, and then a power-on setting process. It is configured to jump to (address 0062H). In the power-on process, instructions stored after the address 0062H are sequentially executed, thereby permitting operation to the WDT, setting an initial value, and monitoring the power supply voltage.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a part of a user program corresponding to the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt signal is input from the counter timer 312, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the interrupt vector table as shown in the figure and jumps to the address defined in the interrupt vector table. In this example, the program jumps to an address 040AH defined corresponding to the timer interrupt. In the main control unit timer interrupt processing, the instructions stored after the address 040AH are sequentially executed, so that register saving and various processes shown in FIGS. Is called.
<Fourth special instruction of main controller>

Next, the fourth special instruction included in the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the contents of the fourth special instruction provided in the main control unit 300 and the ROM area of the main control unit 300.
<4th special instruction / RST instruction>

  The “RST” instruction, which is one of the fourth special instructions, is an instruction for jumping to a fixed address by setting a fixed address in the program counter PC.

  In this embodiment, eight types of RST instructions having different addresses stored in the program counter PC are provided, and the instruction data of the RST instruction is composed of a 5-bit instruction code (opcode) and a 3-bit operand. Yes. Specifically, bits 7 to 6 and 5 bits of 2 to 0 of seven types of RST instructions of instruction data CFH to FFH are instruction codes (opcodes) of the RST instruction, and other 3 bits of bits 5 to 3 (A portion surrounded by a bold line) indicates a part of a jump destination address (in this example, bits 5 to 3) that can be branched by executing each RST instruction as an operand. Address bits 2 to 0 are fixed to 0).

  For example, since bits 5 to 3 of the RST instruction of the instruction data CFH are 001B, bits 5 to 3 of the jump destination address are 001B and bits 2 to 0 are 0 (fixed), that is, 0008H. Since the bits 5 to 3 of the RST instruction of the instruction data D7H are 010B, it indicates that bits 5 to 3 of the jump destination address are 010B and bits 2 to 0 are 0 (fixed), that is, 0010H. ing. Further, jump destination addresses of other RST instructions are as shown in the figure.

  On the other hand, bits 7 to 6 and 5 to 2 of the RST instruction of the instruction data C7H indicate the instruction code (operand) of the RST instruction, and the other 3 bits of bits 5 to 3 (enclosed by bold lines). Indicates a jump destination address that can be branched by executing this RST instruction (in this example, 0040H that cannot be predicted from the numerical value 000B stored in bits 5 to 3). That is, in the RST instruction of the instruction data C7H, even if the operation code and the operand can be analyzed based on the machine language, it is extremely difficult to analyze the jump destination address that can be branched by executing the RST instruction. It is said that.

  Since the instruction data of these RST instructions is composed of a 5-bit instruction code (opcode) and a 3-bit operand as described above, the user cannot freely set the operand (RST instruction). The jump destination address that can be branched by the RST instruction cannot be freely set), and it is only allowed to select the jump destination address that can be branched by the eight types of RST instructions described above. .

  In this example, by including an operand in the instruction data, the jump destination address that can be branched by the instruction is controlled. However, the instruction data may not include the operand. For example, when an opcode (RST) and an operand (0040H) are configured separately as in “RST 0040H” and an address other than a specifiable address (for example, 0000H) is set as an operand, an assembly error is generated. The operands that can be set may be limited, for example, such that it cannot be converted into machine language. In addition, even when a configuration that includes operands in the instruction data is adopted, configurable operands such as an assembly error that cannot be converted into machine language when an address other than a specifiable address is set as an operand. You may restrict.

  That is, in the RST instruction according to the present embodiment, it is possible to jump to only eight types of addresses (0008H, 0010H, 0018H, 0020H, 0028H, 0030H, 0038H, 0040H). The first area of the first area cannot be jumped to 0000H. For this reason, there is a case where an act of incorporating an illegal program and jumping to the start address (starting the user program from the start address and making it an initial state illegally) can be prevented in advance.

Further, in the RST instruction of the instruction data C7H, the numerical value 0040H that is not included in the instruction data is used as the jump destination address. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to specify the jump destination address and the program flow by disassembly or the like. In some cases, unauthorized program modifications can be prevented. In the RST instruction, as shown in the instruction map of FIG. 65, the instruction code order is set in ascending order (C7H → CFH →...), Whereas the jump destination address order (0040H → 0008H → ...) are not arranged in ascending order, it is extremely difficult to analyze instructions, and unauthorized program modification may be prevented in advance.
<Embodiment 2>

Hereinafter, the gaming machine (slot machine 1100) according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1100 as seen from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 1100 shown in the figure includes a main body 1101 and a front door 1102 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1101. Three reels (left reel 1110, middle reel 1111, and right reel 1112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 1101 and rotated inside the slot machine 1100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 1110 to 1112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are configured by attaching the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1110 to 1112 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 1110 to 1112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1110 to 1112 functions as a display device that displays a plurality of combinations of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In this embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 1110 to 1112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1110 to 1112. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1120 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1114 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 1114 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right The down line and the upper right line may be set as valid pay lines, and the same number of pay lines may be set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

  The notification lamp 1123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal insertion is unnecessary) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1128 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1100. In this embodiment, every time the bet button 1130 is pressed, a maximum of 3 cards are inserted, 2 when the bet button 1131 is pressed, and 2 when the bet button 1132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 1132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1121 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1141 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, the insertion of medals can be performed electronically by using the bet buttons 1130 to 1132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1141, and the insertion includes both. is there. The stored number display 1125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1100. The game information display 1126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 1127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 1125, the game information display 1126, and the payout number display 1127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1110 to 1112. In other words, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1141 or the bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are operated and the start lever 1135 is operated, the reels 1110 to 1112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1136 is provided with stop buttons 1137 to 1139. Stop buttons 1137 to 1139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1110 to 1112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1135, and are associated with the reels 1110 to 1112. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1137 to 1139, and when the stop button 1137 to 1139 can be operated, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1133 is a button for pressing and removing a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 1134 is a button for adjusting the medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1100 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1155. Door key hole 1140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1102 of slot machine 1100 is inserted. Below the stop button unit 1136, a title panel 1162 for displaying a model name and pasting various types of certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 1162, a medal payout opening 1155 and a medal tray 1161 are provided.

  The sound hole 1180 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1100 to the outside. Side lamps 1144 provided at the left and right portions of the front door 1102 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1160 is disposed above the front door 1102, and a sound hole 1143 is provided above the effect device 1160. This effect device 1160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1163 including two right shutters 1163a and 1163b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1157 (effect image) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1163. And a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157 appears on the front side (player side) of the slot machine 1100 when the right shutter 1163a and the left shutter 1163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1157. It has become. It should be noted that the display device is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

  FIG. 67 is a front view showing the slot machine 1100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 1101 is a box that is surrounded by an upper surface plate 1261, a left side plate 1260, a right side plate 1260, a lower surface plate 1264, and a back plate 1242 and opens to the front. Inside the main body 1101, a main control board storage case 1210 in which a main control board is stored is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation opening 1249 provided in the upper part of the back plate 1242. Below the three reels 1110 to 1112 are arranged. On the side plate 1260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 1210 and the reels 1110 to 1112, a sub control board storage case 1220 storing the sub control board is disposed. Further, an external concentration terminal plate 1248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 1100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 1260 on the right side.

  The bottom plate 1264 is provided with a medal payout device 1180 (device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket), and has a power supply board above the medal payout device 1180, that is, below the reels 1110 to 1112. A power supply device 1252 is provided, and a power switch 1244 is provided on the front surface of the power supply device 1252. The power supply device 1252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 1100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as a main control unit 1300 and sub-control units 1400 and 1500 described later. To do. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. Yes.

  A medal auxiliary storage 1240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 1180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind this (not shown). The power supply device 1252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting a power cord 1264, and the power cord 1264 connected thereto extends to the outside through a power cord hole 1262 provided in the back plate 1242 of the main body 1101. Yes.

  The front door 1102 is hinged to the left side plate 1260 of the main body 1101 via a hinge device 1276, and an effect device 1160 and an effect control board (which controls the effect device 1160) are provided above the symbol display window 1113. An upper speaker 1272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 1113, a medal selector 1170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 1266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 1170 drops illegal medals etc. on the medal tray 1161, etc. are provided. Yes. Further, a bass speaker 1277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 1180.

  The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 1100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 1100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 1300 that mainly controls the progress of a game (for example, detection of an operation by a player, transition of a game state, game medium payout control, determination of success / failure, etc.). In response to a command signal transmitted from the main control unit 1300 (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”), a first sub control unit 1400 that mainly controls production and a command transmitted from the first sub control unit 1400 And a second sub-control unit 1500 that controls various devices based on the above.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The main control unit 1300 includes a basic circuit 1302 that controls the entire main control unit 1300. The basic circuit 1302 includes a CPU 1304, control program data, lottery data used during an internal lottery for a winning combination, and reel stop. ROM 1306 for storing position, RAM 1308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 1310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 1312 for measuring time, frequency, etc. WDT (watchdog timer) 1314 is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 1306 and the RAM 1308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 1314 as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 1304 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 1306 to the counter timer 1312. The counter timer 1312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 1304 at every interrupt time. In response to this interrupt request, the CPU 1304 executes monitoring of each sensor and transmission of drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 1314 is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 1312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division in the ROM 1306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 1300 has a random number generation circuit 1316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. A circuit 1338 is provided, and the CPU 1304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 1338 (starts a main control unit main process described later).

  Further, the main control unit 1300 includes a sensor circuit 1320, and the CPU 1304 is inserted from various sensors 1318 (a bet button 1130 sensor, a bet button 1131 sensor, a bet button 1132 sensor, and a medal slot 1141 at every interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 1135 sensor, stop button 1137 sensor, stop button 1138 sensor, stop button 1139 sensor, checkout button 1134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 1180, index sensor for reel 1110 , The index sensor of the reel 1111, the index sensor of the reel 1112, etc.).

  When the sensor circuit 1320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 1316. The random number generation circuit 1316 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 1141 and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 1135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 1135 and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 1137 sensor, the stop button 1138 sensor, and the stop button 1139 are installed in each of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 1130 sensor, the bet button 1131 sensor, and the bet button 1132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 1130 to 1132, and the medal electronically stored in the RAM 1308 is inserted as an inserted medal into the game. Detecting the input operation when The settlement button 1134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 1134. When the settlement button 1134 is pressed once, medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 1180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 1110, the index sensor of the reel 1111, and the index sensor of the reel 1112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the respective reels 1110 to 1112. Becomes L level. When detecting this signal, the CPU 1304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the reel rotation position information to zero.

  The main control unit 1300 is provided in a drive circuit 1322 for driving a stepping motor provided in the reel devices 1110 to 1112, a drive circuit 1324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 1170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 1180. A drive circuit 1326 for driving the motor, various lamps 1338 (a winning line display lamp 1120, a notification lamp 1123, a game medal insertion enable lamp 1124, a re-game lamp 1122, a game medal insertion lamp 1129, a game start lamp 1121, and a stored number display. A driving circuit 1328 for driving a device 1125, a game information display 1126, and a payout amount display 1127).

  In addition, an information output circuit 1334 (external concentration terminal board 1248) is connected to the basic circuit 1302, and the main controller 1300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 1334. The gaming information (for example, gaming state) of the slot machine 1100 is output to the information input circuit 1652 provided.

  The main control unit 1300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 1330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 1330 includes the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 1302.

The main control unit 1300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 1400 and enables communication with the first sub control unit 1400. Information communication between the main control unit 1300 and the first sub control unit 1400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 1300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 1400. However, the first sub-control unit 1400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 1300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 1400 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The first sub control unit 1400 includes a basic circuit 1402 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 1300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub control unit 1400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 1402 includes a CPU 1404, a RAM 1408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 1410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 1412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 1404 of the basic circuit 1402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 1414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 1400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 1404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 1406 to the counter timer 1412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 1412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 1404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The first sub-control unit 1400 is provided with a sound source IC 1418, and the sound source IC 1418 is provided with speakers 1272 and 1277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 1418 controls sound output from the amplifiers and speakers 1272 and 1277 in accordance with a command from the CPU 1404. The sound source IC 1418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored. The sound data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 1272 and 1277.

  The first sub-control unit 1400 is provided with a drive circuit 1422, and various lamps 1420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 1144, title panel 1162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 1422 through an input / output interface. It is connected.

  The CPU 1404 transmits and receives signals to the second sub control unit 1500 via the output interface. Second sub-control unit 1500 performs various controls of effect device 1160 including display control of effect image display device 1157. Note that the second sub-control unit 1500 is, for example, a control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 1157 and a control unit that controls various driving devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 1163). For example, it may be configured by a plurality of control units.

  The second sub control unit 1500 includes a basic circuit 1502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 1400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 1500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 1502 includes a CPU 1504, a RAM 1508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 1510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 1512. The CPU 1504 of the basic circuit 1502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 1514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 1500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 1504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 1506 to the counter timer 1512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 1512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 1504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The second sub control unit 1500 is provided with a drive circuit 1530 for driving the motor of the shutter 1163, and the drive circuit 1530 is provided with a shutter 1163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 1530 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 1163 in response to a command from the CPU 1504. The second sub-control unit 1500 is provided with a sensor circuit 1532, and a shutter sensor 1538 is connected to the sensor circuit 1532 via an input interface. The CPU 1504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 1538 every interruption time.

The second sub control unit 1500 is provided with a VDP 1534 (video display processor), and a ROM 1506 and a VRAM 1536 are connected to the VDP 1534 through a bus. The VDP 1534 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 1506 based on a signal from the CPU 1504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 1536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 1157.
<Pattern arrangement>

  Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the reels 1110 to 1112 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram in which the arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 1110, middle reel 1111, right reel 1112) is developed in a plane.

In each reel 1110 to 1112, a plurality of types (eight types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the same figure are arranged by a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in the present embodiment). Also, numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of symbols on the reels 1110 to 1112. For example, in the present embodiment, the “Replay” symbol is assigned to the number 1 frame on the left reel 1110, the “Bell” symbol is assigned to the number 0 frame on the middle reel 1111, and the “No. 2” symbol is assigned to the number 2 frame on the right reel 1112. "Watermelon" design is arranged respectively.
<Type of winning prize>

  Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows the types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

  Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonuses (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are used as a combination for shifting to the bonus game, and the replay (replay) is a replay without newly inserting a medal. Each winning combination is sometimes distinguished from a winning combination and sometimes called an “acting combination”. However, in the “winning combination” in this embodiment, a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a replay that are operating combinations are included. included. In addition, “winning” in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an actuator not accompanied by a medal payout (without medal payout) is displayed on an active line, for example, a big bonus, regular Includes bonuses and replay wins.

  The winning combination of the slot machine 1100 includes a big bonus (BB1, BB2), a regular bonus (RB), a small combination (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replay (replay). Needless to say, the type of winning combination is not limited to this and can be arbitrarily adopted.

  “Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)” (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “BB”) is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning a prize. . Corresponding symbol combinations are “white 7-white 7-white 7” for BB1, and “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” for BB2. Further, flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in the determination result storage area of the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300), but even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in that game, The flag indicating the internal winning is kept until winning, and the BB1 and BB2 are still in the internal winning even after the next game, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 "white 7-white 7-white 7", corresponds to BB2. The symbol combination “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7” is in a state of winning a prize.

  The “regular bonus (RB)” is a special combination (operating combination) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning. The corresponding symbol combination is “bonus-bonus-bonus”. Note that the RB carries over the flag as well as the above-mentioned BB. However, in the big bonus game (BB game) (details will be described later), the regular bonus game (RB game) is won internally and the combination of symbols is displayed on the winning line. In addition, the regular bonus game is started after the start of the big bonus game, and when the regular bonus game is finished once, the regular bonus game is automatically started so that the next regular bonus game is immediately started. It is good. “Short (cherry, watermelon, bell)” (hereinafter, simply referred to as “cherry”, “watermelon”, “bell”) is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The symbol combinations are “cherry-ANY-ANY” for cherry, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” for watermelon, and “bell-bell-bell” for bell. The corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. In the case of “cherry-ANY-ANY”, the symbol of the left reel 1110 may be “cherry”, and the symbol of the middle reel 1111 and the right reel 1112 may be any symbol.

“Replay” is a winning combination (operating combination) in which a game can be performed without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning, and no medal is paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is “replay-replay-replay” for replay.
<Type of gaming state>

Next, the types of gaming state of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The gaming state is information for identifying the type of lottery data selected in a lottery or the like. In the present embodiment, the gaming state of the slot machine 1100 is roughly divided into a normal game, a BB game, an RB game, and an internal winning game of a big bonus (BB) and a regular bonus (RB). However, the internal winning game may be a division included in the normal game.
<Normal game>

  The winning combinations that are internally won for normal games include a big bonus (BB), regular bonus (RB), replay (replay), and small roles (cherry, watermelon, bell).

  “Big Bonus (BB)” is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning. “Regular Bonus (RB)” is a special combination (operating combination) that starts a regular bonus game (RB game) upon winning. The “replay” (replay) is a winning combination (operating combination) in which a game can be performed without a medal being inserted in the next game by winning, and no medal is paid out. The “small role” is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. In addition, the internal winning probability of each combination is a range of random values obtained at the time of internal lottery from numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each combination from lottery data prepared for normal games. It is calculated by the value divided by the numerical data (for example, 65535). The lottery data prepared for the normal game is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each combination and lose is associated with each numerical range. It is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. This lottery data is provided with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probabilities of at least one combination are different, and a game shop clerk can arbitrarily select and set any set value.

In the normal game, the internal lottery result is almost lost (big bonus (BB), regular bonus (RB), replay (replay) and small role won), or any stop display result A setting is made so that the stop display result of the losing that does not correspond to the symbol combination of the combination is generally derived, and the total number of medals to be acquired is less than the total number of inserted medals. Therefore, it is a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player. However, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific symbol combination is displayed), it is a gaming state that may be changed to increase the probability of internal winning of replaying. In this case, Consumption of medals used for games is suppressed, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a small role, resulting in a gaming state where the total number of medals earned exceeds the total number of medals inserted, which is beneficial to the player May become a gaming state.
<BB game>

The BB game is set to be in a gaming state that is beneficial to the player. That is, the BB game is in a gaming state in which the total number of medals to be acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted. In this embodiment, the BB game is started by winning a big bonus (BB), and an RB game (described later) can be continuously executed repeatedly, and a predetermined number (for example, during the game) The process ends when more than 465 medals are obtained. However, the BB game only needs to be able to execute the RB game a plurality of times. For example, when a combination (for example, replay-replay-replay) is set for starting the RB game, and this combination is won internally, or The RB game may be set to start when winning. Furthermore, in the BB game, when the BB general game excluding the RB game during the BB game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), or the number of the RB games executed during the BB game is a predetermined number of times. It may be made to end when it reaches (for example, three times).
<RB game>

  The RB game is set so as to be in a gaming state that is beneficial to the player. That is, the RB game is in a gaming state in which the total number of medals to be acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted. In this embodiment, the RB game is started by winning a regular bonus (RB), and a predetermined role is set to a variation that increases the probability of internal winning (for example, “setting 1” or “normal game”). The internal winning probability 1/15 of “small role 1” is increased to an internal winning probability 1 / 1.2, which is a predetermined value), and a predetermined number (for example, 8 times) It ends when there is a prize. In the RB game, when a predetermined number of times (at least 2 times) is won (for example, 8 times), or when the number of RB games executed during the RB game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, (8 times). Since the BB game described above can execute the RB game a plurality of times, when a single RB game is performed, the number of medals less than the total number of medals obtained in the BB game is acquired and terminated. Become.

  <Big winning (BB) and regular bonus (RB) internal winning games>

  The winning combination for internal winning game of big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB) includes re-game and small role. The big bonus (BB) and the regular bonus (RB) are not won internally, and are game states in which a symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus (BB) or the regular bonus (RB) can be won.

However, the probability of the internal winning of the replay may be changed from the next game internally won in the big bonus (BB) and the regular bonus (RB). Until the symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB) wins, the total number of medals to be acquired is almost the same as the total number of inserted medals, and is compared with the normal game. The gaming state may be beneficial to the player. It should be noted that BB game and RB game are both game states that are beneficial to the player, and may be generally referred to as bonus games or special games.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 1300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 1338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 to which this activation signal has been input executes a main control unit main process in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 1306 after being reset by a reset interrupt.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S2101. In this initial setting, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 1304, setting of interrupt inhibition, initial setting of the I / O 1310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 1308, operation permission to the WDT 1314, and initial setting Set the value. In step S2103, medal insertion / start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and the winning line display lamp 1120 is turned on in response to the insertion of the medal. Note that when a re-win is won in the previous game, a process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that it is not necessary for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 1135 has been operated. If there is an operation of the start lever 1135, the process proceeds to step S2105.

  In step S2105, the number of inserted medals is determined, and an effective winning line is determined. In step S2107, a random value stored in a main control unit timer interrupt process described later is acquired. In step S2109, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 1306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random value acquired in step S2107. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is won internally, the flag of the winning combination is turned ON. In step S2111, reel stop data is selected based on the internal lottery result. In the present embodiment, the random number acquired from the random number generation circuit 1316 is configured to be used for the internal lottery as it is. However, the acquired random number is processed and the internal lottery is performed using the processed random number. It may be configured.

In step S2113, rotation of all reels 1110 to 1112 is started. In step S2115, the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop control in which one of the reels 1110 to 1112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is selected in step S2111. Stop based on data. When all the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S2117. In step S2117, a winning determination is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 1114, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For example, if “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the bell. In step S2119, if any winning combination with payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines. In step S2121, a game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, a process related to transition of each game state of normal game, BB game, RB game, and internal winning game is performed, and the game state is shifted when those start conditions and end conditions are satisfied. Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, returning to step S2103 and repeating the above-described processing, the game proceeds.
<Main control unit 1300 timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 1300 is provided with a counter timer 1312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms). The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S2201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 1304 to the stack area is performed. In step S2203, the WDT 1314 is periodically updated (not to detect a processing abnormality) so that the count value of the WDT 1314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs. In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S2205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 1320 of the various sensors 1318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 1310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and each of the various sensors 1318 is partitioned in the RAM 1308. Store in the provided signal state storage area. More specifically, the presence / absence of a detection signal at the time of the previous interruption and the previous interruption is stored in each signal state storage area.

  In step S2207, various game processes are performed. Specifically, an interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 1318), and processing according to the interrupt status is performed. For example, when this interrupt status indicates a state of waiting for a start lever operation for starting a game, referring to the area corresponding to the sensor for detecting the operation of the start lever in the signal storage area described above, Processing for outputting a latch signal for latching the random number of the internal lottery channel of the random value generation circuit 1316 when the pattern of the presence / absence of the detection signal at the time of the previous interruption coincides with a predetermined determination pattern ( Specifically, a process of writing a predetermined value in an area corresponding to the internal lottery channel of the soft latch register 3186) is executed, and a read signal for acquiring a random number latched by the latch signal is output. Processing (specifically, corresponding to the channel shown in FIG. 1 in the random number register 3188 shown in FIG. 77) A process of outputting a read signal to the random number register) is executed to acquire the latched random number and store it in the corresponding random value storage area. In the present embodiment, as the determination as to whether or not the start lever has been operated, it has been determined whether or not the detection signals of the previous time and the current time coincide with predetermined determination pattern information. Not limited to the method, for example, it is determined whether or not the previous and current detection signals coincide with predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, present detection signal (so-called up edge)). You may comprise. That is, it may be configured to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal of the sensor for detecting the operation of the start lever, and to determine whether or not the history of the monitoring result matches a predetermined pattern.

  In the present embodiment, as a method of acquiring a random number from the random value generation circuit 1316, a read signal for acquiring a latched random number after performing a process of outputting a latch signal for latching a random number of a channel for internal lottery is used. Although the output method is adopted, it may be acquired by executing a process of directly reading the random number of the internal lottery channel (specifically, a process of directly reading the value of the random number register 3188). .

  In the present embodiment, a process of outputting a read signal for acquiring a random number for internal lottery (different from the process of directly reading the value of the random number register 3188) is executed in the main controller timer interrupt process. However, this process may be executed immediately before the internal lottery of the main control unit main process described above.

  Further, the internal lottery process may be performed in the main control unit timer interrupt process together with the process of outputting a read signal for acquiring a random number for internal lottery.

  In step S2209, timer update processing is performed. Various timers are updated for each time unit.

  In step S2211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, start lever reception command, production command accompanying production lottery processing, rotation start command when rotation of reels 1110 to 1112 starts, and operation of stop buttons 1137 to 1139 are accepted. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (stop button reception command accompanying the reels 1110 to 1112, stop position information command accompanying the stop processing of the reels 1110 to 1112, payout number command and payout end command accompanying the medal payout processing, etc.) Predetermined information corresponding to the command type). The first sub-control unit 1400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 1300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S2213, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 1308 is output to an information input circuit 1652 that is separate from the slot machine 1100 via the information output circuit 1334.

  In step S2215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 1318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S2205 are read, and the presence or absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal payout abnormality is monitored. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, according to the current gaming state, the medal selector 1170 (medal blocker in which a solenoid provided in the medal selector 1170 operates), various lamps 1338, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S2217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S2221. If the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2219.

  In the present embodiment, the process for determining the power interruption (step S2217) and the power interruption process (step S2221) are executed in the interrupt control of the main control unit, but it is not always necessary to perform the interrupt control in the main control unit. Instead, a forced interrupt may be generated based on the input of the low voltage signal, and the power interruption process may be executed by this forced interrupt. However, in the power interruption process executed by the forced interruption in this way, each register of the CPU 1304 executed in the timer interruption start process (step S2201) described above in addition to the process of the power interruption process (step S2221) in the present embodiment. It is also necessary to execute the process of temporarily saving the value in the stack area simultaneously.

In step S2219, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2201 is set in each original register. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S2221, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 1308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400, and FIG. 2B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 1400. . FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 1400.

  First, in step S2301 in FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S2301. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 1408, and the like are performed.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S2307, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400 determines whether a command is received from the main control unit 1300.

  In step S2309, an effect control process is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S2307, a process corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 1406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S2311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step 2309. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 1418 in the effect data read out in step S2309, this command is output to the sound source IC 1418. In step S2313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step 2309. For example, if there is a command to the various lamps 1420 in the effect data read in step S2309, this command is output to the drive circuit 1422.

  In step S2315, information output processing is performed to perform setting for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step 2309. For example, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 1500 in the effect data read in step S2309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S2303.

  Next, a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 1400 detects the strobe signal output from the main control unit 1300. In step S2401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 1300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1408 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 1400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

In step S2501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1408 described in step S2303 in the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S2503, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 1500 set in step S2315, update processing of a random number for production, and the like are performed.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 1504 of the second secondary control unit 1500, and FIG. 2B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 1500. . FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 1500, and FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 1500.

  First, in step S2601 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S2601. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization in the RAM 1508, and the like are performed.

  In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S2607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 1504 of the second sub control unit 1500 determines whether a command is received from the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400. In step S2609, an effect control process is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S2607, a process corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 1506 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S2611, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S2609. For example, if there is a shutter control command in the effect data read in step S2609, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed. In step S2613, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S2609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S2609, image control corresponding to this command is performed (details will be described later), and the flow returns to step S2603.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 1500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 1400. In step S2701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 1400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1508 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 1500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S2801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1508 described in step S2603 in the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S2803, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S2613 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S2901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 1504 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 1536. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 1157. Next, the CPU 1504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 1506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 1536) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 1534 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 1506 to the VRAM 1536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 1534 transfers image data from the ROM 1506 to the VRAM 1536 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 1534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 1504.

  In step S2903, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 1534 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S2905. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S2905, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 1536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 1536 in step S2901, the CPU 1504 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 1536). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 1534. The VDP 1534 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S2907, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 1504 instructs the VDP 1534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 1534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 1504. In step S2909, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 1534 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S2911, and if not, a generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S2911, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 1508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  One, a plurality, or all of the features of the present invention described below can be applied to the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100 as well.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has a main control unit (e.g., CPU 304 (or CPU 1304)) that performs game control centered on the progress of the game (e.g., CPU 304 (or CPU 1304)). Main control unit 300 (or main control unit 1300)) and sub-control units (for example, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500 (for example) that control the effect of the game based on the game control of the main control unit. Or a first sub-control unit 1400, a second sub-control unit 1500)), and the CPU uses a first register (eg, “POP TI command”, “PUSH TI command”, etc.) It can be used with the load instruction of T, but it cannot be used with the operation instruction (it cannot change its value directly by the operation instruction) and the second register. A register (for example, an A register, an F register, a B register, a C register, a D register, an E register, an H register, an L register, and a back register thereof), and the first register via the second register There is no instruction for transferring data (for example, an instruction for transferring data directly to the T register via the A register like the “LD T, A” instruction), and the first register has a direct value (immediate value or immediate value). The game machine is provided with an instruction (for example, an “LD T, F0H” instruction) for setting data according to the above.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, since data is transferred to the first register as a direct value, it is easy to check the set data. There is. In addition, since data is not transferred to the first register via another register, the value of the first register cannot be changed carelessly, resulting in a coding error. There are cases where it can be reduced. In addition, since the first register is only allowed to transfer data by direct value, it is used relatively more than other registers that allow both data transfer via the register and data transfer by direct value. Less frequent. For this reason, it is possible to increase the efficiency of coding review work and debugging (for example, T register tracing).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment is a game machine having a CPU and game control means for performing game control, and the game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine. Yes, the CPU is built in a microcomputer, the CPU includes at least a specific register (for example, a T register), and the CPU receives a load instruction among the functions for setting a value in the specific register What is performed based on is a game machine having only a function of setting a value by a direct value.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, since the load instruction cannot set data other than the direct value to the specific register, the value of the specific register cannot be changed carelessly. As a result, the occurrence of coding mistakes can be reduced, and stable game control can be performed. In addition, since the data set in a specific register can be easily confirmed visually on the source code, coding review work and debugging efficiency can be improved, and the occurrence of mistakes is greatly reduced compared to the past. And stable game control can be performed. In addition, since specific registers are only allowed to set data with direct values, they are used more frequently than other registers that allow both data sets via registers and data sets with direct values. Becomes lower. For this reason, it may be possible to improve the efficiency of coding review work and debugging (for example, T register tracing).

  The present invention is not characterized by “not using a load instruction at the time of programming”, but “based on the fact that the CPU receives a load instruction among the functions for setting a value in a specific register. Since it only has a function to set a value by a direct value as it is performed ", it is characterized by" only a load instruction that sets a value by a direct value can be used for a specific register during programming " .

  In other words, the present invention has a function that the CPU itself executes (understands) such a load instruction even when an attempt is made to use a load instruction for setting a value to a specific register via another register during programming. Therefore, normally, in the process of assembling the assembler language into a machine language, it is excluded as an instruction that cannot be executed (understood) by the CPU and cannot be converted into a machine language. For this reason, a programmer cannot use a load instruction that sets a value in a specific register via another register during programming. In this specification, an example is shown in which programming is performed using assembly language. However, the situation is the same when programming is performed using machine language. Even if it is desired to use a load instruction for setting a value via another register, the instruction cannot be used unless the CPU can execute (understand) it.

  For these reasons, in the present invention, the above-described remarkable effects can be obtained. However, in the prior art, the load instruction is not limited as in the present invention. A load instruction that sets a value via another register can be freely used. “Whether or not to use a load instruction during programming (whether or not to use it is a matter that can be appropriately selected by those skilled in the art based on the contents of the program, etc.”) Although it is possible to appropriately select whether or not to use a load instruction for setting a value via another register, the conventional technique has an option that the instruction can be used. An effect equivalent to the effect cannot be obtained with certainty.

  Further, even if a rule that the instruction is not used in programming is formulated, whether or not to follow the rule depends on the programmer (human), and other than the specific register as in the present invention. The use of a load instruction that sets a value via the register of 100% is not completely eliminated.

  Furthermore, in an environment where a load instruction for setting a value to a specific register via another register can be used freely, it is usually an instruction that can be executed (understood) by the CPU in the process of assembling the assembler language into a machine language. The instruction can be converted into machine language. For this reason, in the prior art, even if a programmer is careful not to use a load instruction that sets a value to a specific register via another register during programming, the assembler is optimized. The possibility of being assembled into a machine language corresponding to the instruction cannot be completely excluded.

  The second register includes one specific register (for example, A register) and a plurality of non-specific registers (for example, F register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, and the like) And the CPU transfers the data to the non-specific register via the first register (for example, “LD B, T” instruction, T register in the B register) May be provided with an instruction (for example, “LD A, T” instruction) for transferring data to the specific register via the first register.

  With such a configuration, the first register can be made difficult to use compared to other registers, so that the value of the first register cannot be changed carelessly, resulting in a coding error. There are cases where it can be reduced.

  The first register and the second register are 8-bit registers capable of storing 8-bit values, and the non-specific register is a register capable of 16-bit operations in combination with other registers. A register that can form a combination (for example, a BC register, a DE register, and an HL register), but the first register cannot be combined with other registers to form a combination of registers that can perform the 16-bit operation. It may be a simple register.

  With such a configuration, the first register can be made difficult to use compared to other registers, so that the value of the first register cannot be changed carelessly, resulting in a coding error. There are cases where it can be reduced. Note that the T register cannot be combined with any other register to allow a 16-bit operation, but as described above, the “PUSH TI” instruction or the “POP TI” instruction uses I Along with the register, it is possible to save and restore a 16-bit length. In other words, the T register is a register that cannot be used as an operand of an operation instruction but can be used as an operand of a transfer instruction.

  In addition, a storage unit that stores data used for the game control is provided, and the storage unit stores a ROM (for example, ROM 306 (or ROM 1306)) that stores a program executed by the CPU, and the CPU performs the game control. RAM (for example, RAM 308 (or RAM 1308)) that can temporarily store data used at the time, and the CPU before the game control is started (for example, “after power-on, the main control unit 300 of Before the CPU 304 executes the user program (control program) ”,“ After the system reset, before the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 executes the user program (control program) ”,“ Immediately after shifting to the security mode ”,“ Security check ” Immediately after the result is OK and the mode is changed to the user mode, During a period of initialization processing due to a stem reset, etc.), a specific value (for example, F0H) indicating the upper address of the top address of the RAM is stored in the first register (regardless of the program). It may be set.

  With such a configuration, when reading / writing RAM data, only the lower address of the RAM needs to be specified by fixing the first register as a value indicating the upper address of the RAM, and the amount of program code As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of coding errors as a result of not being able to change the value of the first register inadvertently.

  A gaming machine comprising a microcomputer having a CPU, a ROM storing a gaming control program, and a RAM capable of temporarily storing data, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine. The CPU has at least a specific register, and the upper byte of the start address of the RAM is larger than the upper byte of the start address of the ROM, and the CPU has a function of setting a value in the specific register. Of these, only the function of setting a value by a direct value is performed based on receiving the load instruction, and the CPU has the load instruction among the functions of setting a value in the specific register. As other than what is performed based on the reception of the initial value, the same value as the upper byte of the start address of the RAM Set Te functions may be at least a.

  With such a configuration, by setting a value indicating the upper address of the RAM as the initial value of the specific register, when reading or writing RAM data, only the lower address of the RAM needs to be specified. Reduction of the amount and improvement of the processing speed can be realized. In addition, since only the direct value by the load instruction can be set in the specific register other than the initial value, the value of the specific register cannot be changed carelessly. The occurrence of data read / write errors and the like can be avoided, and stable game control can be performed. In addition, since it is frequently used for computation, it is possible to prevent an incorrect value from being set in a specific register via a register in which an unintended computation result is stored. Since the same value is set in a specific register, if the RAM is accessed using a specific register after the power is turned on, the specific register is not operated without setting the value in the specific register. Can be used to access the RAM, and with regard to the “accessing the RAM”, it is possible to prevent a problem that the information of an unintended address is accessed because the value of a specific register is incorrect. The effect can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the game cannot be controlled as desired simply by rewriting the program, there are cases where illegal acts caused by rewriting the program can be effectively prevented. In particular, a user mode in which a user program set by a CPU user can be executed and a non-user mode in which the user program cannot be executed (for example, a security mode) are provided, and the specific value is set in the non-user mode. If the first register is set, it may be possible to prevent an illegal act in which a specific value is altered to another value or a specific value is read out.

  The RAM includes a first area (for example, a work area of F000H to F3FFH (or an area accessible by an I / O mapped I / O method)) and a second area (for example, a stack area of 7FE0H to 7FFFH ( Alternatively, the area may be accessed by a memory mapped I / O method)), and the specific value may be a value indicating an upper address (F0H) of the first area.

  With such a configuration, when reading and writing data in the first area of the RAM, the first register is fixed as a value indicating the upper address of the first area of the RAM, so that the first area of the RAM is It is only necessary to specify the lower address, so that the amount of program code can be reduced and the processing speed can be improved, and the value of the first register cannot be changed carelessly. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of. In addition, by fixing the upper address of the first area, there is a case where it is possible to prevent a mistake that an intention to read / write the first area erroneously reads / writes the second area.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment stores a CPU (for example, the CPU 304 (or CPU 1304) that performs game control centering on the progress of the game and data used for the game control. And a memory for storing a program executed by the CPU (for example, ROM 306 (or ROM 1306)) and data used when the CPU performs the game control. RAM (for example, RAM 308 (or RAM 1308)) at least, and the CPU before the game control is started (for example, “after power-on, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is a user program). (Before executing (control program) "," After system reset, main controller 30 Before the CPU 304 executes the user program (control program), “immediately after shifting to the security mode”, “immediately after shifting to the user mode with the result of the security check being OK”, “initialization processing by system reset” During a period, etc.), a specific value (for example, F0H) indicating the upper address of the top address of the RAM is set to a specific register (for example, the CPU 304 separate from the ROM 306). This is a gaming machine characterized in that it is set in a T register built in.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, when reading / writing data in the RAM, by fixing the specific register as a value indicating the upper address of the RAM, only the lower address of the RAM is obtained. It is only necessary to specify this, and it is possible to reduce the amount of program code and increase the processing speed, as well as reduce the occurrence of coding errors as a result of not being able to change the value of a specific register carelessly. May be possible.

  The pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment is a game machine including a microcomputer that includes a CPU, a ROM that stores a game control program, and a RAM that can temporarily store data. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU includes at least a specific register, and the upper byte of the top address of the RAM is larger than the upper byte of the top address of the ROM. The gaming machine is characterized in that the same value as the upper byte of the head address of the RAM is set in the specific register as an initial value regardless of the control program.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to describe the upper byte of the RAM address in the game control program, even if the program is illegally analyzed by an unauthorized person. It is difficult to specify the address of the RAM, and the game cannot be controlled as desired simply by rewriting the game control program, so that illegal acts caused by rewriting the game control program can be effectively prevented. In addition, when reading and writing data in the RAM, it is sufficient to specify only the lower address of the RAM by fixing the specific register as a value indicating the upper address of the RAM, thereby reducing the amount of program code and improving the processing speed. In addition to being able to be realized, the value of the specific register cannot be changed carelessly, and as a result, the occurrence of coding errors can be reduced.

  In addition, since the game cannot be controlled as desired simply by rewriting the program, there are cases where illegal acts caused by rewriting the program can be effectively prevented. In particular, a user mode in which a user program set by a CPU user can be executed and a non-user mode in which the user program cannot be executed (for example, a security mode) are provided, and the specific value is set in the non-user mode. If the first register is set, it may be possible to prevent an illegal act in which a specific value is altered to another value or a specific value is read out.

  The CPU further includes non-specific registers (for example, an A register, an F register, a B register, a C register, a D register, an E register, an H register, an L register, and a back register thereof), and the specific register Are not provided with an instruction for transferring data via the non-specific register (eg, an instruction for transferring data via the A register to the T register, such as an “LD T, A” instruction). May be provided with an instruction (for example, an “LD T, F0H” instruction) for setting data.

  With such a configuration, since data is transferred to a specific register as a direct value, it may be easy to check the set data. In addition, since it is configured so that data cannot be transferred to a specific register via another register, the value of the specific register cannot be inadvertently changed, thereby reducing the occurrence of coding errors. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, because specific registers are only allowed to transfer data by direct data, they are used more frequently than other registers that allow both data transfer through registers and direct data transfer. Becomes lower. For this reason, it is possible to increase the efficiency of coding review work and debugging (for example, T register tracing).

  The CPU may be configured to transfer the specific value to the specific register based on an instruction to transfer data to the specific register as a direct value.

  With such a configuration, when the general-purpose register becomes empty due to loop processing or the like, the specific register is temporarily used and then returned to the initial value, so that convenience can be improved.

  Further, the CPU is configured to be able to transfer the specific value to the specific register (for example, transfer by a “POP TI” instruction) based on an instruction to transfer data from the RAM to the specific register. May be.

  With such a configuration, the specific register can be used for specific processing, and the convenience of the specific register can be improved in some cases.

  The RAM includes a first area (for example, a work area of F000H to F3FFH (or an area accessible by an I / O mapped I / O method)) and a second area (for example, a stack area of 7FE0H to 7FFFH ( Alternatively, the area may be accessed by a memory mapped I / O method)), and the specific value may be a value indicating an upper address (F0H) of the first area.

  With such a configuration, when reading and writing data in the first area of the RAM, the specific register is fixed as a value indicating the upper address of the first area of the RAM, thereby lowering the lower address of the first area of the RAM. It is possible to reduce the amount of program code and increase the processing speed, as well as reduce the occurrence of coding errors as a result of the inadvertent change of specific register values. There is a case that can be made. In addition, by fixing the upper address of the first area, there is a case where it is possible to prevent a mistake that an intention to read / write the first area erroneously reads / writes the second area.

  In addition, the CPU can execute an interrupt process (for example, main control unit main process) that is executed based on a predetermined interrupt condition being satisfied, and executes the first interrupt process after the power is turned on. Before that, a process for determining whether the specific value is set in the specific register (for example, a T-registration check process) may be executed. In addition, examples of “before executing the first interrupt process after turning on the power” include other “after power on and before confirming the low voltage state in step S105 of the main control unit main process”, “ For example, after power-on, before confirming whether or not to return to the state before power interruption in step S109 of the main control unit main process, or “before power-on, before confirming the rise of the first sub-control unit”. it can. Further, depending on the result of the “determination process”, a specific value may be set in the specific register as shown in FIG. 11 or error processing may be executed as shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to determine whether or not the game machine is operating normally by checking the value of the specific register.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has a plurality of types of data (for example, non-use data and data) including control program data in storage areas (for example, ROM areas) indicated by a plurality of addresses. A plurality of ROMs (for example, ROM 306) storing reference data) and interrupt processing (for example, main control unit timer interrupt processing) executed at predetermined intervals based on the control program data stored in the ROM A CPU (for example, a CPU 304) that executes a type of game control process, and the ROM is one or a plurality of the control program data, each of which corresponds to a plurality of types of commands executed by the CPU (Opcode) and one or more of the control program data, the CPU Specific identification information (for example, a subroutine) that stores supplementary data (operands) necessary for executing the instruction, and is capable of identifying a specific address (for example, the head address of the subroutine). First address data (for example, m) indicating the first identification information that is a part of the first address of information in binary format) and other data different from the first address data (for example, the EXESUB instruction) Specific instruction data (for example, EXESUB instruction), for example, which causes the CPU to read the data stored in the storage area indicated by the specific address. , The instruction data of the EXESUB instruction) and the supplementary data, the information obtained by removing the first identification information from the specific identification information Specific supplementary data that is composed of second address data (for example, n) indicating second identification information that is at least a part of the CPU and that is necessary for the CPU to execute the specific instruction. (For example, in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the timer interrupt processing area in the ROM control area (the storage area indicated by the address corresponding to the timer interrupt processing)) It is a game stand characterized by being.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, the first address data m included in the instruction data is defined as upper address data, thereby grouping the instruction data into the address area. In some cases, coding errors can be suppressed. In addition, because the instruction data includes data that forms part of the top address of the subroutine to be called, even if the destination address data is incorrect, the erroneous data is If included in the instruction data, the execution of the control program may be stopped, so that a coding error may be suppressed. In addition, a control instruction (for example, a CALL instruction) for calling a conventional subroutine can be compressed, and conventional control program data stored in the storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area can be compressed. . In addition, due to the compression of the control program, there are cases where the processing speed of the control program for calling a subroutine can be improved (the number of states can be reduced) as compared with the conventional case (for example, CALL instruction).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of data including control program data and reference data referred to based on the control program data in a storage area indicated by each of a plurality of addresses. And a CPU for executing a plurality of types of game control processes including an interrupt process executed at predetermined intervals based on the control program data and the reference data stored in the ROM, The ROM is one or a plurality of the control program data, the command data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU, and the one or a plurality of the control program data, the CPU And supplementary data necessary for executing A storage area composed of first address data indicating first identification information that is part of specific identification information enabling identification of an address and different data different from the first address data, and indicated by the specific address Specific instruction data corresponding to a specific instruction for causing the CPU to read the data stored in the CPU and the supplementary data, the second identification information which is information obtained by removing the first identification information from the specific identification information And the specific supplementary data necessary for the CPU to execute the specific instruction is stored so as to correspond to the instruction executed in the interrupt processing, and All the control program data is stored in a specific storage area that can be read by the CPU by execution, and the specific record in which all the control program data is stored is stored. In different storage area from the region, a gaming table, characterized in that stores the reference data.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, when the CPU executes a specific command, the reference data is erroneously read, and an unintended game control process is performed based on the reference data. Such a situation can be prevented and game control can be stabilized. Further, since the specific instruction is configured to be able to read all the control program data stored in the specific storage area, the arrangement (storage location) of the call source and the call destination in the control program data may be limited. Therefore, the control program can be designed with a degree of freedom. In the field of gaming machines, a plurality of types of gaming machines share control program data (for example, frequently used subroutines), while reference data (for example, lottery values) according to the specifications and performance of each gaming machine. Or production data) is generally different, and is particularly suitable for a game machine.

  A ROM storing a plurality of types of data including control program data and reference data referred to based on the control program data in a storage area indicated by each of a plurality of addresses; and the control program data stored in the ROM And a CPU that executes a plurality of types of game control processes including an interrupt process that is executed at predetermined intervals based on the reference data, and the ROM is one or a plurality of the control program data, Storing instruction data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU, and one or a plurality of the control program data, which is supplementary data necessary for the CPU to execute the instructions; Indicates first identification information that is part of specific identification information that is instruction data and enables identification of a specific address. Specific instruction data corresponding to a specific instruction that is constituted by first address data and different data different from the first address data, and causes the CPU to read data stored in the storage area indicated by the specific address; The supplementary data is composed of second address data indicating second identification information, which is information obtained by removing the first identification information from the specific identification information, and the CPU executes the specific instruction. Specific supplementary data necessary for the interrupt processing is stored so as to correspond to the instruction executed in the interrupt processing, and all the control program data is stored in a specific storage area readable by the CPU by the execution of the specific instruction. The reference data may be stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area in which all control program data is stored.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, when the CPU executes a specific command, the reference data is erroneously read and an unintended game control process is performed based on the reference data. And stabilization of game control can be achieved. Further, since the specific instruction is configured to be able to read all the control program data stored in the specific storage area, the arrangement (storage location) of the call source and the call destination in the control program data may be limited. Therefore, the control program can be designed with a degree of freedom. In the field of gaming machines, a plurality of types of gaming machines share control program data (for example, frequently used subroutines), while reference data (for example, lottery values) according to the specifications and performance of each gaming machine. Or production data) is generally different, and is particularly suitable for a game machine.

  Further, the ROM includes the first identification information (for example, mn) that makes it possible to identify the specific address by defining at least the order of the first identification information and the second identification information. The first instruction data indicating one identification information and the specific command data composed of the separate data, and the second address data indicating the second identification information among the specific identification information. The specific supplementary data may be stored so as to correspond to an instruction executed in the interrupt process.

  With such a configuration, since the instruction data is configured to include a part of the head address of the subroutine to be called, even if the destination address data is wrong, If erroneous data is included in the instruction data, the execution of the control program is stopped, so that coding errors may be suppressed.

  The ROM includes at least first configuration data (for example, bit 7 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction) that is a part of the first address data, and second configuration data that is at least a part of the other data. (For example, bits 6 to 3 of the instruction data of the EXEBUS instruction), third configuration data obtained by removing the first configuration data from the first address data (for example, bits 2 to 0 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction) The specific instruction data configured in this order may be stored so as to correspond to the instruction executed in the interrupt processing.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to finely assign the instruction data to a free area of the instruction data table while grouping the instruction data. Therefore, limited hardware resources (for example, patterns that can be defined by 1 byte (256 patterns)) can be used effectively and stored in the ROM storage area corresponding to the ROM control area by compression of instruction data The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  Further, the third configuration data (for example, bits 2 to 0 of the instruction data of the EXEBUS instruction) has a larger data capacity than the first configuration data (for example, bit 7 of the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction). Alternatively, the specific instruction data configured such that the first configuration data has a data capacity larger than that of the third configuration data (for example, 1 bit compared to 3 bits) is generated by the interrupt processing. You may memorize | store corresponding to the command performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to finely assign the instruction data to a free area of the instruction data table while grouping the instruction data. Therefore, limited hardware resources (for example, patterns that can be defined by 1 byte (256 patterns)) can be used effectively and stored in the ROM storage area corresponding to the ROM control area by compression of instruction data The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  The ROM stores all the control program data in a specific storage area (for example, 0000H to 0FFFH or 0000H to 11FFH) in which data that can be read by the CPU by execution of the specific instruction is stored. A storage area (for example, a storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to a non-use area) excluding a control storage area (for example, a storage area of the ROM 306 corresponding to the ROM control area) in which the control program data is stored from the specific storage area ) May be stored non-use data (for example, 00H) that is not used for execution of the game control process.

  With such a configuration, the CPU 304 does not directly read data (for example, reference data or management data) excluding non-use data and control program data as instruction data. It may be possible to prevent operation.

  The ROM stores a plurality of types of data represented by a specific data length (for example, 1 byte (8 bits)) in a storage area indicated by each of a plurality of addresses. A plurality of types of game control processes including the interrupt process are executed by reading the data stored in the storage area indicated by one address stored in the ROM for each process, and the ROM further includes: The specific identification information that can identify the specific address represented by a first data length (for example, 2 bytes (16 bits)) that is an integer multiple of 2 or more of the specific data length The specific instruction data composed of the first address data indicating the first identification information and the separate data, and data that is an integer multiple of the specific data length than the first data length The specific supplementary data composed of the second address data expressed by a second data length (for example, 1 byte (8 bits)) that is short only so as to correspond to the instruction executed in the interrupt processing May be stored.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to finely assign the instruction data to a free area of the instruction data table while grouping the instruction data. Therefore, limited hardware resources (for example, patterns that can be defined by 1 byte (256 patterns)) can be used effectively and stored in the ROM storage area corresponding to the ROM control area by compression of instruction data The conventional control program data can be compressed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 110) according to the present embodiment has a ROM (eg, ROM 306) storing a control program composed of a plurality of control program data, and game control based on the control program. And the ROM executes first data (for example, bit 6 and bit 7 in the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn)) among the plurality of control program data. , Second data (for example, bit 5 (α) in the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBMn)), third data (for example, bits 3 and 4 in the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn)), 4 data (for example, the EXESUB instruction (EX Bit 0 (δ), bit 1 (γ), bit 2 (β)) in the instruction data of SUBmn), and fifth data (for example, supplementary data (n) in the instruction data of the EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn)) The instruction data of specific control program data (EXESUB instruction (EXESUBmn)) configured to include at least the second data, the third data, and the fourth data are arranged in order (for example, the address is young) The CPU stores the first instruction (for example, the first address of the subroutine) specified by using the first and third data when the specific control program data is read. And a second instruction (for example, specified by using the second data, the fourth data, and the fifth data) For example, an instruction for specifying the start address of a subroutine to be called) and a specific instruction (for example, EXESUB instruction) specified in (1) during interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) executed at a predetermined cycle. It can be said that it is a game stand.

  The ROM includes at least one of the first data and the second data, the second data and the third data, and the third data and the fourth data. The specific control program data configured to include another data between any one of the data may be stored. However, the ROM stores the first data, the second data, and the data. If the specific control program data composed only of the third data and the fourth data is stored, the machine language after assembly can be checked more easily and coding errors can be suppressed. it can.

  The data length of the first data, the second data, the third data, and the fourth data is the same as the data length of the fourth data (for example, 1 byte ( (8 bits) long). Furthermore, the data length of the data read by the CPU at the same time may be the same as the data length of the fourth data.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment stores storage means (for example, ROM 306, RAM 308 (or ROM 1306, RAM 1308)) for storing program data and temporary data, and storage in the storage means. A main control unit (for example, main control unit 300 (or main control unit 1300)) that performs game control centered on the progress of the game using the stored data, and a game based on the game control of the main control unit A sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 1500)) that performs the production control. The main control unit includes a plurality of registers (for example, an A register, an F register, a B register, etc.) each having a first bit length (for example, 8 bit length). Register, D register, E register, H register, L register, T register), and can calculate a second bit length (for example, 16-bit length) that is double the first bit length. Indicated by a value stored in a first register and a second register (for example, an H register and an L register) of the plurality of registers (for example, a BC register, a DE register, and an HL register). And a first value (for example, AEH) stored in a first address (for example, 1750H) in the storage means and a second address (for example, 1751H) continuous with the first address, and a second The value (for example, 19) is assigned to the third register (for example, C register) and the fourth register (for example, A register) of the plurality of registers. A predetermined instruction (for example, an “INCENSOU AC, (HL)” instruction) to be transferred, and the predetermined instruction is executed in the game control (for example, a special symbol variation time lottery process), and the third register And the fourth register is a gaming machine characterized by being different from a combination of registers capable of calculating the second bit length (BC register, DE register, HL register). The “second address continuous with the first address” is not limited to an address larger than the first address, and may be an address smaller than the first address. In the above example, the first address is 1750H. The second address may be 174FH.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, two data stored in consecutively arranged addresses are converted into two types of registers that do not constitute a register pair by one instruction. Since the program capacity can be stored, the capacity of the program can be reduced, the capacity can be allocated to the program for improving the game performance, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. Further, there are cases where the processing time can be shortened and stable game control can be performed. In addition, by reducing the program capacity, it becomes easier to see the program, and in some cases, coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. In addition, since the third register and the fourth register are not a register pair, a program can be created with care when performing 16-bit arithmetic processing, and the occurrence of coding errors and bugs may be suppressed. .

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes at least first to fourth registers, and a CPU that can execute processing using a register pair including an upper register and a lower register, A gaming machine comprising a microcomputer storing a ROM for storing a gaming control program, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU receives a first instruction and a second instruction. A plurality of instructions can be executed, and a combination of at least two of the first register and the second register is a predetermined register pair of the register pair, and the third register and the second register At least one of the fourth registers is the upper register, and is based on execution of the first instruction. A first value stored in an area indicated by a first address indicated by a value stored in the predetermined register pair is set in the fourth register, and the second value is continuous with the first address. The second value stored in the area indicated by the address of the second address is set in the third register, and the value of the predetermined register pair becomes a value indicating an address continuous with the second address, Based on the execution of the instruction, the second value stored in the area indicated by the second address continuous with the first address indicated by the value stored in the predetermined register pair is the fourth value. A third value stored in a region indicated by a third address that is set in the register and indicated by the third address that is continuous with the second address is set in the third register, and a value of the predetermined register pair is set in the third register Indicates address The CPU can set the value stored in the ROM to a combination of two registers of the third register and the fourth register different from the register pair with one instruction. The predetermined function for changing the value of the predetermined register pair is based on receiving the first function and the second instruction for setting a value based on receiving the first instruction. It is a gaming machine having only two of the second functions for setting values.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, the function of setting values to two combinations of the third register and the fourth register, which are less versatile than the register pair, is limited by one instruction. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to perform an unauthorized act of illegally altering a value related to a player's profit. In addition, the first command and the second command can be properly used according to the preceding and subsequent processing, and the capacity of the game control program can be reduced. In addition, the capacity of the game control program can be reduced as compared with the case where the first instruction and the second instruction are configured by conventional instructions, and capacity can be allocated to a program for improving game play. Can enhance the interest of Further, since the third register and the fourth register are less versatile than the register pair, the program can be created with care, and coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. In addition, interrupt processing may occur during execution of an instruction, and the value of a register during instruction execution may be rewritten to an unintended value due to interrupt processing, or execution of the instruction may be hindered and processing may be delayed. In some cases, stable game control can be performed.

  In addition, a microcomputer including at least first to fourth registers, a CPU capable of executing processing using a register pair including an upper register and a lower register, and a ROM storing a game control program is provided. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU can execute a plurality of instructions including a first instruction and a second instruction, and at least the first register And the combination of the two registers of the second register is a predetermined register pair of the register pair, and at least one of the third register and the fourth register is the upper register, Based on the execution of the first instruction, the first instruction indicated by the value stored in the predetermined register pair. The first value stored in the area indicated by the address is set in the fourth register, and the second value stored in the area indicated by the second address that is continuous with the first address is the third value. Is set in a register, and the value of the predetermined register pair becomes a value indicating an address continuous with the second address, and is stored in the predetermined register pair based on the execution of the second instruction. The second value stored in the area indicated by the second address that is continuous with the first address indicated by the value is set in the fourth register, and the third address that is continuous with the second address is The third value stored in the area indicated is set in the third register, the value of the predetermined register pair becomes the value indicating the third address, and the CPU is different from the register pair. Third register A value stored in the ROM can be set to a combination of two registers of the fourth register with one instruction, and a predetermined function for changing the value of the predetermined register pair includes the first register The CPU has at least two of a first function for setting a value based on receiving one command and a second function for setting a value based on receiving the second command; The CPU has at least a specific register, and among the functions for setting a value in the specific register, the CPU has only a function for setting a value by a direct value as a function that is performed based on receiving a load instruction. It may be.

  With such a configuration, the function for setting a value to one combination of the third register and the fourth register, which is less versatile than the register pair, is limited. It is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to perform an unauthorized act of tampering. In addition, the first command and the second command can be properly used according to the preceding and subsequent processing, and the capacity of the game control program can be reduced. In addition, the capacity of the game control program can be reduced as compared with the case where the first instruction and the second instruction are configured by conventional instructions, and capacity can be allocated to a program for improving game play. Can enhance the interest of Further, since the third register and the fourth register are less versatile than the register pair, the program can be created with care, and coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. In addition, interrupt processing may occur during execution of an instruction, and the value of a register during instruction execution may be rewritten to an unintended value due to interrupt processing, or execution of the instruction may be hindered and processing may be delayed. And stable game control can be performed.

  Further, at least one of the third register and the fourth register may constitute a combination of registers capable of calculating the second bit length (for example, the B register has a 16-bit length). A BC register, which is a register pair that can be operated, is configured).

  With this configuration, the value of one register of a register pair that performs 16-bit arithmetic can be fixed, and the value of one register set before a predetermined instruction can be saved without saving the value of one register. In some cases, the program capacity can be reduced. Also, when performing 16-bit arithmetic processing, a program can be created with care, and in some cases, coding errors and bugs can be suppressed.

  Further, at least one of the third register and the fourth register may be an upper register of a combination of registers capable of calculating the second bit length (for example, the B register is a 16-bit register). (It is a high-order register of the BC register, which is a register pair capable of long operations).

  With such a configuration, the value of the upper 8 bits of the register pair that performs 16-bit arithmetic can be changed, and the upper part of the address indicated by the register pair can be changed and used in processing after a predetermined instruction. May be possible. For example, each of the third register and the fourth register can be used for different processing (for example, one is used by the INCENSOU instruction and the other is used as a counter for counting the number of loop processes). It is possible to effectively use the limited registers. Also, when performing 16-bit arithmetic processing, a program can be created with care, and in some cases, coding errors and bugs can be suppressed.

  The predetermined instruction may include a process of adding a predetermined value to a value of a lower register of the first register and the second register (for example, a process of adding 2 to the HL register). .

  With such a configuration, the following processing can be performed in a state in which the value of an address obtained by adding a predetermined value from a predetermined address is set in a register after the completion of the predetermined instruction. In some cases, the program capacity can be reduced compared to a program that is executed a predetermined number of times.

  The first address is an address next to an address (for example, 174FH) (for example, 174FH) indicated by values stored in the first register and the second register before the predetermined instruction is executed. 1750H).

  With such a configuration, the address can be specified first in the repetition process, and when the repetition process is finished, the address value obtained by adding a predetermined value from the address before the predetermined instruction is set in the register. The following processing can be performed in this state. In particular, when using a data table in which two types of data are alternately stored, desired data can be quickly read from the data table.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment stores storage means (for example, ROM 306, RAM 308 (or ROM 1306, RAM 1308)) for storing program data and temporary data, and storage in the storage means. A main control unit (for example, main control unit 300 (or main control unit 1300)) that performs game control centered on the progress of the game using the stored data, and a game based on the game control of the main control unit A sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 1500)) that performs the production control. The main control unit includes a first register (for example, C register) capable of storing a value of a first bit length (for example, 8-bit length) and the first A plurality of registers (for example, BC register, DE register, HL) including a second register (for example, HL register) capable of storing a value of a second bit length (for example, 16-bit length) that is an integral multiple of the bit length A predetermined instruction (for example, “ADDTWOONE HL, C” instruction) that adds the value of the first register to the value of the second register and stores the value in the second register, The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined command is executed in the game control (for example, special symbol variation time lottery processing). The second register only needs to be able to store a value of the second bit length that is an integral multiple of the first bit length. For example, when the bit length of the first register is 4 bits, the second register is 4 bits. May be a register whose bit length is a multiple of (4, 8, 12,...), And when the bit length of the first register is 16 bits, a multiple of 16 (16, 32, 64,...) A register may be used.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to carry out a carry process separately, so that the program capacity can be reduced and a capacity is allocated to a program for improving game playability. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the processing time can be shortened and stable game control can be performed. In addition, by reducing the program capacity, it becomes easier to see the program, and in some cases, coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. Furthermore, since addition operations between registers having different bit lengths can be performed, for example, an addition operation that has conventionally been performed using two 16-bit register pairs can be performed with a 16-bit register pair and an 8-bit register. In some cases, a long register can be used, and a limited number of registers can be used effectively.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a CPU including at least first to third registers capable of storing an 8-bit value, and the CPU has a 16-bit value. At least a fourth register, and the CPU is capable of executing a process using a register pair including the first register and the second register, and includes a microcomputer incorporating the CPU. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU adds the value of the third register to the value of the fourth register and adds the value to the fourth register. A first instruction capable of setting a result is executable, wherein the first instruction adds the value of the third register to the value of the register pair; The CPU can set the addition result to the register pair, and the CPU can subtract the value of the third register from the value of the register pair and set the subtraction result to the register pair. The function of adding / subtracting the 8-bit value to / from the 16-bit register pair in the CPU is realized by both the first instruction and the second instruction. The function of adding / subtracting the value of the 8-bit length to / from the fourth register of the 16-bit length in the CPU is realized only by the first instruction.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, values of registers having different bit lengths can be added and subtracted. For example, conventionally, two 16-bit register pairs are used. In some cases, the addition and subtraction performed can be performed with a 16-bit register pair and an 8-bit register, and a limited number of registers can be used effectively. In addition, since addition / subtraction is performed between register values, the processing time for addition / subtraction can be shortened compared to the case of using RAM or the like, and stable game control can be performed. In addition, by configuring such that addition / subtraction using the fourth register can be executed only by the first instruction, a fraudulent act of illegally tampering with the value related to the player's profit (for example, a numerical value advantageous to a register pair It is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to perform an act of improperly embedding an instruction to add the. In addition, since the capacity of the game control program can be reduced compared to the case where the first instruction and the second instruction are configured with conventional instructions, capacity can be allocated to a program for improving game play, There are cases where the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, a microcomputer including at least first to fourth registers, a CPU capable of executing processing using a register pair including an upper register and a lower register, and a ROM storing a game control program is provided. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU can execute a plurality of instructions including a first instruction and a second instruction, and at least the first register And the combination of the two registers of the second register is a predetermined register pair of the register pair, and at least one of the third register and the fourth register is the upper register, Based on the execution of the first instruction, the first instruction indicated by the value stored in the predetermined register pair. The first value stored in the area indicated by the address is set in the fourth register, and the second value stored in the area indicated by the second address that is continuous with the first address is the third value. Is set in a register, and the value of the predetermined register pair becomes a value indicating an address continuous with the second address, and is stored in the predetermined register pair based on the execution of the second instruction. The second value stored in the area indicated by the second address that is continuous with the first address indicated by the value is set in the fourth register, and the third address that is continuous with the second address is The third value stored in the area indicated is set in the third register, the value of the predetermined register pair becomes the value indicating the third address, and the CPU is different from the register pair. Third register A value stored in the ROM can be set to a combination of two registers of the fourth register with one instruction, and a predetermined function for changing the value of the predetermined register pair includes the first register The CPU has at least two of a first function for setting a value based on receiving one command and a second function for setting a value based on receiving the second command; The CPU has at least a specific register, and among the functions for setting a value in the specific register, the CPU has only a function for setting a value by a direct value as a function that is performed based on receiving a load instruction. It may be.

  With such a configuration, the function for setting a value to one combination of the third register and the fourth register, which is less versatile than the register pair, is limited. It is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to perform an unauthorized act of tampering. In addition, the first command and the second command can be properly used according to the preceding and subsequent processing, and the capacity of the game control program can be reduced. In addition, the capacity of the game control program can be reduced as compared with the case where the first instruction and the second instruction are configured by conventional instructions, and capacity can be allocated to a program for improving game play. Can enhance the interest of Further, since the third register and the fourth register are less versatile than the register pair, the program can be created with care, and coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. In addition, interrupt processing may occur during execution of an instruction, and the value of a register during instruction execution may be rewritten to an unintended value due to interrupt processing, or execution of the instruction may be hindered and processing may be delayed. And stable game control can be performed.

  In addition, the first register (for example, the C register) is capable of calculating a second bit length.

It may be a lower register of a combination of registers (for example, BC register).

  With such a configuration, the value of the upper 8 bits of the register pair can be fixed, and a program can be created with care when performing 16-bit arithmetic processing, which can lead to coding errors and bugs. In some cases, it can be suppressed. In addition, each of the upper register and the lower register of the register pair can be used for different processing (for example, one is used by the ADDTWOONE instruction and the other is used as a counter for counting the number of loop processes). Limited registers can be used effectively.

  In addition, the main control unit includes a first value and a second value stored at two consecutive addresses based on a predetermined address indicated by a value stored in the second register (for example, an HL register). Are transferred to the first register (for example, C register) and the third register (for example, B register) of the plurality of registers, respectively, for example, a predetermined second instruction (for example, “INCTENSOU BC, (HL ) "Instruction), and after executing the predetermined second instruction, the predetermined instruction may be executed.

  With such a configuration, one of the values stored in two consecutive addresses is added to the first register, and a value indicating an address related to a predetermined address is set in the first register. The following processing can be performed, and the program capacity may be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit executes a predetermined determination process (for example, as shown in steps S <b> 1110 to S <b> 1111) from a B register (third register) after executing the predetermined second instruction. The value stored in the predetermined storage area) is subtracted to determine whether or not carry occurs, and the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined value (for example, carry occurs) The predetermined command may be performed.

  With such a configuration, when the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined value, the next process can be performed in a state where a value indicating an address related to the predetermined address is set in the first register, The program capacity may be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit may execute the predetermined second instruction and the predetermined determination process again after executing the predetermined instruction (for example, executing the INCENSOOU instruction in step S1109, After the ADDTWOONE instruction is executed in step S1112, the INCENSOU instruction is executed again in step S1114, and a specific value is subtracted from the B register in step S1116 to determine whether or not a carry occurs.

  With such a configuration, for example, the second table address of the two-stage lottery can be set, the program of the two-stage lottery can be made easy to see, and the occurrence of coding errors and bugs can be suppressed in some cases. .

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 (or the main control unit 1300)) having a CPU for performing game control, and the main control unit. A sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400, the second sub-control unit 1500)) that controls the production of the game based on the game control The CPU includes a predetermined flag (for example, Z flag, SZ flag), and the main control unit is executed between the first process and the second process. A third process for changing the content of the flag, which was the first content in the first process, to the second content before the start of the second process, The second process is the result of the execution of the third process. A process performed when the result of the second does not refer to the flag changes to the content process (e.g., CPRT instruction, CPJR instruction) is a gaming table which is a.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the relationship between the change in the flag contents and the flow of program execution, making it difficult to analyze the program and altering the illegal program. Can be prevented in advance. For this reason, stable game control can be performed and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  The third process may be a process that does not refer to the flag that is the first content.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the relationship between the change in the flag contents and the flow of program execution, making it difficult to analyze the program and preventing unauthorized alteration of the program in some cases. For this reason, stable game control can be performed and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 (or the main control unit 1300)) having a CPU for performing game control, and the main control unit. A sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400, the second sub-control unit 1500)) that controls the production of the game based on the game control The CPU includes instructions (for example, RES instruction, RST instruction) in which access to a predetermined area of storage means (for example, ROM 306, RAM 308, register, program counter) is restricted. The gaming machine is characterized in that the command is executed in the game control.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, since access to a predetermined area can be prohibited, the predetermined area can be protected, and the content of the predetermined area changes to an unexpected value. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

  The instruction may be an instruction that can access a predetermined specific area among the areas excluding the predetermined area.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to read and write the contents of the specific area at the same time while prohibiting access to the predetermined area, so that the contents of the predetermined area can be protected and the degree of freedom in program design is reduced. There is nothing.

  The CPU may further include an instruction capable of accessing the predetermined area. With such a configuration, it is possible to read and write the contents of the specific area at the same time while prohibiting access to the predetermined area, so that the contents of the predetermined area can be protected and the degree of freedom in program design is reduced. There is nothing.

  Further, if the instruction is configured not to be able to jump to a predetermined area of the storage means, a malicious program is incorporated and jumped to the top address of the user program (the user program is started from the top address and illegally initialized). In some cases, it is possible to prevent such actions.

  The game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine 1100 described above. Therefore, for example, in the above-described embodiment, an example of a little endian CPU is shown, but the present invention can also be applied to a big endian CPU. Further, the present invention is not limited to an 8-bit CPU, and can be applied to a 16-bit CPU, a 32-bit CPU, and the like. Further, the name of the instruction is not limited to the name shown in the above embodiment.

  Moreover, although the example applied to CPU304 of the main control part 300 (or CPU1304 of the main control part 1300) was shown, you may apply to CPU of another control part. Further, the storage means is not limited to ROM and RAM, and other storage means may be applied.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 20002 and a lottery is executed based on the bet 20004 and start operation 20006, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 20008. When the number of coins is added to the number of remaining credits and cashout 20009 is selected, the present invention is applied to a casino machine 20000 that issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits is issued from the receipt issuing machine 20010 May be. Further, it may be suitable for an arrange ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, a mobile phone 20100 having a control unit including the configuration of the present invention is provided, and as shown in FIG. 5C, a control unit including the configuration of the present invention is provided. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 20200 and a home video game machine 20300 provided with a control unit including the configuration of the present invention.

  More specifically, the cellular phone 20100 in FIG. 5B stores an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and the acquired data related to the game. A storage unit, and a control unit including the configuration of the present invention, which controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  In addition, the portable game machine 20200 in FIG. 10C includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and the acquired data related to the game. And a control unit including the configuration of the present invention, which controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, the home video game machine 20300 in FIG. 5C is related to an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and the acquired game. A storage unit that stores data, and a control unit including the configuration of the present invention that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit are provided.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4D, the present invention may be applied to a data server 20400 including a control unit including the configuration of the present invention. In some cases, the program code including the configuration of the present invention is downloaded from the data server 20400 to the home video game machine 20300 shown in FIG. The present invention can also be applied to a game program in which the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.
<Embodiment 3>

Next, a pachinko machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Example of basic circuit configuration of main controller>

  Next, a configuration example of the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the basic circuit 302 when the microprocessor 3000 is used.

  The microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. 75 corresponds to an example of the electric control unit according to the present invention, and has the function of the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG. 4 and the function of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. . 75, parts corresponding to the configuration shown in FIG. 4 are described with the same reference numerals as those used in FIG.

  75 includes a CPU 304, a ROM (built-in ROM) 306, a RAM (built-in RAM) 308, an external bus control circuit 3110, a parallel input port 3102, an address decoding circuit 3103, a timer circuit 311, a counter circuit 312, In addition to the reset control circuit 314, an interrupt control circuit 3100, a clock circuit 3200, and a random number generation circuit 318 are provided, all of which are connected to each other via an internal bus 3300. The built-in ROM 306 corresponds to an example of a storage unit. Note that the external bus control circuit 3110, the parallel input port 3102, and the address decode circuit 3103 correspond to the I / O 310 in FIG.

  Hereinafter, details of each of the above-described units will be described. First, the CPU 304, the ROM 306, and the RAM 308 are as described with reference to FIG. The external bus control circuit 3110 includes an IO request terminal (XIORQ terminal), a memory request terminal (XMREQ terminal), a read signal terminal (XRD terminal), a write signal terminal (XWR terminal), a 16-bit width address output terminal (A0 terminal to A15 terminal) and data input / output terminals (D0 terminal to D7 terminal) which are input / output terminals having an 8-bit width. In this embodiment, the data input / output terminals (D0 terminal to D7 terminal) are used for data output to the drive circuits 324, 326, 330, and 334 shown in FIG. 4 and data input from the peripheral control circuits. It has been. The data input / output destinations of the data input / output terminals (D0 terminal to D7 terminal) are the address signal output from the address output terminals (A0 terminal to A15 terminal) and the chip select signal output from the address decode circuit 3103. Use to switch.

  The parallel input port 3102 has four input terminals (P0 terminal to P3 terminal). These input terminals (P0 terminal to P3 terminal) are connected to the sensor circuit 322 shown in FIG. 4 and are used to input signals from the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, a signal from a sphere detection sensor that detects a ball entering the first special figure start port 230 is input to the P0 terminal, and a ball detection sensor that detects a ball entering the second special figure start port 232 is used. Is input to the P1 terminal, and a signal from a ball detection sensor that detects a ball entering the normal start port 228 is input to the P2 terminal. The signal from the sensor circuit 322 is output to the random number generation circuit 318 as a latch signal for causing the CPU 304 to acquire a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 318. This operation will be described later.

  The address decoding circuit 3103 has 14 output terminals (XCS0 terminal to XCS13 terminal). The output terminals (XCS0 terminal to XCS13 terminal) are connected to a peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000, and data output from the data input / output terminals (D0 terminal to D7 terminal) of the external bus control circuit 3110. Is used to output a chip select signal or the like for switching the transmission destination.

  The timer circuit 311 is used for time measurement. The timer circuit 311 outputs a timeout signal to the counter circuit 312 when the set measurement time has passed. On the other hand, the counter circuit 312 is used for measuring the number of rises (or falls) of various signals. In addition to the system clock of the microprocessor 3000, the counter circuit measures the timeout signal from the timer circuit, the memory read / write signal, the memory request signal, the external input / output signal, the interrupt response signal, and the like. can do.

  The reset control circuit 314 has two terminals, a system reset input terminal (XSRST terminal) and a reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal). This system reset input terminal (XSRST terminal) is connected to the voltage monitoring circuit 338. When a system reset signal (for example, a signal at L level for a predetermined time) is input from the system reset input terminal (XSRST terminal), the reset control circuit 314 outputs the system reset signal to the internal circuit of the microprocessor 3000. At the same time, a reset signal (for example, a rising signal from L level to H level) is output from the reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal) to the peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000. In this case, the microprocessor 3000 executes a process called system reset and initializes each circuit. An example in which this system reset is executed is when the power is turned on. This system reset will be described later.

  Further, the reset control circuit 314 includes a watch dog timer (WDT) 3141 (corresponding to an example of a return instruction unit), and a travel prohibition circuit 3142 outside the designated area. When the WDT 3141 times out or when the CPU 304 refers to an address outside the predetermined range (running outside the designated area), the reset control circuit 314 sends a system reset signal to the internal circuit of the microprocessor 3000 and One of the user reset signals is output. Whether the system reset signal or the user reset signal is output depends on the setting of the program management area (details will be described later) in the ROM 306. A reset signal is output from a reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal) to the peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000.

  The microprocessor 3000 can execute either the system reset or the process called user reset according to the setting. In the user reset, each circuit is initialized as necessary. This user reset will be described later.

  The traveling outside the designated area means that the program is operating unexpectedly. In this case, the CPU 304 operates with a code that should not be handled as a program. Such a situation may be caused by some sort of fraud other than a so-called runaway state due to a program mistake. In this case, normal operation can be restored by the system reset process described above. In addition, when the WDT 3141 times out, there are a runaway state due to a program error, a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a voltage drop, and the like. Also in this case, it is possible to return to normal operation by the above-described system reset processing.

  The interrupt control circuit 3100 generates an interrupt in order to appropriately execute a process according to a change in external input or internal state. This interrupt process includes, for example, a process executed when an external input (signal from a sensor) is received. In this embodiment, even when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a latch signal for acquiring a random number, it can execute interrupt processing (generate an interrupt). The interrupt control circuit 3100 includes an internal information register 3101. The internal information register 3101 includes an abnormality in the cycle of the external clock (count clock) that determines the random number update cycle by the random number generation circuit 318, and update of the random number. In addition, information on the reset factor that occurred immediately before is stored. The internal information register 3101 corresponds to an example of an abnormality detection information holding unit.

  The clock circuit 3200 has an external clock (24 MHz in this example) input from the crystal oscillator 316b shown in FIG. 4 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a system crystal oscillator 316b) via an external clock input terminal (EX terminal). Clock) is divided by a predetermined frequency division ratio (1/2 in this example), and the divided system clock (12 MHz clock in this example) is supplied to each circuit in the microprocessor 3000. The system clock is output to a peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000 via a system clock output terminal (CLKO terminal).

  The random number generation circuit 318 uses the clock signal (count clock) for updating the random number and holds the updated random number in the random number register when the random number latch signal is received. In the present embodiment, the external clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 316a via the external clock input terminal (RCK terminal) is divided by a predetermined frequency division ratio (1/2 in this example) and is used as this count clock. Although it is used, a clock signal in the microprocessor 3000 can also be used. In this case, the crystal oscillator 316a is not necessary. The value held in the random number register can be read and used as a random number. Note that when a random number is read from the random number register, an allowable state in which the random number register is allowed to latch the next random number can be set. Details of the random number generation circuit 318 will be described later.

  Next, the flow of processing when reset is executed will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of reset. This flowchart is a process executed by each circuit of the microprocessor 3000 when a system reset signal is input to the reset control circuit 314, when the WDT 3141 times out, or when traveling outside the designated area is detected. .

  In the first step SH01, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the microprocessor 3000: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the process proceeds to step SH03. This system reset operation corresponds to an example of a return process according to the present invention. When executing a reset operation that is not a system reset operation, that is, a user reset operation, the process proceeds to step SH11.

  In step SH03, a first internal circuit initialization process is executed. This first internal circuit initialization process is performed by the CPU 304 core and built-in registers (timer circuit 311, counter circuit 312, parallel input port 3102, RAM 308 access protect register, interrupt control circuit 3100, and random number generation circuit 318). Initialize the value. When the first internal circuit initialization process is completed, the process proceeds to step SH05.

  In step SH05, a security check process is executed. In this security check process, it is determined whether or not the value calculated based on the user program matches the value representing the authentication code stored in the program management area of the ROM 306. That is, recalculation of whether or not the authentication code is correct is performed. The user program here corresponds to an example of the contents stored in the storage unit (internal ROM 306) according to the present invention, and the authentication code stored in the program management area of the internal ROM 306 is the predetermined authentication according to the present invention. This corresponds to an example of information. If the authentication code is correct, the process proceeds to step SH07. If not, the operation of the CPU 304 is stopped. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the security check is performed in this way, so that stable control can be performed by the gaming machine.

  In step SH07, a fixed extension process is executed. In this fixed extension process, the security mode is extended for a preset fixed time (for example, set using 0 to 2 bits of the security time setting in the program management area of the ROM 306). For example, when n is the time set in the program management area and the system clock is SCLK, the time is extended by 3n × 2 ^ 24 / SCLK seconds. A reset signal is output from the XRSTO terminal when this extended time has elapsed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SH09.

  In step SH09, a random extension process is executed. In this random extension process, the security mode is extended only by a random time selected in advance (for example, setting using 3 to 4 bits of the security time setting in the program management area). For example, when the short mode is set, the time is extended from 0 to Sμ seconds, when the middle mode is set, 0 to Mμ seconds, and when the long mode is set, the time is extended from 0 to Lμ seconds ( S <M <L). When this process ends, the process shifts to the user mode, and the CPU 304 starts the process from address 0000H in the memory map. In the present embodiment, the main process of the main control unit 300 is started.

On the other hand, in step SH11 which proceeds when executing the user reset operation in step SH01, the second internal circuit initialization process is executed. This second internal circuit initialization processing is performed by using internal registers (timer circuit 311, counter circuit 312, parallel input port 3102, RAM 308 access protect register, interrupt control circuit 3100) excluding the registers for controlling the core of CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318. ) Value is initialized. That is, in the second internal circuit initialization process, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. When the second internal circuit initialization process is completed, the process shifts to the user mode, and the CPU 304 starts the process from address 0000H in the memory map. In the present embodiment, the main process of the main control unit 300 is started.
<Random number generation circuit>

  Next, details of the random number generation circuit 318 of the microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. 75 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an internal block diagram of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG.

  The random number generation circuit 318 includes four random number generation channels CH1 to CH4 that generate different random numbers. Since the internal configuration of each channel circuit is the same, FIG. 77 shows one random number generation channel CH1, and the remaining random number generation channels CH2 to CH4 are simplified in illustration. In the following description, the random number generation circuit 318 will be described focusing on the random number generation channel CH1.

  The random number generation circuit 318 includes an initial setting register 3181, a frequency monitoring circuit 3182, a random number updating circuit 3183, a random number monitoring circuit 3184, a noise filter 3185, a soft latch register 3186, a latch selection register 3187, and a random number register 3188. And a random number latch flag register 3189 and a random number interrupt control register 3180. The frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 correspond to an example of update abnormality detection means.

  The initial setting register 3181 stores clock selection information for determining which of the external clock signal from the RCK terminal and the system clock (internal clock signal) to use in the random number update circuit 3183 in the program management area. Set based on information. The external clock signal and the system clock (internal clock signal) from the RCK terminal are input to a multiplexer provided in front of the random number update circuit 3183. The initial setting register 3181 inputs the update clock selection signal to the multiplexer according to the clock selection information, so that the clock signal selected by the update clock selection signal is input to the random number update circuit 3183. When an external clock signal is selected, a clock signal divided by a predetermined frequency division ratio (in this example, 1/2) is input to the random number update circuit 3183. Note that the frequency-divided clock signal cannot be used when the frequency is not lower than that of the internal clock. In the present embodiment, the description will be continued assuming that the external clock signal is selected.

  The frequency monitoring circuit 3182 monitors the period of the internal clock signal and the external clock signal, and outputs information indicating that the clock signal is abnormal to the internal information register 3101 when the period is not constant.

  The random number update circuit 3183 receives the clock signal selected by the initial setting register 3181 and updates the random number according to the cycle of the clock signal. The updated random number value is output to the random number monitoring circuit 3184 and the random number register 3188, respectively. Details of the random number update circuit 3183 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 82.

  The update of the random number value is configured to start (automatically start) when the maximum value is not set in the random number update circuit 3183 when shifting to the user mode, while the random value update circuit 3183 has a maximum value. The set CH is configured to start (manual start) when the maximum value is set. That is, the maximum value of the random number can be individually set for the random number generation channels CH1 to CH4. In addition, when the update is started once for both the CH in which the maximum value is not set and the CH in which the maximum value is set, the update is stopped only when the power supply is cut off or a system reset occurs. It is configured so that the update cannot be stopped except for these events except when an abnormal event occurs.

  Further, for the CH for which the maximum value is set, updating is started based on the setting of the maximum value in the maximum value setting register provided in the random number update circuit 3183. A register that can be written only once (initialized at system reset (FFFFH, which is the maximum value of the update range, is set as an initial value), and maintains the value that was set before the user reset occurred when a user reset occurred Register). That is, even when the process for writing the maximum value setting register is executed by the user program when the random number is updated, the maximum value setting register is not updated, and the random number generation circuit 3183 is not affected. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, the lead can be freely set by the user program.

  In addition, one of the 16-bit random value and the 8-bit random value may be configured so that an initial value can be set, and the other may be configured so that an initial value cannot be set, and whether or not the random number is normally updated. One may be monitored and the other may not be monitored. In addition, the initial value of the random number value may be different between an internal reset and an external reset described later (for example, the initial value at the time of internal reset is 33H, and the initial value at the time of external reset is CCH). In the initial setting of the user program or the like, the type of reset may be determined based on the initial value of the random number value, and processing according to the type of reset may be executed.

  Based on the input from the random number update circuit 3183, the random number monitoring circuit 3184 monitors whether or not the random number has been updated normally. If there is an abnormality in updating the random number, information indicating that there is an abnormality in updating the random number is output to the internal information register 3101.

  In the above description, the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 are provided inside the random number generation circuit 318, but may be provided outside the random number generation circuit 318. In the above description, the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 are provided separately from the random number update circuit 3183. However, these circuits may be provided inside the random number update circuit 3183.

  Input from the P0 terminal to P3 terminal is input to the noise filter 3185 as a latch signal via the parallel input port 3102. In FIG. 77, the P3 terminal and the circuit connected to the P3 terminal are not shown. As described above, a signal from a ball detection sensor that detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is input to the P0 terminal, and a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is input to the P1 terminal. A signal from a sphere detection sensor to be detected is input, and a signal from a sphere detection sensor that detects a ball entering the normal start port 228 is input to the P2 terminal. Further, the clock signal selected by the initial setting register 3181 is input to the noise filter 3185. Using this clock signal, the noise generated at the inputs from the P0 to P3 terminals is removed, and then the latch signal is detected. When this latch signal is detected, a hard latch signal is output to a multiplexer provided in front of the random number register 3188. Details of the noise removal will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Information indicating that a random number is latched from the random number register 3188 is appropriately set in the soft latch register 3186 according to an instruction from the CPU 304. This information is output as a soft latch signal to a multiplexer provided in front of the random number register 3188.

  The latch selection register 3187 has information indicating which of the hard latch signal and the soft latch signal is output from the multiplexer provided in front of the random number register 3188, that is, which latch signal is input to the random number register 3188. These are set as appropriate according to instructions from the CPU 304. By setting this information, a random number can be obtained by appropriately using a hard latch signal and a soft latch signal.

  Three signals are input to the random number register 3188. The first signal is a signal representing a random number output from the random number update circuit 3183. The second signal is a random number latch signal (a signal set by the latch selection register 3187 out of the hard latch signal and the soft latch signal) output from the multiplexer provided in front. The third signal is a read signal indicating random number reading.

  A signal indicating the random number updated by the random number update circuit 3183 is always input to the random number register 3188. Here, when a random number latch signal is input, a random number at this input timing is latched (held) in the random number register 3188. At this time, a set signal indicating that the random number is latched is output from the random number register 3188 to the random number latch flag register 3189. At this time, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number. Note that when a random number is acquired by the CPU 304, a read signal is input to the random number register 3188. When a new random number latch signal is input by this signal, an allowable state is entered in which the random number is allowed to be latched. In other words, once the random number is latched, it becomes an unacceptable state in which the random number cannot be newly latched until the read signal is inputted. Note that since the latched random number is held even when a read signal is input, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number any number of times at the same latched timing. With this configuration, the influence of chattering in the sensor circuit that outputs the random number latch signal can be suppressed. A clear signal indicating that the read signal has been input is output to the random number latch flag register 3189. As shown in FIG. 77, since there are a plurality of random number registers 3188, random numbers generated from the same random number update circuit can be acquired at various timings.

  The random number latch flag register 3189 stores information indicating whether or not a random number is latched in the random number register 3188. The random number latch flag register 3189 is automatically cleared when the random number latched in the random number register 3188 (all or part of a 16-bit random number or all or part of an 8-bit random number) is read. You may comprise so that it may clear by CPU.

  In the random number interrupt control register 3180, information indicating whether or not an interrupt is to be generated in the interrupt control circuit when a random number is held in the random number register 3188 is set. This information can be set for each random number register 3188. For example, when the random number of the random number generation channel CH1 is latched by entering the first special figure starting port 230, an interrupt is generated, and by entering the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generating channel CH2 is set. If a random number is latched, it can be set such that no interrupt is generated.

  In the present embodiment, using the random number generation circuit 318 described above, random numbers are acquired at the timing when the ball enters each of the general view start port 282, the first special view start port 230, and the second special view start port 232. Note that the program can be executed so that the CPU 304 can acquire a random number at an arbitrary timing. Further, independent random numbers can be acquired using different random number generation channels, and the maximum value of the random number generation range can be set for each channel.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the random number generation range can be changed for each individual channel and a predetermined maximum value (for example, 65535) is applied when the range is not set has been described. For example, when changing the random number generation range, the configuration may be required to set the random number generation range for all channels.

  In addition, the random number acquired at the timing of entering the general figure starting port 282 is used as a general figure winning random number described later. In addition, the random number acquired at the timing of entering the first special figure starting port 230 is counted up (down) by processing (for example, a circuit different from the random number generation circuit (for example, the basic circuit 302 or the counter circuit 312)). The value is added (subtracted) to the random number, etc.) and used as a special figure 1 winning random number described later. Furthermore, the random number acquired at the timing of entering the second special figure starting port 232 is processed and used as a special figure 2 winning random number described later.

  The random number processing is not limited to the random number acquired at the timing of entering the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232, but other triggers (for example, entering the normal figure starting port 282). You may perform with respect to the random number acquired by the timing of balling etc.). Furthermore, when the maximum value of the random number generation range described above is set, processing corresponding to the set maximum value (for example, a process of adding a value not exceeding the maximum value to the random number) may be performed.

  In addition, although it is not always necessary to perform random number processing, it is effective to prevent random numbers from being processed. For example, when the CPU 304 monitors whether or not the processed random number has been updated, it cannot be accurately determined whether or not the random number update in the random number generation circuit 318 is normally performed. Thus, when processing random numbers, monitoring of update of random numbers by the random number monitoring circuit 3184 described above works more effectively.

  Next, the operation of the noise filter 3185 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of processing by the noise filter 3185 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the noise filter 3185 receives inputs from the P0 to P3 terminals as latch signals via the parallel input port 3102 and receives the clock signal selected by the initial setting register 3181. For example, as shown in FIG. 78, the noise filter 3185 receives the input signal from the P0 terminal to the P3 terminal until the down edge of the clock signal (falling signal from the H level to the L level) is continuously input four times. If H is at the H level, a hardware latch signal is output. If a hardware latch signal is simply output based on only the rising and falling edges of the signal, the hardware latch signal is output even when noise occurs. For this reason, the hardware latch signal is not output due to noise by detecting the sensor signal for a certain period using the clock signal as described above.

  In the above description, the example in which the hard latch signal is output by the input from the P0 terminal to the P3 terminal has been described. However, for example, there is a method of acquiring the random number after the CPU 304 once receives the input from the P0 terminal to the P3 terminal. . In this case, the random number is latched not by the hard latch signal but by the soft latch signal output from the soft latch register 3186. In this case, the CPU 304 executes processing similar to the processing by the noise filter. That is, it is determined whether or not the input from the P0 terminal to the P3 terminal has continued for a predetermined period. Thereafter, the soft latch register 3186 is set so as to output a soft latch signal.

  Next, details of the random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG. 77 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows the details of the random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG.

  The random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG. 79A includes a counter circuit 3183a, a start value selection circuit 3183b, and a maximum value setting register 3183c. 77 shows that either the external clock signal or the internal clock signal is input to the random number update circuit 3183 as an update clock signal for updating the random number, the random number shown in FIG. Maximum value data is further input to the update circuit 3183 from the CPU 304.

  A random number (random number data) is output from the counter circuit 3183a. The initial value of this random number is set in the start value selection circuit 3183b. The initial value is set to one of a fixed value (for example, 0), a value based on the ID number of the microprocessor 3000 stored in the program management area, and a value lottery within the random number generation range. Is done.

  The counter circuit 3183a is provided with a counter in which 1 is added for each clock of the update clock signal, and a value obtained by adding the initial value of the random number input from the start value selection circuit 3183b to the value of this counter is provided. Output as a random number.

  The maximum value of the random number output from the counter circuit 3183a is set in the maximum value setting register 3183c. Note that the maximum value of the random number is set in the maximum value setting register 3183c in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 304. FIG. 79 (b) shows a 16-bit register in which this maximum value is set. The initial value when there is no instruction for setting the maximum value from the CPU 304 is FFFFH (65535). Instead of the maximum value setting register 3183c, for example, an area for setting a maximum value may be provided in the program management area of the ROM 306, and the set maximum value may be referred to.

  When the output random number exceeds the maximum value, the counter circuit 3183a subtracts a value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, and then outputs this value as a random number. For example, in the case where the maximum value is 65535, if the value obtained by adding the initial value and the counter value is updated in the order of 65534, 65535, 65536, and 65537, the output random number is 65534, 65535, 0 (655536). (65535 + 1)), 1 (65537- (65535 + 1)). That is, when the maximum value is exceeded, the output random number returns to zero.

  When the value of the counter provided in the counter circuit 3183a reaches the maximum value set in the maximum value register 3183c, the counter value is cleared to 0, and the counter circuit 3183a to the start value selection circuit 3183b. A signal (circular signal) indicating that the output of the random number has been completed is output. In the start value selection circuit 3183b that has received this round signal, the initial value of the random number is updated. When the initial value updated at this time exceeds the maximum value of the random number set in the maximum value setting register 3183c, for example, a fixed value can be used, or it can be set after multiplying the current maximum value of the random number once. By using a value divided by the maximum value (65535) of the random number generation range, a value that does not exceed the maximum random number value (a value within the random number generation range) is reset as an initial value. Of course, a value within the random number generation range may be set as an initial value by using this resetting method from the beginning.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum value set in the maximum value setting register 3183c is automatically updated when the output from the counter circuit 3183a completes a cycle, but for example, when an update command from the CPU 304 is received. It may be updated.

  Here, the range of the above random number generation will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a range of random numbers output when the maximum value of the random number generation range is not set (default state). FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a range of random numbers output when a maximum value different from that in FIG. 80 is set.

  First, FIG. 80 (a) will explain the situation in the nth cycle (immediately after the (n-1) th round signal is output). FIG. 80A shows a random number generation range of 0 to 65535. Further, the initial value of the output random number is shown as the start value (X).

  A random number is updated and output from the random number update circuit 3183 for each clock of the update clock. More specifically, the start value (X) is output first, and then the random numbers updated in the order of X + 1 and X + 2 are output every clock thereafter. When the value of the random number reaches 65535, which is the maximum value of the random number generation range, the random number output next is returned to 0 by the above-described processing. Thereafter, the random numbers updated in the order of 1, 2 are output, and when the X-1 is output, this random number generation range is completed. At this time, the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a in the random number update circuit 3183 is the same as the maximum value. The start value selection circuit 3183b outputs a signal (round signal) indicating that the random number output has rounded.

  Subsequently, when one clock is input, the output of the random number update circuit 3183 enters the (n + 1) period (immediately after the nth round signal is output). The situation in the (n + 1) th cycle will be described with reference to FIG. First, the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a in the random number update circuit 3183 is cleared to zero. In the start value selection circuit 3183b, a new initial value is set. In FIG. 80 (b), this new initial value is shown as the start value (X '). A random number is output in the same flow as the flow described above based on the new initial value and the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a.

  Next, in FIG. 81 (a), the situation in the nth cycle (immediately after the (n-1) th round signal is output) when the maximum value smaller than the maximum value of the random number generation range shown in FIG. 80 is set. Will be described. FIG. 81 (a) shows a random number generation range that is narrower than the random number generation range shown in FIG. 80 (a) by a set maximum value from 0 to 65535. Note that the range of random numbers that are not output is indicated by a left-down hatching. Further, the initial value of the output random number is shown as the start value (Y).

  Similar to the situation described with reference to FIG. 80, the random number update circuit 3183 first outputs a start value (Y), and then outputs random numbers updated in order of Y + 1 and Y + 2 every clock. . When the value of the random number reaches the set maximum value, the random number output next is returned to 0 by the above-described processing. That is, random numbers in the range indicated by the left-down hatching are not output. Thereafter, the random numbers updated in the order of 1, 2 are output, and when the Y-1 is output, this random number generation range is completed. At this time, the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a in the random number update circuit 3183 is the same as the set maximum value. The start value selection circuit 3183b outputs a signal (round signal) indicating that the random number output has rounded.

  Subsequently, when one clock is input, the output of the random number update circuit 3183 enters the (n + 1) period (immediately after the nth round signal is output). The situation in the (n + 1) th cycle will be described with reference to FIG. As in the case described with reference to FIG. 80B, the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a in the random number update circuit 3183 is cleared to zero. In the start value selection circuit 3183b, a new initial value is set. FIG. 81 (b) shows this new initial value as the start value (Y ′). A random number is output in the same flow as the flow described above based on the new initial value and the counter value of the counter circuit 3183a.

  In addition to appropriately setting the maximum value of the random number generation channel as described above, for example, the maximum random number value is 65535 in one random number generation channel, but the maximum random number value is 255 in another random number generation channel. For example, the random number generation range may be different for each channel. In this case, the channel may be selected according to the required random number generation range. In this case, the capacity of the maximum value setting register can be reduced and the processing load for setting the maximum value can be reduced. Furthermore, even if a plurality of maximum values that can be set in advance are set and an appropriate maximum value is selected and set from these, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the maximum value setting register and to reduce the processing load for setting the maximum value. Can be reduced.

  The random number output from the random number update circuit 3183 has been described above. Hereinafter, a modification of the random number update circuit 3183 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows a range in which random numbers can be acquired in a random number generation range in which a maximum value and a minimum value are set.

  In the example of FIGS. 79 to 81, the example in which the maximum value of the random number generation range is changed has been described. However, for example, the minimum value may be set. Further, a register for setting not only the maximum value but also the minimum value may be prepared, and as shown in FIG. 82A, the minimum value and the maximum value may be set to set the random number generation range. In addition, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), a plurality of random number generation ranges may be set. That is, any configuration can be used as long as the range of the output random number can be set. Further, in the above description, the example in which the output random number increases by 1 has been described for easy understanding, but other random number update methods may be used.

  Hereinafter, random numbers used in the game machine of this embodiment and main derivation sources will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a table showing random number derivation sources used in the game machine of this embodiment. Each random number shown in this figure is used in a flowchart described later.

  First, the special figure 1 winning random numbers, the special figure 2 winning random numbers, and the universal figure winning random numbers are based on random numbers generated by the random number generation channels CH1 to CH4 of the random number generation circuit 318. This value is appropriately processed as necessary and used as these random numbers.

  The big hit special figure random number, the small hit special figure random number, and the lost special figure random number are generated in a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later. That is, these random numbers are so-called software random numbers. Note that the initial value generating random numbers used when generating these random numbers are generated by the main control unit main process and the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  For the special figure fluctuation time determination random number and the normal figure fluctuation time determination random number, the value of the counter circuit 312 is used as a random number. In the count circuit 312 of this embodiment, in addition to the system clock of the microprocessor 3000, a timeout signal from the timer circuit, a memory read / write signal, a memory request signal, an external input / output signal, and the like can be used as counter targets. . Therefore, by combining these, a value having no regularity is derived and used for the above random number. The production random number is generated by the main control unit main process and the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  Next, details of the internal information register 3101 provided in the interrupt control circuit 3100 shown in FIG. 75 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the internal information register 3101 has an external clock (count clock) cycle abnormality that determines the random number update cycle by the random number generation circuit 318, an abnormality of the generated random number value, and a user reset that occurred immediately before. The reset factor information and the like are stored. The internal register 3101 includes a first internal information register, a second internal information register, and a third internal information register.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the first internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. FIG. 84A shows a range in which information indicating abnormality of the random number generation circuit 318 is stored in the first internal information register. This range is composed of 8 bits, and FIG. 84 (b) shows a table showing what information each bit represents.

  The CPU 304 checks the contents of the first internal information register every time a timer interrupt described later is executed (step S3235a in FIG. 95). This content is used to determine whether or not to perform processing such as stopping the progress of a game when an abnormality occurs. For example, in the present embodiment, when the random number generation circuit 318 detects an abnormality, the winning acceptance process is not executed (see step S3235c in FIG. 95 and FIG. 96). In addition, the ball may not be launched, the payout may not be performed, or the variation timer may not be subtracted. In particular, when there is an abnormality in random number update, there is a possibility that a large current is flowing through the random number update circuit 3183 (latch-up state). Good.

  Bit number 0 is a bit indicating an abnormality of the external clock (update clock) of the random number generation circuit 318. 0 indicates no abnormality and 1 indicates an abnormality. Bit numbers 1 to 4 are bits indicating an abnormality of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 318 for each channel, where 0 indicates no abnormality and 1 indicates an abnormality. Bit numbers 5 to 7 are not used (fixed to 0).

  When the value of the first internal information register is 1, when read from the CPU 304, it is set (cleared) to 0. Since the internal information register is read by the CPU 304 at a time, if the value held in the first internal information register is set to 0 (cleared), the value is read after reading the value of the first internal information register to the CPU 304. You can discard the value. Further, as described above, when either system reset or user reset processing is executed, the internal information register is set (cleared) to 0 as in the case of reading from the CPU 304. It will be.

  As described above, how the abnormality of the random number generation circuit 318 is stored has been described. As in this example, information indicating the reset factor (identifying which reset among the system reset and the user reset has occurred) Possible information) is also stored in the first internal information register. In the above description, the abnormality of the random number generation channel is represented for each channel by the bit numbers 1 to 4, but it may be represented by one bit whether an abnormality has occurred in any channel. (It may be common to all channels). In this embodiment, the internal information register 3101 is provided in the interrupt control circuit 3100, but may be provided in another circuit. The second internal information register and the third internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100 will be described later.

  Next, an example of abnormality detection in the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 shown in FIG. 77 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows an example of abnormality detection in the frequency monitoring circuit 3182. FIG. 85 shows, from the top, normal operation, abnormal operation example 1 (abnormal time 1), and abnormal operation example 2 (abnormal time 2), respectively. In these examples, in addition to the internal clock of the microprocessor 3000 and the external clock (RCK) input to the random number generation circuit 318, the ratio of the cycle of the internal clock to one cycle of the external clock is shown. In this detection operation, the ratio of the period between the external clock and the internal clock is monitored, and a case where this ratio changes is detected as an abnormality.

  In the normal example shown in FIG. 85 (a), a state in which the internal clock has 2.5 cycles continues during one cycle of the external clock. That is, since the ratio of the period between the external clock and the internal clock does not change, information indicating abnormality is not output.

  Next, operation example 1 (abnormal time 1) at the time of abnormality shown in FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the internal clock has 4.5 cycles in one cycle of the external clock. When the state shown in FIG. 85 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 85 (b), information indicating abnormality is output at this point.

  Next, at the beginning of operation example 2 (abnormal time 2) at the time of abnormality shown in FIG. 85 (c), there is shown a state in which the internal clock has 0.5 cycles in one cycle of the external clock. If the state shown in FIG. 85 (a) is changed to the first state shown in FIG. 85 (c), information indicating an abnormality is output at this point. Further, in FIG. 85 (c), the state in which the internal clock is 0.5 cycles in one cycle of the external clock continues, and the state in which the internal clock is 2.5 cycles in one cycle of the external clock continues. ing. Information indicating abnormality is output even when the ratio of the period changes.

  In the above example, when one of the external clock and the internal clock becomes abnormal, information indicating abnormality is output. That is, even when the internal clock is used as a random number update clock, an abnormality can be detected. If the ratio between the external clock and the internal clock is the same, no information indicating abnormality is output even if both frequencies are changed. In this case, for example, information indicating the frequency of the external clock or the internal clock can be stored in the program management area, and the abnormality of the external clock or the internal clock can be detected using this information. The method for detecting an abnormality of the update clock is not limited to the above-described method, and other methods may be adopted as long as the abnormality of the update clock cycle can be detected.

  Next, an example of abnormality detection in the random number monitoring circuit 3184 shown in FIG. 77 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of detecting an abnormality in the random number monitoring circuit 3184. In this detection example, the random numbers before and after the update are compared every time the random number is updated, and it is checked whether or not the same random number is generated. If the same random number is generated, information indicating abnormality is output. In the example of FIG. 86A, since the same random number is not generated before and after the update, information indicating abnormality is not output. On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 86 (b), the same random number is generated in the middle of the update (random number 4 is generated twice), and at this time (second time 4 is output) Will output information indicating anomalies. In the above example, the check is performed every time the random number is updated. However, the check may be performed every predetermined cycle longer than the random number update cycle.

  As described above, in the random number generation circuit 318, information indicating abnormality is output from the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 to the internal information register 3101. Further, the value of the internal information register 3101 is read by the CPU 304 at every timer interruption.

  By monitoring the abnormality of the random number generation circuit 318 using both the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 as described above, there is an abnormality in the update clock frequency, but there is no abnormality in updating the random number ( An abnormal state that cannot be detected only by the random number monitoring circuit 3184) and an abnormal state in which the frequency of the update clock is normal but there is an abnormality in updating the random number can be accurately grasped. Control can be stabilized.

  In conventional game machines, fraud may be made by targeting the random numbers used in the lottery so that it is easy to derive the lottery results advantageous to the player, making it difficult to ensure the fairness of the game. ing. However, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the random number generation circuit 318 can deal with the abnormalities of the random numbers used in the lottery, so that the randomness of the random numbers is suppressed and the fairness of the game is suppressed. Can be secured. Note that the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and the random number monitoring circuit 3184 continuously monitor regardless of the information stored in the internal information register 3101.

  Here, the value of the internal information register 3101 is a cycle in which the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 318 makes a round (a period required to output all the values in the random number generation range once, hereinafter, a random cycle) 87), the problem that occurs in the configuration that is held and then cleared will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a comparison of the cycle of the random number and the timer interrupt cycle. At the top of FIG. 87, a random number round cycle t1 longer than the timer interrupt cycle t4 shown at the bottom is shown. Also, in the second and third from the top in FIG. 87, random number round cycles t2 and t3 shorter than the timer interrupt cycle t4 are shown, respectively.

  As described above, the contents of the internal information register 3101 are confirmed for each timer interrupt. For example, when the random number round cycle is longer than the timer interrupt cycle t4 as in the random round cycle t1 shown in FIG. 87, this value can be read before the value held in the internal information register 3101 is cleared. However, in this embodiment, since the maximum value of the random number generation range can be set, there may occur a situation where the random number cycle period is shortened accordingly. For example, when the random number round cycle is shorter than the timer interrupt cycle t4 as in the random round cycles t2 and t3 shown in FIG. 87, this value may be cleared before reading the value held in the internal information register 3101. . That is, the CPU 304 may not be able to acquire information indicating abnormality.

In this embodiment, once the value of the internal information register 3101 is set, the value is held until this value is read. That is, this value is maintained regardless of whether it has returned to normal. Further, when the CPU 304 reads this value, the value of the read portion is cleared. For this reason, even if the round cycle of the random number has changed as described above, information indicating abnormality can be acquired from the internal information register 3101. If the abnormality continues after the value indicating abnormality is read, the value indicating abnormality is set again.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  This main control unit main process corresponds to the above-described process in the user mode, and is a process executed regardless of whether a system reset is applied or a user reset is applied. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 has a special jackpot special random number counter, a small bonus special figure 1 random counter, a lost special figure 1 random number counter, and a counter for these counters for the special figure 2. Is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores the number of holds shown in FIG. 1, the special figure 1 winning random number, the special jackpot special figure 1 random number, the small bonus special figure 1 random number, the lost special figure 1 random number, the special figure 1 hit determination result, FIG. 1 determination result, special figure 1 variation time, and the number of reservations, random numbers, and result for special figure 2 are stored. In addition, the RAM 308 has separate storage units that are divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery), separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Yes. As shown below, the reserved storage unit of Special Figure 1 determines Special Figure 1 winning random numbers, Special Bonus Figure 1 random numbers, Special Bonus Figure 1 random numbers, Loss Special Figure 1 random numbers, and Special Figure 1 variation time determination. One set of five random numbers for use is stored as a set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 88 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S3001, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the like. .

  In step S3003, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), this step S3003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off). Then, the process proceeds to step S3005. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, step S3003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In step S3005, initial setting 2 is performed.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a flow of initial setting 2 in the main process of the main control unit. First, in step S3051, setting processing related to the counter circuit 312 is performed, such as processing for setting a maximum value or a numerical value for determining an update source in the counter circuit 312. Note that setting processing related to the timer circuit 311 is also performed, such as processing for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to the timer circuit 311 at regular intervals. In step S3052, a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400 is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3053. In step S3053, random number generation circuit initial setting processing is performed. Next, in step S3054, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308 is performed, and the initial setting 2 is completed.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the flow of the random number generation circuit initial setting process in step S3053. This random number generation circuit initial setting process is an initial setting process of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 77 performed in the above-described user mode. First, a range of random numbers (random number generation range) is set (step S3053a), and the process proceeds to step S3053b. As described above, in the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 77, the maximum width of the generated random number is 0 to 65535, and this maximum width is the default of the random number generation range. Here, FIGS. 79 to 82 are used. As described in detail, the random number generation range can be set to a range different from the default. The main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 88 is a process that is executed every time reset (system reset or user reset) is performed. Therefore, the setting of the random number generation range is also performed every time reset is performed. By doing in this way, the problem by abnormality of the random number generation range mentioned later using FIG. 98, FIG. 99 can be prevented.

  In step S3053b, the random number register 3188 shown in FIG. 77 is read, and the read random number is discarded, and the process proceeds to step S3053c. By this processing, every time the random number generation range is reset, the random number register 3188 enters an allowable state that allows the random number to be latched. In this permissible state, even if a random number that may be abnormal remains in the random number register, it is possible to immediately update the random number, thereby preventing the use of a random number that may be abnormal.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generation circuit 318 generates a random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number and the universal winning random number, but the output channel differs depending on the control state. That is, the random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number is output from the channel CH1 during non-probability fluctuation (special figure low probability state), and is output from the channel CH2 during probability fluctuation (special figure high probability state). . Further, the normal winning random number is output from the channel CH3 in the normal low probability state (during non-electric support) and is output from the channel CH4 in the normal high probability state (during electric support). Note that the random number generation circuit 318 may generate the special figure winning random number itself, or may generate a random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number. Further, the normal winning random number itself may be generated, or the random number that is the basis of the normal winning random number may be generated. In step S3053c, it is determined whether or not step S3053a and step S3053b have been executed for all four channels. If all the channels have not been completed, the process returns to step S3053a for each unfinished channel. Process. Note that the setting of the random number generation range may be executed only for the channel used according to the state, or may be executed only for the channel for which the random number generation range is set. On the other hand, if all the channels have been completed, this random number generation circuit initial setting process is completed.

  Note that the timer interrupt of the main control unit is prohibited at this point, and the random number generator initial setting process is performed before the timer interrupt is permitted, so even if a random number is newly latched, it is used for various lotteries. The lottery process can be stabilized.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the user program is executed from the beginning (the random number is updated) when a system reset occurs (update of random numbers is stopped) and when a user reset occurs, for example. The random number circuit initialization process is always executed in any case. Although it is not always necessary to configure in this way, this configuration makes the analysis result of the user program and the operation of the random number generation circuit 318 inconsistent. Can be prevented. Therefore, the operation of the basic circuit 302 is not unstable due to fraud, and the game control can be stabilized. If the operation of the basic circuit 302 is analyzed by fraud, there is a possibility that an operation advantageous to the player may be performed. However, with the above configuration, such fraud can be prevented, so that game control is stable. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the random number generation circuit 318 performs the random number update, if the CPU 304 is instructed to execute the random number generation circuit initial setting process, the process when the user reset is performed may be unified. it can. That is, even if the state becomes unstable after the user reset, it is not necessary to perform the branch process, so that the game control can be stabilized. In addition, although the above-mentioned content described the case where a user reset was applied, the same effect can be acquired also when a system reset is applied.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing content of the random number generation circuit initial setting processing is the same when a system reset occurs and when a user reset occurs, but this processing content is You may make it differ by the case where reset generate | occur | produces and the case where user reset etc. generate | occur | produce. Specifically, when a user reset occurs, a process for setting the maximum value (a process for writing the maximum value of the corresponding CH stored in the ROM 306 in the maximum value setting register) is executed while the user reset is performed. When the error occurs, the maximum value is confirmed (the value of the maximum value setting register is read and compared with the maximum value of the corresponding CH stored in the ROM 306), and the maximum values do not match. In the event of a failure, a predetermined process (for example, a process for stopping the progress of a game, a process for transmitting a signal indicating an abnormality to the outside, a process for notifying an abnormality, a process for storing the occurrence of an abnormality, etc.) is executed. You may comprise. It should be noted that as a method for identifying whether a system reset or a user reset has occurred, information stored in an internal information register (details will be described later) may be referred to.

  In step S3007 in the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 88, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption). When the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state), the process proceeds to the RWM clear process (step S3013).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S3013 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S3013 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. The result of the calculated checksum is It is determined whether or not the value matches the value set in the RAM 308 (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S3009 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is other than the specific value. In the case (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S3013 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process advances to step S3013.

  In step S3009, data write-back processing is performed. In this data write-back process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S3009, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S231 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S3011, processing for starting WDT 3141 is performed. Here, activation permission of WDT 3141, setting of an initial value, and the like are performed. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT 3141.

  In step S3013, RWM clear processing is performed. In this RWM clear process, all storage areas in the RAM 308 are initialized. In addition, setting of timer interrupt permission of the main control unit, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), etc. are also performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the RWM clear process (step S3013) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power recovery command, in step S231 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the normal return command 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400. In step S3015, similarly to step S3011, processing for starting WDT 3141 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, WDT 3141 is not restarted in the main control unit main process after at least setting of timer interrupt permission, and WDT 3141 is restarted only in the main control unit timer interrupt process described later (for details) And a process for starting the WDT 3141 after setting the timer interrupt permission of the main control unit. With this configuration, the count value of WDT 3141 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) only when the timer interrupt process of the main control unit is normally executed (WDT 3141%). And subsequent processing is performed. Especially when there is an abnormality in the main control unit in a game machine that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit in the main process of the main control unit (only acquisition of the latched random number, or latching of the random number and acquisition of the latched random number) It is possible to prevent random numbers from being acquired (when the main control unit timer interrupt process is not normally executed).

  In step S3017, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. Here, the basic random number corresponds to a big hit special figure random number, a small hit special figure random number, and a lost special figure random number, which are software random numbers. Note that each random number includes a random number for special figure 1 and a random number for special figure 2, but in the following description, unless otherwise noted, both will be described as a special figure without distinction. In this basic random number initial value updating process, the initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial values of the big hit special figure random number counter, the small hit special figure random number counter, and the lost special figure random number counter is updated. Each counter is provided in the RAM 308. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S204 described later.

  In step S3019, effect random number update processing is performed. The effect random number here is also a software random number, and this effect random number is a random number from which the effect is determined. In the present embodiment, when the lottery is executed to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch notice described later. It corresponds to the random number used. In this effect random number update process, the effect random number counter provided in the RAM 308 is updated. The effect random number counter is also updated in step S211 described later.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of step S3017 and step S3019 except during the timer interrupt process starting every predetermined cycle. These steps S3017 and S3019 correspond to an example of main processing.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 311 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S3201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S3203, the WDT 3141 count value of the WDT 3141 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT 3141 interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 4 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S3205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the previous timer interruption process (about 8 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S3205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 4 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S3205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S3205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 234, 230 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information. In the present embodiment, as a determination as to whether or not there has been a prize at the general prize opening 226, the variable prize opening 234, the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232, or the ordinary figure start opening 228, Although it has been determined whether or not the previous and current detection signals coincide with the predetermined winning determination pattern information, the present invention is not limited to such a method. For example, the previous and current detection signals are determined to be predetermined. You may comprise so that it may determine whether it corresponds with pattern information (For example, no previous detection signal, this time detection signal exists (what is called up edge)). That is, it may be configured to monitor whether or not there is a detection signal from the sphere detection sensor and determine whether or not the history of the monitoring result matches a predetermined pattern.

  In step S3207 and step S3209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S3017 is updated, and then the jackpot special figure random number used in the main control unit 300, The random number counter for generating the special figure random number for small hits and the special figure random number for lose is updated. For example, if the possible numerical range for the big hit special figure random number is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the big hit special figure random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random counter for generating a special jackpot random number for big hit that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating special jackpot random numbers, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special counter random number counter for generating a big hit special round has been made next round. Keep it. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number related to the special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number related to the special figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S3211, an effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random numbers used in the main control unit 300 is updated as in step S3019. In step S3213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S3215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning holes 234, 230 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S3217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of special figure 1 variable games on hold is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), a predetermined Get startup information. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, a hardware random number that is the basis of the special figure 1 winning random number is obtained from the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 and processed to obtain the special figure 1 winning random number. . More specifically, the process of obtaining the special figure 1 winning random number will be described. The process of outputting a latch signal for latching the random number of the channel corresponding to the special figure 1 of the random number generation circuit 318 (specifically, software A process of writing a predetermined value in an area corresponding to the channel of the special register 1 of the latch register 3186, and a process of outputting a read signal for acquiring a random number latched by this latch signal (specifically, The random number register 3188 executes a process of outputting a read signal to the random number register corresponding to the channel shown in FIG. 1 to obtain the latched random number, and processes the obtained random number (for example, the user Processing for adding software random numbers generated by the program). The same process is executed when a winning is made at the second special figure starting port 232. In this embodiment, as a method of acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit 318, a latched random number is acquired after performing a process of outputting a latch signal for latching a random number of a channel corresponding to FIGS. The method of outputting the read signal is adopted, but the process of directly reading the random number of the channel corresponding to FIGS. 1 and 2 (specifically, the process of directly reading the value of the random number register 3188) is executed. You may make it acquire. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit timer interrupt process is performed by outputting a read signal for acquiring the latched random number shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 (different from the process of directly reading the value of the random number register 3188). However, this process may be executed in the main control unit main process described above. In this case, the main control unit is combined with a special drawing related lottery process described later. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be performed in a main process, and when performing the process which directly reads the random number value of the channel corresponding to the special figure 1 and 2, only a special figure related lottery process is performed in the main control part main process. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may perform. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 winning random numbers and the special figure 2 winning random numbers are derived by processing the random numbers acquired from the random number generating circuit 318. However, the present invention is not limited to this case, and the random number generating circuit The random numbers acquired from 318 may be special figure 1 winning random numbers and special figure 2 winning random numbers. Also, the big hit special figure 1 random number, the small hit special figure 1 random number, and the lost special figure 1 random number are obtained from a random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308. The special hit 1 random number for big hits, the special Fig. 1 random number for small hits, and the special Fig. 1 random number for lost are values obtained by processing software random numbers derived from the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value) Value + 1). Further, the special figure 1 variation time determination random number is acquired from the counter circuit 312 shown in FIG. The combination of the random number generation circuit 318, the counter circuit 312 and the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308 and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing shown in FIG. 4 generates and derives start information. This corresponds to an example of information deriving means (first starting information deriving means, second starting information deriving means). The various random numbers (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. . The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random numbers (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage unit. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. As for special figure 2, each random number which is start information is acquired as in special figure 1, and the obtained random number is similarly stored as a set of start information in the holding storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. Further, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a possible second starting information storage means. At this time, various random numbers (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The starting information storage means may be used, or the holding storage unit and the temporary area of FIG. 2 may be used as the second starting information storage means.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general figure starting port 228 and the number of pending custom figure variable games is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), the timing is as follows. 4 is obtained from the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. The point that the normal winning random number is acquired from the random number generation circuit 318 will also be described later.

  In this winning acceptance process, a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, or the variable winning port 234. In such a case, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the winnings of the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. ) Is set to receive winning information. It should be noted that, regardless of whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step S3219.

  In step S3219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S3221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and no signal is sent to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232. Is not output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and the valve is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area, set “Normal” inactive. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S3223. Subsequently, in step S3223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed.

  FIG. 92 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of a general drawing related lottery process. In the common drawing-related lottery process shown in FIG. 92A, first, it is determined whether or not there is general drawing hold information (step S3223a). Here, the general map hold information refers to the number of hold of the general map. In other words, here, it is determined whether or not the number of pending variable games is one or more. In addition, even if it does not have the usual number of reservations as data, for example, a random number corresponding to the reservation (a normal winning random number) may be recognized as the general reservation information. If there is no general map hold information, this general drawing related lottery process is terminated, and if there is general map hold information, the process proceeds to step S3223b. In step S3223b, it is determined whether or not the usual figure variable game is being performed. If it has been carried out, this drawing related lottery process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3223c. In step S3223c, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 is being performed (whether or not the normal map is in operation). If it is not normally operated, the process proceeds to step S3223d. In step S3223d, a random number lottery based on the regular winning random number stored in the random number storage area is performed.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing a general drawing lottery table. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 takes out the normal winning random number from the random number storage area of the RAM 308, refers to the short time flag, and if the short time flag is on, it is in a high probability state (during electric support) Subtracting the high-probability common-plan winning data from the common-lot winning random number, if a carry occurs (if the value of the general-plan winning data is larger than the normal winning random number), it is determined to be a general winning and a carry occurs. If you don't, you will lose your usual figure. That is, the normal winning random number range is 0-9. In the normal high probability state, the normal winning random number is output from the channel CH4 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. In this channel CH4, a random number generation range of 0 to 9 is set in the setting of the random number generation range (step S3053a) in the random number generation circuit initial setting process shown in FIG. 90. The range that can be taken is 0-9. Therefore, the probability of winning the normal drawing in the normal high probability state is 1/1. On the other hand, if the time flag is off, it is in the low probability state (non-powered support), so the winning symbol in the low probability state is the same as the data in the high probability state from the acquired random number. If the data is pulled and a carry occurs (when the value of the win-winning data is larger than the normal-winning random number), the win-winning is determined. If no carry occurs, the win-win is lost. That is, even in the normal figure low probability state, the normal figure winning random number range is 0-9. In the normal low probability state, the normal winning random number is output from the channel CH3 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. In this channel CH3, a random number generation range of 0 to 999 is set in the setting of the random number generation range (step S3053a), and the range that the normal winning random number in the normal low probability state can take is 0 to 999. Therefore, the probability of winning the normal figure in the normal figure low probability state becomes 1/100.

  In this embodiment, by limiting the range (random number generation range) that the normal winning random numbers can take from 0 to 65535, which is the default, 0 to 999, the big hit probability can be reduced to 1/100. In addition, the common figure winning data can be set to the same value in the common figure high probability state and the common figure low probability state. Determining the probability without limiting the random number generation range may lead to an increase in development man-hours and may cause erroneous probability design. In particular, the complexity becomes more noticeable when lottery is performed a plurality of times based on one opportunity. Therefore, limiting the random number generation range can reduce the development man-hours and stabilize the lottery process. In addition, it can be said that sharing the common figure winning data in the common figure high probability state and the common figure low probability state can reduce the development man-hours and stabilize the lottery process.

  When the regular drawing lottery is won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of losing (unfair), the winning flag is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the general drawing lottery, a random number for determining the normal variation time is acquired from the counter circuit 312 shown in FIG. One time for variably displaying the normal map on the figure display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in the normal time variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that selects one common map change time from a plurality of change times by lottery using the random number for determining the normal map change time corresponds to an example of a lottery means. Here, the lottery process for the usual time fluctuation time is different from the determination of whether or not the lottery is successful. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308. Each time step S3223e is executed, the number of pending custom figure variable games is stored. The value obtained by subtracting 1 from is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. In addition, acquisition of the random number for determining the normal figure change time from the counter circuit 312 may be performed at the time of winning a prize in the general figure start port 228.

  In step S3223e, the common winning lottery used in the previous general drawing lottery is deleted from the random number storage area described above, and the common drawing related lottery processing is terminated. Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S3225) is executed. In this prefetching process, first, the special figure 1 winning random number in the special memory 1 of FIG. 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special figure 2 winning random number in the special memory 2 of FIG. 2 is prefetched. Note that prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is referred to as the result of the predetermined (correction determination (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read. In this step S3225, a pre-judgment table having the same contents as the contents of the special figure lottery table shown in FIG. 94 (a) used in the special figure related process (step S3229) described later is used, and the validity based on the prefetched special figure winning random number. Pre-determination is performed. In the special figure related process, the special figure lottery table is used again to determine whether or not the special figure variable game is successful, and the determination result here is only the result of the preliminary determination. In the pre-judgment determination, a result of “big hit” or a result other than “big hit” is derived, and in the case of a result of “big hit”, the big hit in the reserved storage unit of FIG. The special figure 1 random number is prefetched, or the big hit special figure 2 random number in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 is prefetched. Subsequently, using the pre-determination table having the same content as the content of the stop symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 94 (b) used in the special symbol-related process in step S3229, the special symbol stop symbol based on the pre-determined special bonus random number for jackpot Make a prior judgment.

  In the special symbol related process, the special symbol stop symbol lottery table is used again, and the special symbol stop symbol lottery is performed again, and the determination result here is a preliminary determination result. In this way, when the stop symbol of the special figure is determined in advance, a lottery for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice is performed. This pre-reading notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination performed in the special drawing-related lottery process before the special figure-related lottery process (step S3229) is executed, that is, before the determination of success / failure is performed. 15R big hit (15R special big hit or 15R big hit). The pre-reading notice here is a fake pre-reading notice that gives a false notice as if it was a big hit of 15R even if the pre-determined result of the stop symbol is not a big hit of 15R (Special Figure A or Special Figure B) Is also included. In other words, the pre-reading notice indicates that there is a possibility that the result of the success / failure determination will be a 15R jackpot, an advance notification that suggests to the player, or an advance notice that the player expects that the result of the success / failure determination will be a 15R jackpot. It can be said that it is information. An effect random number (for example, a possible range is 0 to 99) is acquired from an effect random number counter provided in the RAM 308 at the timing of performing the pre-reading notice execution availability lottery, and the execution availability lottery is performed based on the acquired effect random number. In addition, the prior determination result of the stop symbol may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may perform this execution availability lottery.

  Next, the special figure state update process (step S3227) for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 is performed, and then, the special figure state update process for the special figure 1 is performed. Perform figure state update processing. In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S3231) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first loss flag, second loss flag, probability change flag, and hourly flag. Is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process to be described later Based on the determination result (stop pattern mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set to represent. By carrying out this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the second lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is turned off during the big hit game or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (second control state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S3231) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S3231).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S3231).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S3231) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores an opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful from the ROM 306. Get the open / close pattern.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. When the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit game is high (a special figure high probability state). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), it is a special figure low probability state. Therefore, the setting state of the probability variation flag affects the result of the determination of success / failure (special drawing lottery). In addition, when the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state, the electric chew is easy to open (for example, easy to hit), the opening time based on one hit is long, and the number of times of opening based on one hit is large. The variable starting area control is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, if the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is in a non-electric support state, and the variable start area control is performed so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time reduction flag also affects the variable start area control. Therefore, information indicating the setting state of the probability variation flag and / or the time reduction flag corresponds to an example of game control information, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control information determination means.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S3231).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S3227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special drawing 2 related lottery process), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the special condition 2 variable game start conditions, and the special figure 1 variable game start. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, or if both the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable game start condition are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Figure 1 Floating game does not start to fluctuate. That is, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs special figure 2 priority fluctuation, and the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure start port 232 (determination of special figure 2) is determined as the first special figure start. This is prioritized over a lottery based on winning a prize in the mouth 230 (a determination of success / failure in FIG. 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random numbers are stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum number of reservations, and the game is stored in the second special start area. When a ball wins, a random number is stored in both the first random number storage area and the first random number storage area, and the winning random number storage area that stores random numbers up to the maximum number of reservations in the second random number storage area In this case, the random number is stored in the second random number storage area regardless of the time when the random number is stored in the first random number storage area and the time when the random number is stored in the second random number storage area. If the random number is determined based on the random number, and the random number is not stored in the first random number storage area and the random number is stored in the second random number storage area, the second random number Based on random numbers stored in the storage area If the random number is not stored in the second random number storage area and the random number is stored in the first random number storage area, it is stored in the first random number storage area. In this case, a determination unit is provided for determining whether or not the image is correct based on the random number. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the startup information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means. Note that the special figure 2 related lottery process may be performed first after the special figure 2 state update process, then the special figure 1 state update process may be performed, and then the special figure 1 related lottery process may be performed.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special drawing related lottery process. In the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 93, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are shown without being distinguished from each other. The process from step S3229a to step S3229f is performed. Here, it demonstrates without distinguishing special figure 2 and special figure 1. FIG.

  In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 93, first, it is determined whether or not there is special figure holding information (step S3229a). Here, special figure hold information refers to the number of special figure hold. That is, here, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure variable games that are on hold is one or more. For example, a random number corresponding to a hold (a special figure winning random number) may be recognized as the special figure hold information without having the number of special figure hold as data. If there is no special figure hold information, this special figure related lottery process is terminated, and if there is special figure hold information, the process proceeds to step S3229b. In step S3229b, it is determined whether or not the special figure display device (212, 214) is in the special figure variation display or in the stop display. The related lottery process ends, and if none of the displays is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3229c. In step S3229c, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in operation. If the special figure is in operation, the special figure-related lottery process ends. If the special figure is inactive, the process proceeds to step S3229d.

  In step S3229d, a special drawing lottery process is performed. Here, first, a special set of random numbers (special figure winning random number, big hit special figure random number, small hit special figure random number, Take out the special figure random number for losing and the random number for determining the special figure fluctuation time), and transfer the starting information (set of random numbers) still stored in the reserved storage part from the currently stored area to the next area . That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the reserved storage unit of the special figure and the starting information is stored in the reserved storage unit of the special figure, the Nth oldest starting information is stored in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 Is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random numbers (special figure winning random number, big hit special figure random number, small hit special figure random number, lose special figure random number, and special figure variable time determination random number) are taken out from the special figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs processing corresponds to an example of the start information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 94A shows a special drawing lottery table. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag. If the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation is in progress (the special figure high probability state). If the special figure jackpot winning data with probability fluctuation is subtracted from the figure winning random number and carry occurs (if the value of the special figure winning data is larger than the special figure winning random number), the special figure jackpot is won and the carry occurs If not, the special figure jackpot will not be selected. That is, the special figure big hit winning random number range is 0 to 124. During the probability variation, the random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number is output from the channel CH2 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. In this channel CH2, a random number generation range of 0 to 4999 is set in the setting of the random number generation range in the random number generation circuit initial setting process shown in FIG. 90 (step S3053a). The range obtained is 0-4999. Therefore, the winning probability of the special figure jackpot during the probability change is 1/40.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it means that non-probability fluctuation is in progress (special figure low probability state). On the other hand, if a carry occurs (when the value of the special figure winning data is larger than the special figure winning random number), the special figure big hit is won, and if no carry occurs, the special figure big hit is not selected. That is, the special figure big hit winning random number range is 0 to 124 even during non-probability fluctuation. During non-probability fluctuation, the random number that is the basis of the special figure winning random number is output from the channel CH1 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. In this channel CH1, a random number generation range of 0 to 49999 is set in the setting of the random number generation range (step S3053a), and the possible range of the special figure winning random number during non-probability variation is 0 to 49999. Therefore, the winning probability of the special figure jackpot during non-probability fluctuation is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, by limiting the range (random number generation range) that the special figure winning random number can take from 0 to 65,999 from the default, 0 to 49999, the jackpot probability can be reduced to 1/400. Further, the special figure big hit winning data can be set to the same value during the probability fluctuation and the non-probability fluctuation. Determining the probability without limiting the random number generation range may lead to an increase in development man-hours and may cause erroneous probability design. In particular, the complexity becomes more noticeable when lottery is performed a plurality of times based on one opportunity. Therefore, limiting the random number generation range can reduce the development man-hours and stabilize the lottery process. In addition, it can be said that sharing the special figure big hit winning data during the probability fluctuation and the non-probability fluctuation can reduce the development man-hours and stabilize the lottery process.

  In FIG. 94 (a), only the special drawing big hit lottery table is shown, but a predetermined value is prepared as the special drawing small hit winning data. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 subtracts the special figure big hit winning data from the acquired special figure winning random number, and when no carry occurs (when the value of the special figure winning data is smaller than the special figure winning random number), This time, if the special figure small win winning data is subtracted from the value obtained by subtracting the special figure big hit winning data, and a carry occurs here (if the special figure small winning data is larger than the special figure winning random number) If you win a small figure and no carry occurs, you will lose. It is also possible to separately provide lost winning data. In this way, the special chart “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing” are determined, and the determination result is obtained as the special figure determination result. The number of special figure variable games that are held is stored in the special figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure variable games that are held each time step S3229d is executed. The value obtained by subtracting 1 from is re-stored in this special figure holding number storage area.

  Next, in the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 93, a special symbol stop symbol is drawn using software random numbers based on the special figure success / failure determination result (step S3229e). FIG. 94B shows a stop symbol lottery table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the stop symbol lottery table, symbol winning data corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special symbol (see FIG. 5A) is defined for each success / failure determination result. In FIG. 5B, the winning probability is also shown.

  When the determination result is a big hit, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines a special jackpot random number for a big hit out of one set of random numbers previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible numerical range is 0 to 0). 99) from special figure A, special figure B, ... special figure F, the symbol winning data corresponding to each stop symbol is gradually subtracted, and the stop symbol when a carry occurs is used as the special symbol determination result. . If the result of the determination is a small hit, a special hit random number for a small hit (a numerical range that can be taken is 0 to 99) out of one set of random numbers previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. If the symbol winning data of Fig. G is drawn and a carry occurs, "Special Illustration G" is won, and if no carry occurs, the special drawing H is further subtracted from the value obtained by subtracting the symbol winning data of Special Illustration G. The symbol winning data is drawn, and since a carry occurs here, “Special Figure H” is won. Note that before drawing the symbol winning data of the special figure H, it may be determined that the “special figure H” has been won. In this way, when the determination result is a small hit, “special figure G” or “special figure H” is determined as the special figure determination result. Further, if the determination result is a loss, a special figure random number for loss (a possible numerical range is 0 to 99) out of one set of random numbers previously acquired from the storage unit of the RAM 308 will be special figure I. If a carry occurs, the special symbol I will be selected, and if no carry occurs, the special symbol J will be further subtracted from the value obtained by subtracting the special symbol I symbol winning data. The winning data is drawn, and here a carry occurs, so “Special Figure J” is won. Here, it may be determined that “Special Figure J” has been won before drawing the symbol winning data of Special Figure J. In this way, when the determination result is lost, “Special Figure I” or “Special Figure J” is determined as the special figure determination result. Note that the first sub-control unit 400 determines a stop symbol pattern that is a combination of decorative symbols according to the special symbol determination result determined here.

  Further, a special figure variation time determination random number (possible numerical range is 0 to 255) of the random numbers for one set previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is acquired, and the acquired special figure variation time determination random number is acquired. In the lottery using, based on the result of the special figure determination, one time (special figure fluctuation time) for displaying the special figure on the special figure display device (212, 214) is selected from a plurality of fluctuation times. . In addition, in the 1st sub control part 400, the production | presentation aspect of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 according to the special figure change time determined here is determined. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that selects one special figure fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times by lottery using the special figure fluctuation time determination random number value also corresponds to an example of a lottery means. Here, the lottery process for the special figure variation time corresponds to the lottery process related to the production, which is different from the determination of whether or not the special figure is a big hit, and different from the lottery for determining the symbol of the special figure. That is, the lottery process is irrelevant to the change of the control state and is not related to the payout of the prize ball.

  In step S3229f, the one set of random numbers previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is erased, and the special drawing related lottery process ends. In step S3231, which is performed following the special figure-related lottery process in step S3229, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, per round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special figure. Bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (result of determining a special symbol), information indicating a control state, and the like, a winning effect start command and an end effect start are included. In the case of a command, information indicating a control state is included, and in the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating a control state, a per-round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information representing the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing the control state, and information representing the special figure variation time stored in the RAM 308 as command data. The information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is on hold is set.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state that are stored in the RAM 308 and are output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the winning effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the winning effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the winning effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), The jackpot game starts.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for informing the player that the big hit is to be ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). finish.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held. Information indicating the number of games is set.

  In step S3231, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance.

  Further, in this step S3231, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 91, an external output signal setting process (step S3233) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. In step S3235, device monitoring processing is performed.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing. First, in step S3235a, information in the internal information register 3101 is acquired. Since step S3235a is executed for each timer interrupt, the information in the internal information register 3101 is acquired for each timer interrupt.

  In step S3235b, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the random number generation circuit 318 based on the information acquired in step S3235a. Here, the abnormality of the random number generation circuit refers to both abnormality of the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and abnormality of the random number monitoring circuit 3184. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S3235c. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S3235e.

  In step S3235c, the random number generation circuit abnormality flag is set to ON. This flag is stored in the RAM 308. More specifically, there are a flag indicating an abnormality of the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and a flag indicating an abnormality of the random number monitoring circuit 3184. Hereinafter, these flags may be collectively referred to as a random number generation circuit abnormality flag.

  Subsequently, in step S3235d to be executed, preparation for transmission of the random number generation circuit abnormality flag setting command is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3235e. The random number generation circuit abnormality flag setting command is a command including information that can identify whether the frequency monitoring circuit 3182 is abnormal or the random number monitoring circuit 3184 is abnormal.

  In step S3235e, other device monitoring processing is executed. For example, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S3205 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error is monitored. Device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame open error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, Display data to be output to the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S3219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310. When these processes are completed, the device monitoring process in step S3235 ends.

  In the subsequent step S3237, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON in order to determine whether or not a power interruption (power interruption) has been detected. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S3239. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S3241.

  In step S3239, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S3201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control part main process shown in FIG. 88 is executed. Return. On the other hand, in step S3241, a power interruption process for returning to the power interruption state at the time of power recovery is performed. In the present embodiment, the process for determining the power interruption (step S3237) and the power interruption process (step S3241) are executed in the interrupt control of the main control unit, but it is not always necessary to perform the interrupt control in the main control unit. Instead, a forced interrupt may be generated based on the input of the low voltage signal, and the power interruption process may be executed by this forced interrupt. However, in the power interruption process executed by the forced interrupt in this way, in addition to the power interruption process (step S3241) in the present embodiment, each register of the CPU 304 executed in the timer interrupt start process (S3201) described above. The process of temporarily saving the value to the stack area must also be executed at the same time.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of power interruption processing in the main control unit.

  In this power interruption process, first, the stack pointer is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (step S3431), and then the power status stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is updated to information indicating suspend. (Step S3432). Subsequently, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum Is set in the RAM 308 (step S3433). Finally, access to the RAM 308 is set to be prohibited (step S3434), the process at the time of power interruption ends, and the pachinko machine 100 is eventually disconnected. When the voltage is restored before the voltage completely decreases, the reset operation is performed by the reset control circuit 314 when the WDT 3141 provided in the reset control circuit 314 shown in FIG. System reset).

  The main control unit timer interrupt process described above also corresponds to an example of the main process.

  Next, a process of acquiring a special winning random number and a normal winning random number in the winning acceptance process (step S3217) shown in FIG. 91 will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flow of processing for acquiring the special winning random number and the normal winning random number in the winning acceptance processing in step S3217.

  In step S3217a, it is determined whether or not the random number generation circuit abnormality flag is set to ON. This flag is a flag set in step S3235c in FIG. 95. When there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number update clock, or the random number updated in the random number update circuit 3183 shown in FIG. 77 is updated normally. If not, the corresponding flag is set to ON. If this flag is set to ON, the winning acceptance process is terminated, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S3217b.

  In step S3217b, there is a special signal of FIG. 1 indicating that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment). If the result is negative, the process proceeds to step S3217f. If the result is positive, the process proceeds to step S3217c. In step S3217c, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (the special figure high probability state). If the probability variation flag is set to OFF, it means that non-probability variation is in progress (special figure low probability state), and step S3217d is executed. In step S3217d, a random number is acquired from the random number register of channel CH1 of the random number generation circuit 318. In the present embodiment, a similar signal is sent to the CPU separately from the incoming signal that triggers random number latching, and the CPU responds to a signal in a predetermined channel (here, CH1) based on the reception of the signal. Get the latched random number from the random number register. The CPU 304 adds the value of the R register to the acquired random number, and further obtains a value obtained by adding 1 as the special figure 1 winning random number, and proceeds to step S3217f. Note that the CPU 304 recognizes the random number generation range set in step S3053a shown in FIG. 90, and performs addition processing based on the random number generation range. That is, when the added value exceeds the maximum value of the random number generation range, the remaining value is added to the minimum value of the random number generation range.

  On the other hand, if the probability change flag is set to ON, the probability is changing, and step S3217e is executed. In step S3217e, a random number is acquired from the random number register of channel CH2 of the random number generation circuit 318, and in the same manner as in step S3217d, the CPU 304 adds the value of the R register to the acquired random number and adds a value obtained by adding 1 to the special value. 1 is obtained as a winning random number, and the process proceeds to step S3217f.

  In step S3217f, there is a special signal of FIG. 2 indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has been won, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment). If the result is negative, the process proceeds to step S3217j. If the result is positive, the process proceeds to step S3217g. Also in step S3217g, as in step S3217c, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and if the probability variation flag is set to OFF (if non-probability variation is in progress), the random number of the channel CH1 of the random number generation circuit 318 The random number is acquired from the register, and similarly to step S3217d, the CPU 304 adds the value of the R register to the acquired random number, and further obtains a value obtained by adding 1 as a special figure 2 winning random number (step S3217H). The process proceeds to step S3217j. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is set to ON (if the probability is changing), the random number is acquired from the random number register of the channel CH2 of the random number generation circuit 318, and similarly to step S3217d, the CPU 304 The value of the R register is added to the value, and a value obtained by adding 1 is obtained as the special figure 2 winning random number (step S3217i), and the process proceeds to step S3217j.

  In step S3217j, whether there is a general-purpose entrance signal indicating that a win has been made at the general-purpose start opening 228, and whether the number of general-purpose variable games held is less than a predetermined number (2 in this embodiment). If the answer is negative, the winning acceptance process is terminated. If the answer is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3217k. In step S3217k, the time reduction flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to. If the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is a normal low probability state (non-electric support), and step S3217l is executed. In step S32217l, a random number is acquired as a normal winning random number from the random number register of the channel CH3 of the random number generation circuit 318, and this winning acceptance process ends. On the other hand, if the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is a normal high probability state (during electric support), and step S3217m is executed. In step S3217m, a random number is acquired as a normal winning random number from the random number register of channel CH4 of the random number generation circuit 318, and the winning acceptance process is ended.

  Here, based on the content described above, the operation when the voltage supply to the game machine is reduced will be described. For example, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like in a big hit state, when the game table is returned to the initial state by turning on the power again, the player becomes extremely disadvantageous. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, a power interruption process (step S3241 in FIG. 91) for holding the state of the game machine with the power stored in the capacitor is executed. This power interruption process is executed not only when the power is turned off, but also when the supply voltage temporarily decreases due to factors such as static electricity. Hereinafter, an operation when the power is turned off (hereinafter referred to as “power off”) and an operation when the supply voltage is temporarily reduced (hereinafter referred to as “momentary interruption”) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a diagram showing an operation when the power is off, and FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an operation when there is an instantaneous interruption.

  When the power is turned off, the voltage is not supplied (power interruption occurs), but the voltage does not immediately become 0, but the supply voltage gradually drops due to the electric power stored in the capacitor. When the supply voltage is effective up to a predetermined voltage (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is transmitted from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the CPU 304. By receiving this signal, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred in step S3237 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and the power interruption process in step S3241 is executed. FIG. 97 (a) shows that the normal processing is executed until the supply voltage drops to 9V after the power failure occurs, and the power interruption processing is started when the supply voltage becomes 9V. Has been. By this power interruption process, data indicating the state of the game machine is stored in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, a capacitor is provided that can sufficiently secure the time required for the execution of the power interruption process (main control section power interruption time delay). Then, when the process at the time of power interruption is completed, the apparatus is in a standby state as it is. Thereafter, when the supply of power is not resumed, the voltage drops to 0 and the operation of the game machine stops.

  On the other hand, even in the case of a momentary interruption, a low voltage signal is transmitted from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the CPU 304, so that the power interruption process is executed, and then the apparatus enters a standby state. FIG. 97 (b) shows that the power interruption process is started due to a temporary voltage drop. Here, even if the voltage recovers to the operating voltage, the standby state continues. If this standby state continues, WDT 3141 of reset control circuit 314 of main control unit 300 is not restarted (step S3203 in FIG. 91 is not executed), and WDT 3141 times out. As a result, the reset control circuit 314 outputs a system reset signal. Thereafter, when the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 88 is resumed, a return process (steps S3009 to S3011) including the data write-back process in step S3009 is executed based on the data stored in the power interruption process. . FIG. 97 (b) shows that a reset signal due to timeout of WDT 3141 is transmitted, so that the process shifts from a standby state to a return process (reset process). By this return processing, the state of the gaming table is restored to the state before the processing at the time of power interruption. If there is a problem with the data stored in the power interruption process, it is determined that the state before the power interruption process cannot be restored, and the contents of the RAM 308 are cleared (step S3013 in FIG. 88). ).

  Next, the effect of setting a random number generation range by the random number generation circuit 318 of the present embodiment will be described, and then problems will be described. As described above, the random number generation circuit 318 included in the gaming machine of the present embodiment can set a random number generation range that is the basis of the lottery result. Using this function, the game state can be easily set.

  First, the case where the random number generation range is 0 to 65535 will be described. For example, when these random numbers correspond to either winning or losing, it is assumed that the winning probability is designed to be 1/400 (0.25%). There are 65536 random numbers to be generated, but when 1/400 of 65536 is calculated, it is 163.84, which is not an integer. If 164 random numbers close to this number are made to correspond to the win, strictly speaking, the winning probability is not 1/400.

  Here, it is assumed that the random number generation range is set to 0-49999. In order to make the winning probability 1/400 (0.25%) as in the above case, it is only necessary to match 1/400 of the generated random numbers 50000, that is, 125 values. . For example, the winning probability can be reduced to 1/400 by associating the values of 0 to 124 out of 50000 random numbers and associating the other values of 125 to 49999 with the loss. That is, the random number generation range (for example, 0 to 49999) and the random number range (for example, 0 to 124) corresponding to the winning can be set so that the winning probability is as designed (for example, 1/400).

  As described above, a desired winning probability can be set by appropriately setting the random number generation range. This makes it possible, for example, to exclude the random number generation range corresponding to the big hit and leave the random number generation range corresponding to the big hit, or to prevent the generation of random numbers corresponding to half of the random number generation range corresponding to the big hit. It is. In particular, if a random number generation range as described with reference to FIG. 82 can be set, it becomes easier to design a gaming machine than when only the maximum value is set. For this reason, it can be said that setting the random number generation range is useful in the design of a game machine.

  Next, a method for changing the winning probability by changing the random number generation range will be described. For example, suppose that the maximum value of the random number generation range is changed from 49999 to 249 from the state in which the values from 0 to 124 are matched in the random number generation range of 0 to 49999. In this case, values from 0 to 124 correspond to wins, values from 125 to 249 correspond to loses, and the winning probability is halved. That is, the winning probability can be easily changed by changing only the random number generation range while fixing the value corresponding to the winning or losing. In the above description, the example in which the hit range is biased has been described for easier understanding, but the hit range may not be biased.

  As a method for determining whether it is a hit or a loss based on the generated random number, a method in which a table that defines these correspondences is prepared and used can be considered. However, if the winning probability is to be changed by this method, it is necessary to prepare a table corresponding to the winning probability and execute a process for selectively using these according to the state of the game. In the above-described method, only one table that defines values corresponding to hits or misses is required, so that the memory capacity burden can be reduced. As a matter of course, the process of switching the table is unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of random number generation channels having different random number generation ranges are prepared, and the winning probability during the game is changed by using these channels properly. However, the random number generation range is appropriately changed for one channel. The winning probability may be changed by using a configuration to do so. In this embodiment, random numbers may be processed and used for lottery. In this case, a corresponding table may be prepared in consideration of processing.

  Here, a problem when the random number generation range is unintentionally changed will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows the problem of the random number generation range. For example, it is assumed that the above-described instantaneous interruption occurs due to factors such as static electricity, and then a return process (user reset) is performed. In this case, the internal register of the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained as it is before the return process. However, information in the internal register may be rewritten due to a change in voltage. If the random number generation range is changed unintentionally, the winning probability will change.

  For example, in the non-stochastic fluctuation state, a random number generation range of 0 to 49999 is set as shown in the upper part of FIG. Is a random number corresponding to. It is assumed that a factor such as static electricity is generated in this state, and the random number generation range becomes 0 to 250. In this case, since the winning probability is reduced from 1/400 to 1/2, the store side is seriously damaged.

  Further, in the probability fluctuation state, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 98 (b), a random number generation range of 0 to 4999 is set, and among these, 0 to 124 (range indicated by left-downward hatching) is the hit. Assume that the corresponding random number. It is assumed that a factor such as static electricity is generated in this state and the random number generation range becomes 0 to 59999. In this case, the winning probability is reduced from 1/40 to 1/480, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player.

  As explained in the above example, if lottery processing is performed using a method that limits the numerical range in which random numbers are generated to an arbitrary numerical range, the lottery processing will not be performed if the numerical range restricted due to some abnormality changes. There arises a problem that it leads to stabilization.

  In order to prevent such a situation, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in step S3053a in FIG. 90, a process for resetting the random number generation range to a state immediately before the cause of the return process is executed. By re-setting the random number generation range in this way, the above problem can be prevented from occurring. That is, it is possible to prevent the lottery process from becoming unstable while performing the lottery process using a method of limiting the numerical value range in which the random number is generated to an arbitrary numerical value range.

  In this embodiment, since the random number generation range is set when the game machine is started, the state immediately before the cause of the return process is the same as the initial state. For example, the random number generation range is set during the game. In the case of a changeable configuration, a process for returning to the previous state may be executed.

  In addition, as in this embodiment, the random number generation range is reset for a channel for which the random number generation range is set, and the random number generation range is set for a channel for which the random number generation range is not set. In the case of a configuration that is not corrected, there are channels that are initialized and channels that are not initialized. In this case, since it is not known whether the channel is initialized from the outside of the basic circuit 302, there is an effect of preventing fraud.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the random number register 3188 is allowed to be latched in step S3053b of FIG. In this way, when there is an abnormality in the random number latched in the random number register 3188, the frequency with which this random number is used can be lowered. At this time, the content of the random number latch flag register 3189 is rewritten with information indicating that the random number register 3188 is in a state in which the random number can be latched. In this embodiment, the random number register 3188 and the setting of the random number generation range are simultaneously executed by the user program (see FIG. 89). It may be. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the random number register 3188 enters the permissible state, the random number remains until a new random number is latched, but if possible, the value of the random number register 3188 is set to a predetermined value. You may make it set (for example, set to 0). In this case, it is possible not to use random numbers that may be abnormal.

  When the user reset by the WDT 3141 is executed, the above-described resetting is executed through the determination of the drive voltage (step S3003 in FIG. 88) after the user reset is executed (step S3053 in FIG. 89). ). The time required for this determination processing is not constant because it depends on the voltage supply. For this reason, it is possible to give randomness to the timing at which random numbers reflecting the resetting start to be output, which is effective in preventing fraud. Note that the same effect can be obtained in the above-described configuration in which the maximum random number is updated when an update command is received from the CPU 304.

  In the above description, an example of a problem caused by a change in voltage and a countermeasure for the problem has been described. However, for example, a value in the start value selection circuit 3183b of the random number generation circuit 318 may be rewritten. is there. In this case, a value that should not be generated may be output from the random number update circuit 3183. Also for such a problem, as in the example of the random number generation range described above, by executing a process of resetting the value in the start value selection circuit 3183b to the state immediately before the cause of the return process occurs, It is possible to prevent the above problems from occurring. In addition, the value in the start value selection circuit 3183b may be reset separately according to the random number generation range. That is, it is possible to prevent an abnormal operation from occurring due to a voltage change by executing a process of appropriately resetting a value that can be set by the random number generation circuit 318 as necessary.

  In addition to the change in voltage, for example, when an unexpected operation occurs due to traveling outside the specified area, the above-described problem may occur. In particular, when traveling outside the designated area, there is a high possibility that the same situation will be reproduced due to a program mistake or the like, and there is a risk that fraud will be easier than when the voltage changes. Therefore, in this embodiment, even when traveling outside the designated area occurs, resetting is performed by step S3053a and step S3053b in FIG.

  Here, based on the above description, a supplementary description will be given of the start timing (steps S3011 and S3015) of WDT 3141 in the main process of the main control unit in FIG. In normal WDT, counting up is performed independently of program execution. With this configuration, even if there is some problem in the execution of the program, the reset operation (user reset) can be executed without being affected by this. For this reason, WDT needs to be activated (reactivated) at the time of initial setting. However, there may be a problem depending on the start timing. This problem will be described by taking as an example a case where WDT is started immediately after initial setting 1 in step S3001 in FIG.

  It is assumed that the main process of the main control unit is started in a state where data for restoration is stored in the RAM 308 by the user reset. First, initial setting 1 is executed in step S3001, and then WDT is activated. Next, standby processing in step S3003 is executed until a sufficient drive voltage is secured.

  For example, when the above-described user reset is executed due to instability of the supply voltage, the execution time of this standby process may become long. Here, if the standby process takes a long time, the WDT may time out during the subsequent execution of step S3007 or step S3009, and the user reset may be executed again. In this case, since the main control unit main process is executed again from the beginning, the processing time until the return data stored in the RAM 308 is returned to the register becomes long.

  Further, for example, in step S3009, when the data in the RAM 308 is returned to the register and the data in the RAM 308 is erased, the user reset is executed with a part of the data in the RAM 308 being erased. There is also a possibility. In this case, even if the main control unit main process is executed again from the beginning, the return data in the RAM 308 is incomplete, and it is not determined in step S3007 that the data can be returned. Even if it is determined in step S3007 that recovery is possible, the data write-back processing in step S3009 cannot completely return to the state before the user reset.

  In order to avoid such a problem, in this embodiment, a system reset is executed by a timeout by WDT 3141. However, in this embodiment, a user reset may be further executed by a timeout by WDT 3141. The WDT 3141 is configured to be activated after the determination of the drive voltage and before the main control unit timer interrupt process is permitted (steps S3011 and S3015). The above configuration is an example, and WDT 3141 is activated so that WDT 3141 does not time out after main control unit main processing is started after user reset and before main control unit timer interrupt processing is permitted. It is preferable to do. In addition, after the user reset is performed, the main control unit starts the progress of the game (in this embodiment, steps S3017 to S3019 of the main control unit main process are started, and the main control unit timer interrupt process is started) WDT 3141 is preferably activated so that WDT 3141 does not time out before In particular, the process for returning the game after the user reset (the process for enabling the progress of the game) includes a standby process for executing the initial setting process of the liquid crystal image display device (decorated symbol display device). In such a case, the above problem is more likely to occur, so that the WDT 3141 is activated more effectively at the timing described above. Furthermore, even if the WDT 3141 is activated in the first process of the main control unit timer interrupt process, the above problem can be avoided. In the above description, the case where the user reset is executed is described as an example, but the same applies to the case where the system reset is executed.

  Here, a modification of the random number update circuit 3183 described with reference to FIG. 79 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows a modification of the random number update circuit 3183 described in FIG. A random number update circuit 3183n shown in FIG. 99A is obtained by adding a random number sequence change circuit 3183d to the random number update circuit 3183 described in FIG.

  The random number sequence change circuit 3183d is provided with a plurality of random number tables in advance. FIG. 99B shows a plurality of random number sequences in which an array of 65536 random numbers is predetermined. When using these plurality of random number sequences, it is possible to set whether to use the same random number sequence continuously or to change to another random number sequence when one random number sequence is made a round. Furthermore, when changing to another random number sequence, it is possible to set whether to change automatically even if there is no instruction, or whether to instruct a change each time. Note that when a round signal is received from the counter circuit 3183a, it is determined that one round of the random number sequence has been made.

  When the random number sequence to be used in the random number sequence changing circuit 3183d is determined, a value is extracted from this random number sequence according to the count value output from the counter circuit 3183a. This extracted value is output as a random number. For example, in FIG. 99 (b), when it is decided to use the random number sequence B, when a count value “5” is input, “9806” is output as a random number (the thick frame in FIG. 99 (b)). (See the part indicated by).

  Here, an example of processing when the maximum value is set in the maximum value setting register 3183c will be described. In FIG. 81, the example in which the range of values output from the count circuit 3183a is changed according to the maximum value set in the maximum value setting register 3183c has been described. In FIG. 81, the value output from the count circuit 3183a is used as a random number as it is. Here, the value output from the count circuit 3183a is used as a count value instead of a random number, and is input to the random number sequence change circuit 3183d.

  For example, when the maximum value is set to 9999, a count value of 0 to 9999 is output from the count circuit 3183a. Here, the random number sequence change circuit 3183d acquires the maximum value data from the maximum value setting register 3183c, and executes a process of deleting a value exceeding the maximum value from the values of the random number sequence and filling the empty portion. By this process, a random number sequence in which values 0 to 9999 are randomly arranged is prepared. When a value corresponding to the count value is output as a random number using this random number sequence, a random number having a random number generation range of 0 to 9999 can be output. Note that the above method is an example. For example, when a value corresponding to a count value is referred to from a random number sequence and the maximum value is exceeded, subsequent values are sequentially referred to, and the referenced value indicates the maximum value. Other methods may be used, such as outputting a value that does not exceed the value.

  Here, an example of detecting an abnormality in the random number monitoring circuit 3184 when the random number update circuit 3183n is used will be described. In this case, the count value output from the counter circuit 3183a is compared before and after one random number update, and it is checked whether or not the same count value is output. If the same count value is output, information indicating abnormality is output. The check timing may be every predetermined cycle longer than the random number update cycle. The random number monitoring circuit 3184 may monitor the random number output from the random number sequence changing circuit 3183d. However, as described above, the monitoring accuracy is improved by monitoring the count value output from the counter circuit 3138a. At the same time, the monitoring burden can be reduced.

  In addition, as described in the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 77, a random number monitoring circuit 3183n may be provided outside the random number generation circuit 318, and a random number monitoring circuit 3184 is provided inside the random number update circuit 3183n. May be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100, a payout control unit main process executed by the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the payout control unit.

  The payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, an I / O port, and a voltage monitoring circuit. These CPU, RAM, ROM, and I / O port are constituted by a single microcomputer (dispensing control microcomputer). In addition, the payout control microcomputer may have the same function as the main control microcomputer in this specification, and may not include a part of the function (for example, a random number circuit). Similarly to the voltage monitoring circuit included in the main control unit 300, the voltage monitoring circuit included in the dispensing control unit 600 has a predetermined voltage value (in this embodiment, the power supply voltage supplied from the power management unit 650 to the dispensing control unit 600). If it is less than 9V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the CPU of the payout control unit 600. Even if a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300, the low voltage signal may not be output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the payout control unit 600.

  A command including power-on information is transmitted from the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Based on the reception of this command, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 starts the payout control unit main process. The payout control unit main process may be started before receiving a command including power-on information from the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and a predetermined process (for example, step S3603 to be described later) is received until the command is received. You may make it skip, without performing step S3610).

  First, in step S3501, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU of the payout control unit 600. In step S3502, it is determined whether or not a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the dispensing control unit 600, that is, whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S3502 is repeated. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S3503. move on.

  In step S3503, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to the counter / timer, a setting for allowing the payout control unit 600 to write to the RAM, I Performs initial setting of / O port.

  In step S3504, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption). If the process returns to the state before the power interruption, the process proceeds to step S3505. Specifically, also in this step S3504, the same process as in step S3009 of the main process of the main control unit 300 is performed. If the RAM needs to be cleared, the process proceeds to step S3506 in order to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not necessary, the power status information is read from the RAM of the payout control unit 600. If the power status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S3506. If the information indicates suspend, the checksum is executed on the RAM of the payout control unit 600. If the checksum result is normal, the flow advances to step S3505 to return to the state before power interruption. If the result of the checksum is abnormal, the process advances to step S3506 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process advances to step S3506.

  In step S3505, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, of the storage area of the payout controller 600 RAM, a storage area to be cleared upon power recovery (a command buffer for storing commands, a memory other than an error status for storing error status, etc.) Area) is initialized.

  In step S3506, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM of the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S3507, initial setting 3 is performed. In the initial setting 3, information other than the illegal payout error and the payout excess error among the error statuses stored in the error status storage area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 600 is cleared, interrupt permission is set, and the like.

  In step S3508, it is determined whether or not there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main control unit 300. If there is unanalyzed data, command analysis processing is performed in step S3509, and there is no unanalyzed data. Then, the process proceeds to step S3510.

  In step S3510, as in step S3502, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. If the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S3508. If the signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S3511.

In step S3511, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 600, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Also, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM of the payout control unit 600 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and a numerical storage area for checksum calculation The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value stored in is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-described numerical storage area for checksum calculation, A setting for prohibiting writing to the RAM of the payout control unit 600 is performed. Note that, after step S3511, the process for monitoring whether or not the low voltage signal is off is performed in the same manner as in step S3502. You may make it return to the head (step S3501) of the main process.
<Discharge control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a payout control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  The payout control unit 600 also includes a counter circuit that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms), and starts the payout control unit timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. To do.

  In step S3601, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU of the payout control unit 600 to the stack area is performed. The payout control unit 600 is also provided with a watch dog timer (WDT). In step S3602, the WDT is restarted.

  In step S3603, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the value of the I / O port of the payout control unit 600 is acquired to detect the state of the payout sensor 604 and the like shown in FIG. In step S3604, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated, including timers for timing the turn-on / off time of the payout notification LED, the drive / non-drive time of the payout motor 602 shown in FIG.

  In step S3605, an error monitoring process is performed. Various error signals such as a lower pan full error signal and a glass frame opening error signal are sent from the main control unit 300 to the I / O port of the payout control unit 600. The RAM of the payout control unit 600 is provided with an error status storage area, a game medium lending information storage area, a payout completion number check storage area, and a motor drive amount storage area. Information corresponding to each error signal is stored in the error status storage area. In this error monitoring process, it is determined whether or not various error signals are ON. If ON, information indicating an error corresponding to the error status storage area is stored. If OFF, the error status storage area is stored. The information indicating the cancellation of the error corresponding to is stored. Further, whether or not communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is possible is determined based on whether or not a command from the main control unit can be received continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), and an error status is stored. If the communication is possible, information indicating that communication is possible is stored in the area, and if the communication is impossible, information indicating that communication is not possible (main control communication error) is stored. In addition, as to whether or not communication between the card unit (CR unit) 608 and the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 is possible, is it impossible to continuously receive a signal from the card unit 608 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms)? If the communication is possible in the error status storage area, information indicating that communication is possible is conversely impossible if communication is impossible (CR unit unconnected error) Is stored. In addition, an error release signal is also sent to the I / O port of the payout control unit 600. In this error monitoring process, it is also determined whether or not the error cancellation signal is on. If the error cancellation signal is on, the information stored in the error status storage area is initialized to cancel the error.

  In step S3606, CR unit communication processing is performed. In this CR unit communication process, a game medium lending signal is received from the interface unit 606 shown in FIG. 4 to determine whether or not the game medium lending signal sensor signal is on. When the game medium lending signal is on (interface) When a ball lending request is input from the unit 606), information indicating that there is a game medium lending request is stored in the game medium lending information storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S3607, a payout operation management process is performed. In the error status storage area described above, information on illegal payout errors and information on payout excess errors are also stored. In this payout operation management process, the information on the illegal payout error and the payout excess error information are read from the error status storage area, and if neither error has occurred, the signal from the payout sensor 604 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the number of payouts is monitored based on the payout sensor signal. That is, when a predetermined error has occurred, the driving of the payout motor 602 is stopped, that is, the payout of a prize medium (for example, a game ball) from the payout device is stopped. Specifically, the signal of the payout sensor 604 is detected to determine whether or not the payout sensor signal is on. When the payout sensor signal is on (when the ball passes through the payout sensor), the number of payouts completed. 1 is added to the check and stored in the payout completion number check storage area. Further, when the payout sensor signal is turned on when there is no request for a winning ball or a lending ball, information indicating an illegal payout error is stored in the error status storage area, and the number of winning balls or the number of lending balls is When each request number is exceeded and the number exceeds the predetermined number, information indicating a payout excess error is stored in the error status storage area.

  In addition, the information indicating the bottom full tank error, the information on the illegal payout error, and the information on the payout excess error are read from the error status storage area described above, and when any error has not occurred, the payout start monitoring process, the initial Any one of position search operation processing, normal payout operation processing, retry operation processing, and reverse rotation operation processing is performed.

  As described above, the payout device 152 includes a sprocket that is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor 602. This sprocket temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and also drives the payout motor 602 to rotate by a predetermined angle, thereby temporarily retaining the game ball. Are delivered one by one downward to the dispensing device 152. In the payout start monitoring process, when the number of lending requests and the number of requested prize balls are 0, and the number of requested next prize balls is other than 0, the number of requested next prize balls is set as the number of requested prize balls, and the next prize ball request Clear the number. When the position of the payout motor 602 is indefinite (when the operation mode is the initial position search operation mode), 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check and stored in the payout completion number check storage area. When the position is fixed (when the operation mode is the normal payout operation mode), 0 is set in the payout completion number check storage area as a payout completion number check. Also, the requested number of winning balls is converted into an amount for driving the payout motor 602 (motor drive amount), and this is stored in the motor drive amount storage area provided in the RAM, and the motor control data table provided in the RAM is referred to. Then, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected, and motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit that controls the payout motor 602 via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the motor of the payout motor 602 a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

  In the initial position search operation process and the normal payout operation process, after the payout motor 602 is driven, the payout completion check is read out from the payout completion number check storage area. If the payout completion check is other than 0, information indicating the payout device error is set in the error status storage area, and preparation for executing the retry operation process is performed.

  In the retry operation process, wait for a predetermined time to elapse (wait for the retry operation start wait timer to become 0), and when the retry operation start wait timer becomes 0, execute the reverse rotation operation process. Make preparations. In the reverse rotation operation process, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the motor control data table described above, and motor drive control data indicating reverse rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. To do. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the payout motor 602 a predetermined number of times to drive the sprocket in a reverse rotation. Further, in the reverse rotation operation process, preparation for executing the payout start monitoring process is performed after the driving of the payout motor 602 is completed.

  In step S3608, a payout motor drive monitoring process is performed. In the payout motor drive monitoring process, any one of a drive start monitoring process, an acceleration drive process, a constant speed drive process, a brake drive process, and a drive end process is performed.

  In the drive start monitoring process, the information on the lower pan full tank error, the information on the illegal payout error, and the information on the payout excess error are read from the error status storage area described above. Motor control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the control data table, and motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the dispensing motor 602 a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

  In the acceleration drive process and constant speed drive process, 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check every time the excitation position of the payout motor 602 is changed 16 times, except during the initial position search operation of the sprocket or the reverse rotation operation. And stored in the payout completion number check storage area. When the updated payout completion number check is less than −4, preparation for executing the brake drive process is made. Further, the game medium lending information is read from the above-mentioned game medium lending information storage area, the presence / absence of information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is determined, and information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is present. In some cases (when a ball lending request is input from the interface unit 606 while paying out a prize ball), preparations for executing the brake driving process are made. In the brake drive process, it waits for a predetermined time to elapse (waits for the motor drive management timer to become 0), and when the motor drive management timer becomes 0, prepares to execute the drive end process In the drive end process, a post-process for driving the motor is performed.

  In step S3609, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM of the payout control unit 600 (for example, a prize ball signal output every time a payout sensor signal is input) is sent via an information output circuit (not shown). The information is output to an information input circuit 350 that is separate from the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S3610, port output processing is performed. In this port output process, a launch permission signal for permitting launch is output from the I / O port of the payout controller 600 to the launch controller 630 shown in FIG. However, when the above-mentioned main control communication error or CR unit non-connection error has occurred, a state is set in which the firing permission signal is not output. Therefore, in a state where the main control unit 300 is cut off and power is supplied to the payout control unit 600, a main control communication error is recognized in step S3605 described above, and a firing permission signal is output in this port output processing. It is set to the state that does not.

In step S3611, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S3601 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and the payout control unit timer interrupt process ends.
<Second internal information register>

  Next, the second internal information register of the interrupt control circuit 3100 whose first internal information register is shown in FIG. 84 will be described. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining a second internal information register prepared in internal information register 3101 of interrupt control circuit 3100.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the second internal information register is an 8-bit register, but the seventh to third bits remain set to “0” and are not used. The initial values of the 2nd to 0th bits are “0”.

  In this embodiment, a system reset signal is input from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the reset control circuit 314 when the power is turned on. Then, the system reset signal 1 is output from the reset control circuit 314 to the internal circuit of the microprocessor 3000 via the internal bus 3300. In this embodiment, when the WDT 3141 times out, the reset control circuit 314 indicates that a WDT timeout signal has been output to the internal circuit of the microprocessor 3000 via the internal bus 3300. A system reset signal 2 is output. Further, when the CPU 304 refers to an address outside the predetermined range (running outside the designated area), the reset control circuit 314 runs outside the designated area via the internal bus 3300 to the circuit inside the microprocessor 3000. A system reset signal 3 indicating that the prohibit signal has been output is output.

  When the interrupt control circuit 3100 acquires the system reset signal 1 via the internal bus 3300, it sets “1” to the second bit. That is, the second bit of the first internal information register corresponds to a bit indicating that the reset factor generated immediately before is a reset due to power-on.

  Further, when the interrupt control circuit 3100 acquires the system reset signal 2 via the internal bus 3300, it sets “1” to the first bit. That is, the first bit of the first internal information register corresponds to a bit indicating that the reset factor generated immediately before is a timeout of WDT 3141.

Furthermore, when the interrupt control circuit 3100 acquires the system reset signal 3 via the internal bus 3300, it sets “1” to the 0th bit. That is, the 0th bit of the first internal information register corresponds to a bit indicating that the reset factor generated immediately before is traveling outside the designated area of the CPU 304. The value of each bit is cleared when the CPU 304 reads the value (becomes the initial value “0”). Note that the second internal information register may be configured by the first internal information register shown in FIG.
<Third internal information register>

  FIG. 103 is a diagram for describing a third internal information register prepared in internal information register 3101 of interrupt control circuit 3100. As shown in FIG. 103, the third internal information register is also an 8-bit register, but the seventh and second bits remain set to “0” and are not used.

  The first bit of the third internal information register shown in FIG. 103 is a bit for setting whether to perform a user reset operation or a system reset operation when WDT 3141 times out. “0” is set when the user reset operation is performed, and “1” is set when the system reset operation is performed.

  The 0th bit is a bit for setting whether the user reset operation or the system reset operation is performed when the CPU 304 travels outside the designated area. In this bit, “0” is set when the user reset operation is performed, and “1” is set when the system reset operation is performed.

  The values set for the first bit and the 0th bit described here are stored in the program management area of the built-in ROM 306. These values stored in the program management area are called from the program management area in the initial setting 2 (step S3007) in the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 88, and are set in the first bit and the 0th bit, respectively. The In this embodiment, “1” is set to cause the system reset operation to be performed on any bit. Note that “0” for performing the user reset operation may be set in the first bit, and “1” for performing the system reset operation may be set in the 0th bit. Further, “1” for performing the system reset operation may be set in the first bit, and “0” for performing the user reset operation may be set in the 0th bit.

This third internal information register may also be composed of the empty bits (unused bits) of the first internal information register shown in FIG. 84, or the empty bits of the second internal information register shown in FIG. (Unused bits) may be used. When a reset occurs, the value of the reset operation setting data stored in the program management area of the ROM 306 may be directly referred to. In this case, the process of setting a value in the third internal information register may not be performed.
<Fourth internal information register>

  FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining a fourth internal information register prepared in the internal register 3101 of the interrupt control circuit 3100. As shown in FIG. 104, the fourth internal information register is an 8-bit register, but the seventh and second bits remain set to “0” and are not used.

  The first bit of the fourth internal information register is a bit indicating an abnormality in the external clock (update clock) RCK of the random number generation circuit 318. If there is an abnormality in the update clock, the information “1 (abnormal)” is read from the first bit of the fourth internal information register. If there is no abnormality in the update clock, the fourth internal information register Information of “0 (no abnormality)” is read from the first bit.

The 0th bit is a bit for indicating whether or not the immediately preceding reset factor is a system reset (reset upon power-on) when a reset occurs. When the interrupt control circuit 3100 acquires the system reset signal 1 via the internal bus 3300, the interrupt control circuit 3100 sets “1” to the 0th bit. If the immediately preceding reset factor is a system reset, information “1 (system reset has occurred)” is read from the 0th bit of the fourth internal information register, and if the immediately preceding reset factor is not a system reset (reset factor Is the time-out of WDT 3141, or when the reset factor is running outside the designated area of CPU 304), the information of “0 (system reset has not occurred)” is read from the 0th bit of the fourth internal information register Is done.
<Other internal information registers>

  Although not shown, the microprocessor 3000 includes a start register and a clear register as registers for controlling the WDT 3141. The start register is an 8-bit register for controlling activation / deactivation of the WDT 3141. When the WDT 3141 is activated, a value (for example, CCH) instructing activation is set (written) and stopped when the WDT 3141 is deactivated. Is configured to set a value (for example, 33H).

  This start register is valid when “start by software” is set (selected) in the program management area at the time of resetting. In this case, a stop instruction value (for example, 33H) is set as an initial value. Is set. Therefore, in order to activate WDT 3141 when “activation by software” is set (selected), it is necessary to set a value (for example, CCH) instructing activation by the game control program (manually). On the other hand, when “activation by software” is not set (selected) at the time of resetting, a value (for example, CCH) instructing activation in the start register is an initial value (automatically) regardless of the game control program. The WDT 3141 is activated (automatically) without depending on the game control program.

  The clear register is an 8-bit register for controlling the clearing and restarting of the WDT 3141. After setting a predetermined first value (for example, 55H), a predetermined second value (for example, AAH) Is set, WDT 3141 is cleared and restarted immediately after. When the value of the clear register is read, a predetermined fixed value (for example, FFH) is read.

  Here, the flow of system reset will be described again, including the relationship with random number update. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the flow of system reset including the relationship with random number update. Up to now, it has been described that when a momentary interruption occurs due to factors such as static electricity, the reset control circuit 314 outputs a system reset signal (here, the system reset signal 2) due to the timeout of the WDT 3141, and the reset operation is performed. Further, not only the timeout of WDT 3141 but also, for example, when the CPU 304 runs out of the designated area, the system reset signal (here, system reset signal 3) is output from the reset control circuit 314, and the reset operation is performed. . In this reset operation, the gaming machine shifts to the security mode, and a security check process (step SH05 shown in FIG. 76) is executed.

  The time-out of WDT 3141 and the running out of the designated area of CPU 304 correspond to an example of an abnormality that hinders normal progress of the game process. The system reset signal 2 and the system reset signal 3 correspond to an example of a return instruction. Further, the reset control circuit 314 illustrated in FIG. 76 corresponds to an example of an abnormality detection unit that detects the abnormality.

  Although not shown in FIG. 105, in the security mode, first, the first internal circuit initialization process in step SH03 shown in FIG. 76 is executed, and the core of the CPU 304, the timer circuit 311, the counter circuit 312, and the parallel input port 3102 are executed. The values of built-in registers such as the RAM 308 access protect register, the interrupt control circuit 3100, and the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 are initialized. Since the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is initialized, the random number update range is reset, and the initial value of the random number is also reset. In particular, when traveling outside the designated area of the CPU 304 occurs, it is preferable that the random number update range is reset because there is a possibility that the random number update range has some influence.

  Subsequently, a fixed extension process (step SH07) is performed. When this fixed extension process is completed, the reset control circuit 314 sends a reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal) to the peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000. Output a reset signal. That is, the reset signal (reset output) from the XRSTO terminal is output after the end of the fixed extension process (during the security mode), and is output at a timing different from the start of the user mode.

  Next, a random extension process (step SH09) is performed, and the delay process time becomes indefinite. When the random extension process is completed, the gaming machine shifts to the user mode, and a game control program (in this case, the main control unit main process) is started.

  In this game control program, first, various initial settings (steps S3001 to S3015 shown in FIG. 88) are performed. In this initial setting, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), after reading the value of “bit indicating update clock abnormality” from the first bit of the fourth internal information register, the read value is set in the general-purpose register. On the other hand, while the process of reading (writing) is executed, the process of reading “the bit indicating whether or not the reset factor is a system reset” is executed from the 0th bit of the fourth internal information register. It is configured not to execute the process of setting (writing).

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 7B, the microprocessor 3000 uses the bits (for example, the fourth information register) that change based on the first factor (for example, the state of the update clock of the random number generation circuit 318). While reading the value of bit 1) of the internal information register and setting (writing) the read value in the general-purpose register, it changes based on a second factor (for example, a reset factor) different from the first factor A value of the bit of the internal information register (for example, bit 0 of the fourth internal information register) is read, but the read value is not set (not written) in the general-purpose register.

  When the initial setting is completed, a software random number update process (step S3017 and step S3019) is performed, and then the jackpot random number acquisition timing that occurs first is reached. Here, if a random number is illegally acquired at the first big hit random number acquisition timing, the big hit may be forced. However, since the time of delay processing is indefinite due to the random extension processing, the above-mentioned predetermined time is also indefinite even if the above-mentioned reset output is caught illegally and the timing for acquiring the first big hit random number is attempted. Therefore, cheating can be prevented.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a modification of the reset control circuit 314 of the microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG. The reset circuit 1314 according to this modification includes a signal output timing control circuit 1314a instead of the out-of-designated area travel prohibition circuit 3142 and the watchdog timer (WDT) 3141 included in the reset control circuit 314 shown in FIG. The signal output timing control circuit 1314a is a circuit for determining the output timing of the reset output signal output from the reset output terminal XRSTO based on the reset input signals input from the two reset input terminals XSRST1 and XSRST2. is there.

  FIG. 108 is a timing chart showing an example in the case where a timeout of WDT 3141 occurs only in main control unit 300 out of main control unit 300 and first sub control unit 400. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 108, time (T) elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the state at the left end of the figure, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, and both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 perform normal processing. In this example, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure variation display, and the first sub control unit 400 performs the second sub control (not shown here) in accordance with the start of the special figure fluctuation display by the main control unit 300. Via the unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols. The symbols (a) to (g) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 108 indicate the timing of the position where the symbol is written, and the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 at that timing is shown below FIG. It is shown.

  Shortly after the main control unit 300 starts displaying the special figure fluctuation, an instantaneous interruption occurs in the main control unit 300, and a process at the time of power interruption is performed due to a temporary voltage drop, and a transition is made to a standby state. As described with reference to FIG. 97 (b), in the standby state, the WDT 3141 of the main control unit 300 is not restarted, and the WDT 3141 times out. A system reset signal 2 is output from the reset control circuit 314 based on the timeout of the WDT 3141.

  When the system reset signal 2 is output, the main control unit 300 starts the reset process shown in FIG. In the main control unit 300, after the first internal circuit initialization process (step SH03) is executed in this reset process, the security check process (step SH05) is executed. Then, even if the security check process is completed, the user mode (main control unit main process shown in FIG. 88) is not immediately shifted, the delay process is performed, and the reset process is continued. In this delay process, the fixed extension process (step SH07) shown in FIG. 76 is executed. As described above, when the fixed extension process is completed, the reset control circuit 314 outputs a reset signal from the reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal) to the peripheral control circuit outside the microprocessor 3000. The signal is not transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. Further, in the delay process, a random extension process (step SH09) is executed, and the transition to the user mode is further delayed by a random time of a maximum of 30 seconds. These steps SH07 and SH09 correspond to an example of the delay processing referred to in the present invention.

  Further, as described above, when the dispensing control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 300 until a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) elapses after the power interruption process is started. Then, the output of the firing permission signal to the firing control unit 630 is stopped.

  On the other hand, in this example, although the main control unit 300 has an instantaneous interruption, the first sub-control unit 400 is continuously supplied with a voltage of 12 V, and the main control unit 300 performs the power interruption process and the reset process. The first sub-control unit 400 continues normal processing even during the process. As a result, the effect executing means continues the effect, and the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol fluctuating, and it is shortly after the main control unit 300 starts the power interruption process (b). At this timing, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a (so-called left symbol stop). At the timing (c), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c (so-called right symbol stop), and the reach state is reached. Subsequently, at the timing of (d), it develops into a special reach (here, so-called triple reach), at the timing of (e), a reach-off effect is once performed, and at the timing of (f), a combination of decorative symbols ( Here, “decoration 5—decoration 4—decoration 5”) fluctuates and fluctuates. Based on the fact that the symbol variation stop command is sent from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 completely stops the combination of the decorative symbols and performs the fixed stop. However, no command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 while the main control unit 300 is performing a power interruption process or a reset process.

  As a result, the fluctuation of the shaking continues even if the fluctuation time of the special figure elapses. Players who have seen fluctuations that continue to forever are worried that the pachinko machine 100 may have broken, and can expect to call a store clerk at the amusement store, informing the game store clerk that a momentary break or reset has occurred. May be possible. In other words, in the conventional game machine, a technique has been devised to perform a reset process when a reset occurs due to an instantaneous voltage drop due to static electricity or the like during the game, but the reset process takes only a short time. Although the store side could not grasp the occurrence of the reset and could not allow the game machine to perform stable control, according to the game machine of this embodiment, by delaying the start of game control, The game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of the reset. Further, since the game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of the reset, it is possible to cause the game machine to perform stable control by eliminating the cause of the occurrence of the reset (for example, by separating the wiring on the back of the game machine). Furthermore, in this example, the out-of-reach performance is performed, but if the fluctuation of fluctuation continues more than usual after the per-reach performance, the pachinko machine is expected for the player who expected the big hit. It is possible to further raise the player's anxiety that the 100 may have broken and changed so that it does not become an advantageous state, letting the player call the store clerk, that the game store clerk had a momentary break You may be able to inform.

  Further, during the period when the reset process is being performed, the output of the launch permission signal is stopped, and the game ball cannot be launched from the launch device 110. For this reason, although the display by the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued, the game ball is not fired no matter how many times the ball launch handle 134 shown in FIG. 1 is operated, and the player may have broken the pachinko machine 100. I am worried that there may be a chance, I can expect to call a store clerk at the amusement store, and I may be able to inform the amusement store clerk that an interruption or reset has occurred. In other words, the game store clerk may be able to grasp the occurrence of the reset via the player by stopping the launch during the delay process.

  Further, a clear signal is output to each circuit (for example, the drive circuits 324 to 334) of the main control unit 300 at a timing when the XRSTO signal falls, and the main control unit 300 is driven, the special figure display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure. The game display means such as the hold lamp 220 and the high-probability lamp 222 are not displayed, and the player who notices these non-displays is anxious that the pachinko machine 100 is broken, and is a store clerk of the game store. Can be expected to inform the game store clerk that a momentary interruption or reset has occurred. In particular, the display device for displaying the status based on the rights acquired by the player, such as the general figure hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the high accuracy medium lamp 222, is not provided. When it is displayed, the pachinko machine 100 is broken and the player's anxiety that the acquired rights have been lost can be further exaggerated. It may be possible to notify that a disconnection or reset has occurred. Also, from a different perspective, the clerk can be given an opportunity to apologize to the player, communicate with the player, and help to realize a cozy game store.

  In the main control unit 300, when the random extension process (step SH09) ends, the main control unit 300 first shifts to the user mode and starts the normal process (main control unit main process shown in FIG. 88). In the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 88, since the supply voltage to the main control unit 300 has returned to 12 V, the initial setting 2 shown in FIG. 89 is performed, and the first sub-control unit 400 includes A clear signal is output for the first time (step S3052). The first sub-control unit 400 performs various initial settings when receiving the clear signal. With this initial setting, the initial design screen (default screen) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the default screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 even when a timeout occurs in the WDT 3141. At the timing (g) shown in FIG. 108, a character display “Please wait” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to a character display screen of “Please wait” from the shaking fluctuation that has not ended indefinitely, and the player who was watching this series of displays broke the pachinko machine 100. I am worried that it may have been, I can expect to call a store clerk at the amusement store, and may be able to inform the amusement store clerk that a momentary break has occurred.

  When the main control unit main process is started, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600, and a launch permission signal is output to the launch control unit 630, and the game ball is fired. Will be able to.

  In this example, the timing at which the main control unit 300 shifts from the reset process to the normal process is during the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination (after the timing (f)), but before the fluctuation fluctuation (timing (f). Even before, a default screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 described above is an example in the case where a timeout of WDT 3141 occurs. Similarly, when a run out of the designated area of CPU 304 occurs, the game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of reset via the player. Thus, it is possible to cause the game machine to perform stable control. In addition, even if other abnormalities such as resetting occur, if the system reset operation is performed, a delay process is executed during the system reset, and the game store clerk detects the occurrence of the reset via the player. In some cases, the game table can be grasped and stable control can be performed.

  In the above description, “a game control unit (for example, a game process related to a game including a main process (for example, steps S3017, S3019, and a main control unit timer interrupt process) repeatedly executed until power-off is detected (for example, , The main control unit 300), and the game control unit detecting an abnormality (for example, time-out of the WDT 3141 or running out of the designated area of the CPU 304) that prevents normal progress of the game process while the game process is being executed. Provided with an electrical control means (for example, a microprocessor 3000) provided with an abnormality detection unit (for example, a reset control circuit 314) for performing a return instruction (for example, system reset signals 2 and 3), and the game control unit (for example, The main control unit 300) stops the execution of the game process based on the return instruction, The electrical control means (for example, the microprocessor 3000) performs a return process (for example, a system reset operation) for the game control unit to start executing the game process based on the return instruction. A game machine characterized by executing a delay process (for example, steps SH07 and SH09) for delaying the start of the game process while the game is being executed. Is explained.

  Here, a storage unit (for example, a built-in ROM 306) that stores a game process program for the game process is provided, and the electrical control means performs an initialization process (for example, in step SH03) for resuming the execution of the game process. The first internal circuit initialization process) is performed based on the return instruction, and the game control unit suspends execution of the game process based on the return instruction, and the initialization process is performed. Thereafter, the game process program is sequentially read out from the storage unit and the game process is resumed, and the electrical control means is a period between the completion of the initialization process and the start of the game process. In addition, a delay process for delaying the start timing of the game process may be executed. That is, the return process here is a process that combines the initialization process and the delay process.

  Also, a game control means for executing a game process relating to a game including a main process that is repeatedly executed until power-off is detected, and an abnormality that prevents the progress of the game process while the game control means is executing the game process An abnormality detecting means for giving a return instruction based on the detection of the game, and the game control means stops the execution of the game process based on the return instruction and resumes the execution of the game process. A gaming machine that performs processing, and executes delay processing that delays resumption of the game processing during execution of the return processing. The aspect of this may be sufficient. According to this aspect, instead of the means that can perform both hardware processing and software processing such as the electrical control means, the return processing is performed by means that performs only software processing such as game control means, The delay process is executed while the return process is being executed. The game processing means includes a first storage unit that stores a game processing program for the game process, and a second storage unit that stores a return program for the return process. Are sequentially read out to execute the game process, and the electrical control means may execute the return process according to the return program.

  In this case, stable game control may be performed. In other words, by delaying the start of game control, the game store clerk may be able to grasp the occurrence of reset via the player. In addition, since the game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of the reset, it is possible to identify and deal with the cause of the reset (for example, an electrical component that generates static electricity) (for example, review the layout of the wiring behind the game table) In some cases, the game machine can be controlled stably. In addition, since the game process is not performed during the return process, the process based on the entry is performed even if the game ball rolling in the game area when the reset occurs enters the first special figure starting port 230 during the return process. In some cases, it is possible to make the game store clerk easy to call with anxiety. In addition, the game store clerk may be able to confirm the state of the game table by manually inserting the game ball into the first special figure starting port 230 or the like. In addition, since the game process is not performed during the return process, even if the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is opened, the process based on the opening is not performed, and the game store clerk opens the main body 104 or the front frame door 106, You may be able to check the status of the game console.

  Further, in the above description, “the electrical control means (for example, the microprocessor 3000) performs a security check process for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred during the return process (for example, the security in step SH05). A game machine characterized by a check process). Is also explained.

  In this case, since the security check process is also performed during the return process, the time during which the return process is being performed can be used effectively, and security can be improved.

  The abnormality detection unit detects a first return instruction (for example, a system reset) among the return instructions based on a first abnormality (for example, traveling outside the designated area of the CPU 304) among the abnormalities. Signal) and a second return instruction (for example, a user reset signal) of the return instructions based on the presence of a second abnormality (for example, timeout of WDT 3141) among the abnormalities. The electrical control means executes the delay process while executing the return process based on the first return instruction, and executes the return process based on the second return instruction. The delay process may not be executed during the operation.

  In this case, since the time until the game process is started differs depending on the type of abnormality, the game store clerk may be able to determine the type of abnormality.

  The first abnormality may have a higher degree of abnormality than the second abnormality.

  In this case, since the delay process is performed in the return process when the first abnormality having a high degree of abnormality occurs, the game clerk may be able to confirm that a reset based on the abnormality having a high degree of abnormality has occurred. .

  Further, the electrical control means executes the security check process while executing the return process based on the first return instruction, and performs the return process based on the second return instruction. The security check process may not be executed during the execution.

  In addition, a launching unit (e.g., launching device 110) that launches a game ball toward the game area is provided, and the launching unit stops launching the game ball while the delay process is being executed. Also good.

  In this case, the player is worried that the pachinko machine 100 may have broken, and can expect to call a store clerk at the amusement store, and may be able to notify the game store clerk that an instantaneous interruption or reset has occurred. is there. In other words, the game store clerk may be able to grasp the occurrence of the reset via the player by stopping the launch during the delay process.

  In addition, a storage unit (for example, a built-in ROM 306) that stores a game processing program for the game processing is provided, and the game control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) reads the game processing program from the storage unit and stores the game The storage unit (for example, the built-in ROM 306) receives predetermined authentication information (for example, an authentication code) obtained based on the contents (for example, a user program) stored in the storage unit. The electrical control means (for example, the microprocessor 3000) acquires the authentication information during the return process based on the content stored in the storage unit, and the acquired authentication information is stored in the storage unit. It is determined during the restoration process whether or not it matches the predetermined authentication information stored in the storage unit (for example, the security in step SH05). A tee check processing is performed) may be one.

  In this case, since it is determined whether or not it matches the predetermined authentication information during the return process, the time during which the return process is performed can be used effectively, and security can be improved. There is a case.

  The electrical control unit may execute the delay process based on the fact that the acquired authentication information matches the predetermined authentication information stored in the storage unit.

  The game control unit may stop the operation based on the fact that the acquired authentication information does not match the predetermined authentication information stored in the storage unit.

  Further, the electrical control means is configured to delay the start of the gaming process by a predetermined time (for example, a fixed extension process at step SH07) and a second delay process (for example, a variable time delay). , Random extension process in step SH09) may be performed.

  The electrical control means performs a first delay process for delaying the start of the game process for a predetermined time, and then performs a reset instruction (for example, a reset signal from a reset output terminal (XRSTO terminal)) to the outside. ), And then a second delay process that delays the start of the game process by a variable time may be performed. The changeable time here may be a time selected from a plurality of prepared times at the time of manufacture or setting of the electrical control means, or may be a time that can be arbitrarily changed. Good.

  In this case, since the start timing of the game process and the output timing of the reset instruction to the outside are different, it is possible for an unauthorized person to make it difficult to analyze the initial timing at which an advantageous random number can be obtained. It may be possible to prevent the act.

  In addition, the game control unit may perform a predetermined lottery process (for example, determination of whether or not a special figure is appropriate) using a numerical value that is repeatedly updated and updated in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a random number generation range) in the gaming process. The electrical control means initializes the numerical value in the return process (for example, executes the first internal circuit initialization process in step SH03). Also good.

  In addition, game display means controlled by the game control unit (for example, the common figure display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the common figure holding lamp 216, the first A special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222), and the game display means is not displayed while the delay process is being executed. Good.

  In this case, since the game display means should not be displayed, there is a case where it is possible to make the game store clerk easy to call with anxiety. In addition, the game store clerk may be able to check the state of the game table by putting the game ball into the first starting port 230 or the like by hand.

  In addition, variable winning means (for example, the second special figure starting port 232, variable) that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter than the first state. The variable winning means may change to the second state based on the return instruction in the first state.

  In this case, since the variable winning means should be in the first state but in the second state, the game store clerk may be able to be called easily by making the player uneasy. In addition, the game store clerk may be able to check the state of the game table by putting the game ball into the first starting port 230 or the like by hand. The variable winning means may maintain the first state based on the return instruction in the first state. In this case, since the first state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, opening time) for a predetermined time, it may be possible to make the game store clerk easy to call with anxiety.

  In addition, an effect execution means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that executes an effect based on an instruction from the game control unit is provided, and the effect execution means continues the effect while the delay process is being executed. You may do. Here, the effect executing means may have a larger display area than the game display means.

  In this case, it may be possible to prevent the player from being bored during the delay process.

    The electrical control means selectively executes a first return process and a second return process based on the return instruction, and stores a return operation of the first return process. A storage unit, and a second return operation storage unit that stores a return operation of the second return process, and the electrical control means stores the first return operation memory when the first return process is selected. The first return process is executed according to the return operation stored in the unit, and when the second return process is selected, the second return process is executed according to the return operation stored in the second return operation storage unit. It may be executed.

  Further, the game control unit performs a predetermined lottery process using a numerical value that is repeatedly updated and updated within a predetermined numerical value range in the gaming process, and the electrical control means includes: Based on the return instruction, a first return process for initializing the numerical value (for example, a first internal circuit initialization process in step SH03) and a second value for holding the numerical value at a value before the return instruction is given. The return process (for example, the second internal circuit initialization process in step SH11) may be selectively executed.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses a predetermined number of game balls. In addition, the main control unit 300 and the sub control unit 400 may be bi-directional communication, or a single control unit having the functions of the main control unit 300 and the sub control unit 400 may be provided instead.

  Conventionally, as a game stand, there are obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. that can be used for winning the game ball. There is known a ball game machine (pachinko machine) that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a prize ball when winning a prize. This ball game machine is advantageous to the player by performing a lottery process for determining whether or not the game ball has entered the starting port and opening the variable prize opening for a predetermined time according to the result of the determination. A game state is generated.

  In addition, when the reel is rotated by inserting a medal (game medium) and operating the start lever, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. If a combination of symbols that is predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the window, a winning combination is established. If a winning combination that involves paying out medals is achieved, a special number of medals are paid out. Also known is a slot machine.

  By the way, during the operation of the game store, an abnormality may occur in the electrical system of the game machine, and the power supply of the game machine may be cut off (power interruption). After the power is turned off, the game table is automatically restored immediately (power is turned on) so that the game is not hindered. For this reason, the game store may not be aware of the fact that the game stand has been disconnected. In addition, if any abnormality occurs, such as when the game machine program operates unexpectedly, a reset is temporarily applied. However, even if an abnormality that requires a reset occurs, the game automatically returns immediately so that there is no problem with the game.

  There are a variety of causes for abnormalities in the electrical system of the game console and the causes of abnormalities that may cause a reset. The game store may experience a power outage or be reset. There is a case where it is desired to grasp on the spot that an abnormal abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned game machine, it is easy to give the game store an opportunity to grasp on the spot that an abnormality of the electric system has occurred or that an abnormality that requires resetting has occurred. In addition, by delaying the start of the game control, the game store clerk can grasp the occurrence of the reset through the player, and the game store clerk identifies and deals with the cause of the reset (for example, the layout of the wiring behind the game table) Etc.) and may allow the game machine to perform stable control.

In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.
(Appendix 1)

  Game control means for performing game control including a plurality of types of processing relating to games;

  An abnormality detecting means for detecting an abnormality related to the progress of the process of the game control means and instructing a return to the game control means when the abnormality is detected;

A voltage supply means for supplying a predetermined voltage to the game control means and the abnormality detection means,
The game control means includes

Performing a return process performed based on receiving the return instruction from the abnormality detection means, and a main process that is started after the return process and repeatedly executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied,

The game table characterized in that the return process includes a delay process for delaying the start of the game control.
(Appendix 2)

  Random number generation means (random number generation circuit 318 or the like) for generating a random number and capable of setting a random number generation range that is a numerical range in which the random number is generated;

  Game control means (CPU 304, etc.) for performing a plurality of types of processing related to games, including lottery processing using random numbers generated by the random number generation means;

A process for detecting whether or not there is an abnormality related to the progress of the process of the game control means is executed, and when the abnormality is detected, the process of the game control means is restarted from a specific process and the game control means An abnormality detection means (such as a reset control circuit 314) for performing a return instruction (system reset or user reset) for normally returning the processing of the game control means,
The random number generation means includes

A generation range update process (step S3053 in FIG. 89) for updating the random number generation range based on receiving a random number range setting instruction for setting the random number generation range from the game control means,
The game control means includes

When the return instruction is received from the abnormality detection means, the random number range setting instruction for setting the same numerical range as the random number generation range set before the return instruction is performed as the random number generation range. A game machine (pachinko machine 100 or slot machine 1100), characterized in that it is performed on the random number generation means (step S3053 in FIG. 89).
(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 2,
The abnormality detection means includes

Based on the fact that the elapsed time starts to be measured based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, whether or not the elapsed time exceeds a specific time, and that the elapsed time exceeds the specific time A game table characterized by giving a return instruction to the game control means (see the description of WDT 3141 in FIG. 75).
(Appendix 4)

  Random number generation means (random number generation circuit 318 or the like) that generates a random number that is updated at predetermined intervals within a predetermined numerical range and is used for a lottery concerning a game;

  Update abnormality detection means (frequency monitoring circuit 3182 and random number monitoring circuit 3184) for detecting an abnormality related to the update of the random number;

  An abnormality detection information holding unit (internal information) that holds abnormality detection information indicating that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on detection of the abnormality by the abnormality detection unit. Register 3101),

Reference is made to the abnormality detection information holding means at a predetermined timing, and based on the fact that the abnormality detection information is held by the abnormality detection information holding means, the abnormality response processing means (CPU 304 and 95. A game table comprising the device monitoring process and winning acceptance process of FIG.
(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to appendix 4,
The abnormality detection information holding means is

A game characterized in that the abnormality detection information is erased on the basis of being referenced by the abnormality handling processing means in a state where the abnormality detection information is held (refer to the explanation of the internal information register). Stand.
<First Modification of Main Control Unit>

  FIG. 109A is a diagram showing a first modification of the configuration of the main control unit. In this example, the CPU 304 includes a reset signal input terminal XSRST, and a random delay circuit 317 is connected to the reset signal input terminal XSRST. Note that the letter “X” attached to the head of the terminal name indicates that the signal input to and output from the terminal is low active, but it goes without saying that the signal may be high active (the same applies hereinafter).

  The random delay circuit 317 has two input terminals, a low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and a WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). (For example, an L level signal) is output. Further, the WDT 314 outputs a WDT activation signal (for example, an L level signal) due to a timeout of the WDT.

The random delay circuit 317 inputs the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 or the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314 from the input terminal, waits for the delay time selected at random, and receives the input signal. It outputs toward the reset signal input terminal XSRST of the CPU 304. As described with reference to FIG. 9, the CPU 304 inputs an H level signal after an L level signal is input to the reset signal input terminal XSRST for a predetermined period (for example, a period corresponding to four cycles of the system clock). System reset (initialization). Therefore, in this example, the CPU 304 is reset (initialized) based on a signal obtained by adding a delay time to either the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 or the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314. The
<Second Modification of Main Control Unit>

  FIG. 109B is a diagram showing a second modification of the configuration of the main control unit. In this example, the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314 is directly output to the reset signal input terminal XSRST of the CPU 304 without going through the random delay circuit 317. Therefore, in this example, the CPU 304 performs a system operation based on a signal obtained by delaying the output timing of the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 by a delay time or a WDT activation signal (no delay time) output from the WDT 314. It is reset (initialized).

FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reset circuit configured to include the random delay circuit 317, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, and the WDT 314 described above. In this example, the CPU 304 outputs (1) a system reset based on the WDT activation signal (no delay time) output from the WDT 314, and (2) outputs the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314 for the delay time selected by the random delay circuit 317. One of three states: system reset based on a signal with delayed timing, and (3) system reset based on only a low voltage signal without inputting the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314 to the reset signal input terminal XSRST. Can be selected by the CPU 304. Further, the delay time added by the random delay circuit 317 can be set, and the delay time added to the WDT activation signal and the delay time added to the low voltage signal can be individually set. These selections and settings, WDT 314 start and reset, for example, write a set value to a register built in the reset circuit via the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the CPU 304, or set a predetermined value to a predetermined input terminal of the reset circuit This is performed by inputting a level signal (a signal corresponding to a set value).
<First Modification of Reset Circuit>

FIG. 110A shows a first modification of the reset circuit shown in FIG. 109C. In this example, apart from the first WDT 314a built in the reset circuit, the CPU 304 also incorporates a second WDT 314b. The CPU 304 can select whether a system reset (external reset) is performed by a reset signal input to the reset signal input terminal XSRST or a system reset (internal reset) is performed by a timeout of the built-in second WDT 314b. It has.
<Second Modification of Reset Circuit>

FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a second modification of the reset circuit shown in FIG. In this example, the CPU 304 has a random delay circuit 317 built in the reset circuit and a reset signal output terminal XRSTO. The CPU 304 includes a register that can select whether to output a reset signal from the reset signal output terminal XRSTO based on an external reset or to output a reset signal from the reset signal output terminal XRSTO based on an internal reset. Yes. The CPU 304 also includes a register capable of selecting whether or not to add the delay time selected by the random delay circuit 317 to the reset signal output from the reset signal output terminal XRSTO, and reset based on an external reset. The delay time for delaying the output timing of the signal and the delay time for delaying the output timing of the reset signal based on the internal reset can be individually set.
<Third Modification of Reset Circuit>

  FIG. 111 (a) is a diagram showing a third modification of the reset circuit shown in FIG. 109 (c). In this example, the first random delay circuit 317a for setting the delay time for delaying the output timing of the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338, and the delay for delaying the output timing of the WDT activation signal output by the WDT. A second random delay circuit 317b for setting the time is provided separately. That is, in this example, the CPU 304 performs (1) system reset based on a signal obtained by delaying the output timing by the delay time selected by the first random delay circuit 317a to the low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338. 2) System reset based on a signal obtained by delaying the output timing by the delay time selected by the second random delay circuit 317b to the WDT activation signal output by the WDT 314. (3) WDT activation signal output by the WDT 314 (no delay time) ) Based on the system reset so that the CPU 304 can select one of the three states. Each delay time for delaying the output timing of the low voltage signal and the WDT activation signal can be individually set by the first random delay circuit 317a and the second random delay circuit 317b. These selections and settings, WDT 314 start and reset, for example, write a set value to a register built in the reset circuit via the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the CPU 304, or set a predetermined value to a predetermined input terminal of the reset circuit. This is performed by inputting a level signal (a signal corresponding to a set value).

  <Example of reset signal output terminal connection>

  FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram showing a part of various ICs connected to the CPU 304. In this example, the CPU 304 has a reset signal input terminal XSRST1 to which a reset signal generated based on a low voltage signal output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 shown in FIG. The three terminals of the reset signal input terminal XSRST2 to which a reset signal generated based on the WDT activation signal output from the WDT 314 shown in FIG. 5A is input and the reset signal output terminal XRSTO for outputting the reset signal are provided. Prepare.

  As described with reference to FIG. 9, the CPU 304 receives an L level signal of a predetermined period (for example, a period corresponding to four cycles of the system clock) or more at the reset signal input terminal XSRST1 (or the reset signal input terminal XSRST2). After that, when an H level signal is input to the input terminal, the system is reset (initialized).

  The reset signal output terminal XRSTO is connected to input terminals of a plurality (four in this example) of IC11 to IC14 and input terminals of other circuits. Here, as IC11 to IC14 and other circuits, for example, a logic IC such as an address decoder and a flip-flop, various circuits / ICs / devices shown in FIG. Circuits, sound source ICs, sensor circuits, shielding devices, decorative design display devices) can be applied. In addition, as input terminals of IC11 to IC14 and other circuits, a reset terminal for inputting a reset signal for initializing the entire circuit, or a CLR terminal for inputting a signal for initializing a part of the circuit Etc. can be applied.

  <First Modification of Connection of Reset Signal Output Terminal>

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a first modification of the connection of the reset signal output terminal XRSTO shown in FIG. 111 (b). In this example, in addition to connecting the reset signal output terminal XRSTO to the input terminal 9 of the IC 11, the CPU 304 includes eight data signal terminals D 0 to D 7, and the data signal input terminal 1 to the input terminal 8 of the IC 11. Connected to each of. The IC 11 includes output terminals 1 to 8 corresponding to the data signal input terminal 1 to the input terminal 8, respectively. It is connected to the data signal input terminal. That is, the data signal line of the CPU 304 is input to the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 via the IC 11, and the CPU 304 and the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 are configured to be able to communicate via the IC 11. . Note that the CPU 304 and the CPU 404 may be configured to be communicable via a part or all of the above-described IC12 to IC14 in addition to (or instead of) the IC11. Further, the CPU 304 and the CPU 404 may be configured to be communicable via a relay board in addition to (or instead of) these ICs 11 to 14.

  <Second Modification of Connection of Reset Signal Output Terminal>

  FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating the basic circuit 302 described with reference to FIG. 4 and a part of various ICs connected to the basic circuit 302. Although the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 will be described here, the basic circuit 402 and the second sub control of the first sub control unit 400 are replaced with (or in addition to) the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. The present invention can also be applied to the basic circuit 502 of the unit 500 and a circuit corresponding to the basic circuit of another control unit (for example, the payout control unit 600).

  The basic circuit 302 includes two terminals, the reset signal input terminal XSRST and the reset signal output terminal XRSTO described above, as terminals related to reset. The reset signal input terminal XSRST is connected to the output terminal of IC01 (for example, the above-described reset circuit or power supply monitoring circuit). As described with reference to FIG. The system is reset (initialized) when an H-level signal is input after an L-level signal having been input for a predetermined period (for example, a period of four cycles of the system clock) is input to the terminal XSRST.

The reset signal output terminal XRSTO is connected to input terminals of a plurality (four in this example) of IC11 to IC14 and input terminals of other circuits. Here, as IC11 to IC14 and other circuits, for example, a logic IC such as an address decoder and a flip-flop, various circuits / ICs / devices shown in FIG. Circuit, sound source IC, sensor circuit, shielding device, decorative design display device) can be applied. In addition, as input terminals of IC11 to IC14 and other circuits, a reset terminal for inputting a reset signal for initializing the entire circuit, or a CLR terminal for inputting a signal for initializing a part of the circuit Etc. can be applied.
<Fixed extension time and random extension time>

  Next, the time setting for the fixed extension process and the random extension process executed by the basic circuit 302 after the system reset will be described with reference to FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 9, the CPU 304 executes each processing in the order of security check processing → fixed extension processing → random extension processing in the security mode, then shifts to the user mode and executes the game control program. Is configured to do. In this embodiment, the security mode (= security check process + fixed extension process) is set in advance in the CPU 304 for each of the fixed extension process time (fixed extension time) and the random extension process time (random extension time). + Random extension process) can be extended by the set time.

  FIG. 114A shows an example of setting the fixed extension time. In this example, the fixed extension time can be extended by the time shown in the figure by presetting any one of the 3-bit set value data 000B to 111B in a predetermined storage area of the CPU 304. In this example, except for the case where the set value data is 111B, the fixed extension time is calculated by a calculation formula of “2 to the 22nd power × (1 / SCLK) × set value data”.

  For example, when the set value data is set to 000B, the fixed extension time is set to 0 (not extended) regardless of the frequency of the system clock SCLK, and when the set value data is set to 001B, the system clock SCLK When the frequency is 8 MHz, the fixed extension time is set to about 525 ms (= 2 to the power of 22 × (1/8 MHz) × 1), and when the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 10 MHz, the fixed extension time is about 420 ms (= 2). 22 × (1/10 MHz) × 1), and when the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 12 MHz, the fixed extension time is set to about 350 ms (= 2 to the 22nd power × (1/12 MHz) × 1). The

  In this example, the fixed extension time is calculated based on the system clock SCLK. However, for example, the fixed extension time may be calculated based on another set value (for example, a random extension time described later). The calculation may be based on both the system clock SCLK and other set values. Further, although an example in which the system clock SCLK and the fixed extension time are in an inversely proportional relationship has been shown, both may be in a proportional relationship. In the case where the set value data is 111B, an example is shown in which the fixed extension time is set to about 30000 ms, regardless of the frequency of the system clock SCLK. Or a maximum value may be set. Further, the data length of the set value data is not limited to 3 bits, and the type of extension time may be increased. Further, the fixed extension time may be limited to a time longer than 0 without including 0 (the CPU 304 may always execute the fixed extension process). Further, different fixed extension times may be set for the internal reset and the external reset.

  FIG. 114 (b) shows an example of setting the random extension time. In this example, the random extension time can be extended by the time shown in the figure by presetting any of the 2-bit length set value data 00B to 11B in a predetermined storage area of the CPU 304. ing. For example, when the set value data is set to 00B, the random extension time is set to 0 (not extended) regardless of the frequency of the system clock SCLK, and when the set value data is set to 01B, the frequency of the system clock SCLK is When the frequency is 8 MHz, the random extension time is set to a random time of 0 to 0.5 ms (a time randomly selected by the core of the CPU 304). When the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 10 MHz, the random extension time is 0 to 0. When the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 12 MHz, the random extension time is set to a random time of 0 to 0.3 ms.

In this example, an example in which the random extension time is changed by the system clock SCLK is shown, but the same may be set between different system clocks SCLK. Further, it may be calculated based on other set values (for example, the above-described fixed extension time) or may be calculated based on both the system clock SCLK and other set values. Further, the data length of the set value data is not limited to 2 bits, and the type of extension time may be increased. Further, the random extension time may be limited to a time longer than 0 without including 0 (the CPU 304 may always execute the random extension process). Further, different random extension times may be set for the internal reset and the external reset. Further, the reference clock may be variable for one of the fixed extension time and the random extension time, and the reference clock may be fixed for the other.
<WDT timeout period>

  Next, the timeout time setting of the WDT 314 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of setting the timeout time of WDT 314. In this example, the time-out time can be set for the time shown in the figure by presetting any one of 4-bit set value data 0000B to 1000B in a predetermined storage area of the CPU 304. For example, when the set value data is set to 0000B, the timeout time is set to be prohibited (WDT is not used) regardless of the frequency of the system clock SCLK, and when the set value data is set to 0001B, the system clock SCLK is set. When the frequency of the clock is 8 MHz, the timeout time is set to about 65 ms, when the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 10 MHz, the timeout time is set to about 52 ms, and when the frequency of the system clock SCLK is 12 MHz, the timeout time is about 44 ms. Set to

  In this example, the timeout time is changed according to the system clock SCLK. However, the same time may be set between different system clocks SCLK. Further, it may be calculated based on other set values (for example, the above-described fixed extension time or random extension time), or may be calculated based on both the system clock SCLK and other set values. Further, the data length of the set value data is not limited to 4 bits, and the types of timeout time may be increased. Further, although the timeout time is set to be smaller than the above-described fixed extension time, the timeout time may be set to be longer than the above-described fixed extension time.

  <Reset output signal and security mode>

  Next, the relationship between the change in the output signal of the reset output terminal XSRSTO and the change in the security mode state will be described. The example shown in FIG. 116 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 9 described above, and when an H level signal is input to the reset input terminal XSRST after an L level signal of a predetermined period or longer is input. Transition to security mode. Then, in this security mode, the security check process is first executed, then the fixed extension process waiting for the elapse of a period according to the above-described setting of the fixed extension time is executed, and when the fixed extension process is completed A game control program that shifts to a user mode when a random extension process that outputs an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO and then waits for the passage of a random period according to the setting of the above-described random extension time is completed. Execution has started. That is, in this example, the end timing of the fixed extension processing (= start timing of the random extension processing) is matched with the timing of outputting an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO.

  In the example shown in FIG. 116B, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed extension process is completed, an H level signal is output from the reset output terminal XRSTO, and then the random extension process is completed. Transition to the user mode, the execution of the game control program is started. That is, in this example, after the fixed extension process is finished, before the random extension process is finished and before the transition to the user mode (before the execution of the game control program is started), an H level signal is output from the reset output terminal XRSTO. Is output. The predetermined time (the time from the end of the fixed extension process to the output of the H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO) may be a fixed time or a variable time. Further, when the fixed time is adopted, for example, the rising edge (or falling edge) of the system clock SCLK after a predetermined clock (for example, 4 clocks) has elapsed since the end of the fixed extension process. The time until may be set to a predetermined time. When variable time is adopted, the predetermined time may be changed to a random time each time the system is reset.

  <When changing the random extension time>

  117 (a) and 117 (b) show that the end timing of the fixed extension processing (= start timing of the random extension processing) coincides with the timing of outputting the H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO. It is the figure which showed the different example. That is, in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the set value of the fixed extension time is the same (for example, set value = 001B, SCLK = about 8 MHz), and the set value of the random extension time is also the same (for example, the set value). (Value = 01B, SCLK = 8 MHz) In FIG. 9A, the time A1 (for example, 0.2 ms) is selected from the numerical range of the random extension time (for example, 0 to 0.5 ms). In FIG. 5B, a time A2 (for example, 0.3 ms) longer than the time A1 is selected from the numerical range (for example, 0 to 0.5 ms) of the random extension time. In this example, since 0 to 0.5 ms is selected as the numerical range of the random extension time, the case where the random extension time becomes 0 (no random extension time) is also included.

As described above, the user mode is started from the H level signal output of the reset output terminal XRSTO by changing the random extension time (A1, A2) even if the setting of the fixed extension time and the random extension time is the same. The time until (A1, A2) can be changed at every system reset. For this reason, after outputting an H level signal to IC11 to IC14 or other circuits connected to the reset signal output terminal XRSTO (after starting or initializing IC11 to IC14 or other circuits), for game control The time until the program is executed can be changed, and the execution timing of the game control program (for example, lottery timing for determination of success / failure) based on the output signals from the respective terminals of the CPU 304 and the operation of peripheral ICs of the CPU 304 ) Can be prevented in advance. In this example, the setting value of the random extension time is the same, but the setting value of the random extension time may be different.
<When changing the fixed extension time>

  117 (c) and 117 (d), the end timing of the fixed extension process (= start timing of the random extension process) and the timing of outputting the H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO coincide, but the fixed extension time It is the figure which showed the different example. That is, the setting value data of the random extension time is the same (for example, setting value = 01B, SCLK = 8 MHz) in FIGS. 10C and 10D, and the random extension time is shown in FIGS. While the same time A1 (for example, 0.2 ms) is set from a numerical range of (for example, 0 to 0.5 ms), in FIG. 5C, the fixed extension time is set to the time B1 (for example, set value = (001B, SCLK = 8 MHz, about 525 ms), in FIG. 4D, the fixed extension time is set to a time B2 longer than the time B1 (for example, set value = 010B, SCLK = 8 MHz, about 1050 ms) (B1). <B2).

  In this way, even if the random extension time (A1) is the same, the fixed extension time (B1, B2) is changed to change the time (C1,. C2) can be varied. For this reason, the time from the system reset of the CPU 304 to the execution of the game control program can be changed every time the system reset is performed, and for the game control using the reset signal input to the reset input terminal XSRST of the CPU 304 as a clue. In some cases, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as grasping the execution timing of the program (for example, the lottery timing for determination of success / failure). Note that FIG. 109 shows an example in which one of the fixed extension time and the random extension time is made different. However, if both are made different, an illegal act of grasping the execution timing of the game control program is more reliably performed. Can be prevented.

  <When changing the reset output signal triggered by fixed extension processing>

  FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the reset output signal is changed in response to the fixed extension process. In this example, the start timing of the fixed extension process (= end timing of the security check process) and the timing of outputting an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO are matched. Since the reset output signal may be changed in response to the fixed extension process, for example, the reset output signal may be output before the start of the fixed extension process (for example, 200 ms before the start timing of the fixed extension process). The delay time may be determined according to the set value of the fixed extension time, and the reset output signal may be output after the delay time has elapsed. Also, it determines whether it is an internal reset (reset based on a built-in WDT timeout) or an external reset (reset based on a signal input to the XSRST terminal), and determines the output timing of the reset output signal according to the type of the reset. May be.

  Further, a storage unit that stores past reset types may be provided, and the output timing of the reset output signal may be changed based on the history of reset types stored in the storage unit. If it is continuous, the output timing of the reset output signal may be delayed or advanced from the previous time.

  <Other output signals and security mode>

  FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating changes in the address signal, data signal, control signal, and reset output signal output from the CPU 304, and changes in the security mode state. In this example, the CPU 304 outputs an H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO when the fixed extension process is completed (when the random extension process is started) and at the same timing, an external IC (for example, ROM 306, RAM 308). Data read (or write) has started. For this reason, in this example, an H level signal is output from the reset output terminal XRSTO, and at the same time, output of 16-bit address information (0000H in this example) is started from the address signals A0 to A15, and the control signal XM1 terminal A control signal indicating the latch timing of the address information (timing at which the external IC captures the address information) is output, and subsequently, 8-bit data information (opcode in this example) is output from the data signals D0 to D7 terminals. The control signal indicating the latch timing of the data information (the timing at which the external IC captures the data information) is output from the control signal XM1 terminal.

  In this example, the output of the address signal and the control signal is started simultaneously with the output of the H level signal from the reset output terminal XRSTO. For example, the output of the address signal and the control signal is started before the reset output. Alternatively, the output of the address signal and the control signal may be started after the reset output (for example, immediately after shifting from the security mode to the user mode). The control signal output from the XM1 terminal may be, for example, an output signal indicating a machine cycle of the CPU 304, a request output signal to a memory space or an I / O space, or an output signal indicating a read cycle or a write cycle. It's okay.

  FIG. 120A is a diagram showing a change in the state of another output signal after the external reset, and FIG. 120B is a diagram showing a change in the state of another output signal after the internal reset. In this example, in the case of an external reset, the output of 16-bit address information (0000H in this example) is started from the address signals A0 to A15 terminals by a predetermined time A1 before the random extension process, and the control signal A control signal indicating the latch timing of the address information is output from the XM1 terminal. On the other hand, in the case of an internal reset, output of 16-bit address information (0000H in this example) is started from the address signals A0 to A15 before a predetermined time A2 (A2> A1) before the random extension process. The control signal indicating the latch timing of the address information is output from the control signal XM1 terminal. That is, in this example, the signal output timing of the address signals A0 to A15 and the signal output of the control signal XM1 terminal are different between the external reset and the internal reset.

  In the case of an internal reset, 16-bit address information (E000H in this example) is output from the address signals A0 to A15 immediately after timeout of the WDT 314, and the address information immediately after the external reset ( For example, 0000H). Note that the address information output immediately after the internal reset and the address information output immediately after the external reset may be set to be the same.

  FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram showing another example of the state change of another output signal after the external reset, and FIG. 121 (b) is another example of the state change of another output signal after the internal reset. FIG. In this example, in the case of an internal reset, the internal reset is canceled after the elapse of a time B2 longer than the reset cancellation time B1 of the external reset. Note that this configuration and each configuration described with reference to FIG.

  <Start timing of security mode>

  FIG. 122 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the security mode start timing after the external system reset, and FIG. 122 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the security mode start timing after the internal system reset. In this example, in the case of an external system reset, after the cause of the external system reset occurs (for example, after the falling edge of the reset input signal XSRST is detected), the time C1 (for example, the system clock SCLK) The security mode is configured to start after a lapse of 4 clocks). On the other hand, in the case of an internal system reset, after the cause of the internal reset occurs (for example, after the WDT timer times out), the time C2 (for example, the time corresponding to one clock of the system clock SCLK) elapses. Security mode is configured to start.

  In this example, the time C1 from the occurrence of the external reset factor to the start of the security mode is set longer than the time C2 from the occurrence of the internal reset factor to the start of the security mode. However, (C1> C2), the time C1 from the occurrence of the external reset factor to the start of the security mode is determined from the time C2 from the occurrence of the internal reset factor to the start of the security mode. May be shortened (C1 <C2).

  In the above example, the execution time of random extension processing (random extension time) and fixed extension processing (fixed extension time) included in the security mode can be freely set regardless of the reset factor. Configured to have only one random extension time setting register and one fixed extension time setting register for external reset and internal reset, and set random extension time and fixed extension time individually for external reset and internal reset. Setting may be prohibited (only common setting may be permitted).

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the basic concept of the present invention. In the present invention, when starting the second event based on the first event, the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor The timing for starting the second event can be varied.

  For example, considering the start timing of the security mode described with reference to FIG. 122 above, when the second event (security mode) is started based on the first event (reset), the first event is the first event. The timing for starting the second event (security mode) differs depending on whether the first event is caused by an external system reset or if the first event is caused by a second factor (internal system reset). Can do. Therefore, the time C1 from the occurrence of the first factor (external system reset) to the start of the second event (security mode) is set to The second event (security mode) starts after the first event (external system reset) occurs or the time C2 is longer than the time C2 until the second event (security mode) starts The time C1 until the second event (internal system reset) occurs can be made shorter than the time C2 until the second event (security mode) is started.

  Moreover, since the timing which starts security mode can be varied, it is also possible to vary the timing which starts user mode performed after that. For example, the security mode is started even when the execution time of the security mode is the same between the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor. If the timing is different, the timing at which the user mode is started can be made different between the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor.

Also, the security mode can be executed without changing the timing of starting the security mode between the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor. If the times are different, the timing at which the user mode is started can be made different between the case where the first event is caused by the first factor and the case where the first event is caused by the second factor.
<Other embodiments>

  Next, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment will be described. In some cases, the contents described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the present embodiment may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  For example, FIG. 124A is a diagram illustrating an example of connection of the power supply board 182, the payout board 170, and the main board 156 described with reference to FIG. The power supply board 182 includes a RAM clear switch 180 and a detection signal output terminal for outputting a detection signal when an operation of the RAM clear switch 180 is detected. The CPU of the power supply board 182 periodically detects whether or not the RAM clear switch 180 is operated, and outputs a detection result (for example, an H level signal when there is an operation and an L level signal when there is no operation). Output from the detection signal output terminal toward the dispensing substrate 170.

  The payout board 170 is a RAM clear for temporarily storing the detection signal input terminal connected to the detection signal output terminal of the power supply board 182 and the operation information of the RAM clear switch 180 acquired through the detection signal input terminal. Switch operation information temporary storage means 171 (for example, RAM, CPU register, flip-flop) and an operation information output terminal for outputting the operation information stored in the RAM clear switch operation information temporary storage means 171. . The CPU of the payout board 170 detects the signal input to the detection signal input terminal in the initial processing after power-on or system reset, and indicates operation information (for example, whether or not the RAM clear switch 180 is operated). When the H level signal is detected, the RAM clear switch operation information temporary storage 171 stores 1 information indicating that there is an operation and 0 information indicating that there is no operation when an L level signal is detected. The operation information is stored in a predetermined storage area and information corresponding to the operation information (for example, an H level signal in the case of operation information with an operation and an L level signal in the case of operation information without an operation) is output. Output from the terminal toward the main board 156.

  The main board 156 includes an operation information input terminal (the above-mentioned I / O 410) connected to the operation information output terminal of the payout board 170, and a RAM clear timing notification LED 155. The CPU 304 mounted on the main board 156 inputs the operation information input terminal (I / O 310) after turning on the RAM clear timing notification LED 155 in the initial setting (after notifying that the RAM can be cleared). When the signal is confirmed and an H level signal is detected, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is initialized (RAM clear).

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the main control unit according to the modification, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as the flowchart shown in FIG. 10, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a flow of initial setting 2 in the main process of the main control unit.

  In step S128 of the initial setting 2, the CPU 304 turns on the RAM clear timing notification LED 155 (after notifying that the RAM can be cleared), and then checks the input signal of the operation information input terminal (I / O 310). Operation information indicating whether or not the RAM clear switch 180 is operated (for example, 1 information indicating that there is an operation when an H level signal is detected, and no operation when an L level signal is detected) Is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308.

  In the determination process in step S109 after the initial setting 2 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 information indicating that there is an operation is stored in the RAM 308, and if applicable (when the RAM needs to be cleared). In step S113, the basic circuit 302 is initialized. On the other hand, when 0 information indicating no operation is stored (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is It is determined whether the information indicates suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine to an initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  Returning to FIG. 124, FIG. 124 (b) is a diagram showing a conventional connection mode corresponding to FIG. 124 (a). In the conventional connection mode, when the setting data 111B (about 30 seconds) is set as the above-described fixed extension time on the main board 156, the security mode ends, the user mode is entered, and the game control program is started. Will be at least about 30 seconds later. For this reason, when the configuration for detecting the signal input to the operation information input terminal (I / O 410) is adopted in the game control program of the main board 156, the RAM clear switch 180 must be operated for at least about 30 seconds. For example, whether or not the RAM clear switch 180 is operated cannot be detected, and the timing at which the main board 156 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 180 cannot be known from the outside.

  On the other hand, in the connection mode according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 6A, whether the store clerk or the like of the game shop can clear the RAM by confirming that the RAM clear timing notification LED 155 is turned on / off. It is possible to immediately determine whether or not. For this reason, the RAM clear switch 180 can be operated by waiting for the RAM clear timing notification LED 155 to be lit, and the RAM clear switch 180 can be operated for a long time. There is a case where it is freed from troublesomeness and convenience can be improved. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is operated before the RAM clear timing notification LED 155 is turned on (before the game control program of the CPU 304 is started), the CPU of the payout board 170 is activated. The dispensing board 170 can store the operation information. Therefore, when the main board 156 can reliably execute the RAM clear after the start of the game control program based on the operation information stored in the RAM clear switch operation information temporary storage means 171 of the payout board 170. There is.

In the present embodiment, an example in which input / output of signals between the power supply board 182, the payout board 170, and the main board 156 is performed via the input / output terminals is described. It may be by transmission and reception. Further, the RAM clear switch 180 is not limited to the example arranged on the power supply board 182, and may be arranged on the payout board 170, for example.
<Other commands of main control unit>

Next, other commands included in the main control unit 300 will be described. In the following description, “r”, “s”, “ss”, or “qq” is an abbreviation representing an arbitrary register, and “k” is an abbreviation representing a lower address paired with the T register. , “N” is an abbreviation representing an 8-bit numeric value (hexadecimal number), “mn” is an abbreviation representing a 16-bit numeric value (hexadecimal number), and “()” is a value in parentheses. An abbreviation for address data.
<Other instructions / 8-bit load instructions>

  The 8-bit load instruction is an instruction for loading 8-bit data into a predetermined storage area, and corresponds to, for example, an LD instruction, an LDT instruction, or a CLRT instruction.

  For example, the (LD A, T) instruction is an instruction for loading data stored in the T register into the A register, and the (LD T, n) instruction is for loading a numerical value n having an 8-bit length into the T register. It is an instruction to do.

  The (LDT A, (r)) instruction stores the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r as the lower byte. (LDT A, (k)) instruction is an instruction for loading data stored in the T register into the upper byte, the register indicated by k. This is an instruction to load the data stored in the address having the data as the lower byte into the A register. The (LDT r, (k)) instruction is the register indicated by the upper byte, k, of the data stored in the T register. This is an instruction to load the data stored in the address having the data stored in the lower byte into the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r.

  The (LDT (r), A) instruction is the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register is the upper byte, and the registers (A, B, C, D, E, H, L indicated by r) (LDT (k), A) is an instruction to load data stored in the A register, data stored in the T register as upper bytes, This is an instruction to load the data stored in the register indicated by k into an address having a lower byte, and the (LDT (k), r) instruction is a register (B, C, D, E, H, This is an instruction to load data stored in L) into an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte.

  The (LDT (k), (ss)) instruction is obtained by changing the data stored in the address indicated by the data stored in the pair register (BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss and the data stored in the T register. This is an instruction to load the data stored in the register indicated by byte k to the address having the lower byte, and the (LDT (k), (HL + v)) instruction is indicated by v in the data stored in the HL register. Data stored at the address indicated by the addition result of data (v = 1 to 7), the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte The (LDT (k), (HL + d)) instruction is data indicated by d in the data stored in the HL register (d = 8 to 127, −1 to 128) is an instruction to load the data stored at the address indicated by the addition result of 128) into the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. , (LDT (ss), (k)) instruction, the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte This is an instruction to load to the address indicated by the data stored in the indicated pair register (BC, DE, HL).

  The (LDT (HL + v), (k)) instruction stores data stored in an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This is an instruction to load the address indicated by the addition result obtained by adding the data indicated by v (v = 1 to 7) to the stored data, and the (LDT (HL + d), (k)) instruction is stored in the T register. The data stored in the address having the data stored in the register indicated by k as the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the data indicated by d in the data stored in the HL register (d = 8 to 127, − 1 to -128) is added to the address indicated by the addition result, and the (LDT (k), n) instruction is used to set the value indicated by n to the data stored in the T register. High byte data is an instruction to load the address of the lower byte data stored in the register indicated by k.

The (CLRT (k)) instruction is an instruction to load a numerical value 0 to an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte.
<Other instructions / 16-bit load instructions>

  The 16-bit load instruction is an instruction for loading 16-bit data into a predetermined storage area, and corresponds to, for example, an LDT instruction, an LDWT instruction, a CLR instruction, a CLRWT instruction, and the like. Specifically, the (LDT BC, n) instruction is an instruction for loading data stored in the T register into the B register and loading a numerical value indicated by n into the C register, and (LDT DE, n ) Instruction is an instruction to load data stored in the T register into the D register and load a numerical value indicated by n into the E register, and the (LDT HL, n) instruction is stored in the T register. This is an instruction to load data into the H register and load a numerical value indicated by n into the L register.

  The (LDT IX, n) instruction loads the data stored in the T register into the upper 8 bits of the 16-bit IX register, and sets the numerical value indicated by n to the lower 8 bits of the 16-bit IX register. The (LDT IY, n) instruction loads data stored in the T register into the upper byte of the 16-bit IY register, and the numerical value indicated by n is a 16-bit IY register. This is an instruction to load the lower byte of.

  The (LDT ss, (k)) instruction is a pair indicated by ss with data stored at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. Load the upper byte of the register (BC, DE) and store the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the address stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte plus 1 This is an instruction to load the read data into the lower byte of the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss.

  The (LDT qq, (k)) instruction is a pair indicated by qq with data stored at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. Load the upper byte of the register (IX, IY), store the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and store the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This is an instruction to load the read data into the lower byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq.

  The (LDT HL, (k)) instruction uses the data stored in the address stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. And the data stored in the address obtained by adding 1 to the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the H register of the HL register. Is an instruction to load.

  The (LDT (k), ss) instruction is data stored in the lower byte of the pair register (BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss, data stored in the T register is higher byte, and register indicated by k The data stored in the upper byte of the pair register (BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, This is an instruction to load an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the data stored in the register indicated by k as a lower byte.

  The (LDT (k), qq) instruction stores the data stored in the lower byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the register indicated by k. The data stored in the upper byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and k This is an instruction to load an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the data stored in the register as the lower byte.

  The (LDT (k), HL) instruction loads data stored in the L register into an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. And an instruction to load data stored in the H register into an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. .

  The (LDWT (r), mn) instruction uses the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r as the lower byte. The data stored in the address indicated by mn + 1, which is a 16-bit numerical value, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the register indicated by r (A, B, C, D) , E, H, L) is an instruction to load an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the data stored in the lower byte.

  The (CLR (ss)) instruction is an instruction for storing a numerical value 0 in the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss, and the (CLRW (ss)) instruction is a pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss. , HL) is an instruction that stores a numerical value 0 at the address indicated by the data stored in the data, and stores a numerical value 0 at an address obtained by adding 1 to the address. The (CLRW (qq)) instruction is qq This is an instruction for storing a numerical value 0 at an address indicated by data stored in the indicated register (IX, IY) and storing a numerical value 0 at an address obtained by adding 1 to the address, (CLRW (qq + d)) The instruction is an address indicated by an addition result obtained by adding data (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) indicated by d to data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. In vinegar, it is an instruction to store the numeric 0.

  The (CLRT (k)) instruction is an instruction for storing a numerical value 0 at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and (CLRWT (K)) The instruction loads the data stored in the T register to the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and stores the numerical value 0 in the T register. This is an instruction for storing a numerical value of 0 at an address obtained by adding 1 to an address having the data stored as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte.

As described above, the register (BC, DE) indicated by ss and the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq are (CLR (ss)) instruction, (CLRW (ss)) instruction, (CLRW (qq + d)). It can be specified as an instruction operand. On the other hand, the T register (special register) can be specified only as an operand of the CLRT instruction or the CLRWT instruction, and in addition, a part of the operand (the lower 1 byte of the address indicated by k in this embodiment) is It can only be specified as a direct value. For this reason, a situation in which the value of the T register is unexpectedly cleared to 0 or an unexpected value is stored in the T register may be prevented.
<Other instructions / stack manipulation instructions>

  The stack operation instruction is an instruction for saving data in the stack area or restoring data from the stack area, and corresponds to, for example, a PUSH instruction, a POP instruction, and the like.

  For example, the (PUSH ss) instruction saves the data stored in the upper byte of the pair register (AF, BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss to the address indicated by (SP (stack pointer) -1). An instruction that subtracts 2 from SP after saving the data stored in the lower byte of the pair register (AF, BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss to the address indicated by (SP-2). is there. The (PUSH TI) instruction saves the data stored in the T register to the address indicated by (SP-1), and the data stored in the I register is indicated by (SP-2). This instruction subtracts 2 from SP after saving to an address. The (PUSH qq) instruction saves the data stored in the upper byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq to the address indicated by (SP-1), and the pair indicated by qq. This instruction subtracts 2 from SP after saving the data stored in the lower byte of the register (IX, IY) to the address indicated by (SP-2).

  (PUSH ALL) instruction is for all registers (T, I, A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX high byte, IX low byte, IY high byte, IY low byte This is an instruction for subtracting 14 (total number of registers) from SP after the data stored in () is saved to the stack area byte by byte in this order. In addition, the (PUSH GPR) instruction saves data stored in some registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L) one byte at a time in this order, This is an instruction to subtract 8 from SP.

  The (POP ss) instruction restores the data stored at the address indicated by SP to the upper byte of the pair register (AF, BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss and the address indicated by (SP + 1) This is an instruction to add 2 to SP after the data stored in is restored to the lower byte of the pair register (AF, BC, DE, HL) indicated by ss. The (POP TI) instruction returns the data stored at the address indicated by SP to the I register and returns the data stored at the address indicated by (SP + 1) to the T register. This is an instruction to add 2 to SP. The (POP qq) instruction restores the data stored at the address indicated by SP to the lower byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq and stores it at the address indicated by (SP + 1). This is an instruction to add 2 to SP after the restored data is restored to the upper byte of the pair register (IX, IY) indicated by qq.

The (POP ALL) instruction reads the data stored in SP, (SP + 1),..., (SP + 12), (SP + 13) in this order in all registers (lower byte of IY, upper byte of IY, lower byte of IX). , IX, upper byte, L, H, E, D, C, B, F, A, I, T) one byte at a time (lower byte of IY ← (SP), upper byte of IY ← (SP + 1), ..., I ← (SP + 12), T ← (SP + 13)), and then an instruction to add 14 to SP. In addition, the (POP GPR) instruction is used to store data stored in SP, (SP + 1),..., (SP + 6), (SP + 7) in this order in some registers (L, H, E, D, C, B). , F, A) is an instruction for adding 8 to SP after returning one byte at a time (L ← (SP), H ← (SP + 1),..., F ← (SP + 6), A ← (SP + 7)).
<Other instructions / arithmetic logic operation instructions>

  The arithmetic logic operation instruction is an instruction for performing various logic operations. For example, an ADD instruction, a SUB instruction, an ANDT instruction, an ORT instruction, an XORT instruction, a CPT instruction, an INC instruction, an INCT instruction, an INCWT instruction, a DEC instruction, A DECT instruction, a DECWT instruction, and the like are applicable.

  For example, the (ADD A, r) instruction adds the data stored in the A register and the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r, and adds This is an instruction for storing the result in the A register. The (ADDT r, (k)) instruction stores the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r and the T register. The stored data is added to the upper byte, the data stored in the address having the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the addition result is added to the register (B, C, D, E, H, L).

  For example, the (SUB r) instruction subtracts the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r from the data stored in the A register. This is an instruction to be stored in the A register. The (SUBT r, (k)) instruction is stored in the T register from the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r. The data stored in the address having the data stored in the register indicated by k as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte are subtracted, and the subtraction result is indicated by the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) is an instruction to be stored.

  For example, the (ANDT (k)) instruction is stored in an address having the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. Is an instruction that calculates a logical product (AND) of the data and stores the operation result in the A register. The (ANDT r, (k)) instruction is a register (B, C, D, E) indicated by r. , H, L) and the data stored in the address stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte ( AND), and the operation result is stored in a register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r.

  The (ORT (k)) instruction is data stored in an address having the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. And (ORT r, (k)) instructions are registers (B, C, D, E, H) indicated by r. , L) and the data stored at the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte (OR) And the operation result is stored in a register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r.

  The (XORT (k)) instruction is data stored in an address having the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. And an XORT r, (k) instruction is a register (B, C, D, E) indicated by r. , H, L) and the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This is an instruction for calculating the sum (XOR) and storing the operation result in a register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r.

  The (CPT (k)) instruction is the data stored in the address stored in the A register with the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. When the operation result overflows, the predetermined flag is set to 1, while when the operation result does not overflow, the predetermined flag is cleared to 0, and the S flag, Z flag, SZ flag, H flag, Alternatively, it is an instruction for changing the value stored in the carry flag (C flag) from 0 to 1 (or from 1 to 0). The (CPT r, (k)) instruction indicates the data stored in the T register from the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by the upper byte, k. The data stored in the address stored in the register is subtracted from the data stored in the lower byte, and when the operation result overflows, the predetermined flag is set to 1, while when the overflow does not occur, the predetermined flag is set. This instruction clears the value to 0 and changes the value stored in the S flag, Z flag, SZ flag, H flag, or carry flag (C flag) from 0 to 1 (or from 1 to 0).

  The (INC T) instruction is an instruction for adding 1 to the data stored in the T register, and the (INCT (r)) instruction is used to store the data stored in the T register as an upper byte and a register (A , B, C, D, E, H, L) is an instruction for adding 1 to the data stored in the address having the lower byte as the data stored therein, and the (INCT (k)) instruction is stored in the T register. This is an instruction to add 1 to the data stored in the address having the stored data as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. In addition, the (INCWT (k)) instruction stores the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the address stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the address obtained by adding 1 to the address. This is an instruction for adding 1 to the 2-byte data.

  The (DEC T) instruction is an instruction for subtracting 1 from the data stored in the T register, and the (DECT (r)) instruction is used to store the data stored in the T register in the upper byte, the register (A , B, C, D, E, H, L) is an instruction for subtracting 1 from the data stored in the address having the lower byte as the data stored therein, and the (DECT (k)) instruction is stored in the T register. This is an instruction for subtracting 1 from data stored at an address having stored data as an upper byte and data stored in a register indicated by k as a lower byte. In addition, the (INCWT (k)) instruction stores the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the address stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and the address obtained by adding 1 to the address. This is an instruction to subtract 1 from the 2-byte data.

  <Other instructions / Rotate shift instructions>

  Arithmetic logical operation instructions are instructions for performing various logical operations. For example, RLC instruction, RLCT instruction, RRC instruction, RRCT instruction, RL instruction, RLT instruction, RR instruction, RRT instruction, SLA instruction, SLAT instruction, An SRA instruction, SRAT instruction, SRL instruction, SRLT instruction, and the like are applicable.

  For example, the (RLC r) instruction rotates the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by 1 bit to the left (from the LSB to the MSB side) This instruction stores the bits shifted out from the MSB in the LSB and the carry flag. The (RLC (HL)) instruction rotates the data stored in the HL register to the left by 1 bit and is shifted out from the MSB. The bit is stored in the LSB and the carry flag. The (RLC (qq + d)) instruction is data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) is added, the data stored at the address indicated by the addition result is rotated left by 1 bit, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is LSB (RLCT (k)) instruction is data stored in an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. Is rotated to the left by 1 bit, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is stored in the LSB and carry flag.

  The (RRC r) instruction rotates the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r to the right (from the MSB to the LSB side) by 1 bit, and from the LSB This instruction stores the shifted out bits in the MSB and carry flag. The (RRC (HL)) instruction rotates the data stored in the HL register to the right by 1 bit, and shifts the bits shifted out from the LSB. This is an instruction stored in the MSB and carry flag, and the (RRC (qq + d)) instruction is data indicated by d (d = 8 to 127, −1) in data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. The data stored at the address indicated by the addition result is rotated by 1 bit to the right, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is carried with the MSB. (RRCT (k)) instruction stores data stored in an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This instruction rotates to the right by one bit and stores the bits shifted out from the LSB in the MSB and carry flag.

  The (RL r) instruction rotates the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r to the left (from the LSB to the MSB side) by 1 bit, and carries the carry flag. The bit stored in the LSB is stored in the LSB, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RL (HL)) instruction stores the data stored in the HL register 1 bit to the left. The bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the LSB, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RL (qq + d)) instruction is a register ( IX, IY) is stored in the address indicated by the addition result obtained by adding the data indicated by d (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128). Is rotated to the left by 1 bit, the bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the LSB, and the bit shifted out from the MSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RLT (k)) instruction is Rotate the data stored in the address with the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte by one bit to the left, and change the bit stored in the carry flag. This is an instruction for storing the bit shifted out from the MSB and stored in the LSB in the carry flag.

  The (RR r) instruction rotates the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by 1 bit to the right (from the MSB to the LSB side), and carries the carry flag. The bit stored in the MSB is stored in the MSB, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RR (HL)) instruction stores the data stored in the HL register 1 bit to the right. Only the bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the MSB, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RR (qq + d)) instruction is a register ( IX, IY) is stored in the address indicated by the addition result obtained by adding the data indicated by d (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128). Is rotated to the right by 1 bit, the bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the MSB, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is stored in the carry flag. The (RRT (k)) instruction is Rotate the data stored in the address with the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte by one bit to the right, and change the bit stored in the carry flag. This is an instruction to store in MSB the bit shifted out from LSB in the carry flag.

  The (SLA r) instruction shifts the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by 1 bit to the left (from the LSB to the MSB side), and from the MSB. This instruction stores the shifted out bit in the carry flag and stores 0 in the LSB. The (SLA (HL)) instruction shifts the data stored in the HL register by 1 bit to the left and shifts from the MSB. This is an instruction for storing the out bit in the carry flag and storing 0 in the LSB. The (SLA (qq + d)) instruction is indicated by d in the data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. Data stored at the address indicated by the addition result of data (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) is shifted left by 1 bit, and the bits shifted out from the MSB are keyed. The instruction is stored in the Lee flag and 0 is stored in the LSB. The (SLAT (k)) instruction uses the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This is an instruction to shift the data stored in the address by 1 bit to the left, store the bit shifted out from the MSB in the carry flag, and store 0 in the LSB.

  The (SRAR) instruction shifts the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r to the right (from the MSB to the LSB side) by 1 bit, and from the LSB This is an instruction to store the shifted out bit in the carry flag and store the previous MSB value in the MSB. The (SLA (HL)) instruction shifts the data stored in the HL register by 1 bit to the right. , The bit shifted out from the LSB is stored in the carry flag, and the MSB value is stored in the MSB. The (SLA (qq + d)) instruction is stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. The data stored at the address indicated by the addition result obtained by adding the data indicated by d (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) to the generated data is shifted to the right by 1 bit, and from the LSB The bit stored in the carry flag is stored in the carry flag, and the value of the previous MSB is stored in the MSB. The (SLAT (k)) instruction stores the data stored in the T register in the upper byte, a register indicated by k. An instruction that shifts data stored in the address having the data stored in the lower byte by 1 bit to the right, stores the bit shifted out from the LSB in the carry flag, and stores the previous MSB value in the MSB It is.

The (SRL r) instruction shifts the data stored in the register (A, B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r by 1 bit to the right (from the MSB to the LSB side), and from the LSB This instruction stores the shifted-out bit in the carry flag and stores 0 in the MSB. The (SRL (HL)) instruction shifts the data stored in the HL register to the right by 1 bit and shifts from the LSB. This is an instruction to store the out bit in the carry flag and store 0 in the MSB. The (SRL (qq + d)) instruction is indicated by d in the data stored in the register (IX, IY) indicated by qq. The data stored at the address indicated by the addition result of data (d = 8 to 127, −1 to −128) is shifted to the right by 1 bit, and the bit shifted out from the LSB is captured. -An instruction to store in the flag and 0 in the MSB. The (SRLT (k)) instruction uses the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. This is an instruction to shift data stored in the address by 1 bit to the right, store the bit shifted out from the LSB in the carry flag, and store 0 in the MSB.
<Other instructions / bit manipulation instructions>

  The bit operation instruction is an instruction for performing various operations in bit units, and corresponds to, for example, a BITT instruction, a SETT instruction, a REST instruction, and the like.

For example, the (BITT b, (k)) instruction inverts data stored at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. The (SETT b, (k)) instruction is an instruction that sets the data stored in the T register to the upper byte and 1 stored in the data stored in the register indicated by k. The (REST b, (k)) instruction is an instruction to set 0 to data stored in an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. is there.
<Other instructions / arithmetic & jump instructions>

  The calculation & jump instruction is an instruction for performing a branch process based on the calculation and the calculation result of the calculation, and corresponds to, for example, a JCPT instruction, a JTT instruction, a JBITT instruction, or the like.

  For example, the instruction (JCPT Z, A, (k), e), from the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register is the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k is the lower byte. When the Z flag is 1, when the Z flag is 1, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e), and the Z flag is 0 In this case, it is an instruction to execute a subsequent instruction. The instruction (JCPT NZ, A, (k), e) is obtained by changing the data stored in the T register from the data stored in the A register with the upper byte, k. The data stored in the address stored in the indicated register is subtracted from the address stored in the lower byte. If the Z flag is 0, the address indicated by e is set in the PC (program counter). It is an instruction to load (branch to an address indicated by e) and execute the subsequent instruction when the Z flag is 1.

  In the (JCPT C, A, (k), e) instruction, from the data stored in the A register, the data stored in the T register is the upper byte, and the data stored in the register indicated by k is the lower byte. The data stored in the address having the data stored in the address as the lower byte is subtracted, and when the carry flag is 1, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (to the address indicated by e) Branch), and when the carry flag is 0, it is an instruction for executing the subsequent instruction. The instruction (JCPT NC, A, (k), e) is stored in the T register from the data stored in the A register. When the carry flag is 0 when the stored data is subtracted from the address where the stored data is the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k is the lower byte Is an instruction for loading the address indicated by e into the PC (program counter) (branching to the address indicated by e) and executing the subsequent instruction when the carry flag is 1.

  The instruction (JCPT Z, (k), ss, e) adds an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and 1 is added to the address. The 2-byte data stored in the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss is subtracted from the 2-byte data stored at the specified address, and when the Z flag is 1, the address indicated by e is set to PC. (Program counter) is an instruction to load (branch to an address indicated by e) and execute the subsequent instruction when the Z flag is 0. (JCPT NZ, (k), ss, e) The data stored in the T register is the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k is the lower byte, and the address obtained by adding 1 to the address. The 2-byte data stored in the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss is subtracted from the 2-byte data, and when the Z flag is 0, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter). (Branch to an address indicated by e), and when the Z flag is 1, this is an instruction for executing the subsequent instruction.

  The (JCPTC C, (k), ss, e) instruction adds an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and 1 to the address. The 2-byte data stored in the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss is subtracted from the 2-byte data stored at the specified address, and when the carry flag is 1, the address indicated by e is set to PC. It is an instruction to load (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e) and execute the subsequent instruction when the carry flag is 0. The (JCPT NC, (k), ss, e) instruction is , An address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte, the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte, and an address obtained by adding 1 to the address The 2-byte data stored in the pair register (BC, DE) indicated by ss is subtracted from the 2-byte data stored in, and when the carry flag is 0, the address indicated by e is set to PC (program This is an instruction to load the counter) (branch to an address indicated by e) and execute the subsequent instruction when the carry flag is 1.

  The (JTT Z, (k) e) instruction calculates the numerical value 0 from the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. When the Z flag is 1, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e), and when the Z flag is 0, the subsequent instruction is executed. The (JTT NZ, (k) e) instruction is an instruction from data stored at an address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. The numerical value 0 is subtracted, and if the Z flag is 0, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e), and if the Z flag is 1, This is an instruction for executing a subsequent instruction.

The (JBITT Z, b, (k), e) instruction includes the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. The inverted data of the bit indicated by b is stored in the Z flag, and when the Z flag is 1, the address indicated by e is loaded into the PC (program counter) (branch to the address indicated by e), and the Z flag Is an instruction to execute the following instruction when 0 is 0, the (JBITT NZ, b, (k), e) instruction stores the data stored in the T register in the upper byte, the register indicated by k. Of the data stored in the address having the lower data as the lower byte, the inverted data of the bit indicated by b is stored in the Z flag, and when the Z flag is 0, the address indicated by e is set to PC Program counter) in the load branches to (address indicated by e), if Z flag is 1 is an instruction to execute the subsequent instruction.
<Other instructions / arithmetic & return instructions>

  The operation & return instruction is an instruction for performing a return process based on the operation and the operation result of the operation, and corresponds to, for example, an RTT instruction.

For example, the (RTT Z, (k)) instruction is a numerical value 0 from the data stored in the address having the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. When the Z flag is 1, the address stored in SP and (SP + 1) is loaded into the PC (program counter) (returned to the address indicated by SP and (SP + 1)), and the Z flag is 0. In the case of (1), an instruction to execute a subsequent instruction is executed. The (RTT NZ, (k)) instruction has the data stored in the T register as the upper byte and the data stored in the register indicated by k as the lower byte. The value 0 is subtracted from the data stored at the address to be loaded, and when the Z flag is 0, the address stored in SP and (SP + 1) is loaded into the PC (program counter). It returned to the address indicated by SP and (SP + 1)), if Z flag is 1 is an instruction to execute the subsequent instruction.
<Other instructions / Compound instructions>

  The compound instruction is an instruction in which a plurality of processes are combined, for example, an INCPLD instruction, an INCWLD instruction, a DECPLD instruction, a DECPWLD instruction, or the like.

  The (INCPLD A, r) instruction subtracts the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r from the data stored in the A register, and the carry flag is 1. In this case, 1 is added to the data stored in the A register, and 0 is stored in the A register when the carry flag is 0. The (INCPLD (HL), r) instruction is stored in the HL register. The data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the data, and stored in the HL register when the carry flag is 1. This instruction adds 1 to the data stored at the address indicated by the read data and stores 0 in the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register when the carry flag is 0. .

  The (INCPLD A, n) instruction subtracts the numerical value n from the data stored in the A register, adds 1 to the data stored in the A register when the carry flag is 1, and the carry flag is 0 The (INCPLD (HL), n) instruction subtracts the numerical value n from the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register, and the carry flag is 1. In this case, 1 is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register, and when the carry flag is 0, 0 is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register. Is an instruction to memorize.

  The (INCPLD HL, mn) instruction subtracts the numerical value mn from the data stored in the HL register, adds 1 to the data stored in the HL register when the carry flag is 1, and the carry flag is 0 The instruction (INCPWLD (HL), mn) is stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and at the address indicated by the data +1 stored in the HL register. The numerical value mn is subtracted from the data, and when the carry flag is 1, 1 is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and the data indicated by the data +1 stored in the HL register. When the carry flag is 0, the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the HL register + This is an instruction for storing 0 in the data stored at the address indicated by 1.

  The (DECPLD A, r) instruction subtracts 1 from the data stored in the A register, and when the carry flag is 1, stores it in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r. The stored data is stored in the A register, and when the carry flag is 0, 1 is subtracted from the A register. The (DECPLD (HL), r) instruction is an address indicated by the data stored in the HL register. When the data stored in the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) indicated by r is subtracted from the data stored in, and the carry flag is 1, the register (B, C, D, E, H, L) is stored in the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register when the carry flag is 0. Data indicated by the data This instruction subtracts 1 from the data stored in the dress.

  The (DECPLD A, n) instruction subtracts the numerical value n from the data stored in the A register, stores the numerical value n in the A register when the carry flag is 1, and stores the numerical value n when the carry flag is 0. This is an instruction to subtract 1 from the data stored in the register. The (DECPLD (HL), n) instruction subtracts the numerical value n from the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register, When the flag is 1, the numerical value n is stored in the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register. When the carry flag is 0, the numerical value n is stored at the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register. This instruction subtracts 1 from the data.

  The (DECPLD HL, mn) instruction subtracts the numerical value mn from the data stored in the HL register, stores the numerical value mn in the HL register when the carry flag is 1, and outputs the HL when the carry flag is 0. This is an instruction to subtract 1 from the data stored in the register. The (DECPWLD (HL), mn) instruction is an address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and an address indicated by the data +1 stored in the HL register. When the numerical value mn is subtracted from the stored data and the carry flag is 1, the numerical value is stored in the data stored in the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register + 1. When mn is stored and the carry flag is 0, the address indicated by the data stored in the HL register and the HL register This is an instruction to subtract 1 from the data stored at the address indicated by the stored data + 1.

  For example, in the basic random number initial value update process (step S115) of the main control unit main process described above, the normal timer random number value is stored in the A register, and the maximum value (for example, 100) of the normal timer random value is stored in the numerical value n. If (INCPLD A, n) instruction is executed after (loading), if the carry flag is 1, that is, if the usual timer random number is not the maximum value, 1 is added to the ordinary timer random value. When the carry flag is 0, that is, when the usual timer random number value reaches the maximum value, 0 can be stored in the ordinary timer random value. For this reason, the usual timer random number value can be easily updated by only the (INCPLD A, n) instruction, and the program capacity may be reduced and the processing speed may be improved.

  Further, in the basic random number initial value updating process (step S115) of the main control unit main process described above, the normal timer random number value is stored in the A register, and the maximum value (for example, 100) of the normal timer random value is stored in the numerical value n. If the (DECPLD A, n) instruction is executed after (loading), if the carry flag is 1, that is, if the usual timer random number value becomes negative, the ordinary timer random number value is When the maximum value of the figure timer random value is stored and the carry flag is 0, that is, when the common timer random number is not a negative value, 1 can be subtracted from the common timer random value. For this reason, it is possible to easily update the regular timer random number value only with the (DECPLD A, n) instruction, and it may be possible to reduce the program capacity and improve the processing speed. In this example, the random number value is updated only by the A register. However, another register (for example, R register) may be used together, or a hardware random value may be used together.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment includes a microprocessor (for example, a basic) having at least a CPU (for example, the CPU 304) and a ROM (for example, the ROM 306) in which at least a game control program is stored. A game machine having a circuit 302), wherein the game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the microprocessor has at least a predetermined output terminal (for example, a reset output terminal XRSTO), and the microprocessor Has at least a random extension function (for example, a random extension process), and the random extension function is capable of randomly changing the execution start timing of the game control program, from the predetermined output terminal Output of the first level at least at a predetermined timing. To a second level (for example, a high level signal) higher than the first level (for example, a low level signal), and the predetermined timing is before the execution of the random extension function. It is a game table characterized by that.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the above embodiment is a game including a microprocessor (for example, basic circuit 302) including at least a CPU (for example, CPU 304) and a ROM (for example, ROM 306) for storing a game control program. The microprocessor has at least a predetermined output terminal (for example, reset output terminal XRSTO), and the microprocessor has a predetermined signal from the predetermined output terminal (for example, reset output terminal XRSTO). Start of random delay processing that is performed before the start of execution of the game control program with respect to rising timing or falling timing of output (for example, reset output signal output) (for example, rising timing for changing from a low level signal to a high level signal) It is feasible before It is a skill base.

  127 and 128 are diagrams for explaining an example of a signal output from a predetermined output terminal according to the present invention. In the figure, the voltage change of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO which is an example of the predetermined output terminal and the low level which is a reference voltage for judging whether or not the first level according to the present invention is set. A threshold voltage VL and a high level threshold voltage VH, which is a reference voltage for determining whether or not the second level according to the present invention is present, are shown.

  In this example, when the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is lower than the low level threshold voltage VL, it is defined as the first level (low level), and the voltage output from the reset output terminal XRSTO is high level. When it is higher than the threshold voltage VH, it is defined as the second level (high level). In this example, hysteresis is given to the low-level threshold voltage VL and the high-level threshold voltage VH, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the low-level threshold voltage VL and the high-level threshold voltage VH The level threshold voltage VH may be set to the same voltage (for example, when the high voltage is 5V and the low voltage is 0V, the average of both is 2.5V).

  In FIG. 127A, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the voltage exceeding the low level threshold voltage VL after the execution of the random extension process is started. After that, during the execution of the random extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to be changed to the second level (high level). In FIG. 6B, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the voltage exceeding the low level threshold voltage VL almost simultaneously with the start of the random extension processing. After the change, during execution of the random extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to be changed to the second level (high level).

  In FIG. 8C, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the low level threshold voltage VL before the execution of the random extension process. Then, during the execution of the random extension process, after the start of the random extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH and changed to the second level (high level). . In FIG. 4D, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the voltage exceeding the low level threshold voltage VL before the execution of the random extension process is started. Then, almost simultaneously with the start of execution of the random extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to be changed to the second level (high level).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 5E, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is changed from the first level (low level) voltage to the low level threshold voltage VL before the execution of the random extension process is started. Then, before the execution of the random extension process is started, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to be changed to the second level (high level). In FIG. 128 (a), the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is lowered from the first level (low level) voltage before the start of the random extension process and after the end of the fixed extension process. After changing to a voltage exceeding the threshold voltage VL, before starting the execution of the random extension process and after completing the fixed extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH to the second level. (High level). In FIG. 5B, the voltage of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO is set to the first level (low level) voltage before the start of the random extension process and almost simultaneously with the end of the fixed extension process. After changing from a low level threshold voltage VL to a voltage exceeding the low level threshold voltage VL, before starting the execution of the random extension process and after completing the fixed extension process, the voltage is further changed to a voltage exceeding the high level threshold voltage VH. The level is changed to the second level (high level).

  In addition, the microprocessor performs a random delay process for performing a predetermined signal output (for example, reset output signal output) from the predetermined output terminal (for example, reset output terminal XRSTO) before the execution of the game control program is started. Even if it can be executed before the end of (or during random delay processing), the same effect can be obtained.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to shift the timing of the predetermined signal output and the execution start timing of the game control program, so that a specific process of the game control process (for example, a soft random number update process, an initial value) In some cases, it is possible to prevent aiming of update processing and the like.

  The predetermined output terminal may be a terminal capable of outputting a reset signal. With such a configuration, for example, when a reset signal is connected to a predetermined electronic component, the electronic component can operate before game control, and the electronic component operates when an unauthorized radio wave is transmitted. It may be easier to detect fraud. In addition, since electronic components can operate before the start of the game control program, by making the operation start timing of the electronic components different from the execution start timing of the game control program, it is possible to aim at specific processing of the game control processing. There are cases where it can be prevented.

  Further, at least a security mode and a user mode may be provided, and the game control program may be a user program executed in the user mode.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to shift the timing of the predetermined signal output and the execution start timing of the user program, so that specific processing of game control processing (for example, soft random number update processing, initial value update processing, etc.) In some cases, it is possible to prevent sniper shooting.

  In addition, the execution start of the game control program may be performed after receiving at least one of a system reset and a user reset.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to shift a predetermined signal output timing and a game control program execution start timing at each system reset or user reset. Update processing, initial value update processing, and the like) may be prevented.

  In addition, a predetermined electronic component (for example, IC11 to IC14) having at least a predetermined input terminal is provided, and the predetermined input terminal (for example, reset input terminal) inputs the predetermined signal from the predetermined output terminal. Possible terminals may be used.

  With such a configuration, the electronic component can be operated before the start of the game control program, so that the operation start timing of the electronic component and the execution start timing of the game control program are considered to be different. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a specific process from being aimed.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating changes in the system clock signal, the address signal, the data signal, the control signal, and the reset output signal at the time of user reset. As described above, there are two types of user resets according to this embodiment: user reset due to timeout of WDT and user reset due to access outside the designated area. The user reset is set to be effective by setting the program management area. It works when there is.

  A user reset due to a WDT timeout is a reset that occurs based on a WDT timeout signal, and is configured to output a first fixed value (for example, E000H) as an address signal during the reset. On the other hand, a user reset due to an access outside the designated area is a reset that occurs based on a travel prohibition signal outside the designated area. During the reset, a second fixed value (for example, a value other than E000H, such as 8000H) is used as an address signal. Is output.

  When a user reset occurs, the CPU core, timer circuit, arithmetic circuit, input / output port, communication circuit, interrupt controller, etc. are initialized, and the execution of the user program (game control program) is started from the reset address (0000H). The watchdog timer that has been set is also cleared and restarted (automatically) regardless of the control program.

  As described above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the time-out period shown in FIG. 115 elapses), the microprocessor performs a predetermined signal (for example, a WDT activation signal (WDT time-out signal)) A designated area based on the execution of a watchdog timer (for example, WDT 314, first WDT 314a, second WDT 314b) capable of generating at least a storage area code other than a legally designated area. At least an out-of-designated area travel prohibition circuit (for example, out-of-designated-area travel prohibition circuit 3142) that can generate an out-of-designated travel prohibition signal, and after the predetermined out-of-designated area travel prohibition signal is generated During the security check that is initiated during the timing of Period during which the counter is stopped may be included at least.

  It should be noted that “the watchdog timer counter is stopped” according to the present invention means that when the counter is temporarily stopped, the counter temporarily stops after the counter is set to the initial value or 0. If the counter continues to count, but the counter is substantially stopped (does not time out) by continuing to clear and restart the counter before the counter times out, the counter value is set to the maximum security check time. This includes a case where the counter is substantially stopped (not timed out) by setting it longer than the processing time and avoiding a timeout during the security check. In addition, in the “period when the watchdog timer counter is stopped”, the system clock is set to a predetermined period from the occurrence of the out-of-designated area travel prohibition signal to the period from the occurrence of the out-of-designated area travel prohibition signal to immediately after the generation of the signal. After the clock has elapsed (for example, from the occurrence of the out-of-designated area travel prohibition signal to the falling edge or rising edge one clock after the system clock), part or all of the period from the rising edge of the output signal of the reset output terminal XRSTO Etc. are also included. Also, the WDT is built in the microcomputer, and at least the period during which the WDT counter is stopped is included in the security check that is started during the predetermined timing after the WDT timeout occurs, and the WDT is built in the microcomputer. In addition, at least a period during which the WDT counter is stopped is included in the security check that is started during the predetermined timing after the out-of-designated-area travel prohibition signal is generated.

  With such a configuration, when performing reset processing based on the travel prohibition signal outside the designated area, the watchdog timer time-out can be stopped (automatically) without depending on the control program. In some cases, the reset process based on the prohibition signal can be performed quickly.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine including at least a CPU (for example, the CPU 304) and a ROM (for example, the ROM 306) in which at least a game control program is stored. Is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the timeout time shown in FIG. 115 elapses), a predetermined signal (for example, a WDT activation signal (WDT timeout signal) or CPU A watchdog timer (for example, WDT 314, first WDT 314a, second WDT 314b) that generates at least an internal signal), and the CPU triggers the game control program at a predetermined address (for example, the generation of the predetermined signal). 62, address 0000H shown in FIG. Are adjustable configuration time from the generation of a constant signal to the execution start of the game control program, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the time until the game control program is executed can be changed, and the execution timing of the game control program (for example, the lottery timing for determination of success / failure) is grasped. In some cases, it is possible to prevent illegal acts and to perform stable game control.

  The watchdog timer according to the present invention includes both a CPU separate from the CPU and a built-in CPU. In the former case, the reset signal is input from the watchdog timer to the CPU, so the signal line is external. In the latter case, since the reset signal is wired inside the CPU, the signal line is not exposed to the outside. Therefore, in the latter case, it is possible to conceal whether or not the reset signal is generated based on the timeout of WDT (whether or not the CPU is reset) and to grasp the execution timing of the game control program. In some cases, illegal acts can be prevented more reliably.

  The microprocessor further includes a microprocessor (for example, a basic circuit 302) including at least the CPU and the ROM, and the microprocessor has at least a predetermined output terminal (for example, a reset output terminal XRSTO), and the predetermined output terminal Can start at least at a predetermined timing, and the predetermined timing may be before the start of a random delay process performed before the execution of the game control program.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to shift the timing of the predetermined signal output and the execution start timing of the game control program, so that specific processing of game control processing (for example, soft random number update processing, initial value update processing, etc.) ) May be prevented.

  Further, the CPU changes the rising timing or falling timing (for example, the low level signal to the high level signal) of the output of the signal (for example, the reset output signal output) from the predetermined output terminal (for example, the reset output terminal XRSTO). May be executed before the start of the random delay process performed before the execution of the game control program.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the time from the generation of the reset signal to the output of the predetermined signal constant while changing the time until the game control program is executed, and stable game control May be possible.

  The predetermined output terminal may be a terminal capable of outputting a reset signal. With such a configuration, for example, when a reset signal is connected to a predetermined electronic component, the electronic component can operate before game control, and the electronic component operates when an unauthorized radio wave is transmitted. It may be easier to detect fraud. In addition, since electronic components can operate before the start of the game control program, by making the operation start timing of the electronic components different from the execution start timing of the game control program, it is possible to aim at specific processing of the game control processing. There are cases where it can be prevented.

  Further, at least a security mode and a user mode may be provided, and the game control program may be a user program executed in the user mode.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to shift the timing of the predetermined signal output and the execution start timing of the user program, so that specific processing of game control processing (for example, soft random number update processing, initial value update processing, etc.) In some cases, it is possible to prevent sniper shooting.

  In addition, a register (for example, a fourth internal information register shown in FIG. 104) in which at least predetermined information indicating a reset factor (for example, information indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a system reset) is set. The game control program may be configured not to include (do not execute) processing based on the predetermined information (for example, processing to write information read from the fourth internal information register to the general-purpose register). .

  With such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to prevent an illegal act aiming at an execution timing of a specific process (for example, a soft random number update process, an initial value update process, etc.) by intentionally generating a CPU reset. .

  Further, the microprocessor travels outside the designated area capable of generating at least a running prohibition signal outside the designated area based on the execution of the watchdog timer and a code in a storage area other than the legitimate designated area. At least a prohibition circuit (for example, a travel prohibition circuit 3142 outside the designated area), and during the security check that is started during the predetermined timing after the travel prohibition signal outside the designated area is generated, At least a period during which the counter of the timer is stopped may be included.

  With such a configuration, when performing reset processing based on the travel prohibition signal outside the designated area, the watchdog timer time-out can be stopped (automatically) without depending on the control program. In some cases, the reset process based on the prohibition signal can be performed quickly.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine including at least a CPU (for example, the CPU 304) and a ROM (for example, the ROM 306) in which at least a game control program is stored. Is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU includes at least a specific register (for example, a T register), and the game control program performs a predetermined process (for example, the special drawing 1 related lottery process shown in FIG. 31). And a predetermined sub-process called from the predetermined process (for example, “a process of transferring the number of holds stored in the hold-number storage area (address F040H of the RWM area) to the A register” in step S1103 in FIG. 34) The predetermined process includes a first process and a second process (for example, a special symbol random number transfer shown in FIG. 31). Processing, special symbol lottery processing, display symbol lottery processing, special symbol variation time lottery processing, special symbol variation time setting processing, special symbol on-hold information transfer processing, the first process and the second process The predetermined sub-process is called from both the first process and the second process, and the process using the specific register is at least executable in the predetermined sub-process. It is a gaming machine characterized by being.

  The first process according to the present invention is a process called from the main control section main process (main loop process) (for example, each process shown in the main control section main process of FIG. 10), and the second process according to the present invention. The process may be a process called from the main control unit timer interrupt process (timer interrupt process) (for example, each process shown in the main control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 14), and the predetermined sub-process according to the present invention is These may be called from both the process called from the main control part main process and the process called from the main control part timer interrupt process.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the sub-process called from two different processes (the first process and the second process), the process using the common specific register is executed. The program can be simplified, the code amount of the program can be reduced as compared with the conventional case, the occurrence of coding errors can be reduced, and stable game control can be performed in some cases.

  Further, the CPU can execute at least a predetermined instruction (for example, the RST instruction shown in FIG. 64), and the predetermined instruction has a predetermined address (for example, 0008H) from a process in which the instruction is executed. , 0010H, 0018H, 0020H, 0028H, 0030H, 0038H, and 0040H), and the predetermined sub-process includes the first process and the second process. It may be one of the processes that can be called from both of the processes using the predetermined instruction.

  Such a configuration makes it difficult to analyze and tamper with the game control program. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an illegal profit by incorporating a program for reading out the sub-processing illegally, or an illegally stored internal memory. There are cases where an act of acquiring information can be prevented in advance.

  Further, the CPU sets a predetermined value as an initial value as a function other than a function that is performed based on receiving a load command among functions that set a value in the specific register (for example, 8 A bit load (transfer) instruction, a 16-bit load (transfer) instruction, a stack operation instruction (a kind of 16-bit load instruction), a compound instruction, and the like.

  With such a configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the game control program can be increased, and stable game control can be performed in some cases.

  Further, it includes an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control part 500) for effect control, and the CPU is not mounted on the effect control means, and a game control means (game control means for performing game control). For example, it may be mounted only on the main control unit 300). Further, the CPU includes an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control part 500) for performing effect control, and a pay-out control means (for example, the pay-out control unit 600) for performing pay-out control. May be mounted on at least one of the game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for performing game control and the payout control means, without being mounted on the effect control means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make analysis and alteration of the game control program more difficult.

  The microprocessor further includes a microprocessor (for example, a basic circuit 302) including at least the CPU and the ROM, and the microprocessor has at least a predetermined output terminal (for example, a reset output terminal XRSTO), and the predetermined output terminal Can be started up at least at a predetermined timing (for example, before the execution of the random extension function), and when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the time-out time shown in FIG. 115 has elapsed) A watchdog timer (for example, WDT 314, first WDT 314a, second WDT 314b) capable of generating at least a predetermined signal (for example, a WDT activation signal (WDT timeout signal) or a signal inside the CPU) , Storage area code other than the legitimate designated area A non-designated area travel prohibition circuit (for example, a non-designated area travel prohibition circuit 3142) capable of generating at least a non-designated area travel prohibition signal based on the execution of The security check started during the predetermined timing after the outside travel prohibition signal is generated may include at least a period during which the watchdog timer counter is stopped.

  With such a configuration, when performing reset processing based on the travel prohibition signal outside the designated area, the watchdog timer time-out can be stopped (automatically) without depending on the control program. In some cases, the reset process based on the prohibition signal can be performed quickly.

  Also, a game control including a random number circuit that changes a numerical value at a predetermined period, and a process of extracting a numerical value from the random number circuit based on the fact that a predetermined extraction condition is satisfied and performing a lottery regarding a game based on the numerical value And a microcomputer including a CPU for performing processing, a ROM in which the contents of the game control processing are stored in advance, and a RAM for temporarily storing data. A process that is executed when the power is shut off, and includes a process of storing predetermined data indicating that the process has been performed in a predetermined area of the RAM. When the predetermined data is stored, it is possible to return the game control process without performing an initialization process for initializing the RAM area. If the predetermined data is not stored, it is impossible to return the game control process without performing the initialization process, and the microcomputer is activated when the power is turned on. A time variation circuit for performing a time variation process for randomly varying the length of time from when a signal is input to when the game control process is started, and a code for a storage area other than a valid designated area are executed. A non-designated area running prohibition circuit for generating a non-designated area running prohibition signal based on the above, and in the case of a system reset that is executed based on the input of the start signal A process for checking whether the contents of the game control process stored in the ROM are abnormal by the microcomputer; and After the security check including the inter-process variation process is performed, the game control process is started, and in the case of a user reset that is executed based on the occurrence of the out-of-designated-area travel prohibition signal, the CPU Since the security check is not performed by the microcomputer, the time variation process is not performed, the game control process is started, and the CPU performs the game control process regardless of the system reset or the user reset. The game machine may be characterized in that no power interruption process is performed and the predetermined data is not stored in the predetermined area.

  Next, details of the initial setting process in step S2101 of FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the initial setting process in step S2101 of FIG.

  First, initial setting 1 is performed in step S2101a executed first. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 1304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 1310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 1308 are initialized, and the like. .

  In step S2101b, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 1330 has a voltage value of the power source supplied to the main control unit 1300 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). In this case, it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 1304 detects that the power is cut off), this step S2101b is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 1304 has not detected the power supply is cut off). Then, the process proceeds to step S2101c. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, step S2101b is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S2101c, initial setting 2 is performed. The details of this process are the same as the contents described with reference to FIG.

  In step S2101d, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. Here, the setting key switch is a switch for setting the player's advantage (for example, six advantages from 1 to 6) in the slot machine 1100. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S2101i; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2101e.

  In step S2101e, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 1308 is abnormal. The data determined here is data saved in the RAM 1308 by turning off the power of the slot machine 1100 or by the instantaneous interruption described above (see step S2221 in FIG. 71). That is, it is determined in this step S2101e whether or not the data is surely saved in the RAM 1308. The details of this process are the same as those described in step S3007 of FIG. If there is an abnormality in this data, the process proceeds to step S2101k, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S2101f.

  In step S2101f, it is determined whether forced RWM clear is in an ON state. Specifically, when the power is turned on and a RWM clear button (not shown) is pressed long (for example, pressed for 5 seconds or more), the forced RWM clear is turned on. If the forced RWM clear is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S2101j. If the forced RWM clear is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S2101g.

  In step S2101g, data stored in the RAM 1308 is written back to the register of the CPU 1304, and processing for restoring the state of the register to the state immediately before the power interruption processing is executed. The details of this process are the same as the contents described in step S3009 of FIG. After this process, the process proceeds to step S2101h.

  In step S2101h, processing for starting the WDT 1314 is performed. Here, activation permission of WDT 1314, setting of an initial value, and the like are performed. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 1314 as an initial value. Thereafter, the initial setting process is terminated.

  In step S2101d, when the setting key switch is turned on, in step S2101i, the setting value changing process is executed according to the state of the setting key. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2101j.

  In step S2101j, RWM clear processing is performed. Details of this processing are the same as the contents described in step S3103 of FIG. After this process, the process proceeds to step S2101h.

  In step S2101k, which proceeds when it is determined in step S2101e that the data in the RAM 1308 is abnormal, RWM error processing is performed. In this RWM error processing, after making preparations for clearing the storage areas of all RAM (RWM) 1308 except for the used stack area, the process shifts to an infinite loop state. In this state, the game can be started by operating the setting key switch after the power is turned on again.

  FIG. 132 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of timer circuit 311 shown in FIG.

  The timer circuit 311 has three channels of 8-bit programmable counters. That is, as shown in FIG. 132, three timer circuits (timer circuits 0 to 2) are prepared. Each timer circuit is a down-counter circuit, and an independent operation mode can be set. Since these three timer circuits have the same configuration, the description will be made using the timer circuit 0 here.

  The timer circuit 311 includes four types of registers, a prescaler register 3111, a control register 3112, a counter setting register 3113, and a counter register 3114, a prescaler 3115, and an 8-bit counter 3116.

  The timer circuit 311 uses the count clock selected by the prescaler register 3111 as a clock source for the 8-bit counter 3116. The prescaler register 3111 is an 8-bit register that selects the number of clocks for operating the 8-bit counter 3116. When the initial value “00H” is set in the prescaler register 3111, the count clock for operating the 8-bit counter 3116 is stopped. When “01H” is set, the count clock is the system clock (SCLK). The count clock is set to system clock / 2 when "02H" is set, becomes system clock / 3 when set to "03H", and so on when "FEH" is set. System clock / 254, and when “FFH” is set, system clock / 255.

  The control register 3112 is an 8-bit register for monitoring the interrupt flag 3110, enabling or disabling interrupts, clearing the interrupt flag 3110, and setting various operating conditions of the 8-bit counter 3116.

  In the timer circuit 311, the count value is written in the counter setting register 3113, so that the 8-bit counter 3116 starts to count down. The counter setting register 3113 is a register for setting the count value of the 8-bit counter 3116. When “00H” is written in the set value, the 8-bit counter 3116 does not operate.

  The counter register 3114 is a register for reading the value of the 8-bit counter 3116 in accordance with the input timing of the CPU register read signal.

  When the 8-bit counter 3116 times out, a timeout signal is output from the 8-bit counter 3116 to the counter circuit 312. If an interrupt is permitted, an interrupt signal is output from the interrupt flag 3110 to the interrupt control circuit 3100. If “0” is set in the 0th bit of the 8-bit control register, a one-time mode (initial value) is set. After a timeout occurs, the 8-bit counter 3116 stops operating, but “1 Is set to repeat mode, and even after a timeout occurs, the 8-bit counter 3116 continues to operate, and a timeout signal is periodically output.

  The setting values of each register described above are stored in the program data area of the built-in ROM 306. Each set value stored in the program data area is called from the program data area and set in each register in the initial setting 2 (step S3005) in the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. Is called in the main process of the main part and the main control part interrupt process shown in FIG. 91 and set in each register.

  In the timer circuit 311 shown in FIG. 132, if the initial value “00H” is set in the prescaler register 3111 or “00H” is written in the counter setting register 3113, the 8-bit counter 3116 counts down. Does not start and no timeout signal is output.

  FIG. 133 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of counter circuit 312 shown in FIG.

  The counter circuit 312 has four channels of 8-bit programmable counters. That is, as shown in FIG. 133, four counter circuits (counter circuits 0 to 3) are prepared. Each counter circuit is an up-counter circuit, and an independent operation mode can be set. Since these four counter circuits have the same configuration, the counter circuit 0 will be described here.

  The counter circuit includes a control register 3121, an 8-bit counter 3122, a counter setting register 3123, and a counter register 3124. The control register 3121 can acquire various signals flowing through the internal bus, and FIG. 133 shows that the control register 3121 can acquire eight types of signals. These eight types of signals are a system clock signal (SCLK), a timeout signal from each of the timer circuits 0 to 2 shown in FIG. 132, a CPU core memory request signal (XMREQ signal), a CPU core write signal (XWR signal), CPU core IO request signal (XIORQ signal) and CPU core interrupt request response signal (maskable interrupt acknowledge cycle; XINTACK signal). The control register 3121 is an 8-bit register that selects a clock source for operating the 8-bit counter 3122. In other words, it selects which signal input from the eight signal lines is used as the clock source. The control register 3121 is also a register for setting permission / prohibition of the 8-bit counter 3122.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the control register 3121 in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the control register 3121 is an 8-bit register. In the fifth to seventh bits, “0” remains set and is not used.

  The fourth bit is a bit for setting permission / prohibition of the 8-bit counter 3122. When the initial value “0” is set in the fourth bit, the 8-bit counter 3122 stops operating, and when “1” is set, the 8-bit counter 3122 starts operating.

  The third bit is a bit for setting the cascade connection of the 8-bit counter 3122. Although details will be described later, the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 0 and the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 1 can be cascaded, and the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 2 and the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 3 are connected. Cascade connection is also possible. That is, the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 0 and the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 1 are in the first set, and the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 2 and the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 3 are the first set. It is a set of two. When “1” is set in the third bit of one of the control registers 3121 in the same group, the cascade connection is prioritized. That is, even if “0” is set in the third bit of the other control register 3121, cascade connection is set, and “1” is a setting value that has priority over “0”.

  The 2nd to 0th bits are bits for setting the clock source of the 8-bit counter 3122. That is, it is a bit for setting a signal that becomes an update source of the counter circuit 312. When the initial value “000” is set in the 2nd to 0th bits, the system clock signal (SCLK) becomes the clock source of the 8-bit counter 3122, and when “001” is set, the time-out from the timer circuit 0 occurs. When the signal becomes a clock source and “010” is set, the timeout signal from the timer circuit 1 becomes the clock source, and when “011” is set, the timeout signal from the timer circuit 2 becomes the clock source. The system clock signal (SCLK) is a signal that is periodically input to the control register 3121. Further, when the timer circuit 311 is set to the repeat mode, a timeout signal is periodically input to the control register 3121. On the other hand, a memory request signal (XMREQ signal), a write signal (XWR signal), an IO request signal (XIORQ signal), and an interrupt request response signal (XINTACK signal) are signals that are irregularly input to the control register 3121. When “100” is set in the 2nd to 0th bits, the write signal (XWR signal) becomes the clock source of the 8-bit counter 3122, and when “101” is set, the memory request signal (XMREQ signal) becomes the clock source. When “110” is set, the IO request signal (XIORQ signal) becomes the clock source, and when “111” is set, the interrupt request response signal (XINTACK signal) becomes the clock source. The setting value for setting the clock source is stored in the program data area of the built-in ROM 306, and is called from the program data area in the initial setting 2 (step S3005) in the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 3121 is set. In the basic circuit, the signal to the built-in RAM 308 is the memory request signal when the memory mapped method is adopted among the memory request signal (XMREQ signal) and the IO request signal (XIORQ signal). (XMREQ signal) is used, and when the IO mapped method is adopted, an IO request signal (XIORQ signal) is used. As described above, the second bit of the control register 3121 is “0” when a signal that is periodically input is used as a clock source (second condition), and is input irregularly. 1 is used as a clock source (first condition), which corresponds to an example of a predetermined bit. In this way, the developer or the setter can check whether or not a signal periodically input to the clock source is used only by looking at the second bit of the control register 3121. The control register 3121 is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the 7th bit is an empty bit, and the 6th bit is a bit for setting permission / prohibition of the 8-bit counter 3122 (0: operation stop, 1: operation start ( (Initial value)) Bit that sets whether the fifth bit is updated in the maskable interrupt acknowledge cycle of the CPU core (0: update, 1: not update (initial value)), the fourth bit is the XIORQ signal of the CPU core Bit to set whether to update (0: update, 1: not update (initial value)) Bit to set whether the third bit is updated by the CPU core XMREQ signal (0: update, 1: not update) (Initial value)) Bit that sets whether the second bit is updated by the XWR signal of the CPU core (0: update, 1: not update (initial value)), 1st to 0th bit Bit to set whether to update with timer signal (00: timeout signal from timer circuit 0, 01: timeout signal from timer circuit 1, 10: timeout signal from timer circuit 2, 11: unselected (initial value) The system clock signal (SCLK) may be set as an update source when all 1s are written in the 5 to 0 bits, or the control register 3121 of the counter circuit 1 may be configured. When the 1st to 0th bits are 00, the time-out signal from the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 0 may be used as the update source instead of the time-out signal from the timer circuit 0. When the 0th bit is 00, instead of the timeout signal from the timer circuit 2, the 8-bit counter of the counter circuit 0 The 122 time-out signal may be updated source. Further, the counter circuit 0 may be automatically started using the SCLK, the counter circuit 1 the XWR signal, the counter circuit 2 the XMREQ signal, and the counter circuit 3 using the XIORQ signal as an update source. 255 may be set (255 may be set as an initial value in the counter setting register 3123). In this case, when the power is turned on, the count operation is performed before the update source and the count value are set by the program, and the update source is set (changed) and the count value is set (changed) by the program during the count operation. You may do it. In this case, it may be difficult to obtain an advantageous value by an unauthorized person by changing the update source or the count value during the counting operation. Note that when the system clock signal (SCLK) is set as the update source, the counter circuit 312 has other update sources (XWR signal, XREQ signal, XIORQ signal, timer circuit 0 timeout signal, timer circuit 1 timeout signal, The time-out signal of the timer circuit 2 may not be settable. In other words, when the first update source among the plurality of update sources is set, the counter circuit may not be able to set other update sources other than the first update source.

  Further, the counter circuit 312 may be capable of setting at least two update sources among the XWR signal, the XMREQ signal, the XIORQ signal, and the timeout signal of the timer circuit n as update sources. In other words, the counter circuit may be capable of setting both the second update source and the third update source excluding the first update source among the plurality of update sources.

  The counter setting register 3123 is an 8-bit register that sets the count value (maximum value) of the 8-bit counter 3122 that is an up-counter circuit. In this embodiment, a count value from 0 to 255 can be set. When “255” is written, the maximum value 255 is set as the count value. In this case, 0 to 255 is a predetermined numerical range. When “00” is set as the set value, the operation of the 8-bit counter may be stopped. Each counter circuit may be a down counter circuit. In the case of a down counter circuit, the counter setting register 3123 is a register for setting a minimum value.

  The counter register 3124 is a register for reading the value of the 8-bit counter 3122 in accordance with the input timing of the CPU register read signal.

  The setting values of each register described above are stored in the program data area of the built-in ROM 306. Each set value stored in the program management area is called from the program data area in the initial setting 2 (step S3005) in the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 88 and set in each register, or the main control. Is called in the main process of the main part and the main control part interrupt process shown in FIG. 91 and set in each register. When the count value is written to the counter setting register 3123, the value of the 8-bit counter 3122 is cleared to “00H”. After that, when “1” is written to the fourth bit of the control register 3121, the selected clock source Up-counting of the 8-bit counter 3122 is started.

  The counter circuit 312 described above corresponds to an example of a numerical value updating unit. In addition, although the structure which reads the value of the 8-bit counter 3116 according to the input of a CPU register read signal was shown, it is not limited to this, You may provide a hard latch random value register and a hard latch selection register, The value of the 8-bit counter 3116 may be always input to the hard latch random value register, and the latch signal from the hard latch selection register to which the PI0 to PI5 signals are input via the parallel input port is the hard latch random value. A value may be latched (held) when input to the register, or a flag register may be provided to which a set signal by value latch and a clear signal by value acquisition are input. In this case, the hard latch selection register sets an acquisition condition of the value of the 8-bit counter 3116 by external terminal input (0: If the value is not read, the next value is not latched (initial value), 1: the value is read. If not, the next value is latched), and the setting (PI0 to PI5 signal) regarding which external terminal input takes in the value of the 8-bit counter 3116 may be configured. In another configuration, the counter circuit 312 may generate random numbers instead of generating random numbers with the random number generation circuit 318 or the random number circuit 5316.

  Next, read and write timings for the internal RAM area and the internal register area on the memory map shown in FIG. 7A will be described.

  FIG. 135 is a timing chart for explaining read / write timings of the internal RAM area and the internal register area on the memory map shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 135, time (T) elapses from the left to the right in the figure (the same applies to the subsequent timing charts). In the timing chart shown in FIG. 135, the system clock output signal (CLKO), the address input / output signals (A0 to A15) input / output via the 16 signal lines, the memory request signal (XMREQ), and the read time are shown in order from the top. Read signal (XRD), data output signals (D0 to D7) from the internal RAM area and internal register area at the time of reading, write signals (XWR) at the time of writing, and the internal RAM area and internal register area at the time of writing Data output signals (D0 to D7) are shown. A broken line represents a high impedance state.

  Address input / output signals (A0 to A15) specify addresses to be read and written in the memory map of FIG. Reading and writing are permitted when the memory request signal (XMREQ) is at L level, reading is permitted when the read signal (XRD) is at L level, and writing is permitted when the write signal (XWR) is also at L level. Therefore, when the memory request signal (XMREQ) is at the L level and the read signal (XRD) is also at the L level, the address specified by the address input / output signals (A0 to A15) can be read, and the memory request signal (XMREQ) Can be written to the address specified by the address input / output signals (A0 to A15) when the write signal (XWR) is also at the L level, but there is a time shift in each signal. Moreover, while the clock output signal (CLKO) is a periodic signal, the memory request signal (XMREQ) and the write signal (XWR) input to the control register 3121 are output at an arbitrary timing according to the program. It can be seen that the signal is irregular and is not synchronized with the periodic clock output signal (CLKO). In other words, the memory request signal (XMREQ) and the write signal (XWR) are signals that the CPU 304 outputs irregularly based on an instruction (predetermined instruction) for exchanging with the internal memory or the internal register. More specifically, the CPU 304 outputs a memory request signal (XMREQ) by reading data from the built-in ROM 306 (for example, LDA, (ROM_ADD01) command), and reads / writes data from / to the built-in RAM 308 (for example, LD (RAM_ADD01), A command), a memory request signal (XMREQ) and a write signal (XWR) are output. As described above, in this embodiment, the memory request signal (XMREQ) and the write signal (XWR) that are generated irregularly can be used as the update source of the counter circuit 312. The memory request signal (XMREQ) and the write signal (XWR) that are generated irregularly correspond to an example of a predetermined signal.

  Next, the read / write timing of the built-in register area on the I / O map shown in FIG. 7B will be described.

  FIG. 136 is a timing chart for explaining read / write timings of the built-in register area on the I / O map shown in FIG.

  Also in the timing chart shown in FIG. 136, each signal is shown in order from the top, and an IO request signal (XIORQ) is shown instead of the memory request signal (XMREQ) shown in FIG. Again, the dashed line represents the high impedance state.

  The address input / output signals (A0 to A15) specify addresses to be read and written in the memory map of FIG. Reading / writing is permitted when the IO request signal (XIORQ) is at L level, reading is permitted when the read signal (XRD) is at L level, and writing is permitted when the write signal (XWR) is also at L level. Therefore, when the IO request signal (XIORQ) is at the L level and the read signal (XRD) is also at the L level, the address specified by the address input / output signals (A0 to A15) can be read, and the IO request signal (XIORQ) Can be written to the address specified by the address input / output signals (A0 to A15) when the write signal (XWR) is also at the L level, but here again, there is a time shift in each signal. In addition, the IO request signal (XIORQ) and the write signal (XWR) input to the control register 3121 are also irregular signals that are output at arbitrary timings according to the program, and are generated as periodic clock output signals (CLKO). It can be seen that they are not synchronized. In other words, the IO request signal (XIORQ) is also a signal that the CPU 304 outputs irregularly based on an instruction (predetermined instruction) for exchange with the internal memory or the internal register. More specifically, the CPU 304 outputs an IO request signal (XIORQ) upon an IN command or an OUT command. As described above, in this embodiment, these irregularly generated IO request signals (XIORQ) are also generated.

It can be used as an update source for the counter circuit 312. An IO request signal (XIORQ) that occurs irregularly also corresponds to an example of a predetermined signal.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram showing only the flow of signals to counter circuit 312 inside microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 137 shows a CPU 304, a ROM 306 built in the microprocessor 3000 (hereinafter simply referred to as a built-in ROM 306), a RAM 308 (hereinafter simply referred to as a built-in RAM 308) similarly built in the microprocessor 3000, a timer circuit 311 and a counter. A state in which the circuit 312, the interrupt control circuit 3100, and the clock circuit 320 are connected to each other via the internal bus 3300 is shown.

  Further, when the memory mapped method is adopted, it is shown that the memory request signal (XMREQ signal) is sent from the CPU 304 to the built-in ROM 306 or the built-in RAM 308 and also acquired by the counter circuit 312, and the I / O mapped signal is displayed. When the method is adopted, it is shown that an IO request signal (XIORQ signal) is sent from the CPU 304 to the built-in RAM 308 and also acquired by the counter circuit 312. It is shown that the write signal (XWR signal) is sent from the CPU 304 to the built-in RAM 308 and also acquired by the counter circuit 312. In this embodiment, the read signal (XRD) cannot be selected as the clock source of the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 312, but the counter circuit 312 can also acquire the read signal (XRD), and the read signal (XRD) May be used as a clock source. Further, upon receiving an interrupt request signal (XINT signal) sent from the interrupt control circuit 3100 to the CPU 304, an interrupt request response signal (XINTACK signal) is output from the CPU 304 to the interrupt control circuit 3100. Some interrupt request signals are output periodically and others are output irregularly (for example, hardware interrupt), and the interrupt request response signal (XINTACK signal) is output irregularly after all. It becomes a signal and corresponds to an example of a predetermined signal. FIG. 137 also shows that this interrupt request response signal (XINTACK signal) is acquired by the counter circuit 312. Further, the time-out signal from each of the timer circuits 0 to 2 included in the timer circuit 311 is sent to the counter circuit 312, and the system clock signal (SCLK) is sent from the clock circuit 320 to the counter circuit 312. The CPU 304 that outputs a memory request signal (XMREQ), a write signal (XWR), an IO request signal (XIORQ), or an interrupt request response signal (XINTACK signal) that occurs irregularly has a function as a signal output means. . The built-in ROM 306 and the built-in RAM 308 correspond to an example of a storage unit.

  FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the counter circuit 0 is updated irregularly.

  The functional block diagram is shown in the upper part of FIG. 138, and the source code is shown in the lower part (the same applies to FIG. 142). In this source code, the counter circuit 0 is represented by PCC0, and the counter circuit 1 is represented by PCC1 (hereinafter the same). The maximum value “255” is set as the count value in both the counter setting register 3123 of the counter circuit 0 and the counter setting register 3123 of the counter circuit 1. Further, “00010101” is set in the control register 3121 of the counter circuit 0, “1” indicating the start of operation is set in the fourth bit, and the clock source of the 8-bit counter 3122 is set in the second to zeroth bits. Is set to “101”, which is a memory request signal (XMREQ signal). On the other hand, “00010001” is set in the control register 3121 of the counter circuit 1, “1” representing the start of operation is set in the fourth bit, and the clock source of the 8-bit counter 3122 is set in the second to zeroth bits. Is set to “001”, which is a time-out signal from the timer circuit 0. Further, “0” representing that cascade connection is not set is set in the third bit in any control register 3121. In this example, the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1 are not cascade-connected. In the source code shown in FIG. 138, the timer circuit 0 is represented by PTC0, the system clock is divided by 1/240 by the prescaler register 3111 of the timer circuit 0, and the 8-bit counter 3116 of the timer circuit 0 is The clock source is set.

  In the example shown in FIG. 138, the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 0 is updated with an irregular memory request signal (XMREQ signal). On the other hand, the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 1 is updated by a periodic timeout signal from the timer circuit 0.

  The counter register 3124 of each counter circuit 312 reads the value of the 8-bit counter 3122 in accordance with the input timing of the CPU register read signal, and the CPU 304 acquires the value read by the counter register 3124 via the internal bus. In this example, the count value of the count circuit 0 is used as a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating a first modification in which the counter circuit 0 is the update source of the counter circuit 1. In the following, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 138 will be mainly described, and description of the same points as in the example illustrated in FIG. 138 may be omitted.

  “00011101” is set in the control register 3121 of the counter circuit 0 shown in FIG. 139, and “1” indicating the setting of cascade connection is set in the third bit. On the other hand, “00010001” is set in the control register 3121 of the counter circuit 1, and “0” indicating that the cascade connection is not set is set in the third bit. As described above, in the set of the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1, when “1” is set in the third bit of one of the control registers 3121, cascade connection is set. Therefore, the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1 shown in FIG. 139 are cascade-connected. The counter circuit 0 in which “1” is set in the third bit of the control register 3121 is a counter circuit that counts up from 0 to 255. When the count value reaches 255 and the count value is updated by 1, An overflow signal (specific signal) is sent to the counter circuit 1 to return the count value to zero. The counter circuit 1 is updated by a time-out signal from the timer circuit 0 periodically, but is also updated by an overflow signal from the counter circuit 0, the counter circuit 1 has a plurality of update sources, and the counter circuit 1 is random. Increase. Moreover, since the counter circuit 0 is a counter circuit that is updated by an irregular memory request signal (XMREQ signal), an overflow signal is also a signal that is irregularly transmitted. Note that if the update source of the counter circuit 1 is an irregular update source (for example, an XWR signal or the like), the randomness can be further improved. In this example, the count value of the count circuit 1 is used as a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time.

  In this example, an overflow signal is output from the counter circuit to which “1” is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a counter circuit that outputs an overflow signal may be determined in advance.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a second modification in which the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1 function as a 2-byte counter. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 139 will be mainly described, and description of the same points as in the example illustrated in FIG. 139 may be omitted.

  “00010010” is set in the control register 3121 of the counter circuit 1 shown in FIG. 140, and “010” is used as the time-out signal from the timer circuit 1 as the clock source of the 8-bit counter 3122 in the 2nd to 0th bits. Is set. Therefore, 8-bit counter 3116 of counter circuit 1 shown in FIG. 140 is updated when a time-out signal from timer circuit 1 is input. Further, in the source code shown in FIG. 140, the timer circuit 1 is represented by PTC1, and the prescaler register 3111 of the timer circuit 1 stops the count clock for operating the 8-bit counter 3116 of the timer circuit 1. “0” is set. For this reason, a time-out signal is not output from the 8-bit counter 3116 of the timer circuit 1, and although the time-out signal from the timer circuit 1 is set as a clock source, the counter circuit 1 uses the time-out signal as a clock source. Will not be updated. However, as in the example shown in FIG. 139, an overflow signal is sent from the counter circuit 0 to the counter circuit 1, and the counter circuit 1 is updated by this overflow signal. That is, the counter circuit 1 uses only the overflow signal from the counter circuit 0 as a clock source (update source). Thus, by stopping the count clock of the timer circuit 1, the update source of the counter circuit 1 can be practically only overflow of the counter circuit 0, and the counter values of the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1 can be changed. Can be used as a 2-byte counter. In this example, the count value obtained by the combination of the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1 is used as the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating a third modification in which the update source of the counter circuit 0 is the update source of the counter circuit 1. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 139 will be mainly described, and description of the same points as in the example illustrated in FIG. 139 may be omitted.

  In the counter setting register 3123 of the counter circuit 0 shown in FIG. 141, “0” is set as the count value, and the maximum value of the counter circuit 0 is zero. That is, in the counter circuit 0, the predetermined numerical range is 1. As a result, every time a memory request signal (XMREQ signal) is input to the counter circuit 0, an overflow signal is output to the counter circuit 1, and the update source of the counter circuit 0 can be handled as the update source of the counter circuit 1. The randomness of the counter circuit 1 is increased. Further, the randomness is further increased by making the update source of the counter circuit 1 an irregular signal (for example, an XWR signal or the like). Also in this example, the count value of the count circuit 1 is used as a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a fourth modification in which the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1 are cascade-connected to each other. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 139 will be mainly described, and description of the same points as in the example illustrated in FIG. 139 may be omitted.

  “00011101” is also set in the control register 3121 of the counter circuit 0 shown in FIG. 142, and “1” representing the cascade connection setting is set in the third bit. In addition, “00011110” is set in the control register 3121 of the counter circuit 1 shown in FIG. 142, “1” representing the setting of cascade connection is set in the third bit, and in the second to 0th bits, “100” is set with a write signal (XWR signal) input irregularly as a clock source. Therefore, in this example, the cascade connection is set by both counter circuits constituting a set, and an overflow signal is transmitted / received to / from each other. That is, in the counter circuit 0, when the count value reaches 255 and when the count value is further updated by 1, the overflow signal of the counter circuit 0 is sent to the counter circuit 1, and even in the counter circuit 1, the count value reaches 255. When the count value is further updated by 1, a counter overflow signal of the counter circuit 1 is sent to the counter circuit 0. As a result, the counter circuit 0 and the counter circuit 1 each have a plurality of update sources, and the randomness of both counter circuits increases. In this example, the count value of the counter circuit 0 is used as a random number value for determining a normal diagram variation time, and the count value of the count circuit 1 is used as a random value for determining a special diagram variation time.

  In the counter circuit 312 described above, the count value can be updated with randomness. The count value of the counter circuit 312 is used as a random number value for determining a normal figure variation time or a random value for determining a special figure variation time, and can improve the randomness of the lottery process.

  Subsequently, another embodiment will be described. In the following, differences from the already described embodiment will be mainly described, and the same points as the already described embodiment may be omitted.

  In the embodiment described so far, the built-in RAM area and the built-in register area in the microprocessor 3000 (basic circuit) are targeted. However, in the present embodiment, an external memory or the like outside the microprocessor 3000 (basic circuit) Target external registers and external peripherals and circuits.

  FIG. 143 is a timing chart for explaining the external memory read / write chip select timing outside the microprocessor 3000 (basic circuit).

  In the timing chart shown in FIG. 143, the system clock output signal (CLKO), the address input / output signals (A0 to A15) inputted / outputted by the eight signal lines, the memory request signal (XMREQ), and the read time are sequentially shown from the top. Read signal (XRD), read chip select signal (XCS0 to XCS13), read data input signal from external memory (D0 to D7), write write signal (XWR), write chip select signal (XCS0 to XCS13) and data output signals (D0 to D7) to the external memory at the time of writing are shown. A broken line represents a high impedance state.

  A chip set to be read is selected by a chip select signal (XCS0 to XCS13) at the time of reading, and an address to be read in the selected chip set is designated by an address input / output signal (A0 to A15). A chip set to be written is selected by a chip select signal (XCS0 to XCS13) at the time of writing, and an address to be written in the selected chip set is designated by an address input / output signal (A0 to A15). Further, reading and writing are permitted when the memory request signal (XMREQ) is at L level, reading is permitted when the reading signal (XRD) at the time of reading is L level, and writing signal (XWR) at the time of writing is also at L level. Sometimes writing is allowed. Therefore, when the memory request signal (XMREQ) is at the L level and the read signal (XRD) is also at the L level, the data at the designated address can be read from the selected chip set, and the memory request signal (XMREQ) is at the L level. When the level and the write signal (XWR) are also at the L level, data can be written to the designated address of the selected chip set, but there is a time shift in each signal. Moreover, while the clock output signal (CLKO) is a periodic signal, the memory request signal (XMREQ) and the write signal (XWR) are irregular signals that are output at an arbitrary timing according to a program, that is, It can be seen that this signal is generated irregularly for exchange with the external memory and is not synchronized with the periodic clock output signal (CLKO). Also in this embodiment, these irregularly generated memory request signals (XMREQ) and write signals (XWR) are input to the control register 3121, and these irregular signals can be used as the update source of the counter circuit 312.

  Next, input / output to / from peripheral devices and peripheral circuits (external I / O) outside the microprocessor 3000 (basic circuit) will be described.

  FIG. 144 is a timing chart for explaining external I / O read and write chip select timings.

  Also in the timing chart shown in FIG. 144, each signal is shown in order from the top, and an IO request signal (XIORQ) is shown instead of the memory request signal (XMREQ) shown in FIG. Again, the dashed line represents the high impedance state.

  A chip set to be read is selected by a chip select signal (XCS0 to XCS13) at the time of reading, and an address to be read in the selected chip set is designated by an address input / output signal (A0 to A15). A chip set to be written is selected by a chip select signal (XCS0 to XCS13) at the time of writing, and an address to be written in the selected chip set is designated by an address input / output signal (A0 to A15). In addition, reading and writing are permitted when the IO request signal (XIORQ) is at L level, reading is permitted when the reading signal (XRD) at reading is L level, and the writing signal (XWR) at writing is also L level. Sometimes writing is allowed. Therefore, when the IO request signal (XIORQ) is at the L level and the read signal (XRD) is also at the L level, the data at the designated address can be read from the selected chip set, and the IO request signal (XIORQ) is at the L level. When the level and the write signal (XWR) are also at the L level, data can be written to the designated address of the selected chip set, but here again, there is a time shift in each signal. Moreover, while the clock output signal (CLKO) is a periodic signal, the IO request signal (XIORQ) and the write signal (XWR) are irregular signals that are output at an arbitrary timing according to a program, that is, It can be seen that the signal is generated irregularly for exchange with an external peripheral device or peripheral circuit (external I / O) and is not synchronized with the periodic clock output signal (CLKO). Also in the second embodiment, these irregularly generated IO request signals (XIORQ) and write signals (XWR) are input to the control register 3121, and these irregular signals can be used as the update source of the counter circuit 312.

  FIG. 145 shows only the signal flow to counter circuit 312 in microprocessor 3000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 145 shows that the CPU 304, timer circuit 311, counter circuit 312, interrupt control circuit 3100, clock circuit 320, external bus control circuit 3110, and address decoder circuit 3103 are connected to each other via the internal bus 3300. It is shown. FIG. 145 also shows other circuit 4000. The other circuit 4000 corresponds to a peripheral device or a peripheral circuit outside the microprocessor 3000 (for example, each drive circuit 324, 326, 330, 334, etc. of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4).

  In addition, the memory request signal (XMREQ signal) is sent from the CPU 304 to the built-in ROM or RAM of the other circuit 4000 and acquired by the counter circuit 312, and the IO request signal (XIORQ signal) is sent from the CPU 304. It is shown that it is sent to the internal register of the other circuit 4000 and also acquired by the counter circuit 312. In addition, it is shown that the chip select signals (XCS0 to XCS13) are sent from the CPU 304 to the built-in ROM, built-in RAM, and built-in register of the other circuit 4000 and acquired by the counter circuit 312. It is shown that the write signal (XWR signal) is sent from the CPU 304 to the built-in RAM or built-in register of the other circuit 4000 and also acquired by the counter circuit 312. In this embodiment as well, the same signal as in the previous embodiment is used as the clock source of the 8-bit counter 3122 of the counter circuit 312 and the read signal (XRD) cannot be selected. However, the counter circuit 312 has the read signal (XRD). ) Can also be obtained, and the read signal (XRD) may be used as a clock source. Further, it is shown that an interrupt request response signal (XINTACK signal) output irregularly is also acquired by the counter circuit 312. Further, the time-out signal from each of the timer circuits 0 to 2 included in the timer circuit 311 is sent to the counter circuit 312, and the system clock signal (SCLK) is sent from the clock circuit 320 to the counter circuit 312.

  Also in the second embodiment, the updating of the counter circuit 312 can be given randomness. The count value of the count circuit 312 is used as a random number value for determining a normal figure variation time or a random number value for determining a special figure variation time, and can improve the randomness of the lottery process.

In the above-described embodiment, the count value of the counter circuit 312 is used as a random number value for determining a normal figure variation time or a random number value for determining a special figure variation time. You may use for the lottery which determines the success / failure determination which draws a lot, or the symbol of a special figure. That is, you may use for the lottery relevant to the change of a control state, or the lottery relevant to payout of a prize ball. Or you may use for the lottery process (For example, the lottery of the pre-reading notice execution possibility) regarding another production.
<Modification of main controller timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a modified example of the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S4201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S4203, the WDT is counted periodically (to prevent detection of processing abnormality) so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur. In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 4 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S4205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the previous timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S4205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 4 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S4205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S4205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information. In this embodiment, as a determination of whether or not there has been a winning at the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228, the previous and previous detection signals coincided with predetermined winning determination pattern information. However, the present invention is not limited to such a method. For example, winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, current detection signal is present (so-called up-edge) )) May be determined. That is, it may be configured to monitor whether or not there is a detection signal from the sphere detection sensor and determine whether or not the history of the monitoring result matches a predetermined pattern.

  In step S4207 and step S4209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated. A counter for generating and a counter for processing each of the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value (hereinafter, special figure winning random number processing counter) are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counters for processing the random number values in FIG. 1 and the random number values in FIG. 2 are provided as the same counter, but different counters may be used.

  In step S4211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S4213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S4215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226 and 234 and starting holes 230, 232 and 228 have been won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read and 1 is added to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S4217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S4205. If there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number of the channel corresponding to the special figure 1 of the random number generation circuit 318 is latched. And a process for outputting a latch signal (specifically, a process for writing a predetermined value in an area corresponding to the channel of the special latch 1 of the soft latch register 3186) and a random number latched by the latch signal A process of outputting a read signal for acquisition (specifically, a process of outputting a read signal to the random number register corresponding to the channel in FIG. 1 in the random number register 3188) is executed and latched. The random number is acquired and stored in the corresponding random value storage area, and further, the value is acquired from the special figure winning random number processing counter and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. To. The same process as when there is a winning at the first special figure starting port is executed also when there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232. In this embodiment, as a method of acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit 318, a latched random number is acquired after performing a process of outputting a latch signal for latching a random number of a channel corresponding to FIGS. The method of outputting the read signal is adopted, but the process of directly reading the random number of the channel corresponding to FIGS. 1 and 2 (specifically, the process of directly reading the value of the random number register 3188) is executed. You may make it acquire. Subsequently, when a winning is made to the ordinary figure starting port 228, and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the random number counter for generating the ordinary figure winning random number value is set as the usual figure winning random number value. Acquire and store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. In the present embodiment, the main controller timer interrupt processing is performed in accordance with the processing for outputting a read signal for acquiring the latched random number shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 (different from the processing for directly reading the value of the random number register 3188). However, this process may be executed in the main control unit main process described above. In this case, the main control unit is combined with a special drawing related lottery process described later. It is sufficient that the main process is executed. In the case where the process of directly reading the random number values of the channels corresponding to the special figures 1 and 2 is executed, only the special figure related lottery process is performed in the main process. And can be configured to execute.

  In step S4219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S4221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the normal state update process in the case where the normal is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S4223.

  In step S4223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S4225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S4233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, in the RAM 308 determination result storage area of the main controller 300, the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first off flag, second off flag, special figure probability A flag for each of a variation flag and an ordinary probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S4233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S4233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S4233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S4233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S4233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S4227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S4227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. In addition, the order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed, and according to the winning order (the winning order) to the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, Special figure state update processing corresponding to a special figure with a fast winning (winning) may be executed with priority.

  When the special figure state update process in step S4225 and step S4227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for special figure 2 is performed first (step S4229), and then the special figure related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S4229). More specifically, in each of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the random value acquired from the random number generation circuit 318 is processed using the random value acquired from the special figure winning random number processing counter (for example, the random number generation circuit 318). The random number value acquired from the special figure winning random number processing counter is added to the random number value acquired from (1), and a lottery is performed using the processed random number value. In this embodiment, in each of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the random number value acquired from the random number generation circuit 318 is processed using the random value acquired from the special figure winning random number processing counter. However, the special drawing related lottery process may be performed by directly using the random value acquired from the random number generation circuit without performing such processing. In other words, the special figure related lottery process using the random value acquired from the random number generation circuit 318 may be performed. Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S4233, command setting transmission processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in the command setting transmission processing, processing for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed. In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the presentation control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 and the output by the command type included in the output schedule information received from the main control unit 300. Based on the command data information included in the schedule information, the contents of the effect control can be determined.

  In step S4235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S4237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S4205 are read, and the presence / absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence / absence of a front frame door opening error or the bottom pan full error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S4219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S4239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S4243. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S4241.

  In step S4241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S4201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main control part main process.

On the other hand, in step S4243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of the strobe interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S4301 in FIG. 4A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S4301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S4303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S4307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S4309, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S4307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  If it is detected in step S4311 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S4309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S4313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S4309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S4315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S4309, the command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S4317, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S4309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S4319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S4309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S4321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S4309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S4303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S4401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S4501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S4303 in the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Accordingly, in step S4303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S4503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S4319, an effect random number value update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S4313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S4601, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S4603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S4605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S4601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S4607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S4609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S4611. Wait for input. In step S4611, the scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S4701 of FIG. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S4701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S4703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4705.

  In step S4705, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S4707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S4709, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S4707, the effect data corresponding to the command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S4711, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S4713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to S4703. Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S4801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S4901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Accordingly, in step S4703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Command setting transmission processing>

  Next, the command setting transmission process (step S4233) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the flow of command setting transmission processing.

In step S4233a of the command setting transmission process, a big hit middle command transmission process is performed. Although details will be described later, in the jackpot medium command transmission processing, a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 during the jackpot game is set. In the next step S4233b, command setting transmission processing for setting other commands (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, power recovery command, etc.) is performed. After performing, the process is terminated.
<Big hit middle command transmission processing>

  Next, the jackpot medium command transmission process (step S4233a) in the command setting transmission process described above will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the flow of the jackpot middle command transmission process.

  In step S5101 of this jackpot middle command transmission process, the command storage area provided in the RAM 308 is cleared (initialized). Also, in step S5102, based on the progress status of the jackpot game (at the start of the jackpot game, at the start of the round, at the end of the round, at the end of the jackpot game, etc.), the type of special figure at the time of the jackpot game, etc. Specific command data is extracted from a plurality of types of stored command data. Further, the start address of the storage area in which the extracted command data is stored is set (stored) in the transfer source address storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the transfer source address. Here, the RAM 308 is applied as the storage means for temporarily storing the transfer source address, but other storage means such as a register may be applied (transfer destination address, transfer number, etc. described below). Is the same).

  In step S5103, the head address of the command storage area is set (stored) in the transfer destination address storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a transfer destination address. In step S5104, the number of bytes of command data is provided in the RAM 308. The transfer number is set (stored) in the transfer number storage area.

In step S5105, block transfer processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this block transfer process, a process of transferring data stored in a storage area set as a transfer source address to a storage area set as a transfer destination address is performed. In step S5106, after the command transferred to the command storage area is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the process ends. Note that the process of transmitting the command to the first sub-control unit 400 may be executed by the main control unit main process described above.
<Block transfer processing>

  Next, the block transfer process (step S5105) in the above-mentioned jackpot medium command transmission process will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the flow of block transfer processing.

  In step S5201 of this block transfer process, a correction time is set according to the number of transfers described above. Details will be described with reference to FIG. 156. For example, when the number of transfers is 1, the block transfer processing time required when the number of transfers is 1, and the block transfer processing required when the number of transfers is 3. When the transfer number is 2, when the transfer number is 2, the block transfer process time required when the transfer number is 2 and the block transfer process required when the transfer number is 3 are set. The difference from the processing time is set as the correction time.

  In step S5202, the data stored in the storage area indicated by the above-mentioned transfer source address in the command data is transferred to the storage area indicated by the above-mentioned transfer destination address in the command storage area. In step S5203, one transfer source address is added. In step S5204, one transfer destination address is added.

In step S5205, 1 is subtracted from the transfer number. In step S5206, it is determined whether or not the transfer number after subtraction is 0. If this is the case (when all of the command data transfer has been completed). Proceeding to step S5207, if not applicable (if command data transfer remains), the process returns to step S5202 to continue block transfer processing. In step S5207, the process ends after waiting for the correction time set in step S5201 to elapse.
<Command table>

  Next, a command table stored in advance in the ROM 306 will be described. FIGS. 152A to 152D are diagrams showing an example of a command table that is referred to during the jackpot game.

  These command tables are pre-stored in the ROM 306, and have a fixed length (in this example, 1 byte length) start address, a fixed length (in this example, 1 byte length) number of bytes, and a variable length command. It consists of data (in this example, a 1-byte command identifier and a variable-length command parameter).

  The head address indicates the address of the ROM 306 in which command data (command identifier in this example) of the first byte is stored, for example, 1 of the jackpot start command 1 shown in FIG. The command data (11H) in the byte indicates that it is stored in the address 100 of the ROM 306. The number of bytes indicates the data length of the command data. For example, the data length of the command data of the jackpot start command 1 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 4A shows an example of a command table that is referred to when the big hit game is started. In this command table, command data having a 2-byte length of jackpot start commands 1 to 6 transmitted at the start of jackpot game is specified, and the command identifier (11H) stored in the first byte of the command data is the jackpot start Indicates a command. In the second byte of the command data, jackpot symbol identification information is stored. 01H is special figure A, 02H is special figure B, 03H is special figure C, 04H is special figure D, and 05H is special figure. E and 06H show that it is the special figure F.

  FIG. 5B is an example of a command table that is referred to when a big hit game round starts. In this command table, command data having a 3-byte length of round start commands 1 to 29 transmitted at the start of a round of jackpot game is specified, and a command identifier (12H) stored in the first byte of the command data is a round Indicates a start command. In the second byte of the command data, jackpot symbol identification information is stored. 01H is special figure A, 02H is special figure B, 03H is special figure C, 04H is special figure D, and 05H is special figure. E and 06H show that it is the special figure F. In the third byte of the command data, information for identifying the number of rounds is stored, and the number of rounds is indicated by a hexadecimal number.

  FIG. 3C is an example of a command table that is referred to at the end of the round of the big hit game. This command table defines 2-byte length command data of round end commands 1 to 15 transmitted at the end of the round of the big hit game, and the command identifier (13H) stored in the first byte of the command data is round Indicates an end command. Further, the round number identification information is stored in the second byte of the command data, and the round number is represented by a hexadecimal number.

FIG. 4D is an example of a command table that is referred to at the end of the big hit game. This command table defines 1-byte command data of the jackpot end command 1 transmitted at the end of the jackpot game, and the command identifier (14H) stored in the first byte of the command data is the jackpot end command. It shows that there is. The jackpot end command is a command having no command parameter.
<Contrast of the present invention and the prior art>

  Next, the difference between the present invention and the prior art will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing only the characteristic part of the present invention.

  As shown in the figure, in the above jackpot middle command transmission process, immediately after the process in step S5104 (a process for setting a correction time according to the number of transfers), immediately before the process in step S5106 (command transmission process). The block transfer processing executed until then can be divided into three, processing X, processing Y and processing Z.

  In process X, immediately after the process in step S5201 (a process for setting the correction time according to the number of transfers), it is determined whether or not the process in step S5206 (the number of transfers is 0), and step S5202 is performed according to the determination result. Alternatively, the process is executed immediately before the process jumping to S5207 (hereinafter may be referred to as a conditional branch process), and includes a plurality of processes in steps S5202 to S5205. The process Y includes a process from immediately before the process of step S5206 (conditional branch process) to immediately after the process of step S5206 (conditional branch process), that is, the process of step S5206 (conditional branch process). The process Z includes at least the process of step S5207 (correction time waiting process) immediately after the process of step S5206 (conditional branch process) and immediately before the process of step S5106 (command transmission process).

  FIGS. 154 (a) and (b) are flowcharts showing the characterizing portion of the present invention from a viewpoint different from that in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the above-mentioned jackpot middle command transmission process can be divided into the processes of steps S5301 to S5305. Specifically, step S5301 is the first process preparation process (condition setting process), for example, the process of step S5201 in FIG. 153 (a process of setting the correction time according to the number of transfers). To do.

  Step S5302 is the first process (conditional branch process), and corresponds to, for example, the process of step S5206 (conditional branch process) in FIG. 153 described above. Step S5303 is the second process (first process content), and is executed after, for example, a plurality of processes (step X5206 (conditional branch process) of the processes X in steps S5202 to S5205 in FIG. 153 described above). Process X) to be performed corresponds.

  Step S5304 is the second processing (second processing content), for example, processing of step S5106 (command transmission processing) including at least the processing of step S5207 (correction time standby processing) in FIG. 153 described above. This corresponds to the processing up to immediately before (processing Z). Note that the second process (second process content) in step S5304 includes a process of only a branch (jump) from the conditional branch process to the third process as shown in FIG. The present invention is not limited to instructions that operate on registers, memories, stacks, I / Os, and the like, such as arithmetic instructions, input / output instructions, and load instructions.

  Further, the first process and the second process include a plurality of instructions (for example, a first instruction for determining a predetermined condition, a second instruction for executing process A when the condition is satisfied, and a condition being satisfied. It is not limited to the case where it is configured with a third instruction that executes process B when there is no such condition, but a single instruction (for example, a predetermined condition is determined, and process A is executed when the condition is met, May be configured to be executable by an instruction that executes process B when the above is not established. As described above, if the first process and the second process can be executed with one instruction, the amount of program code corresponding to the first process and the second process can be reduced, In some cases, the number of states necessary for executing the process and the second process can be reduced.

  Further, as a variation of a single instruction, for example, if a predetermined condition is determined, a process B is executed when the condition is satisfied, and a process A is executed when the condition is not satisfied. There are cases where instructions can be used properly according to predetermined conditions, and the program can be simplified. In addition, a predetermined calculation is performed, and the process A is executed when the calculation result is the first result, and the process B is executed when the calculation result is the second result. Is provided with an instruction for executing process B when the result is the first result and executing process A when the operation result is the second result, the convenience of coding is improved and the development period of the program can be shortened. There is a case. Further, a predetermined condition is judged, and if the condition is satisfied, the process branches to the process A. If the condition is not satisfied, the instruction branches to the process B, or a predetermined calculation is performed, and the calculation result is the first result. In this case, an instruction may be provided that branches to the process A and branches to the process B when the operation result is the second result.

  Step S5305 is a third process, and corresponds to the process (command transmission process) of step S5106 in FIG. 153, for example. The processing content of the third processing is not particularly limited as long as it is a processing executed immediately after the second processing (first processing content) and the second processing (second processing content). Good.

  On the other hand, FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the prior art corresponding to the characteristic part of the present invention, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. If this prior art process is considered in the same way as the flowchart of FIG. 153 above, immediately after the process of step S5401 (a process of setting the number of bytes of a command as the number of transfers) in the process corresponding to the above-mentioned jackpot command transmission process. Thus, the process executed immediately before the process of step S5407 (command transmission process) can be divided into three processes, a process X ′, a process Y ′, and a process Z ′.

  The process X ′ determines whether or not the process of step S5406 (the number of transfers is 0) immediately after the process of step S5401 (process for setting the number of bytes of the command as the number of transfers), and performs a step according to the determination result. This process is executed immediately before the process jumping to S5402 or S5407 (hereinafter may be referred to as a conditional branch process), and includes a plurality of processes in steps S5402 to S5405. The process Y includes a process from immediately before the process of step S5406 (conditional branch process) to immediately after the process of step S5406 (conditional branch process), that is, the process of step S5406 (conditional branch process). The process Z includes a process from immediately after the process (conditional branch process) in step S5406 to immediately before the process (command transmission process) in step S5407.

  FIG. 156 (a) is a diagram showing the time required for block transfer in the jackpot medium command transmission processing according to the present invention, and FIG. 156 (b) shows the jackpot medium command transmission processing according to the prior art. It is the figure which showed the required time when performing block transfer in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, in the jackpot middle command transmission processing according to the prior art, when 1 is set as the number of transfer bytes in step S5401, only the first processing (processing Y ′) is performed. The total time is the processing time T1 of the processing Y ′ (one time). If 2 is set as the transfer byte count in step S5401, the first process (process Y ′) is performed twice and the second process (of process X ′, the process of step S5406 (conditional branch process)). Since the processing X ′) to be executed later is performed once, the total required time is the processing time T1 obtained by adding the processing time T1 × 2 of the processing Y ′ (twice) and the processing time T2 of the processing X ′ (one time). X2 + T2. If 3 is set as the transfer byte count in step S5401, the first process (process Y ′) is performed three times and the second process (of process X ′, the process of step S5406 (conditional branch process)). Since the processing X ′) to be executed later is performed twice, the total required time is the sum of the processing time T1 × 3 of the processing Y ′ (one time) and the processing time T2 × 2 of the processing X ′ (twice). Time T1 × 3 + T2 × 2 is obtained.

  That is, in the jackpot medium command transmission processing according to the conventional technique, the processing time differs depending on the number of transfer bytes. For this reason, it is necessary to work in consideration of the difference in processing time due to the difference in the number of transfer bytes, and the work becomes complicated and it is extremely difficult to shorten the development period.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot middle command transmission process according to the present invention, when 1 is set as the number of transfer bytes in step S5104, the first process (process Y) and the second process (correction time waiting included in process Z) are set. Therefore, the total required time is the processing time T3 of the processing Y (once) and the processing time T3 × 2 + T4 × 2 (2 bytes) of the correction time standby processing included in the processing Z. T3 × 3 + T4 × 2. If 2 is set as the number of transfer bytes in step S5104, the first process (process Y) is executed twice and after the second process (of process X, step S5206 (conditional branch process)). Processing X) is performed once and the second processing (correction time standby processing included in the processing Z) is performed, the total required time is the processing time T3 × 2 of processing Y (one time), and processing X The processing time T3 × 3 + T4 × 2 is obtained by adding the processing time T4 of (one time) and the processing time T3 + T4 (one byte) of the correction time standby processing included in the processing Z. When 3 is set as the number of transfer bytes in step S5104, the first process (process Y) is executed three times and the second process (of process X, after the process of step S1206 (conditional branch process)). Since the processing X) is performed twice, the total required time is the processing time T3 × 3 + T4 obtained by adding the processing time T3 × 3 of the processing Y (once) and the processing time T4 × 2 of the processing X (twice). X2.

  That is, in the jackpot medium command transmission processing according to the present invention, the processing time is the same (T3 × 3 + T4 × 2) regardless of the number of transfer bytes. For this reason, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, specifically, there is no difference in processing time due to the difference in the number of transfer bytes, and the number of patterns that must be confirmed by debugging or testing is greatly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time for debugging and testing, and it is not necessary to consider the difference in processing time, so that the program design can be simplified.

  Also, the start timing of the third process following the first process and the second process (the timing at which the third process is started based on the timing immediately before the start of the first process) is used as the number of transfer bytes. Regardless, since it can be made the same, there is no difference in the start timing of the third process due to the difference in the number of transfer bytes, and the pattern that must be confirmed in the debug or test can be greatly reduced. In addition to being able to shorten the time, it is not necessary to consider the difference in start timing, so that the program design can be simplified.

In FIGS. 153 and 154, an example in which the correction time standby process is included in the second process is shown. However, the correction time standby process is a third process immediately after the first process preparation process (condition setting process). The correction time standby process may be arranged at any one of the positions indicated by the correction time standby process arrangement positions 1 to 7 as shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b). Good.
<Interrupt processing time>

  Next, the processing time for interrupt processing will be described. 158 (a) and 158 (b) schematically show the flow of interrupt processing. If the interrupt process is composed of a plurality of processes (for example, process 1, process 2, process 3,..., Process X), the processing time of each process varies depending on the interrupt timing. In the example shown in a), as a result of the processing times of processing 1, processing 2, and processing 3 at interrupt timing 2 being shorter than interrupt timing 1, execution start timing of processing X executed after these processing However, the interrupt timing 1 and the interrupt timing 2 are different. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 5B, the processing start time of the process X executed after these processes is reduced as a result of the process 2 processing time at the interrupt timing 2 being shorter than the interrupt timing 1. There is a difference between interrupt timing 1 and interrupt timing 2.

  When designing such an interrupt process (for example, the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process), in order to ensure the real-time property of the process interrupted by this interrupt process (for example, the above-described main control unit main process), It is necessary to consider the maximum processing time for interrupt processing. For example, assuming that the interrupt timing 1 shown in the upper part of FIGS. 10A and 10B indicates the maximum processing time, all processes at other interrupt timings are shown in the lower part of FIGS. It is necessary to verify whether or not the processing is within the maximum processing time of the interrupt timing 1, as in the interrupt timing 2 shown in FIG. 2, and whether or not the processing X can be started at the same timing.

  As described above, in the jackpot medium command transmission processing according to the conventional technique, the processing time differs depending on the number of transfer bytes. For this reason, when such processing is included in interrupt processing, it is necessary to work in consideration of the difference in processing time due to the difference in the number of transferred bytes in debugging and testing, and the work becomes complicated and the development period is reduced. Shortening is extremely difficult.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot medium command transmission processing according to the present invention, the processing time is the same regardless of the number of transfer bytes. For this reason, even when such processing is included in interrupt processing, there is no need to consider the difference in processing time for such processing, and the pattern that must be confirmed by debugging or testing can be greatly reduced. The test work time can be shortened, and the program design can be simplified because it is not necessary to consider the difference in processing time.

  Furthermore, the timer interrupt process is usually designed to be executed at a predetermined cycle, but when an unexpected event occurs (for example, a part of the process included in the interrupt process has a longer processing time than expected). In such a case, a so-called fluctuation (jitter) may occur in a case where a waiting time longer than expected occurs due to an interrupt process having a high priority. When such fluctuations occur, there may occur a situation in which processing that should be executed at a predetermined cycle cannot be performed. However, according to the present invention, it is possible to unify the processing time in the interrupt processing. In some cases, it is possible to eliminate fluctuations in time and to make the execution start timing of the process the same.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100, the input port state update process in step S4205 (a process for monitoring the presence or absence of a detection signal by inputting a detection signal from a sphere detection sensor), or in the slot machine 1100, in the input port in step S2205. State update processing (processing for inputting the detection signal of the sensor circuit 1320 of the various sensors 1318 and monitoring the presence / absence of the detection signal), command setting transmission processing of step S2211 (transmitting control data relating to various motors to other control units) It is possible to make the execution start timing of the processing) the same regardless of the interrupt timing, so that the game control can be stabilized and the fairness of the game can be ensured.
<Command setting transmission processing>

  Next, the command setting transmission process (step S2211) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 71 will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the flow of command setting transmission processing.

  In step S2211a of this command setting transmission process, the command storage area provided in the RAM 1308 is cleared (initialized). Further, in step S2211b, based on the progress of the game (when the game is started, when the lever is received, when the left reel is stopped, when the middle reel is stopped, when the right reel is stopped, when all the reels are stopped), it is stored in the ROM 1306 in advance. Specific command data is extracted from a plurality of types of command data. Further, the start address of the storage area in which the extracted command data is stored is set (stored) in the transfer source address storage area provided in the RAM 1308 as the transfer source address. Here, the RAM 1308 is applied as the storage means for temporarily storing the transfer source address, but other storage means such as a register may be applied (transfer destination address, transfer number, etc. described below). Is the same).

  Next, in step S2211c, the head address of the command storage area is set (stored) in the transfer destination address storage area provided in the RAM 1308 as a transfer destination address. In step S2211d, the number of bytes of command data is provided in the RAM 1308. The transfer number is set (stored) in the transfer number storage area.

In step S2211e, block transfer processing is performed. The block transfer process is the same as the block transfer process described with reference to FIG. In step S2211f, after the command transferred to the command storage area is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400, the process ends. Note that the process of transmitting the command to the first sub control unit 1400 may be executed by the main control unit main process described above.
<Command table>

  Next, a command table stored in advance in the ROM 1306 will be described. FIGS. 160A to 160D are diagrams showing an example of a command table referred to during a game.

  These command tables are pre-stored in the ROM 1306, and have a fixed length (in this example, 1 byte length) head address, a fixed length (in this example, 1 byte length) number of bytes, and variable length command data. (In this example, it is composed of a 1-byte command identifier and a variable-length command parameter).

  The start address indicates the address of the ROM 1306 in which the command data of the first byte (command identifier in this example) is stored, for example, 1 of the game start command 1 shown in FIG. The command data (A1H) of the byte indicates that it is stored in the address 1000 of the ROM 1306. The number of bytes indicates the data length of the command data. For example, the data length of the command data of the game start command 1 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 6A shows an example of a command table that is referred to when the game is started. In this command table, command data having a 2-byte length of game start commands 1 and 2 transmitted at the start of the game is defined, and the command identifier (A1H) stored in the first byte of the command data is a game start command. It shows that there is. In addition, re-game identification information is stored in the second byte of the command data, and 01H indicates that the re-game operation is performed and 02H indicates that the re-game operation is not performed.

  FIG. 5B is an example of a command table that is referred to when a lever (start lever 1135) is received. In this command table, command data having a 3-byte length of lever reception commands 1 to 12 transmitted at the time of lever reception is defined, and the command identifier (A3H) stored in the first byte of the command data is the lever reception command. It shows that there is. The second byte of the command data stores game state identification information, indicating that 01H is in the normal state, 02H is in the BB, 03H is in the RB, and 04H is in the bonus internal winning. Yes. In addition, in the third byte of the command data, winning combination identification information is stored, indicating that 01H is a loss, 02H is a small role, 03H is a replaying role, 04H is RB, and 05H is BB. Yes.

  FIG. 3C is an example of a command table that is referred to when the left reel 110 is stopped. This command table defines 1-byte command data of the left reel stop command 1 transmitted when the left reel 110 is stopped, and the command identifier (A4H) stored in the first byte of the command data is the left reel. Indicates a stop command. The left reel stop command is a command having no command parameter.

  FIG. 4D is an example of a command table that is referred to when the middle reel 111 is stopped. This command table defines 1-byte length command data of the middle reel stop command 1 transmitted when the middle reel 111 is stopped, and the command identifier (A5H) stored in the first byte of the command data is the middle reel. Indicates a stop command. The reel stop command is a command having no command parameter.

  FIG. 4E is an example of a command table that is referred to when the right reel 112 is stopped. This command table defines 1-byte length command data of the right reel stop command 1 transmitted when the right reel 112 is stopped, and the command identifier (A6H) stored in the first byte of the command data is the right reel. Indicates a stop command. The right reel stop command is a command having no command parameter.

  FIG. 5F is an example of a command table that is referred to when all reels are stopped. This command table defines 2-byte length command data of all reel stop commands 1 to 5 transmitted when all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and a command identifier (A7H) stored in the first byte of the command data. Indicates an all-reel stop command. In addition, in the second byte of the command data, winning combination identifying information is stored, indicating that 01H is a loss, 02H is a small role, 03H is a replaying role, 04H is RB, and 05H is BB. Yes.

  One, a plurality, or all of the features of the present invention described below can be applied to the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100 as well.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes the game control means (for example, the main control unit 300 (or the main control unit 1300) that executes a plurality of processes related to the game. The game control means includes a first process (for example, a first process in FIG. 154 (a)), and the contents of the process in response to a request for the first process are the first contents and the second contents. The process is executed in the order of the second process (for example, the second process in FIG. 154 (a)) and the third process (for example, the third process in FIG. 154 (a)), which is one of the contents of The contents of the second process are the first contents (for example, the first process contents in FIG. 154 (a)) and the second contents (for example, the second process contents in FIG. 154 (a)). In any case, the same timing (for example, The timing at which the third process is started at the same timing, or the first timing in FIG. 154 (a), with reference to immediately before the start of the first process preparation process (condition setting process) in FIG. 154 (a). The game machine is characterized in that execution of the third process is started with the timing immediately before the start of the third process (conditional branch process) as the reference.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, even if the contents of the second process are different, the difference in the processing time of the second process can be eliminated, and it can be confirmed by debugging or testing. Because the number of patterns that must be reduced can be greatly reduced, debugging and testing work time can be shortened, and there is no need to consider the difference in processing time, so the program design can be simplified. . In addition, the game control unit may be able to stabilize the game control while performing a branch process according to the processing status.

  Further, the game control means executes one of the third content and the fourth content according to the content of the second process as the third process, and the first content in the second process. Is executed, the third content is executed as the third processing, and when the second content is executed in the second processing, the fourth content is executed as the third processing. May be.

  With such a configuration, game control may be stabilized even when different processing is executed as a result of branch processing.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot medium command transmission process is taken as an example, and in the slot machine 1100 according to the present embodiment, the command setting transmission process is taken as an example. The present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to various processes and commands.
<Fifth special instruction of main control unit>

Next, the fifth special instruction included in the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating a part of the fifth special instruction included in the main control unit 300 and an explanation thereof.
<Fifth special instruction / WARU instruction>

  The “WARRU r, A, n (n: immediate value)” instruction, which is one of the fifth special instructions, divides the data stored in the A register indicated by the second operand by the numerical value n indicated by the third operand, The quotient of the division result is stored in the register (any one of the B, C, D, E, H, and L registers) indicated by the first operand r, and the remainder of the division result is stored in the A register indicated by the second operand. It is an instruction. When the remainder of the division result is 0, the Z flag and the SZ flag are set to 1, and when the remainder of the division result is other than 0, the Z flag and the SZ flag are set to 0. Further, when the divisor is 0, the C flag is set to 1, the quotient and the remainder are FFH (FFFFH when 2 bytes are used), and when the divisor is other than 0, the C flag is set to 0.

The “WARU A, r” instruction divides the data stored in the A register indicated by the first operand by the data stored in the register r indicated by the second operand, and the quotient of the division result is indicated by the first operand. This instruction is stored in the A register and the remainder of the division result is stored in the register r indicated by the second operand. The “WARU ss, HL” instruction divides the data stored in the ss register (BC, DE register) indicated by the first operand by the data stored in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand, This is an instruction for storing the quotient in the ss register indicated by the first operand and storing the remainder of the division result in the pair register HL indicated by the second operand. The “WARU HL, ss” instruction divides the data stored in the HL register indicated by the first operand by the data stored in the pair register ss (BC, DE register) indicated by the second operand, This is an instruction for storing the quotient in the HL register indicated by the first operand and storing the remainder of the division result in the pair register ss indicated by the second operand.
<Fifth special instruction / JP instruction>

One of the fifth special instructions, “JP SZ, mn instruction”, is an instruction that jumps to the address indicated by mn when the SZ flag is 1, and continues the subsequent processing when the SZ flag is 0. The “JP NSZ, mn instruction” is an instruction that jumps to an address indicated by mn when the SZ flag is 0 and continues the subsequent processing when the SZ flag is 1.
<Fifth special instruction / JR instruction>

“JR SZ, e instruction” which is one of the fifth special instructions is an instruction to jump to the address indicated by the program counter PC + e when the SZ flag is 1, and to continue the subsequent processing when the SZ flag is 0. The “JR NSZ, mn instruction” is an instruction that jumps to the address indicated by the program counter PC + e when the SZ flag is 0, and continues the subsequent processing when the SZ flag is 1.
<Fifth special instruction / CALL instruction>

One of the fifth special instructions, “CALL SZ, mn instruction”, when the SZ flag is 1, the upper address stored in the program counter PC is displayed in the stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP-1, and the program An instruction that stores (saves) the lower address stored in the counter PC in the stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP-2, jumps to the address indicated by mn, and continues the subsequent processing when the SZ flag is 0. is there. In addition, when the SZ flag is 0, the “CALL NSZ, mn instruction” indicates the upper address stored in the program counter PC in the stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP-1 and the lower address stored in the program counter PC. This is an instruction to store (save) the address in the stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP-2, jump to the address indicated by mn, and continue the subsequent processing when the SZ flag is 1.
<Fifth special instruction / RET instruction>

  When the SZ flag is 1, the “RET SZ instruction” which is one of the fifth special instructions uses the data stored in the stack area SP indicated by the stack pointer SP as the lower address of the program counter PC, and the stack pointer. An instruction that adds two stack pointers SP after loading (returning) the data stored in the stack area SP + 1 indicated by the SP to the upper address of the program counter PC, and continues the subsequent processing when the SZ flag is 0. is there. Further, when the SZ flag is 0, the “RET NSZ instruction” sets the data stored in the stack area SP indicated by the stack pointer SP to the lower address of the program counter PC and the stack area SP + 1 indicated by the stack pointer SP. This is an instruction to add two stack pointers SP after loading (returning) the stored data to the upper address of the program counter PC and to continue the subsequent processing when the SZ flag is 1.

  <5th special instruction / number of bytes / number of states>

FIG. 162 is a diagram comparing the number of bytes and the number of states of the fifth special instruction. As shown in the figure, the JP instruction and the CALL instruction are different in the number of bytes and the number of states between an instruction using the Z flag as an operand and an instruction using the SZ flag as an operand. The instruction having the SZ flag as an operand has 1 byte and 4 states. On the other hand, the JR instruction and the RET instruction are the same in the number of bytes and the number of states in the instruction using the Z flag as an operand and the instruction using the SZ flag as an operand.
<Z flag, SZ flag>

FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of an instruction for changing the Z flag and the SZ flag. The main control unit 300 changes the Z flag and the SZ flag to the same value after execution of the instruction, changes the SZ flag without changing the Z flag after execution of the instruction, and sets the Z flag after execution of the instruction. And an instruction that does not change the SZ flag. For example, the WARU instruction, which is one of the fifth special instructions, is one of the instructions that changes the Z flag and the SZ flag to the same value after the execution of the instruction, and the INCENSOU instruction, which is one of the special instructions, This is one of the instructions for changing the SZ flag without changing the Z flag after execution.
<Timer update processing>

  Next, the timer update process (step S213) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of timer update processing.

  In step S5501, the number of update timers (the number of timers that need to be updated) provided in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S5502, the start of the storage area of the RAM 308 in which the timer to be updated (update target timer) is stored. Set the address. In step S5503, it is determined whether the value of the update target timer is 0 or other than 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S5504, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step S5505.

  In step S5504, the update target timer is updated. In step S5505, it is determined whether there is an unupdated timer. If there is an unupdated timer, the process returns to step S5503 to continue updating other timers. If there is no unupdated timer, the process is terminated.

  FIG. 165 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a timer update processing program according to the present invention, and FIG. 165 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a conventional timer update processing program.

  In the conventional timer update processing program, when it is determined in step S5503 whether the value of the update target timer is 0 or other than 0, first, an “LD A, (HL)” instruction indicated by (1-3) of the program is issued. By executing, the value of the update target timer stored at the address indicated by the HL register is loaded (stored) in the A register. Subsequently, by executing an “AND A” instruction indicated by (1-4) of the program, the Z flag is changed when A is 0, and the Z flag is not changed when A is other than 0. If the Z flag is changed (when A is 0) as shown in (1-5) of the next program and the Z flag is the first operand, the JR instruction When jumping to an address indicated by two operands and the Z flag has not changed (when A is other than 0), subsequent processing (in this example, a DEC instruction) is executed.

  On the other hand, when the same determination is made in the timer update processing program according to the present invention, first, as in the conventional timer update processing program, the “LD A, (HL)” instruction indicated by (1-1) of the program. , The value of the update target timer stored at the address indicated by the HL register is loaded (stored) in the A register. Here, since the LD instruction (load instruction) is one of the instructions for changing the SZ flag without changing the Z flag after the execution of the instruction as shown in FIG. 162, “LD A, (HL)”. After execution of the instruction, the Z flag does not change, but the SZ flag changes. Subsequently, in the present invention, when the SZ flag is changed in the JR instruction indicated by (1-2) of the program and having the SZ flag as the first operand, the address indicated by the second operand of the JR instruction is changed. When the SZ flag has not changed, the subsequent processing (in this example, the DEC instruction) is executed.

That is, the timer update processing program according to the present invention does not require the “AND A” instruction (processing for checking whether the value of the A register is 0) indicated by (1-4) in the conventional timer update processing program. It becomes. For this reason, the code amount of the program can be reduced as compared with the conventional method, the processing speed can be increased, and the game control can be performed stably.
<Display symbol lottery processing>

  Next, the display symbol lottery (step S1003) in the above-described special figure 1 lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a display symbol lottery.

  In step S5601 of the display symbol lottery process shown in FIG. 5A, the address (table address) of the display symbol lottery table provided in the ROM 306 is acquired. In step S5602, lottery preparation processing is performed. In step S5603, lottery processing is performed. In step S5604, after the hit type information setting process is performed, the process ends.

  Also, in step S5611 of the lottery preparation process shown in FIG. 5B, an offset value is acquired, and in step S5612, one address of the acquired display symbol lottery table is added and updated. In step S5613, a data selection process is performed. In step S5614, it is determined whether the acquired value, which is the result of the data selection process, is 0 or other than 0. If 0, the process ends. The process proceeds to S5615. In step S5615, after the random number for lottery is acquired, the process ends.

  In step S5621 of the data selection process shown in FIG. 5C, the offset value is added to the table address. In step S5622, the value of the table address is transferred to the A register. In step S5623, the value of the A register is decremented by 1. In step S5624, the process ends after transferring the table address value to the A register.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery preparation process program according to the present invention. In the lottery preparation process program according to the present invention, by executing the RST instruction indicated by (3-1) of the program, the program jumps to the data selection process, and the data selection process program indicated by (3-3) “ Decrement the A register value by one by executing the "DEC A" instruction. Here, since the 8-bit DEC instruction is one of the instructions for changing the Z flag and the SZ flag to the same value after the execution of the instruction as shown in FIG. 162 above, the Z flag after the execution of the “DEC A” instruction. And the SZ flag change to the same value.

  Subsequently, the “LD A, (HL)” instruction indicated by (3-4) of the program is executed to transfer the value of the table address to the A register. Here, since the LD instruction (load instruction) is one of the instructions for changing the SZ flag without changing the Z flag after the execution of the instruction as shown in FIG. 162, “LD A, (HL)”. After execution of the instruction, the Z flag does not change, but the SZ flag changes.

Subsequently, by executing the “RET” command indicated by (3-5) of the program, the program returns immediately after the RST command indicated by (3-1) of the lottery preparation process program. Execute the “RET Z” instruction. Here, the “RET Z instruction” indicates that when the Z flag is 1, the data stored in the stack area SP indicated by the stack pointer SP is set to the lower address of the program counter PC, and the stack area SP + 1 indicated by the stack pointer SP. Is stored in the upper address of the program counter PC, and two stack pointers SP are added. When the Z flag is 0, the subsequent processing is continued. That is, the “RET Z” instruction shown in (3-2) changes after the execution of the “DEC A” instruction shown in (3-3), but the “LD A, ( In response to the Z flag that does not change after execution of the “HL)” command, either the process of returning to the display symbol lottery process or the process of continuing the subsequent process is performed.
<Lottery processing>

  Next, the lottery process (step S5603) in the display symbol lottery described above will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a lottery process.

  In step S5701, a random number for display symbol lottery is acquired, and in step S5702, the random value acquired in step S5701 is divided. In step S5703, the lottery data address stored in the ROM 308 is acquired. In step S5704, the quotient of the division result is added to the lottery data address acquired in step S5703. In step S5705, the remainder of the division result is transferred to the A register. In step S5706, the value of the A register is compared with 2.

  In step S5707, it is determined whether the Z flag is 1 or 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S5708. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step S5714. In step S5708, the value of the A register is compared with 1. In step S5709, it is determined whether the Z flag is 1 or 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S5710. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step S5712.

  In step S5710, the value of the lottery data address is transferred to the A register. In the next step S5711, the lottery result data is set in the A register, and the process ends. In step S5712, the value of the lottery data address is transferred to the A register. In next step S5713, the lottery result data is set in the A register, and the process is terminated. In step S5714, the value of the lottery data address is transferred to the A register. In the next step S5715, the lottery result data is set in the A register, and the process ends.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery processing program according to the present invention, and FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of a conventional lottery processing program.

  In the lottery preparation processing program according to the present invention, as shown in the lottery table stored in the ROM area, “N” for three lottery values N, M, and L (N, M, and L are positive integers). By performing an operation consisting of a calculation formula of “× 6 × 6 + M × 6 + L”, three lottery values are associated with one-byte ROM and stored. Therefore, the memory capacity can be reduced to 1/3 as compared with the conventional lottery table shown in FIG. 170 in which one lottery value is stored in association with one byte of ROM.

In addition, in the lottery preparation program according to the present invention, in order to obtain a lottery value from a lottery table in which three lottery values are stored in association with a 1-byte ROM, As shown in (5-1), the WARU instruction is executed once, and for the lottery value M, the WARU instruction is executed twice as shown in (5-2). Executes the WARU instruction three times as indicated by (5-3).
<Transmission request number transmission processing>

  Next, the payout request number transmission process (step S219) in the main control unit timer interruption process described above will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout request number transmission process.

  In step S5801, it is determined whether there is a payout request. If there is a payout request, the process proceeds to step S5802, and if there is no payout request, the process ends. In step S5802, the payout request counter to be transmitted is decremented by 1. In step S5803, prize ball number command data corresponding to the transmission object is acquired. In step S5804, a prize ball command to be transmitted to the payout control unit 600 is obtained. Set.

  In step S5805, the value of the main prize ball number counter is added to the number of prize balls, and in step S5806, the number of prize balls is divided. In step S5807, the main award ball number counter is updated, and in step S5808, the process ends after the main award ball information signal output request number is updated.

  FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of a payout request number transmission processing program according to the present invention. In the LD instruction indicated by (5-1) in this program, the address of the RAM 308 (in this example, F060H) in which the main winning ball number counter is stored is stored in the HL register, and is indicated by the following (5-2). In the ADD instruction, the value of the main prize ball counter (number of main prize balls) stored at the address indicated by the HL register is added to the value of the A register (number of prize balls).

  In the next WARU instruction indicated by (5-3), the data stored in the A register indicated by the second operand is divided by the numerical value indicated by the third operand (in this example, 10), and the quotient of the division result is obtained. The result is stored in the register indicated by the first operand r (C register in this example), and the remainder of the division result is stored in the A register indicated by the second operand. For example, when the data stored in the A register is 23, the C register has 2 as the quotient of the division of 23 (data stored in the A register) / 10 (the numerical value indicated by the third operand). And 3 which is the remainder of division is stored in the A register.

  In the LD instruction shown in (5-4) below, the data stored in the A register (division quotient; 3 in the above example) is stored in the main prize ball counter stored in the address F060H of the RAM 308 next time. In the following instructions (5-5) to (5-8), the data stored in the C register (remainder of division; 2 in the previous example) is stored in the RAM 308 at the address F061H. Is stored as the main prize ball information signal output request count in the main prize ball information signal output request count storage area.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has a main control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 (or main control) having a CPU (for example, the CPU 304 (or CPU 1304)) that performs game control. Unit 1300)) and a sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400) that controls the effect of the game based on the game control of the main control unit. , A second sub-control unit 1500)), wherein the CPU includes a flag register having a first flag and a second flag, the first flag, and the second flag. A first process for changing the flag to the same value based on the process execution result, and a second process for changing the value of the second flag without changing the value of the first flag based on the process execution result. processing The provided a gaming table, characterized in that the said second processing and the first processing is executed in the game controller.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 173, the main control unit of the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has a flag A and a flag B, and uses the flag A and the flag B as processing execution results. And a second process for changing the value of the flag B to γ without changing the value of the flag A based on the process execution result. A process and the second process are executed in the game control.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, stable game control can be performed while making it possible to enhance the interest of the game. That is, since the value of the first flag before the execution of the second process is protected after the execution of the second process, the value of the first flag can be used in the subsequent process, and the value of the first flag is stored in another register. There is no need to perform useless processing to save the value of one flag, the register capacity is not occupied, the program capacity can be reduced, the capacity can be allocated to a program for improving the gameability, and the interest of the game is enhanced. It becomes possible. Also, by reducing the program capacity, it becomes easier to see the program, and coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. Also, since the first flag and the second flag change to the same value after the first process is executed, the same result can be obtained even if the process is executed using one of the flag values. A program can be described by selecting an appropriate process according to the program, and the program capacity, processing speed, and the like can be optimized.

  In the first process, the CPU changes the first flag and the second flag to a second value based on the fact that the process execution result is the first value, and the process execution result Is different from the first value, the first flag and the second flag are changed to the first value. In the second process, the process execution result is the first value. The second flag may be changed to the second value based on a certain thing, and the second flag may be changed to the first value based on a process execution result being different from the first value. Good.

  With this configuration, after the first process is executed, the first flag and the second flag change to the same value based on the process execution result, so the process is executed using one of the flag values. However, the same result can be obtained, the program can be described by selecting an appropriate process according to the situation, and the program capacity and the processing speed can be optimized.

  In addition, the CPU includes a specific register having a predetermined bit length, and the CPU stores a process execution result in the specific register in the first process, and the value of the specific register is the first value. The first flag and the second flag are changed to the second value, and the first flag and the second flag are changed based on the value of the specific register being different from the first value. In the second process, the process execution result is stored in the specific register, and the second flag is set based on the value of the specific register being the first value. May be changed to the second value, and the second flag may be changed to the first value based on the value of the specific register being different from the first value.

  With this configuration, after the first process is executed, the first flag and the second flag change to the same value based on the value of the specific register, so the process is executed using either flag value. Even in such a case, the same result can be obtained, the program can be described by selecting an appropriate process according to the situation, and the program capacity and the processing speed can be optimized.

  In addition, based on the value of the first flag changed by execution of the first process, based on the value of the second flag changed by execution of the first process And a process for performing the same process as the first process.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 174 (a), the third process for performing the first process (branch process) based on the value of the first flag (Z flag) changed by the execution of the first process (SUB instruction). Based on the value of the second flag (SZ flag) changed by execution of the first process (SUB instruction) as shown in FIG. A fourth process (JR instruction using the SZ flag as an operand) for performing the same process (branch process) as the first process may be provided.

  With such a configuration, the same process can be executed based on changes in different flags, and the third process and the fourth process can be used properly depending on the process. In particular, if the number of bytes and the number of states in the third process and the fourth process are made the same, operations such as program checking, debugging, and testing may be facilitated.

  Further, the CPU includes a third process for determining the value of the first flag and a fourth process for determining the value of the second flag. In the third process, It is determined whether the value of one flag is the first value or the second value. In the fourth process, the value of the first flag is the first value or the second value. It may be determined whether or not the value is.

  With such a configuration, the value of the first flag and the value of the second flag are the same after execution of the first process, so the third process and the fourth process are performed after the execution of the first process. There are cases where the capacity and readability of the program can be improved by properly using it. In addition, since the value of the first flag before the execution of the second process is protected after the execution of the second process, the value of the first flag can be used in the third process, There is no need to perform wasteful processing for saving the value of the first flag, the register capacity is not occupied, the program capacity can be reduced, and the capacity can be allocated to a program for improving game play. It becomes possible to raise.

  In addition, if the fourth process is executed after the second process is executed, the execution result of the second process can be determined in the fourth process, so the process of confirming the execution result of the second process (Processing for changing the first flag) can be omitted, and the program capacity can be reduced in some cases.

  In the third process or the fourth process, the CPU may shift to a predetermined address when the determination result is true, and may be more false than when the determination result is true. If the processing speed is faster, the size (number of bytes) and the speed (number of states) of the third process and the fourth process are the same (for example, JR instruction, RET instruction), and the amount of program code In some cases, it is possible to use different processes without worrying about the processing speed.

  Further, when the processing speed is the same when the determination result is true and when it is false, the third process may be smaller in size and speed than the fourth process (for example, a JP instruction). The second processing is not limited to the processing shown in the above embodiment. For example, a load instruction, a 16-bit ADD instruction, an INC instruction, a DEC instruction, an IN instruction for inputting a direct value, and a rotation dedicated to the A register A shift instruction may be used.

  Further, the first flag after the CPU executes the second process may maintain a value before the second process is executed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has a main control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 (or main control) having a CPU (for example, the CPU 304 (or CPU 1304)) that performs game control. Unit 1300)) and a sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 (or the first sub-control unit 1400) that controls the effect of the game based on the game control of the main control unit. , A second sub-control unit 1500)), wherein the CPU has a predetermined flag register having a plurality of types of flags and a plurality of registers, and among the plurality of registers, A predetermined operation is performed on the value stored in at least one of the first register and the second register with a predetermined value, the first result of the operation is stored in the first register, and the operation is performed. The second result is stored in the second register, and the value of the specific flag among the plurality of types of flags is based on the value stored in the second register that is the second result of the operation A gaming machine comprising a predetermined process for changing the game process and executing the predetermined process in the game control.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 175, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a Z flag, a plurality of storage units 1, and a storage unit 2, and includes at least the storage unit 1 and the storage unit 2. The value 7 stored in any one is divided by a predetermined value 3, the quotient 2 of the division result is stored in the storage unit 1, the remainder 1 of the division result is stored in the storage unit 2, and the storage unit 2 A division process for changing the Z flag from 1 to 0 based on the value stored in is provided, and the division process is executed in the game control.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment, stable game control can be performed while making it possible to enhance the interest of the game. That is, since the value of any of the multiple types of flags changes based on the value stored in the second register (second result), the program can be created with care and coding errors and bugs can be suppressed. May be able to perform stable game control. In addition, since the first result and the second result are stored in the respective registers, it is possible to perform other processes using the two results after a predetermined process, and the program is easy to see by reducing the program capacity. In some cases, coding errors and bugs can be suppressed.

  Further, the predetermined processing stores a second value in the flag register based on the fact that the value stored in the second register is the first value, and stores the second value in the second register. The value of the specific flag among the plurality of types of flags may be changed to the first value based on the fact that the value is different from the first value.

  With this configuration, the value of a specific flag changes based on the value based on the processing execution result (second result) stored in the second register, so the program can be created with care and coding In some cases, mistakes and bugs can be suppressed, and stable game control can be performed.

  In addition, in the predetermined process, the CPU stores the second register that is the second result of the operation regardless of the value stored in the first register that is the first result of the operation. A value of a specific flag among the plurality of types of flags may be changed based on a stored value.

  In addition, when the first operand is a specific value, the predetermined processing changes the register specified by the second operand and the third operand to a predetermined value, and a plurality of types that change by the predetermined processing. Of these flags, processing other than the specific flag may be changed.

  For example, in the WARU instruction shown in FIG. 176 (a), when the first operand (third operand) is a specific value (0), the second operand (first operand) and the third operand (two The register (C register, A register) specified by the th operand) is changed to a predetermined value (FFH), and flags other than a specific flag (C flag) among the plurality of types of flags that change in the predetermined process ) May be changed.

  With such a configuration, since the number of processes can be reduced as compared with two processes as shown in FIG. 2B, the processing time can be shortened and the amount of program code can be reduced. is there. Moreover, a predetermined value can be stored in two designated registers in one process, and the readability of the program may be improved.

  Note that the C flag (carry flag) is a carry-down at the time of execution of addition (for example, ADD instruction, INC instruction), a borrow at the time of execution of subtraction (for example, SUB instruction, DEC instruction), a rotate shift instruction (for example, RLCA instruction) ) Since the value changes to 1 when the value that enters the C flag at the time of execution is 1, C is not obtained in a specific process (for example, ADD instruction, DEC instruction, RLCA instruction) and the predetermined process (WARU instruction). The flag change conditions are different. In addition, when the dividend is divided by the divisor of the specific value (0), the values before the calculation in the values of the first register and the second register are crushed (overwritten regardless of the values before the calculation) and are the same. It becomes a specific value (FFH). The predetermined value is a register (C register, A register) specified by the second operand (first operand) and the third operand (second operand) as an operation result of the predetermined process. ) May be a value that cannot be taken as a value to be stored (a value in which a quotient and a remainder cannot be taken as a result of division (for example, both a quotient and a remainder are FFH)).

  The predetermined processing is performed by performing the predetermined operation on the value of the operand specified second last from the value of the operand specified last, and the first specified as the first specified operand. The first result of the operation is stored in a register, the second result of the operation is stored in the second register, which is the second specified operand from the beginning, and is the first result of the operation Regardless of the value stored in the first register, the value of any of the plurality of types of flags is changed based on the value stored in the second register, which is the second result of the operation. It may be.

  In this case, the value of any of the multiple types of flags changes based on the value of the second register that is the second specified operand from the beginning, so the program can be created with care and coding errors and bugs can be avoided. In some cases, the game can be suppressed and stable game control can be performed.

  Further, the value of the operand specified last may be the predetermined value. In this case, the readability of the program may be improved.

  The CPU includes the plurality of data in an area indicated by a predetermined address of a storage unit (for example, ROM 306, RAM 308 (or ROM 1306, RAM 1308)) for storing program data and temporary data, and the CPU performs the predetermined process. It may be performed a predetermined number of times to acquire any of the plurality of data corresponding to the predetermined number of times.

  In this case, by reducing the program capacity, the program can be easily viewed, and coding errors and bugs can be suppressed.

  The CPU stores the value stored in the first register in the area indicated by the first specific address of the storage means after performing the predetermined process, and stores the value stored in the second register. May be stored in an area indicated by a second specific address adjacent to the first specific address.

In this case, the program may be easier to see, and coding errors and bugs may be suppressed.
<Flag change instruction / Flag determination instruction>

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a microprocessor (for example, a microprocessor 3000) including a CPU (for example, the CPU 304 (or CPU 1304)), and the CPU The CPU can execute at least the first operation when an instruction (for example, a flag change instruction) is received, and the CPU receives the second instruction (for example, a flag determination instruction). The CPU can execute at least a second operation, and the CPU can execute at least a third operation when receiving a third instruction (for example, a flag non-change instruction). The first bit in the flag register is changeable according to the result of the first operation, and the second operation is: The operation according to the state of the first bit can be executed at least, and the first bit does not change the state before and after the third operation, and the CPU The game machine is characterized in that the third operation can be executed after the execution of the operation is finished and before the execution of the second operation is started.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 177, the main control unit of the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has a flag register (for example, an F register), and when a flag change command is received, The first operation for changing the first bit of the register (for example, the Z flag), and the first bit is determined when a flag determination instruction is received, and processing according to the state of the first bit is performed. The second operation to be performed and the third operation that does not change the first bit when the flag non-change instruction is received can be executed at least. After the execution of the first operation is completed, the second operation is performed. The third operation can be executed until the start of the operation.

  With such a configuration, since the third operation is performed between the first operation and the second operation, it may be difficult for an unauthorized person to analyze and stable game control may be performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 (or slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment includes a microprocessor (for example, a microprocessor 3000) including a CPU (for example, the CPU 304 (or CPU 1304)), and the CPU The CPU can execute at least the first operation when an instruction (for example, a flag change instruction) is received, and the CPU receives the second instruction (for example, a flag determination instruction). The CPU can execute at least a second operation, and the CPU can execute at least a third operation when receiving a third instruction (for example, a flag non-change instruction). The first bit in the flag register is changeable according to the result of the first operation, and the second operation is: The operation according to the state of the first bit can be executed at least, and the first bit does not change the state before and after the third operation, and the CPU The third operation can be executed after the execution of the operation is finished and before the execution of the second operation is started, and the CPU finishes the execution of the first operation. The gaming machine is capable of executing the second operation immediately after the game.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 178, the main control unit of the pachinko machine 100 (or the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has a flag register (for example, an F register), and when a flag change instruction is received, The first operation for changing the first bit of the register (for example, the Z flag), and the first bit is determined when a flag determination instruction is received, and processing according to the state of the first bit is performed. The second operation to be performed and the third operation that does not change the first bit when the flag non-change instruction is received can be executed at least. After the execution of the first operation is completed, the second operation is performed. The third operation can be executed before the execution of the first operation ((a) in the figure), and the second operation can be executed immediately after the execution of the first operation is finished. Yes ((b) in the figure).

  With this configuration, the second operation is executed immediately after the execution of the first operation is completed, and the third operation is executed after the execution of the first operation is completed. There are cases where two actions are executed, and there is a case where a third action is performed between the first action and the second action, making it difficult for an unauthorized person to perform analysis and performing stable game control. There are cases where it is possible.

  In the case shown in FIG. 177 or FIG. 178, the first bit may function as at least a first zero flag (for example, a Z flag).

  With such a configuration, since the third operation is performed between the first operation and the second operation, it may be difficult for an unauthorized person to analyze and stable game control may be performed.

  In the case shown in FIG. 177 or 178 described above, the first zero flag (for example, Z flag) is at least when the result of the first operation (for example, subtraction processing by a DEC instruction) is zero. The first zero flag may be turned on at least when the result of the first operation is other than zero.

  With such a configuration, since the third operation is performed between the first operation and the second operation, it may be difficult for an unauthorized person to analyze and stable game control may be performed.

  In the case shown in FIG. 177 or 178 described above, the second bit in the flag register may function as at least a second zero flag (for example, an SZ flag).

  With such a configuration, since a plurality of zero flags are provided, it is extremely difficult to analyze the program using the zero flag as a clue, and it may be possible to prevent an unauthorized person from understanding the program structure. In other words, it may be possible to provide a highly reliable gaming machine by making it difficult to analyze a program aimed at unauthorized modification. In addition, it may be difficult to monitor flag changes by an unauthorized person and make it difficult for the unauthorized person to grasp the progress of game control.

  In the case shown in FIG. 177 or 178 described above, only one bit in the flag register may function as at least a carry flag (for example, a C flag).

  Such a configuration may make it difficult for an unauthorized person to analyze.

  Hereinafter, an example of processing using a flag change instruction and a flag determination instruction will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180.

  <Example of processing using flag change instruction and flag determination instruction>

  179 and 180 are program lists showing an example of a program using a flag change instruction and a flag determination instruction.

  First, the first process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first process, the DEC instruction shown in (1-1) and the LD instruction shown in (1-2) and (1-4) are flag change instructions, and (1-3) and (1-5) The JR instruction shown in FIG.

  The DEC instruction (DEC A) of (1-1) is an instruction for subtracting 1 from the data stored in the A register. Upon receiving this instruction, the main control unit performs Z flag (zero flag) and SZ flag (second flag). The value of (zero flag) can be changed.

  The (1-2) LD instruction (LD B, eTeisu_1) is an instruction for setting eTeisu_1 (0) in the B register. Upon receiving this instruction, the main control unit does not change the Z flag, Only the SZ flag can be changed depending on the result. That is, when the B register is 0, 1 is set to the SZ flag, and when the B register is 1, 0 is set to the SZ flag.

  The JR instruction (JR Z, | Address_10) of (1-3) jumps to the address indicated by | Address_10 when the Z flag is 1, and continues the next processing when the Z flag is other than 1. is there.

  The LD instruction (1-4) (LD B, eTeisu_2) is an instruction to set eTeisu_2 (1) in the B register. Upon receiving this instruction, the main control unit does not change the Z flag, but only the SZ flag. The value can be changed.

  The JR instruction (JR SZ, | Address_20) of (1-5) jumps to the address indicated by | Address_20 when the SZ flag is 1, and continues the next processing when the SZ flag is other than 1. It is.

  That is, in the first process, for example, the main control unit accepts the (1-1) DEC instruction, and when the A register becomes 0, the Z flag is set to 1, and the SZ flag is set to 1. Next, when the LD instruction (1-2) is received, the SZ flag is changed based on the value of the B register (1 is set), and the Z flag is not changed (1 is maintained). The Z flag is determined by the JR instruction (1-3). In this case, since 1 is set, jump to | Address_10. In | Address_10, the SZ flag is determined by the JR instruction (1-5). Since the SZ flag is set to 1 in (1-2), the process jumps to | Address_20. That is, the process X is not executed, and the process Y is executed at | Address_20.

  On the other hand, the main control unit accepts the (1-1) DEC instruction, and when the A register is not 0, sets the Z flag to 0 and sets the SZ flag to 0. Next, when the LD instruction (1-2) is received, the SZ flag is changed based on the value of the B register (1 is set), and the Z flag is not changed (maintains 0). The Z flag is determined by the JR instruction (1-3). Since 0 is set in this case, the next process (1-4) is executed without jumping to | Address_10. When the main control unit receives the LD command (1-4), it changes the SZ flag and sets the SZ flag to 0. Subsequently, the SZ flag is determined by the JR instruction (1-5), and 0 is set. Therefore, the process X is executed without jumping to | Address_20.

  Looking at this process with respect to the Z flag, the main control unit executes the first operation (subtraction process of the value of the A register) when the first instruction (DEC A) is received (1-1). When the second instruction (JR Z, | Address_10) is received, the second operation (processing to determine the Z flag and branch) is executed (1-3), and the third instruction (LD B, When eTeisu_1) is received, the third operation (set 0 in the B register) is executed (1-2). The state of the Z flag changes according to the result of the first operation (subtraction process of the value of the A register), and the state does not change in the third operation. The second operation (the process of determining the Z flag and branching) is an operation according to the state of the Z flag, and the main control unit executes the second operation after completing the execution of the first operation. In the meantime, the third operation is executed.

  On the other hand, looking at the above processing with respect to the SZ flag, the main control unit executes the first operation (sets 0 in the B register) when the first instruction (LD B, eTeisu_1) is received ( 1-2) When the second instruction (JR SZ, | Address_20) is accepted, the second operation (the process of determining the SZ flag and branching) is executed (1-5), and the third instruction When (LR Z, | Address — 10) is received, the third operation (processing for determining the Z flag and branching) is executed (1-3). The state of the SZ flag changes according to the result of the first operation (set 0 in the B register), and the state does not change in the third operation. The second operation (the process of determining the SZ flag and branching) is an operation according to the state of the SZ flag, and the main control unit executes the second operation after completing the execution of the first operation. In the meantime, the third operation is executed.

  When the main control unit receives the first command (LD B, eTeisu_2), the main control unit executes the first operation (sets 1 in the B register) (1-4) and the second command (JR When SZ, | Address_20) is received, the second operation (processing to determine the SZ flag and branch) is executed (1-5), and the third instruction (for example, LR Z, | Address_10) is received. If this is the case, the third operation (the process of determining the Z flag and branching) is executed (1-3). The state of the SZ flag changes according to the result of the first operation (1 is set in the B register), and the state does not change in the third operation. The second operation (processing for determining the SZ flag and branching) is an operation according to the state of the SZ flag, and the main control unit executes the second operation immediately after finishing the execution of the first operation. To do.

  As described above, the main control unit of the present embodiment executes another instruction between the flag change instruction and the flag determination instruction.

  In addition, the main control unit of this embodiment may execute another instruction between the flag change instruction and the flag determination instruction, or may execute the flag determination instruction immediately after the flag change instruction.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 100, this first process may be used, for example, for a process of determining whether the acquired random number value is the random value in FIG. 1 or the random value in FIG. , It may be used for processing to determine whether it is a non-probable change state or a probable change state, may be used for processing to determine whether it is a non-electric support state or an electric support state, either the first state or the second state It may be used for the process of determining whether or not it may be used for other processes.

  In the case of the slot machine 1100, the first process may be used for, for example, a process for determining which of the MAX bet button or the 1 bet button is operated, or may be used for another process.

  Next, an example of the second process to the fourth process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the case where the flag determination instruction is executed immediately after the flag change instruction in any of the second process to the fourth process is shown.

  First, referring to FIG. 180 (a), in the second process, the LDT instruction shown in (2-1) is a flag change instruction, and the JR instruction shown in (2-2) is a flag determination instruction. The LDT instruction (LDT A, (vHensu — 3)) stores the contents of the address indicated by the 16-bit address with the address stored in the T register as the upper byte and the value of vHensu — 3 (variable) as the lower byte. Instruction to store. In the initialization process of the main control unit 300, the upper byte of the head address of the RAM area (RWM area) is set in the T register, and a plurality of addresses in the RAM area can be referred to by changing the value of vHensu_3. By using the LDT instruction, as long as the initialization process of the T register is not known, the contents of the A register are not known, making it difficult for an unauthorized person to analyze. The main control unit that has received the LDT instruction can change the value of the SZ flag and does not change the value of the Z flag. The JR instruction indicated by (2-2) determines the value of the SZ flag changed immediately after the flag change instruction of (2-1), and jumps to | Address_40 only when the SZ flag is 1.

  Referring to FIG. 180 (b), in the third process, the LDT instruction shown in (3-1) is a flag change instruction, and the CALL instruction shown in (3-2) is a flag determination instruction. The main control unit that has received the LDT instruction in (3-1) can change the value of the SZ flag and does not change the value of the Z flag. The CALL instruction indicated by (3-2) determines the value of the SZ flag changed immediately after the flag change instruction of (2-1), and calls the subroutine moSyori_5 only when the SZ flag is 1.

  Referring to FIG. 180 (c), in the fourth process, the LDT instruction shown in (4-1) is a flag change instruction, and the RET instruction shown in (4-2) is a flag determination instruction. The main control unit that has received the LDT instruction in (4-1) can change the value of the SZ flag and does not change the value of the Z flag. The RET instruction indicated by (4-2) determines the value of the SZ flag changed immediately after the flag change instruction of (4-1), and returns to the caller only when the SZ flag is 1.

  The second process, the third process, and the fourth process are each performed by any process of the main control unit (for example, main process, interrupt process, initial setting process, initialization process, error determination process, (Random number update process, lottery process, command setting process, command output process, other modules, etc.).

  Further, the second to fourth processes described above may be processes X and / or Y in the first process.

  Further, the third operation may be executed twice or more between the first operation and the second operation.

  Further, the third operation may be executed three or more times between the first operation and the second operation.

  Also, the third operation is not performed between the first operation and the second operation, as compared with the case where the third operation is performed between the first operation and the second operation. There may be more cases.

  The third operation may jump to an address designated by the third instruction.

  Further, the second operation may be capable of determining any of the results of the plurality of first operations.

  The zero flag is at least turned on when the value of the register (r) indicated by the first instruction (for example, LD r, s instruction) is zero, and the zero flag is When the value of the register (r) indicated by one instruction is other than zero, it may be at least turned off.

  The zero flag is turned on at least when the value of the address indicated by the register (HL) indicated by the first instruction (for example, LD (HL), rr instruction) is zero. When the value of the address indicated by the register (HL) indicated by the first instruction is other than zero, it may be at least turned off.

  In the lottery process, the first operation and the second operation may be executable.

  In the operation reception process, the first operation and the second operation may be executable.

  Further, in the general-purpose processing that can be jumped by an RST instruction, the first operation and the second operation may be executed.

Hereinafter, a pachinko machine (game table) according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 5100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 5100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 5100 includes a later-described game board (board surface) 5102 that is visibly disposed behind a door member 5156 made of a transparent plate member 5152 made of glass or resin and a transparent member holding frame (glass frame) 5154. ing.

  Further, below the launcher 5138 and the launcher 5140, an operation handle 5148 for controlling the launcher 5138 and operating the launch intensity of the ball toward the game area 5104 is disposed, and a storage dish Below 5144, a lower plate 5150 is provided to store overflow balls that cannot be stored in the storage plate 5144.

  FIG. 182 is a schematic front view of the game board 5102 viewed from the front. In the game board 5102, an outer rail 5106 and an inner rail 5108 are provided, and a game area 5104 in which a game ball (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “ball”) can roll is formed.

  An effect device 5200 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5104. The effect device 5200 is provided with a horizontally-long decorative symbol display device 5110 substantially in the center, around which a normal symbol display device 5112, a special symbol display device 5114, a normal symbol hold lamp 5116, and a special symbol hold. A lamp 5118 and a high-probability medium lamp 5120 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 5200 performs an effect by operating a movable part, and details will be described later. The decorative symbol display device 5110 is a display device for displaying various images used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 5110 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). This decorative symbol display device 5110 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 5110a, a middle symbol display area 5110b, a right symbol display area 5110c, and an effect display area 5110d. The left symbol display area 5110c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 5110d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 5110a, 5110b, 5110c, and 5110d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 5110. The decorative symbol display device 5110 employs other display devices such as a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a drum display device, and a leaf display device instead of the liquid crystal display device. May be.

  The common map display device 5112 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure display device 5114 is a display device for displaying a special figure, and is constituted by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment.

  The general-purpose hold lamp 5116 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold. In this embodiment, it is possible to hold up to two general-purpose variable games. The special figure hold lamp 5118 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are on hold. In this embodiment, up to four special figure variable games can be held. The high probability lamp 5120 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state (a gaming state in which a winning probability of a big hit game described later is set higher than a normal probability) or a high probability state. Yes, when the game state is changed from a low probability state (a game state in which the winning probability of a big hit game described later is set to a normal probability) to a high probability state, and turned off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state .

  In addition, a general prize opening 5122, a general drawing start opening 5124, a first special figure start opening 5126, a second special figure start opening 5128, and a variable winning opening 5130 are provided around the effect device 5200. ing. In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 5122 are arranged on the game board 5102, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 5122 (in the general winning holes 5122). In the case of winning a prize), a payout device 552 described later is driven to discharge a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of balls to the storage tray 5144 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the storage tray 5144, and with these configurations, the player can pay out the prize balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 5122 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 5100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 5124 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area, and in this embodiment, on the left side of the game board 5102. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 5122, the ball that has passed through the normal start opening 5124 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the general-purpose start opening 5124, the pachinko machine 5100 starts a general-purpose variable game by the general-purpose display device 5112.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 5126 is disposed at the center of the game board 5102. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 5126, a payout device 552 described later is driven to store a predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of balls as prize balls. While discharging to the tray 5144, the special figure display game by the special figure display device 5114 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 5126 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 5100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 5128 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 5128 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 5126. The second special figure starting port 5128 has blades that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blades are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the normal figure display device 5112 is won. Is stopped and displayed, the blades open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 5128, a payout device 552 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (5 in this embodiment) of balls is described later as a prize ball. While discharging to the storage tray 5144, the special figure display game by the special figure display device 5114 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 5128 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 5100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 5130 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 5130 is arranged below the center of the game board 5102. This variable winning opening 5130 includes a door member that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device 5114 stops and displays the big hit symbol. In this case, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 5130, a payout device 552 described later is driven and a predetermined number (15 balls in this embodiment) of balls is discharged as a prize ball to the storage tray 5144. To do. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 5130 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 5100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 5132 and game nails 5134 called windmills are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 5108, An out port 5136 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 5100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 5100 supplies the ball stored in the storage tray 5144 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail 5142, drives the launch motor 602 with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle 5148, The launcher 5138 and the launcher 5140 are passed through the outer rail 5106 and the inner rail 5108 to launch into the game area 5104. Then, the ball that reaches the upper part of the game area 5104 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the hitting direction changing member 5132, the game nail 5134, etc. (First special figure starting port 5126, second special figure starting port 5128), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal drawing start port 5124, out port 5136 To reach.
<Director>

  Next, the rendering device 5200 of the pachinko machine 5100 will be described. A warp device 5230 and a stage are arranged on the front side of the effect device 5200, and a decorative symbol display device 5110 and a shielding means 5250 are arranged on the back side of the effect device 5200. That is, in the rendering device 5200, the decorative symbol display device 5110 and the shielding means 5250 are located behind the warp device 5230 and the stage.

  The warp device 5230 discharges the game ball that has entered the entrance 5232 provided at the upper left of the effect device 5200 to the front stage 5234 below the front surface of the effect device 5200, and the game ball discharged to the front stage 5234 is the front surface. When entering the second entrance 5236 provided at the back of the center of the stage 5234, the game ball is discharged from the exit 5238 provided at the lower center of the effect device 5200 above the first special figure starting port 5126. It is discharged toward the first special figure starting port 5126. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 5238 can easily enter the special figure start port 5126.

  The shielding means 5250 includes a grid-like left door 5250a and right door 5250b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 5110 and the front stage 5234. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 5250a and the right door 5250b, respectively. That is, the left door 5250a and the right door 5250b move to the left and right in accordance with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left and right doors 5250a and 5250b are closed, the shielding means 5250 overlaps the inner ends of the doors so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 5110. In the state where the left and right doors 5250a and 5250b are opened, the inner end portions thereof slightly overlap the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 5110, but the player can visually recognize all of the displays on the decorative symbol display device 5110. . In addition, the left and right doors 5250a and 5250b can be stopped at arbitrary positions. For example, only a part of the decorative design is shielded so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. You can do that. The left and right doors 5250a and 5250b may allow part of the decorative pattern display device 5110 behind the lattice hole to be visible, and the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body, The display by the symbol display device 5110 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice may be completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 5110 behind may be completely invisible. .

  FIG. 183 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 5100 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 5100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 5152 for temporarily storing the ball, and a ball tank 5152 that is positioned below the ball tank 5152 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 5152. A tank rail 5153 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 5154 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 5154 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a sprocket 5157 and a payout sensor 5158 inside thereof. The sprocket 5157 is configured to be rotatable by a motor, and temporarily retains a sphere that has passed through the tank rail 5153 and dropped into the dispensing device 5154, and is rotated by a predetermined angle by driving the motor. The balls that have stayed temporarily are sent one by one downward to the payout device 5154.

  The payout sensor 5158 is a sensor for detecting the passage of the sphere sent out by the sprocket 5157, and outputs an ON signal when the sphere is passing, and outputs an OFF signal when the sphere is not passing. To do. Note that the sphere that has passed through the payout sensor 5158 passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches a storage tray 5144 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 5100. The pachinko machine 5100 has this configuration. Pay out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the dispensing device 5154, a main board 5161 constituting a main control unit 5300 described later and a sub board 5164 constituting a sub control unit 5400 described later are arranged. Also, below the main board 5161 and the sub board 5164, a launch board 5166 that constitutes a launch control section 5600 described later, a power supply board 5162 that constitutes a power management section 5650 described later, and a payout control section 5550 described later. A payout board 5165 to be configured and a CR interface unit 5163 connected to the payout board 5165 are provided.
<Type of design>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (c), the special drawing display device 5114, the decorative symbol display device 5110, and the special drawing display device 5112 of the pachinko machine 5100 will be described with reference to the special drawing and the type of the common drawing. To do.

  FIG. 4A shows an example of a special display stop display mode. There are three types of special display stop display modes of the present embodiment: “Special Figure 1” which is a jackpot symbol, “Special Figure 2” which is a special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure 3” which is a missed symbol. . When the special figure variable game is started on the condition that a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 5126 or the second special figure start port 5128, the special figure display device 5114 Performs “variable display of special figure” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the special figure elapses, in order to notify the winning of the special figure variable game, “Special Figure 1” or “Special Figure 2” is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying the disconnection, “Special Figure 3” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  FIG. 2B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The left symbol display area 5110a of the decorative symbol display device 5110, the middle symbol, on condition that a predetermined ball detection sensor has detected that a ball has won the first special symbol start port 5126 or the second special diagram start port 5128 In each of the symbol display areas of the display area 5110b and the right symbol display area 5110c, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” → Perform “decorative symbol variation display” to switch the display in the order. When notifying the jackpot, a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot in the symbol display areas 5110a to 5110c (in this embodiment, a combination of decorative symbols having the same number (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”). )) Is stopped and the special jackpot is notified, a combination of symbols corresponding to the special jackpot (in this embodiment, a combination of decorative symbols having the same odd number numbers (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”). 1 ”)) is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed, the big hit game or the special big hit game is started, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the special big hit is stopped and displayed, the special big hit game is started. In the case of notifying a detachment, if there is a variation display of a decorative symbol that is on hold after the symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5110a to 5110c, the variation display is performed. To start.

FIG. 2C shows an example of a normal stop display mode. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of the normal figure, “general figure 1” which is a winning symbol and “general figure 2” which is a missed symbol. In the case where a general-purpose display game is started on the condition that a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general-purpose start opening 5124, the general-purpose display device 5112 displays that all seven segments are turned on. Then, the “variable display of the usual map” is performed by repeatedly turning on one central segment. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “general figure 1” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game being lost, the “normal figure 2” is stopped and displayed.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 5100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 5100 can be broadly classified according to a main control unit 5300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 5300. A sub-control unit 5400 that controls the production, a payout control unit 5550 that mainly performs control related to payout of the game ball in response to a command transmitted by the main control unit 5300, and a launch control unit 5600 that controls the launch of the game ball. And a power management unit 5650 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 5100.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 5300 of the pachinko machine 5100 will be described. The main control unit 5300 includes a basic circuit 5302 that controls the entire main control unit 5300. The basic circuit 5302 includes a CPU 5304, a ROM 5306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. RAM 5308 for storing data, I / O 5310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 5312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 5313 are mounted. Note that other storage means may be used for the ROM 5306 and the RAM 5308, and this is the same for the sub-control unit 5400 described later. The CPU 5304 of the basic circuit 5302 is a system clock obtained by dividing the external clock output from the crystal oscillator 5314b by a clock circuit 5340 (see FIG. 186, details will be described later) at a predetermined frequency division ratio (1/2 in this example). It operates by inputting SCLK as a basic clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 5302 includes a counter circuit (random number circuit) 5316 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time the random number clock RCK output from the crystal oscillator 5314a is received. It is installed (details will be described later).

  The basic circuit 5302 receives signals output from various sensors 5318 including a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and results of amplification and comparison with a reference voltage. Sensor circuit 5320 for outputting to the basic circuit 5302, a display circuit 5322 for performing display control of the special figure display device 5114, a display circuit 5324 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 5112, and various states A display circuit 5328 for performing display control of a display unit 5326 (a normal figure holding lamp 5116, a special figure holding lamp 5118, a high accuracy medium lamp 5118, etc.), a second special figure starting port 5128, a variable winning port 5130, etc. are opened and closed. A solenoid circuit 5332 for controlling various solenoids 5330 to be driven and a start signal (reset) to the CPU 5304 when the power is turned on. Connecting the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 5338 for outputting the door signal).

  When the ball detection sensor 5318 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 5126, the sensor circuit 5320 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 5316. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 5316 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 5126 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 5126. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 5316 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 5128 has won a ball, the counter circuit 5316 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 5128 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 5128. Similarly, when the counter circuit 5316 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won a prize at the general start port 5124, the counter circuit 5316 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the general start port 5124, and the latched value. Is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 5124.

  Further, an information output circuit 5334 is connected to the basic circuit 5302, and the main control unit 5300 pachinkos to an information input circuit 5562 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 5334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 5100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 5300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the sub control unit 5400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 5550. With this configuration, the sub control unit 5400 is provided. Communication with the payout control unit 5550 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 5300, the sub control unit 5400, and the payout control unit 550 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 5300 can transmit signals such as commands to the sub control unit 5400 and the payout control unit 5550. However, the sub-control unit 5400 and the payout control unit 5550 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 5300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the sub control unit 5400 of the pachinko machine 5100 will be described. The sub-control unit 5400 includes a basic circuit 5402 that controls the entire sub-control unit 5400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 5300. The basic circuit 5402 includes a CPU 5404, a control program, ROM 5406 for storing various data, RAM 5408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 5410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and counter timer 5412 for measuring time and frequency It is installed. The CPU 5404 of the basic circuit 5402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 5414 as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 5402 drives a sound source IC 5418 for controlling the speaker 5416 (and an amplifier), a display circuit 5422 for controlling various lamps 5420, and a movable body for rendering of the rendering device 5200. An effect driving device control circuit 5426 for controlling various effect driving devices 5424 including a solenoid or a motor as a driving device, and a decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 5110 and a shielding means 5250 are controlled. The sub-control unit 5500 is connected to a chance button detection circuit 5380 that detects the pressing of the chance button 5146 and outputs a signal.

  <Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 5550, the launch control unit 5600, and the power management unit 5650 of the pachinko machine 5100 will be described. The payout control unit 5550 controls the payout device 5552 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 5300, and the payout of the winning ball or the rental ball is completed based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 5554. It is detected whether or not the card unit 5654 is provided separately from the pachinko machine 5100 through the interface unit 5556.

  The launch control unit 5600 outputs the control signal output from the payout control unit 5550 to permit or stop the launch, and the operation amount of the launch handle 5148 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the operation handle 5148. Based on the control signal instructing the corresponding launch intensity, the launch motor 5602 that drives the launcher 5138 and the launcher 5140 is controlled, and the ball feeder 5604 that supplies the balls from the storage tray 5144 to the launch rail 5142 is controlled. .

The power management unit 5650 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 5100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 5300 and the sub control unit 5400, and each device such as the dispensing device 5552. To supply. Further, the power management unit 5650 is a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 5308 of the main control unit 5300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. Capacitor).
<Basic circuit of main control unit>

  Next, the basic circuit 5302 of the main control unit 5300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows the internal configuration of the basic circuit.

  The basic circuit 5302 includes the above-described CPU 5304, ROM (built-in ROM) 5306, RAM (built-in RAM) 5308, counter timer 5312 (timer circuit 5312a, counter circuit 5312b), counter circuit (random number circuit) 5316, I / O 5310 (external bus). In addition to the control circuit 5310a, the reset control circuit 5310b built in the WDT 5313, the parallel input port 5310c, and the address decoding circuit 5310d), a clock circuit 5340 and the like are provided.

  The clock circuit 5340 divides the external clock EX (24 MHz clock in this example) input from the above-described crystal oscillator 5314b (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the system crystal oscillator 5314b) via the EX terminal by a predetermined frequency division. This circuit divides the signal by a ratio (1/2 in this example) and supplies the divided system clock SCLK (12 MHz clock in this example) to the CPU core and internal circuits. The random number circuit 5316, which will be described in detail later, is a random number clock RCK (in this example, 10 MHz) that is input via the RCK terminal from the above-described crystal oscillator 5314a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a random number crystal oscillator 5314a). This is a circuit for generating a random value by counting a count value based on a clock. In the present embodiment, the frequency of the random number clock RCK is less than the frequency of the system clock SCLK (in this example, 12 MHz), and is set in the counter / timer 5312 as a period of main control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later. The frequency is set to a period (2 ms in this example) or more.

  FIG. 187 is a circuit block diagram showing an example of wiring patterns of the random number crystal oscillator 5314a and the system crystal oscillator 5314b connected to the basic circuit 5302.

  In this embodiment, the length of the signal line Ls connecting the basic circuit 5302 and the system crystal oscillator 5314b is set shorter than the length of the signal line Lr connecting the basic circuit 5302 and the random number crystal oscillator 5314a (Lr>). Ls). With this configuration, the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be disposed in the vicinity of the basic circuit 5302, and the length of the signal line Ls connecting the basic circuit 5302 and the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be shortened. The external clock EX signal output from the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be stably supplied to the clock circuit 5340 of the basic circuit 5302, and the system clock SCLK generated based on the external clock EX signal. These signals can also be stably supplied to the CPU core and internal circuits.

  In general, the length of the signal line connecting the supply source and the supply destination of the clock signal is set as short as possible so that no disturbance is applied to the clock signal. However, the basic circuit 5302 and the crystal oscillator for random number 5314a are provided. The length of the signal line Lr to be connected is set to be long and the signal of the random number clock RCK passing through the signal line Lr is configured to be easily affected by the disturbance, so that the count value is based on the signal of the random number clock RCK. The random number circuit 5316 that counts the random number circuit 5316 can vary in update timing, and the randomness of the random number value generated by the random number circuit 5316 can be further enhanced.

Further, by making the length of the signal line Ls connecting the basic circuit 5302 and the system crystal oscillator 5314b different from the length of the signal line Lr connecting the basic circuit 5302 and the random number crystal oscillator 5314a, the components in the vicinity of the basic circuit 5302 can be obtained. The degree of freedom of arrangement can be increased.
<Random number circuit>

  Next, the random number circuit (counter circuit) 5316 included in the basic circuit 5302 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. 188 is an internal configuration diagram of the random number circuit, and FIG. 189 is an internal configuration diagram of the frequency monitoring circuit included in the random number circuit.

  The random number circuit 5316 includes four random number circuits, which are random number circuits CH1 to CH4. Since the internal configuration of the random number circuits CH2 to CH4 is the same as that of the random number circuit CH1, the illustration is omitted.

  The random number circuits CH1 to CH4 include a random number register 5316b for storing the random number value fetched by the random number update circuit 5316g, a random number latch flag register 5316c for indicating that the random number value is fetched by the random number register 5316b, Random number interrupt control register 5316d for controlling an interrupt and random number update circuit 5316g monitor whether or not the random number value is normally updated, and outputs a random value abnormal signal when the update is abnormal The monitoring circuit 5316e and an internal information register 5316f that sets a random value abnormal signal state bit to 1 when a random value abnormal signal is input from the random number monitoring circuit 5316e are configured. Note that the random number monitoring circuit 5316e may be incorporated in the random number update circuit 5316g, or may be provided in common in the random number circuits CH1 to CH4 (when provided in common, a flag is set so that CH1 to CH4 can be identified). It may be provided, or a flag may be provided in common).

  The random number circuit 5316 can generate two types of 16-bit random numbers having different random number sequences for each channel, and use random number setting, random number initial setting, random number collection provided in a predetermined area of the ROM 5306. By changing the contents of the setting, the use / non-use of the random number circuits CH1 to CH4, the selection of the initial value / random number sequence changing method, the update period of the random value, the method of acquiring the random value, the interrupt condition, etc. are changed. It is possible. In this embodiment, the P0 terminal is a special figure 1 start opening detection signal that is output when a ball enters the first special figure start opening 5126, and the P1 terminal has a ball entering the second special figure start opening 5128. The special figure 2 entrance opening detection signal that is output when there is, and the P2 terminal receives the normal start entrance detection signal that is output when there is an entrance to the general start opening 5124. Is connected to the sensor circuit 5320, but is not limited thereto.

  The random number circuits CH1 to CH4 include a frequency monitoring circuit 5316a. As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 189, the frequency monitoring circuit 5316a receives a smoothing circuit to which the system clock SCLK output from the clock circuit 5340 is input, and is input from the crystal oscillator 5314a through the RCK terminal. The smoothing circuit to which the random number clock RCK is input is compared with the frequency of the smoothed system clock SCLK and the frequency of the random number clock RCK, and the frequency of RCK is equal to or lower than the frequency of the system clock SCLK (RCK = <SCLK). A comparator that determines that the frequency of the random number clock RCK has become abnormal and sets the clock signal status bit of the internal information register to 1.

  The CPU 5304 of the main control unit 5300 refers to the random value abnormal signal status bit and the clock signal status bit of the internal information register at a predetermined timing. When the random value abnormal signal state bit is set to 1 (when there is an abnormality in updating the random value in the random number update circuit 5316g), it is determined that some abnormality has occurred in the random number update circuit 5316g, When the random value abnormal signal state bit is set to 0, it is determined that the random number update circuit 5316g is normal.

  Further, when the clock signal status bit of the internal information register is set to 1 (when the frequency of the random number clock RCK is equal to or lower than the frequency of the system clock SCLK (RCK = <SCLK)), the random number clock RCK When it is determined that some abnormality (for example, disconnection of the wiring pattern connecting the random number circuit 5316 and the crystal oscillator 5314a) has occurred, and the clock signal status bit of the internal information register is set to 0 (the frequency of the random number clock RCK) Is larger than the frequency of the system clock SCLK (when RCK> SCLK), it is determined that the random number clock RCK is normal.

In this embodiment, when the frequency of the random number clock RCK is equal to or lower than the frequency of the system clock SCLK (RCK = <SCLK), it is determined that the random number clock RCK is abnormal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, a plurality of types of threshold values for determining an abnormality may be provided, and one threshold value may be selected from the plurality of types of threshold values. Further, the frequency of the system clock SCLK and the frequency of the random number clock RCK are not limited to the numerical values shown in the present embodiment. For example, an abnormality determination method such as RCK = <2 × SCLK, RCK = <1/2 × SCLK, or the like may be set based on predetermined information (for example, information stored in the ROM). Ideally, it is desirable to make an abnormality when the 10 MHz random number clock RCK has a frequency of 3 MHz or less (1/4 or less of the system clock) with respect to the 12 MHz system clock SCLK.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 5304 of the main control unit 5300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 5300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 5338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 5304 of the basic circuit 5302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes processing according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 5306.

  In step S6101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 5304, the interrupt mask is set, the initial setting of the I / O port 5310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 5308, and the operation permission to the WDT 5313 is permitted. Set initial values. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 5313 as an initial value.

  In step S6102, the value of the WDT 5313 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 5313 is restarted.

  In step S6103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power source that the voltage monitoring circuit 5336 supplies from the power source management unit 5650 to the main control unit 5300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment). When the voltage is less than 9V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 5304 has detected that the power has been cut off), the process returns to step S6102. If the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 5304 has not detected that the power has been cut off), the step returns. The process proceeds to S6104.

  In step S6104, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 5312, a predetermined port of the I / O 5310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 5400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 5308, and the like are performed.

  In step S6105, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 5302 of the main controller 5300 is set to the initial state). ), The process proceeds to step S6107. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend (information indicating that power interruption processing has been performed)”, the process advances to step S6108.

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the operation unit provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicating that there is an operation), that is, It is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S6107 to set the basic circuit 5302 to an initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 5308 is read, and whether the power status information is information indicating suspend. Determine whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process advances to step S6107 to set the basic circuit 5302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 5308 is displayed. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S6106 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process advances to step S6107 to set the pachinko machine 5100 to an initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process advances to step S 6107.

  In step S6106, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 5308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer. In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 5308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 5304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 5100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in steps S6108 and S6109) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption.

  In step S6107, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 5308, and the like are performed.

  In step S6108, after setting for prohibition of interruption, basic random number update processing is performed. In this basic random number update process, two random number counters for generating a normal figure timer random value and a special figure timer random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal timer random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal timer random number value provided in the RAM 5308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other random number counters are similarly updated. Further, after this basic random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set, and the process advances to step S6109.

  In step S6109, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 5300 is updated.

The main control unit 5300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S6108 and S6109 except during the timer interrupt process starting at predetermined intervals.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 5304 of the main control unit 5300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 5300 includes a counter / timer 5312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start with a predetermined period.

  In step S6201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 5304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S6202, the count value of the WDT 5313 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment), so that a WDT interrupt is not generated (a process abnormality is not detected), and the WDT is periodically performed (this implementation is performed). In the example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S6203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, an open sensor for detecting whether the above-mentioned glass frame 5154 is in an open state or a closed state via the input port of the I / O 5310, the above-described lower plate 5150 is provided. The detection signal of various sensors 5318 including a bottom plate full sensor for detecting whether or not the ball is full and a plurality of ball detection sensors are input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal. The signal state is stored in a signal state storage area. In this embodiment, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process of the last time (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 5308 for each previous sphere detection sensor. This information is read from the area, and this information is stored in the RAM 5308 in the detection signal storage area provided in advance for each sphere detection sensor, and detected by the previous timer interrupt process (approximately 2 ms before). Information on the presence or absence of a signal is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 5308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S6204 and step S6205, a jackpot type random number update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these jackpot type random number update processing and basic random number update processing, the jackpot type random number used in the main control unit 5300 is updated next. The updating method is the same as that in steps S6108 and S6109 described above.

  In step S6206, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 5300 is updated.

  In step S6207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for symbol change / stop display on the normal symbol display device 5112 and a special symbol display device 5114 for clocking time for symbol variation / stop display. Various timers including a special figure display symbol update timer, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S6208, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when there is a winning (winning) in the winning opening (general winning opening 5122, first and second special figure starting openings 5126, 5128 and variable winning opening 5130), The value of the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening is read, and 1 is added to set the original winning ball number storage area. Note that even if the random number clock RCK is abnormal, there is no reason to limit the increase in the number of winning ball payouts for winning. Therefore, even when the random number clock RCK is abnormal as in step S6209 described later, special processing is performed. However, a predetermined process such as not adding the number of prize balls may be performed when there is an abnormality in the random number clock RCK in a punitive sense for an unauthorized person. In the next step S6209, a winning acceptance process is performed (details will be described later). In step S6210, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 550 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), and power supply in bit 6 Input information (when ON, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate the number of payout requests after processing I am doing so.

  In step S6211, the normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in a general diagram state update process during a normal map change (a general-purpose general-purpose timer value to be described later is 1 or more), on / off drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the general map display device 5112 is performed. Do.

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, When the 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 5112 is turned on / off so as to be in the first mode, and the hit flag is off, the normal diagram is displayed as in the above-described normal mode 2 The 7 segment LED constituting the device 5112 is controlled to be turned on / off, and then stored in a routine stop time management timer provided in the RAM 5308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). Information indicating the stop period is set in the area. With this setting, the usual figure is stopped and the result of the usual figure variable game is notified to the player.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the predetermined state is displayed. During the opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a signal for holding the blade member in an open state is output to the solenoid 5330 for opening / closing the blade member of the second special figure starting port 5128, and the blade opening time management provided in the RAM 5308 Information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the timer.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 5330, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 5308.

  In the normal state update process that starts at the timing when a predetermined closing period has elapsed (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the normal state is set to inactive. In the normal state update process when the normal state is inactive, the process proceeds to the next step S6212 without doing anything.

  In step S6212, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 5128 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the pending general map variable game When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. If the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 5308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time for displaying the variable map on the general map display device 5112 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 5308 as the normal map variable display time. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the common figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 5308. Each time a hit determination is made, the number of pending custom figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S6213, special figure state update processing is performed (details will be described later). In step S6214, special drawing related lottery processing is performed. In this special drawing-related lottery process, the opening / closing control of the special drawing variable game and the variable prize opening 5130 is not performed (the state of the special drawing is inactive), and the number of the special drawing variable games held is 1 In the case described above, the jackpot determination is first performed among various lotteries using the jackpot determination table, the high probability state transition determination table, the timer number determination table, and the like. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure winning random number value stored in the random value storage area in step S6203 is within the numerical range of the lottery data for the first special figure starting port in the jackpot determination table. When the random number value is within the numerical range of the lottery data for the first special figure start opening, information indicating that the special figure variable game is won and the big hit flag storage area provided in the RAM 5308 is a big hit is set. (Here, setting the jackpot information in the RAM 5308 is setting the jackpot flag to ON). On the other hand, when the special figure winning random number value is outside the numerical range of the first special figure starting port lottery data, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of the game, and the big hit flag storage area provided in the RAM 5308 is out. (In this case, setting outlier information in the RAM 5308 is setting the jackpot flag off). Note that the number of special figure variable games that are on hold is stored in a special figure variable number storage area provided in the RAM 5308. Each time a hit determination is made, the number of special figure variable games that are held is determined. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this special figure reservation number storage area. In addition, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  If the big hit flag is set to ON, the probability variation transition determination is performed next. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type random number is in the numerical range of the transition determination random number, and if the special figure random number value is in the numerical range of the lottery data, the probability variation (probability variation) provided in the RAM 5308 is determined. ) Information indicating that a special jackpot game is started is set in the flag storage area. (Here, setting the special big hit game start information in the RAM 5308 is referred to as setting the probability variation flag to ON). On the other hand, when the jackpot type random number is outside the numerical range of the lottery data, information indicating that the jackpot game is started is set in the storage area of the probability variation flag (here, the information on the start of the jackpot game is set). Setting the RAM 5308 is referred to as setting the probability variation flag to OFF).

  Regardless of the result of the big hit determination, the process for determining the timer number is performed next. Specifically, the value of the random counter for generating the special figure timer random value described above is acquired as the special figure timer random value. A timer number corresponding to the value of the jackpot flag and the timer random number range including the acquired special figure timer random number value is selected and stored in a predetermined timer number storage area provided in the RAM 5308. Further, the fluctuation time corresponding to the timer number is stored as the special figure fluctuation display time in the special figure display symbol update timer described above, and the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S6215). For this reason, 01H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  In step S6215, command setting transmission processing is performed. The output schedule information (command) transmitted to the sub control unit 5400 and the payout control unit 550 is composed of 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (basic command for 00H, symbol change start command for 01H, symbol change stop command for 04H, winning effect start command for 05H, and end effect start command for 06H. In the case of 07H, a command for specifying the number of rounds of big hits, in the case of 0EH, a power recovery command, in the case of 0FH, a RAM clear command, and in the case of 10H, a random clock error command is indicated. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by command transmission processing. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, etc. If it is a case, it includes the value of the jackpot flag, the probability variation flag, etc. If it is a winning effect command and an end effect start command, it includes the value of the probability variation flag, etc. If it is a jackpot round number designation command The value of the probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the first special figure starting port 5126, presence / absence of winning in the second special figure starting port 5128, winning in the variable winning port 5130 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command type is 01H, the jackpot flag value stored in the RAM 5308 as the command data, the probability variation flag value, the timer number selected in the special drawing related lottery process, and the suspension. Information indicating the number of special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 5308 is set as the command type and 04H as the command type. In the above-described general command winning effect setting transmission process, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 5110, various lamps 5420, and the speaker 5416 during the winning effect period stored in the RAM 5308 as the command type is 05H, and the probability change is performed. Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of special figure variable games that are held, and the like are set. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 5110, various lamps 5420, and the speaker 5416 during the effect waiting period stored in the RAM 5308 as the command type is 06H, and the probability change is performed. Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of special figure variable games that are held, and the like are set. In the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process described above, the information indicating the command type is 07H, the command data is the number of big hits stored in the RAM 5308, the value of the probability variation flag, the number of the special figure variable games held, etc. Set. In the above-mentioned general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the command type is 08H, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 5308 as the command data, the value of the probability variation flag, the number of the special figure variable games held, etc. Set. In the sub-control unit 5400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 5300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command data included in the output schedule information Based on this information, the contents of the effect control can be determined.

  In step S6216, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 5308 is output to the information input circuit 5652 separate from the pachinko machine 5100 via the information output circuit 5334.

  In step S6217, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S6203 are read to monitor the presence / absence of a glass frame open error or a bottom pan full error, and the like. When a full tank error is detected, device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 5400. Further, various solenoids 5330 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 5128 and the variable prize opening 5130, and the general diagram display device 5112 and the special figure display device 5114 via the display circuits 5322, 5324, and 5328. The display data to be output to the various status display units 5326 and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 5310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S6210) is output to the sub-control unit 5400 via the output port 5310.

  In step S6218, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S6220. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S6219.

  In step S6219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S6201 is set in each original register, or interrupt permission is set.

In step S6220, the voltage monitoring circuit that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 5650 to the main control unit 5300 outputs a voltage decrease signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage value is equal to or lower than a predetermined value. Whether or not a power-off is detected. If a power-off is detected, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is displayed. The return data is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 5308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. In addition, the power status is set to “suspend”.
<Prize acceptance process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the winning acceptance process in the main control unit timer interrupt process described above will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the winning acceptance process.

  In steps S6301 to S6303, the first special figure start port detection signal storage area, the previous first special figure start port detection signal storage area, and the current first special figure start port detection signal storage area are stored in the respective storage areas. The information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of the first special figure starting mouth ball detection sensor is compared, and the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first special figure starting mouth ball detection sensor matches the predetermined winning pattern information. It is determined whether or not. In the first special figure starting mouth ball detection sensor, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, the first special figure starting mouth detection signal is turned on previously, When the first special figure starting port detection signal coincides with the information indicating that the first special figure starting port detection signal is off the previous time), it is determined that the first special figure starting port 5126 has entered the ball. To do. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first special figure start opening ball detection sensor, the first special figure start opening 5126 has been entered. After determining and performing the process associated with entering the first special figure starting port 5126, if the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, The process is terminated without performing the process associated with entering the first special figure starting port 5126.

  In step S6304, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock by referring to the clock signal status bit of the internal information register described above. If there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock, the process proceeds to step S6306 without executing the process of step S6305. If there is no abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock, the process proceeds to step S6305.

  In step S 6305, a random number is acquired from the counter circuit (random number circuit) 5316. More specifically, when there is a prize at the first special figure start opening 5126 and the number of special figure variable games held is less than 4, the counter corresponding to the first special figure start opening 5126 is displayed. A value extracted from the random value register of the circuit 5316 is acquired as a special figure winning random value, or a value obtained by performing “predetermined processing” on the extracted value is acquired as a special figure winning random value. Further, the value extracted from the random number counter for generating the special figure random value described above is acquired as the special figure random number value, or the value obtained by performing “predetermined processing” on the extracted value is acquired as the special figure random number value. A special figure winning random number value is stored in a random value storage area provided.

  In steps S6306 to S6308, the second special figure start port detection signal storage area, the previous second special figure start opening detection signal storage area, and the current second special figure start opening detection signal storage area are stored in the respective storage areas. The information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of the second special figure starting ball detecting sensor is compared, and the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the second special figure starting ball detecting sensor coincides with the predetermined winning pattern information. It is determined whether or not. The information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the second special figure starting mouth ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, the second special figure starting mouth detection signal is turned on previously, When the second special figure start port detection signal coincides with the information indicating that the second special figure start port detection signal has been turned off two times before, it is determined that the second special figure start port 5130 has entered the ball. To do. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the above-described winning determination pattern information in the second special figure start opening ball detection sensor, the second special figure start opening 5128 has entered the ball. After determining and performing processing associated with entering the second special figure starting port 5128 after that, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, The process is terminated without performing the process associated with entering the second special figure starting port 5128.

  In step S6309, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock by referring to the clock signal status bit of the internal information register. If there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock, the process proceeds to step S6311 without executing the process of step S6310. If there is no abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock, the process proceeds to step S6310.

  In step S6310, a random number is acquired from the counter circuit (random number circuit) 5316. More specifically, if there is a prize at the second special figure start opening 5128 and the number of special figure variable games held is less than 4, the counter corresponding to the second special figure start opening 5128 is displayed. A value extracted from the random value register of the circuit 5316 is acquired as a special figure winning random value, or a value obtained by performing “predetermined processing” on the extracted value is acquired as a special figure winning random value. Further, the value extracted from the random number counter for generating the special figure random value described above is acquired as the special figure random number value, or the value obtained by performing “predetermined processing” on the extracted value is acquired as the special figure random number value. A special figure winning random number value is stored in a random value storage area provided.

  In step S6311 to step S6313, the general-purpose start-up ball detection stored in the respective memory areas of the previous-time general-purpose start-port detection signal storage area, the previous-time general-purpose start-port detection signal storage area, and the current-day general-purpose start-port detection signal storage area. The information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of the sensor is compared, and it is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the normal start ball detection sensor matches the predetermined winning pattern information. The information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general-purpose start-mouth detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, the current general-purpose start-point detection signal is on, When the detection signal coincides with the information indicating that the usual-time start opening detection signal is off the previous time), it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal start opening 5124. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-described winning determination pattern information in the normal-use start mouth detection sensor, it is determined that the sphere of the normal-use start opening 5124 has passed, and thereafter When the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general figure start opening 5124 is processed. The process is terminated without performing the process associated with the passage of the ball.

  In step S6314, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock by referring to the clock signal status bit of the internal information register. If there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock, the process ends without executing the process of step S6315. If there is no abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock, the process proceeds to step S6315.

  In step S6315, a random number is acquired from the counter circuit (random number circuit) 5316. More specifically, if there is a win at the general-purpose start opening 5124 and the number of the variable-type variable games held is less than two, the counter circuit 5316 corresponding to the general-purpose start opening 5124 is disturbed. The value is acquired from the numeric register as a random number value for normal winning. Further, a value is acquired from the above-described random number counter for generating a normal random number value as a normal random number value, and stored in a random value storage area provided in the RAM 5308 together with the normal winning random number value.

In this embodiment, the CPU 5304 does not disturb the counter circuit 5316 unless the input to various start port detection signals is turned on → on and a period of at least one interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) has passed. The numeric register value is not latched. On the other hand, in the random value register, the latch signal when various start port detection signals are input does not latch unless an on-level signal corresponding to four cycles of the random number clock RCK is passed. In this embodiment, since the random number clock RCK is 10 MHz, the latching is completed when the maximum is less than 0.4 μs + 0.1 μs = 0.5 μs. That is, the latch by the various start port detection signals is surely completed before the value is obtained from the random value register in step S6305 and the like.
It is configured.
<Special status update process>

  Next, referring to FIG. 193, the special figure state update process in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of special figure state update processing.

  In step S6401, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock by referring to the clock signal status bit of the internal information register. If there is an abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock, the process proceeds to step S6410 without executing the processing of steps S6402 to S6409. If there is no abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock, the process proceeds to step S6402.

  In step S6402, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S6403, and if not, the process proceeds to step S6406. In step S6403, it is determined whether or not the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device 5112 was previously turned off. If the previous time is off, the process proceeds to step S6405 and the 7-segment LED is turned on. In this case, the process proceeds to step S6404 and the 7-segment LED is turned off. As a result, lighting / extinguishing drive control for repeatedly turning on and off the 7-segment LED is performed.

  In step S6406, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure fluctuation stop. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S6407, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S6407, the special figure is stopped and displayed according to the information of the big hit flag. Specifically, when the big hit flag is on and the probability change flag is off, the special figure display device 5114 is displayed. When the big hit flag is on and the probability change flag is on, the special figure display device 5114 is displayed. When the above-mentioned special figure 2 and the big hit flag are off, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device 5112 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in the above-described special figure 3 mode.

  In step 408, a stop display period is set. Specifically, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a special figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 5308 for maintaining a special figure display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the special figure is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special figure variable game is notified to the player.

  In step S6409, after setting the output of the stop command, the process ends. Specifically, 02H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command rotation stop setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S6215 above).

  Although not shown, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the value of the special figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the big hit flag is on. In this case, a special figure standby provided in the RAM 5308 for waiting for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for informing the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 5110 is started is displayed. Information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the time management timer. Also, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the special figure standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds or A signal for holding the door member in an open state is output to the solenoid 5330 for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 5130 (until a winning of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable prize opening 5130). At the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 5308. In the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) is variable. A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoid 5330 for opening and closing the door member of the winning opening 5130, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 5308. To do. Further, in the special figure state update process which is repeated at predetermined timings (for example, 15 rounds) and this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, by the decorative symbol display device 5110 Information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 5308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player of the end of the big hit is displayed. Further, in the special figure state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure state is set to inactive. .

In step S6410, the big hit flag is set to off (lost), and in step S6411, the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped. In the next step S6412, 10H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the transmission information storage area in order to execute the stop setting transmission process due to the random number clock abnormality in the command setting transmission process (step S6215). To finish the process. If there is an abnormality in the random number clock RCK, the special figure or / and usual figure display may be deleted.
<Payment control unit main process>

  Next, the payout control unit main process executed by the payout control unit 5550 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the payout control unit.

  The payout control unit 5550 is provided with a reset signal output circuit that outputs a reset signal when the power is turned on. The CPU of the payout control unit 5400 to which this reset signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM.

  In step S6501, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU.

  In step S6502, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power source that the voltage monitoring circuit supplies to the payout control unit 5550 from the power management unit 5650 is a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). ), It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), step S6502 is repeated. If the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), step S6502 is performed. The process proceeds to S6503.

  In step S6503, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, processing for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, in the counter timer, setting for permitting writing to the RAM, initial setting of the I / O port Make settings.

  In step S6504, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption). If the state before power interruption does not return (when the pachinko machine 5100 is set to the initial state), step S6506 is performed. If the process returns to the state before the power interruption, the process proceeds to step S6505.

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the operation unit provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicating that there is an operation), that is, It is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process advances to step S6506 to set the pachinko machine 5100 to an initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM is read, and whether the power status information is information indicating suspend. Determine whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S6506 to set the pachinko machine 5100 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM is stored. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is 0 (if the checksum result is normal), the process advances to step S6505 to return to the state before the power interruption. If the checksum result is other than 0 (checksum) If the result is abnormal), the process advances to step S6506 to set the pachinko machine 5100 to an initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process advances to step S6506.

  In step S6505, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, initialization of the RAM storage area to be cleared upon power recovery (the command buffer for storing commands, the storage area excluding error status for storing error status, etc.) is initialized. Etc.

  In step S6506, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM, and the like are performed.

  In step S6507, initial setting 3 is performed. In the initial setting 3, information other than the illegal payout error and the payout excess error among the error statuses stored in the error status storage area provided in the RAM is cleared, interrupt permission is set, and the like.

  In step S6508, it is determined whether or not there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main control unit 5300. If there is unanalyzed data, command analysis processing is performed in step S6509, and there is no unanalyzed data. Then, the process proceeds to step S6510.

  In step S6510, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. If the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S6508, and the low voltage signal is on. In the case of detecting a power shutdown, the process proceeds to step S6511.

  In step S6511, a power interruption process is performed. In the power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Further, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0 and stored in a checksum calculation numerical storage area. The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-mentioned numerical storage area for checksum calculation, and written to the RAM. Perform prohibited settings.

In step S6512, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. When the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S6512 is repeatedly executed to turn off the low voltage signal. When the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S6501, and the payout control unit reset interrupt process is started from the beginning.
<Discharge control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a payout control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the payout control unit 5550 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  The payout control unit 5550 includes a counter / timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). With this timer interrupt, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle. Start.

  In step S6601, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU to the stack area is performed. In step S6602, port input management processing is performed. In this port input management process, the value of the I / O port is acquired and the state of various sensors is detected.

  In step S6603, timer update management processing is performed. In this timer update management process, various timers including timers for measuring the lighting / extinguishing time of the payout notification LED, motor driving / non-driving time, and the like are updated.

  In step S6604, error management processing is performed. In this error management process, it is determined whether or not a random number clock abnormality command is received from the main control unit 5300, and if applicable, information indicating random number clock abnormality is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. Also, a dish full signal input to the I / O port is detected to determine whether or not the dish full signal is on. When the dish full signal is on (when the lower plate 5150 is full of balls) ) Stores information indicating the dish full error in the error status storage area provided in the RAM, and when the dish full signal is OFF (when there is a free space for storing balls in the lower plate 5150), the error status Information indicating the release of the dish full error is stored in the storage area. Further, it is detected whether the communication line between the main control unit 5300 and the payout control unit 5550 is communicable due to disconnection or the like, and if communication is possible, it is possible to communicate with the error status storage area provided in the RAM. In addition, information indicating that communication is impossible is stored when communication is impossible. In the error management process, an error release switch signal input to the I / O port is detected to determine whether the error release signal is on. If the error release signal is on, an error status is stored. The information indicating the random number clock abnormality, the illegal payout error information, or the payout excess error information stored in the area is initialized, and these errors are canceled.

  Note that, regarding information indicating random clock anomaly, unlike other errors, the error may not be canceled even when an error cancellation switch signal is detected. Because, in the case of random clock anomaly, the special figure that is held when the error is restored is changed, and the reliability of the random number for the special figure lottery is very low. This is because there is a case where it is not desired to play a game. Also, “There are multiple abnormal states, the first type of abnormal state is provided so that the abnormal state can be canceled by an abnormal release input, and the second type of abnormal state is provided so that the abnormal state cannot be canceled by an abnormal release input. "The second type of abnormal state includes at least the abnormal state of the random number clock" can be applied to other control units and slot machines. In this case, “the second type of abnormal state may be stored in the second type of abnormal state by backup even when the power is turned off”, and further, “the second type of abnormal state is stored. "Can be released by initializing a plurality of stored information including the second type of abnormal state", and may further include "a plurality of stored information related to the interests of the player" Furthermore, “the information related to the player's profit may be information determined by lottery based on a random number generated based on a random number clock”. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the abnormality of the random number clock, and when there is an abnormality in the random number clock, it is possible to reliably clear the profits drawn based on the random number clock. Can be prevented from suffering disadvantages.

  In step S6605, CR unit communication management processing is performed. In this CR unit communication management process, it is determined whether or not information indicating random number clock abnormality is stored in the error status storage area described above, and if information indicating random number clock abnormality is stored, Avoid lending. Also, a signal for returning the card to the CR unit is not output. Specifically, the game media lending process is skipped, or the CR unit return process is skipped. On the other hand, when information indicating random clock anomaly is not stored, it is determined whether or not the game medium lending signal sensor signal is turned on by receiving the game medium lending signal from the interface unit 5556, and the game medium lending signal. Is turned on (when a ball lending request is input from the interface unit 5556), information indicating that there is a game medium lending request is stored in the game medium lending information storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S6606, a payout management process is performed. In this payout management process, the information indicating the random number clock abnormality, the information on the illegal payout error, and the information on the payout excess error are read from the above-described error status storage area. The number of payouts is monitored based on a payout sensor signal (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a payout sensor signal) input via the terminal. That is, when a predetermined error (one of the errors in this case) has occurred, the driving of the motor, that is, the payout of a prize medium (for example, a game ball) from the payout device is stopped.

  Also, from the error status storage area described above, information indicating random clock error, dish full error information, illegal payout error information, and payout excess error information are read, and if any error has not occurred, payout One of start monitoring processing, initial position search operation processing, normal payout operation processing, retry operation processing, and reverse rotation operation processing is performed.

  In the payout start monitoring process, when the number of lending requests and the number of requested prize balls are 0, and the number of requested next prize balls is other than 0, the number of requested next prize balls is set as the number of requested prize balls, and the next prize ball request Clear the number. If the position of the motor driving the sprocket is uncertain (when the operation mode is the initial position search operation mode), 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check and stored in the payout completion number check storage area. When the position of the motor for driving is fixed (when the operation mode is the normal payout operation mode), 0 is set in the payout completion number check storage area as the payout completion number check. Also, the number of prize balls requested is converted into an amount for driving the motor of the sprocket (motor drive amount), which is stored in the motor drive amount storage area provided in the RAM, and the motor control data table provided in the RAM is referenced. Then, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected, and motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the motor of the sprocket a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

  In the initial position search operation process and the normal payout operation process, after the motor has been driven, a payout completion check is read from the payout completion number check storage area, and when the payout completion check is 0, preparation for executing the payout start monitoring process is performed. If the payout completion check is other than 0, information indicating the payout device error is set in the error status storage area, and preparation for executing the retry operation process is performed.

  In the retry operation process, wait for a predetermined time to elapse (wait for the retry operation start wait timer to become 0), and when the retry operation start wait timer becomes 0, execute the reverse rotation operation process. Make preparations. In the reverse rotation operation process, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the motor control data table described above, and motor drive control data indicating reverse rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. To do. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the motor of the sprocket a predetermined number of times to drive the sprocket in a reverse rotation. Further, in the reverse rotation operation process, preparation is made for executing the payout start monitoring process after the motor is driven.

  In step S6607, motor drive management processing is performed. In the motor drive management process, any one of a drive start monitoring process, an acceleration drive process, a constant speed drive process, a brake drive process, and a drive end process is performed.

  In the drive start monitoring process, information indicating a random clock error, dish full error information, illegal payout error information, and payout excess error information are read from the error status storage area described above, and no error has occurred. In this case, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the motor control data table, and motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the motor of the sprocket a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

  In the acceleration drive processing and constant speed drive processing, 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check every time the motor excitation position is changed 16 times, except when the sprocket is in the initial position search operation or reverse rotation operation. Store in the payout completion number check storage area. When the updated payout completion number check is less than −4, preparation for executing the brake drive process is made. Further, the game medium lending information is read from the above-mentioned game medium lending information storage area, the presence / absence of information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is determined, and information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is present. In some cases (when a ball lending request is input from the interface unit 5556 during the payout of award balls), preparations for executing the brake driving process are made.

  In the brake drive process, it waits for a predetermined time to elapse (waits for the motor drive management timer to become 0), and when the motor drive management timer becomes 0, prepares to execute the drive end process In the drive end process, a post-process for driving the motor is performed.

  In step S6608, an LED management process is performed. In this LED management process, when the information indicating the abnormality of the random number clock in the error status storage area indicates an abnormality, an LED for notifying the player that an abnormality has occurred in the frequency of the random number clock is provided. When the information indicating the abnormality of the random number clock in the error status storage area does not indicate abnormality, the LED is turned off. In addition, when the illegal payout error information in the error status storage area indicates that an illegal payout error is occurring, an LED for notifying the player that an illegal payout error has occurred is turned on. At the same time, if it indicates that an illegal payout error has not occurred, the LED is turned off. In addition, when the payout excess error information in the error status storage area indicates that a payout excess error is occurring, an LED for notifying the player that a payout excess error has occurred is turned on. At the same time, when it indicates that no payout excess error has occurred, the LED is turned off.

  In step S6609, signal output management processing is performed. In this signal output management process, game information stored in the RAM (for example, a prize ball signal output each time a payout sensor signal is input) is separated from the pachinko machine 5100 via an information output circuit (not shown). To the information input circuit (not shown).

In step S6610, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S6601 is set in each original register, or interrupt permission is set.
<Strobe interrupt processing>

  Next, strobe interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the payout control unit 5550 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of strobe interrupt processing.

  The payout control unit 5550 receives a strobe signal output from the main control unit 5300. When the main control unit 5300 transmits a command to the payout control unit 5550, the strobe signal is input to the payout control unit 5550. A strobe interrupt is notified to the CPU of the payout control unit 5550.

The CPU of the payout control unit 5550 that has detected the strobe interrupt executes the strobe interrupt process, and stores the command received from the main control unit 5300 in the predetermined storage area of the RAM in step S6701.
<Sub control section main processing>

  Next, the sub-control unit main process executed by the CPU 5404 of the sub-control unit 5400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the sub control unit.

  The sub-control unit 5400 is provided with a reset signal output circuit that outputs a reset signal when the power is turned on. The CPU 5404 of the basic circuit 5402 to which this reset signal is input starts resetting by a reset interrupt and executes processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 406. First, various initial settings are performed in step S6801. In this initial setting, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization of various variables, and the like are performed. In step S6802, command input processing (details will be described later) is performed.

  In step S6803, a command is output to the sub control unit 5500 via the output port of the I / O 5410. In step S6804, it is determined whether the value of a timer variable storage area described later is 10 or more. When the value of the timer variable storage area is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S6805, and when the value of the timer variable storage area is less than 10, the process proceeds to step S6802. In step S6805, 0 is stored in the timer variable storage area.

  In step S6806, effect data update processing is performed. In this effect data update process, the contents of a command storage area to be described later are confirmed, and it is determined whether or not a random number clock abnormality command is received from the main control unit 5300. If the random clock abnormality command is received, the random number clock is abnormal due to the decorative symbol display device 5110, the shielding means 5250, the speaker 5416, the various lamps 5420, the effect movable body of the effect device 5200, and the like. The operation control data for notification to the outside is updated. On the other hand, if the random clock abnormality command has not been received, the variation number stored in the variation pattern selection process described later, the temporary stop symbol combination, and the stop symbol combination type are updated and the decorative symbol variation Updating of the operation control data for controlling the effects by the decorative symbol display device 5110, the shielding means 5250, the speaker 5416, the various lamps 5420, the effect movable body of the effect device 5200, etc. based on the elapsed time since the display was started. I do.

  In step S 6806, a command to be output to the sub-control unit 5500 in the process of step S 6803 to be executed next time so as to display the decoration symbol variation display in the manner indicated by the determined presentation information (for example, stop the decoration 7 on the left). For example, a command for operating the shielding means 5250 and a command for operating the shielding means 5250) are stored in a liquid crystal command storage area provided in the RAM 5408, and a speaker 5416, various lamps 5420, and a movable body for production are described in steps S6807, S6808, and S6809 described later. Prepare to control. Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery such as whether or not to execute a predetermined effect, for example, whether or not to perform an effect using a chance button, is performed.

  In step S6807, a sound output process is performed. In this sound output process, the audio data to be output to the speaker 5416 included in the speaker control information acquired in step S6806 is set in the output port of the I / O 5410, and the sound source IC 5418 performs output control of the speaker 5416. For example, if operation control data for notifying the outside that the random number clock is abnormal is set in step S6806, a sound (for example, a warning) is output using the speaker 5416 that the random number clock is abnormal. Sound).

  In step S6808, a lamp control process is performed. In this lamp control process, data indicating lighting / extinguishing of lamps output to the various lamps 5420 included in the information for controlling various lamps acquired in step S6806 is set in the output port of the I / O 5410, and various lamps 5420 are displayed. The display circuit 5422 is controlled to turn on and off. For example, when the operation control data for notifying the outside that the random number clock is abnormal is set in step 806, light (for example, using various lamps 5420) that the random number clock is abnormal is set. (Flashing display).

  In step S6809, an effect driving device control process is performed. In this effect driving device control process, the data indicating the operation timing included in the control information for the effect movable body acquired in step S6806 is set in the output port of the I / O 5410, and the effect movable object etc. The production drive device control circuit 5426 controls the various production drive devices 5424 to be driven. For example, when the operation control data for notifying the outside that the random number clock is abnormal is set in the step S6806, the fact that the random number clock is abnormal is moved using the effect movable body (for example, , Stop).

Sub-control unit 5400 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S6802 to S6809, except for interruption by strobe processing, chance button processing, or sub-control unit timer interrupt processing described later.
<Command input processing>

  Next, command input processing in the sub-control unit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (b). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of command input processing.

  In step S6810, the contents of a command storage area to be described later are confirmed, and it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command remains. If an unprocessed command remains in the command storage area, the process proceeds to step S6812. If an unprocessed command does not remain in the command storage area, the process ends and returns to the sub-control unit main process. .

  FIG. 196 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the variation pattern selection process, and FIG. 196 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the symbol stop process. In step S6821, based on the type of unprocessed command to be processed next among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. This is executed based on the symbol variation start command), symbol stop processing shown in FIG. There are other processes based on unprocessed commands. For example, a round start command that is output by the main control unit 5300 each time the opening control of the variable winning opening 5130 is started during the big hit, and includes information indicating the number of opening of the variable winning opening 5130 after the big win starts is an unprocessed command. For example, a round start process performed in some cases. Other processing is omitted here.

  In step S6821 of the variation pattern selection process, the jackpot flag value, the probability variation flag value, and the timer number included in the unprocessed command are extracted and stored in the respective storage areas of the RAM 5408. Further, referring to the above-described variation number selection table and symbol determination table, effect data (in this embodiment, variation number, temporary stop symbol / stop symbol combination, etc.) is selected and stored in a storage area provided in the RAM 5408. After that, the process ends.

In step S6841 of the symbol stop process, the three decorative symbols constituting the combination of the stopped symbols stored in the symbol storage area are displayed in the three symbols on the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 5110a to 5110c of the decorative symbol display device 5110. The setting is made to display in the area, and the process ends. In the round start process, information indicating the number of times the variable winning opening 5130 is opened after the jackpot start included in the unprocessed command is extracted and stored in the storage area of the RAM 5408.
<Strobe interrupt processing>

  Next, the strobe interrupt process of the sub control unit 5400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of strobe interrupt processing.

This strobe interrupt process is a process executed when the sub control unit 5400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 5300. In step S6861 of the strobe interrupt process, the command output from the main controller 5300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 5408.
<Chance button interrupt processing>

  Next, the chance button interrupt process of the sub control unit 5400 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (f). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of chance button interrupt processing.

  This chance button interruption process is a process executed when the sub control unit 5400 detects an operation of the chance button 5146 by the chance button detection circuit 5364.

In step S6881 of the chance button interrupt process, a value is acquired from the detection counter for measuring the number of times the chance button 5146 is pressed, which is stored in the detection counter storage area of the RAM 5408, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Store in the original detection counter storage area.
<Variable update interrupt processing>

  Next, variable update interrupt processing executed by the CPU 5404 of the sub control unit 5400 will be described using FIG. 196 (g). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of variable update interrupt processing.

  The sub-control unit 5400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and executes variable update interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. To do.

In step S6901 of the variable update interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 5408, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Accordingly, in step S6304, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).
<Package of basic circuit 302>

  Next, a package in which the basic circuit 5302 of the main controller 5300 described above is mounted will be described in detail. FIG. 197 (a) is an external perspective view of the package 5680 on which the basic circuit 5302 is mounted, and FIG. 197 (b) is a side view showing the vicinity of the visually unrecognizable part of the package 5680.

  A plurality of terminals 5682 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the package 5680 on both sides of the package 5680 in the short side direction. The package (microcomputer) 5680 is provided with the terminals 5682, and the terminals 5682 are used to A first region on the back surface of the computer 5680 (for example, a space below the back surface), a second region on the surface of the substrate facing the back surface (for example, a space above the surface), and between the back surface and the surface A specific area that is at least one of the third areas in the space (for example, when the microcomputer is mounted on the substrate via the IC socket, includes the space near the front and back surfaces of the IC socket). By not providing the difficult-to-view part 5680a and the terminal 5682, the visually-not easy part 5 And it is configured with a, and viewing ease portion 5680b to facilitate viewing the particular area than 80a.

  With such a configuration, the other side (for example, the back side) of the package 5680 can be visually recognized from the one side (for example, the front side) of the package 5680 through the easy-to-view part 5680b. In some cases, it is possible to easily find a fraudulent act such as attaching a fraudulent circuit to a gap between substrates (or IC sockets), and to prevent the fraudulent act.

In particular, in this example, the easy-to-view part 5680b is provided on the side surface in the short direction, so that it is particularly difficult to see the back side of the package 5680 compared to the case where it is provided on the side surface in the longitudinal direction. It is possible to visually recognize the vicinity of the center of the back side that is easy, and there are cases where fraud can be prevented more reliably. Furthermore, since the easy-to-view part 5680b is provided in the vicinity of the central part in the longitudinal direction, it is possible to visually recognize a wide range on the back side of the package 5680 from various angles as compared with the case where it is provided in the vicinity of the end part in the longitudinal direction. In some cases, fraud can be prevented more reliably. Note that if the easy-to-view part is also provided on the side surface in the longitudinal direction, the visible range can be further expanded, and illegal acts may be prevented more reliably.
<Package modification>

  Next, a modified example of the package 5700 will be described. FIG. 198 (a) is a plan view of the package 5700 on which the basic circuit 5302 is mounted, and FIG. 198 (b) is an external perspective view showing only the terminals of the package 5700 and the lower substrate.

  The package 5700 includes a plate-like upper substrate 5702 and lower substrate 5704, a basic circuit (CPU core) 5302 disposed so as to be sandwiched between the upper substrate 5702 and lower substrate 5704, and the basic circuit. A plurality of terminals (lead frames) 5706 connected to each of the connection terminals 5302 via bonding wires, and the plurality of terminals 5706 are disposed along the longitudinal direction on both sides in the short direction. (Dual Inline Package). Each of the upper substrate 5702 and the lower substrate 5704 of the package 5700 is configured by alternately arranging easy-to-view parts 5702a and 5704a made of transparent members and non-viewable parts 5702b and 5704b made of non-transparent members in the longitudinal direction. Has been. The easy-to-view part 5702a on the upper substrate 5702 and the easy-to-view part 5704a on the lower substrate 5704 are stacked at the same position in the longitudinal direction, and the non-viewable part 5702b on the upper substrate 5702 and the non-viewable part on the lower substrate 5704 are stacked. 5704b is laminated | stacked on the same position of a longitudinal direction.

  With such a configuration, the other side (for example, the back side) of the package 5700 can be visually recognized from the one side (for example, the front side) through the easy-to-view parts 5702a and 5704a. In some cases, it is possible to easily find a fraudulent act such as attaching a fraudulent circuit to the gap between the 5700 and the board (or IC socket), and to prevent the fraudulent act.

Note that the easy-to-view parts 5702a and 5704a only need to be made of a member that allows the back side of the package 5700 to be seen, for example, the whole may be made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the member is transparent. Or a semi-transparent member, and other parts may be formed of a non-transparent member. In addition, the non-viewable portions 5702b and 5704b may be formed of a member that is not visible or difficult to view on the back side of the package 5700. For example, the whole may not be visible or may be difficult to view. Good. Further, the easy-to-view parts 5702a and 5704a and the non-viewable parts 5702b and 5704b are alternately arranged at the same position in the longitudinal direction, but for example, the package may be formed by only the easy-to-view parts 5702a and 5704a. The easy-to-view parts 5702a and 5704a and the non-visible parts 5702b and 5704b may be alternately arranged in the short direction.
<Package Modification / Modification 1>

  Next, a modified example of the package 5700 will be described. FIG. 199 (a) is an external perspective view showing a part of the lower substrate 5714 (5714a, 5714b) of the package 5710 according to the first modification. The lower substrate 5714 of the package 5710 according to the first modified example (not shown but the upper substrate has the same configuration. The same applies to the following modified examples) includes a visible easy portion 5714a made of a transparent member and a non-transparent member. The visual non-easy parts 5714b are alternately arranged in the longitudinal direction in the same manner as the package 5700, but the arrangement mode of the terminals 5716 in the visual easy part 5714a and the arrangement mode of the terminals 5716 in the visual non-easy part 5714b are different. It is different.

  Specifically, in the easy-to-view part 5714a, one terminal 5716 is arranged with respect to the length L1 in the longitudinal direction of the easy-to-view part 5714a, and in the non-easy-to-view part 5714b, the longitudinal direction of the easy-to-view part 5714a. Three terminals 5716 are arranged at substantially equal intervals with respect to the length L1 (in this example, the same length as the length L1 in the longitudinal direction of the easy-to-view part 5714a), and the terminals 5716 in the non-viewable part 5714b The number of terminals 5716 (one in this example) in the easy-to-view part 5714a is smaller than the number (three in this example).

  In other words, among the terminals 5716 arranged in the easy-to-view part 5714a and the terminals 5716 arranged in the non-viewable part 5714b, the distance L2 between the terminal 5716 closest to the easy-to-view part 5714a and the non-visible The distance L3 between the plurality of terminals 5716 arranged in the portion 5714b is different, and the distance L2 is longer than the distance L3.

With this configuration, the number of terminals 5716 is small (the number of members that hinder visual recognition) is easily visible from the one side of the package 5710 through the easy-to-view part 5714a, and visibility is high even when the number of terminals 5716 is large. In some cases, a large number of terminals 5716 can be arranged in the non-viewable portion 5714b that does not affect the visual recognition. In addition, if a signal line that is easily affected by noise of an adjacent terminal is preferentially connected to the terminal 5716 disposed in the easy-to-view part 5714a having a low terminal density, while ensuring visibility, noise or the like In some cases, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by the occurrence of a malfunction.
<Package Modification / Modification 2>

  FIG. 199 (b) is an external perspective view showing a part of the lower substrate 5724 (5724a, 5724b) of the package 5720 according to the second modification. The substrate of the package 5720 according to Modification 2 is the same as the package 5700 in that the easy-to-view parts 5724a made of a transparent member and the non-visible parts 5724b made of a non-transparent member are alternately arranged in the longitudinal direction. However, a plurality (three in this example) of terminals 5726 are arranged in the visually unrecognizable part 5724b, whereas no terminal 5726 is arranged in the easily visible part 5724a.

With such a configuration, visibility in the easy-to-view part 5724a can be further ensured, and the other side of the package 5720 can be reliably visually recognized in some cases. In addition, a plurality of signal lines that are easily affected by noise from adjacent terminals are connected to the terminal 5726 of the non-viewable part 5724b on one side (for example, the right side of the figure) of the easy-to-view part 5724a and the easy-to-view part 5724a. If it is separated and connected to the terminal 5726 of the non-viewable portion 5724b on the other side (for example, the left side of the figure), it is possible to prevent malfunction caused by noise or the like while ensuring visibility. Sometimes it can be prevented.
<Modification of Package / Modification 3>

  FIG. 199 (c) is an external perspective view showing a part of the lower substrate 5732 (5732a, 5732b) of the package 5730 according to the third modification. In the substrate of the package 5730 according to the third modification, a cubic easy-to-view part 5732a made of a transparent member is formed in a part of the non-visible part 5732b made of a non-transparent member. A plurality (three in this example) of the terminals 5736 are arranged, but the easy-to-view part 5732a is configured not to arrange any of the terminals 5736.

  With such a configuration, the cost of the substrate of the package 5730 can be reduced as compared with the case where the easy-to-view parts and the non-viewable parts are alternately arranged in the longitudinal direction, and one side of the package 5730 passes through the easy-to-view parts 5732a. The other side can be visually recognized.

Note that the easy-to-view portions 5732a may be formed on both sides in the short direction of the substrate of the package 5730, or may be formed only on one side in the short direction, but if formed on both sides, the visibility is further improved. May be possible. In addition, the number of the easy-to-view parts 5732a may be one or plural, but if a plurality of easy-to-view parts 5732a are formed, the visibility may be further improved.
<Package Modification / Modification 4>

  FIG. 199 (d) is an external perspective view showing a part of the lower substrate 5742 (5742a, 5742b) of the package 5740 according to the fourth modification. In the substrate of the package 5740 according to the fourth modification, a rectangular notch 5742c that is recessed inward is formed in a part of the visually uneasy part 5742b made of a non-transparent member, and the notch 5742c is A plurality (three in this example) of terminals 5746 are arranged in the part not formed, but no terminal 5746 is arranged in the notch 5742c.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the cost of the substrate of the package 5740 and to reduce the cost of the package 5740 from one side to the other through the notch 5742c as compared with the case where the easy-to-view part and the non-visible part are configured by separate members. The side can be visually recognized.

  Note that the notch portions 5742c may be formed on both sides in the short direction of the substrate of the package 5740, or may be formed only on one side in the short direction, but if formed on both sides, the visibility is further improved. May be possible. Further, the number of the notch portions 5742c may be one or plural, but if a plurality of the notches 5742c are formed, the visibility may be further improved.

In addition, the strength of the package 5740 is reduced by forming the notch 5742c in the package 5740. For example, when the package 5740 mounted on a substrate or an IC socket is removed, the package 5740 is easily damaged (broken). However, in the package 5740 according to the modified example 4, the package 5740 may be illegally removed and crafted by making it difficult to remove the package 5740 by reducing the strength of the package 5740. It is configured so that it can be prevented in advance.
<Package Modification / Modification 5>

  FIG. 200A is an external perspective view of a package 5750 according to the fifth modification. The substrate of the package 5750 according to the modification 5 is entirely composed of a non-transparent member. In addition, a rectangular cutout portion 5752 that is recessed inward is formed in each of the vicinity of one end portion and the other end portion on the left side in plan view, while the cutout portion having the same shape is formed in the vicinity of the center on the right side in plan view. One 5752 is formed, and no three terminals 5756 are arranged in the three notches 5752.

With such a configuration, the cost of the substrate of the package 5752 can be reduced and the number of the notch portions 5752 arranged on the left side in a plan view can be reduced as compared with the case where the easy-to-view portion and the non-visible portion are configured as separate members. Since the number of the notch portions 5752 to be arranged on the right side in the plan view and the arrangement location are different from each other, for example, a place that cannot be seen from the right side may be visible from the left side. May be able to increase.
<Package Modification / Modification 6>

  FIG. 200B is an external perspective view of a package 5760 according to Modification 6. The substrates of the package 5760 according to Modification 6 (upper substrate 5762 and lower substrate 5762) are entirely made of a non-transparent member. In addition, a narrow-diameter portion 5765 that is recessed inward is formed in the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction of the package 5760. The upper substrate 5762 and the lower substrate 5762 have a short side direction and a thickness direction toward the small-diameter portion 5765. The outer diameter of the taper is tapered. The small diameter portion 5765 is the thinnest and narrowest portion of the entire package 5760.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the cost of the substrate of the package 5760 and to reduce the cost of the package 5760 through the space around the small-diameter portion 5765 as compared with the case where the easy-to-view portion and the non-visible portion are configured as separate members. In some cases, the other side can be visually recognized from various angles, and visibility can be improved.

  Note that the small diameter portion 5765 may be formed at a position other than the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction of the package 5760, or a plurality of the small diameter portions 5765 may be formed. However, if a plurality of the small diameter portions 5765 are formed, the visibility is further improved. May be possible.

In addition, the strength of the package 5760 is reduced by forming the small diameter portion 5765 in the package 5760. For example, when the package 5760 mounted on a substrate or an IC socket is removed, the package 5760 is easily damaged (folded). However, in the package 5760 according to the modified example 6, the package 5760 is deliberately reduced in strength and difficult to remove, so that the package 5760 is illegally removed and crafted. It is configured so that it can be prevented in advance.
<Package Modification / Modification 7>

  FIG. 200 (c) is an external perspective view of a package 5770 according to Modification 7. The substrates (upper substrate 5774 and lower substrate 5772) of the package 5770 according to the modified example 7 are entirely made of a non-transparent member. Further, in the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction on the left side and the right side in plan view, the inner circuit 5302 is sandwiched between the upper substrate 5774 and the lower substrate 5772 so as to straddle the basic circuit 5302 disposed in the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction. The rectangular cutout portion 5775 is formed so as to be opposed to the cutout portion 5775 so that no terminal 5776 is disposed.

  With such a configuration, the cost of the substrate of the package 5770 can be reduced as compared with the case where the easy-to-view portion and the non-visible portion are configured as separate members, and a plurality of cutouts arranged on the left side and the right side in plan view. The other side of the package 5770 can be viewed from various angles through the notch 5775, and the visibility may be improved.

In addition, the strength of the package 5770 is reduced by forming the notch portion 5775 at the same position in the longitudinal direction on the left side and the right side in a plan view, and the package 5770 is removed when the package 5770 mounted on a substrate or an IC socket is removed. However, in the package 5770 according to the modified example 7, the strength of the package 5770 is deliberately lowered and the removal is difficult, so that the package 5770 is illegally removed and crafted. It is configured so that fraudulent acts that are performed can be prevented in advance.
<Package Modification / Modification 8>

  FIG. 200D is an external perspective view of a package 5780 according to Modification 8. A rounded portion 5780a is formed at the right end of the substrate of the package 5780 according to the modified example 8 in a plan view, and the terminal 5786 is not disposed in the round portion 5780a. The terminal 5786 is arranged at the end on the left side without being subjected to round processing corresponding to the round portion 5780a. That is, the package 5780 according to the modified example 8 is configured such that the number of terminals 5786 arranged on the left side of the substrate 5780 in plan view is larger than the number of terminals 5786 arranged on the right side of the substrate in plan view. ing.

With such a configuration, the orientation of the package 5780 can be easily confirmed with the presence or absence of the round portion 5780a as a clue, and the reverse insertion into the IC socket can be prevented in advance. In some cases, the other side of the package 5780 can be visually recognized through the formed space. The package 5780 according to the modified example 8 does not have the notch 5775 as the package 5770 according to the modified example 7 described above. However, in addition to (or in place of) the round part 5780a, the same shape (or You may form a notch part of a different shape. That is, one, a plurality, or all of the configurations of the packages according to other embodiments may be applied to this embodiment (the same applies to other embodiments).
<Other variations of package>

  FIGS. 201A and 201B are external perspective views showing an example of a package in which a slit-shaped cutout is formed. In the package shown in FIG. 6A, a plurality of slit-shaped notches are formed between adjacent terminals (three in this example), and the package shown in FIG. One slit-shaped notch is formed between the terminals to be connected. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the space below the package through the notch.

  FIG. 202 (a) is an external perspective view showing an example of a package in which an arcuate cutout is formed. In the above example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the package is provided with a rectangular cutout. However, in this case, the cutout is easily processed and the package has a rectangular outer shape. Since there are many cases, even if a notch is provided, there is little discomfort in the design. On the other hand, when an arc-shaped notch as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4C is provided, the design can be improved and the notch can be made more conspicuous than other parts. Because of this, it may be easy to attract attention when inspecting a package.

  FIG. 203 (a) is an external perspective view showing an example of a package in which a seal indicating a model number or the like is attached to the upper surface of the notch. In this example, as shown in the same figure (b), as shown in the same figure (c), when the package is bent around the notch portion so as to be removed from the IC socket or the substrate, as shown in the same figure (b). Since the trace remains on the seal, it may be possible to immediately determine whether or not the package has been removed. Note that the model number may be printed (printed) directly on the upper surface of the notch. In this case, when the package is bent around the notch to remove the package from the IC socket or the substrate, In some cases, the marks of the fraudulent acts can be reliably left by the shape of the characters in the printed portion being broken or the paint being dropped.

  204A to 204G are views showing modifications of the package shape, and FIGS. 204A to 204E are plan views of the package according to the modification, FIG. (G) is the side view which looked at the package concerning a modification from the longitudinal direction.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 5A, a notch having a triangular shape in plan view that is recessed inward may be formed on both sides in the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction of the package, or as shown in FIG. As described above, in addition to the notch portion shown in FIG. 5A, a rectangular notch portion recessed inward may be formed on the bottom surface of the package. Further, as shown in FIG. 6C, a notch having a triangular shape in plan view that is recessed inward may be formed on both sides in the vicinity of the longitudinal end portion of the package. As shown, a notch having a triangular shape in plan view that is recessed inward is formed in the vicinity of one end in the longitudinal direction of the package, while a notch having the same shape is formed in the vicinity of the other end in the longitudinal direction. A part may be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5E, in the vicinity of the end portion on one side in the longitudinal direction of the package, a plurality of notches having a triangular shape in plan view recessed inward are formed side by side in the longitudinal direction. A plurality of notch portions having the same shape may be formed in the longitudinal direction in the vicinity of the other end portion. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5 (f), a notch part recessed inward may be formed on one surface in the thickness direction of the package, or as shown in FIG. You may form the notch part hollow inwardly on both surfaces.
<IC socket>

  Next, an example of an IC socket on which the package 5740 according to Modification 4 described above is mounted will be described. 205A is an external perspective view of the IC socket 5850, and FIG. 205B is an external perspective view showing a state where the package 5740 is mounted on the IC socket 5850. FIG.

  The IC socket 5850 has a plate-shaped base 5852 in which three rectangular openings 5852a are formed, and a plurality of socket terminals 5854 arranged on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the base 5852. Yes. On both sides in the longitudinal direction of the base 5852, a plurality of cylindrical connecting portions 5852b for inserting and fixing the terminals 5746 are formed at positions corresponding to the terminals 5746 of the package 5740. From each of the connecting portions 5852b, A rod-shaped socket terminal 5854 is formed so as to protrude in the direction opposite to the mounting surface of the package 5740. With such a configuration, when the package 5740 is mounted on the IC socket 5850 (when the terminal 5746 of the package 5740 is inserted and fixed to the connecting portion 5852b of the IC socket 5850), the terminal 5746 of the package 5740 and the IC socket 5850 are mounted. The socket terminal 5854 is electrically connected.

  One of the openings 5852a of the IC socket 5850 is formed at a position corresponding to the notch 5742c of the package 5740. Even when the package 5740 is mounted on the IC socket 5850, the package 5740 is passed through the notch 5742c. From one side of the package 5740 to the other side (for example, a part of the space below the package 5740 from the diagonally upper side of the package 5740 as well as the lower side of the package 5740 when viewed from the front).

In particular, the socket terminal 5854 of the IC socket 5850 has a length sufficient to float and hold the base 5852 at a predetermined height from the substrate when the IC socket 5850 is mounted on the substrate. In addition to being able to visually recognize the space below the package 5740 from the side, the visibility through the notch 5742c may be further improved. Further, when the package 5740 is mounted on the IC socket 5850, if the terminal 5746 of the package 5740 has a length sufficient to float and hold the package 5740 from the mounting surface of the IC socket 5850, In addition to being able to visually recognize the space below the package 5740 from the side of the terminal 5746 of the package 5740, the visibility through the notch 5742c may be further improved.
<Package terminals>

  Next, main terminals of the package 5790 according to Modification 9 will be described. FIG. 206 is a plan view showing a terminal arrangement example of the package 5790. FIG. Although details will be described later, a circle (circle) in the figure indicates the position of the socket terminal of the IC socket on which the package 5790 is mounted (or when the package 5790 is mounted on the substrate without the IC socket). Indicates the position of the land of the substrate).

  As shown in the figure, on the left side of the package 5790 in plan view, 35 terminals having terminal numbers 1 to 35 are arranged in a line from top to bottom, and on the right side of the package 5790 in plan view, terminal number 36 In the area of terminal number 1 to terminal number 17 of the package 5790 in which 36 terminals of .about.71 are arranged in a line from the bottom to the top, eight of the 16 address buses A15 to A0 Address buses A15 to A8 are arranged. These upper address buses A15 to A8 are arranged at terminal numbers 15, 13, 11, 9, 7, 5, 3, 1, respectively, and are arranged every other terminal number 15 to terminal number 1. . Also, two ground potential terminals VSS5 and VSS1 are arranged in the region of terminal numbers 1 to 17, and the ground potential terminal VSS5 is near the center of the region of terminal numbers 1 to 17 (terminal number 11). In addition, the ground potential terminal VSS1 is disposed at a position closest to the terminal number 18 (terminal number 17).

  Also, eight lower address buses A7 to A0 of the 16 address buses A15 to A0 are arranged in the region of terminal number 54 to terminal number 71 of the package 5790. These upper address buses A7 to A0 are arranged at terminal numbers 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 67 and 69, respectively, and are arranged every other terminal number 55 to terminal number 69. . In addition, two ground potential terminals VSS4 and VSS3 are arranged in the region of terminal number 54 to terminal number 71. The ground potential terminal VSS4 is located farthest from the terminal number 53 (terminal number 71). The potential terminal VSS3 is disposed at a position closest to the terminal number 53 (terminal number 54).

  In the region of terminal number 18 to terminal number 35 of the package 5790, a positive power supply terminal VDD1, a backup power supply terminal VBB for the built-in RAM, and a ground potential terminal VSS2 are arranged. The positive power supply terminal VDD1 is a terminal number. 17 is the second closest position (terminal number 19), the backup power supply terminal VBB1 is next to VDD1, that is, the third closest position from terminal number 17 (terminal number 20), and the ground potential terminal VSS2 is They are arranged at positions farthest from the terminal number 17 (terminal number 35). Further, a clock input terminal EX is arranged at a position (terminal number 18) closest to the terminal number 17 of the package 5790.

Further, positive power supply terminals VDD25 and VDD2 and a ground potential terminal VSS6 are arranged in the region of terminal numbers 36 to 53 of the package 5790. The positive power supply terminal VDD25 is located closest to the terminal number 54 (terminal number). 53), the positive power supply terminal VDD2 is next to VDD25, that is, the position closest to the terminal number 54 (terminal number 52), and the ground potential terminal VSS6 is the center of the region of the terminal numbers 36 to 53. It is arranged in the vicinity (terminal number 44). Further, eight data input / output buses D7 to D0 are arranged from terminal number 36 to terminal number 43 far from the terminal number 54 of the package 5790.
<Modified example of IC socket / Modified example 1>

  Next, a modified example of the IC socket will be described. 207 (a) is an external perspective view of an IC socket 5860 according to Modification 1, and FIG. 207 (b) is an external perspective view showing a state where a package 5740 is mounted on the IC socket 5860. FIG.

  The socket 5860 according to Modification 1 is different in that the opening 5852a of the socket 5850 described above is not provided. Even when the package 5740 is mounted on the socket 5860 that does not include the opening 5852a, the package 5740 includes the notch portion 5742c, so that the other side of the package 5740 can be visually recognized through the notch portion 5742c. Can do.

In particular, if the terminal 5746 of the package 5740 has a length enough to float and hold the package 5740 from the IC socket 5860 when the package 5740 is mounted on the IC socket 5860, In addition to being able to visually recognize the lower space of the package 5740 from the side of the terminal 5746, the visibility through the notch 5742c may be further improved. On the other hand, the space formed between the package 5740 and the IC socket 5860 does not have a height high enough to allow electronic components to be placed. Making it difficult.
<Modified example of IC socket / Modified example 2>

  Next, a modified example of the IC socket will be described. FIG. 208A is an external perspective view of an IC socket 5870 according to Modification 2. FIG. 208B is a plan view of a substrate on which the socket terminal of the IC socket 5870 is mounted.

The IC socket 5870 according to the modified example 2 is different from the above-described IC sockets 5850 and 5860 in the manner of arrangement of the socket terminals 5874 with respect to the base 5872. Specifically, in the IC socket 5870, the connecting portions 5872b into which the terminals of the package are inserted are arranged linearly at substantially equal intervals over the entire length direction, but project from each connecting portion 5872b. The formed socket terminals 5874 are arranged in a staggered manner over the entire longitudinal direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, lands 5878a are arranged and formed in a staggered manner on the substrate 5878 on which the IC socket 5870 is mounted in accordance with the arrangement mode of the socket terminals 5874 of the IC socket 5870.
<Connect part and socket terminal>

  FIG. 209 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a cross section along line AA in FIG. 208 (a), and FIG. 209 (b) is along line BB in FIG. 208 (a). FIG. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), of the plurality of socket terminals 5874, the socket terminal 5874 protruding inward in the short direction of the IC socket 5870 is a predetermined distance inward in the short direction from the axial center La of the connecting portion 5872b. The shaft center Lb is located at a position separated by L8, and is disposed at a position separated by a predetermined distance L9 from the outer end surface in the short direction of the IC socket 5870. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), of the plurality of socket terminals 5874, the socket terminal 5874 protruding outward in the short direction of the IC socket 5870 is outward in the short direction from the axial center La of the connecting portion 5872b. The shaft center Lc is located at a position separated by a predetermined distance L8, and is disposed at a position separated by a predetermined distance L10 (L10 <L9) from the lateral direction outer end face of the IC socket 5870.

  In this example, the length of the connecting portion 5872b and the length of the socket terminal 5874 are the same for the entire IC socket 5870. That is, when the IC socket 5870 is mounted on the substrate and the package is mounted on the IC socket 5870, the distance between the contact between the package terminal and the connector portion 5872b and the contact between the socket terminal 5874 and the contact of the substrate is as follows: The entire IC socket 5870 is configured to have substantially the same length.

  <Modification example of connection part and socket terminal / Modification example 1>

  FIGS. 210A and 210B are views schematically showing cross sections of the connection portion and the socket terminal according to the modification 1, and are views corresponding to FIGS. 209A and 209B, respectively. There are two types of connect portions according to the first modification, namely, a first connect portion 5880 shown in FIG. 210A and a second connect portion 5882 shown in FIG. Although illustration is omitted, in this example, the first connect portion 5880 and the second connect portion 5882 into which the terminals of the package are inserted are linearly arranged at substantially equal intervals over the entire length direction of the IC socket. On the other hand, the socket terminals 5884 that protrude from the first connect portion 5880 and the second connect portion 5882 are arranged in a staggered manner over the entire longitudinal direction of the IC socket.

  The first connection portion 5880 has a linear shape extending straight from the front surface to the back surface of the IC socket along the axis Ld. The second connecting portion 5882 includes a first straight portion extending straight from the front surface to the back surface of the IC socket along the axis Ld, and a bend extending obliquely toward the back surface using the first straight portion as a base end. And a second straight portion extending straight to the back surface of the IC socket along an axis Le different from the axis Ld with the bent portion as a base end. On the other hand, the lengths of the socket terminals 5884 are all the same, and the socket terminal 584 connected to the first connector portion 5880 is based on the first connector portion 5880 on the same axis Ld as the first connector portion 5880. A socket terminal 5884 extending as an end and connected to the second connector portion 5882 is based on the second straight portion of the second connector portion 5882 on the same axis Le as the second straight portion of the second connector portion 5882. It is extended and formed as an end.

  Therefore, in this example, the total length L11 of the first connecting portion 5880 and the length of the socket terminal 5884 is greater than the total length L12 of the second connecting portion 5882 (L12> L11) and the length of the socket terminal 5884. Is also shorter. That is, when an IC socket having such a configuration is mounted on a substrate and the package is mounted on the IC socket, two terminals, a contact between the package terminal and the first connector portion 5880, and a contact between the socket terminal 5884 and the substrate, are provided. The distance between the contacts is configured to be shorter than the distance between the contact between the package terminal and the second connector portion 5882 and the contact between the socket terminal 5884 and the substrate contact.

  <Modified example of connection part and socket terminal / Modified example 2>

  211 (a) to 211 (d) are diagrams schematically showing a cross section of the connection portion and the socket terminal according to the second modification. The first connect portion 5892 and the second connect portion 5893 shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B are a straight portion extending straight from the front surface of the IC socket toward the back surface, and slanting from the straight portion to the back surface. The first connecting portion 5892 shown in FIG. 5A and the second connecting portion 5893 shown in FIG. 5B are reversed in the bending direction of the bending portion. Although illustration is omitted, in this example, the straight portions of the first connect portion 5892 and the second connect portion 5893 into which the terminals of the package are inserted are substantially equally spaced over the entire longitudinal direction of the IC socket. In contrast to the linear arrangement, the socket terminals 5894 that are formed so as to protrude from the bent portions of the first connecting portion 5892 and the second connecting portion 5893 are extended over the entire longitudinal direction of the IC socket. Arranged in a staggered pattern.

On the other hand, the connecting portion 5895 shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D has a linear shape extending straight from the front surface to the back surface of the IC socket. Further, the first socket terminal 5896 and the second socket terminal 5897 are formed by a bent portion extending obliquely with the connection portion 5895 as a base end, and a straight portion extending straight in the thickness direction of the IC socket with the bent portion as a base end. The first socket terminal 5896 shown in FIG. 3C and the second socket terminal 5897 shown in FIG. Although illustration is omitted, in this example, the connection portion 5895 into which the terminal of the package is inserted is linearly arranged at substantially equal intervals over the entire longitudinal direction of the IC socket. The 1 socket terminal 5896 and the 2nd socket terminal 5897 are arrange | positioned in the zigzag form over the longitudinal direction whole region of IC socket.
<Modified example of IC socket / Modified example 3>

FIG. 212A is an external perspective view of an IC socket 5900 according to the third modification. In the above-described IC socket 5850, the opening is formed at a position corresponding to the notch 5742c of the package 5740 to be mounted. However, as in this example, the opening is formed at a position corresponding to the notch 5742c of the package 5740 to be mounted. A reinforcing member 5900a that connects both sides of the IC socket 5900 may be provided. In the above-described IC socket 5850, the connection portion and the socket terminal are not arranged at a position corresponding to the notch portion 5742c of the package 5740. You may arrange | position the connection part 5900b and the socket terminal 5900c in the corresponding position. With such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the strength of the IC socket or increase the number of socket terminals while ensuring visibility from one side of the package to the other. In addition, by arranging the connection portion 5900b and the socket terminal 5900c, it becomes difficult to insert and attach electronic components between the package 5740 and the IC socket 5900, so that illegal actions may be prevented in advance. .
<Modified example of IC socket / Modified example 4>

FIG. 212B is an external perspective view of an IC socket 5910 according to the fourth modification. As in this example, a recess 5910a may be formed at a position corresponding to the notch 5742c of the package 5740 to be mounted in accordance with the shape and size of the notch 5742c. With such a configuration, there is a case where not only the notch portion of the package but also the other side of the package can be visually recognized through the concave portion 5910a of the IC socket 5910, and visibility can be improved.
<Modified example of IC socket / Modified example 5>

  FIG. 212C is an external perspective view of an IC socket 5920 according to Modification 5. As shown in this example, a convex corresponding to the shape and size of the notch 5742c (for example, a shape that fits into the notch 5742c and made of a transparent member) is provided at a position corresponding to the notch 5742c of the package 5740. A portion 5920a may be formed. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent unauthorized equipment from being installed on the back of the package by preventing the convex portion 5920a from creating a gap with the package, If the convex portion 5920a is formed of a transparent member or a semi-transparent member, the other side of the package can be visually recognized through the convex portion 5920a, and it may be easy to find that an unauthorized device or the like has been installed. The shape of the IC package is not limited to the shape matched to the shape of the package as shown in FIGS. 1A to 1C. For example, the shape matched to the shape of the substrate on which the IC package is mounted ( For example, when the substrate includes a convex portion, an IC socket including a concave portion having a shape complementary to the convex portion may be used.

  FIGS. 213 (a) and 213 (b) are external perspective views showing an example in which an IC socket is mounted on a substrate. In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the thickness of the IC socket 5930 is made thinner than the thickness of other electronic components mounted on the substrate 5932. With such a configuration, even when the package is mounted on the IC socket 5930, it is possible to prevent the package from being obscured by other electronic components and to obscure the existence of the package. There is. In addition, since the electronic parts are not arranged in the short direction of the IC socket in which the above-described easy-to-view part and the notch part are arranged, the IC is provided via the easy-to-view part and the notch part. In some cases, the back side of the package mounted on the socket can be reliably seen.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 5B, the thickness of the IC socket 5940 is made larger than the thickness of the plurality of electronic components 5944 mounted on the substrate 5942 on one side of the IC socket 5940 in the longitudinal direction. With such a configuration, when the IC socket 5940 is observed from one side in the longitudinal direction of the IC socket 5940, the presence of the IC socket 5940 can be easily confirmed. There are cases where it can be increased. Further, compared to the example of FIG. 5A, the heat of the package is easily released to the outside of the substrate 5942, so that a defect due to the heat may be prevented in advance. In this example, the electronic component 5944 is disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the IC socket 5940, but may be on both sides in the longitudinal direction or in a direction other than the longitudinal direction.

  Further, it is preferable that no electronic component is disposed on the extension of the IC socket 5940 in the longitudinal direction of the IC socket 5940. With such a configuration, the back side of the package mounted on the IC socket may be visible from the longitudinal direction of the IC socket.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6C, when an upper case 5953 made of a transparent member covering the surface of the substrate 5950 and a lower case 5954 covering the back surface of the substrate 5950 are provided, the upper case 5953 is mounted on the substrate 5950. A recessed portion 5953a that is recessed toward the IC socket 5951 or the package 5952 may be formed at a position where the IC socket 5951 or the package 5952 is disposed. With such a structure, even when the substrate 5950 is protected by the upper case 5953, the back side of the IC socket 5951 or the package 5952 may be reliably visible.
<Wiring pattern>

  Next, the wiring pattern of the substrate on which the above IC socket is mounted will be described. FIG. 214A is a diagram showing an example of lands on which IC sockets are mounted, and signal lines connecting these lands to the random number crystal oscillator 5314a and the system crystal oscillator 5314b. These are the elements on larger scale near the land. FIG. 215 is a view for explaining the outer edge of the IC socket.

  In this example, a plurality of lands 6004a and 6004b (only part of which are shown) on which an IC socket is mounted (to which a socket terminal of an IC socket is connected) are formed on a substrate 1002, and an IC socket mounting portion is formed. A random crystal oscillator 5314a and a system crystal oscillator 5314b are mounted at a predetermined distance from. The lands 6004a and 6004b are arranged corresponding to the socket terminals of the IC socket mounted on the board 6002, and in this example, the outer edge line OL representing the outer edge of the IC socket when the IC socket is mounted on the board 6002 is used. There are two types, a circular outer land 6004a centered at a position separated from the outer edge line OL by a predetermined distance L21 and a circular inner land 6004b centered at a position separated from the outer edge line OL by a predetermined distance L22 (L22> L21). is there.

  Here, the “outer edge of the IC socket” means a virtual plane VP including a surface 6001a on the outer side in the short direction of the IC socket 6001 in a state of being mounted on the substrate 6002, as shown in FIG. A line formed by the intersection of the surface of the substrate 6002 with the substrate 6002 is the outer edge line OL described above.

  The system crystal oscillator 5314b is connected to the outer land 6004a via the first signal line 6006, and the random crystal oscillator 5314a is connected to the inner land 6004b via the second signal line 6008. The length of the first signal line 6006 is determined by the distance L20 from the external clock EX terminal of the system crystal oscillator 5314b to the outer edge line OL, and the outer land 6004a from the outer edge line OL (in this example, via the connecting portion of the IC socket). The value is obtained by adding the distance L21 to the center of the land connected to the EX terminal of the package, and the length of the second signal line 6008 is the distance from the random number clock RCK terminal of the random number crystal oscillator 5314a to the outer edge line OL. It is a numerical value obtained by adding L20 and the distance L22 from the outer edge line OL to the center of the inner land 6004b (in this example, the land connected to the RCK terminal of the package via the connecting portion of the IC socket). That is, in this example, the length (L20 + L22) of the second signal line 6008 is longer than the length (L20 + L21) of the first signal line 6006. Further, in this example, the distance from the inner land 6004b to the package RCK terminal is closer than the distance from the outer land 6004a to the package EX terminal, that is, from the inner land 6004b to the package RCK terminal. The input random number clock signal RCK is set so as to be easily affected by noise generated from the package.

  FIG. 216 is a side view of the substrate 6002 as viewed from the side. The first signal line 6006 connects the system crystal oscillator 5314b and the IC socket straight along the flat substrate surface without any difference in height, and the second signal line 6008 is a random number along the flat substrate surface. The crystal oscillator 5314a and the IC socket are connected straight without any difference in height.

  With such a configuration, the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be disposed in the vicinity of the package (basic circuit 5302), and the length of the first signal line 6006 connecting the package and the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be shortened. Therefore, the external clock EX signal output from the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be stably supplied to the clock circuit 5340 of the basic circuit 5302, and is generated based on the external clock EX signal. The signal of the system clock SCLK can also be stably supplied to the CPU core and internal circuits.

  In general, the length of the signal line connecting the supply source and the supply destination of the clock signal is set as short as possible so that no disturbance is applied to the clock signal. However, the basic circuit 5302 and the crystal oscillator for random number 5314a are provided. The length of the second signal line 6008 to be connected is set to be long, and the signal of the random number clock RCK passing through the second signal line 6008 is configured to be easily affected by the disturbance, whereby the signal of the random number clock RCK is changed. Based on this, the random number circuit 5316 that counts the count value can be varied in the update timing of the count value, and the randomness of the random value generated by the random number circuit 5316 can be further improved.

In particular, the portion of the first signal line 6006 that is not hidden by the IC socket (the signal line from the external clock EX terminal of the system crystal oscillator 5314b to the outer edge line OL) and the second signal line 6008 that is hidden by the IC socket. Since no part (the signal line from the random number clock RCK terminal of the random number crystal oscillator 5314a to the outer edge line OL) is set to the same length, the length of the second signal line 6008 is set to be longer at first glance. I can't figure out what is being done. For this reason, there is a possibility that a fraudulent person may increase the possibility of fraud. However, since the abnormality of the signal of the random number clock RCK can be detected, the fraudulent act can be reliably detected.
<Modification Example of Wiring Pattern / Modification Example 1>

  FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating a wiring pattern according to the first modification. In this example, an outer land 6014a and an inner land 6014b (only part of which are shown) on which an IC socket is mounted are formed on a substrate 6012, and a system crystal oscillator 5314b (also serving as a random number crystal oscillator 5314a) is formed. Has been implemented.

  The system crystal oscillator 5314b is connected to the outer land 6014a via the first signal line 6016 and is connected to the inner land 6014b via the second signal line 6018. The length of the first signal line 6016 is determined by the distance L30 from the external clock EX terminal of the system crystal oscillator 5314b to the outer edge line OL, and the outer land 6014a from the outer edge line OL (in this example, via the connecting portion of the IC socket). The value is obtained by adding the distance L31 to the center of the land) connected to the RCK terminal of the package, and the length of the second signal line 6018 is the distance L32 from the external clock EX terminal of the system crystal oscillator 5314b to the outer edge line OL. (L32> L30) and a distance L33 (L33> L31) from the outer edge line OL to the center of the inner land 6014b (in this example, the land connected to the RCK terminal of the package via the connecting portion of the IC socket) It becomes the numerical value. That is, in this example, the length (L32 + L33) of the second signal line 6018 is longer than the length (L30 + L31) of the first signal line 6016.

  With such a configuration, the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be disposed in the vicinity of the package (basic circuit 5302), and the length of the first signal line 6016 connecting the package and the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be shortened. Therefore, the external clock EX signal output from the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be stably supplied to the clock circuit 5340 of the basic circuit 5302, and is generated based on the external clock EX signal. The signal of the system clock SCLK can also be stably supplied to the CPU core and internal circuits.

  In general, the length of the signal line connecting the supply source and the supply destination of the clock signal is set as short as possible so that no disturbance is applied to the clock signal, but the length of the second signal line 6018 is deliberately set. A random number circuit 5316 that counts the count value based on the signal of the random number clock RCK by setting the length longer and configuring the signal of the random number clock RCK passing through the second signal line 6018 to be easily affected by the disturbance. Thus, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 5316 can be further improved.

  In some cases, the wiring pattern can be simplified by sharing a part of the first signal line 6016 and the second signal line 6018.

  <Modification Example of Wiring Pattern / Modification Examples 2 and 3>

  FIG. 218 (a) is a diagram illustrating a wiring pattern according to the second modification. This example is substantially the same as the wiring pattern shown in FIG. 214 (a), but the outer land 6004a to which the system crystal oscillator 5314b is connected and the inner land 6004b to which the random number crystal oscillator 5314a is connected. Two outer lands 6004a are arranged between them. One outer land 6004a is connected to a first power supply terminal (for example, the above-described positive power supply terminal VDD1) of the package, and the other outer land 6004a is connected to a second power supply terminal (for example, the above-described backup power supply). The connection is different from the terminal VBB).

  On the other hand, FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a wiring pattern according to the third modification. This example is similar to the wiring pattern shown in FIG. 5A, but the power line 6033 from the outer land 6004a connected to the first power terminal of the package is connected to the substrate 6032 through the through hole. A power supply line 6034 from the outer land 6004a connected to the second power supply terminal of the package is wired on the back surface of the substrate 6032 through the vicinity of the random value crystal oscillator 5314a.

  With such a configuration, the signal of the external clock EX passing through the first signal line 6006 can be made less affected by the power supply line, and the signal of the external clock EX output from the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be stabilized. In addition to being able to be supplied to the clock circuit 5340 of the basic circuit 5302, the signal of the system clock SCLK generated based on the signal of the external clock EX can also be stably supplied to the CPU core and internal circuits. .

Further, by arranging a power supply line 6034 in the vicinity of the second signal line 6008 so that the signal of the random number clock RCK passing through the second signal line 6008 is easily influenced by disturbance, the signal of the random number clock RCK Thus, the random number circuit 5316 that counts the count value can be varied in the update timing of the count value, and the randomness of the random value generated by the random number circuit 5316 can be further improved.
<Modification Example of Wiring Pattern / Modification Example 4>

  FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating a wiring pattern according to the fourth modification. In this example, the land 6044a disposed above the land 6044b to which the system crystal oscillator 5314b is connected is connected to the ground terminal of the package (for example, the above-described ground potential terminal VSS1), and the system crystal oscillator A land 6044c disposed below the land 6044b to which 5314b is connected is connected to a first power supply terminal (for example, the above-described positive power supply terminal VDD1) of the package. In addition, a land 6044d disposed above the land 6044e to which the random number crystal oscillator 5314a is connected is connected to the second power supply terminal of the package (for example, the above-described backup power supply terminal VBB), and for the random number. A land 6044f disposed below the land 6044e to which the crystal oscillator 5314a is connected is connected to a control signal line (for example, a chip select terminal) of the package.

  Thus, by arranging a line (power supply line, ground line) with little signal change in the vicinity of the first signal line 6006, the signal of the external clock EX passing through the first signal line 6006 is less affected. The external clock EX signal output from the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be stably supplied to the clock circuit 5340 of the basic circuit 5302, and the system is generated based on the external clock EX signal. The signal of the clock SCLK can also be stably supplied to the CPU core and internal circuits.

Further, by arranging a line (control signal line) with a large signal change in the vicinity of the second signal line 6008, the signal of the random number clock RCK passing through the second signal line 6008 is easily affected by disturbance. By doing so, the count value update timing of the random number circuit 5316 that counts the count value based on the signal of the random number clock RCK can be varied, and the randomness of the random value generated by the random number circuit 5316 can be further enhanced. .
<Modification of wiring pattern / Modification 5>

  FIG. 220A is a diagram illustrating a wiring pattern according to the fifth modification. In this example, three lands 6040a, 6040b, 6040c are arranged at a position separated by a predetermined distance L41 from the outer edge line OL on the substrate, the land 6040a is connected to the ground line 6042, and the land 6040b is connected to the system crystal oscillator. The system clock line 6044 is connected, and the land 6040 c is connected to the power supply line 6046. Further, a distance W1 between the outer edge of the land 6040a to which the ground line 6042 is connected and the outer edge of the land 6040b to which the system clock line 6044 is connected, the outer edge of the land 6040b to which the system clock line 6044 is connected, and a power source The distance W1 between the outer edge of the land 6040c to which the line 6046 is connected is the same distance.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 5B, the land 6040a to which the ground line 6042 is connected and the land to which the power line 6046 is connected are separated from the outer edge line OL on the substrate by a predetermined distance L41. 6040c is disposed, and a land 6040b to which the system clock line 6044 is connected is disposed at a position separated from the outer edge line OL on the substrate by a predetermined distance L42 (L42> L41). Further, by disposing the land 6040b farther from the outer edge line OL than the lands 6040a and 6040c, the distance W2 between the outer edge of the land 6040a to which the ground line 6042 is connected and the outer edge of the system clock line 6044 is Both the distance W2 between the outer edge of the system clock line 6044 and the outer edge of the land 6040c to which the power supply line is connected are longer than the distance W1 shown in FIG.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 5C, a land 6040a to which the ground line 6042 is connected and a land 6040c to which the power line 6046 is connected are arranged at a predetermined distance L42 from the outer edge line OL on the substrate. The land 6040b to which the system clock line 6044 is connected is disposed at a position separated from the outer edge line OL on the substrate by a predetermined distance L41 (L41 <L42). Further, by disposing the lands 6040a and 6040c at positions farther from the outer edge line OL than the land 6040b, a distance W2 between the outer edge of the ground line 6042 and the outer edge of the land 6040b to which the system clock line 6044 is connected. Both the distance W2 between the land 6040b to which the system clock line 6044 is connected and the outer edge of the power supply line 6046 are longer than the distance La shown in FIG.

According to the configuration shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the system clock line 6044 can be disposed at a position away from the ground line 6042 and the power supply line 6046 by a distance corresponding to the swelling of the land. The signal of the external clock EX passing through the clock line 6044 can be hardly affected, and the signal of the external clock EX output from the system crystal oscillator 5314b is stably supplied to the clock circuit 5340 of the basic circuit 5302. In addition, the signal of the system clock SCLK generated based on the signal of the external clock EX can be stably supplied to the CPU core and internal circuits. In this example, the distance between the outer edge of the ground line 6042 and the outer edge of the land 6040b to which the system clock line 6044 is connected, the land 6040b to which the system clock line 6044 is connected, and the outer edge of the power supply line 6046 However, for example, one may be longer than the other.
<Modification Example of Wiring Pattern / Modification Example 6>

  FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating a wiring pattern according to the sixth modification. In this example, two lands 6050a and 6050b are arranged at a position away from the outer edge line OL on the substrate by a predetermined distance L51, and at a position away from the outer edge line OL on the board by a predetermined distance L52 (L52> L51). One land 6050c is arranged. The land 6050a is connected to the external clock EX terminal of the system crystal oscillator 5314b, and the signal line connecting the two is not bent but is linear. On the other hand, the land 6050c is connected to the random number clock RCK terminal of the random number crystal oscillator 5314b, and the signal line connecting both is bent halfway.

  With this configuration, the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be disposed in the vicinity of the package (basic circuit 5302), and the length of the first signal line 6052 connecting the package and the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be shortened. Therefore, the external clock EX signal output from the system crystal oscillator 5314b can be stably supplied to the clock circuit 5340 of the basic circuit 5302, and is generated based on the external clock EX signal. The signal of the system clock SCLK can also be stably supplied to the CPU core and internal circuits.

In general, the length of the signal line connecting the supply source and the supply destination of the clock signal is set as short as possible so that no disturbance is applied to the clock signal. However, the basic circuit 5302 and the crystal oscillator for random number 5314a are provided. The length of the second signal line 6054 to be connected is set to be long, and the signal of the random number clock RCK passing through the second signal line 6054 is configured to be easily affected by the disturbance, whereby the signal of the random number clock RCK is changed. Based on this, the random number circuit 5316 that counts the count value can be varied in the update timing of the count value, and the randomness of the random value generated by the random number circuit 5316 can be further improved.
<Board>

  FIG. 222 is a plan view of a substrate on which the above-described IC socket is mounted. The substrate 6050 shown in the figure includes four rectangular IC socket mounting portions 6054 having a plurality of lands 6052 for mounting IC socket socket terminals, and a ground region 6056 around the IC socket mounting portion 6054. It is said. Of the plurality of lands 6052, two lands 6052a connected to the ground terminal of the package are directly connected to the ground region 6056 without passing through a signal line or the like. Note that the substrate according to the present embodiment may be a component surface or a solder surface.

With such a configuration, there are cases where the number of ground lines connecting the substrate and the land can be reduced as compared to the conventional case, and in addition, when it is desired to obtain the ground potential by changing the circuit, the ground potential can be easily obtained. There are cases where it can be increased.
<Variation of substrate / Variation 1>

  FIG. 223 is a plan view of the substrate according to the first modification. The substrate 6060 shown in the figure includes four IC socket mounting portions 6064 having a plurality of lands 6062 for mounting the socket terminals of the IC socket, and the other side from the one side of the IC socket mounted on the substrate 6060. A power supply region 6068 is arranged so as to straddle. Further, of the plurality of lands 6062, two lands 6062a used as power supply terminals of the package are directly communicated with the power supply region 6068 without using a signal line or the like.

With such a configuration, the power line connecting the board and the land may be reduced as compared to the conventional case, and in addition, when it is desired to take a power source by changing the circuit, the power source can be easily taken and the convenience is improved. May be possible.
<Variation of substrate / Variation 2>

  FIG. 224 is a plan view of a substrate according to the second modification. The substrate 6070 shown in the figure includes four rectangular IC socket mounting portions 6074 having a plurality of lands 6072 for mounting IC socket socket terminals, and each of these IC socket mounting portions 6074 is provided. A plurality (four in this example) of lands 6072 are arranged in a staggered manner. Further, in this example, of the plurality of lands 6072, only the lands corresponding to the socket terminals arranged outside the IC socket are connected to the electronic components mounted on the substrate 6070, and the lands arranged inside are It is unused without being connected to electronic parts. In this example, there are four mounting portions in which the lands are arranged in a staggered pattern. However, the lands may be arranged in a staggered pattern in one, a plurality, or all of the four mounting units. Also, the number of mounting parts is not limited to four.

With such a configuration, a predetermined distance can be provided between adjacent signal lines, the influence of noise and the like caused by other signal lines can be reduced, and circuit design can be facilitated.
<Modification Example of Substrate / Modification Example 3>

  FIG. 225 is a plan view of the substrate according to the third modification. A substrate 6080 shown in the figure includes a plurality of (16 in this example) lands 6082 for mounting socket terminals of IC sockets, and these lands 6082 are arranged in a staggered manner. In this example, among the lands 6082, only lands corresponding to socket terminals arranged outside the IC socket are connected to electronic components mounted on the substrate 6080, and the lands arranged inside are It is unused without being connected to electronic parts. Further, in this example, a region excluding a plurality of lands 6082 and wirings for electronic components among all the regions of the substrate 6080 is a ground region 6084.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the number of ground lines connecting the substrate and the land can be reduced as compared to the conventional case, and in addition, when it is desired to obtain the ground potential by changing the circuit, the ground potential can be easily obtained. There are cases where it can be increased. In addition, a predetermined distance can be provided between adjacent signal lines, and the influence of noise and the like caused by other signal lines can be reduced, and circuit design can be facilitated.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 5100 according to the present embodiment has a main control means having a board provided with a game control microcomputer (for example, the package 5680 shown in FIG. 197 (a)) for performing game control. For example, a gaming machine comprising a main control unit 5300) and sub-control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 5400) that performs game effect control based on the game control of the main control means, The microcomputer is provided with a terminal (for example, a terminal 5682), whereby the first region on the back surface of the microcomputer, the second region on the surface of the substrate facing the back surface, and the back surface and the front surface by the terminal. A non-viewable part that makes it difficult to visually recognize a specific region that is at least one of the third regions in the space between 5680a) and an easy-to-view part (for example, easy-to-view part 680b) that makes the specific region easier to see than the non-viewable part by not providing the terminal. It is a game stand characterized by.

  In other words, the microcomputer has a non-viewable part having a range that is difficult to visually recognize by providing the terminal, and a range that is more difficult to view than the non-visible part by not providing the terminal. It is a gaming machine characterized by having an easily visible portion that narrows. The “difficult to see” according to the present invention is not limited to the case where the specific area cannot be completely seen (when visual recognition is impossible), and the specific area is slightly visible compared to the easy-to-view part. It is a concept that includes difficult situations. On the other hand, the “easy visual recognition” according to the present invention is not limited to the case where all the specific area can be seen, and is a concept including a state where the specific area is slightly easier to visually recognize than the non-visually easy part. . Further, the “specific region” according to the present invention is a concept including the surface of a microcomputer terminal, the surface of an IC socket for connecting the terminal of the microcomputer and the substrate, and the like.

  According to the pachinko machine 5100 according to the present embodiment, a specific area in the vicinity of the back side of the game control microcomputer can be visually recognized through the easy-to-view part, and illegal activities such as attaching illegal parts to the back side of the microcomputer or the like can be performed. In some cases, this can be prevented. In addition, it is difficult for people other than manufacturers and pachinko stores to know the presence of a specific area due to the non-easy-to-view part, while illegal parts are provided in specific areas for those at the manufacturer and pachinko shop by the easy-to-view part. It may be easier to check whether or not it has been tampered with and may prevent unauthorized modification.

  In addition, the terminals in the visually unrecognizable part may be provided only on both sides in the short direction of the microcomputer (for example, a package 5760 shown in FIG. 200B, a package 5770 shown in FIG. 200C), etc. See).

  With this configuration, a specific area near the back side of the game control microcomputer can be viewed from various angles through the easy-to-view parts on both sides in the short direction, making it easier to find unauthorized parts. It may become.

  In addition, the easy-to-view portion (for example, the non-visible portion 5732a shown in FIG. 199 (c), the notch portion 5742c shown in FIG. 199 (d), the slit shown in FIGS. 201 (a) and (b), FIG. A round part 5780a shown in d) and an arc-shaped notch part shown in FIG. 202 (a) may be provided on one side of the gaming control microcomputer in the short direction.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize a specific area in the vicinity of the back side of the gaming control microcomputer through the easy-to-view part on one side in the short direction. is there.

  The game control microcomputer has a plurality of terminals arranged along the longitudinal direction, and the easy-to-view part (for example, the small diameter part 5765 shown in FIG. 200 (b), the notch shown in FIG. 200 (c)). Part 5775 and slits shown in FIGS. 200A and 200B may be provided between the terminals.

  With such a configuration, although it is possible to arrange a large number of terminals, it is possible to visually recognize a specific area near the back side of the gaming control microcomputer through the easy-to-view parts between the terminals. It may be easier to find parts.

  In addition, the easy-to-view part (for example, the narrow-diameter part 5765 shown in FIG. 200 (b), the notch part 5775 shown in FIG. 200 (c), the triangular cut-out shown in FIGS. 204 (a) to (c). (A notch portion) may be provided opposite to both sides in the lateral direction.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the back side of the game control microcomputer through the facing easy-to-view parts, so that it may be easier to find unauthorized parts.

In the above embodiment, an example of a pachinko machine using a game ball as a game medium has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal (coin) as described below is used. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine used as a game medium.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of a slot machine 6100 according to another example will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows an external perspective view of the slot machine 6100.

  The slot machine 6100 includes a substantially box-shaped main body 6101 and a front door 6102 attached to the front opening of the main body 6101. Inside the center of the main body 6101 of the slot machine 6100, three reels (a left reel 6110, a middle reel 6111, and a right reel 6112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. Each symbol is printed on the belt-like member at an appropriate interval, and this reel-like member is affixed to a predetermined circular frame member to constitute the reels 6110 to 6112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 6110 to 6112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 6113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 6110 to 6112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. In the first embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 6100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  In addition, a line display LED (not shown) for notifying an effective line and a winning line, which will be described later, is arranged on the outer frame of the symbol display window 6113 by lighting control such as blinking and lighting.

  Further, in the slot machine 6100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 6110 to 6112. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between them. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol in the rotation direction on the reel is determined, and the reels 6110 to 6112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line 6114.

  The winning line display lamp 6120 is a lamp indicating an effective winning line. An effective winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals inserted into the slot machine 6100. Of the five winning lines 6114, for example, when one medal is inserted, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are inserted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. When three medals are inserted and three medals are inserted, the five added with the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line become effective as the winning line. Note that the number of winning lines 114 is not limited to five.

  The start lamp 6121 is a lamp that informs the player that the reels 6110 to 6112 are in a state of being able to rotate. The replay lamp 6122 indicates to the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal insertion is not required) when a replay game that is one of the winning games in the previous game is won. It is a lamp to inform. The notification lamp 6123 is a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (for example, a bonus such as BB (Big Bonus) or RB (Regular Bonus)) is won internally in the internal lottery. The medal insertion lamp 6124 is a lamp notifying that a medal can be inserted. The payout number display 6125 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The number-of-games display 6126 is an indicator for displaying an error display when a medal is inserted, the number of games during the big bonus game (in the BB game), the number of winnings of a predetermined winning combination, and the like. The stored number display 6127 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 6100. The reel panel lamp 6128 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 6130 and 6131 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 6100. In the first embodiment, every time the medal insertion button 6130 is pressed, a maximum of three are inserted one by one, and when the medal insertion button 6131 is pressed, three are inserted. The medal slot 6134 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically with the medal insertion button 6130 or 6131, or an actual medal can be inserted through the medal insertion slot 6134. The payment button 6132 is a button for adjusting the medals stored electronically in the slot machine 6100 and the bet medals and discharging them to the medal tray 6156 from the medal payout opening 6155. The medal return button 6133 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged.

  The start lever 6135 is a lever-type switch for performing a game start operation. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6134 and the start lever 6135 is operated, the reels 6110 to 6112 are rotated as a trigger, and the game is started. The stop buttons 6137 to 6139 are buttons for performing a stop operation on the reels 6110 to 6112 that have started rotating by the operation of the start lever 6135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 6110 to 6112. When any one of the stop buttons 6137 to 6139 is operated, any one of the corresponding reels 6110 to 6112 is stopped.

  Door key hole 6140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 6102 of slot machine 6100 is inserted. The medal payout exit 6155 is a payout exit for paying out medals. The medal tray 6156 is a container for collecting medals paid out from the medal payout opening 6155. The medal tray 6156 employs a tray that can emit light in the first embodiment.

The upper lamp 6150, the side lamp 6151, the center lamp 6152, the waist lamp 6153, and the lower lamp 6154 are decorative lamps for exciting games. The effect device 6190 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device on which a door device (shutter) 6163 that can be opened and closed is attached to the front surface. Various information such as a small role notification is displayed on the effect device 6190. The sound hole 6160 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 6100 to the outside. On the title panel 6162, a design for decorating the slot machine 6100 is drawn.
<Main control unit 300>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 6100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228.

The control unit of the slot machine 6100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 6300 that controls the central part of the game, a sub control unit 6400 that controls various devices according to commands transmitted from the main control unit 6300, and a sub control. The door / liquid crystal screen display control unit 6490 controls the liquid crystal display device 6157 and the door device 6163 according to the command transmitted from the unit 6400.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 6300 of the slot machine 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the main control unit 6300.

  The main control unit 6300 includes a CPU 6310 that is an arithmetic processing unit for controlling the entire main control unit 6300, a data bus and an address bus for the CPU 6310 to transmit and receive signals to and from each IC and each circuit, It has the structure described below. The clock correction circuit 6314 is a circuit that divides the clock oscillated from the crystal oscillator 6311 and supplies it to the CPU 6310. For example, when the frequency of the crystal oscillator 6311 is 12 MHz, the divided clock is 6 MHz. The CPU 6310 operates by receiving the clock divided by the clock correction circuit 6314 as the system clock.

  The CPU 6310 is connected to a timer circuit 6315 for setting a timer interrupt processing cycle for constantly monitoring the sensor and switch states and a motor drive pulse transmission cycle via a bus. When the power is turned on, the CPU 6310 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 6312 to the timer circuit 6315 via the data bus. The timer circuit 6315 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 6310 for each interrupt time. In response to this interrupt request, the CPU 6310 executes monitoring of each sensor and transmission of drive pulses. For example, when the system clock of the CPU 6310 is set to 6 MHz, the frequency division value of the timer circuit 6315 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 6312 is set to 44, the reference time for this interrupt is 256 × 44 ÷ 6 MHz = 1. 877 ms.

  Further, the CPU 6310 stores a ROM 6312 for storing various data such as a program for controlling each IC, lottery data used in the internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel stop position, and for storing temporary data. A RAM 6313 is connected. Other storage means may be used for these ROM 6312 and RAM 6313, and this point is the same in the sub-control unit 6400 described later. Further, an input interface 6360 for receiving an external signal is connected to the CPU 6310, and a start lever sensor 6321, a stop button sensor 6322, a medal insertion button sensor 6323, a checkout switch via the input interface 6360 every interrupt time. The state of the sensor 6324, the medal payout sensor 6326, and the power supply determination circuit 6327 is detected, and each sensor is monitored.

  The medal insertion sensor 6320 is a sensor for detecting a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6134. The start lever sensor 6321 is a sensor for detecting the operation of the start lever 6135. The stop button sensor 6322 is a sensor for detecting which stop button is pressed when any one of the stop buttons 6137 to 6139 is pressed. The medal insertion button sensor 6323 is a sensor for detecting which medal insertion button is pressed when any of the medal insertion buttons 6130 and 6131 is pressed. The settlement switch sensor 6324 is provided on the settlement button 6132, and when the settlement button 6132 is pressed once, the stored medals and the bet medals are settled and paid out. The medal payout sensor 6326 is a sensor for detecting a medal to be paid out. The power determination circuit 6327 is a circuit for detecting the interruption of the power supplied to the slot machine 6100.

  Further, an input interface 6361 and output interfaces 6370 and 6371 are connected to the CPU 6310 via the address decode circuit 6350 to the address bus. The CPU 6310 transmits and receives signals to and from external devices via these interfaces. An index sensor 6325 is connected to the input interface 6361. The index sensor 6325 is installed at a predetermined position on the mounting base of each of the reels 6110 to 6112, and becomes high level each time the light shielding piece provided on the reels 6110 to 6112 passes through the index sensor 6325. When detecting this signal, the CPU 6310 determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. The output interface 6370 has a reel motor driving unit 6330 that controls a motor for driving the reel and a motor for a hopper (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket from the medal payout opening 6155). Hopper motor drive unit 6331, a game lamp 6340 (specifically, a winning line display lamp 6120, a start lamp 6121, a re-game lamp 6122, a notification lamp 6123, a medal insertion lamp 6124, etc.), and a 7 segment (SEG) display A device 6341 (a payout number display 6125, a game information display 6126, a stored number display 6127, etc.) is connected.

  In addition, a random number generation circuit 6317 is connected to the CPU 6310 via a data bus. The random number generation circuit 6317 is an increment counter capable of incrementing a value within a certain range based on the clocks oscillated from the crystal oscillator 6311 and the crystal oscillator 6316 and outputting the count value to the CPU 6310, which will be described later. Used for various lottery processes, including internal lottery for winning positions.

  Although not shown, the main control unit 6300 compares the frequency of the system clock input from the clock correction circuit 6314 with the frequency of the random number clock input to the random number generation circuit 6317, and the frequency of the random number clock is equal to or lower than the system clock. A frequency generation circuit for setting the clock signal status bit of the internal information register to 1 at the same frequency. When the clock signal status bit of the internal information register is set to 1 (when the frequency of the random number clock is equal to or lower than the frequency of the system clock), the CPU 6310 of the main control unit 6300 has some abnormality in the random number clock ( For example, when it is determined that the wiring pattern connecting the random number generation circuit 6317 and the crystal oscillator 6316 is broken, and the clock signal status bit of the internal information register is set to 0 (the frequency of the random number clock is the system clock) If the frequency is less than the frequency of the random number), it is determined that the random number clock is normal. Although not shown, the main control unit 6300 includes a collation block block that is connected to an external collator and performs chip collation (check for chip authenticity). Further, the first signal line from the random number generation circuit 6317 to the crystal oscillator 6316 is wired to be longer than the second signal line from the clock correction circuit 6314 to the crystal oscillator 6311.

An output interface 6371 for transmitting a command to the sub control unit 6400 is connected to the data bus of the CPU 6310. The information communication between the main control unit 6300 and the sub control unit 6400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 6300 transmits a command to the sub control unit 6400, but any command or the like from the sub control unit 6400 to the main control unit 6300 Cannot be sent.
<Sub-control unit 400>

  Next, the sub control unit 6400 of the slot machine 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the sub-control unit 6400.

  The sub-control unit 6400 is a CPU 6410 that is an arithmetic processing unit that controls the entire sub-control unit 6400 based on a main control command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 6300, and the CPU 6410 transmits and receives signals to and from each IC and each circuit. It has a data bus and an address bus for performing, and has a configuration described below. The clock correction circuit 6414 is a circuit that corrects the clock oscillated from the crystal oscillator 6411 and supplies the corrected clock to the CPU 6410 as a system clock.

  In addition, a timer circuit 6415 is connected to the CPU 6410 via a bus. The CPU 6410 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 6412 to the timer circuit 6415 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The timer circuit 6415 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 6410 for each interrupt time. The CPU 6410 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  Further, the CPU 6410 temporarily stores a ROM 6412 in which commands and data for controlling the entire sub-control unit 6400, lighting patterns of line display LEDs, data for controlling various indicators, and data are stored. A RAM 6413 for saving is connected via each bus.

  Further, an input / output interface 6460 for transmitting and receiving external signals is connected to the CPU 6410. The input / output interface 6460 is disposed on the outer frame of the symbol display window 6113 and controls lighting such as blinking and lighting. Are connected to a line display LED 6420 for informing an active line or a winning line, a door sensor 6421 for detecting opening / closing of the front door 6102, and a reset switch 6422 for clearing data in the RAM 6413.

  An input interface 6461 for receiving a main control command from the main control unit 6300 is connected to the CPU 6410 via a data bus, and an effect process for exciting the whole game based on the command received via the input interface 6461 Etc. are executed. A sound source IC 6480 is connected to the data bus and address bus of the CPU 6410. The sound source IC 6480 controls sound in accordance with a command from the CPU 6410. The sound source IC 6480 is connected to a ROM 6481 in which sound data is stored. The sound source IC 6480 amplifies the sound data acquired from the ROM 6481 by the amplifier 6482 and outputs the sound data from the speaker 6483. Similarly to the main control unit 6300, the CPU 6410 is connected to an address decode circuit 6450 for selecting an external IC. The address decode circuit 6450 has an input interface for receiving a command from the main control unit 6300. 6461, a clock IC 6423, an output interface 6472 for outputting a signal to the 7-segment display 6440, and the like are connected.

By connecting the clock IC 6423, the CPU 6410 can acquire the current time. The 7-segment display 6440 is provided inside the slot machine 6100 so that, for example, predetermined information set in the sub-control unit 6400 can be confirmed by an attendant of a game store. Further, a demultiplexer 6419 is connected to the output interface 6470. The demultiplexer 6419 distributes the signal transmitted from the output interface 6470 to each display unit and the like. That is, the demultiplexer 6419 receives the upper lamp 6150, the side lamp 6151, the center lamp 6152, the waist lamp 6153, the lower lamp 6154, the reel panel lamp 6128, the title panel lamp 6170, the payout exit strobe 6171 according to the data received from the CPU 6410. To control. The title panel lamp 6170 is a lamp that illuminates the title panel 6162, and the payout exit strobe 6171 is a strobe type lamp installed inside the medal payout opening 6155. Note that the CPU 4610 performs signal transmission to the door / liquid crystal screen control unit 6490 via the demultiplexer 6419. The door / liquid crystal screen control unit 6490 is a control unit that controls the liquid crystal display device 6157 and the door device 6163.
<Main processing>

  Next, the main process of the main control unit 6300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit 6300.

  Basic control of the game is performed mainly by the Main CPU 6310 of the main control unit 6300, and the Main CPU 6310 repeatedly executes the main processing of FIG.

  In step S7101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 6310, the interrupt mask is set, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 6313, the operation permission to the watchdog timer (WDT), and the initial value are set. Make settings. In step S7102, the value of the WDT counter is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT is restarted.

  In step S7103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied to the main control unit 6300 by the voltage determination circuit 6327 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). In this case, it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 6310 detects that the power supply has been cut off), the process returns to step S7102, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 6310 has not detected that the power supply has been cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S7104.

  In step S7104, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, processing for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing timer interrupt processing to be described later at regular intervals in the timer circuit 6315, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 6313, and the like are performed.

  In step 1105, it is determined whether a setting key is accepted based on the state of the setting key sensor. If a setting key has been received, the process proceeds to a setting change process in step S7106. If a setting key has not been received, the process proceeds to step S7107.

  In step S7106, a setting change process is performed. In this setting change process, first, the setting of the function-restricted wait is canceled, the interrupt permission is set, and then the set value is changed.

  In step S7107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power supply interruption). And when returning to the state before power interruption, it progresses to step S7108, and when that is not right, it progresses to step S7110.

  In step S7108, after setting a function-restricted wait to wait for an interrupt function for a predetermined time in a timer interrupt process (described later) (after storing information indicating that the function is limited in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 6313). In step S7109, processing at power recovery is performed, for example, the stack pointer stored at the time of power interruption is reset in the stack pointer, and the processing ends.

  In step S7110, game medal insertion processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this game medal insertion process, the setting of the function-limited weight is canceled and the interrupt permission is set, and then a process related to medal insertion is performed.

  In step S7111, a process related to the game start operation is performed. Here, it is checked whether the start lever 6135 has been operated based on the state of the start lever sensor 6321. If it is determined that the start operation has been performed, the number of inserted medals is determined. In step S7112, a random number acquisition process is performed (details will be described later). In step S7113, an internal lottery of a winning combination is performed using the random number acquired in step S7112 and the lottery data stored in the ROM 6312.

  In step S7114, all reels 6110-6112 are started to rotate by the reel rotation start process. At this time, a reel stop control table that defines the stop positions of the reels 6110 to 6112 is selected based on the result of the internal lottery in step S7113.

  In step S7115, it is checked whether or not the stop buttons 6137 to 6139 are operated based on the state of the stop button sensor 6322. If it is determined that the stop buttons 6137 to 6139 are operated, the reel stop selected in step S7114 is performed. Based on the control table, the reels 6110 to 6112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 6137 to 6139 stop rotating. Based on the state of the index sensor 6325, it is determined whether or not all the reels 6110 to 6112 are stopped. If all the reels 6110 to 6112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S7116. It waits for 6139 to be operated to stop all reels 6110-6112.

  In step S7116, the winning determination of the symbols of all reels 6110-6112 stopped by pressing the stop buttons 6137-6139 is performed. Here, it is determined that a winning combination has been won when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination or flag-carrying winning combination is aligned (displayed) on the activated winning line 6114. In step S7117, medal payout processing is performed. In this medal payout process, if a winning combination is awarded, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S7118, control for ending the game and control for shifting the game state are performed. For example, in the case of BB winning or RB winning, preparation is made so that the BB game or RB game can be started from the next time, and in those final games, preparation is made so that the normal game can be started from the next time.

Thus, one game is completed, and thereafter, the game proceeds by repeating this main process.
<Game medal insertion process>

  Next, the game medal insertion process in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of game medal insertion processing.

  In step S7301, the clock signal status bit in the internal information register is referenced to determine whether or not the clock signal status bit is set to 1. If the clock signal status bit is set to 1 (if there is an abnormality in the random number clock RCK), the process proceeds to step S7302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S7303.

  In step S7302, in order to send information indicating that there is an abnormality in the random number clock RCK to another control unit (for example, the sub control unit 6400), after setting the output of the stop command due to the abnormality in the random number clock, the processing Exit. The sub-control unit 6400 that has received the stop command due to the abnormality of the random number clock indicates the abnormality of the random number clock by displaying on the liquid crystal display device 6157, sound by the speaker 6484, movement by the door device (movable object) 6163, and the like. Inform.

  In step S7303, it is confirmed whether or not a game medal has been inserted. If a game medal has been inserted, the process proceeds to step S7304 to perform a bet number increasing process, and if no game medal has been inserted, the process proceeds to step S7305.

  In step S7305, it is confirmed whether or not the settlement button has been operated. If the settlement button has been operated, the process proceeds to step S7306 to perform a game media settlement process. move on.

  In step S7307, it is determined whether or not the number of game medals bet is greater than 0. If yes, the process proceeds to step S7308; otherwise, the process returns to step S7301.

In step S7308, it is confirmed whether or not there is a start operation. If there is a start operation, the process ends. If there is no start operation, the process returns to step S7301.
<Random number acquisition processing>

  Next, the random number acquisition process in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of random number acquisition processing.

  In step S7401, it is determined whether or not the clock signal status bit is set by referring to the clock signal status bit of the internal information register. If the clock signal status bit is set to 1 (when the random number clock RCK is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S7402; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S7403.

In step S7402, in order to send information indicating that there is an abnormality in the random number clock RCK to another control unit (for example, the sub control unit 6400), after setting the output of the stop command due to the abnormality in the random number clock, the process Exit. The sub-control unit 6400 that has received the stop command due to the abnormality of the random number clock indicates the abnormality of the random number clock by displaying on the liquid crystal display device 6157, sound by the speaker 6484, movement by the door device (movable object) 6163, and the like. Inform. In the next step S7403, after the random number is acquired from the random number generation circuit 6317, the process is terminated.
<Timer interrupt processing>

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the Main CPU 6310 of the main control unit 6300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing.

  The Main CPU 6310 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, approximately once every 1.504 ms), and executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle triggered by the timer interrupt.

  In step S7201, each register of the Main CPU 6310 is saved on the stack. In step S7202, the value of the input port is acquired and the states of various sensors (medal insertion sensor 6320, start lever sensor 6321, stop button sensor 6322, medal payout sensor 6326, etc.) are detected. More specifically, signals output from a plurality of sensors such as a medal insertion sensor 6320, a start lever sensor 6321, a stop button sensor 6322, and a medal payout sensor 6326 are input, and outputs from the plurality of sensors are turned on or off, respectively. Determine whether.

  In step S7203, whether or not the interrupt function is limited, that is, whether or not a function limit weight is set in the main process (information indicating that the function is limited is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 6313). Or not). If the interrupt function is limited (when a function-limited wait is set), the process proceeds to step S7209 without performing the processing of steps S7204 to S7208. If the interrupt function is not limited (a function-limited wait is set). If not set), the process advances to step S7204.

  In step S7204, game medal insertion acceptance processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this game medal insertion acceptance process, processing related to the insertion of game medals is performed based on the current gaming state, the prescribed number of medals required for one game, and the like.

  In step S7205, reel control processing such as rotation control and stop control of the reels 6110-6112 is performed, and in step S7206, other processing is performed. In step S7207, data output to the game lamp 6340 (upper lamp 6150, side lamp 6151, center lamp 6152, waist lamp 6153, lower lamp 6154, saucer lamp 6156, etc.) is updated.

  In step S7208, an error monitoring process is always performed. In this constant error monitoring process, based on the state of the medal payout sensor 6326 detected in step 1202, errors such as a hopper are monitored and error detection information is updated.

  In step S7209, a concentrated terminal board signal setting process is performed. In this concentrated terminal board signal setting process, a state composite signal is generated based on the security state information stored in the RAM 6313 and serially output. Further, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and external signals 1 to 4 are generated based on medal insertion information stored in the RAM 6313 and are output in parallel.

  In step S7210, data to be output to the 7SEG display 6341 is set. In step S7211, data to be output to the reel motor control unit 6330 and the hopper motor control unit 6331 is set. In addition, referring to the clock signal status bit of the internal information register and when the clock signal status bit of the internal information register is set to 1 (when the frequency of the random number clock is equal to or lower than the frequency of the system clock), the random number It is determined that some abnormality (for example, disconnection of the wiring pattern connecting the random number generation circuit 6317 and the crystal oscillator 6316) has occurred in the clock for use, and information indicating the error is displayed using the 7SEG display 6341. On the other hand, when the clock signal status bit of the internal information register is set to 0 (when the frequency of the random number clock is less than the frequency of the system clock), it is determined that the random number clock is normal, and the next The process proceeds to step S7212.

  In step S7212, a control command is output to the sub-control unit 6400, and in step S7213, various counter timers (for example, the above-described security signal output standby timer) stored in the RAM 6313 are updated.

  In step S7214, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is on, that is, whether or not a predetermined voltage is supplied to the slot machine 6100. If the voltage drop signal is on (when a predetermined voltage is not supplied to the slot machine 6100), the process proceeds to step S7217. If the voltage drop signal is off (a predetermined voltage is supplied to the slot machine 6100). If yes, the process proceeds to step S7215.

  In step S7215, the register saved in step S7201 is restored, and in step S7216, an interrupt is set to be permitted.

  In steps S7217 to S7220, a power interruption process is performed. More specifically, in step S7217, the current stack pointer is saved, and in step S7218, the power status is updated to “power failure”. In step S7219, a checksum is calculated and set using the value stored in the RAM 6313. In step S7220, writing to the RAM 6313 is prohibited, and an infinite loop is entered.

  If the above-described present invention is applied to the CPU 6310 and the CPU 6410 (package) of such a slot machine 6100, the back side of the game control microcomputer can be visually recognized through the easy-to-view part, and illegal parts are placed on the back side of the microcomputer. It may be possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as attaching

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine and the slot machine according to the above-described embodiment, and can be applied to, for example, an enclosed gaming machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.
<Embodiment 4>

  Hereinafter, a pachinko machine (game table) according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 233 shows an example of power supply among the power supply board 182, the payout board 170, and the main board 156 described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 233 (a), the power supply line pl01 and the power supply line pl02 are drawn from the power supply board 182 including the power supply control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and the power supply line pl01 and the power supply line pl02 are extracted. Both are connected to a payout board (payout control board) 170 including a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls. When a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a DC (direct current) voltage of 12V is applied to the power supply line pl01, and a direct current voltage different from DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl02. A power supply line pl03 is drawn from the payout board 170, and the power supply line pl03 is connected to a main board (main control board) 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game. The power supply line pl03 is connected to the power supply line pl01 in the payout board 170. Accordingly, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 12 V is supplied to the main board 156 from the power supply board 182 through the payout board 170. Note that these voltage values are merely examples, and it is of course possible to apply voltages having different voltage values depending on the circuit to be driven.

  In the example shown in FIG. 233 (b), the power supply line pl04, the power supply line pl05, and the power supply line pl06 are drawn from the power supply board 182. The power supply line pl04 is connected to the main board 156. Both the power supply line pl05 and the power supply line pl06 are connected to the payout board 170. When a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a DC12V voltage is applied to the power supply line pl04 and the power supply line pl05, and a DC voltage different from DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl06. That is, when a certain time has elapsed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 12 V is directly supplied from the power supply board 182 to the main board 156 without going through the payout board 170.

  In the example shown in FIG. 233 (c), the power supply line pl07, the power supply line pl08, the power supply line pl09, and the power supply line pl10 are drawn from the power supply board 182. The power supply line pl07 and the power supply line pl08 are connected to the main board 156. Both the power supply line pl09 and the power supply line pl10 are connected to the payout board 170. When a certain time has elapsed after power-on, a DC12V voltage is applied to the power supply line pl07 and the power supply line pl09, a DC5V voltage is applied to the power supply line pl08, and a DC voltage different from DC5V / 12V is applied to the power supply line pl10. Is done. That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on, two types of voltages, DC5V and DC12V, are directly supplied to the main board 156 from the power supply board 182 without passing through the payout board 170.

  FIG. 234 shows an example of power supply in the main board 156. This example will be described using the configuration shown in FIG. The power supply line pl03 drawn from the payout board 170 is drawn into the main board 156 and connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter 7001. The DC-DC converter 7001 has a function of converting DC12V voltage applied to the power supply line pl03 into DC5V. The voltage of DC5V generated by the DC-DC converter 7001 is applied to the power supply line pl11.

  A plurality of branch lines are connected to the power supply line pl11, and a predetermined branch line is connected to the power supply terminal A of the reset IC 7003. When a certain period of time has elapsed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 5 V is applied as a drive voltage to the power supply terminal A, thereby driving the reset IC 7003. Further, another branch line branched from the power supply line pl11 is connected to the power supply terminal F of the microcomputer (CPU) 304. When a certain time elapses after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC 5 V is applied to the power supply terminal F as a drive voltage for the microcomputer 304. Note that the drive voltages of the reset IC 7003 and the microcomputer 304 are not the same and may be different. Further, the voltage value itself of the drive voltage of the reset IC 7003 or the microcomputer 304 may be different from the voltage value of the voltage applied to the power supply line pl11.

  The signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the power supply line pl11 through another branch line. The reset IC 7003 monitors the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B and grasps the state of the driving voltage of the microcomputer 304 applied to the terminal F of the microcomputer 304. On the other hand, the signal input terminal C of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the power supply line pl03 via a predetermined branch line. The reset IC 7003 monitors the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C and grasps the state of the voltage applied to the power supply line pl03.

  The reset IC 7003 is provided with at least two signal output terminals D and E. A reset signal (start signal) is output from the signal output terminal D, and a low voltage signal is output from the signal output terminal E. If the reset IC 7003 determines that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B does not exceed the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5V) of the microcomputer 304, the reset IC 7003 negates the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D. To. On the other hand, if it is determined that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B has exceeded the operation guarantee voltage of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D is asserted (valid). That is, when the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B does not exceed the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5 V) of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D becomes a negated state, and the signal input terminal When the terminal voltage of B exceeds the operation guarantee voltage of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D is asserted. Note that the number of terminals of the reset IC 7003 is arbitrary, and the illustrated one is only an example, and only the terminals necessary for the description are illustrated, and the number and arrangement positions of the terminals may be the same as those illustrated. And it doesn't have to be the same.

  The signal output terminal D of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the signal input terminal G of the microcomputer 304 via the signal line pl12. The signal input terminal G is used as a system reset (XSRST) terminal. For this reason, when the reset signal output to the signal line pl12 is asserted, the microcomputer 304 shifts to the security mode. Thus, the reset IC 7003 functions as the start signal output circuit 340 shown in FIG. 4 with the signal output terminal D functioning as a reset signal output terminal.

  When the reset IC 7003 determines that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C does not exceed a predetermined voltage value (for example, 9 V), the reset IC 7003 asserts the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C exceeds a predetermined voltage value, the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E is negated.

  The signal output terminal E of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the signal input terminal H of the microcomputer 304 via the signal line pl13. The signal input terminal H is used as one of the data terminals D0 to D7. For example, the microcomputer 304 repeats the processes of, for example, step S103 and step S105 in FIG. 10 until the low voltage signal output to the signal line pl13 is negated. As described above, the reset IC 7003 functions as the voltage monitoring circuit 338 shown in FIG. 4 with the signal output terminal E functioning as a constant voltage signal output terminal.

  In this example, the predetermined threshold voltage value of the signal input terminal C when the low voltage signal on the signal line pl13 changes from the asserted state to the negated state (or vice versa) is set to 9V, but is not limited thereto. For example, the voltage at which the microcomputer 304 can continue the power interruption process is applied to the power supply terminal F during the period required from the power interruption detection to the power interruption process in steps S239 and S243 of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. That's fine. The DC5V voltage output from the DC-DC converter 7001 to the power supply line pl11 starts to gradually decrease around the time when the DC12V voltage of the power supply line pl03 input to the DC-DC converter 7001 decreases to about 7V. Therefore, when the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C becomes less than a predetermined voltage value (for example, 9 V), the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E is changed from the negated state to the asserted state. If, for example, 9V is used as the predetermined voltage value, even if the voltage of the power supply line pl11 gradually decreases, the microcomputer during the period required for the power interruption process from the power interruption detection in steps S239 and S243 of the main control unit timer interrupt process 304 can continue to operate.

  FIG. 235 shows an example of power supply in the power supply board 182 and the main board 156. In comparison with the power supply configuration shown in FIG. 234, the DC-DC converter 7001 and the reset IC 7003 arranged in the main substrate 156 in FIG. 234 are arranged on the power supply substrate 182 in the configuration shown in FIG. Yes. Thereby, the power supply line pl11 and the signal lines pl12 and pl13 are wired across the power supply board 182 and the main board 156. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to supply all the power of DC5V, DC12V, and other voltage values with the power supply board 182, and therefore it is not necessary to provide a power supply circuit on the main board 156 or the payout board 170. In some cases, there is a margin in the above circuit layout.

  FIG. 236 shows an example of power supply in the main board 156. FIG. 236 (a) shows a state in which the branch line of the power supply line pl11 is connected to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT and the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI of the CPU 304, and a DC5V voltage is constantly applied to both terminals XINT and XNMI. ing. By doing so, the interrupt signals input to both terminals XINT and XNMI always maintain a negated state, so that malfunction due to noise or the like can be reliably prevented when an external interrupt by the interrupt terminal is not used. The configuration shown in FIG. 236 (b) exemplifies the case where the terminal H of the CPU 304 in the configuration shown in FIG. 234 functions as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. Note that the symbol X of the interrupt terminal indicates low active and the L signal is input to be in an asserted state, but in the case of a circuit that is in a high active and asserted state, the L signal (for example, 0 V) is always input. Like that.

  FIG. 237 is a time chart of the startup process after the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. It shows the passage of time from left to right in the figure. The operation mode, the XRSTO terminal, and the XSRST terminal shown from the lower stage to the middle stage in the figure are the same as those shown in FIG. A low voltage signal, a microcomputer voltage, and a monitoring voltage are shown from the middle to the top. The low voltage signal is, for example, a signal output from the terminal E of the reset IC 7003 shown in FIG. 234 to the terminal H (predetermined D terminal) of the CPU 304 via the signal line pl13. The microcomputer voltage indicates a voltage level on the power supply line pl11 applied to the power supply terminal F of the CPU 304 shown in FIG. 234, for example. The monitoring voltage is a voltage applied to the power supply line pl03 input to the signal input terminal C of the reset IC 7003.

  As shown in FIG. 237, at time T-XSRST when the system reset signal is asserted and the signal level of the XSRST terminal becomes H after power-on, the monitoring voltage is about 7V, for example, and the microcomputer voltage is about 4.5V, for example. It has become. When the system reset signal is asserted, the mode shifts to the security mode, and the random extension process is executed following the security check process. In this example, after the security check is completed and before the random extension process starts, the reset signal at the XRSTO terminal is asserted. After the random extension process is completed, the process shifts to the user mode, the game control program is executed, and the main control part main process is started.

  The monitor voltage gradually rises to a predetermined voltage value after the power is turned on. Along with this, the microcomputer voltage also rises, and a power supply voltage of approximately 5 V is obtained immediately after the system reset signal is output. The monitoring voltage continues to rise, and the low voltage signal changes from the asserted state to the negated state at time T-low voltage when the threshold voltage level (lower limit voltage, for example, 9 V) S indicated by the broken line is exceeded. Further, when a predetermined time elapses, the monitoring voltage becomes approximately 12 V as a predetermined voltage value (a predetermined voltage that is equal to or higher than the operating voltage value of the CPU 304 and lower than the upper limit voltage of the power supply line). In this example, the WDT 314 is automatically activated, and the WDT 314 is automatically activated immediately after the start of the user mode. Thereafter, the clear & restart process of the WDT 314 is repeatedly executed in step S103 of the main control part main process. FIG. 237 illustrates the first WDT clear and restart immediately after the WDT 314 is activated.

  FIG. 238 shows a monitoring voltage (voltage applied to the power supply line pl03) in which the range surrounded by the dashed ellipse O in FIG. 237 is enlarged. 238 (a) and (b) show the passage of time from the left to the right in the figure. In the vertical direction, the voltage value of the monitoring voltage is shown in 1V increments from 7V to 12V. FIG. 238 (a) shows an ideal rise in the monitoring voltage. FIG. 238 (b) is a diagram for explaining a problem caused by clearing and restarting the WDT 314. As shown in FIG. 238 (a), ideally, at the time T1, the monitoring voltage exceeds the threshold voltage (9V), and then the first timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 is started while the monitoring voltage further increases. The Since the monitoring voltage has already exceeded the threshold voltage at time T, the low voltage signal output from the terminal E of the reset IC is already negated when the first timer interrupt process starts. For this reason, the power interruption state is not detected in the power interruption detection determination process (step S239) in the first main control unit timer interruption process.

  On the other hand, FIG. 238 (b) shows a state in which the clear and restart of WDT 314 executed in step S103 of the main control unit main process is repeatedly executed after the WDT 314 is automatically activated. As shown in FIG. 238 (b), a voltage drop (noise) phenomenon occurs in the voltage applied to the power supply line pl03 every time the clear & restart process of the WDT 314 occurs. If this repeated process of clearing and restarting WDT 314 is performed from the initial stage when the voltage applied to the power supply line pl03 starts to rise, the accumulation of voltage drops increases, so the time when the monitored voltage first exceeds the threshold voltage T2 is later than time T1 shown in FIG. 238 (a). In this way, repeated clearing and restarting of the WDT 314 delays raising the applied voltage of the power supply line pl03 to a predetermined voltage, and the processing time of the main control unit main processing becomes unnecessarily long. Have.

  Further, even if the monitoring voltage exceeds the threshold at time T2 and the low voltage signal at the signal output terminal E of the reset IC 7003 changes from the asserted state to the negated state, the first main control unit timer interrupt processing causes the WDT clear & restart. When a voltage drop occurs in the monitoring voltage, at the time of the power interruption detection determination process (step S239) of the main control unit timer interruption process, the monitoring voltage again falls below the threshold level and the signal output terminal E of the reset IC 7003 is low. The voltage signal returns from the negated state to the asserted state. In this case, since the power interruption detection determination process (step S239) of the first main control unit timer interruption process is determined as a power interruption state, the power interruption process (step S243) may be executed. .

  In order to solve the above problem, at least the first clear & restart process of WDT 314 is based on the time T-low voltage when the monitoring voltage exceeds the threshold voltage level S and the low voltage signal changes from the asserted state to the negated state. It may be executed later. In order to ensure that the first clearing and restarting process of WDT 314 is later than time T-low voltage, WDT 314 activation (manual activation or automatic activation) may be started after time T-low voltage. Since the WDT 314 is activated at the earliest time when the user mode starts, the time T-low voltage may arrive before the user mode starts.

  FIG. 239 shows a WDT driving method in which the time T-low voltage arrives before the start of the user mode and the first clear & restart process of the WDT 314 is executed after the time T-low voltage (part 1). FIG. 239 is a time chart of the startup process after power-on of the pachinko machine 100 similar to FIG. It shows the passage of time from left to right in the figure. Since the configuration of FIG. 239 is the same as that of FIG. 237, the description of the same configuration is omitted.

  In order to make the time T-low voltage arrive before the user mode start time, the time T-low voltage is made to arrive during the security mode. In order to arrive at the time T-low voltage during the security mode period, the time required for the security mode period is grasped in advance. In addition, the time required from turning on the power to time T-low voltage is grasped based on the voltage rise profile of the monitoring voltage obtained by experiments and simulations. Based on this, the time T-XSRST is determined so that the sum of the time from power-on to time T-XSRST and the time in the security mode period is longer than the time from power-on to time T-low voltage. In this example, random extension processing is included in the security mode period. Therefore, in order to ensure that the time T-low voltage arrives during the security mode period, the sum of the time from power-on to time T-XSRST and the time required for the security check process is from power-on to time T-low voltage. The time T-XSRST is determined so as to be longer than the time.

  Further, when the time T-XSRST is set during the rise of the microcomputer voltage, the threshold voltage for determining the level of the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003 is set as the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5 V) of the microcomputer 304. Set to a higher voltage (eg, 4.8V). Further, as shown in FIG. 239, when the time T-XSRST arrives while the microcomputer voltage is stable at DC 5V, the threshold voltage for determining the level of the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003 is set. For example, the delay time is set to any value between 4.8 and 5.0 V, and a delay process is performed to delay the time when the system reset signal is asserted only during the period from the time when the threshold voltage is reached until the time T-XSRST. To.

  The voltage may be divided in the middle of the branch line from the power supply line pl11 and a voltage considerably lower than the target value DC5V may be applied to the signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003. For example, the threshold voltage may be set to about 1.22V, and the system reset signal may be output when the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B reaches about 1.22V. That is, when a voltage higher than the operation guarantee voltage is applied to the microcomputer 304, a voltage of about 1.22 V is applied to the signal input terminal B.

  In this way, by delaying the timing at which the reset signal output from the reset IC 7003 is in the asserted state as compared with the conventional case, the startup process of the pachinko machine 100 can be stably performed without causing the problem described with reference to FIG. It can be performed.

  FIG. 240 shows a WDT driving method in which the time T-low voltage arrives before the start of the user mode, and the first clear & restart process of the WDT 314 is executed after the time T-low voltage. 2). FIG. 240 is a time chart of the start-up process after power-on of the pachinko machine 100 similar to FIG. It shows the passage of time from left to right in the figure. The configuration in FIG. 240 is the same as that in FIG. 237, so description of the same configuration is omitted.

  In order to make the time T-low voltage arrive before the user mode start time, in order to make the time T-low voltage arrive during the security mode period, the time required for the security mode period is grasped in advance. In addition, the time required from turning on the power to time T-low voltage is grasped based on the voltage rise profile of the monitoring voltage obtained by experiments and simulations. Based on this, the time of the security mode period is determined so that the sum of the time from power-on to time T-XSRST and the time of the security mode period is longer than the time from power-on to time T-low voltage.

  Further, when the voltage rise profile of the microcomputer voltage is grasped by experiment or simulation so that the time T-XSRST arrives while the microcomputer voltage is rising, the level of the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003 Is set to a voltage (for example, 4.8V) higher than the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5V) of the microcomputer 304. Further, as shown in FIG. 239, when the time T-XSRST arrives while the microcomputer voltage is stable at DC 5V, the threshold voltage for determining the level of the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003 is set. For example, the delay time is set to any value between 4.8 and 5.0 V, and a delay process is performed to delay the time when the system reset signal is asserted only during the period from the time when the threshold voltage is reached until the time T-XSRST. To.

  Fixed extension processing in the security mode so that the total time required from the power-on to time T-XSRST and the time required for the security mode is longer than the time from power-on to time T-low voltage. Decide how long it will take. For the time required for the fixed extension process, a corresponding numerical value is set in advance in the program management area. In this example, random extension processing is included in the security mode period. Therefore, in order to ensure that the time T-low voltage arrives during the security mode period, the sum of the time from power-on to time T-XSRST, the time required for the security check process, and the time for the fixed extension process is For example, based on the table shown in FIG. 114A, the fixed extension processing time is determined so as to be longer than the time from turning on to time T-low voltage.

  In this manner, by adjusting the time required for the fixing and extending process, the pachinko machine 100 can be stably started without causing the problem described with reference to FIG. By simply adjusting the time required for the fixing and extending process, it is not necessary to make a design change to the reset IC 7003 or the peripheral circuit, so the start-up process of the pachinko machine 100 can be easily and stably performed at a low cost.

  Further, as a method of reliably performing the initial clearing and restarting process of the WDT 314 after the time T-low voltage, the time T-low voltage may arrive after the start of the user mode. In this case, in the game control program, it is determined that time T-low voltage has arrived. If it is determined that time T-low voltage has arrived, WDT 314 is manually activated.

  FIG. 241 shows a WDT driving method in which the time T-low voltage arrives after the start time of the user mode, and the first clear & restart process of the WDT 314 is executed after the time T-low voltage (part 3). ). FIG. 241 is a time chart of the startup process after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100 similar to FIG. It shows the passage of time from left to right in the figure. Since the configuration of FIG. 241 is the same as that of FIG. 237, the description of the same configuration is omitted.

  In order to make the time T-low voltage arrive after the user mode start time, the time T-low voltage is made to arrive after the security mode. In order to make the time T-low voltage arrive after the security mode, the time required for the security mode period is grasped in advance. In addition, the time required from turning on the power to time T-low voltage is grasped based on the voltage rise profile of the monitoring voltage obtained by experiments and simulations. Based on this, the time T-XSRST and the security mode period are set so that the sum of the time from the power-on to the time T-XSRST and the time of the security mode period is shorter than the time from the power-on to the time T-low voltage. Decide on one or both of the times. In this example, random extension processing is included in the security mode period. Therefore, to ensure that the time T-low voltage arrives after the security mode period, the time from power-on to the time T-XSRST, the time required for the security check process, the time for the fixed extension process, and the random extension process Time to time T-XSRST, time required for security check processing, time for fixed extension processing, time for random extension processing, so that the total with the maximum time of power is shorter than the time from power-on to time T-low voltage Determine the maximum time.

  Further, the microcomputer 304 grasps the voltage rise profile of the microcomputer voltage, and sets the threshold voltage for judging the level of the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003 so that the time T-XSRST arrives while the microcomputer voltage is rising. Is set to a voltage (for example, 4.8 V) higher than the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5 V).

  Based on the above viewpoint, by adjusting the time until time T-XSRST, the time required for security check processing, the time for fixed extension processing, and the maximum time for random extension processing, the main control unit 300 starts main processing after the main processing starts. Prior to the first interrupt permitting the transition to the timer interrupt process of the control unit 300, the time T-low voltage can be reached and the WDT 314 can be manually activated.

  In the game control program, a process (1) for determining whether or not a low voltage signal is in a negated state is added, and a process (2) for manually starting WDT 314 when the low voltage signal is in a negated state is added. Keep it. By doing so, it is possible to stably start the pachinko machine 100 without causing the problem described with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the time chart of the start-up process after power-on of the pachinko machine 100 is known as shown in FIG. 237, it is only necessary to add the processes (1) and (2) to the game control program. The start-up process of the pachinko machine 100 can be performed stably without causing the problem described with reference to H.238.

  <Main control unit main processing and main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing and main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 and 243. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the main control unit, and the flow is substantially the same as the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and is composed of a flow substantially similar to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In FIG. 242 and FIG. 243, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 10 and FIG.

  First, in the control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 243, the timer interrupt start process (step S201) to the device monitoring process (step S237) are sequentially executed as in the process shown in FIG. Next, in step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on (asserted). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, the interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main process in the main control unit shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Do. If the WDT 314 is manually activated, the WDT 314 may be stopped in step S243.

  Next, in step S244, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (this embodiment). When the voltage is less than 9V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process of monitoring whether or not the low voltage signal is output is repeated, and when the low voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 is powered off) If no shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to initial setting 1 (step S101) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 242, and the main control unit main process is continued. When the WDT 314 is manually activated and the WDT 314 is stopped in step S243, the process of step S244 can be repeated without shifting to the reset process due to the WDT timeout. For example, during the special figure variation game, when the WDT 314 is temporarily stopped during the power interruption process in step S243 and the voltage becomes stable at a low voltage (when the step S244 is infinitely looped), the sub-control unit 400 side displays the special figure. Since the command indicating the end of the variable game cannot be received, the state during the special figure variable game or the state of the fluctuation of the swing is indefinite.

Also, with this configuration, 16-bit address information (for example, E000H) output from the address signals A0 to A15 terminals is not output immediately after timeout of the WDT 314 as shown in FIG. 120 (b). Can do. This may prevent unauthorized use by unauthorized persons. In addition, according to this configuration, the security mode can be omitted and the process can be started from the user mode, so that the pachinko machine 100 can be started quickly. Note that the transition destination from step S244 to the main control unit main process need not be limited to step S101. For example, the processing of steps S101 to S105 may be omitted, and the process may be executed from the initial setting 2 of steps S244 to S107.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a modification of the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process according to this modification. The flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process according to the present modification is a determination process for power interruption detection in the process from the timer interrupt start process (step S201) to the timer interrupt end process (step S241) shown in FIG. This is characterized in that (Step S239) and the power interruption process (Step S243) are omitted. In FIG. 244, the same process as that shown in FIG. 10 is denoted by the same step number, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 244 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of non-maskable interrupt (NMI) processing in the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. The non-maskable interrupt is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 304 is in an interrupt disabled state. The non-maskable interrupt is executed by setting an interrupt signal input to the XNMI terminal to an asserted state (low level in this example). In this modified example, when a non-maskable interrupt occurs, the power interruption process (step S243) is executed. In this way, the power interruption process is separated from the main control part timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control part 300, and the power interruption process is performed on condition that a non-maskable interrupt occurs. By doing so, stable game control can be performed. Note that the low voltage state determination process (step S244) of FIG. 243 may be added after the power interruption process (step S243) of the NMI process. If there is a timer interrupt during the NMI process, the process may be shifted to the timer interrupt process after the NMI process ends.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, a modified example of the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 245 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S8101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S8103, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). When the voltage is less than 9V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply has been cut off), the processing of step S8103 is repeated, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 has not detected the power supply being cut off). ) Proceeds to step S8107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process of step S8103 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S8105, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 (eg, a test output port) , A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S8107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption), and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to initialization processing (step S8115).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is ON (the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S8115 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S8115 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S8109 to delay the subsequent processing, and then the state before power interruption is established. Proceed to step S8111 to return. If the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process advances to step S8115 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process advances to step S8115.

  In step S8109, a delay process is executed (details will be described later).

  In step S8111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S8121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S8111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S8233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S8113, time measurement by the WDT 314 is started.

  In step S8115, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S8115) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S8233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S8117, delay processing is executed (details will be described later).

  In step S8119, the counter value of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is started.

  In step S8121, the basic random number initial value update process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S8207 described later. In step S8121, in addition to the basic random number initial value updating process, a basic random number updating process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number updating process may be performed.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S8121 except during the timer interrupt process starting at predetermined intervals.
<Delay processing>

  Next, delay processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of delay processing in the main processing of the main control unit.

  In step S811, processing for transmitting a clear signal from a predetermined output port of I / O is executed.

  In step S 8133, a sub control unit activation wait counter that determines a cycle for waiting for activation of the first sub control unit 400 is initialized (for example, 90 is set).

  In step S8135, an interrupt function limited counter is initialized (for example, 250 is set). The interrupt function limited counter is subtracted by timer interrupt processing every 4 ms.

  In step S8137, a basic random number initial value update process is executed (details will be described later). In step S8137, in addition to the basic random number initial value updating process, a basic random number updating process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number updating process may be performed.

  In step S8139, command transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S8141, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limit counter is 0. If the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S8137. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limit counter is 0, that is, if 250 is set in the interrupt function limit counter in step S8135 and is subtracted by the timer interrupt process every 4 ms and 1000 ms = 1 second has passed, the process proceeds to step S8143.

  In step S8143, the sub-control unit activation wait counter is decremented by 1.

  In step S8145, it is determined whether or not the sub control unit activation wait counter is 0. If the sub control unit activation wait counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S8135. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit activation wait counter is 0, ie, 90 is set in the sub-control unit activation wait counter in step S8133 and 90 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S8147.

In step S8147, other processing is executed.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S8201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S8203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, clear and restart are performed once every about 2 ms which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S8205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S8205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is activated, in step S8205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S8205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S8207 and step S8209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S8115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S8211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S8212, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation counter is 0. If the interrupt function limitation counter is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S8213. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limit counter is 0, the process advances to step S8214.

  In step S8213, the interrupt function limitation counter is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S8239.

  In step S8214, it is determined whether or not a specific abnormality detection flag (described later in detail) is ON. If the specific abnormality detection flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S8239. On the other hand, if the specific abnormality detection flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S8215.

  In step S8215, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S 8216, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226 and 234 and starting holes 230, 232 and 228 have been won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read and 1 is added to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S8217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S8203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S8219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S8221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S8223.

  In step S8223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S8225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S8233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S8233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S8233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S8233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S8233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S8233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S8227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S8227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S8225 and step S8227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for special figure 2 is performed first (step S8229), and then the special figure related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S8231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S8232, device monitoring processing is executed (details will be described later).

  In step S8233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands (for example, a signal indicating a specific abnormality when there is a specific abnormality in the device monitoring process in step S8232) are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, commands such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, FRAM (registered trademark) clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S8233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S8235, external output signal setting processing is performed. Specifically, an external terminal board signal, a test fire test signal, and the like are set. If there is a specific abnormality in the device monitoring process in step S8232, a signal indicating the specific abnormality is set. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S8239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S8243. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S8241.

  In step S8241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S8201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S8243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

  The following errors can be considered as errors monitored in the device monitoring process (step S8232).

  The error types are: tray full tank error (bottom full tank error), payout device error, payout excess error, payout error, payout number switch error, main control communication error, CR unit disconnected error, CR unit communication error, magnetic error Error, external clock error, magnetic field error, switch level error, frame open error (front frame door open error), switch disconnection error, shock sensor error, etc. Of these errors, the underfill full tank error or the like is not applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine.

  The bottom pan full tank error is when the on state of the bottom pan full switch signal is read from the main when the timer interrupt is read once by the predetermined input port of the main board (when switching from the off state to the on state). It is output for payout.

  The payout device error means that the payout number (count number of the payout number switch) is a payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor has finished driving the number of payout requests (actually + brake period + non-excitation period has elapsed). When the number is smaller than the number, the occurrence of a payout device error is detected. When the retry process of paying out the game balls one by one is completed, the error state is canceled.

  The payout excess error is to stop the payout operation when ten game balls actually paid out with respect to the payout request number are detected. This payout excess error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180.

  The illegal payout error is to stop the payout operation when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch is counted) in a state where no payout request is generated. This illegal payout error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180.

  The payout number switch error is an error of the payout number switch (not shown) of the game ball controlled by the payout board 170, and stops the payout operation when an abnormal connection of the payout number switch is detected (regardless of the main board). To do. This payout number switch error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168. After confirming whether the switch is connected correctly, the error cancel switch 168 is operated, or the RAM clear switch 180 is initialized (RAM clear). The error state is released.

  The main control communication error is an error that occurs when the main control connection confirmation signal OFF state is detected or when the main control operation confirmation signal ON state is detected continuously for two interrupts. Reception is impossible. However, if the number of payout requests remains, the payout is made up to that amount. When the ON state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected, and when the OFF state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts, the error state is canceled.

  The CR unit unconnected error occurs when the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is off when the CR unit unconnected error is released and continues for 16 ms. There is no effect on the payout of the ball). When the ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected and continued for 16 ms, the error state is canceled. After the error is released, communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

  Here, the connection signal relationship between the CR unit and the interface will be described. When various signals are transmitted from the CR unit to the payout board via the interface, the CR unit connection signal is a VL signal composed of a + 18V power source in the CR unit. The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal that conveys that the CR unit is being lent. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal for transmitting 25 lending requests and lending instructions for the basic unit.

  The CR unit communication error occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the lending request is generated (although there are other conditions, they are omitted because they are not particularly related here). After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error state is canceled by turning off the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal.

  The magnetic abnormality error is to stop the main control operation when a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The external clock error is an error that occurs when an error is detected in the random number update clock. The magnetic field abnormality error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field exceeding a predetermined amount is detected.

  The switch level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a winning switch is detected and continued for 1 second. The frame opening error is an error that occurs when the opening of the glass frame or the inner frame is detected. The switch non-connection error is an error of a winning switch (not shown), and is an error that occurs when an abnormal connection of a winning switch is detected.

The impact sensor error is an error notification that continues until the power is turned off when the impact sensor detects an impact exceeding a predetermined amount.
<Device monitoring processing>

  Next, device monitoring processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing in the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  In step S8251, device information indicating the presence / absence of the error is initialized.

  In step S8253, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read, the presence or absence of the above-described error is monitored, and if the error is detected, the process proceeds to step S8255. On the other hand, if the above error is not detected, the device monitoring process is terminated.

  In step S8255, abnormality information (device information) indicating the error detected in step S8253 is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S8257, it is determined whether or not there is specific abnormality information in the abnormality information set in step S8255. If there is specific abnormality information, the process proceeds to step S8257. On the other hand, if there is no specific abnormality information, the process proceeds to step S8261. The specific abnormality information is abnormality information of one or a plurality of errors set in advance from the above-described abnormality information regarding errors. For example, abnormality information of a magnetic abnormality error may be set in advance as specific abnormality information.

  In step S8259, the specific abnormality detection flag is turned on.

  In step S8261, a device command transmission request is set.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment described above will be described.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Each of the plurality of types of game control processes related to the game is performed by at least one of main control (for example, main control unit main process) and interrupt control (for example, main control unit timer interrupt process) performed at every predetermined interrupt cycle. Game control means (for example, main control unit 300, user program) executed in one of the controls,

  Measurement of elapsed time is started based on receiving a start instruction (for example, automatic start processing or manual start processing) from the game control means, and the elapsed time is set to a specific time (for example, a timeout set in the program management area) Time), and a return instruction (for example, output of a time-out signal to the internal bus) is given to the game control means based on the determination that the elapsed time has exceeded a specific time. A return instruction means (for example, WDT 314) for initializing the elapsed time based on receiving an initialization instruction (for example, a restart instruction) from the game control means;

When the voltage (for example, DC12V) of the monitored power supply line (for example, power supply line pl03) is lower than the lower limit voltage (for example, DC9V), the low voltage signal output to the game control means is asserted, A gaming machine comprising voltage monitoring means (for example, a reset IC 7003) capable of negating the low voltage signal when the voltage of the power line becomes higher than a lower limit voltage,

  The start instruction is issued after the low voltage signal is changed from the asserted state to the negated state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the WDT is activated after the low voltage signal as the power supply monitoring signal changes from the asserted state to the negated state. For example, when the monitoring voltage becomes 9V or higher, the power supply monitoring signal is negated. When the monitoring voltage becomes less than 9V, the power supply monitoring signal is asserted. To start WDT after the low-voltage signal changes from the asserted state to the negated state, specifically, (1) delay the timing at which the reset signal is output from the reset IC by the circuit, (2) fixed extension function (3) WDT manual activation.

  Conventionally, the WDT is started immediately after the power is turned on, and loop processing is performed until the voltage is stabilized. And WDT clear & restart was repeatedly performed in the loop processing. In this case, since a WDT clear & restart signal is periodically output until the voltage becomes stable, there is a problem that it is easy to determine the execution time of the specific process with reference to the signal output timing. In addition, since WDT clear & restart is repeatedly performed before the voltage is stabilized, there is a problem that the time until the voltage is stabilized becomes long due to the influence of noise.

  According to the present invention, it may be possible to shorten the time until the voltage stabilizes, and to make it difficult to determine the execution timing of the specific process using the WDT clear & restart signal.

  In the case of a WDT timeout, by performing a system reset operation, it may be difficult to determine the execution time of the specific process, and it may be difficult to analyze the user program.

  In addition, when the WDT is manually activated and the power interruption process occurs, the WDT may not be stopped during the power interruption process. In the timer interrupt control process of the main control unit, the power interruption process is executed when a low voltage signal is detected. In this case, an abnormality may have occurred in the electrical system of the pachinko machine. At this time, if the value of the remaining timer of the WDT is shortened, a timeout signal may be immediately output and the system may be reset. It is normal to temporarily stop the WDT before power interruption processing, but in the case of a normal voltage drop such as a power failure, there is almost no adverse effect on the WDT, and in the case of fraudulent acts, a high voltage can be temporarily applied. Yes, WDT has an adverse effect. That is, the WDT may not be stopped so that the normal player can complete the power interruption process and the unauthorized person can prevent the power interruption process from completing. Also, WDT may not be stopped even in the case of momentary power failure (a state where the voltage drops below 9V and immediately recovers to 9V or higher).

  Further, even when a magnetic field detection signal, a magnetic detection signal, a radio wave detection signal, a vibration detection signal, or the like is input to a predetermined terminal, the start of WDT is started, and further, the clear & restart of WDT is executed. It may be. Before performing error notification processing based on these detection signals, it may be possible to confirm that an abnormality has occurred due to WDT timeout (especially effective when error notification processing is executed within timer interrupt processing). In some cases, it may be noticed before the timer interrupt transition.

  Even when the card unit (CR unit) 608 is not connected to the payout control unit 600, it may be possible to confirm that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine by manually starting the WDT.

  When the monitoring voltage returns to 9V after the power interruption process, WDT manual activation may be performed again (WDT is not stopped by the power interruption process). Since the system reset process by the time-out signal of WDT is not performed, it may be difficult to determine that the monitor signal (E000H) is not output to the address buses A0 to A15 and the address has been returned to a predetermined address.

  Alternatively, the WDT may be activated by a module different from the first module after the power is turned on (such as setting the stack pointer). This may make it difficult to analyze the user program.

  Examples of the positions of WDT manual activation and WDT clear & restart include the following timings.

(A) Either before the low voltage signal output determination loop processing after power-on, during the processing, or after the processing.

(B) Either before the process of setting predetermined data in the built-in register, during the process, or after the process.

(C) Either before the process of referring to the power status (the process of branching), during the process, or after the process.

(D) Either before the check SUM loop process, during the process, or after the process.

(E) Either before the access to the built-in RAM, during the process, or after the process.

(F) Either before return start or initial start, during the process, or after the process.

(G) Either before the interrupt permission, during the process, or after the process.

(H) Either before waiting for activation of the sub-control unit, during the process, or after the process.

(I) Either before the start of updating the soft random number, during the process, or after the process.

(J) Either before sending a command such as a sub-communication confirmation command (sub-start start command, completion command) or a communication confirmation command for payout, during the processing, or after the processing.

(K) Either before the random number maximum value setting process, during the process, or after the process.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

The start instruction is issued before permitting the first interrupt permitting the transition from the main control to the interrupt control.
(3) The pachinko machine 100,

A microprocessor having at least the game control means;
The microprocessor is

  At least, when it is determined by the return instruction means that the elapsed time has exceeded the specific time, a security check is performed and a transition is made to the user mode in which the game control is performed after the security check. At least a random extension process for randomly changing the time is performed, and the user mode is entered after staying in the security mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the random extension process is executed before shifting to the user mode, it is possible to shift the execution start timing of the game control program. For example, it may be difficult to determine the execution time of a soft random number update process, an initial value update process, and the like, and it may be possible to prevent the aim of these specific processes.

(4) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that a predetermined signal is output from a predetermined output terminal of the microprocessor before the random extension process is started.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100, the predetermined terminal is a reset terminal capable of outputting a reset signal to an external device other than the microprocessor.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, a reset signal can be output to the external device before the random extension process, and the execution of the game control program can be started after the random extension process. In some cases, it is difficult to determine the execution timing of the specific processing (for example, soft random number update processing, initial value update processing, etc.), and the aim of these specific processing can be prevented.

(6) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized by having sub-control means for performing effect control based on a command sent from the game control means.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, when power is turned off and before the WDT manual activation is started, the main control unit 300 returns to the main process and the predetermined process in the timer interrupt process after the completion of various processes. In the case of a configuration in which a return command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 at the time of execution of the process, and in a configuration in which the payout control unit 600 does not permit launching without receiving this command, the gaming machine cannot be fired. It may be possible to confirm that an abnormality has occurred.
<Embodiment 5>

  Hereinafter, a pachinko machine (game table) according to Embodiment 5 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 249 shows a procedure for taking a 16-bit random value from the random number generation circuit into the RAM 308. On the right side of the figure, 16-bit random numbers updated by the random number generation circuit 9006 of the 16-bit random number circuit 9000 shown in FIG. Yes. The left side of each row shows the upper byte of the 16-bit random number value, and the right side shows the lower byte. A 16-bit random number value is sequentially updated from top to bottom. In this example, since the maximum value of the random number value is not set, the 16-bit random value is sequentially updated to 0 to 65535 (decimal number). In the middle of the figure, as the registers related to fetching random values among the built-in registers of the microcomputer, from the top, the random value soft latch register, soft latch random value register (lower), soft latch random value register (upper), random software A latch flag register is shown. On the left side of the figure, data stored in a storage area of two consecutive predetermined addresses in the RAM 308 is shown.

  In fetching the random value shown in FIG. 249, “1” is written to the random number soft latch register of the internal register by the user program (see arrow (1)). As a result, a latch signal is output to a predetermined soft latch random value register, and the 16-bit random value input from the random number generation circuit 9006 is latched (see (2)). In the latch process, the lower 8 bits of the latched 16-bit random number value are taken into the soft latch random value register (lower) (see arrow (3)), and then the upper 8 bits are stored in the soft latch random value register (upper). Is taken in (see arrow (4)). When the random number value is taken into the soft latch random value register, “1” is set to the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register (see arrow (5)). Next, when “1” is set to the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register, the first instruction in the user program determines whether the value of the soft latch random number register (lower) is stored in the storage area of the RAM 308 at a predetermined address. Random number (lower order) is stored (see arrow (6)), and then the value of the soft latch random value register (upper order) is determined in the storage area of the address next to the predetermined address in the RAM 308 by the second instruction. ) (See arrow (7)). When the value of the soft latch random value register is stored in the storage area of the predetermined address in the RAM 308, “0” is set to the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register (see arrow (8)).

  FIG. 250 also shows a procedure for taking a 16-bit random number value from the random number generation circuit 9006 into the RAM 308. The arrangement of the components in FIG. 250 is the same as that in FIG. In this example, the maximum random value is set to 100. For this reason, the 16-bit random number value is sequentially updated and updated from 0 to 100 (decimal number).

  In the random number fetching shown in FIG. 250, “1” is written to the random number soft latch register of the internal register by the user program as in the case of FIG. 249 (see arrow (1)). As a result, a latch signal is output to a predetermined soft latch random value register, and the 16-bit random value input from the random number generation circuit 9006 is latched (see (2)). In the latch process, the lower 8 bits of the latched 16-bit random number value are taken into the soft latch random value register (lower) (see arrow (3)), and then the upper 8 bits are stored in the soft latch random value register (upper). Is taken in (see arrow (4)). When the random number value is taken into the soft latch random value register, “1” is set to the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register (see arrow (5)). Next, on condition that the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register is set to “1”, the value of the soft latch random number register (lower order) is stored in a predetermined address in the RAM 308 by the first instruction in the user program. The result is stored as a random number (lower) in the area (see arrow (6)), and then the value of the soft latch random value register (upper) is determined in the storage area of the address next to the predetermined address in the RAM 308 by the second instruction. Stored as a decision random number (upper order) (see arrow (7)). When the value of the soft latch random value register is stored in the storage area of the predetermined address in the RAM 308, “0” is set to the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register (see arrow (8)). In this way, the user program is set up so that the upper 8 bits are taken together even when data fetching is unnecessary because the maximum random number is less than 256 and the upper byte is always 0.

  FIG. 251 (a) is a flowchart showing random number acquisition determination processing executed in the random number acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIGS. 249 and 250. This process is executed, for example, in a winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. When a plurality of special figure 1 random values, special figure 2 random values, ordinary figure random values, etc. are latched within the same interrupt, this random number acquisition determination process is repeated a plurality of times in the winning acceptance process (step S217). When the data read from the ball detection sensors of the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the general figure starting port 228 matches the winning determination pattern, the process proceeds to this processing. For example, when latching the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value within one interrupt, if it is established simultaneously, for example, the special figure 2 random value is latched first, and the special figure 1 random value is obtained at the next interrupt. May be latched. In the case of simultaneous establishment, the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value may be latched within one interrupt. That is, in the case of simultaneous establishment, the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value may not be latched by separate interrupts.

  In the random number acquisition determination process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether a latch condition is satisfied (step S9001). Examples of the latch condition include specifying a target (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2, or Common Chart), obtaining the current number of reserved objects of the specified object, and determining whether the number of reserved objects is not the maximum. The latch condition is not satisfied if the number of holds is maximum, and the latch condition is satisfied if the number of holds is less than the maximum. Other latch conditions may be included in addition to the reserved number. As another latch condition, for example, whether or not an error state occurs may be included in a part of the latch condition. Further, as a matter of course, all other common conditions in the gaming machine may be included as other latch conditions.

  If the main control unit 300 determines in step S9001 that the latch condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S9002 and latches a predetermined random value. If it is determined that the latch condition is not satisfied, step S9002 is omitted and the random number acquisition determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 251 (b) is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process executed in the random number acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIGS. 249 and 250. This process is executed, for example, in a winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. When multiple latches are performed within the same interrupt process (such as special figure 1 random value, special figure 2 random value, ordinary figure random value, etc.), this random number acquisition process is repeated a predetermined number of times in step S217.

  In the random number acquisition process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not a random number acquisition condition is satisfied (step S9003). As a random number acquisition condition, a target (special figure 1, special figure 2, or general figure) is specified, and whether or not “1” is set in a predetermined bit of a random number soft latch flag register corresponding to the specified target. judge.

  When determining that the random number acquisition condition is satisfied in step S9003, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S9004 and acquires a predetermined random value. If it is determined that the random number acquisition condition is not satisfied, step S9004 is omitted and the random number acquisition process is terminated. In step S9004, along with the random number acquisition from the built-in register, the soft random number may be acquired at this timing. Then, a random number for determination of success / failure may be generated by adding a soft random number to the random number acquired from the built-in register.

  FIG. 252 (a) is a flowchart for explaining in more detail the random number acquisition determination process shown in FIG. 251 (a) executed in the random number acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIGS. 249 and 250. First, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the data read from the ball detection sensors of the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the general figure starting port 228 matches the winning determination pattern ( Step S9005). If the data read from the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern, the process proceeds to step S9006, and if not, the random number acquisition determination process ends. When the data read from the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the pending number is in a non-full state in order to determine whether or not the latch condition is satisfied. (Step S9006). If the number of reserves is not full, the process proceeds to step S9007, and if it is full, the random number acquisition determination process ends.

  If the reserved number is not full, the main control unit 300 moves to step S9007 and sets “1” to a predetermined bit of the random number soft latch register. As a result, the process indicated by the arrow (1) shown in FIG. 249 or 250 is executed, and a latch signal is output to a predetermined soft latch random value register.

  Next, in step S9008, it is determined whether or not the predetermined bit of the random number soft latch flag register is “0”. If the predetermined bit of the random number soft latch flag register is “0”, the process proceeds to step S9008 and the predetermined bit is set. If “0” is not “0”, the random number acquisition determination process ends.

  If the predetermined bit of the random number soft latch flag register is “0”, in step S9010, the 16-bit random number value input from the random number generation circuit 9006 is latched in the predetermined soft latch random number value register (FIG. 249 or FIG. (See arrows (3) and (4) shown at 250).

  Next, in step S9011, “1” is set to a predetermined bit of the random number soft latch flag register (see arrow (5) shown in FIG. 249 or FIG. 250), and the random number acquisition determination process ends.

  FIG. 252 (b) is a flowchart illustrating in more detail the random number acquisition process shown in FIG. 251 (b) executed in the random number acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIGS. 249 and 250. The main control unit 300 determines whether or not the predetermined bit of the random number soft latch flag register is “1” (step S9012). If the predetermined bit is “1”, the process proceeds to step S9013. If the predetermined bit is not “1”, the random number acquisition process ends.

  If the predetermined bit of the random number soft latch flag register is “1”, in step S9013, the lower byte of the 16-bit random number value from the random number soft latch random value register (lower order) is determined to be a random number determination random number in the storage area of the predetermined address in the RAM 308. Read (read) as (lower) (see arrow (6) shown in FIG. 249 or 250). Next, in step S9014, the upper byte of the 16-bit random number value is read from the random number soft latch random number register (upper) to the storage area of the address next to the predetermined address in the RAM 308 as a pass / fail judgment random number (upper) (FIG. 249 or Arrow (7) shown in FIG. 250). Next, in step S9015, “0” is set to the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register based on reading the upper byte of the 16-bit random number value into the storage area of the address next to the predetermined address in the RAM 308. (See arrow (8) shown in FIG. 249 or FIG. 250).

  FIG. 253 shows a method of directly fetching a 16-bit random number value sequentially input from the random number generation circuit 9006 into a predetermined soft latch random number value register. In the random number fetching shown in FIG. 249, a 16-bit random number value can be fetched directly from the soft latch random value register by the third instruction described in the user program. By using the third instruction, the random number soft latch register and the random number soft latch flag register among the registers related to fetching the random number value in the microcomputer built-in register become unnecessary.

  Only with the third instruction, the lower byte of the 16-bit random number value is read from the random number soft latch random value register (lower order) into the storage area of the predetermined address in the RAM 308 as a validity determination random number (lower order), and then the random number soft latch disturbance The upper byte of the 16-bit random number value can be read from the numerical register (upper) as a pass / fail judgment random number (upper) into the storage area of the address next to the predetermined address in the RAM 308 (see arrow (A)). As will be described later with reference to the program code, the value stored in the upper register can be fetched only by designating the lower register with the third instruction. Since it is impossible to distinguish the upper address from the machine language, it is possible to make code analysis by an unauthorized person difficult.

  In the random number value fetching method shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, the upper byte of the 16-bit random value is read into the storage area of the address next to the predetermined address in the RAM 308. Although “0” is set, in the direct capture method of this example, the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register is originally “0”, and “0” is maintained after this processing. Therefore, even when a random number value is extracted from the same soft latch random number register using the first instruction and the second instruction after execution of the third instruction, the step of random number acquisition determination processing in FIG. 252 (a) S9008 can be applied as it is.

  FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition determination / acquisition process executed in the direct random number acquisition shown in FIG. This process is executed, for example, in a winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. When directly acquiring a plurality of random values such as special figure 1 random value, special figure 2 random value, ordinary figure random value within the same interrupt, this random number acquisition determination / acquisition process in the winning acceptance process (step S217) Repeat several times. When the data read from the ball detection sensors of the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the general figure starting port 228 matches the winning determination pattern, the process proceeds to this processing. For example, in the case where the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are directly acquired within one interrupt, for example, the special figure 2 random value is acquired first, and the special interrupt is obtained in the next interrupt. A numerical value may be acquired. In the case of simultaneous establishment, the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value may be directly acquired within one interrupt. That is, in the case of simultaneous establishment, the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value may not be directly acquired by separate interrupts.

  In the random number acquisition determination / acquisition process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not a random number acquisition condition is satisfied (step S9016). The random number acquisition condition includes specifying a target (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2, or Common Chart), acquiring the current number of reserved objects of the specified object, and determining whether the number of reserved objects is not the maximum. . If the reserved number is maximum, the random number acquisition condition is not satisfied, and if the reserved number is less than the maximum, the random number acquisition condition is satisfied. Other random number acquisition conditions may be included besides the reserved number. As another random number acquisition condition, for example, whether or not an error state exists may be included in a part of the random number acquisition condition. Furthermore, as a matter of course, all the common-sense conditions for gaming machines may be included as other random number acquisition conditions.

  If the main control unit 300 determines in step S9016 that the random number acquisition condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S9017 and directly acquires a predetermined random number value. In step S9017, a soft random number may be acquired at this timing as well as directly acquiring a random number from the built-in register. Then, a random number for determination of success / failure may be generated by adding a soft random number to the random number acquired from the built-in register. If it is determined that the random number acquisition condition is not satisfied, step S9017 is omitted and the random number acquisition determination / acquisition process is terminated.

  In this random number acquisition determination / acquisition process, “1” is set to a predetermined bit of the random number soft latch flag register corresponding to the specified target, which is essential in the case of random number acquisition using the first instruction and the second instruction. The process of determining whether or not is set is not necessary.

  255A and 255B are flowcharts for explaining the random number acquisition determination / acquisition process shown in FIG. 254 executed in the random number direct acquisition (acquisition) procedure shown in FIG. 253 in more detail. FIG. 255 (a) shows random number acquisition determination processing. First, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the data read from the ball detection sensors of the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the general figure starting port 228 matches the winning determination pattern ( Step S9018). If the data read from the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern, the process proceeds to step S9019. If the data does not match, the random number acquisition determination process ends. When the data read from the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the reserved number is in a non-full state in order to determine whether or not the random number acquisition condition is satisfied. Judgment is made (step S9019). If the reserved number is not full, the process proceeds to step S9020, and if it is full, the random number acquisition determination process ends.

  If the reserved number is not full, the main control unit 300 determines that the random number acquisition condition is satisfied and proceeds to step S9020 to set a predetermined flag to ON. The predetermined flag is set not in a microcomputer built-in register but in a predetermined area in the RAM 308 by the user program.

  FIG. 255 (b) shows random number acquisition processing. The main control unit 300 determines whether or not a predetermined flag is on (step S9021). If the predetermined flag is on, the process proceeds to step S9022, and if the predetermined flag is not on, the random number acquisition process is terminated.

  If the predetermined flag is ON, in step S9022, the random value is read from the soft latch random value register. Specifically, the lower byte of the 16-bit random number value is read from the random number soft latch random number value register (lower order) to the storage area of the predetermined address in the RAM 308 as a validity determination random number (lower order), and then the random number soft latch random number value register The upper byte of the 16-bit random number value from (upper) is read as a success / failure determination random number (upper) in the storage area of the address next to the predetermined address in the RAM 308 (see arrow A in FIG. 253). Next, in step S9023, based on the fact that the upper byte of the 16-bit random number value has been read into the storage area of the address next to the predetermined address in the RAM 308, the predetermined flag is set to OFF.

  FIG. 256 shows an example of a program code describing the procedure for fetching the random number values shown in FIG. 249 and FIG. When a latch condition (for example, a condition including at least a pending non-full tank) is satisfied, “1” is set in the random number soft latch register as described in the ROM area in the code. Further, the value of the random number soft latch flag register is acquired by another module, and the acquired value is compared with “1”. If the acquired value is “1”, the process jumps to the module “moRNDGET”. The module “moRNDGET” acquires the address of the soft latch random value register (lower), acquires the value of the soft latch random value register (lower) stored in the acquired address, and acquires the acquired soft latch random value register (lower) ) Value is read into the RAM. Next, the address of the soft latch random value register (upper) is obtained, the value of the soft latch random value register (upper) stored in the obtained address is obtained, and the value of the obtained soft latch random value register (upper) is obtained. Read into RAM.

  FIG. 257 shows an example of a program code describing the procedure of direct fetching of the random value shown in FIG. The code indicated by the strike-through line in FIG. When a random number acquisition condition (for example, a condition including at least a pending non-full tank) is satisfied, the process jumps to the module “moRNDGET” described in the ROM area in the code. In the module “moRNDGET”, a 16-bit random value can be read into the RAM 308 with a single instruction without performing latch processing or via the pair register (HL) by an LDW instruction (third instruction). In the example shown in FIGS. 253 and 257, the random value may not be directly taken into the RAM 308, but may be taken once into the pair register, and the random value may be taken into the RAM 308 via the pair register.

  The (LDW (RANSU0_L), RANSU_REG0_L) instruction loads the value of RANSU_REG0_L to the storage area of the address indicated by RANSU0_L, and the value of RANSU_REG0_H is the address of the RANSU0_H that is the next address of the address indicated by RANSU0_L. Is an instruction to load.

  Thus, according to the random value direct fetch using the third command, the program becomes simpler and easier to create than the random value fetch using the first command and the second command. Further, the advantage of using the third instruction will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 258 (a) and (b) show part of the flow of processing when the first instruction and the second instruction are used. 258 (c) and (d) show a part of the flow of processing when the third instruction is used. FIGS. 258 (a) and (b) show the flow of processing when the first instruction and the second instruction are used.

  For the flow of random number acquisition using the first instruction and the second instruction, “1” is set in the random number soft latch register, the random number is taken into the soft latch random value register, and the flag is set in the random number soft latch flag register. It is set, and the flag is referred to. When the flag is set, a random number is acquired in the RAM and the flag is cleared. In the example shown in FIG. 258 (a), a latch signal and a latch completion signal (set signal) are output in the process of permitting reading when the read permission condition is satisfied. Next, in the random number read process, a read completion signal (clear signal) is output. In this case, the execution timing of the random number acquisition process is easily estimated from the output of the latch signal at the timing of the latch completion signal or the read completion signal.

  On the other hand, the random number acquisition using the third instruction uses a flag on the user program and does not use the random number soft latch register and the random number soft latch flag register. I will not. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 258 (c), in the process of allowing the read when the read permission condition is satisfied, the latch signal and the latch completion signal are not output only by changing the flag set in the RAM, and the random number In the read process, only a read completion signal (clear signal) is output. Thus, since the latch signal is not output and only the read completion signal is output, it is difficult to estimate the execution time of the random number acquisition process.

  The example shown in FIG. 258 (b) is also random number acquisition using the first instruction and the second instruction. In the process of permitting reading when the read permission condition is satisfied, a latch signal and a latch completion signal (set signal) are output. Next, random number read processing is performed through processing by one or a plurality of program modules. In the random number read process, a read completion signal is output. In this case, since the interval from the output of the latch signal or the latch completion signal to the output of the read completion signal can be increased, it may be difficult to estimate the execution time of the random number acquisition process.

The example shown in FIG. 258 (d) is random number acquisition using a third instruction. In the process of permitting reading when the read permission condition is satisfied, the latch signal and the latch completion signal are not output. Next, random number read processing is performed through processing by one or a plurality of program modules. In the random number read process, a read completion signal is output. Also in this case, the latch signal is not output, only the read completion signal is output, and the interval between the read permission process and the read completion signal output can be increased, so the execution time of the random number acquisition process is estimated. Can be difficult to do. Further, in the process of permitting reading, it is possible to permit acquisition of one or a plurality of random values in the special figure 1, the special figure 2, or the usual figure. Further, other random numbers (for example, soft random numbers) may be acquired by this processing. Further, in the random number read process, one or a plurality of random values of special figure 1, special figure 2, or ordinary figure can be acquired. Other random numbers (for example, soft random numbers) may be acquired by this processing.
<Data table of main control unit>

  Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A shows an example of a jackpot determination table, FIG. 4B shows an example of a high probability state transition determination table, and FIG. 4C shows an example of a timer number determination table. is there.

  In the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 259 (a), the type of information stored in the game state storage area provided in the RAM 308 (hereinafter simply referred to as game information) and the first special figure starting port 230 has a ball. Lottery data (first special figure start port lottery data) used when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects winning, and a predetermined ball detection sensor that a ball has won the second special figure start port 232 This is a data table in which lottery data (second special figure starting port lottery data) used in the case of being detected is stored in association with each other. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses these pieces of information to determine whether the special figure variation game is won (big hit) or wrong (miss), that is, a big hit determination. The game information indicates information indicating a low probability state in which the special figure variable game is determined to be won with a predetermined low probability, and indicates a high probability state in which the special figure variable game is determined to be a winning with a high probability higher than the low probability. Hereinafter, these are simply referred to as a low probability state and a high probability state. Further, the information stored in the game state storage area includes other information, which will be described later.

  The lottery data for the first special figure starting port is used to determine the result of the special figure variable game that starts when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230. It is lottery data. For example, when the gaming state is in a low probability state, if the acquired special figure winning random number value (the random number value will be described later) is 10001 to 10187, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won. On the other hand, when the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value other than 10001 to 10187, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of play. In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range indicated by the lottery data for the first special figure starting port in the low probability state is 10001. -10187 (the size of the numerical range is 187), the winning probability of the special figure variable game based on the winning of the ball to the first special figure starting port 230 in the low probability state is about 1 / 350.4 (= 187/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range indicated by the lottery data for the first special figure starting port in the high probability state is 30001 to 13310 (the numerical range is 1310), the first special figure starting port 230 in the high probability state. The winning probability of the special figure variable game based on the winning of the special ball is about 1 / 50.0 (= 1310/65536), and the winning of the special figure variable game based on the winning of the ball to the first special figure starting port 230 is won. The probability is set so that the high probability state is higher than the low probability state.

  The lottery data for the second special figure starting port is used to determine the result of the special figure variable game that starts when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232. It is lottery data. For example, when the gaming state is a low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is 20001 to 20187, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won. On the other hand, when the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value other than 20001 to 20187, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of play. In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range indicated by the lottery data for the second special figure starting port in the low probability state is 20001. Since it is ˜20187 (the size of the numerical range is 187), the winning probability of the special figure variable game based on the winning of the ball to the second special figure starting port 128 in the low probability state is about 1 / 350.4 (= 187/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range indicated by the lottery data for the second special figure starting port in the high probability state is 40001 to 41310 (the numerical range is 1310), the second special figure starting port 232 in the high probability state. The winning probability of the special figure variable game based on the winning of the special ball is about 1 / 50.0 (= 1310/65536), and the winning of the special figure variable game based on the winning of the ball at the second special figure starting port 232 is won. The probability is set so that the high probability state is higher than the low probability state.

  The high-probability state transition determination table shown in FIG. 259 (b) is a data table that stores lottery data used when it is determined that the jackpot is determined as a result of the jackpot determination. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses these pieces of information to determine whether to start a big hit game or a special big hit game after the end of the special figure variable game, that is, to determine the probability change transition. For example, if the acquired special figure random number value (random number will be described later) is a numerical value of 11 to 74, the special jackpot game is started after the special figure variable game is completed. On the other hand, when the acquired special figure random number value is other than the numerical values of 11 to 74, the big hit game is started after the special figure variable game is completed. In the present embodiment, the range of numerical values that can be taken by the special figure random number value is 0 to 127 (the size of the numerical range is 128), and the range of random numbers for determining the migration of the lottery data is 11 to 74 (the size of the numerical range is 64 Therefore, when the result of the jackpot determination is winning, the probability of winning the result of the probability change transition determination, that is, the probability of starting the special jackpot is 1/2 (= 64/128).

  The timer number determination table shown in FIG. 259 (c) is a lottery for determining the timer number indicating the variation time from when the special figure display devices 212 and 214 start displaying the special figure to the stop display. It is a data table which memorize | stored the lottery data to be used. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines a timer number based on this information, the above-described jackpot determination result (a value of a jackpot flag described later) and a timer random number described later. Then, the variation time corresponding to the determined timer number is set as the initial value of the special figure display symbol update timer (see FIG. 260 (c)).

  In the present embodiment, the numerical value range that can be taken by the special figure timer random number value (random number will be described later) is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical value range is 65536). Since the range of the timer random number of timer 1 is 0 to 60235 (the size of the numerical range is 60236), the probability of selecting timer 1 (fluctuation time 5 seconds) as the timer number is 60236/65536. As the timer number, the probability of selecting timer 2 (variation time 10 seconds) is 4250/65536, the probability of selecting timer 3 (variation time 20 seconds) is 800/65536, and timer 3 (variation time 40 seconds) is selected. The probability of doing is 250/65536. On the other hand, when the big hit determination result is winning, the range of the timer random number of timer 2 is 0 to 15535 (the numerical range is 15536), so the probability of selecting timer 2 (variation time 10 seconds) as the timer number Is 15535/65536. As the timer number, the probability of selecting timer 3 (variation time 20 seconds) is 9000/65536, the probability of selecting timer 4 (variation time 40 seconds) is 38000/65536, and timer 5 (variation time 50 seconds) is selected. The probability of doing is 3000/65536.

  Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 (a) to (d). 2A is an example of a payout request number table, FIG. 2B is an example of a payout processing table, FIG. 2C is an example of a timer control data table, and FIG. 2D is a jump. It is the figure which showed an example of the table, respectively.

  The payout request number table shown in FIG. 260 (a) is a data table that stores the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player by the pachinko machine 100 as prize balls. Although details will be described later, the main control unit 300 selects the number of payout requests to be output to the payout control unit 600 using this payout request number table, processes the number of payout requests, and then outputs it to the payout control unit 600. To do. For example, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the main control unit 300 selects 3 as the number of payout requests, and after processing the number of payout requests , Output to the payout control unit 600. Similarly, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the general winning port 226, or the variable winning port 234, the main control unit 300 issues a payout request to the payout control unit 600. The number is selected as 4, 10, or 15, respectively, and after processing the number of payout requests, it is output to the payout control unit 600. Although the details will be described later, the payout control unit 600 that has input the payout request number cancels the processing of the payout request number processed by the main control unit 300 and acquires the payout request number, In this embodiment, three balls are entered into the first special figure starting port 230, four balls are entered into the second special figure starting port 232, and four balls are entered into the general winning port 226. Ten balls are discharged to the storage tray 126 as winning balls, and ten balls are discharged to the variable winning opening 234.

  The payout processing table shown in FIG. 260 (b) is a data table used for processing the number of payout requests that the main control unit 300 outputs to the payout control unit 600. Although details will be described later, the main control unit 300 processes the number of payout requests to be output to the payout control unit 600 using the payout processing table. For example, when the processing type is 0, the main control unit 300 uses the number of payout requests and 00H of the processing data (H after the numerical value indicates that the numerical value is a hexadecimal number. The same applies hereinafter) Process the number of payout requests. Similarly, when the processing type is 1, 2, or 3, the main control unit 300 processes the payout request number using the payout request number and the processing data 13H, 2EH, or 39H. In addition, bits 0 to 4 of the processing data indicate mask information, and bits 5 and 6 indicate processing type information.

  The timer control data table shown in FIG. 260 (c) is a data table used by the main control unit 300 to update various timers. Although details will be described later, the main control unit 300 uses the timer control data table to provide a plurality of types of timers having different update periods (in this example, nine types of timers 1 to 9 updated about every 2 ms) , One type of timer 10 that is updated approximately every 10 ms).

The jump table shown in FIG. 260 (d) is included in the transmission information in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 to identify a plurality of types of transmission processes in the command setting transmission process (details will be described later) of the main control unit 300. This is a data table storing general information and the start address of each transmission process in the command setting transmission process. Although details will be described later, the main control unit 300 uses the jump table to select a jump destination from the general information, and executes processing of the selected jump destination. For example, when the general information is 01H, the main control unit 300 selects the general command rotation start setting transmission process as the jump destination, and executes this general command rotation start setting transmission process. Similarly, for other general information, when the general information is 02H, the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is selected and executed, and when the general information is 04H, the general command winning effect setting transmission process is selected and executed. When the general information is 08H, the general command end effect setting transmission process is selected and executed. When the general information is 10H, the general command big prize opening release transmission process is selected and executed, and the general information is 20H. In this case, the general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process is selected and executed. After executing these processes, the transmission information in the transmission information storage area is initialized, and the process proceeds to the external output signal setting process in step S9317.
<Data table of payout control unit>

  Next, a data table stored in the ROM of the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5E shows an example of the restoration data table.

The restored data table shown in FIG. 260 (e) is a data table used to cancel processing of the processed payout request number input from the main control unit 300 by the payout control unit 600. Although details will be described later, the payout control unit 600 cancels the processing of the processed payout request number input from the main control unit 300 using the restored data table. For example, when the processing type is 0, the payout control unit 600 cancels processing of the payout request number using the payout request number input from the main control unit 300 and 00H of the processing data. Similarly, when the processing type is 1, 2, or 3, the payout control unit 600 uses the payout request number input from the main control unit 300 and the processing data of 03H, 0EH, or 09H to output the payout request number. Cancel the processing.
<Main control unit reset interrupt processing>

  Next, main control unit reset interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller reset interrupt processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S9101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the initial setting of the I / O port 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and the initial value in the WDT 314. Set up. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT 314.

  In step S9102, the WDT 314 is reset and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S9103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, When the voltage is less than 9V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is cut off), the process returns to step S9102, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 does not detect that the power is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S9104.

  In step S9104, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to the counter / timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the effect control unit), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S9105, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ), The process proceeds to step S9108. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process advances to step S9108.

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the operation unit provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicating that there is an operation), that is, It is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process advances to step S9108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and whether the power status information is information indicating suspend. Determine whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process advances to step S9108 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S9106 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process advances to step S9108 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process advances to step S9108.

  In step S9106, function-limited weight processing is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S9107, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer. In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in steps S9110 and S9111) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption.

  In step S9108, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S9109, function-limited weight processing is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S9110, after setting for interrupt inhibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the normal figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer random number counter, respectively. Two random number counters for generating numerical values are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Further, after this basic random number initial value update process is completed, an interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to step S9111.

  In step S9111, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of step S9110 and step S9111 except during the timer interrupt process starting at predetermined intervals.
<Function-limited weight processing>

  Next, the function-limited wait processing (steps S9106 and S9109) in the above-described main control unit reset interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of function-limited weight processing.

  In step S9201, information indicating the function limited state is set in the power status information stored in the power status storage area described above, and a predetermined numerical value (this value is set in the function limited timer storage area provided in the RAM 308). In the embodiment, 3) is set.

  In step S9202, whether or not a function limited state end condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the value of the function limited timer is read from the function limited timer storage area described above and the value of the function limited timer is 0 or not). Is determined. If the function limited state end condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the function limited timer is 0), the process proceeds to step S9203, and if the function limited state end condition is not satisfied (in this embodiment, When the function limitation timer is not 0), the process of step S9202 is repeatedly executed to wait for the function limitation state end condition to be satisfied (in this embodiment, the function limitation timer waits for the function limitation timer to become 0).

In step S9203, information indicating a normal state is set as the power status in the above-described power status storage area, and an initial value of a machining type described later is set in the machining type storage area provided in the RAM 308.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter / timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start with a predetermined period.

  In step S9301, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S9302, the count value of WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment), so that WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect abnormal processing), and WDT is periodically performed (this implementation). In the example, clear & restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle.

  In step S9303, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals from various sensors 320 including the glass frame opening sensor, the front frame opening sensor, the lower pan full sensor, and a plurality of ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. Then, the presence or absence of the detection signal is monitored and stored in the signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. In this embodiment, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process of the last time (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each previous sphere detection sensor. This information is read from the area, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the detection signal storage area provided in advance for each sphere detection sensor, and the detection of each sphere detection sensor detected by the previous timer interruption process (about 2 ms before). Information on the presence or absence of a signal is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S9303, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal recording area, the previous detection signal recording area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the sphere detection sensor of the two sphere detection sensors matches. The information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, this time detection signal) In the case of a match to the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), or It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the ball detection sensor that detects the winning at the general winning opening 226, the player has entered the general winning opening 226. After determining and performing processing associated with entering the general winning opening 226 after that, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with entering the mouth 226.

  In step S9304 and step S9305, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S9110 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value and special value used in the main control unit 300 are updated. The two random number counters for generating the figure random number values are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the regular-winning random number next makes one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S9306, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S9307, the power status information stored in the power status storage area is read, and it is determined whether or not the read power status information is information indicating a function limited state. If the power status information is information indicating a function limited state, the process proceeds to step S9318 without performing the subsequent processes in steps S9308 to S9317, and otherwise proceeds to step S9308.

  In step S9308, timer update processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this timer update process, the normal symbol display device 210, 214 is used to measure the time for the normal symbol display device 210 to display the time when the symbol is changed or stopped. Various timers including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update.

  In step S9309, winning prize counter updating processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when there is a winning (winning) in the winning opening (general winning opening 226, first and second special figure starting openings 230, 232, and variable winning opening 234), The value of the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening is read, and 1 is added to set the original winning ball number storage area.

  In step S9310, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if the first and second special figure starting ports 230 and 232 have won a prize and the number of special figure variable games held is less than four, the winning starting port corresponds to The value is acquired from the counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to be a special figure winning random number value. In addition, a value is acquired as a special figure random value from the random number counter for generating the special figure random value described above, and stored in a random value storage area provided in the RAM 308 together with the special figure winning random number value. In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the general chart start opening 228 and the number of the general chart variable games held is less than two, a random number counter for generating a regular figure winning random number value at that timing Is obtained as a random number value for normal winning, and is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 different from that for the above special figure. Further, in this winning acceptance process, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) of the first, second special figure starting port 230, 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, or the variable winning port 234, A winning acceptance indicating whether or not the first and second special figure starting ports 230 and 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234 have won (entered) in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set the information.

  In step S9311, a payout request number transmission process is performed (details will be described later). The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), and power supply in bit 6. Input information (when ON, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate the number of payout requests after processing I am doing so.

  In step S9312, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in a general diagram state update process during a normal map change (a general-purpose general-purpose timer value to be described later is 1 or more), on / off drive control for repeatedly turning on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the general map display device 112 is performed. Do.

  Further, in the general chart state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, FIG. When the 7-segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is turned on / off so that the mode of the general map A shown in FIG. The 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in the mode B, and thereafter provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). In addition, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer. With this setting, the usual figure is stopped and the result of the usual figure variable game is notified to the player.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the predetermined state is displayed. During the opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a signal for holding the blade member in the open state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the blade member of the second special-purpose start port 232, and the blade opening time management provided in the RAM 308 is performed. Information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the timer.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the normal state update process that starts at the timing when a predetermined closing period has elapsed (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the normal state is set to inactive. In the normal state update process when the normal state is inactive, the process proceeds to the next step S9313 without doing anything.

  In step S9313, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S9314, special figure state update processing is performed. In the special figure state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure. For example, in special figure state update processing during special figure fluctuation (the value of a special figure general-purpose timer to be described later is 1 or more), lighting / extinguishing driving that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LEDs constituting the special figure display devices 212 and 214 Take control.

  Also, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure change display time has elapsed (when the special figure display symbol update timer value changes from 1 to 0), the big hit flag is on and the probability variation flag is on When the big hit flag is on and the probability variation flag is off, such as the special figure A shown in FIG. 5A on the special figure display devices 212 and 214, the special figure display devices 212 and 214 shown in FIG. When the big hit flag is off, such as special figure B, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure display devices 212, 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I shown in FIG. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the special figure is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special figure variable game is notified to the player. In addition, 02H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command rotation stop setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S9316).

  Also, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the special figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), if the big hit flag is on, a predetermined A special figure waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for waiting for a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started, that is, a bonus winning period (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area. Further, 04H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S9316).

  Also, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the special figure standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds or A signal for holding the door member in an open state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. At the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 10H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S9316).

  In the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) is variable. A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member of the winning opening 234, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 20H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S9316).

  Further, in the special figure state update process that is repeated at a predetermined timing (for example, 15 rounds) by repeating the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, for 3 seconds), that is, by the decorative symbol display device 208. Information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit is to be ended is displayed. Further, 08H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S9316).

  Further, in the special figure state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure state is set to inactive. . In the special figure state update process when the special figure is in a non-operating state, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S9315.

  In step S9315, special drawing related lottery processing is performed. In this special drawing-related lottery process, the opening / closing control of the special figure variable game and the variable winning opening 234 is not performed (the state of the special figure is inactive), and the number of special figure variable games held is one. In the case of the above, among various lotteries using the jackpot determination table of FIG. 259 (a), the high probability state transition determination table of FIG. (B), the timer number determination table of FIG. First, a big hit judgment is performed. Specifically, whether or not the special figure winning random number value stored in the random value storage area in step S9203 is within the numerical range of the lottery data for the first special figure starting port in the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 259 (a). If the special figure winning random number value is within the numerical range of the lottery data for the first special figure starting port, it is determined that the special figure variable game is won and the big hit flag storage area provided in the RAM 308 (Here, setting the jackpot information in the RAM 308 is setting the jackpot flag to ON). On the other hand, when the special figure winning random number value is outside the numerical range of the first special figure starting port lottery data, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out and the big hit flag storage area provided in the RAM 308 is out. (In this case, setting outlier information in the RAM 308 is setting the jackpot flag off). Note that the number of special figure variable games held is stored in the special figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308. Each time a hit determination is made, the number of special figure variable games held is determined. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this special figure reservation number storage area. In addition, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  As a specific example, when the gaming state is a low probability state, and the special figure winning random number value acquired based on the detection of the ball winning to the first special figure starting port 230 is 10100, the jackpot flag is set to ON, When the special figure winning random number is 10200, the jackpot flag is set to OFF. Further, when the special figure winning random number acquired based on the detection of the ball winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is 20100, the big hit flag is set to ON, and when the special figure winning random number is 20200, the big hit flag is set. Set to off.

  If the big hit flag is set to ON, the probability variation transition determination is performed next. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure random number value stored in the random value storage area in step S9203 is within the numerical range of the transition determination random number shown in FIG. 259 (b), and the special figure random number value is determined by lottery data. Is set in the storage area of the probability variation (probability variation) flag provided in the RAM 308, information indicating that a special big hit game is started. (Here, setting the special jackpot game start information in the RAM 308 is referred to as setting the probability variation flag to ON). On the other hand, when the special figure random number value is outside the numerical range of the lottery data, information indicating that the big hit game is started is set in the above-described probability variation flag storage area (where the big hit game start information is set). Setting in the RAM 308 is referred to as setting the probability variation flag off). For example, if the acquired special figure random number value is 20, the probability variation flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when the acquired special figure random value is 80, the probability variation flag is set to OFF.

  Regardless of the result of the big hit determination, the process for determining the timer number is performed next. Specifically, the value of the random counter for generating the special figure timer random value described above is acquired as the special figure timer random value. A timer number corresponding to the numerical value range of the timer random number shown in FIG. 259 (c) including the value of the big hit flag and the acquired special figure timer random number value is selected and stored in a predetermined timer number storage area provided in the RAM 308. Further, the fluctuation time corresponding to the timer number is stored as the special figure fluctuation display time in the special figure display symbol update timer, and the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S9316). For this reason, 01H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  For example, when the big hit flag is off and the acquired special figure timer random number value is 50000, the special figure timer random number value is in the range of 0 to 60235, so 1 corresponding to those conditions of the timer number determination table. The timer 1 indicating the timer number stored in the line and 5 indicating the variation time are selected and stored in the respective storage areas provided in the RAM 308. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is on and the acquired special figure timer random number value is 64000, the special figure timer random number value is not in the range of 0 to 15535, so the timer 2 is not selected and it is not 15536 to 24535. Timer 3 is not selected, and timer 4 is not selected because it is not 24536 to 62535. However, since it is within the range of 62536 to 65535, it is stored in the eighth line corresponding to those conditions in the timer number determination table. The timer 5 indicating the timer number and the variable time 50 are selected and stored in the respective storage areas provided in the RAM 308. In consideration of 2 ms which is the start cycle of the interrupt processing, a value obtained by multiplying the selected variation time value by 500 (1000 ms / 2 ms) is set in the variation time storage area. For example, when the variation time is 5 seconds, a value of 2500 is set as an initial value in the variation time storage area, and the value of the variation time storage area is set to 1 each time the timer update process in step S9308 is executed. By subtracting, the passage of time can be measured by the number of execution times of interrupt processing. Further, when the value of the variable time storage area is subtracted every time (for example, five times) the timer interrupt process is executed (for example, 2 ms cycle), if the variable time is 10 seconds, 10 seconds is required. Since it is 10000 ms, dividing by the period (2 ms × 5) sets 1000 to the variable time storage area.

  In step S9316, command setting transmission processing is performed (details will be described later). The output schedule information to be transmitted to the effect control unit 350 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command types ( 00H is a basic command, 01H is a symbol change start command, 04H is a symbol change stop command, 05H is a winning effect start command, 06H is an end effect start command, and 07H is a big hit number of rounds. Designated command, information that can specify the type of command such as a power recovery command in the case of 0EH and a RAM clear command in the case of 0FH), and bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) It is composed.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, etc. If it is a case, it includes the value of the jackpot flag, the probability variation flag, etc. If it is a winning effect command and an end effect start command, it includes the value of the probability variation flag, etc. If it is a jackpot round number designation command The value of the probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command type is 01H, the jackpot flag value stored in the RAM 308 as the command data, the probability variation flag value, the timer number selected in the special drawing related lottery process, the pending Information indicating the number of special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, 04H is set as the command type, and information indicating the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect setting transmission process, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period stored in the RAM 308 as command type and 05H, Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of special figure variable games that are held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned general command end effect setting transmission process, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period stored in the RAM 308 as the command type and the command type Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of special figure variable games that are held, and the like are set. In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating 07H for the command type, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 for the command data, the value of the probability variation flag, the number of the special figure variation games held, etc. Set. In the above-described general command big prize closing setting transmission process, information indicating the command type is 08H, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 as command data, the value of probability variation flag, the number of special figure variable games held, etc. Set. In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S9317, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S9318, whether or not the function limitation state termination condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the value of the function limitation timer is read from the function limitation timer storage area described above, and 1 is subtracted. Whether or not the value is 0). If the function limited state end condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the function limited timer after subtraction is 0), the process proceeds to step S9319, and the function limited state end condition is not satisfied (this In the embodiment, if the function limitation timer after subtraction is not 0), the process proceeds to step S9321 without performing the process of step S9319. In this embodiment, since 3 is set as the initial value of the function limited timer in the above function limited wait process, the initial value is set in the function limited wait process, and the main control unit timer interrupt is interrupted. After enabling, the function is limited to a maximum of about 6 ms (= about 2 ms (main control unit timer interrupt cycle) × 3) and a minimum of about 4 ms (= about 2 ms (main control unit timer interrupt cycle) × 2). The timer subtraction result becomes 0 (function limitation is canceled).

  In step S9319, using a predetermined power interruption information such as a power status and checksum, a return command indicating that the state before the power interruption has been restored and that the update of the history information of the input port has been normally completed is issued. A return command setting transmission process to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed (details will be described later). Further, following the process, a basic command setting transmission process, which will be described later, is executed to transmit a basic command including various information indicating the progress of the game.

  In step S9320, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S9303 are read to monitor whether there is a glass frame opening error, a front frame opening error, or a lower pan full error. When the glass frame open error, front frame open error, or lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the production control unit 350 includes the glass frame open error, the front frame open error, the lower pan Set device information that indicates whether a full error has occurred. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210, special figure display devices 212 and 214, various states via the display circuit. Display data to be output to the display unit 328 or the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in step S9415 of the payout request number transmission process (step S9311) described later is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port 310.

  In step S9321, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S9323. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S9322.

  In step S9322, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S9301 is set in each original register, or interrupt permission is set.

  In step S9323, the power status information stored in the power status storage area is read, and it is determined whether or not the read power status information is information indicating a normal state. If the power status information is information indicating a normal state, the process proceeds to step S9325; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S9324.

  In step S9324, power interruption process 1 is performed. In the power interruption process 1, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Further, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and is stored in the checksum calculation numerical storage area. A value obtained by subtracting the addition result from the value is calculated as a checksum (power failure checksum), the calculated power failure checksum is stored in the above-described checksum calculation numerical value storage area, and writing to the RAM 308 is performed. After setting to prohibit, it becomes an infinite loop.

In step S9325, power interruption process 2 is performed. In the power interruption process 2, information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area without storing the current stack pointer value in the stack pointer save area. Also, the numerical value stored in the RAM 308 is read to calculate a checksum (power interruption checksum), the calculated power interruption checksum is stored in the above-described checksum calculation numerical value storage area, and written to the RAM 308. After setting to prohibit, it becomes an infinite loop.
<Transmission request number transmission processing>

  Next, the payout request number transmission process (step S9311) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout request number transmission process.

  In step S9401, 0 is set as the number of payout requests in the payout request number storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S9402, the output schedule information (information scheduled to be output from the I / O port 310) is read from the output schedule information storage area provided in the RAM 308, and it is determined whether information is set in the output schedule information. If information is set in the output schedule information, the process proceeds to step S9415. If information is not set in the output schedule information, the process proceeds to step S9403.

  In step S9403, information indicating whether or not it is the first transmission process after power-on is read from a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 308, and it is determined whether or not it is the first transmission process after power-on. In the case of the first transmission process after power-on, the process proceeds to step S9412. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S9404.

  In step S9404, first, each winning opening for paying out the winning ball by winning (in this embodiment, the general winning opening 226, the first and second special figure starting openings 230, 232, and the variable winning opening 234) Select sequentially for processing. Next, the value of the payout counter of each processing object is read from the payout counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 corresponding to each processing object, and it is determined whether or not the value of the payout counter is 0. If the processing target payout counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S9405. If the processing target payout counter is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S9406.

  In step S9405, it is determined whether or not the processing of all the payout counters to be processed has been completed. When processing of all processing target payout counters is completed, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing. When processing of all processing target payout counters is not completed, the process returns to step S9404, and the remaining Continue processing the payout counter to be processed.

  In step S9406, the value of the payout counter to be processed is read out from the payout counter storage area described above, and 1 is subtracted. Then, the value after subtraction is stored in the original payout counter storage area as a new payout counter value.

  In step S9407, with reference to the above-mentioned payout request number table in FIG. 260A, payout request information (number of payout requests) corresponding to the processing target is acquired and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308. For example, when the processing target is the first special figure starting port 230, the data of the first row of the payout request table, that is, 3 is selected as the number of payout requests. Similarly for other processing targets, if the processing target is the second special figure starting port 232, 4 is the data in the second row of the payout request table, and if the processing target is the general winning port 226, the payout request 10 is selected as the data in the third row of the table, and 15 is selected as the data in the fourth row of the payout request table when the processing target is the variable winning opening 234.

  In step S9408, a random number value obtained from a random number generation circuit (not shown) that is used as a hardware random number counter and is randomly output from the value 1 or 2 provided in the basic circuit 302, and the previous transmission. Based on the used processing type (previous processing type) (based on the past processing type history), a new processing type (current processing type) is selected. Specifically, the previous processing type selected and stored from the previous processing type storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the stored previous processing type is read, and the acquired random number value is added to the previous processing type. When the addition result is less than 4, the addition result is stored as the current machining type in the current machining type storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the addition result is 4 or more, 4 is subtracted from the addition result. The result is stored in the current processing type storage area as the current processing type.

  In step S9409, the current machining type stored in the current machining type storage area in step S9408 is read, and the machining data corresponding to the current machining type is selected with reference to the above-described payout machining table in FIG. 260 (b). For example, when the current processing type is 0, the first row of data in the payout processing table, that is, 00H is selected as the processing data. Similarly for other machining data, if the current machining type is 1, 13H, which is the data in the second row of the payout machining table, and if the current machining type is 2, the data in the third row of the payout machining table. 2EH is selected, and if the current processing type is 3, 39H that is data in the fourth row of the payout processing table is selected.

  In step S9410, the current machining type stored in the current machining type storage area in step S9408 is read and added to the payout request information.

  In step S9411, the payout request information is processed using the processing data selected in step S9409. In this embodiment, the exclusive OR (EXOR) of the number of payout requests and the processed data is calculated, and the calculation result is set in the payout request information as the number of payout requests after processing. For example, when the number of payout requests is 3 (00000011B (B after the numerical value indicates that the numerical value is a binary number; the same applies hereinafter)) and the processing data is 00H (00000000B), the number of payout requests and the processing data are exclusive. Since the logical sum is 3, the number of payout requests after processing is 3. In addition, when the number of payout requests is 3 and the processing data is 13H (00010011B), the exclusive OR of the number of payout requests and the processing data is 10H (00010000B), so the number of payout requests after processing is 10H and the payout When the number of requests is 3 and the processing data is 2EH (00101110B), the exclusive OR of the number of payout requests and the processing data is 2DH (00101100B), so the number of payout requests after processing is 2DH, and the number of payout requests is 3. When the machining data is 39H (00111001B), the exclusive OR of the number of payout requests and the machining data is 3 AH (00111010B), so the number of payout requests after machining is 3 AH.

  In step S9412, initialization information (ON in a bit of power-on information described later) is set in the payout request information.

  In step S9413, the payout request information set in step S9411 or step S9412 is output from the I / O port 310 to the payout control unit 600.

  In step S9414, strobe information is added to the payout request information.

  In step S9415, the payout request information is stored as output schedule information in an output schedule information storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the payout request information is cleared in step S9401, information indicating all off is output from the I / O port 310 to the payout control unit 600 in the subsequent device monitoring process (step S9302). If strobe information is added in step S9414, the payout request information with the added strobe information is output from the I / O port 310 to the payout control unit 600 in the subsequent device monitoring process (step S9302).

In the process of step S9413 of the payout request number transmission process, a signal including the payout request information is output from the I / O port 310 to the payout control unit 600 without including the strobe information. In the payout request number transmission process, the process is terminated when the output schedule information provided in the RAM 308 stores the strobe information and the payout request information in the output schedule information in the storage area, and the output schedule information is sent from the I / O port 310. It is not output as a signal. Next, in the device monitoring process (step S9320), a signal including strobe information and payout request information, that is, output schedule information, is output from the I / O port 310 to the payout control unit 600. As a result, the strobe signal input by the basic circuit of the payout control unit 600 also falls. Further, in the payout request number transmission process in the timer interruption process to be executed next, the above-described output schedule information storage area is initialized (information that turns off all signals), and the output schedule information that has been turned off is stored as I / O port 310 does not output as a signal. In the device monitoring process to be executed next (step S9320), a signal including output schedule information indicating that all signals are turned off is output from the I / O port 310 to the payout control unit 600. Since the strobe information is also turned off here, the strobe signal input by the basic circuit of the payout control unit 600 also rises.
<Timer update processing>

  Next, a timer update process (step S9308) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of timer update processing. The general-purpose general-purpose timer described later is a single timer that combines the above-described general-purpose display symbol update timer, general-purpose stop time management timer, blade opening time management timer, and blade closing time management timer. The general-purpose timer is the above-mentioned special figure display symbol update timer, special figure stop time management timer, special figure standby time management timer, door opening time management timer, door opening time management timer, door closing time management timer , And a timer that also serves as a production standby time management timer.

  In step S9501, the number of timer types, the number of timers, and the processing target timer are acquired with reference to the timer control data table in FIG. In this embodiment, the number of timer types is 2, which is data in the first row of the timer control data table, the number of timers is 9, which is data in the second row of the timer control data table, and the timer to be processed is timer 1 (special figure). Display symbol update timer).

  In step S9502, the timer value is read from the timer value storage area provided in the RAM 308 corresponding to the timer to be processed, and it is determined whether or not the timer value is 0. If the timer value is not 0, step S9503 is determined. 1 is subtracted from the timer value, and the subtraction result is stored in the original timer value storage area. On the other hand, if the timer value is 0, the process of step S9503 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S9504.

  In step S9504, 1 is subtracted from the number of timers (9 in this embodiment), and in step S9505, it is determined whether or not the number of timers after subtraction is zero. If the number of timers after subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step S9507. If the number of timers after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S9506.

  In step S9506, the timer to be processed is updated, and the process returns to step S9502 to subtract the timer value of the next timer to be processed. In the present embodiment, the processing target timer is a special-figure display design update timer in which the storage address is stored in the third row of the timer control data table. Update timer →... General-purpose timer with storage address stored in line 10 of timer control data table → 1008 ms timer with storage address stored in line 11 of timer control data table.

  In step S9507, 1 is subtracted from the number of timer types (in this embodiment, the initial value is 2). In step S9508, it is determined whether the number of timer types after subtraction is zero. If the timer type after subtraction is 0, the process returns to timer interrupt processing. If the timer type after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S9509.

  In step S9509, the timer value is read from the timer value storage area provided in the RAM 308 corresponding to the processing target timer (in this embodiment, the 10.08 ms timer storing the storage address in the eleventh row of the timer control data table). Whether or not the timer value is 0 is determined. If the timer value is not 0, the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the timer value is 0, the process proceeds to step S9510.

  In step S9510, the initial value of the timer value (in this embodiment, the numerical value 5 corresponding to the timer update period on the 12th line of the timer control data table) is acquired from the timer control data table, and the acquired initial value is processed. Set the timer.

  In step S9511, the number of timers is acquired from the timer control data table (in this embodiment, 1 as data in the 13th row of the timer control data table is acquired as the number of timers), and the timer to be processed is set to the next timer ( In this embodiment, after updating to the special-purpose general-purpose timer storing the storage address in the 14th line of the timer control data table, the process returns to step S9502 to subtract the timer value of the updated timer.

With this configuration, in this embodiment, the timer corresponding to the 14th row of the timer control data table is about 10 ms (about 2 ms (interrupt cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt)) × 5 (the 12th row of the timer control data table). The timer corresponding to the 3rd to 11th lines of the timer control data table is updated about every 2 ms (interrupt period of the main control unit timer interrupt). Note that a timer that is a condition for updating the timer corresponding to the 14th row of the timer control data table (here, the timer corresponding to the 11th row of the timer control data table) needs to be initialized at an appropriate place. In the present embodiment, the special figure display symbol update timer corresponding to this timer is initialized with the timer number in the special figure display symbol update timer of the above-mentioned special figure related lottery process (step S9315) as the special figure fluctuation display time. It is best to do this at the same time (same interrupt) as storing the corresponding variation time.
<Command setting transmission processing>

  Next, the command setting transmission process (step S9316) in the main control unit timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of command setting transmission processing.

  In step S9601, it is determined whether or not the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes general information such as the above-described winning acceptance information and device information. The transmission information includes the general information. If YES in step S9602, basic command setting transmission processing (details will be described later) is performed. If transmission information does not include general-purpose information, the process advances to step S9603.

  In step S9603, it is determined whether there is information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (whether transmission information is set in the transmission information storage area). If there is information to be transmitted, step S9604 is determined. If not, return to the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In step S9604, the jump destination address is selected based on the transmission information stored in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 with reference to the jump table shown in FIG. For example, when the transmission information is 01H, the general command rotation start setting transmission process (first address) in the first row of the jump table is selected as the jump destination address. Similarly, when the transmission information is other than 01H, when the transmission information is 02H, the general command rotation stop setting transmission processing (first address) of the second row of the jump table is performed, and when the transmission information is 04H. The general command winning effect setting transmission process (first address) of the third row of the jump table. When the transmission information is 08H, the general command end effect setting transmission process (first address) of the fourth line of the jump table. When the transmission information is 10H, the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process (first address) of the fifth line of the jump table is performed (the start address). When the transmission information is 20H, the sixth line of the jump table is Select the general command special winning opening closing setting transmission process (first address). The processing contents of each processing will be described later.

In step S9605, the jump destination address selected in step S9604 is set in the PC (program counter), the processing is transferred to the jump destination address, and various processes are performed according to the control program stored after the jump destination address. When the process at the jump destination is completed, the process once returns to the command setting transmission process and immediately returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.
<Basic command setting transmission processing>

  Next, the basic command setting transmission process (step S9602) in the command setting transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of basic command setting transmission processing.

  In step S9701, basic command information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is set as output schedule information.

  In steps S9702 and S9703, the winning acceptance information and the device information included in the above-described general-purpose information are included in the output schedule information.

In step S 9704, command transmission processing (details will be described later) is performed, and then general-purpose information is deleted from the transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the processing ends. In the first embodiment, the above-described winning acceptance information including information indicating that a game medium has entered the variable winning device, and the above-described device information including information indicating the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, etc. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 at the same time. The above-described winning acceptance information including information indicating that a game medium has entered the start opening and the variable winning device is first transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the front frame door 106 is opened and closed within the same interruption. The above-described device information including information indicating the state and the like may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. Conversely, information indicating the open / closed state of the front frame door 106 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 first, and information indicating that a game medium has entered the start port or variable winning device within the same interrupt. The above-described winning acceptance information including “” may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 first.
<Command transmission processing>

  Next, the command transmission process (step S 9704) in the command setting transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 268. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of command transmission processing.

  In step S9801, the output schedule information stored in the output schedule information storage area described above is read, and the data of the output schedule information is output from the I / O port 310 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S9802, the pre-data retention time is set, and in step S9803, the pre-data retention time set in step S9802 is subtracted to determine whether the pre-data retention time has become 0 (whether the pre-data retention time has elapsed). )). If the pre-data retention time has elapsed, the process advances to step S9804. If the pre-data retention time has not elapsed, the process waits for the pre-data retention time to elapse in step S9803.

  In step S9804, strobe information is added to the output schedule information and output from the output port 310 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S9805, the pre-data retention time is set, and in step S9806, the data retention time set in step S9805 is subtracted to determine whether the data retention time has become 0 (whether the data retention time has elapsed). judge. If the data retention time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S9807. If the data retention time has not elapsed, the process waits for the data retention time to elapse in step S9806.

  In step S 9807, the output schedule information stored in the output schedule information storage area is cleared. In step S 9808, the output schedule information stored in the output schedule information storage area is read, and this output schedule information is output from the I / O port 310. To do.

  When the general information is included in the transmission information at the start of the command setting transmission process (step S9316), first, the general information does not include the strobe information in step S9801 of the command transmission process branched from the basic command setting transmission process. Is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port 310, and the signal including the strobe information and the general-purpose information is output via the output port 310 to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S9804 starting after a predetermined period. Output to. As a result, the strobe signal input to the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 also falls. Further, after a predetermined period, in step S9808, a signal in which all signals are OFF is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port 310. Since the strobe information is also turned off here, the strobe signal input to the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 also rises. Next, in step S9801 of the command transmission process branched from the previous process jumped from step S9605, a signal including general information and not including strobe information is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port 310, for a predetermined period. In step S9804 that starts later, a signal including strobe information and general information is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port 310. As a result, the strobe signal input to the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 also falls. Further, after a predetermined period, in step S9808, a signal in which all signals are OFF is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port 310. Since the strobe information is also turned off here, the strobe signal input to the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 also rises.

On the other hand, if the general information is not included in the transmission information at the start of the command setting transmission process (step S9316), the general information is not output, and the step of the command transmission process branched from the previous process jumped from step S9605 In step S9801, a signal that does not include strobe information but includes general information is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port 310, and a signal that includes strobe information and general information is output in step S9804 that starts after a predetermined period. The data is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via 310. As a result, the strobe signal input to the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 also falls. Further, after a predetermined period, in step S9808, a signal in which all signals are OFF is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port 310. Since the strobe information is also turned off here, the strobe signal input to the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 also rises.
<Return command setting transmission processing>

  Next, the return command setting transmission process (step S9319) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of return command setting transmission processing.

  In step S9901, it is determined whether or not the power is restored. If the power is restored, the process proceeds to step S9902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S9903.

  In step S9902, information indicating power recovery is set in the output schedule information stored in the output schedule information storage area, and the flow advances to step S9904.

  In step S9903, information indicating RAM clear is set in the output schedule information stored in the output schedule information storage area, and the process proceeds to step S9913.

  In step S9904, it is determined whether or not the display of the jackpot has been confirmed. If it has not been confirmed after the display of the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S9905. If the display has been confirmed after the display of the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S9909.

  In steps S9905 to S9908, the game state, the special figure operating state, the special figure lottery result, the number of the special figure variable games held and the probability variation lottery result are added to the output schedule information stored in the output schedule information storage area. . In this embodiment, based on the current gaming state, any one of information indicating the normal state, information indicating the short time state, and information indicating the probability variation state is added as the gaming state. Also, when the special figure variable game is operating, information indicating that the special figure is operating is added, and when the special figure variable game is not operating, the special figure operating state is being stopped. Add information to indicate. In addition, when the big hit flag is set on, information indicating a big hit is added as a special figure lottery result, and when the big hit flag is set off, information indicating a loss as a special figure lottery result Add If the probability variation flag is set to ON, information indicating probability variation is added as a probability variation lottery result. If the probability variation flag is set to OFF, information indicating loss is added as a probability variation lottery result. To do.

  In steps S9909 to S9912, the output schedule information stored in the output schedule information storage area includes information indicating whether or not a big hit is being made, special figure holding number information, number of times of winning a prize opening, the value of a probability change flag, and opening / closing of a prize opening Add state. In this embodiment, when the big hit flag is set to ON, information indicating the big hit is added. Further, as the special figure hold number information, the hold number data corresponding to the special figure game hold number (0 to 4 in this embodiment) is added. In addition, information indicating the number of times the variable prize opening 234 is opened is added as the number of times of opening the big prize opening. Further, when the variable prize opening 234 is open, information indicating that the variable prize opening 234 is open is added as the large prize opening / closing state, and when the variable prize opening 234 is closed, the large prize opening 234 is closed. Information indicating that the big prize opening is closed as the prize opening / closing state is added.

In step S9913, the above-described command transmission process is performed.
<Discharge control unit reset interrupt processing>

  Next, a payout control unit reset interrupt process executed by the CPU of the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit reset interrupt process.

  The payout control unit 600 is provided with a reset signal output circuit that outputs a reset signal when the power is turned on. The CPU of the basic circuit to which this reset signal is input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM.

  In step S11001, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU.

  In step S11002, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 is a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). ), It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), step S11001 is repeatedly executed. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), step S11001 is performed. The process proceeds to S11003.

  In step S11003, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, processing for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, in the counter timer, setting for permitting writing to the RAM, initial setting of the I / O port Make settings.

  In step S11004, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption). If the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state), step S11006 is executed. If the process returns to the state before the power interruption, the process proceeds to step S11005.

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the operation unit provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicating that there is an operation), that is, It is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S11006 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 408 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. Determine whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process advances to step S11006 to set the pachinko machine 100 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM is stored. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is 0 (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S11005 to return to the state before the power interruption. If the checksum result is other than 0 (checksum) If the result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S11006 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process advances to step S11006.

  In step S11005, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, initialization of the RAM storage area to be cleared upon power recovery (the command buffer for storing commands, the storage area excluding error status for storing error status, etc.) is initialized. Etc.

  In step S11006, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM, and the like are performed.

  In step S11007, initial setting 3 is performed. In the initial setting 3, information other than the illegal payout error and the payout excess error among the error statuses stored in the error status storage area provided in the RAM is cleared, interrupt permission is set, and the like.

  In step S11008, it is determined whether or not there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main control unit 300. If there is unanalyzed data, command analysis processing (details will be described later) is performed in step S11009. If there is no unanalyzed data, the process proceeds to step S11010.

  In step S11010, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. If the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S11008, and the low voltage signal is on. In the case of detecting a power shutdown, the process proceeds to step S11011.

  In step S11011, a power interruption process is performed. In the power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Further, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0 and stored in a checksum calculation numerical storage area. The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-mentioned numerical storage area for checksum calculation, and written to the RAM. Perform prohibited settings.

In step S11012, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S11012 is repeatedly executed to turn off the low voltage signal. When the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S11001, and the payout control unit reset interrupt process is started from the beginning. That is, in step S11012, after the low voltage signal is input in step S11010 (after the power supply is detected to be shut off), it is detected that the output of the low voltage signal is stopped (when the power supply is detected to be restored). ) Performs an initialization process for initializing the payout control circuit.
<Command analysis processing>

  Next, a command analysis process (step S11009) in the above-described payout control unit reset interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of command analysis processing.

  In step S11101, the number of award balls (the number of payout requests) stored as unanalyzed data in the award ball number storage area provided in the RAM and the processing type stored as unanalyzed data in the current process type storage area provided in the RAM are acquired. To do.

  In step S11102, the current machining type acquired in step S11101 and the previous machining type used last time in the command analysis process acquired from the previous machining type storage area provided in the RAM are compared. Then, it is determined whether or not the current machining type and the previous machining type are the same. If both are the same, the process ends. If both are different, the process proceeds to step S11103.

  In step S11103, the value of the current machining type is stored in the previous machining type storage area as the previous machining type.

  In step S11104, the restoration data table of FIG. 260 (e) described above is referred to, and restoration data is selected based on the current machining type, and then the processing of the number of prize balls is canceled using the restoration data. In this embodiment, the exclusive OR (EXOR) of the processed prize ball number and the restored data is calculated, and the lower 4 bits of the calculation result are stored in the prize ball number storage area as the prize ball number. For example, when the number of processed prize balls is 3 (00000011B) and the restoration data is 00H (00000000B), the result of calculating the exclusive OR is 03H (00000011B), so the number of prize balls is 3 in the lower 4 bits. It is. Further, when the processed number of prize balls is 10H (00010000B) and the restoration data is 03H (00000011B), the calculation result of the exclusive OR is 13H (00010011B), so the number of prize balls is 3 in the lower 4 bits. When the number of processed prize balls is 2DH (00101100B) and the restoration data is 0EH (000011110B), the calculation result of the exclusive OR is 23H (00100011B), so the number of prize balls is the lower 4 bits. 3. When the processed number of prize balls is 3AH (00111010B) and the restoration data is 09H (00000101B), the calculation result of the exclusive OR is 33H (00110011B), so the number of prize balls is the lower 4 bits. Of 3.

In step S11105, the number of prize balls acquired in step S11104 is added to the number of next prize ball requests stored in the next prize ball demand number storage area provided in the RAM, and the process is terminated.
<Command reception interrupt processing>

  Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of command reception interrupt processing.

  When the payout control unit 600 detects the falling edge of the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300, the payout control unit 600 executes the command reception interrupt process. When the main control unit 300 outputs the payout request signal including the strobe information, the circuit configuration is such that the strobe signal of the payout control unit 600 that has held the High level until then falls to the Low level.

  In step S11201, reception interrupt start processing is performed. In this reception interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU to the stack area is performed.

  In step S 11202, payout request information input from the main control unit 300 is input from the I / O port. In step S 11203, it is determined whether there is payout request information. If there is payout request information, the process proceeds to step S11204. If there is no payout request information, the process proceeds to step S11209.

  In step S11204, it is determined whether or not the strobe information of the payout request information is present (ON or OFF). If there is strobe information, the process proceeds to step S11205, and if there is no strobe information, the process proceeds to step S11209.

  In step S11205, the processing type is acquired from the payout request information input in step S11202.

  In step S11206, it is determined whether the payout request information includes initialization information (ON or OFF). If initialization information is present, the process proceeds to step S11208. If initialization information is not present, the process proceeds to step S11207.

  In step S11207, the number of prize balls is acquired from the payout request information, stored in the above-mentioned prize ball number storage area, and the processing type acquired from the payout request information is stored in the current processing type storage area provided in the RAM as unanalyzed data. Remember as.

  In step S11208, the machining type acquired in step S11205 is stored in the previous machining type storage area.

In step S11209, reception interrupt end processing is performed. In this reception interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S11201 is set in each original register, or interrupt permission is set.
<Discharge control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a payout control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  The payout control unit 600 includes a counter / timer 412 that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). With this timer interrupt as a trigger, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle. Start with.

  In step S11301, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU to the stack area is performed.

  In step S11302, port input management processing is performed. In this port input management process, the value of the I / O port is acquired and the state of various sensors is detected.

  In step S11303, timer update management processing is performed. In this timer update management process, various timers including timers for measuring the lighting / extinguishing time of the payout notification LED, motor driving / non-driving time, and the like are updated.

  In step S11304, error management processing is performed. In this error management process, a dish full signal input to the I / O port is detected to determine whether or not the dish full signal is on. If the dish full signal is on (the lower plate 126 is full of balls). In the error status storage area provided in the RAM, the information indicating the dish full error is stored, and the dish full signal is OFF (when the lower plate 150 has an empty space for storing balls). Stores information indicating the release of the full plate error in the error status storage area. Further, it is detected whether the communication line between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is communicable due to disconnection or the like, and if communication is possible, it is possible to communicate with the error status storage area provided in the RAM. In addition, information indicating that communication is impossible is stored when communication is impossible. In the error management process, an error release switch signal input to the I / O port is detected to determine whether the error release signal is on. If the error release signal is on, an error status is stored. The information on the illegal payout error or the payout excess error stored in the area is initialized, and these errors are canceled.

  In step S11305, CR unit communication management processing is performed. In this CR unit communication management process, a game medium lending signal is received from the CR interface unit 606, and it is determined whether or not the game medium lending signal sensor signal is on. If the game medium lending signal is on (CR interface unit) When a ball lending request from 606 is input), information indicating that there is a game medium lending request is stored in the game medium lending information storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S11306, a payout management process is performed. In this payout management process, the information of the illegal payout error and the payout excess error information are read from the error status storage area described above, and when no error has occurred, the payout sensor 604 input via the sensor circuit. The number of payouts is monitored based on a signal (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a payout sensor signal). That is, when a predetermined error (one of the errors in this case) has occurred, the driving of the motor, that is, the payout of a prize medium (for example, a game ball) from the payout device is stopped. Specifically, the signal of the payout sensor 604 is detected to determine whether or not the payout sensor signal is on. When the payout sensor signal is on (when the ball passes through the payout sensor), the number of payouts completed. 1 is added to the check and stored in the payout completion number check storage area. If the payout sensor signal is turned on when there is no request for a winning ball or a lending ball, information indicating an unauthorized payout error is set in the error status storage area, and the number of winning balls or the number of lending balls is When the number of requests exceeds each number and the number exceeds the predetermined number, information indicating a payout excess error is set in the error status storage area.

  Also, the dish full error information, the illegal payout error information, and the payout excess error information are read from the error status storage area described above, and when any error has not occurred, the payout start monitoring process, the initial position search operation One of processing, normal payout operation processing, retry operation processing, and reverse rotation operation processing is performed.

  In the payout start monitoring process, when the number of lending requests and the number of requested prize balls are 0, and the number of requested next prize balls is other than 0, the number of requested next prize balls is set as the number of requested prize balls, and the next prize ball request Clear the number. If the position of the payout motor 602 that drives the sprocket is uncertain (when the operation mode is the initial position search operation mode), 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check and stored in the payout completion number check storage area. When the position of the payout motor 602 for driving the sprocket is fixed (when the operation mode is the normal payout operation mode), 0 is set in the payout completion number check storage area as a payout completion number check. Also, the number of requested prize balls is converted into an amount (motor drive amount) for driving the sprocket payout motor 602, which is stored in a motor drive amount storage area provided in the RAM, and a motor control data table provided in the RAM. , The motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected, and the motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the motor of the sprocket a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

  In the initial position search operation process and the normal payout operation process, after the motor has been driven, a payout completion check is read from the payout completion number check storage area, and when the payout completion check is 0, preparation for executing the payout start monitoring process is performed. If the payout completion check is other than 0, information indicating the payout device error is set in the error status storage area, and preparation for executing the retry operation process is performed.

  In the retry operation process, wait for a predetermined time to elapse (wait for the retry operation start wait timer to become 0), and when the retry operation start wait timer becomes 0, execute the reverse rotation operation process. Make preparations. In the reverse rotation operation process, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the motor control data table described above, and motor drive control data indicating reverse rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. To do. Thus, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the sprocket delivery motor 602 a predetermined number of times to drive the sprocket in a reverse rotation. Further, in the reverse rotation operation process, preparation is made for executing the payout start monitoring process after the motor is driven.

  In step S11307, motor drive management processing is performed. In the motor drive management process, any one of a drive start monitoring process, an acceleration drive process, a constant speed drive process, a brake drive process, and a drive end process is performed.

  In the drive start monitoring process, the dish full error information, the illegal payout error information, and the payout excess error information are read from the error status storage area described above. Motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the table, and motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the sprocket delivery motor 602 a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

  In the acceleration drive processing and constant speed drive processing, 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check every time the motor excitation position is changed 16 times, except when the sprocket is in the initial position search operation or reverse rotation operation. Store in the payout completion number check storage area. When the updated payout completion number check is less than −4, preparation for executing the brake drive process is made. Further, the game medium lending information is read from the above-mentioned game medium lending information storage area, the presence / absence of information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is determined, and information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is present. In some cases (when a ball lending request is input from the CR interface unit 606 while paying out a prize ball), preparations for executing the brake driving process are made.

  In the brake drive process, it waits for a predetermined time to elapse (waits for the motor drive management timer to become 0), and when the motor drive management timer becomes 0, prepares to execute the drive end process In the drive end process, a post-process for driving the motor is performed.

  In step S11308, LED management processing is performed. In this LED management process, when the illegal payout error information in the error status storage area indicates that an illegal payout error is occurring, the player is notified that an illegal payout error has occurred. The LED is turned on, and when it indicates that an illegal payout error has not occurred, the LED is turned off. In addition, when the payout excess error information in the error status storage area indicates that a payout excess error is occurring, an LED for notifying the player that a payout excess error has occurred is turned on. At the same time, when it indicates that no payout excess error has occurred, the LED is turned off.

  In step S11309, signal output management processing is performed. In this signal output management process, game information stored in the RAM (for example, a prize ball signal output each time a payout sensor signal is input) is separated from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit (not shown). The information is output to the body information input circuit 350.

  In step S11310, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S11301 is set in each original register, or interrupt permission is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment includes a control circuit (a basic circuit in this embodiment) including a CPU 304 that operates for controlling a game in which a game medium rolls within a predetermined game area 124. 302, a calculation storage unit (RAM in this embodiment) 308 that stores the calculation result by the CPU 304, a start signal output circuit 340 that outputs a start signal to the control circuit 302, and a periodic signal to the control circuit 302 at a specific cycle. A periodic signal output circuit (counter / timer in this embodiment) 312 to be output and a detection circuit (ball detection sensor in this embodiment) that outputs a detection signal when the game medium passes through a predetermined position in the game area 124. ), And a plurality of periodic processes (in this embodiment, each process in the main control unit timer interrupt process) that starts when a periodic signal is input, and a plurality of periodic processes A detection monitoring process (in this embodiment, an input port state update process) that monitors the presence / absence of a detection signal from the detection circuit and stores it in the operation storage unit 308, and a monitoring in a plurality of detection monitoring processes Based on the result, a pass determination process for determining that the game medium has passed through a predetermined position in the game area 124, and a plurality of times started at predetermined intervals from a predetermined time (after power-on in this embodiment). The control circuit 302 includes a process of branching to a subsequent process without performing a process using the determination result of the passage determination process until the monitoring result in the detection monitoring process is stored in the arithmetic storage unit 308. , A game table.

  In other words, the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment operates by reading a program storage unit (ROM in this embodiment) 306 that stores a game operation program, and the program when an activation signal is input. A control circuit 302 including a CPU 304, a calculation storage unit 308 that stores a calculation result by the CPU 304, a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal to the control circuit 302, and a periodic signal that is output at a specific cycle to the control circuit 302. A periodic signal output circuit 312, and a detection circuit that outputs a detection signal when the game medium passes through a predetermined position in the game area 124, and a plurality of periodic processes that are started when the periodic signal is input; , Which is one of a plurality of periodic processes, monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal from the detection circuit, and stores it in the operation storage unit 308 And a pass determination process for determining that the game medium has passed through a predetermined position in the game area 124 based on the monitoring results in the visual processing and the plurality of detection monitoring processes, and starting at predetermined intervals from a predetermined time. The program includes a process of branching to a subsequent process without performing a process using the determination result of the passage determination process until the monitoring result in the plurality of detection monitoring processes is stored in the calculation storage unit 308. It is a game stand.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunction due to power interruption / recovery due to power failure while the game is in progress, and noise may be applied to the game table. In some cases, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that would cause the control circuit to run away and obtain an unfair advantage. Since the process using the determination result by the passage determination process is not performed until the monitoring result in the detection monitoring process is stored in the calculation storage unit, the process using the determination result by the passage determination process is started from a predetermined time. It is possible to minimize the period until the time is passed, and the information necessary for the passage determination can be used reliably from the predetermined time, so the game control can be performed even though the power is turned on. It may be possible to minimize the discomfort of the player who is interrupting the game and the decrease in the operation of the game table by minimizing the period during which the game is not performed. In some cases, game control using high-quality information can be performed.

  In addition, when an activation signal is input, a control circuit including a CPU that operates to control a game that rolls a game medium within a predetermined game area, an arithmetic storage unit that stores a calculation result by the CPU, An activation signal output circuit for outputting an activation signal to the control circuit, a periodic signal output circuit for outputting a periodic signal to the control circuit at a specific period, and when a game medium passes through a predetermined position in the gaming area. A detection circuit that outputs a detection signal, a plurality of periodic processes that start when the periodic signal is input, and one of the plurality of periodic processes, the detection signal from the detection circuit The presence / absence of a game medium is monitored, and based on the detection monitoring process stored in the calculation storage unit and the monitoring results in the plurality of detection monitoring processes, it is determined that the game medium has passed a predetermined position in the game area. The determination result by the passage determination process until the monitoring result in the plurality of times of the detection monitoring process started every predetermined period after the determination process and the activation signal are input are stored in the calculation storage unit If the control circuit includes a process for branching to a subsequent process without performing the process using the process, the determination result by the passage determination process is used until the monitoring result in the detection monitoring process is stored in the calculation storage unit. Since it is configured not to perform processing, the period from the time when the activation signal is input to the start of processing using the determination result of the passage determination processing can be minimized, and the information necessary for passage determination is reliably activated. Since the information from the time when the signal is input can be used, the period when the game control is not performed even though the power is turned on to the game machine is minimized. , It may become possible to reduce the decrease in discomfort and the game machine operation of a player who has interrupted the game. In some cases, game control using high-quality information can be performed.

  When the voltage supplied from the power supply circuit (power supply control unit in this embodiment) 660 to the control circuit 302 is less than a specific value, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 that outputs a low voltage signal and the power supply circuit 660 A backup power supply circuit (power storage device in this embodiment) that supplies power to the arithmetic storage unit 308 even during a period in which power supply to the CPU 304 is stopped is further provided, and at a predetermined time (after power on in this embodiment) ) To calculate and store predetermined first information of the setting of the control circuit 302 when a low voltage signal is input during a period until the number of times that a plurality of periodic processes are started reaches a specific number of times. After the first power interruption process (power interruption process 1 in this embodiment) stored in the unit 308 and the activation signal are input, and the number of times that a plurality of periodic processes are started reaches a specific number. When a low voltage signal is input In addition, a second power-off process (second power-off process 2 in this embodiment) that stores second information different from the first information in the setting of the control circuit 302 in the arithmetic storage unit 308; When the activation signal is input, the power recovery process for updating a part of the setting of the control circuit 302 based on the information stored in the first power interruption process or the second power interruption process is controlled. If it is configured to be included in the circuit 302, game control is not performed based on low-reliability information stored before the operation is stabilized, and power failure and power recovery due to power failure during the game are the cause. In some cases, malfunctions can be prevented more reliably. Since one of different power interruption processes is executed depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is established, highly flexible game control can be performed. For example, when the gaming state is the first state (for example, during a big hit, an error has occurred, etc.), predetermined power-off processing (for example, acquisition of checksums for all areas of the RAM 308, execution of power supply status storage, stack pointer access) The game state is in the second state (for example, the start of symbol variation is not held at all, the symbol variation is not performed, and there is no memorization of winning at the winning opening) In some cases, the predetermined interruption process may not be executed, or a part of the interruption process may be omitted. By doing this, when it is unnecessary, it becomes possible to quickly end the process at the time of power interruption, and by reducing the operation of the control unit, particularly the basic circuit, while the supplied power is unstable, In some cases, it is possible to further suppress problems such as a game table performing an operation not predicted (for example, runaway or RAM destruction). Here, as the establishment of the predetermined condition, the case where the low voltage signal is input after the start signal is input and the number of times the plurality of periodic processes are started reaches a specific number is applied. Is preferred.

  Note that the various storage areas in the above-described embodiments are not necessarily provided in the RAM. For example, when it is sufficient to temporarily store information, the storage areas may be stored in a CPU register of each control unit.

  Further, the gaming state storage area may be configured not only to be able to store single information but also to be able to store information related to a plurality of gaming states in parallel. In other words, it may be configured by a plurality of storage areas.

  The processing indicates one instruction, a plurality of series of instructions, a plurality of non-series instructions, and the like, and is not limited to the whole subroutine or a series of instructions from branch to return.

  In step S9101, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value of WDT 314, but the initial value set in WDT 314 is not limited to this. In step S9104, a numerical value corresponding to about 2 ms is set as the interrupt period of the main control unit timer interrupt. In step S11003, a numerical value corresponding to about 2 ms is set as the interrupt period of the payout control unit timer interrupt. The interrupt cycle is not limited to this.

  In step S9201, 3 is set as the initial value of the function limited timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control unit timer interrupt period is set to 1 ms, and the initial value of the function limited timer is set. If 6 is set, the initial value is set in the function-limited wait processing, and the main control unit timer interrupt is permitted, and then 6 ms at the maximum (= 1 ms (main control unit timer interrupt cycle) × 6) After that, the function limitation is canceled after a minimum of 5 ms (= 1 ms (main control unit timer interruption period) × 5), and the error (fluctuation) in the function limitation cancellation time can be reduced.

  Further, in the input port state update process in step S9303, the game medium is determined to have passed through a predetermined position in the game area 124 based on a plurality of monitoring results. However, the present invention is not limited to this. This determination process may not be performed. In this case, in the above-described embodiment, if it is determined in step S9307 that the control state is the function limited state, the process can be branched to the subsequent process without performing the process using the determination result by the input port state update process.

  Further, in the winning acceptance process in step S9310, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal recording area, the previous detection signal recording area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches, but the information on the presence / absence of any of the detection signals may be masked. The information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the area and the current detection signal recording area is compared, and the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal for the past two times in each sphere detection sensor matches It may be determined whether or not.

  The main control unit timer interrupt process is configured to branch to the subsequent process without performing the process using the determination result of the input port state update process until it is determined in step S9307 that the control state is not the function limited state. However, the skipping process is not limited to the process of steps S9308 to S9317. For example, when the control state is the function limited state, the external output signal setting process of step S9317 may be performed.

  In step S9411, the payout request information is processed by calculating the exclusive OR (EXOR) of the payout request number and the processed data. For example, the logical product (AND) of the payout request number and the processed data is calculated. The payout request information may be processed by calculating a logical sum (OR). In this case, if the payout control unit cancels the processing using a negative logical product (NAND) or a negative logical sum (NOR), Good.

  In the timer update process, nine types of timers 1 to 9 are updated about every 2 ms, and the timer 10 is updated about every 10 ms. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, timer control data If the timer update cycle of the 12th row of the table is set to 10, nine types of timers 1 to 9 can be updated about every 2 ms, and the timer 10 can be updated about every 20 ms. Also, the number of timers in the second row of the timer control data table is set to 5, then the storage addresses of timers 1 to 5 are stored, then 5 is stored as the timer update period, 5 is stored as the number of timers, Next, if the storage addresses of timers 6 to 10 are stored, the five types of timers 1 to 5 are updated about every 2 ms, and the five types of timers 6 to 10 are updated about every 10 ms. You can also.

  In the embodiment, when the voltage supplied from the power supply circuit 660 to the game control circuit 302 is less than a specific value, the first voltage monitoring circuit 338 that outputs the first low voltage signal, and the power supply circuit The two voltage monitoring circuits of the second voltage monitoring circuit that outputs the second low voltage signal when the voltage supplied from the 660 to the payout control circuit 600 is less than a specific value are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Both the voltages supplied from the power supply circuit 660 to the game control circuit 302 and the payout control circuit 402 are monitored by one voltage monitoring circuit, and the first low voltage signal or / and the second You may comprise so that a low voltage signal may be output.

  In the embodiment, only one voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided in the main control unit 300 and only one voltage monitoring circuit is provided in the payout control unit 600. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined control unit ( The main control unit 300, the payout control unit 600, etc.) are provided with a plurality of voltage monitoring circuits, and each of the plurality of voltage monitoring circuits monitors a separate power line, and one, a plurality, or all of the power lines of the plurality of power lines are monitored. When it is detected that the voltage value is less than a predetermined value, a low voltage signal may be output to a basic circuit provided in the predetermined control unit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably perform control by a predetermined control unit, and to suppress a malfunction (for example, runaway, RAM destruction) such as an operation that the game machine does not predict. . Here, one, a plurality, or all of the plurality of power lines may distribute power at the same voltage, or the power may be distributed so that all have different values of voltage.

  In the embodiment, among the processes that operate in the basic circuit (302, 402) of the predetermined control unit (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600), the process of waiting for the start of game control (step S9103, step S11002). ) Finishes the game control in the determination processing (step S9323, step S11010) whether the low voltage signal, which is a condition for waiting for the start of the game control, is ON and whether to execute the process for ending the game control. The same low voltage signal is used for the two that the low voltage signal, which is a condition for executing the processing, is ON, but is not limited thereto. For example, a predetermined power line of a predetermined control unit is monitored by a plurality of voltage monitoring circuits, and the first monitoring circuit detects the first low voltage signal when the voltage value of the predetermined power line is lower than the first voltage value. In addition, the second voltage monitoring circuit different from the first voltage monitoring circuit among the plurality of voltage monitoring circuits has a voltage value of the predetermined power line higher than the second voltage value different from the first voltage value. The second low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit of each predetermined control unit when the signal is low, and the first low voltage signal is turned on (the first The second low voltage signal is turned on (second voltage) under the condition that the above-described processing for terminating the game control is executed (the second voltage monitor circuit is in a state in which the voltage monitoring circuit of FIG. The monitoring circuit is outputting the second low voltage signal), and the like. Matter may be different. In this case, the first monitoring circuit and the second monitoring circuit may be integrated in the same substrate. In these cases, if the relationship between the first voltage value and the second voltage value is applied when the first voltage value is set higher than the second voltage value, the start of the game control is predetermined. Since it waits until the voltage value of the electric power supplied to the control unit becomes a sufficiently high voltage value, it can more reliably prevent the predetermined control unit, particularly the basic circuit, from performing an unstable operation, In addition, in some cases, it is possible to suppress problems such as a game table performing an operation that is not predicted (for example, runaway or RAM destruction), and the execution of the process for ending the game control is performed by power supplied to a predetermined control unit. Since the game control is continued until the voltage value of the second becomes a second voltage value lower than the first voltage value, the control period can be continued for a long time, and a predetermined control unit, particularly a basic circuit, can be started from the end process of the game control. Period until power is completely shut down Can prevent the predetermined control unit, particularly the basic circuit, from performing an unstable operation more reliably, and can cause a malfunction (for example, runaway) , RAM destruction) may be further suppressed. Conversely, if the second voltage value is applied higher than the first voltage value, the game control may be started quickly after the power supply to the game machine is started. The execution of the process for ending the game control takes a period of time until the voltage value of the power supplied to the predetermined control unit is completely shut off from the game control end process to the predetermined control unit, particularly the power supply of the basic circuit. Since it can be maintained for a sufficiently long time, the control state of a predetermined control unit, particularly the basic circuit, at the time of power interruption may be reliably preserved.

  In addition, for the payout control unit reset interrupt processing described in the embodiment, the voltage is further monitored after the end processing of the game control, and when the predetermined low voltage signal is turned off, the predetermined processing (in the example, the activation signal is input) To the first start process after that), the second process is used in which the condition for shifting to the predetermined process is used as the condition for executing the process for ending the game control described above. The voltage signal may be off (a state in which the second voltage monitoring circuit does not output the second low voltage signal). If the power supply to the predetermined control unit is cut off, the game control is terminated after the second low voltage signal used in the condition for executing the process for terminating the game control is turned on. If the voltage value has not decreased or has increased even though the voltage should have further decreased, the noise may be unstable due to unstable fluctuations in power. There is a high possibility that the basic circuit inputs the low voltage signal of 2 and executes the process of ending the game control. Considering such a case, since this configuration can quickly shift to a predetermined process, the period of interruption of the game due to unstable supply of noise and power can be reduced, and the game can be interrupted. It may be possible to reduce the discomfort of existing players and the decline in operation of the gaming table. In this case, the same effect can be obtained by applying the case where the first low voltage signal used in the condition of waiting for the start of the game control is turned off as the condition for shifting to the predetermined process. May be.

  Also, a third voltage monitoring circuit different from the first and second voltage monitoring circuits among the plurality of voltage monitoring circuits described above is provided, and the third voltage monitoring circuit includes the first and second voltage values. Is configured to output a third low voltage signal to a basic circuit of a predetermined control unit when the voltage value of the predetermined power line is lower than another third voltage value, respectively. The above-described third low voltage signal may be turned off (a state where the third voltage monitoring circuit is not outputting the third low voltage signal). With this configuration, the voltage value according to each condition may be set as appropriate, and it is possible to more reliably prevent the predetermined control unit, particularly the basic circuit, from performing an unstable operation. In addition, there may be a case where a malfunction (for example, runaway or RAM destruction) in which an operation that is not predicted by the game machine is performed can be suppressed. In this case, by setting the third voltage value lower than the second voltage value, it may be possible to obtain an optimal format that takes into account the power that is reduced by the execution of the process for terminating the game control.

  Moreover, although the example which equips both the main control part and the payout control part with the voltage monitoring circuit (336, 426) and the 1st-3rd voltage monitoring circuit was given, it is not limited to this, A low voltage is applied to the main control part. A voltage monitoring circuit that outputs a signal and a voltage monitoring circuit that outputs a low voltage signal to the payout control unit may be provided in any one of the main control unit, the payout control unit, or the power supply management unit. May be configured to output a low voltage signal to both the main control unit and the payout control unit, and this voltage monitoring circuit may be provided in any one of the main control unit, the payout control unit, or the power supply management unit.

  Also, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the embodiment, it indicates that there is no detection signal before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). Information), it is determined that the winning slot corresponding to the ball detection sensor is awarded, and the length of the period during which the function limited state is continued corresponds to the number of information on the presence or absence of the past detection signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the period during which the function limited state is continued may be made longer than the number of pieces of information on the presence / absence of the past detection signals. The winning determination pattern may be anything as long as it is determined in advance, and information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past two times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, If it coincides with information indicating that there is a detection signal this time), it may be determined that a prize is received at a prize opening corresponding to the ball detection sensor, or the detection of the past four times by each ball detection sensor. When the signal presence / absence information matches predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal three times before, no detection signal two times before, presence of the previous detection signal, presence of the current detection signal) You may make it determine with the winning to the winning opening etc. corresponding to a ball | bowl detection sensor. In addition, a flag is set in the RAM 308 to turn on when all of the plurality of sphere detection sensors are off (pass non-detection) and set to off when at least one is on (pass detection), and this flag is set to on. Corresponding to the sphere detection sensor (included in the above-mentioned plurality of sphere detection sensors) that has output ON (passage detection) continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) after the next time of the timer interrupt processing that has been performed. It may be determined that there has been a prize at a prize opening or the like.

  In addition, the detection results for the past predetermined number of times (for example, the past three times) for generating information on the presence / absence of the detection signal used for determining whether or not the winning determination pattern information is coincident include the current detection result. You may make it come out.

  Further, in the payout control unit reset interrupt process (FIG. 270), when the low voltage signal is turned on, the process proceeds to a power interruption process, and when the low voltage signal is subsequently turned off, a predetermined process (this flow) Then, the process shifts to the initial setting 1), and further waits not to shift to predetermined control (payout control, power recovery control in this flow) until the low voltage signal is turned off. Normally, when power supply is stopped due to power off or the like, the circuit configuration is such that the power (voltage) gradually decreases after that, but the voltage value decreases while undulating. In some cases, a phenomenon in which the low voltage signal repeats on and off may occur. For this reason, when the low voltage signal is turned off after the power interruption process, as in the payout control unit reset interrupt process, the control is not immediately shifted to the predetermined control (payout control and power recovery control in this flow). In addition, by waiting for the progress of control until the low voltage signal is turned off in step S11002, it is more certain that a predetermined control unit (for example, the payout control unit 600), particularly the basic circuit 402, performs an unstable operation. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a malfunction (for example, runaway or destruction of the RAM 408) that the game table performs an operation that is not predicted. Such processing may be applied to other control units (for example, the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400).

  Also, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the example, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). ), It is determined that a prize is received at a prize opening corresponding to the ball detection sensor, and the length of the period during which the function limited state is continued is made to correspond to the number of pieces of information on the presence / absence of the past detection signal. Although an example was given, when the predetermined device is in the first state (for example, open state) in order to confirm the state (for example, open state, closed state) of the predetermined device (for example, glass frame 151). A predetermined detection device that outputs an ON signal and outputs an OFF signal in the case of a second state (for example, a closed state) different from the first state is provided for a predetermined number of times (for example, two times). Signal from the device When the presence / absence (on / off) information matches predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that the previous detection signal is present and the time detection signal is present), the state of the predetermined device is the first The state may be determined, and if they do not match, the second state may be determined. As described above, the first determination based on the first number of signals from the first detection device and the second determination based on the second number of signals from the second detection device are the first. When the number of times is different from the second number, the first determination and the second determination are performed over a period corresponding to the number corresponding to one of the first number and the second number. It is also possible to continue the limited period processing. For example, when the first number is greater than the second number, the period-limited process in which the first determination and the second determination are not performed is continued over a period corresponding to the first number. Alternatively, the first time-limited process in which the first and second determinations are not performed over the period corresponding to the second number of times, and the first time-limited process after the end of the first time-limited process. The second time-limited process for performing the second determination may be continued without performing the determination process. For example, when the above-described determination of the state of the glass frame 151 is applied as the second determination and the above-described state determination of the glass frame 151 is applied as the second determination, the above-described ball is detected in the timer interruption processing twice from power-on. Both the passage determination and the state determination of the glass frame 151 are not performed. In the third timer interruption process, the above-described ball passage determination is not performed, the state determination of the glass frame 151 is performed, and the timer interruption for the fourth transition is performed. In the processing, both the above-described ball passage determination and the above-described glass frame 151 state determination may be performed. By doing so, the processing time can be shortened, and the processing load may be reduced.

  Further, in the embodiment, it is determined that a predetermined error has occurred among the error information (for example, information indicating a dish full error) of each device stored in the error status storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 600. When the information shown is on, the driving of the motor for rotating the payout sprocket, that is, the payout of the award medium (for example, a game ball) from the payout device is stopped, and for a predetermined period (for example, the above-mentioned During motor driving) The number of prize balls included in the payout request information received from the main control unit 300 is added to and stored in the number of next prize ball requests, and after the predetermined period, the number of next prize ball requests The motor for rotating the sprocket for payout is driven so as to continuously pay out the award balls for the minute, but with this configuration, the dish is always full during the game (ball removal Les ) Is not operated), a dish full error is intentionally generated to stop paying out, and the number of prize balls is added to and stored in the next prize ball request number, and the ball removal lever is operated at the end of the game. Even for players who are trying to solve the dish full error and pay out all the prize balls at once, the drive of the motor for rotating the payout sprocket is intermittent as in conventional machines. The payout time can be shortened because it is a structure that pays out continuously, and the time that the player waits can be reduced, and the player's irritation and discomfort that occurs when the waiting time is long can be reduced. There are cases where it can be reduced.

  In addition, game information (whether the special drawing lottery state is low probability or high probability, whether the special drawing variation time shortened state or normal state, second start opening open time extended state or normal state, etc.) is included in the basic command It may be included, and the value of the jackpot flag and the probability variation flag may be included in the return command, basic command, and the like.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation game in the present embodiment, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has won at the general diagram start port 228, a winning random number value is acquired in the winning acceptance process at step S9310. Then, starting from storing the acquired value in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, the random number counter value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 in the general drawing related lottery process of step S9313 As a result, a determination is made on the basis of the common figure winning random number value stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and the fluctuation time of the common figure is determined based on the determination result and the acquired common figure timer random number value. The normal map is variably displayed over the change time, and the stop display of the general map 1 or the general map 2 determined based on the above-described determination result is terminated.

  In the special symbol variation game in this embodiment, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has won at the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, the winning acceptance in step S9310 is accepted. In the process, the special figure winning random number value and the special figure random number value are acquired, and the acquired values are respectively stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and the predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 in the special figure lottery process in step S9315. Is acquired as a special figure timer random number value, and a determination is made based on a special figure winning random number value stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and the result is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308. The probability change is determined based on the special figure random number, and the result is determined based on the result of the determination, the result of the probability change, and the acquired special figure timer random value. Special figure A, special figure B, or special figure C determined based on the above-described determination result and the determination result of probability change. Etc. and stop display.

  Further, in the winning in the present embodiment, in addition to the case where a ball enters the winning opening and the start opening provided in the game board 200, the case where the ball passes through a passing area provided in the game board 200 (for example, a normal figure) (When a ball passes through the start port 124). In addition, the start port does not necessarily have to be provided at the position shown in the present embodiment. For example, a specific area in a specific winning opening may be made to function as the start port.

  The variable winning opening 234 is not limited to two types of open / closed states, that is, a closed state in which a ball cannot be won and an open state in which a prize can be won, and a first open state in which a ball can win, What changes into two types of open states of the 2nd open state in which a winning is easier than a 1st open state is also contained.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot (the jackpot symbol combination) is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot game is started. However, the condition for starting the jackpot game is limited to this. is not. Therefore, for example, when a game ball passes through a specific gate on the board after displaying the jackpot symbol combination stopped, or when a game ball passes through a specific winning hole on the board after displaying the jackpot symbol combination stopped After the winning combination is stopped and displayed, if the game ball passes through a specific area in the winning opening other than the big winning opening (variable winning opening), it will be released on condition that the gaming ball has won the specific winning opening. If the game ball passes through a specific area in the big winning opening (variable winning opening), the starting condition for the big hit game may be used.

  In addition, the special figure in the present embodiment shows all the symbols that the special figure display devices 212 and 214 display to change and stop, and does not show only the symbols to be changed and only the symbols to be stopped. In addition, the common symbols and decorative symbols in the present embodiment also show all symbols that the variable symbol display device 210 and the decorative symbol display device 208 display in a variable manner and stop display. It does not indicate only the symbol to be used.

  Also, when both the big hit flag and the probability variation flag are on, the above special figure A and the like, and when the big hit flag is on and the probability variation flag is off, both the big hit flag and the probability variation flag, such as the above special figure B, are displayed. In the case of off, the above special figure I and the like are stopped and displayed. However, when the big hit flag is on regardless of the value of the probability variation flag, when the big hit flag is off, such as the above special figure B. The special figure C or the like may be stopped and displayed, and when the probability variation flag is on, the high-probability medium lamp 222 may be turned on. Of course, there is one or more types of stoppages for the special figure that is displayed when the big hit flag is on and the probability change flag is off, and one type of stoppage for the special figure that is displayed when both the big hit flag and the probability change flag are on. Alternatively, one or a plurality of types of stop modes of a special figure that are stopped and displayed when both of the plurality of types and the big hit flag and the probability variation flag are off may be prepared. Thus, the special figure display devices 212 and 214 may notify the result of the probability change transition determination.

  In addition, although the three states of the high probability state, the low probability state, and the big hit state are illustrated as the gaming state, in addition to these, the normal opening in which the opening duration of the blade provided in the second special start port 232 is a predetermined time A state and an open extended state longer than the predetermined time may be provided, and these two states may be included in the gaming state. In addition, a normal fluctuation state (normal figure) in which the fluctuation time of the normal diagram display device 210 is a predetermined fluctuation time and a shortened fluctuation state (normal figure) in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the predetermined fluctuation time are provided, These two states may also be included in the gaming state. Further, a normal fluctuation state (special figure) in which the fluctuation time of the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is a predetermined fluctuation time, and a shortened fluctuation state (special figure) in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the predetermined fluctuation time. These two states may also be included in the gaming state. In addition, a low probability state (normal figure) having a predetermined probability as a winning probability in a lottery to determine whether or not to win the result of the normal figure variable game and a high probability state (normal figure) higher than the predetermined probability These two states may also be included in the gaming state, or a plurality of these states may be generated in combination. For example, in the case of a big hit in the above-mentioned special figure 1, the high probability state, high probability state (common figure), open until the special figure starts and stops a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the big hit ends. Combining the five states of the extended state, shortened variation state (common figure), and shortened variation state (special drawing) to generate a state advantageous to the player, the predetermined number of times has elapsed, or the above-mentioned special figure 2 is stopped. When the big hit is displayed, the low probability state, low probability state (normal figure), normal open state, normal fluctuation state (normal figure), normal fluctuation state (until the next big hit starts When the big hit in the above-mentioned special figure 1 is generated, the high probability state until the next big hit is started after the big hit is completed. High probability state (common figure), open extended state, shortened variation state (normal diagram), shortened variation The five states of state (special symbol) may be caused to the most favorable conditions occur to the player in combination.

  In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON and the combination of jackpot symbols that do not definitely notify the probability variation after the jackpot is finished, such as decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2, etc., are stopped and displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208. When the probability change occurs at any timing before the big hit, during the big hit, or after the big hit, or when it is notified by a specific image display by the decorative symbol display device 208, the specific image display The effect pattern may be selected based on one, a plurality, or all of the notification, the type of the specific image to be notified, the notification timing, and the like. Here, the notification by the specific image of the probability change or the probability change is not surely notified to the decorative symbol display device 208 that the probability change after the big hit such as the decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 is ended. The combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, but the fact that it will become probable after the jackpot ends is displayed by displaying on the decorative symbol display device 208 an image containing character information such as promotion, probability change, or probability variation. (This is called a promotion effect).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is described that the special hit game or the special big hit game is started when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed on the special figure display devices 212 and 214. When the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is started regardless of the value indicated by the probability change flag, and after the big hit, the game state may be changed to the high probability state. If the probability change flag is on when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped on the devices 212 and 214, the variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed 15 times (15 rounds big hit) during the big hit game, and the probability variation flag is turned off. In this case, the variable prize opening 234 may be opened and closed five times (5 rounds of big hit) during the big hit game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first start lottery data and the second start port lottery data are shown as separate data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball is won at the first start port. It is also possible to refer to a single predetermined lottery data both in the case of detecting this and in the big hit determination that is performed when it is detected that a game ball has won the second starting port.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example of a pachinko machine using a game ball as a game medium is shown as a game table, but the game table according to the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal (coin It can also be applied to a pachislot machine (slot machine) using a game medium as a game medium.

  Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the above-described actual machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines, but also to game programs that execute the operation of actual machines such as pachislot machines for home game machines in a pseudo manner. Can be applied to run the game. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  As mentioned above, although the Example of this invention was described, the effect | action and effect which were described in embodiment of this invention only enumerated the most suitable effect | action and effect which arise from this invention, The effect | action and effect by this invention Is not limited to those described in the embodiment of the present invention.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment described above will be described.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Random number generating means capable of generating at least a 16-bit random number;

  Storage means capable of storing at least the 16-bit random number;

Game control means capable of executing each of the plurality of game control processes in at least one of main control and interrupt control performed for each interrupt cycle;
A game machine equipped with

  The game control means can transfer the 16-bit random number to the storage means with a single command,

The specific flag of the random number generation means does not change before and after execution of the instruction.

  As an example of the flow of hard random number acquisition, “Set value to latch register → Random value is fetched to random value register → Flag is set to latch flag register → Random number when flag is set and flag is set There is "get flag → clear flag". In this case, there is a problem that it is easy to guess the execution timing of the random number acquisition process at the timing of the latch completion signal (set signal) or the read completion signal (clear signal) from the output of the latch signal, but the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration. The 16-bit random number can be transferred with one instruction, and the specific flag in the microcomputer does not change before and after the execution of the instruction, making it difficult to determine the execution time of the specific process. Can be prevented. The specific flag is, for example, a predetermined bit of a random number soft latch flag register.

  A 16-bit random number is stored across a plurality of addresses (registers), and can be read simply by specifying a lower byte register with one instruction. The validity determination random number is a 16-bit random number, and the random number may always be acquired with this one command. Alternatively, only a 16-bit random number may be acquired with this one instruction, and if the success / failure determination random number is an 8-bit random number, it may be acquired with another instruction.

  Processing for permitting random number reading (previously, a latch signal was output, but in this embodiment, there is no signal output because only a so-called program flag is set), and processing for reading random numbers (with read signal output) It may be executed by a separate module. Conventionally, it has been easy to guess the process of reading a random number from the timing of latch signal output, but in this embodiment, it may be difficult to guess.

  Furthermore, there is another process between the process of permitting random number reading and the process of reading, and the execution time of this different process can be made variable because there are various determination processes. Processing inference can be made more difficult.

  The process of permitting the read may be executed a plurality of times (combination of special figure 1, special figure 2, and common figure) within one interrupt. Further, it may be executable in one module. One module may be, for example, an input port state update process (step S205) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. Since the number of times a process that permits read is executed within one interrupt is variable, it may be difficult to estimate the execution time of a process that reads a random number.

  The process of reading the random number may be executed a plurality of times within one interrupt. The multiple times in this case are not limited to the combination of special figure 1, special figure 2, and ordinary figure, but also a hard random number (random number generated by a 16-bit random number generation circuit) and a soft random number (random number generated by a user program). ). Further, these read processes may be executed in one module. For example, the process of reading a random number when it matches the winning determination pattern may be repeated in one module. Alternatively, another module may be used so that another process (another module) is sandwiched between them. The start address of the module may be different from or coincide with the address corresponding to the RST instruction.

  There are three types of random number acquisition methods. As described above, there is a capturing method in which the lower byte of the soft latch random value register is read and then the soft latch flag register is reset when the upper byte is read. In addition, there is a fetching method in which the lower and upper bytes of the soft latch random value register are directly fetched into the RAM using a third instruction, which is one instruction, and the state of the soft latch flag register is not changed. Furthermore, it is possible to take in random numbers by inputting external terminals.

  Further, a soft random number may be combined with a 16-bit random number, or an initial value update random number may be combined. Or these may not be combined. For example, when a hard random number is used as the random time for determining the variation time, this random number may be directly read into the RAM without being taken into the pair register. Conversely, the success / failure determination random number may be always taken into the pair register.

  In addition, there are a random number generation circuit that does not set a maximum value and a random number generation circuit that sets a maximum value, and there is also a random number generation circuit that starts automatically after power-on. There is also a random number generation circuit that is manually activated. Even when a magnetic field detection signal, a magnetic detection signal, a radio wave detection signal, a vibration detection signal, or the like is input to a predetermined terminal, the random number generation circuit may be activated to start the random number generation circuit. .

  As a function limited timer configuration, random number acquisition and lottery processing is performed by the main control unit timer interrupt process, and while the function limited timer is operating, the process shifts to the main control unit timer interrupt process. It may not be transferred. Even in this case, the hard random number is updated. The process of acquiring a random number and performing the lottery is executed by the main controller timer interrupt process, and only a part of the main controller timer interrupt process is executed while the function limited timer is operating. Even if the lottery is not acquired, the process may be difficult to guess by starting the random number generation circuit with the maximum value setting.

  Further, the activation timings of a plurality of random numbers may be varied. Also, the one with the largest maximum value may always be activated first. The maximum value of the random number value may be set by a module different from the first module after the power is turned on (such as processing for setting the stack pointer). After WDT is activated, a predetermined random number generation circuit may be set to a maximum value and activated.

  The position of the random number maximum value setting process includes, for example, the following timing.

(A) Either before the low voltage signal output determination loop processing after power-on, during the processing, or after the processing.

(B) Either before the process of setting predetermined data in the built-in register, during the process, or after the process.

(C) Either before the process of referring to the power status (the process of branching), during the process, or after the process.

(D) Either before the check SUM loop process, during the process, or after the process.

(E) Either before the access to the built-in RAM, during the process, or after the process.

(F) Either before return start or initial start, during the process, or after the process.

(G) Either before enabling the interrupt, during the process, or after the process.

(H) Either before waiting for sub-activation, during the process, or after the process.

(I) Either before the start of updating the soft random number, during the process, or after the process.

(J) Either before sending a command such as a sub-communication confirmation command (sub-start start command, completion command) or a communication confirmation command for payout, during the processing, or after the processing.

(K) Either before WDT manual activation, during the process, or after the process.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

A microprocessor having at least the game control means;
The microprocessor is

  Stay in security mode, at least a security check is possible, and at least a random extension process that randomly changes the time until the transition to the user mode in which the game control is performed after the security check is performed Then, the mode is shifted to the user mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the random extension process is executed before shifting to the user mode, it is possible to shift the execution start timing of the game control program. For example, it may be difficult to determine the execution time of a soft random number update process, an initial value update process, and the like, and it may be possible to prevent the aim of these specific processes.

(3) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that a predetermined signal is output from a predetermined output terminal of the microprocessor before the random extension process is started.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, the predetermined terminal is a reset terminal capable of outputting a reset signal to an external device other than the microprocessor.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, a reset signal can be output to the external device before the random extension process, and the execution of the game control program can be started after the random extension process. In some cases, it is difficult to determine the execution timing of the specific processing (for example, soft random number update processing, initial value update processing, etc.), and the aim of these specific processing can be prevented.

(5) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized by having sub-control means for performing effect control based on a command sent from the game control means.
<Embodiment 6>

Hereinafter, a pachinko machine (game table) according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines that perform game control using random numbers are known. However, there has been a problem that a fraudulent act in which a gaming machine is analyzed by an unauthorized person and profits can be obtained illegally.
<Random number circuit>

  First, a 16-bit random number circuit used in the game machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is an internal block diagram of the 16-bit random number circuit.

  The 16-bit random number circuit 9000 includes four random number generation channels CH0 to CH3 that generate different random numbers. The random number generation channels CH0 to CH3 can individually generate 16-bit random numbers. Since the internal configuration of each channel circuit is the same, FIG. 274 shows one random number generation channel CH0, and the remaining random number generation channels CH1 to CH3 are simplified in illustration. In the following description, the 16-bit random number circuit 9000 will be described focusing on the random number generation channel CH0.

  In the 16-bit random number initial value setting unit 9002 in the program management area, clock selection information for determining which clock signal to use in the random number generation circuit 9006 out of the external clock signal 9004a and the internal system clock 9004b from the RCK terminal. Is set based on information in the program management area. The external clock signal 9004a and the internal system clock 9004b from the RCK terminal are input to a multiplexer provided in front of the random number generation circuit 9006. When the 16-bit random number initial value setting unit 9002 inputs an update clock selection signal to the multiplexer according to the clock selection information, the clock signal selected by the update clock selection signal is input to the random number generation circuit 9006. ing. Note that when the external clock signal 9004a is selected, a clock signal divided by a predetermined frequency division ratio (1/2 in this example) is input to the random number generation circuit 9006. Note that the frequency-divided clock signal cannot be used when the frequency is not lower than that of the internal system clock 9004b. In the present embodiment, the description will be continued assuming that the external clock signal 9004a is selected.

  The activation method for starting the random number value update by the random number generation circuit 9006 can be selected from two methods: activation by the maximum value setting signal or activation by the user mode activation signal 9008. When activation is selected in the maximum value setting, the maximum value of the generated random number value is set in the maximum value setting register 9010, and then the random number generation circuit 9006 is activated. When the activation by the user mode activation signal 9008 is selected, the random number generation circuit 9006 is automatically activated by the transition to the user mode, and the maximum value cannot be set. The maximum value of the random number value can be set individually for each of the random number generation channels CH0 to CH3.

  In the 16-bit random number initial value setting unit 9002, selection information for determining which method to activate the random number generation circuit 9006 is set based on information in the program management area. The activation signal activated at the maximum value setting or the activation signal activated at the user mode activation 9008 is input to a multiplexer provided in front of the random number generation circuit 9006. The 16-bit random number initial value setting unit 9002 inputs a selection signal to select which activation signal is selected according to the clock selection information, and the random number generation circuit 9006 is activated by the selected activation signal. ing.

  The random number generation circuit 9006 receives the clock signal selected by the 16-bit random number initial value setting unit 9002 and updates the random number according to the cycle of the clock signal. In the random number generation circuit 9006, 1 is added for each clock of the update clock signal so that the random number is updated. The random number generation circuit 9006 of the 16-bit random number circuit 9000 can generate random numbers from 0 to 65535.

  The random number generation circuit 9006 is provided with an update monitoring circuit (not shown). The random number value updated by the random number generation circuit 9006 is input to the update monitoring circuit. The update monitoring circuit monitors whether the random number is normally updated based on the input of the random value. If there is an abnormality in updating the random number, information indicating that there is an abnormality in updating the random number is transmitted to the reset controller 9060.

  The random number start value from the first round of the random number generation circuit 9006 is set to, for example, “0001H”, “change value for each system reset”, or “value based on ID number”, 16-bit random number initial value setting Set by the unit 9002. When the random number start value is set to “0001H”, the start value when the random number generation circuit 9006 is activated (at the start of update) is set to 0001H. Further, when the random number start value is set to “change value for each system reset”, the start value at the time of starting the random number generation circuit 9006 (at the start of update) is set to a value that varies for each system reset. Further, when the random number start value is set to “value based on the ID number”, the start value when the random number generation circuit 9006 is activated (at the start of update) is set to a different value for each chip.

  The random number start value selection circuit 9012 receives a signal for setting which random number start value the random number generation circuit 9006 starts to update the random number from the 16-bit random number initial value setting unit 9002. The random number start value selection circuit 9012 outputs the selected random number start value to the random number generation circuit 9006 based on the input signal. The random number generation circuit 9006 starts updating the random number from the input random number start value.

  The random number sequence generated by the random number generation circuit 9006 is updated in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). In the 16-bit random number circuit 9000, the arrangement of the random number sequence can be changed. As a method for changing the random number sequence, it is possible to select either a change by software, an automatic change from the second round, or an automatic change from the first round. When the change by software is selected, the random number sequence is changed by the user program. In this case, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 9006 makes a round, and the random number sequence is changed after the start of the next cycle. Note that when the random number sequence change selection circuit 9016 receives a round-trip signal from the random number generation circuit 9006, it is determined that one random number sequence has been made a round.

  A random number sequence change register 9014 that is effective only when the change by software is selected is provided. The random number sequence change register 9014 is provided to change the arrangement of the random number sequence generated by the random number generation circuit 9006.

  A selection signal indicating whether or not to change the random number sequence is input to the random number sequence change selection circuit 9016 by the 16-bit random number initial value setting unit 9002. The random number sequence change selection circuit 9016 selects whether or not to change the random number sequence based on the input selection signal. When the random number sequence is not changed, the random number sequence change selection circuit 9016 selects the signal “not changed” and outputs the signal to the random number sequence change circuit 9018. When changing the random number sequence, the random number sequence change selection circuit 9016 outputs a signal indicating which change method is used to change the random number sequence to the random number sequence change circuit 9018. When the change by software is selected, the random number sequence change selection circuit 9016 outputs the change information of the random number sequence to the random number sequence change circuit 9018 based on the signal from the random number sequence change register 9014.

  When changing the random number sequence, the random number sequence change circuit 9018 changes the random number sequence generated by the random number generation circuit 9006, outputs the changed random number sequence to the maximum value comparison circuit 9020, and does not change the random number sequence The random number sequence generated by the random number generation circuit 9006 is output to the maximum value comparison circuit 9020 as it is.

  When the maximum value is set and the random number generation circuit 9006 is activated, the maximum value set in the maximum value setting register 9010 is stored. When the maximum value is set in the maximum value setting register 9010, the maximum value comparison circuit 9020 compares the input random number value with the maximum value. When the maximum value comparison circuit 9020 determines that the random number value is less than or equal to the maximum value, it outputs a random value to a hard latch random value register and a soft latch random value register, which will be described later, and determines that the random value is greater than the maximum value. Then, no random number value is output to the hard latch random value register and the soft latch random value register.

  The 16-bit random number circuit 9000 is provided with two registers, CH0 hard latch selection registers 9022a and 9022b, as hard latch selection registers for the random number generation channel CH0. Further, a CH1 hard latch selection register 9024, a CH2 hard latch selection register 9026, and a CH3 hard latch selection register 9028 are provided as the hard latch selection registers for the random number generation channels CH1 to CH3, respectively. The PI0 to PI5 signals are input to these hard latch selection registers via the parallel input ports, respectively. Each hard latch selection register outputs a latch signal to the corresponding hard latch random value register based on the input of the PI0 to PI5 signals.

  In the soft latch selection register 9030, information indicating that each of soft latch random number registers 9040 to 9046 described later latches random numbers is appropriately selected according to an instruction from the CPU 304. This information is output to each of the soft latch random value registers 9040 to 9046 as a latch signal.

  Four registers, CH0 hard latch random number registers 9032a, 9032b, 9032c, and 9032d, are provided as hard latch random number registers for the random number generation channel CH0. As the hard latch random number value registers for the random number generation channel CH1, two registers, the random number generation channel CH1 hard latch random number value registers 9034a and 9034b, are provided. Two registers, CH2 hard latch random number registers 9036a and 9036b, are provided as hard latch random number registers for the random number generation channel CH2. Two registers, CH3 hard latch random number registers 9038a and 9038b, are provided as hard latch random number registers for the random number generation channel CH3.

  These hard latch random number value registers 9032a to 9032d, 9034a to 9034b, 9036a to 9036b, and 9038a to 9038b receive three signals. The first signal is a signal representing a random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the corresponding random number generation channel. The second signal is a random number latch signal (hard latch signal) output from the hard latch selection register. The third signal is a read signal indicating random number reading.

  The hard latch random number value registers 9032a to 9032d, 9034a to 9034b, 9036a to 9036b, and 9038a to 9038b always receive a signal indicating the random number updated by the random number generation circuit of the corresponding random number generation channel. Here, when a latch signal is input, a random number at this input timing is latched (held) in the hard latch random number value register. At this time, a set signal indicating that the random number is latched is output from the hard latch random number value register to the hard latch flag registers 9048a and 9048b. At this time, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number. When a random number is acquired by the CPU 304, a read signal is input to the hard latch random number value register. When a new latch signal is input by this signal, an allowable state is entered in which random numbers are allowed to be latched. In other words, once the random number is latched, it becomes an unacceptable state in which the random number cannot be newly latched until the read signal is inputted. Note that since the latched random number is held even when a read signal is input, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number any number of times at the same latched timing. With this configuration, the influence of chattering in the sensor circuit that outputs the random number latch signal can be suppressed. A clear signal indicating that a read signal has been input is output to the hard latch flag registers 9048a and 9048b. Further, as shown in FIG. 274, since there are a plurality of hard latch random number value registers, random numbers generated from the same random number generation circuit can be acquired at various timings.

  The hard latch flag registers 9048a and 9048b store information indicating whether or not a random number is latched in the hard latch random number value register. Note that the hard latch flag registers 9048a and 9048b may be configured to be automatically cleared when the random numbers (all or part of the 16-bit random numbers) latched in the hard latch random number registers are read. However, it may be configured to be cleared by the CPU 304.

  In the interrupt control registers 9052a and 9052b, information indicating whether or not to generate an interrupt in the interrupt control circuit when a random number is held in the hard latch random number value register is set. This information can be set for each hard latch random value register. For example, when the random number of the random number generation channel CH1 is latched by entering the first special figure starting port 230, an interrupt is generated, and by entering the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generating channel CH2 If a random number is latched, it can be set such that no interrupt is generated.

  Further, as the soft latch random value registers for the random number generation channels CH0 to CH3, the CH0 soft latch random value register 9040, the CH1 soft latch random value register 9042, the CH2 soft latch random value register 9044, and the CH3 soft latch random value register 9046 are random numbers. One is provided for each of the generation channels CH0 to CH3.

  Three signals are input to these soft latch random value registers 9040 to 9046. The first signal is a signal representing a random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the corresponding random number generation channel. The second signal is a random number latch signal (soft latch signal) output from the soft latch selection register 9030. The third signal is a read signal indicating random number reading.

  The soft latch random number value registers 9040 to 9046 always receive a signal indicating the random number updated by the random number generation circuit of the corresponding random number generation channel. Here, when a latch signal is input, a random number at this input timing is latched (held) in the soft latch random number value register. At this time, a set signal indicating that the random number is latched is output from the soft latch random number value register to the soft latch flag register 9050. At this time, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number. When a random number is acquired by the CPU 304, a read signal is input to the soft latch random number value register. When a new latch signal is input by this signal, an allowable state is entered in which random numbers are allowed to be latched. In other words, once the random number is latched, it becomes an unacceptable state in which the random number cannot be newly latched until the read signal is inputted. Note that since the latched random number is held even when a read signal is input, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number any number of times at the same latched timing. With this configuration, the influence of chattering in the sensor circuit that outputs the random number latch signal can be suppressed. Note that a clear signal indicating that a read signal has been input is output to the soft latch flag register 9050.

  The soft latch flag register 9050 stores information indicating whether or not random numbers are latched in the soft latch random value registers 9040 to 9046. The soft latch flag register 9050 may be configured to be automatically cleared when random numbers (all or a part of 16-bit random numbers) latched in the soft latch random number registers 9040 to 9046 are read. It may be configured to be cleared by the CPU 304.

  The interrupt controller 9070 generates an interrupt in order to appropriately execute processing according to an external input or a change in an internal state. This interrupt process includes, for example, a process executed when an external input (signal from a sensor) is received.

  In the present embodiment, using the 16-bit random number generation circuit 9000 described above, random numbers are acquired at the timing of entering each of the normal map start port 282, the first special map start port 230, and the second special map start port 232. To do. Note that the program can be executed so that the CPU 304 can acquire a random number at an arbitrary timing. Further, independent random numbers can be acquired using different random number generation channels, and the maximum value of the random number generation range can be set for each channel.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the random number generation range can be changed for each individual channel and a predetermined maximum value (for example, 65535) is applied when the range is not set has been described. For example, when changing the random number generation range, the configuration may be required to set the random number generation range for all channels.

  In addition, the random number acquired at the timing of entering the general figure starting port 282 is used as a general figure winning random number described later. In addition, the random number acquired at the timing of entering the first special figure starting port 230 is counted up (down) by processing (for example, a circuit different from the random number generation circuit (for example, the basic circuit 302 or the counter circuit 312)). The value is added (subtracted) to the random number, etc.) and used as a special figure 1 winning random number described later. Furthermore, the random number acquired at the timing of entering the second special figure starting port 232 is processed and used as a special figure 2 winning random number described later.

  The random number processing is not limited to the random number acquired at the timing of entering the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232, but other triggers (for example, entering the normal figure starting port 282). You may perform with respect to the random number acquired by the timing of balling etc.). Furthermore, when the maximum value of the random number generation range described above is set, processing corresponding to the set maximum value (for example, a process of adding a value not exceeding the maximum value to the random number) may be performed.

  In addition, although it is not always necessary to perform random number processing, it is effective to prevent random numbers from being processed. For example, when the CPU 304 monitors whether or not the processed random number has been updated, it cannot be accurately determined whether or not the random number update in the random number generation circuit 318 is normally performed. Thus, when processing random numbers, monitoring of update of random numbers by the random number monitoring circuit 3184 described above works more effectively.

FIG. 275 is an internal block diagram of the 8-bit random number circuit 10000. As shown in FIG. 275, the 8-bit random number circuit 10000 includes four random number generation channels CH0 to CH3 that generate different random numbers. The random number generation channels CH0 to CH3 can individually generate 8-bit random numbers (0 to 256). Since the internal configuration of each channel circuit is the same, FIG. 275 shows one random number generation channel CH0, and the remaining random number generation channels CH1 to CH3 are simplified in illustration. Note that the 8-bit random number circuit 10000 is substantially the same as the 16-bit random number circuit 9000 shown in FIG.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 276 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in the main control unit main process, a program activation setting process shown in FIG. 276 (a) is performed. In step S15101 of the program activation setting process, a stack pointer is set. In this stack pointer setting, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

  Next, power-on processing shown in FIG. 276 (b) is performed. In step S15103 of the power-on process, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply has been cut off), the processing of step S15103 is repeated, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 has not detected the power supply being cut off). ) Proceeds to step S15105. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process of step S15103 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S15105, initial setting 2 is executed (details will be described later).

  In step S15107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power is turned off), and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S15113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S15113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S15113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S15109 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the subsequent processing is performed. In order to delay, it progresses to step S15111. If the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process advances to step S15113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process advances to step S15113.

  In step S15109, a recovery process (power recovery process) is performed. In this restoration processing, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction that was performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before power interruption (any of steps S15117 to S15121). A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S15109, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S15233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S15111, a delay process is executed (details will be described later).

  In step S15113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S15113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S15233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S15115, delay processing is executed (details will be described later).

  In step S15117, after setting for prohibition of interruption, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S15207, which will be described later. In step S15117, in addition to the basic random number initial value update process, a basic random number update process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number update process may be performed.

  In step S15119, command transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S15121, after setting interrupt permission, other determination random number update processing is performed. In this determination random number, the random number counter for generating the special figure variation time determination random number and the common figure variation time determination random number is updated.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S15117 to S15121 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Initial setting 2>

  Next, the initial setting 2 executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 276 (c). This figure is a flowchart showing a flow of initial setting 2 in the power-on process of the main process of the main control unit.

  In step S15131, processing for starting WDT is performed. Here, WDT activation permission, initial value setting, and the like are performed. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value in WDT.

  In step S15133, random number generation circuit initial setting processing is performed, and the random number generation circuit of the random number generation channel activated by the maximum value setting is activated. After setting the maximum random number value to be generated in the maximum value setting register, the random number generation circuit is activated. The activated random number generation circuit starts updating the random number value within a range from a predetermined initial value to a maximum value.

  In step S15135, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to the timer circuit is performed.

  In step S15137, other setting processing is performed. After other setting processing, the initial setting 2 is terminated.

The order of the processes in steps S15131 to S15137 performed in the initial setting 2 can be arbitrarily set. Note that part or all of the processing performed in the initial setting 2 may be performed in step S15101.
<Delay processing>

  Next, delay processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of delay processing in the main processing of the main control unit.

  In step S15141, processing for transmitting a clear signal from a predetermined output port of I / O is executed.

  In step S15143, a sub-control unit activation wait counter that determines a cycle for waiting for activation of the first sub-control unit 400 is initialized (for example, 90 is set).

  In step S15145, the interrupt function limited counter is initialized (for example, 250 is set). The interrupt function limited counter is subtracted by timer interrupt processing every 4 ms.

  In step S15147, basic random number initial value update processing is executed (details will be described later). In step S15147, in addition to the basic random number initial value updating process, a basic random number updating process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number updating process may be performed.

  In step S15149, command transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S15151, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limit counter is 0. If the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S15147. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limit counter is 0, that is, if 250 is set in the interrupt function limit counter in step S15145 and is subtracted by the timer interrupt process every 4 ms and 1000 ms = 1 second has passed, the process proceeds to step S15153.

  In step S15153, the sub-control unit activation waiting counter is decremented by 1.

  In step S15155, it is determined whether or not the sub control unit activation wait counter is 0. If the sub control unit activation wait counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S15145. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit activation wait counter is 0, that is, 90 is set in the sub-control unit activation wait counter in step S15143 and 90 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S15157.

In step S15157, other processing is executed.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S15201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S15203, the WDT 314 is periodically updated (so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect a processing abnormality) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S15205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S15205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S15205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S15205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S15207 and S15209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in the above step S15117 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S15211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S15212, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation counter is 0. If the interrupt function limitation counter is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S15213. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limit counter is 0, the process advances to step S15214.

  In step S15213, the interrupt function limitation counter is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S15239.

  In step S15214, it is determined whether or not a specific abnormality detection flag (described later in detail) is ON. If the specific abnormality detection flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S15239. On the other hand, if the specific abnormality detection flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S15215.

  In step S15215, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S15216, winning prize counter updating processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226 and 234 and starting holes 230, 232 and 228 have been won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read and 1 is added to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S15217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S15205. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S15219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S15221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the normal state update process in the case where the normal is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S15223.

  In step S15223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S15224, special figure prefetch processing is performed. In this prefetching process, first, the special figure 1 winning random number in the special memory 1 of FIG. 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special figure 2 winning random number in the special memory 2 of FIG. 2 is prefetched. Note that prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is referred to as the result of the predetermined (correction determination (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read. In this step S15224, the pre-determined special figure is used by using a preliminary determination table having the same contents as the special figure lottery table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process (steps S15229 and S15231) described later. Pre-judgment based on the winning random number is performed. In the special figure 2 related lottery process and special figure 1 related lottery process, the special figure lottery table is used to determine whether the special figure variable game is successful or not, and the determination result here is the result of the preliminary determination only. In the pre-judgment determination, a result of “big hit” or a result other than “big hit” is derived, and in the case of a result of “big hit”, the big hit in the reserved storage unit of FIG. The special figure 1 random number is prefetched, or the big hit special figure 2 random number in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 is prefetched. Subsequently, using a pre-determination table having the same contents as the contents of the stop symbol lottery table used in the special figure related process of the special figure 2 related lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process (steps S15229 and S15231), Pre-determining the stop pattern of the special figure based on the special figure random number.

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process, the stop symbol lottery table is used to perform lottery of the special symbol stop symbol again, and the determination result here is only the result of prior determination. In this way, when the stop symbol of the special figure is determined in advance, a lottery for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice is performed. This pre-reading notice is executed before the special figure 2 related lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process (steps S15229 and S15231) are executed, that is, before the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is performed. This is a notification for notifying that the result of the success / failure determination performed in the related lottery process will be a big hit (here, more limited to 15R big hit (15R special big hit or 15R big hit)). The pre-reading notice here is a fake pre-reading notice that gives a false notice as if it was a big hit of 15R even if the pre-determined result of the stop symbol is not a big hit of 15R (Special Figure A or Special Figure B) Is also included. In other words, the pre-reading notice indicates that there is a possibility that the result of the success / failure determination will be a 15R jackpot, an advance notification that suggests to the player, or an advance notice that the player expects that the result of the success / failure determination will be a 15R jackpot. It can be said that it is information. An effect random number (for example, a possible range is 0 to 99) is acquired from an effect random number counter provided in the RAM 308 at the timing of performing the pre-reading notice execution availability lottery, and the execution availability lottery is performed based on the acquired effect random number. In addition, the prior determination result of the stop symbol may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may perform this execution availability lottery.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S15225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S15233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S15233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S15233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S15233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S15233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S15233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S15227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S15227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S15225 and step S15227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S15229), and then the special figure related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S15231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S15232, device monitoring processing is executed (details will be described later).

  In step S15233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands (for example, a signal indicating a specific abnormality when there is a specific abnormality in the device monitoring process in step S15232) are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, commands such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, FRAM (registered trademark) clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S15233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S15235, an external output signal setting process is performed. Specifically, an external terminal board signal, a test fire test signal, and the like are set. If there is a specific abnormality in the device monitoring process in step S15232, a signal indicating the specific abnormality is set. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S15239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S15243. If the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S15241.

  In step S15241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S15201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S15243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

  The following errors can be considered as errors monitored in the device monitoring process (step S15232).

  The error types are: tray full tank error (bottom full tank error), payout device error, payout excess error, payout error, payout number switch error, main control communication error, CR unit disconnected error, CR unit communication error, magnetic error Error, external clock error, magnetic field error, switch level error, frame open error (front frame door open error), switch disconnection error, shock sensor error, etc.

  The bottom pan full tank error is when the on state of the bottom pan full switch signal is read from the main when the timer interrupt is read once by the predetermined input port of the main board (when switching from the off state to the on state). It is output for payout.

  The payout device error means that the payout number (count number of the payout number switch) is a payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor has finished driving the number of payout requests (actually + brake period + non-excitation period has elapsed). When the number is smaller than the number, the occurrence of a payout device error is detected. When the retry process of paying out the game balls one by one is completed, the error state is canceled.

  The payout excess error is to stop the payout operation when ten game balls actually paid out with respect to the payout request number are detected. This payout excess error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180.

  The illegal payout error is to stop the payout operation when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch is counted) in a state where no payout request is generated. This illegal payout error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180.

  The payout number switch error is an error of the payout number switch (not shown) of the game ball controlled by the payout board 170, and stops the payout operation when an abnormal connection of the payout number switch is detected (regardless of the main board). To do. This payout number switch error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168. After confirming whether the switch is connected correctly, the error cancel switch 168 is operated, or the RAM clear switch 180 is initialized (RAM clear). The error state is released.

  The main control communication error is an error that occurs when the main control connection confirmation signal OFF state is detected or when the main control operation confirmation signal ON state is detected continuously for two interrupts. Reception is impossible. However, if the number of payout requests remains, the payout is made up to that amount. When the ON state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected, and when the OFF state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts, the error state is canceled.

  The CR unit unconnected error occurs when the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is off when the CR unit unconnected error is released and continues for 16 ms. There is no effect on the payout of the ball). When the ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected and continued for 16 ms, the error state is canceled. After the error is released, communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

  Here, the connection signal relationship between the CR unit and the interface will be described. When various signals are transmitted from the CR unit to the payout board via the interface, the CR unit connection signal is a VL signal composed of a + 18V power source in the CR unit. The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal that conveys that the CR unit is being lent. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal for transmitting 25 lending requests and lending instructions for the basic unit.

  The CR unit communication error occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the lending request is generated (although there are other conditions, they are omitted because they are not particularly related here). After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error state is canceled by turning off the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal.

  The magnetic abnormality error is to stop the main control operation when a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The external clock error is an error that occurs when an error is detected in the random number update clock. The magnetic field abnormality error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field exceeding a predetermined amount is detected.

  The switch level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a winning switch is detected and continued for 1 second. The frame opening error is an error that occurs when the opening of the glass frame or the inner frame is detected. The switch non-connection error is an error of a winning switch (not shown), and is an error that occurs when an abnormal connection of a winning switch is detected.

The impact sensor error is an error notification that continues until the power is turned off when the impact sensor detects an impact exceeding a predetermined amount.
<Device monitoring processing>

  Next, device monitoring processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing in the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  In step S15251, device information indicating the presence / absence of the error is initialized.

  In step S15253, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read, the presence / absence of the error is monitored, and if the error is detected, the process proceeds to step S15255. On the other hand, if the above error is not detected, the device monitoring process is terminated.

  In step S15255, abnormality information (device information) indicating the error detected in step S15253 is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S15257, it is determined whether there is specific abnormality information in the abnormality information set in step S15255. If there is specific abnormality information, the process proceeds to step S15259. On the other hand, if there is no specific abnormality information, the process proceeds to step S15261. The specific abnormality information is abnormality information of one or a plurality of errors set in advance from the above-described abnormality information regarding errors. For example, abnormality information of a magnetic abnormality error may be set in advance as specific abnormality information.

  In step S15259, the specific abnormality detection flag is turned on.

  In step S15261, a device command transmission request is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 280, random numbers used in the game machine of the present embodiment and main derivation sources will be described. FIG. 2 is a table showing random number derivation sources used in the game machine of this embodiment.

  Special figure 1 winning random numbers are generated by combining the random value generated by the 16-bit random number circuit CH and latched by the hard latch random number register 0 and the random value generated by the 16-bit random number circuit CH1 and latched by the soft latch random number register. The basis is The random number generation circuit for generating these random number values is updated based on the external clock signal. In addition, the maximum value setting of the generated random number value is set to none.

  Special figure 2 winning random numbers are composed of a random value generated by the 16-bit random number circuit CH0 and latched by the hard latch random number register 1 and a random value generated by the 16-bit random number circuit CH2 and latched by the soft latch random number register. Is the basis. The random number generation circuit for generating these random number values is updated based on the external clock signal. In addition, the maximum value setting of the generated random number value is set to none.

  In the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 2 winning random number, the same random number generation channel may be used, and the hard latch random value register for hard latching may be different between the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 2 winning random number. Also, the random number generation channel for soft latching may be different between the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 2 winning random number.

  The display symbol random number is based on the random number value generated by the 16-bit random number circuit CH3 and latched by the hard latch random number register 0. The random number generation circuit that generates the random number value is updated based on the external clock signal. In addition, the maximum value of the generated random number is set to be present (for example, 0 to 199).

  The usual winning random number is based on the random number value generated by the 8-bit random number circuit CH0 and latched by the hard latch random number register 0. The random number generation circuit that generates the random number value is updated based on the external clock signal. In addition, the maximum value setting of the generated random number value is set to none.

  The big hit special figure random number, the small hit special figure random number, and the special figure random number for loss are generated in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt processing. That is, these random numbers are so-called software random numbers. Note that the initial value generating random numbers used when generating these random numbers are generated by the main control unit main process and the main control unit timer interrupt process. The big hit special figure random numbers, the small hit special figure random numbers, and the special figure random numbers for loss may be hard latched random numbers.

  For the special figure fluctuation time determination random number and the normal figure fluctuation time determination random number, the value of the counter circuit 312 is used as a random number. In the count circuit 312 of this embodiment, in addition to the system clock of the microprocessor 3000, a timeout signal from the timer circuit, a memory read / write signal, a memory request signal, an external input / output signal, and the like can be used as counter targets. . Therefore, by combining these, a value having no regularity is derived and used for the above random number. The production random number is generated by the main control unit main process and the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  Next, a random number used in the game machine (slot machine) of this embodiment and its main derivation source will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a table showing random number derivation sources used in the game machine of this embodiment.

  The role lottery random number is based on a random value generated by the 16-bit random number circuit CH0 and latched by the soft latch random value register. The random number generation circuit for generating the random number value is updated based on the internal clock signal. In addition, the maximum value setting of the generated random number value is set to none.

  The effect lottery random number is based on a random value generated by the 16-bit random number circuit CH1 and latched by the soft latch random value register. The random number generation circuit for generating the random number value is updated based on the internal clock signal. In addition, the maximum value setting of the generated random number value is set to none.

  The left reel delay time lottery random number is based on the random number value generated by the 8-bit random number circuit CH0 and latched by the soft latch random number value register. The random number generation circuit for generating the random number value is updated based on the internal clock signal. In addition, the maximum value setting of the generated random value is set to “Yes”.

  The medium reel delay time lottery random number is based on the random number value generated by the 8-bit random number circuit CH1 and latched by the soft latch random number value register. The random number generation circuit for generating the random number value is updated based on the internal clock signal. In addition, the maximum value setting of the generated random value is set to “Yes”.

  The right reel delay time lottery random number is based on the random number value generated by the 8-bit random number circuit CH2 and latched by the soft latch random number value register. The random number generation circuit for generating the random number value is updated based on the internal clock signal. In addition, the maximum value setting of the generated random value is set to “Yes”.

  In the slot machine, since the random number generation circuit is not updated based on the external clock signal, the read processing of the random number fetched before setting the maximum value may not be performed.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 281 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  A random number circuit capable of deriving at least a random number (for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 9000, an 8-bit random number circuit 10000),

  Each of the plurality of game control processes is executed in at least one of main control (for example, main control unit main process) and interrupt control (for example, main control unit timer interrupt process) performed for each interrupt cycle. A game table including a possible game control means (for example, main control unit 300), wherein the random number circuit is updated with a first random number (for example, a maximum value setting) within a first numerical range. A random number generated by a random number generation circuit that is activated, and the random number circuit is a second random number that is updated within a second numerical range (for example, a random number that is activated by activation of a user mode) A random number value generated by the generation circuit), and the first random number start time and the second random number start time (for example, when the random number generation circuits of the random number generation channels CH0 to CH3 start) ) Is characterized by different.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the start times of the random number generation circuits that generate the first random number and the second random number are different, it is difficult to analyze the start times of the two random number generation circuits by an unauthorized person. In some cases, stable game control can be performed.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100, the game control process includes at least a first process (for example, step S15103 of the main control unit main process), and the first random number start time and the first One of the starting times of the second random number is after the first process.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the start time of the random number generation circuit that generates the first random number or the second random number is after the first process, it is possible to make fraud by an unauthorized person more difficult. In some cases, stable game control can be performed.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100, the first process can hold the progress of control, and the first process is performed when a control progress condition is satisfied (for example, a main control unit Yes in step S15103 of the main process), the hold can be released, and the control progress condition is established when the first signal changes from the first state to the second state. It is characterized by.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the activation time of the random number generation circuit changes according to the change time of the state of the first signal, fraud by an unauthorized person can be made more difficult and stable game control can be performed. There are cases where it can be done.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, a second process that can instruct the random number circuit to set the numerical range (for example, step S15133 of the main control unit main process), and a random number derived by the random number circuit The third process (for example, step S15217 of the main control unit timer interrupt process) and the fourth process (for example, the main control that can execute the determination based on the random number acquired by the third process) The game control process includes at least step S15223, step S15229, and step S15231) of the part timer interrupt process, and the first numerical range is set by the second process. The second numerical range is set without depending on the second processing, and when the first numerical range is set, the first random range is set. Wherein the activation of those that can start.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the random number generation circuit is activated (starts updating) after the numerical value range is set, so that stable game control can be performed without updating numerical values outside the numerical value range. There is.

  The first process may be one or a plurality of instructions. The first process may be a branch instruction. The update cycle of the first random number and the update cycle of the second random number may be the same. The first random number and the second random number may be generated by the same random number circuit (channel). The start time of the first random number may be later than the start time of the second random number. The start time of the first random number may be after the second random number has been updated a plurality of times. The first numerical range may be smaller than the second numerical range. The start time of the second random number may be simultaneous with the start time of the program or before the start time of the program.

  One of the first random number and the second random number may be related to the player's profit, and the other may not be related to the player's profit. The first random number and the second random number may be related to the player's profit, and one of the first random number and the second random number is directly related to the player's profit. The other may be indirectly related to the player's interests. The first random number and the second random number may relate to the player's interest.

  The first random number and the second random number may be unrelated to the player's interest. The start time of the first random number may be any one immediately after, before, or immediately after setting the stack pointer. The start time of the first random number may be immediately after, immediately before, or just before the jump process.

  The start time of the first random number may be any of immediately after, immediately before, or immediately before the first process. The start time of the first random number may be immediately after, before, or immediately after the counter circuit setting process. The start time of the first random number may be immediately after, before, or immediately after the clear signal output process.

  The random number circuit is capable of deriving a third random number that is updated within a third numerical range, and the third numerical range is set by the second process, A storage means capable of storing at least the setting values of the numerical value range and the third numerical value range is provided, and the setting of the first numerical value range and the third numerical value range is performed at an address storing the setting value stored in the storage means It may be set from a small one.

  The second random number may be related to the player's interest, the first random number may be indirectly related to the player's interest, and the third random number may be related to the player's interest. It may not be. The start time of the third random number may be any one of the start time of the first random number, immediately after, before, or immediately before. The random number circuit may include a plurality of random number circuits, and each of the plurality of random number circuits may include a hard latch random number value register and a soft latch random number value register.

  The plurality of random number circuits may include a 16-bit random number circuit and an 8-bit random number circuit. The 16-bit random number circuit may include a plurality of hard latch random number value registers. The 8-bit random number circuit may have only one hard latch random number value register. The 16-bit random number circuit has a first 16-bit random number circuit having a first number of hard latch random number value registers and a second 16-bit random number circuit having a second number of hard latch random number value registers smaller than the first number. A bit random number circuit may be included.

  The 16-bit random number circuit may have only one soft latch random value register. The 8-bit random number circuit may have only one soft latch random value register. When setting the numerical range of the 16-bit random number circuit and the numerical range of the 8-bit random number circuit, the numerical range of the 16-bit random number circuit may be set before the numerical range of the 8-bit random number circuit. When setting the numerical range of the 16-bit random number circuit and the numerical range of the 8-bit random number circuit, the numerical range of the 8-bit random number circuit may be set before the numerical range of the 16-bit random number circuit.

  The start time of the first random number may be while the payout control means is performing the initial setting process. The start time of the first random number may be while the payout control means is waiting for a signal from the main control means. The start time of the first random number may be during the start process of the sub control means. The start time of the first random number may be while the display data displayed on the image display means is developed by the image display control means.

  The random number circuit includes a plurality of channels (including a first channel and a first channel), can update a random number for each channel, and can generate a random value for each channel. The numerical value range generated for each channel can be set.

The “first random value in the first numerical range” may be “a first random value that is not less than the first minimum value and not more than the first maximum value”. The “second random value in the second numerical range” may be “a second random value that is greater than or equal to the second minimum value and less than or equal to the second maximum value”.
<Embodiment 7>

  Next, Embodiment 7 as still another modification of the package on which the basic circuit 5302 of the main control unit 5300 of Embodiment 5 described above is mounted will be described in detail. FIG. 282 (a) is a plan view of the package 10100a and the package 10100b on which the basic circuit 5302 is mounted. The package 10100a has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a plurality of terminals are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the package 10100a on both sides in the lateral direction. The package 10100b has the same shape as the package 10100a. ICs provided inside the package 10100a and the package 10100b are used so as to exhibit different functions, and the basic circuit 5302 can be configured by combining them. A square columnar convex portion 10101a is formed at the center of the package 10100a in plan view, and a square columnar convex portion 10101b is formed at the center of the package 10100b in plan view.

  FIG. 5B is a plan view showing a shape in which the package 10100a and the package 10100b are connected using the connection member 10100c. FIG. 3C is a side view thereof. FIG. 4D is a perspective view thereof. The connecting member 10100c has an elongated rectangular parallelepiped shape that is a flat bar shape. Concave portions 10101c into which the rectangular columnar protrusions 10101a or 10101b can be fitted are provided on both ends of the thin plate portion of the connection member 10100c. The length in the short direction of the connecting member 10100c is shorter than the length in the short direction of the package 10100a and the package 10100b.

  FIGS. 5B, 5C, and 5D show a plurality of packages 10100a and 10100b in which the projecting portions 10101a and 10101b of the package 10100a and the package 10100b are fitted in the two recesses 10101c of the connecting member 10100c, respectively. The terminal arrangement direction is aligned in the longitudinal direction and integrated. Thus, by connecting and integrating the two packages 10100a and 10100b with the connection member 10100c, the two packages 10100a and 10100b may be easily arranged close to each other on the substrate.

  FIG. 283 (a) is a plan view showing a shape in which the package 10120a and the package 10120b on which the basic circuit 5302 is mounted are connected by the connection wiring portion 10120c. FIG. 2B is a side view of the same. FIG. 2C is a perspective view thereof. The package 10120a has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a plurality of terminals are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the package 10120a on both sides in the lateral direction. The package 10120b has the same shape as the package 10120a. The ICs provided inside the package 10120a and the package 10120b are used to perform different functions, and the basic circuit 5302 can be configured by combining them.

  A circuit in the package 10120b can be electrically connected to a circuit in the package 10120a through an opaque connection wiring portion 10120c in which a plurality of wirings are incorporated. The connection wiring part 10120c has a flexible wiring board, and has a plurality of wirings arranged in parallel on the wiring board. Both wiring end portions of the connection wiring portion 10120c are connected to terminal portions provided at the center of the side surface portion on the short side of the package 10120a and the package 10120b, respectively. The length in the direction in which the plurality of wirings are arranged in a row substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the plurality of wirings in the connection wiring portion 10120c is shorter than the length in the short direction of the package 10120a and the package 10120b. Although the package 10100a and the package 10100b shown in FIG. 282 are not directly connected to each other, the package 10120a and the package 10120b shown in FIG. 283 are electrically connected to each other via the connection wiring portion 10120c. It is configured to be directly connected. The package 10120a and the package 10120b can be combined and used as a microcomputer, and there are cases where the security can be improved by combining the package 10120a and the package 10120b so that the input / output terminals do not remain.

  FIG. 284 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the package 10100a and the package 10100b illustrated in FIGS. 282 (b), (c), and (d) are integrated by the connection member 10100c and covered with the housing case 10103. 284 (a) is a plan view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a perspective view. The storage case 10103 can be separated into an upper case 10103a and a lower case 10103b. The housing case 10103 is molded from, for example, an opaque insulating resin. In a state where the upper case 10103a and the lower case 10103b are combined, the housing case 10103 as a whole has a thin rectangular parallelepiped shape. When the package 10100a, the package 10100b, and the connection member 10100c are sandwiched between the upper case 10103a and the lower case 10103b, only a plurality of terminals of the package 10100a and the package 10100b protrude and other members are accommodated in the accommodation case 10103. A package 10100 can be obtained. By covering the package 10100a, the package 10100b, and the connection member 10100c with the housing case 10103 in this manner, it may be possible to prevent the package 10100a, the package 10100b, and the connection member 10100c from separating.

  FIG. 285 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the package 10120a and the package 10120b illustrated in FIGS. 283 (a), (b), and (c) are integrated by the connection wiring portion 10120c and covered with the housing case 10104. 285 (a) is a plan view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a perspective view. The storage case 10104 can be separated into an upper case 10104a and a lower case 10104b. The housing case 10104 is made of, for example, an opaque insulating resin. The storage case 10103 as a whole in a state where the upper case 10104a and the lower case 10104b are combined has a shape obtained by connecting three thin rectangular parallelepiped shapes. Specifically, the storage case 10104 includes a box-shaped first region A formed so as to follow the outer shape of the package 10120a, and a box-shaped third region C formed so as to follow the outer shape of the package 10120b. The first region A and the third region C are connected to each other and the second region B that accommodates the connection wiring portion 10120c is formed. By sandwiching the packages 10120a, 10120b and the connection wiring portion 10120c between the upper case 10104a and the lower case 10104b, only the plurality of terminals of the package 10120a and the package 10120b are opposite to the first side surface and the first side surface of the case 10104. It is possible to obtain an integrated package 10120 that protrudes from the housing and in which other members are housed in the housing case 10104. Regarding the length of the storage case 10104 in the short side direction (distance between the first side surface and the second side surface), the first region A and the third region C are substantially the same length, and the second region B is the first region A. It has a shorter length. By covering the packages 10120a, 10120b and the connection wiring portion 10120c with the housing case 10104 in this manner, it may be possible to prevent the package 10120a, the package 10120b, and the connection wiring portion 10120c from separating.

  Further, since the integrated package 10120 electrically connects the two packages 10120a and 10120b with the connection wiring portion 10120c, an illegal act of connecting an unauthorized electronic component through the connection wiring portion 10120c is performed. It is assumed that An unauthorized electronic component is likely to be mounted on the back side of the integrated package 10120 in order to make it difficult to find. For this reason, the shape of the housing case 10104 having a narrow width at the center as shown in FIG. 285 is observed on the back side of the integrated package 10120 as compared to the housing case 10103 having a rectangular parallelepiped shape as a whole as shown in FIG. Since it is easy, it is suitable. The second region B is integrated by observing using the concave portion formed in the central portion of the housing case 10104 because the width in the short direction of the second region B is narrower than the width in the short direction of the first and third regions A and C. In some cases, it is possible to easily find a fraudulent act such as attaching a fraudulent circuit to the back side of the package 10120 or the gap between the integrated package 10120 and the substrate (or IC socket), and prevent the fraudulent act. .

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment described above will be described.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  A gaming machine equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the game,

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The microcomputer is housed in a DIP type package (for example, an integrated package 10120),

  The package is integrally provided with a first region (for example, first region A), a second region (for example, second region B), and a third region (for example, third region C) in this order. ,

  A plurality of terminals are provided on each of the first side surface of the first region and the third region, and the second side surface facing the first side surface,

  No terminals are provided on the first side surface and the second side surface of the second region,

The width between the first side surface and the second side surface of the second region is shorter than the width between the first side surface and the second side surface of the first region.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it is possible to easily find a fraudulent act that retrofits a fraudulent circuit and prevent the fraudulent act in advance.
<Eighth embodiment>

  Hereinafter, a pachinko machine (game table) according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 286 shows the relationship between the state of the special figure start port and the acquisition of random numbers. (A), (b) shows the detection signal of the ball detection sensor of the special figure start port (here, for example, special figure 2 start port 232) output to the special figure start port of I / O 310. ing. The horizontal axis indicates the passage of time, and the vertical axis indicates the signal level. Moreover, the time points shown in (1) to (4) in the figure indicate the start timing of the timer interrupt process in the main control unit 300. In this example, the timer interrupt cycle is assumed to be 4 ms. In addition, regions indicated by broken lines in the figure indicate times A, B, and C at which random numbers are latched or acquired. At time A, for example, a random number generated by a 16-bit random number circuit 9000 is latched in a predetermined soft latch random number value register (for example, CH0 soft latch random value register 9040), and a random number value (hereinafter referred to as a hard random number (hereinafter referred to as a hard random number) (Referred to as "soft latch"). Time B indicates a time when a software random number generated by the user program (hereinafter referred to as a soft random number) is acquired. At time C, a random value (hereinafter referred to as a hard random number (hard latch)) is latched in a predetermined hard latch random value register (for example, CH0 hard latch random value register (0) 9032a) of the 16-bit random number circuit 9000. Indicates the time. These timings A, B, and C are shown with a time width because the timing of latching and acquisition fluctuates or is indefinite.

  In the example shown in FIG. 286 (a), the state of the special figure start port at the time point (1) is off, the state of the special figure start port at the subsequent time point (2) is on, and the state at the subsequent time point (3). Since the state of the special figure start port is also on (hereinafter, sometimes abbreviated as “off-on-on”), in the input port state update process (step S205), the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times is checked. It is determined that the information matches the winning determination pattern information. As a result, it is determined that there has been a prize at the special figure 2 starting port 232 in the prize acceptance process (step S217) of the timer interrupt process started at the time (3). The main control unit 300 acquires a hard random number (soft latch) from a predetermined soft latch random value register of the 16-bit random number circuit 9000 at time A including time (3), and softens at time B including time (3). Get a random number. Next, random number processing such as adding a soft random number to a hard random number (soft latch) is executed. The processed random number value is used in the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) as a random number for determination of success / failure.

  The table shown on the right side of FIG. 286 summarizes the random number acquisition timing, and shows the timing, the acquisition timing, and the type of random number in order from the left. In the example shown in FIG. 286 (a), a hard random number (soft latch) is acquired at time A when the acquisition timing includes time (3), and a soft random number is acquired at time B when the acquisition timing includes time (3). . Strictly speaking, the winning acceptance process (step S217) is after a predetermined period from the time point (3). In addition, since there are various determination processes before the winning acceptance process, the hard random number (soft latch) latch time and the soft random number acquisition time may be changed randomly. The random number acquisition may be executed at time (4). In this case, on-on-off (or on-on-on-off) information is used as the winning determination pattern information, and the input port state update process (step step) of the timer interrupt process started at time (4) In S205), it is determined that the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three matches with the winning determination pattern information. In addition, it is determined in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the timer interrupt process started at time (4) that the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and random number acquisition is executed. By doing so, there are cases where the timing of random number acquisition can be further varied. Further, the period from winning determination to random number acquisition can be surely made longer than the cycle of the random number sequence. Note that, for example, when off-on is used as the winning determination pattern information as information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past two times, the state of the special drawing start port at the time point (1) is off, and at the subsequent time point (2). Since the state of the special figure start port of is ON, random number acquisition can be executed by the timer interrupt processing started at the time (2).

  Next, an example shown in FIG. 286 (b) will be described. For example, the random number circuit 9000 shown in FIG. 274 can receive a random number by inputting an external terminal. In the 16-bit random number circuit 9000, a random number value is latched in a predetermined hard latch random number value register when an active signal longer than the period set in the input port control register is input. For this reason, a hard random number (hard latch) can be acquired by inputting a signal indicating the state of the special figure start port to the external terminal input of the random number circuit 9000.

  As shown in FIG. 286 (b), when the state of the special view start port changes from OFF to ON between time (1) and time (2), a hard random number (hard latch) is latched at time C. More specifically, the hard latch is executed several μs after the rising edge of the waveform in which the state of the special figure start port changes from OFF to ON. That is, hard latching is performed after a predetermined period after passing through the sphere detection sensor.

  Next, the state of the special drawing start port at the time (1) is off, the state of the special drawing start port at the subsequent time (2) is on, and the state of the special drawing start port at the subsequent time (3) is Since it is ON, in the input port state update process (step S205) at the time point (3), it is determined that the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three matches the winning determination pattern information. As a result, it is determined that there has been a prize at the special figure 2 starting port 232 in the prize acceptance process (step S217) of the timer interrupt process started at the time (3). The main control unit 300 acquires a hard random number (soft latch) from a predetermined soft latch random value register of the 16-bit random number circuit 9000 at time A including time (3), and hard random numbers previously latched at time C Get (hard latch). Next, random number processing such as adding a hard random number (hard latch) to the hard random number (soft latch) is executed. The processed random number value is used in the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) as a random number for determination of success / failure.

  The table shown on the right side of FIG. 286 (b) summarizes the random number acquisition timing, and shows the timing, the acquisition timing, and the type of random number in order from the left. In the example shown in FIG. 286 (b), a hard random number (soft latch) and a hard random number (hard latch) latched at time C are acquired at time A when the acquisition timing includes time (3). Strictly speaking, the winning acceptance process (step S217) is after a predetermined period from the time point (3). Further, the hard latch depends on the winning timing and is generated regardless of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300. That is, since the timing for latching a hard random number (hard latch) is accidental, it may not be possible to specify the latch timing from the start position of the user program. In addition, since there are various determination processes before the winning acceptance process, the latch time of the hard random number (soft latch) may be changed randomly. Further, as described above, the random number acquisition may be executed by the timer interruption process started at the time (4). By doing so, there are cases where the timing of random number acquisition can be further varied. Further, the period from winning determination to random number acquisition can be surely made longer than the cycle of the random number sequence. As described above, the winning determination pattern information is changed, and the state of the special figure start port at the time point (1) is off, and the state of the special figure start port at the next time point (2) is on and the prize is received. It is also possible to execute random number acquisition by timer interruption processing that is started at time (2) after determination. If it is determined that the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for a plurality of past times does not match the winning determination pattern information, the hard random number related to the hard latch is not captured.

  FIG. 287 is similar to that shown in FIG. 286 (b), but shows a case where the hard latch timing of the hard random number is shifted. Depending on the setting of the noise filter 3185 and the timing of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the timing of the hard latch is after the rising edge of the waveform of the special figure starting port and the start time (2) of the timer interrupt process. There may be a time t. That is, the timer interrupt timing is sandwiched between the rising edge of the waveform of the special figure start port and the hard latch timing (time t).

  FIG. 287 shows a case where the hard random number is soft latched by the timer interrupt process started at time (4). For example, when the internal system clock (for example, 10 MHz) is used, the cycle for which the 16-bit random number value (0 to 65535) makes a round is approximately 6.6 ms. On the other hand, the hard random number (hard latch) is latched at time t near the time point (2), and the hard random number (soft latch) is latched after time point (4) after the elapse of about two interrupts. The interval between the hard latch and the soft latch can be as short as 2 interrupts (about 8 ms). For this reason, it is possible to latch the hard random number by the soft latch after surely making a round of the random number sequence after latching the hard random number by the hard latch. That is, the randomness at the time of random number acquisition can be increased. In order to enable the winning determination process by the timer interruption process started at the time (4), the winning determination pattern information may be turned on the previous time, turned on the previous time, and turned off this time. By doing so, the state of the special figure start port at the time point (2) is on, the state of the special figure start port at the next time point (3) is on, and the special figure start port at the subsequent time point (4) In the input port state update process (step S205) of the timer interrupt process started at time (4), it is determined that the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three matches the winning determination pattern information. Is done. When the maximum value is set in the 16-bit random number circuit 9000, there are cases where the random number sequence can be surely made one or more rounds. Further, when it is desired to make a round of the random number sequence, or when soft latching is to be performed with two interrupts, it can be realized by setting the maximum value low.

  In the random number fetching shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, the soft random number fetching may use direct random number fetching using the third instruction described with reference to FIG. 250 and the like in the sixth embodiment instead of the soft latch. . Further, in the above embodiment, in setting the hard latch, the next latch is accepted without reading the latched random value. However, if the latched random value is not read, the next latch is not accepted. But of course. In this case, even if it is determined that the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the winning determination pattern information, the hard random number related to the hard latch is once fetched and then the random number is discarded. do it.

  In the above-described embodiment, the random number for determining whether or not to use is determined as an example of using a random value based on a combination of a hard latch and a soft latch. For example, a random number for determining a symbol is a random value based on a combination of a hard latch and a soft latch May not be used.

  In the above embodiment, the maximum value is not set in the 16-bit random number circuit 9000. However, the maximum value may be set. Further, an 8-bit random number may be acquired from the 8-bit random number circuit 10000 in the same manner as described above. Furthermore, a 16-bit random number circuit 9000 and an 8-bit random number circuit 10000 may be combined to acquire a random number in the same manner as described above. Furthermore, a combination of a hard latch and a soft latch may be combined with a soft random number, or another numerical value may be combined. Further, a hard latch and another hard latch may be combined. Further, in the above embodiment, the random value acquisition using the 16-bit random number circuit 9000 shown in FIG. 274 is taken as an example. However, the hard latch and the soft latch are performed by the random value acquisition using the counter circuit 312 shown in FIG. You may make it let.

  Also, the timing at which the game ball passes the ball detection sensor and the hard latch timing may be different interrupt cycles. For example, as described above, there is a case where the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor in 4 ms due to the first interruption and a hard latch is performed in 4 ms due to the next interruption. When a random value is latched in the hard latch random value register by the hard latch, “1” is set in the latch flag register. At this time, for example, a hard random number (hard latch) may be transferred to the CPU core register or RAM in the special drawing related lottery processing in the interrupt processing that has already been started. Of course, a hard random number (hard latch) may be transferred by processing or the like. When a hard random number (hard latch) is acquired, “0” is set in the latch flag register. The hard random number (soft latch) is executed by an input port state update process or the like in the interrupt process. When “1” is set in the soft latch selection register, the random value is latched in a predetermined soft latch random value register. At the same time, “1” is set in the soft latch flag register. Next, a hard random value (soft latch) is written in a predetermined area of the CPU core register or RAM by a special drawing related lottery process or the like. Further, the soft latch flag register is set to “0” (cleared).

  In the special drawing related lottery process, the special figure stop symbol is determined based on the acquired random number value, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is determined, or the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a probable state or a normal state. However, different random numbers may be used in the determination. Various combinations are possible. For example, when the special figure stop symbol is determined, only the gaming state may be determined, or when the special symbol stop symbol is determined, only the number of rounds may be determined.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment described above will be described.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a random number generation means (for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 9000 and an 8-bit random number circuit 10000) that derives a random number that is updated within a predetermined numerical range, and a plurality of game controls. Game control that can be executed in at least one of main control (for example, main control unit main processing) and interrupt control (for example, main control unit timer interrupt processing) performed for each interrupt cycle. And a random number generation unit configured to latch a first random number (for example, a hard random number (hardware)) based on a signal input to an external terminal input. Latch)) can be generated, and a second random number (for example, a hard random number (soft latch) or a random number value is directly taken in based on the control of the game control means) Hard random number obtained by the above-mentioned game control means, and the game control means can obtain the second hard random number at a timing different from the timing at which the first random number is latched. And a second random number are combined to generate a predetermined random number.

  Conventionally, a random number acquired by a soft latch that can control chattering removal by a user program has been used. In order not to waste the latched hard random number, it is desirable that the hard random number can be latched using predetermined winning determination pattern information. However, since a latch signal is output inside the circuit, there is a possibility that an unauthorized person can grasp the timing of analyzing a random number or determining whether or not it is correct by using this latch signal. Thus, after latching hard random numbers, it is difficult to analyze random numbers at least by using a combination of soft random numbers updated by the user program. However, there is a problem that the timing for obtaining the soft random number is close to the timing for latching the hard random number and that the random number update cycle of the soft random number is long, so that it is easy to decipher. If it is a problem that the hard random number latch time is close to the soft random number acquisition time, the timing for obtaining the soft random number may be synchronized with, for example, the rising edge of the signal input to the special figure start port. It is done. However, since the soft random number update period is long, the problem remains that it is easy to decipher.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, instead of combining soft random numbers, a hard random number for hard latch is acquired, and a hard random number acquired by another method is combined to generate, for example, a random number for determination of success / failure. . According to the above pachinko machine, a hard random number that is different from the hard random number by the hard latch is acquired at a timing different from the timing of the hard latch, and the acquired hard random number (hard latch) and the hard random number acquired by other than the hard latch are obtained. I tried to combine them. As a result, there is a possibility that the execution timing of the process may be grasped on the basis of the timer interrupt in the soft random number, but it may be difficult to identify the hard latch because it is accidental and the latch timing is indefinite.

(2) The pachinko machine 100 includes a microprocessor having at least the game control means, and the microprocessor can perform at least a security check, and the game control is performed after the security check. At least a random extension process for randomly changing the time until the transition to the user mode is performed, and after shifting to the security mode, the transition to the user mode is performed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the random extension process is executed before shifting to the user mode, it is possible to shift the execution start timing of the game control program. For example, it may be difficult to determine the execution time of a soft random number update process, an initial value update process, and the like, and it may be possible to prevent the aim of these specific processes.

(3) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that a predetermined signal is output from a predetermined output terminal of the microprocessor before the random extension process is started.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, the predetermined terminal is a reset terminal capable of outputting a reset signal to an external device other than the microprocessor.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, a reset signal can be output to the external device before the random extension process, and the execution of the game control program can be started after the random extension process. In some cases, it is difficult to determine the execution timing of the specific processing (for example, soft random number update processing, initial value update processing, etc.), and the aim of these specific processing can be prevented.

(5) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized by having sub-control means for performing effect control based on a command sent from the game control means.
<Modification of Embodiment 6>

  Next, a counter circuit 312 used in a pachinko machine (game table) according to a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 288 is a block diagram showing the counter circuit 312.

  The counter circuit 312 has four channels of 8-bit programmable counters. That is, as shown in FIG. 288, four counter circuits (counter circuits 0 to 3) are prepared. Each counter circuit is an up-counter circuit, and an independent operation mode can be set. Since these four counter circuits have the same configuration, the counter circuit 0 will be described here.

  The counter circuit includes a control register 3121, an 8-bit counter 3122, a counter setting register 3123, and a counter register 3124. The control register 3121 can acquire various signals flowing through the internal bus, and FIG. 288 shows that the control register 3121 can acquire eight types of signals. These eight types of signals are a system clock signal (SCLK), a timeout signal from each of the timer circuits 0 to 2 shown in FIG. 132, a CPU core memory request signal (XMREQ signal), a CPU core write signal (XWR signal), CPU core IO request signal (XIORQ signal) and CPU core interrupt request response signal (maskable interrupt acknowledge cycle; XINTACK signal). The control register 3121 is an 8-bit register that selects a clock source for operating the 8-bit counter 3122. In other words, it selects which signal input from the eight signal lines is used as the clock source. The control register 3121 is also a register for setting permission / prohibition of the 8-bit counter 3122.

  Further, the counter circuit 312 may be capable of setting at least two update sources among the XWR signal, the XMREQ signal, the XIORQ signal, and the timeout signal of the timer circuit n as update sources. In other words, the counter circuit may be capable of setting both the second update source and the third update source excluding the first update source among the plurality of update sources.

  The detailed configuration of the control register 3121 is the same as the example shown in FIG.

  The counter setting register 3123 is an 8-bit register that sets the count value (maximum value) of the 8-bit counter 3122 that is an up-counter circuit. In this embodiment, a count value from 0 to 255 can be set. When “255” is written, the maximum value 255 is set as the count value. In this case, 0 to 255 is a predetermined numerical range. When “00” is set as the set value, the operation of the 8-bit counter may be stopped. Each counter circuit may be a down counter circuit. In the case of a down counter circuit, the counter setting register 3123 is a register for setting a minimum value.

  The counter register 3124 is a register for reading the value of the 8-bit counter 3122 in accordance with the input timing of the CPU register read signal.

  The setting values of each register described above are stored in the program data area of the built-in ROM 306. Each set value stored in the program management area is called from the program data area in the initial setting 2 (step S15105) in the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. This is called in the main part processing and main control unit interrupt processing shown in FIG. 278 and set in each register. When the count value is written to the counter setting register 3123, the value of the 8-bit counter 3122 is cleared to “00H”. After that, when “1” is written to the fourth bit of the control register 3121, the selected clock source Up-counting of the 8-bit counter 3122 is started.

  The counter circuit 312 is provided with CH0,1 hard latch selection registers 9022, 9024 as hard latch selection registers for the counter circuits 0,1. In FIG. 288, the CH0,1 hard latch selection registers 9022, 9024 are shown together. Further, CH2, 3 hard latch selection registers 9026, 9028 are provided as hard latch selection registers for the counter circuits 2, 3. In FIG. 288, the CH2, 3 hard latch selection registers 9026 and 9028 are shown together. These hard latch selection registers 9022, 9024, 9026, and 9028 are inputted with PI0 to PI5 signals via the parallel input ports, respectively. Each hard latch selection register outputs a latch signal to the corresponding hard latch random value register based on the input of the PI0 to PI5 signals.

  A CH0 hard latch random value register 9032a is provided as a hard latch random value register for the counter circuit 0. Further, as a hard latch random value register for the counter circuit 1, a CH1 hard latch random value register 9034a is provided. Further, a CH2 hard latch random value register 9036a is provided as a hard latch random value register for the counter circuit 2. A CH3 hard latch random value register 9038a is provided as a hard latch random value register for the counter circuit 3.

  Three signals are input to these hard latch random number value registers 9032a, 9034a, 9036a, and 9038a. The first signal is a signal representing a random number generated by the 8-bit counter of the corresponding counter circuit 0-3. The second signal is a random number latch signal (hard latch signal) output from each of the hard latch selection registers 9022, 9024, 9026, and 9028. The third signal is a read signal indicating random number reading.

  The hard latch random number value registers 9032a, 9034a, 9036a, and 9038a are always input with signals representing random numbers generated by the 8-bit counters of the corresponding counter circuits 0 to 3. Here, when a latch signal is input, a random number at this input timing is latched (held) in the hard latch random number value register. At this time, a set signal indicating that the random number is latched is output from the hard latch random number value register to the hard latch flag registers 9048a and 9048b. At this time, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number. When a random number is acquired by the CPU 304, a read signal is input to the hard latch random number value register. When a new latch signal is input by this signal, an allowable state is entered in which random numbers are allowed to be latched. In other words, once the random number is latched, it becomes an unacceptable state in which the random number cannot be newly latched until the read signal is inputted. Note that since the latched random number is held even when a read signal is input, the CPU 304 can acquire the latched random number any number of times at the same latched timing. With this configuration, the influence of chattering in the sensor circuit that outputs the random number latch signal can be suppressed. A clear signal indicating that a read signal has been input is output to the hard latch flag registers 9048a and 9048b.

  The hard latch flag registers 9048a and 9048b store information indicating whether or not a random number is latched in the hard latch random number value register. Note that the hard latch flag registers 9048a and 9048b may be configured to be automatically cleared when random numbers (all or part of 8-bit random numbers) latched in the hard latch random number registers are read. However, it may be configured to be cleared by the CPU 304.

  The activation timing of the 8-bit counters provided in the counter circuits 0 to 3 of the counter circuit 312 according to this modification can be different depending on whether the count value is not set or when the counter value is set. The 8-bit counter when the counter value is not set is activated during the program activation setting process of the main control unit main process. The 9-bit counter for setting the counter value is started after setting the count value in the initial setting 2 (step S15105) of the main control unit main process. The starting times of the 8-bit counters of the counter circuits 0 to 3 can be set individually.

  The counter circuit 312 described above corresponds to an example of a numerical value updating unit.

  The 8-bit counter of the counter circuit 312 used in the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification is a hard random number counter.

  The hard random number counter is updated by the internal system clock (SCLK) or the external clock (RCK). The update cycle of the hard random number counter is shorter than the update cycle of the soft random number. The update cycle of the hard random number counter is shorter than the interrupt cycle of the interrupt process. The update time of the hard random number counter does not depend on the program processing, but only the update start time (start-up time) depends on the program processing when the maximum value is set. The soft random number counter is updated every update process in the program process. The update time of the soft random number depends on the program processing.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the seventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 288 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  A hard random number counter (for example, an 8-bit counter 3122) capable of deriving at least a random number, and interrupt control (for example, main control unit main process) and interrupt control (for example, each of a plurality of game control processes) are performed. Game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that can be executed in at least one of the main control unit timer interrupt processing), the hard random number counter, A first random number updated within the first numerical range (for example, a random value generated by a random number generation circuit activated by setting a maximum value) can be derived, and the hard random number counter A second random number updated within the numerical range (for example, a random value generated by a random number generation circuit activated by user mode activation) can be derived, and the first random Starting time and starting time of the second random number (e.g., 8-bit counter start timing of the counter circuit 0-3) is characterized by different.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the start times of the two hard random number counters are different, it may be difficult for an unauthorized person to analyze the two random numbers, and stable game control may be performed.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100, the game control process includes at least a first process (for example, step S15103 of the main control unit main process), and the first random number start time and the first One of the starting times of the second random number is after the first process.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the hard random number counter is activated after the first processing, it is possible that fraud by an unauthorized person can be made more difficult and stable game control can be performed. .

(3) In the pachinko machine 100, the first process can hold the progress of control, and the first process is performed when a control progress condition is satisfied (for example, a main control unit Yes in step S15103 of the main process), the hold can be released, and the control progress condition is established when the first signal changes from the first state to the second state. It is characterized by.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the activation time changes in accordance with the change timing of the state of the first signal, so that fraud by an unauthorized person can be made more difficult and stable game control can be performed. There is a case.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, the hard random number counter is derived by the second process (for example, step S15133 of the main control unit main process) that can instruct the setting of the numerical range to the hard random number counter. A third process capable of acquiring the random number (for example, step S15217 of the main control unit timer interrupt process) and a fourth process capable of performing a determination based on the random number acquired by the third process (for example, The game control process includes at least steps S15223, S15229, and S15231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and the first numerical range is set by the second process. Yes, the second numerical range is set without depending on the second processing, and the first numerical range is set. The case, characterized in that activation of the first random number is capable start.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since it is updated after the numerical value range is set, there is a case in which stable game control can be performed without updating numerical values outside the numerical value range.

A characteristic configuration of the above-described <fourth special instruction / RST instruction> in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present invention described above will be additionally described below.
(Appendix 1)

A gaming machine having a microcomputer with a built-in CPU, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU is stored in a jump destination address based on receipt of a specific jump instruction. The address information is included in the specific jump instruction, and when the specific address information is included as the address information, the jump is performed. The destination address is a predetermined address indicated by a predetermined value that does not match the value obtained when the address information is multiplied by a specific value, and is different from the specific address information as the address information. If information is included, the jump destination address is the address information and the specific In which the address indicated by the value that matches the value obtained when multiplying the value, the amusement machine, characterized in that.
(Appendix 2)

In the gaming machine according to attachment 1, since the specific address information is 0, the CPU is prohibited from accepting an instruction stored at address 0 after the specific jump instruction. A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)

The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2, wherein the CPU includes at least a specific register, and the CPU is based on receiving a load command among functions for setting a value in the specific register. What is performed is a gaming machine having only a function of setting a value by a direct value.
(Appendix 4)

The gaming machine according to appendix 3, wherein the CPU sets a predetermined value as a function other than that performed based on receiving the load command among functions for setting a value in the specific register. A gaming table having at least a function of setting as an initial value.
(Appendix 5)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4, comprising game control means for performing game control and effect control means for performing effect control, wherein the microcomputer incorporating the CPU includes the effect control A gaming table which is not mounted on the means and is mounted only on the game control means.
(Appendix 6)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4, comprising game control means for performing game control, effect control means for performing effect control, and payout control means for performing payout control, including the CPU The gaming machine is characterized in that the microcomputer is mounted on at least one of the game control means and the payout control means, not mounted on the effect control means.
(Appendix 7)

A gaming machine including a microcomputer including at least a CPU, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the CPU executes a first jump based on receiving a first jump command. An instruction stored in the destination address can be accepted, and the CPU accepts an instruction stored in the second jump destination address based on the acceptance of the second jump instruction. The first jump instruction includes at least 3-bit first identification information, and the second jump instruction includes at least 3-bit second identification information. The first jump destination address is an address indicated by a first value, and the second jump destination address is a second address The first value is a value eight times that of the first identification information, and the second value is different from a value eight times that of the second identification information. A gaming machine characterized by being a value that is eight times the value that exceeds the maximum value that can be indicated by 3 bits by 1.
(Appendix 8)

The gaming machine according to appendix 7, wherein the second identification information is 0.
(Appendix 9)

The gaming machine according to appendix 7 or 8, wherein the first identification information is any value from 1 to 7.
(Appendix 10)

The gaming machine according to appendix 9, wherein the second jump destination address is 64, which is a value that is eight times the value 8 exceeding the maximum value 7 of the first identification information by 1. There is a game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 11)

  11. The gaming table according to claim 7, wherein the CPU can accept a jump instruction different from the first jump instruction and the second jump instruction. A game table that features

  Hereinafter, a pachinko machine (game table) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 and 290. FIG. 289 shows processing A to processing D executed by the CPU 304. Process A (for example, periodic interrupt process, main loop, etc.) is a process stored between address A and address B of ROM 306, and is designated to call process a1 and process whose head address is address C. Call instruction A (for example, RST instruction), process a2, call instruction A (for example, RST instruction) designated to call a process whose head address is address E, process a3, head address is address F This indicates that the CPU 304 executes each process and each instruction in the order of the call instruction B (for example, the EXEBUS instruction) designated to call a certain process and the process a4.

  Process B (for example, data process 1 etc.) is a process stored between address C and address D of ROM 306, and a call instruction designated to call process b1 and process whose head address is address F It shows that each process and each instruction is executed by the CPU 304 in the order of B (for example, EXESUB instruction), NOP process (for example, one NOP instruction), process b2, and process C.

  The process C (for example, the data process 2) is a process stored between the addresses E to D of the ROM 306.

  The process D (for example, the data process 3) is a process stored between the address F and the address G of the ROM 306.

  In FIG. 289 and FIG. 290, the “instruction” is a single instruction operation unit (opcode) and a single unit that can be accepted by the CPU 304 including the number of operand units (operands) necessary for the CPU 304 to operate based on the instruction operation unit. A term that refers to a set of instructions.

  “Processing” in FIGS. 289 and 290 is a term indicating data processing. The number of instructions executed by the CPU based on input data or the like is composed of one instruction or a plurality of instructions. Includes things that change.

  When the CPU 304 accepts an RST command (see FIG. 65, etc.), the CPU 304 out of a plurality of predetermined addresses (for example, eight addresses 08H, 10H, 18H, 20H, 28H, 30H, 38H, 40H, etc.) When the CPU 304 finishes executing the process (for example, returns by a RET instruction), the CPU 304 executes the process next to the RST instruction. It is configured to read and execute stored instructions.

  When the CPU 304 accepts the EXESUB instruction (see FIGS. 25 to 28, etc.), the CPU 304 sets the address indicated by the operand part of the EXEBUS instruction within a predetermined address range (for example, 4 kilobytes of 0000H to 11FFH). When the CPU 304 finishes executing the process (for example, returns by a RET instruction), the CPU 304 reads and executes the instruction stored next to the EXEBUS instruction. It is configured.

  With these configurations, the CPU 304 calls process a1, a call instruction A (for example, an RST instruction) designated to call a process whose start address is address C, process b1, and a process whose start address is address F. Call instruction B (for example, EXESUB instruction), NOP process, process b2, process C, process a2, and call instruction A (for example, RST instruction) designated to call the process whose top address is address E Etc.), process C, process a3, call instruction B designated to call the process whose head address is address F (for example, EXESUB instruction, etc.), process D, and process a4 in the order of process a4. Run.

  Here, the NOP process is a process including at least a NOP instruction, and is composed of only one NOP instruction, composed of only a plurality of NOP instructions, one or a plurality of NOP instructions and one or a plurality of other You may apply what was comprised by the command.

  When the CPU 304 accepts a NOP instruction, the CPU 304 reads the instruction stored next to the NOP instruction after the elapse of the NOP instruction time without performing any operation or performing a specific operation when the NOP instruction is accepted. Configured to run. The NOP instruction does not require an operand part, and is configured with a predetermined number of states (for example, 4 states) and a predetermined instruction length (for example, 1 byte).

  However, for the gaming machine (slot machine, pachinko machine, gaming medium encapsulated slot machine, gaming medium encapsulating pachinko machine, etc.), the NOP process is replaced by another unauthorized process by an unauthorized person. It has a very big problem. The reason why information stored in the ROM 306 is composed of numerical information (numerical values indicating commands, that is, numerical values constituting the command operation unit / object unit) that is difficult for the inspector to confirm It has become.

  For example, it is assumed that a modification that stores unauthorized processing in an area starting from the address H of the ROM 306 is performed by an unauthorized person, and a modification that replaces the NOP process with a specific calling process (unauthorized process) is performed by the unauthorized person. Here, it is assumed that the specific calling process is a calling process for calling a process starting from the address H. When such modification is performed, the CPU 304 calls and executes the illegal process stored by the modification by the unauthorized person when the process B is executed. Here, the modification of re-storing the storage contents of the ROM 306 attached to the regular gaming machine is illustrated, but depending on the unauthorized person, the ROM 306 attached to the regular gaming machine may be subjected to a specific calling process as described above. -A technique for exchanging an illegal ROM in which illegal processing is stored, or a microprocessor 3000 (including (for example, incorporating) ROM 306) attached to a legitimate gaming machine is an illegal microprocessor (as described above). It is also possible to use a technique such as exchanging for an illegal ROM in which the call processing / illegal processing is stored.

  In addition, the fraud processing is performed when there is a fraudulent input (for example, a signal that is monitored when a predetermined signal is input to the microprocessor and is determined to be on when the change pattern of the signal is a specific change pattern). Predetermined illegal RAM setting processing (for example, a flag indicating the gaming state of the RAM 308 (a jackpot flag in the case of a pachinko machine, a probability change flag in the case of a pachinko machine, a flag indicating whether the BB / RB is in the case of a slot machine, etc.) A value indicating the convenient state of an unauthorized person (a value indicating a big hit in the case of a pachinko machine, a value indicating a probability change in the case of a pachinko machine, or a BB / RB in the case of a slot machine) In general, this is not limited to this, but it is one of various processes by unauthorized persons, such as a process that simply spends time. Others may be a plurality.

  Accordingly, FIG. 290 shows a game control realized without using this NOP process.

  FIG. 290 shows processing A to processing D executed by the CPU 304. Of the processes / instructions in FIG. 290, the same processes / instructions as in FIG. 289 have the same names.

  Process A in FIG. 290 (for example, periodic interrupt process, main loop, etc.) is a process stored between address A and address B of ROM 306, and calls process a1 and process whose head address is address C. Call instruction A (for example, RST instruction), process a2, call instruction A (for example, RST instruction) specified to call the process whose head address is address E, process a3, and head address is This indicates that the CPU 304 executes each process and each instruction in the order of the call instruction B (for example, the EXESUB instruction) designated to call the process at the address F and the process a4.

  Process B (for example, data process 1 etc.) is a process stored between address C and address D of ROM 306, and a call instruction designated to call process b1 and process whose head address is address F It is shown that each process and each instruction is executed by the CPU 304 in the order of C (for example, CALL instruction), process b2, and process C.

  The process C (for example, the data process 2) is a process stored between the addresses E to D of the ROM 306.

  The process D (for example, the data process 3) is a process stored between the address F and the address G of the ROM 306.

  When the CPU 304 accepts a CALL instruction, the CPU 304 executes a process using the address indicated by the operand part of the CALL instruction as a head address, and the CPU 304 ends the execution of the process (for example, returns by a RET instruction). In this case, the instruction stored next to the CALL instruction is read and executed.

  With these configurations, the CPU 304 calls process a1, a call instruction A (for example, an RST instruction) designated to call a process whose start address is address C, process b1, and a process whose start address is address F. Call instruction C (eg, CALL instruction), process b2, process C, process a2, and call instruction A (eg, RST instruction) designated to call the process whose head address is address E, Each process / instruction is executed in the order of process C, process a3, call instruction B designated to call the process whose head address is address F (for example, EXESUB instruction), process D, and process a4.

  The processing of both the EXESUB instruction and the CALL instruction is a process capable of calling the process D, but the size of the EXEBUS instruction is 2 bytes and the number of states is 13, while the size of the CALL instruction is 3 bytes and the number of states. If the address F, which is the start address of the processing D, is within a predetermined address range, the size advantage and the number of states (when using the EXESUB instruction than when using the CALL instruction) (Processing speed).

  However, since the RST instruction can call only one of a plurality of predetermined addresses as described above, the first process (here, a plurality of instructions other than the NOP stored from the address C to the address E) is performed. When the size is a predetermined size (for example, 7 bytes, 7 bytes or less, etc.), the second process (here, process C) is called alone, or the third process including the second process (here) Then, it is impossible to call the process B (process consisting of both the first process and the second process) unless the NOP process is included.

  Therefore, in the first process, the call instruction B (here, the EXEBUS instruction) is not used, but the call instruction C (here, the CALL instruction) is used instead. Although it is disadvantageous and disadvantageous due to slow processing speed, the first process can be accommodated between address C (for example, 20H) and address E (for example, 28H). Since the size can be set to 8 bytes without using the NOP process, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from replacing the illegal process with the NOP process, and an illegally strong game control program can be stored in the ROM 306. It becomes.

  Here, using FIG. 289 and FIG. 290, instead of the call instruction B, use the call instruction C whose instruction (processing) size and instruction processing time are different but whose processing result is the same as that of the call instruction B. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and instead of the second instruction, the size of the instruction (processing) and the processing time of the instruction are different, but the processing result is the second instruction. Any processing that does not use the NOP processing by using the same first instruction as that described above may be used. Here, as an example of the second instruction and the first instruction, the EXESUB instruction and the CALL instruction are shown. However, as other examples, a JR instruction and a JP instruction, an RST instruction and an EXESUB instruction, an RST instruction and a CALL instruction, etc. Of the instructions that can be accepted by the processor 3000, the “second instruction” and the “first instruction whose processing result is the same as the second instruction although the instruction (processing) size and instruction processing time are different” Should be applied. Here, branch instructions are shown as examples of the first and second instructions. However, both the first and second instructions are transferred instructions, search instructions, arithmetic operation processing instructions, logical operation processing instructions, general arithmetic functions, MPU The instruction may be any one of a control instruction, a rotate instruction, a shift instruction, a bit processing instruction, a jump instruction, a call instruction, a shift instruction, and an input / output instruction. In addition, “total of the size of the first plurality of instructions / total processing time” and “total of the sizes of the plurality of instructions / total processing time of the plurality of instructions are different, but the processing result is the first plurality of instructions” May be applied to “second multiple instructions that are the same as”, or “second instruction size / processing time” and “total of multiple instruction sizes / total processing time of multiple instructions are different” May be applied to the “second plurality of instructions whose processing result is the same as the second instruction” or “the total of the sizes of the first plurality of instructions and the total processing time” and “the instruction It may be applied to a “first instruction whose size and instruction processing time is different but whose processing result is the same as the first plurality of instructions”. Here, the instructions included in the first plurality of instructions and the instructions included in the second plurality of instructions may be any instructions as long as the microprocessor 3000 can accept them. Also, “Instruction size / processing time is different” or “Total instruction size / total processing time is different” has been described, but it can be replaced with at least “instruction size” or “total instruction size”. Similar effects can be obtained. The same effect may be obtained even if the value of the flag register after the first instruction is executed and the value of the flag register of the second instruction are the same. Of course, the same effect may be obtained even if the value of the flag register after execution of the first instruction is different from the value of the flag register of the second instruction.

  Of the “plurality of instructions constituting process B”, instructions other than the “plurality of instructions constituting process C” (in the case of FIG. 290, one or more instructions constituting process b1, b2 One or a plurality of instructions and a call instruction C) may include a NOP instruction, and even if a NOP instruction is included, the number of NOP instructions is reduced by the call instruction C. There may be an effect that it becomes difficult.

  The NOP instruction may not be included in any instruction other than “a plurality of instructions constituting process C” among the above “a plurality of instructions constituting process B”, and is stored in ROM 306 and executed by CPU 304. All instructions may be instructions other than NOP.

  Here, the NOP instruction has been exemplified as an instruction used for an illegal act by an unauthorized person. However, even if it is accepted and executed by a CPU such as “LD A, A”, nothing happens before and after the execution. The processing may be considered in the same way as a NOP instruction.

  The value obtained by subtracting the address C from the address E may be a value obtained by subtracting the size of the process C from the size of the process B in some cases. The value obtained by subtracting the size of the process C from the size of the process B may be smaller than the value obtained by subtracting the address C from the address E.

  With respect to FIG. 290, one or more of the processing a1, processing a2, processing a3, processing a4, processing b1, processing b2, and processing D may be omitted. The call instruction B may also be omitted.

  A call instruction A that is designated to call a process B whose start address is an address C and a call instruction A that is designated to call a process C that is an address E to a plurality of instructions of the same process (subroutine) , The call instruction A specified to call the process B whose start address is the address C is included in the plurality of instructions in the process A, and a plurality of instructions in the process E different from the process A are included. The instruction may include a call instruction A that is designated to call the process C having the head address of the address E.

  As for the size of the process, the size of the call instruction for calling another process from the process may be included, and the size of the process called by the call instruction may not be included.

  Regarding the number of processing states (processing time), the number of states (processing time) of a calling instruction that calls another processing from the processing may be included, and the number of processing states (processing time) called by the calling instruction. May also be included.

  The first instruction (for example, CALL instruction) may be configured to be used only in a subroutine called from the above-described call instruction A among all the game control programs stored in the ROM 306. Of course, it may be configured to be used only during the period from when the subroutine is called by the call instruction A described above until it is terminated, for example, it may be configured to be used only within a subroutine called from the subroutine. It may be. Further, it may be used other than a subroutine called from the above-described calling instruction A.

  The second instruction (for example, the EXESUB instruction) may be configured to be used only in the subroutine called from the above-described call instruction A among all the game control programs stored in the ROM 306. Of course, it may be configured to be used only during the period from when the subroutine is called by the call instruction A described above until it is terminated, for example, it may be configured to be used only within a subroutine called from the subroutine. It may be. Further, it may be used other than a subroutine called from the above-described calling instruction A.

Note that the instructions illustrated in the other embodiments may be applied as the instructions illustrated in the present embodiment, and conversely, the instructions illustrated in the present embodiment may be applied as a form of the instructions illustrated in the other embodiments. May be. For example, “RST 40H” exemplified in another embodiment may be applied to at least one of the first and second calling instructions, or at least one of the first and second calling instructions. In this instruction, “any of seven RST instructions other than“ RST 40H ”” exemplified in another embodiment may be applied.
When describing to include these,

  A gaming table A having a microprocessor with a built-in CPU,

  The above-mentioned game machine A is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The above-described CPU can execute at least a first operation when a first instruction (for example, a CALL instruction) is received,

  The above-described CPU can execute at least the second operation when receiving a second instruction (for example, the EXESUB instruction),

  The size of the first instruction is larger than the size of the second instruction,

  When the CPU receives the first call instruction (for example, the instruction “RST 38H”, the instruction code “FFH” in FIG. 64, etc.), the first plurality of instructions included in the first subroutine are received. It ’s at least acceptable.

  When the CPU receives the second call instruction (for example, the instruction “RST 40H”, the instruction code “C7H” in FIG. 64, etc.), the CPU executes the second plurality of processes included in the second subroutine. It ’s at least acceptable.

  The first plurality of instructions is composed of a third plurality of instructions and the second plurality of instructions.

A gaming table A characterized by that. Note that a part of the configuration described here may be omitted, or a plurality of configurations may be omitted. Further, the value of the instruction code is an example and may be another value.
About Amusement stand A

  When the above-mentioned CPU accepts a NOP instruction, it accepts an instruction next to the NOP instruction.

The third plurality of instructions described above may not include the NOP instruction but may include at least the first instruction described above.
About Amusement stand A

When the above-described CPU receives a NOP command, the CPU may receive the above-mentioned next command without performing an operation that is executed only when the NOP command is received.
About Amusement stand A

The value obtained by subtracting the start address (for example, 38H) of the first subroutine from the start address (for example, 40H) of the second subroutine is 8 bytes in this case. It may be equal to a value indicating the size.
About Amusement stand A

When the CPU receives a call instruction, the CPU can execute at least a plurality of instructions included in a subroutine starting from an address specified by the call instruction, and the last RET instruction of the plurality of instructions If it is received, the instruction next to the call instruction may be received and at least executable.
About Amusement stand A

When the CPU receives a call instruction, the CPU can execute at least a plurality of instructions included in a subroutine starting from an address specified by the call instruction, and the last RET instruction of the plurality of instructions If it is received, the instruction next to the call instruction may be received and at least executable.
About Amusement stand A

The last instruction in the second plurality of instructions may be the RET instruction described above.
About Amusement stand A

  The last instruction in the first plurality of instructions may be the RET instruction described above.

The first plurality of instructions may include only one RET instruction.
About Amusement stand A

  The second plurality of instructions are stored in the ROM following the third plurality of instructions,

  The third plurality of instructions described above may not include a call instruction for calling the second subroutine described above.

  An example in which the value obtained by subtracting the head address of the first subroutine from the head address of the second subroutine is 08H (8 bytes), such as 40H as the head address of the second subroutine and 38H as the head address of the first subroutine. Although shown, it is not limited to this, 38H may be used as the head address of the second subroutine, 018H may be used as the head address of the first subroutine, and the like. The head address of the first subroutine may be any address that can be called by the RST instruction, and the head address of the second subroutine may be any address that can be called by the RST instruction.

  Note that "RST 40H" (second jump instruction) exemplified in the other embodiments may be applied to at least one of the first and second calling instructions, or the first and second instructions. The “any one of the seven RST instructions other than“ RST 40H ”(first jump instruction)” exemplified in another embodiment may be applied to at least one of the call instructions. For example, the second jump instruction may be applied to the first call instruction, and the first jump instruction may be applied to the second call instruction. Not limited to the first and second calling instructions and the RST instruction, the instructions exemplified in the other embodiments may be applied as the instructions exemplified in the present embodiment, and conversely, the instructions exemplified in the other embodiments may be applied. The instructions exemplified in this embodiment may be applied as one form.

  In the above embodiment, it is possible to determine the start address of processing when an interrupt request is generated using the data of the jump destination address created by the interrupt vector output from the built-in device and the I register and the data of the next address. explained. In the section of <4th special instruction / RST instruction>, the RST instruction has been described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. Further, here, matters related to them will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 and 292.

  First, a description will be given of how to determine the jump destination address when an interrupt request generated by the interrupt vector output from the built-in device and the I register is generated. The I register is 00H because it is not operated after the power is turned on. That is, the upper byte of the jump destination address is “00H”.

  FIG. 291 shows a setting example of the interrupt initial setting register. The interrupt initial setting register is set at a predetermined position in the program management area. As shown in FIG. 291, the upper 4 bits of the interrupt vector are set in bits 7 to 4 of the interrupt initial setting register. The upper 4 bits of the interrupt vector are values arbitrarily determined by the user. Hereinafter, the upper 4 bits of the interrupt vector are expressed as “XH”. Bit 3 is for prohibiting / permitting multiple reception during non-maskable interrupts. When multiple reception is prohibited, “0” is set, and when multiple reception is permitted, “1” is set. Bits 2 to 0 set the priority combination of maskable interrupt factors. Interrupt factors include an interrupt due to timeout of channel 0 of the timer circuit (PT0I) and various other interrupt factors (seven interrupt factors as shown). In this example, it is assumed that only the interrupt (PT0I) by channel 0 of the timer circuit (for example, timer circuit 0 in FIG. 132) is enabled. If other interrupts are disabled, there is no problem with any set value, but the timer circuit is given priority in consideration of setting mistakes. As shown in the figure, the timer circuit channel 0 timeout interrupt (PT0I) can be selected from 00H to 02H. If interrupts other than the timer circuit are invalidated, any of 00H to 02H may be used. However, it is preferable to set 00H because changing from the default 00H to another value may lead to a coding error.

  Therefore, when “0” is set in bit 3 for prohibiting multiple acceptance, the lower 4 bits of the interrupt vector are 0000B, and when “1” is set for bit 3 for enabling multiple acceptance, the lower 4 bits of the interrupt vector are 1000B. As a result, the setting value of the lower 4 bits of the interrupt vector is 0H or 8H in hexadecimal, which may facilitate coding and checking. In order to perform game control stably, the lower 4 bits of the interrupt vector are preferably set to 0000B or 1000B. As a result, the lower byte of the jump destination address becomes “X0H” or “X8H”, and the jump destination address becomes “00X0H” or “00X8H”. When data is set in the I register, “XXX0H” or “XXX8H” can also be set.

  By the way, it is possible to jump to only 8 types of addresses (0008H, 0010H, 0018H, 0020H, 0028H, 0030H, 0038H, 0040H) in the RST instruction. That is, the capacity of a module that can be incorporated by an RST instruction other than the (RST 40H) instruction is preferably less than 8 bytes. If a module having a jump destination address larger than 8 bytes from 0008H is incorporated, the 0010H RST instruction of the next jump destination address becomes substantially unusable. Therefore, a module having a size exceeding 8 bytes may be arranged in an area where “0040H” is a jump destination address by an (RST 40H) instruction. Note that the description will be made on the assumption that the size of the module called by the RST 40H exceeds 8 bytes, but the size of the module called by the RST 40H may naturally be less than 8 bytes. In addition, all the modules called at each of the eight types of addresses of the RST instruction may be exactly 8 bytes, all may be less than 8 bytes, or only some may be exactly 8 bytes. Alternatively, only a part may be less than 8 bytes. Also, only the size of the module called by RST 40H may be just 8 bytes or less than 8 bytes. As described above, the modules called in RST08 to 40 need not be 8 bytes, and some may be more than 8 bytes and some may be less than 8 bytes. Alternatively, a module having more than 8 bytes may be used with an address “0038H” or may not exceed “0040H”.

  FIG. 292 shows a partial area from the address 0040H in the ROM area. FIG. 6A illustrates a case where the address “0040H” is the jump destination address of the RST instruction and “0050H” is the jump destination address when the interrupt request is generated. In this case, a module A having a size exceeding 8 bytes can be arranged, and the remainder is a remaining area B. In this example, the surplus area corresponds to the NOP process shown in FIG. FIG. 5B shows a module that is called from the next address of module A by another module B (for example, an EXESUB instruction, etc. In this module, a 3-byte jump instruction is used instead of a 2-byte jump instruction. The jump area may be used), and the remainder area D is made smaller than the remainder area B. FIG. 6C illustrates a case where “0060H” is used as a jump destination address when an interrupt request is generated. In this case, another module E having a size larger than that of the module A can be incorporated from the next address of the module A. Moreover, the remainder area | region F has arisen. In this way, by adjusting the jump destination address when an interrupt request is generated, the memory area from the address 0040H to the jump destination address when an interrupt request is generated may be used effectively.

In addition, since it is difficult to actually set the remaining area to 0, in order to eliminate unauthorized use by unauthorized persons as much as possible, by reducing the size of the remaining area from, for example, 5 bytes to 1 to 3 bytes, This effectively makes it difficult to insert malicious programs. [0] In addition to the module called by the RST instruction before the address of the interrupt vector table (0050H in this example), the module read from a plurality of modules can be arranged to easily check the program source. You may be able to do it. When checking a so-called common module, it is sufficient to check between 0008H and the address of the interrupt vector table (0050H in this example).
<Remaining area of ROM>

  Next, items related to the remaining area of the ROM 308 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 293 is a diagram showing a modified example of the RST instruction, and FIG. 293 (b) is a diagram showing a module arrangement example in the ROM area of the main control unit 300.

  In this example, the main control unit 300 includes eight types of RST commands as shown in FIG. In each RST instruction, the hexadecimal number n (n = 08H, 10H, 18H, 20H, 28H, 38H, 40H) following the character “RST” is the lower one of the jump destination address to which jumping is executed by the execution of the RST instruction. A byte (8 bits) is shown. Note that the upper 1 byte (8 bits) of the jump destination address is fixed to 00H in this example.

  Thus, for example, when the (RST 08H) instruction is executed, the program jumps to address 0008H in the ROM area (program counter (PC) is set to 0008H), and when the (RST 40H) instruction is executed, the ROM Jump to address 0040H (program counter (PC) is set to 0040H).

  In this example, modules 01 to 08 are stored in the ROM area of the main controller 300 as shown in FIG. The top addresses of modules 01 to 08 are as shown in FIG. 5B, and the lower 1 byte of these top addresses matches the numerical value specified by the operand of the RST instruction shown in FIG. Yes.

  Therefore, for example, when the (RST 08H) instruction is executed, jumping to the address 0008H in the ROM area executes the module 01 having the address 0008H as the start address, and executing the (RST 40H) instruction. Jumps to address 0040H in the ROM area, thereby executing module 08 having 0040H as the head address.

  <RST Instruction / Module Arrangement Example 1>

  FIG. 294 (a) is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the module 03 and the module 04 in the ROM area. The module 03 to be called by the (RST 18H) instruction is a program for executing the process A having a head address of 0018H, a tail address of 001FH, and a program capacity of 8 bytes. Further, the module 04 called by the (RST 20H) instruction is a program for executing the process B having a head address of 0020H, a tail address of 0027H, and a program capacity of 8 bytes.

  That is, in this example, since the program capacity of the module 03 called by the (RST 18H) instruction and the module 04 called by the (RST 20H) instruction are both 8 bytes, there is a surplus area between the module 03 and the module 04. Not done. As described above, if the modules are arranged so that no surplus area is generated, a situation in which an unauthorized program is inserted in the surplus area may be prevented in advance.

  <RST Instruction / Module Arrangement Example 2>

  FIG. 294 (b) is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the module 03-1, the module 04, and the module 04-1 in the ROM area. The module 03-1 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is a program for executing the process C having a head address of 0018H, a tail address of 001DH, and a program capacity of 6 bytes. Further, the module 04 called by the (RST 20H) instruction is a program for executing the processing D having a head address of 0020H, a tail address of 0027H, and a program capacity of 8 bytes.

  Further, the module 04-1 that is called by a call instruction other than the RST instruction (for example, the above-described EXESUB instruction) executes the process E having a head address of 001EH, a tail address of 001FH, and a program capacity of 2 bytes. And a program for performing the processing D arranged continuously in the program.

  That is, in this example, since the program capacity of the module 03 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is 6 bytes, which is less than 8 bytes, it is originally 2 bytes between the module 04 called by the (RST 20H) instruction. Although a surplus area is generated, a program for executing the process E is arranged in this 2-byte area. As described above, if the modules are arranged so that no surplus area is generated, a situation in which an unauthorized program is inserted in the surplus area may be prevented in advance.

  Further, in this example, when the (RST 18H) instruction is executed, the module 03 (program of process C) is executed by jumping to the address 0018H in the ROM area, and when the (RST 20H) instruction is executed. The module 04 (program for processing D) is executed by jumping to the address 0020H in the ROM area. On the other hand, when jumping to the address 001EH by executing a jump instruction other than the RST instruction, the module 04-1 (a program combining the process E and the process D) is executed. With such a configuration, the process D can be called from at least two different jump instructions, and the program capacity may be reduced.

  <RST Instruction / Module Arrangement Example 3>

  FIG. 295 (a) is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the module 03-2, the module 03-2, and the module 04 in the ROM area. The module 03-2 to be called by a call instruction other than the RST instruction (for example, the above-described EXESUB instruction) is a program for executing the processing F having a head address of 001AH, a tail address of 001FH, and a program capacity of 6 bytes. It is.

  Further, the module 03-3 called by the (RST 18H) instruction has a program for executing the processing G having a head address of 0018H, a tail address of 0019H, and a program capacity of 2 bytes, and is continuously arranged in this program. And a program for executing the processed process F. Further, the module 04 called by the (RST 20H) instruction is a program for executing the processing H having a head address of 0020H, a tail address of 0027H, and a program capacity of 8 bytes.

  That is, in this example, since the program capacity of the module 03 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is 2 bytes, which is less than 8 bytes, it is originally 6 bytes between the module 04 called by the (RST 20H) instruction. Although a surplus area is generated, a program for executing the process F is arranged in this 6-byte area. As described above, if the modules are arranged so that no surplus area is generated, a situation in which an unauthorized program is inserted in the surplus area may be prevented in advance.

  Further, in this example, when the (RST 18H) instruction is executed, the module 03-3 (program combining the processing G and the processing F) is executed by jumping to the address 0018H in the ROM area, and (RST 20H ) When an instruction is executed, module 04 (program for processing H) is executed by jumping to address 0020H in the ROM area. On the other hand, when the jump instruction other than the RST instruction is executed to jump to the address 001AH, the module 03-2 (program combining the process G and the process F) is executed. With such a configuration, the process F can be called from at least two different jump instructions, and the program capacity may be reduced.

  <RST Instruction / Module Arrangement Example 4>

  FIG. 295 (b) is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the module 03-5, the module 03-4, and the module 04 in the ROM area. The module 03-4 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is a program for executing the processing I having a head address of 0018H, a tail address of 001AH, and a program capacity of 3 bytes. In addition, the module 03-5 called by a call instruction other than the RST instruction (for example, the above-described EXESUB instruction) executes the process J having a head address of 001BH, a tail address of 001FH, and a program capacity of 5 bytes. It is a program. The module 04 called by the (RST 20H) instruction is a program for executing the process K having a head address of 0020H, a tail address of 0027H, and a program capacity of 8 bytes.

  That is, in this example, the program capacity of the module 03 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is 3 bytes, which is less than 8 bytes. Therefore, if the original, the 5 bytes between the module 04 called by the (RST 20H) instruction is used. Although a surplus area is generated, a program for executing the process J is arranged in this 5-byte area. As described above, if the modules are arranged so that no surplus area is generated, a situation in which an unauthorized program is inserted in the surplus area may be prevented in advance.

  In this example, when the (RST 18H) instruction is executed, the module 03-4 (program for processing I) is executed by jumping to the address 0018H in the ROM area, and the (RST 20H) instruction is executed. In this case, the module 04 (process K program) is executed by jumping to the address 0020H in the ROM area. On the other hand, when a jump instruction other than the RST instruction is executed to jump to the address 001BH, the module 03-5 (process J program) is executed. With such a configuration, the surplus area between the module 03-4 and the module 04 can be effectively used, and another ROM area may be used for other purposes.

  <RST Instruction / Module Arrangement Example 5>

  FIG. 296 (a) is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the modules 03-6 and 05 in the ROM area. The module 03-6 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is a program for executing the processing L having a head address of 0018H, a tail address of 0027H, and a program capacity of 16 bytes. The module 05 called by the (RST 28H) instruction is a program for executing the processing M having a head address of 0028H, a tail address of 002FH, and a program capacity of 8 bytes.

  That is, in this example, since the program capacity of the module 03-6 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is 16 bytes which is 8 bytes or more, the module called by the (RST 20H) instruction cannot be used. The program capacity is 16 bytes, and modules 05 called by the (RST 28H) instruction are continuously arranged. As described above, if the modules are arranged so that no surplus area is generated, a situation in which an unauthorized program is inserted in the surplus area may be prevented in advance.

  In this example, when the (RST 18H) instruction is executed, the module 03-6 (processing L program) is executed by jumping to the address 0018H in the ROM area, and the (RST 28H) instruction is executed. In this case, the module 05 (process M program) is executed by jumping to the 0028H address in the ROM area. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the program capacity of the module called by the (RST 18H) instruction.

  <RST Instruction / Module Arrangement Example 6>

  FIG. 296 (b) is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the modules 03-7 and the module 04 in the ROM area. The module 03-7 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is a program for executing the processing N having a head address of 0018H, a tail address of 001EH, and a program capacity of 7 bytes. The module 04 to be called by the (RST 20H) instruction is a program for executing the processing M having a head address of 0020H, a tail address of 0027H, and a program capacity of 8 bytes.

  In this example, when the (RST 18H) instruction is executed, the module 03-7 (program of processing N) is executed by jumping to address 0018H in the ROM area, and when the (RST 20H) instruction is executed. The module 04 (program for processing P) is executed by jumping to the address 0020H in the ROM area.

In this example, since the program capacity of the module 03-7 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is 7 bytes, which is less than 8 bytes, the ROM area 001FH between the module 03-7 and the module 04 is a surplus area. . If such a surplus area exists, an illegal program code may be inserted into the surplus area and a fraudulent act may be performed. In the present invention, such a problem is solved by a method described below.
<Replacing instructions>

  FIG. 297 (a) is a diagram showing a part of an instruction group in which instructions having the first function among the instructions provided in the main control unit 300 are collected. The main control unit 300 includes at least a first command and a second command as commands having the first function. The first instruction and the second instruction are common in that they have the same first function, but the instruction length of the first instruction (the total length of the opcode and the operand) is 2 bytes (nH, n + 1H) However, the instruction length of the second instruction is 3 bytes (nH, n + 1H, n + 2H). Note that the instruction group included in the main control unit 300 is not limited to this example. In addition to the first and second instructions, a third instruction group having the same second function and different instruction lengths. And an instruction group including at least the fourth instruction.

  FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the modules 1 and 2 in the ROM, and FIG. 4C is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the modules 3 and 2 in the ROM. In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the module 1 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is a program having a head address of 0018H, a tail address of 001EH, and a program capacity of 7 bytes. The module 2 called by the (RST 20H) instruction is a program having a head address of 0020H, a tail address of 0027H, and a program capacity of 8 bytes. Therefore, in this example, the ROM area 001FH between the module 1 and the module 2 is a surplus area.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 8C, the module 3 called by the (RST 18H) instruction is obtained by replacing the first instruction included in the module 1 shown in FIG. The program has a head address of 0018H, a tail address of 001FH, and a program capacity of 8 bytes.

In this way, by replacing the first instruction having an instruction length of 2 bytes with the second instruction having an instruction length of 3 bytes, the module 1 maintains the same processing contents as the module 2 while maintaining the same processing contents. The capacity of 3 can be adjusted to 8 bytes. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a surplus area between the module 3 called by the (RST 18H) instruction and the module 2 called by the (RST 20H) instruction, and an illegal program code is inserted. Can be eliminated.
<Jump table>

  Next, an example in which a jump based on a jump table is applied instead of a jump based on an RST instruction will be described. FIG. 298 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jump table, and FIG. 298 (b) is a diagram showing an example of module arrangement in the ROM area of the main controller 300.

  In this example, the main control unit 300 includes two types of jump tables 1 and 2 as shown in FIG. In each of the jump tables 1 and 2, jump destination addresses referred to by various jump instructions are stored in advance.

  For example, 0100H is stored as the jump destination address at the top of the jump table 1, and when a jump instruction with the jump destination address as the jump destination is executed, a jump is made to address 0100H in the ROM area (program counter). (0100H is set in (PC)). In addition, 0250H is stored as the jump destination address in the second position from the top of the jump table 2. When a jump instruction with the jump destination address as the jump destination is executed, the jump is made to address 0250H in the ROM area. (0250H is set in the program counter (PC)).

  In this example, modules 21 to 25 are arranged in the ROM area of the main controller 300 as shown in FIG. The top addresses of the modules 21 to 25 are as shown in FIG. 7B, and these top addresses are the same as the addresses that can jump based on the jump tables 1 and 2 shown in FIG. I'm doing it.

  Therefore, for example, when a jump instruction is executed with the jump destination 1 (0100H) in the jump table 1 as the jump destination, the module 21 is executed by jumping to the address 0100H in the ROM area, and the jump destination in the jump table 2 When a jump instruction having a jump destination of 5 (0300H) is executed, the module 23 is executed by jumping to address 0300H in the ROM area.

  <Jump table / module arrangement example 1>

  FIG. 299 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the module 21 and the module 22 in the ROM. The module 21 called by the jump destination 1 (0100H) of the jump table is a program for executing the processing AA having a start address of 0100H, a tail address of 0109H, and a program capacity of 10 bytes. The module 22 called by the jump destination 2 (0110H) of the jump table is a program for executing the processing BB having a head address of 0110H, a tail address of 0119H, and a program capacity of 10 bytes.

  That is, in this example, there is no surplus area between the module 21 and the module 22, and the last address of the module 21 and the start address of the module 22 are consecutive addresses. As described above, if the modules are arranged so that no surplus area is generated, a situation in which an unauthorized program is inserted in the surplus area may be prevented in advance.

  In this example, when a jump instruction with the jump destination 1 (0100H) of the jump table 1 as a jump destination is executed, the module 21 (process AA) is executed by jumping to the address 0100H in the ROM area. When a jump instruction with the jump destination 2 (0110H) of the jump table 1 as a jump destination is executed, the module 22 (process BB) is executed by jumping to the address 0110H in the ROM area.

  <Jump table / module arrangement example 2>

  FIG. 300 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the module 21-A, the module 21-B, and the module 22 in the ROM. The module 21-B called by the jump destination 2 (0105H) of the jump table is a program for executing the processing DD having a head address of 0105H, a tail address of 0109H, and a program capacity of 5 bytes. The module 21-A called by jump destination 1 (0100H) of the jump table includes a program for executing the processing CC having a start address of 0100H, a tail address of 0104H, and a program capacity of 5 bytes. The program is a combination of the processing DD programs arranged successively. The module 22 called by the jump destination 3 (0110H) of the jump table is a program for executing the processing EE having a start address of 0110H, a tail address of 0119H, and a program capacity of 10 bytes.

  That is, in this example, there is no surplus area between the module 21-A and the module 22 and between the module 21-B and the module 22, and the last addresses of the modules 21-A and 21-B and the modules The 22 head addresses are consecutive addresses. As described above, if the modules are arranged so that no surplus area is generated, a situation in which an unauthorized program is inserted in the surplus area may be prevented in advance.

  In this example, when a jump instruction is executed with the jump destination 1 (0100H) of the jump table 1 as the jump destination, the module 21-A (process CC and process DD is processed by jumping to the address 0100H of the ROM area. When the jump instruction with jump destination 2 (0105H) of jump table 1 as the jump destination is executed, module 21-B (process) is executed by jumping to address 0105H in the ROM area. DD) is executed, and when a jump instruction is executed with jump destination 3 (0120H) of jump table 1 as the jump destination, module 22 (process EE) is executed by jumping to address 0110H in the ROM area. . With such a configuration, the process DD can be called from at least two different jump destinations, and the program capacity may be reduced.

  <Special Figure 2: Jump Table Used for Opening / Closing Control of Start Port>

  Next, a jump table used for opening / closing control of the special figure 2 starting port 232 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 301 (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jump table and reference destination data, and FIG. 301 (b) is a diagram showing an example of reference destination data and release types.

  In this example, 1100H is stored as the jump destination address at the head of the jump table, and when a load instruction using the jump destination address as a reference destination is executed, data is referenced with reference to address 1100H in the ROM area. 1 (in this example, a numerical value corresponding to 0.1 second) is acquired. In addition, 1101H is stored as the jump destination address in the second position from the top of the jump table. When a load instruction with the jump destination address as a reference destination is executed, reference is made to address 1101H in the ROM area. Data 2 (in this example, a numerical value corresponding to 5.4 seconds) is acquired.

  For example, when the main control unit 300 wins the first small hit in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the main control unit 300 executes the load instruction with the jump destination 1 (1100H) as a reference destination once, A numerical value corresponding to 0.1 seconds is acquired, and control corresponding to the opening type 1 (control to open the second special figure starting port 232 once for 0.1 seconds) is performed.

  Also, in the case of a special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state, if the second small hit is won, it is equivalent to 0.1 seconds by executing the load instruction with the jump destination 1 (1100H) as a reference destination once. Get the number to be. Subsequently, by adding one reference destination address and executing a load instruction with jump destination 2 (1101H) as a reference destination once, a numerical value corresponding to 5.4 seconds is obtained, and the release type 2 (control for opening the second special figure starting port 232 once for 0.1 seconds and then opening it once for 5.4 seconds).

  In addition, when winning the first small hit or the second small hit in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, the load with the jump destination 2 (1101H) as a reference destination By executing the command once, a numerical value corresponding to 5.4 seconds is acquired, and control corresponding to the opening type 3 (control to open the second special figure starting port 232 once for 5.4 seconds) is performed. .

  FIG. 6C is a diagram showing another example of the reference destination data and the release type. In this example, 1102H is stored as the jump destination address in the third position from the top of the jump table in addition to the jump table of FIG. 10B, and a load instruction with the jump destination address as a reference destination is executed. In this case, data 3 (in this example, a numerical value corresponding to 1.9 seconds) is obtained by referring to address 1102H in the ROM area.

  When the main control unit 300 wins the first small hit or the second small hit in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, refer to the jump destination 3 (1102H). By executing the previous load instruction three times, a numerical value corresponding to 1.9 seconds is obtained, and control corresponding to the release type 3 (the second special figure starting port 232 is opened three times for 1.9 seconds) Control).

  <Jump table used to control opening / closing of variable prize opening>

  302A to 302C are diagrams showing an example of an opening pattern referred to from a jump table used for opening / closing control of the variable winning opening 240. FIG. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5A, a numerical value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is stored in advance in the jump destination 1 (for example, 1100H), and the jump destination 2 (for example, 1101H) that is the next address of the jump destination 1 is stored. ) Is previously stored with a numerical value corresponding to 29 seconds. For example, in the case of hit type 1, the main control unit 300 acquires a numerical value corresponding to 0.5 seconds by executing a load instruction with the jump destination 1 as a reference destination twice, and sets the hit type 1 The corresponding control (control to open the variable winning opening 240 twice for 0.5 second) is performed. Also, in the case of hit type 2, when a big hit game is started at 1R, a load instruction with the jump destination 1 as a reference destination is executed twice at the start of the game to obtain a numerical value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. After performing the control corresponding to 1R (control to open the variable winning opening 240 twice for 0.5 second), the load instruction with the jump destination 2 as the reference destination is executed once at the start of 2R to 4R of the big hit game Thus, a numerical value corresponding to 29 seconds is acquired, and control corresponding to 2R to 4R of the hit type 2 (control to open the variable winning opening 240 once every 29 seconds in each round) is performed. Further, in the case of hit type 5, by executing a load instruction with jump destination 2 as a reference destination once at the start of 1R to 16R, a numerical value corresponding to 29 seconds is obtained, and 1R to 16R of hit type 5 (Control to open the variable winning opening 240 once every 29 seconds in each round).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 6B, in the case of hit type 2, in addition to performing the same control as the opening pattern in the case of hit type 2 shown in FIG. Sometimes a load instruction with a jump destination 1 as a reference destination is executed once to obtain a numerical value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and a control corresponding to 5R to 16R of the hit type 2 (the variable prize opening 240 is set to 0. 0). (Control to release once for 5 seconds). Further, in the case of hit type 3, in addition to performing the same control as the opening pattern in the case of hit type 3 shown in FIG. 5A, a load with jump destination 1 as a reference destination at the start of 9R to 16R. By executing the command once, a numerical value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is obtained, and control corresponding to 9R to 16R of the hit type 3 (control to open the variable winning opening 240 once for 0.5 second) is performed. Do.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8C, in the case of hit types 2 to 4, in addition to performing the same control as the open pattern in the case of hit types 2 to 4 shown in FIG. By executing the load instruction with the jump destination 2 as the reference destination once after 1R is released for 0.5 seconds, a numerical value corresponding to 29 seconds is obtained, and control corresponding to 1R of hit types 2 to 4 (variable winnings) (The control of opening the mouth 240 once for 29 seconds after opening the mouth 240 twice for 0.5 seconds).
<Example using offset value>

  FIG. 303A is a flowchart showing an example of determining a reference destination by adding a variable as an offset value to the address, and FIG. 303B is a diagram showing an example of reference destination data.

  In this example, the reference start address (1100H in this example) is acquired in the table start address acquisition process, and the offset value is acquired in the next offset value generation process. For example, in this offset value generation process, a variable indicating a gaming state (for example, a variable indicating a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is 0, a variable indicating a special figure high probability general figure low probability state is 1, and a special figure low The variable indicating the probability normal state high probability state is 2 as the variable, and the variable indicating the special figure low probability general state low probability state is 3 as the offset value.

  Next, the reference destination address is generated by adding the offset value generated in the offset value generation process to the head address acquired in the table head address acquisition process. For example, in the previous example, when the gaming state is the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, 1100H is generated as the reference destination address by adding the generated offset value 0 to the acquired head address 1100H, When the gaming state is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, 1101H is generated as a reference destination address by adding the generated offset value 1 to the acquired start address 1100H.

  Further, for example, when the gaming state is a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, the data 1 is obtained by executing the load instruction with the generated reference destination address (1100H) as a reference destination once. If the gaming state is the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state, data 2 is obtained by executing the load instruction with the generated reference destination address (1101H) as a reference destination once.

  FIG. 304A is a flowchart showing an example of determining a reference destination by adding an offset value acquired from the offset table to an address, and FIG. 304B is a diagram showing an example of the offset table. FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of reference destination data.

  In this example, the reference start address (1100H in this example) is acquired in the table start address acquisition process, and the offset value is acquired in the next offset value generation process. For example, in this offset value generation process, a variable indicating a gaming state (for example, a variable indicating a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is 0, a variable indicating a special figure high probability general figure low probability state is 1, and a special figure low The offset table is referred to based on 2 for the variable indicating the high probability state of normal probability, 3 for the variable indicating the low probability general state low probability state of 3), and the offset value is obtained from this offset table. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 7B, when the gaming state is the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, the offset value 00H at the head of the offset table is set by adding the variable 0 to the head address of the offset table. If the gaming state is the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the variable 1 is added to the head address of the offset table to obtain the second offset value 10H from the head of the offset table.

  Next, the reference destination address is generated by adding the offset value generated in the offset value generation process to the head address acquired in the table head address acquisition process. For example, in the previous example, when the gaming state is a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, 1100H is generated as a reference destination address by adding the acquired offset value 00H to the acquired head address 1100H, When the gaming state is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, 1110H is generated as a reference destination address by adding the acquired offset value 10H to the acquired start address 1100H.

  Further, for example, when the gaming state is a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, the data 1 is obtained by executing the load instruction with the generated reference destination address (1100H) as a reference destination once. When the game state is the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the data 2 is acquired by executing the load instruction with the generated reference destination address (1110H) as a reference destination once.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes the microprocessor (for example, the basic circuit 302) including at least the CPU (for example, the CPU 304) and the ROM (for example, the ROM 306). The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and when the CPU receives a first jump instruction (for example, (RST 18H) instruction), a first jump destination address The CPU can execute at least the operation of receiving the instruction stored in (for example, 0018H) next to the first jump instruction, and the CPU can execute the second jump instruction (for example, (RST 20H) instruction). ) Is received, the instruction stored in the second jump destination address (for example, 0020H) is The ROM can execute at least the operation received next to the jump instruction, and the ROM has a first module whose first address is the first jump destination address (for example, module 03- shown in FIG. 296 (a)). 6) is stored at least, and the last address of the first module (for example, 0027H shown in FIG. 296 (a)) is larger than the second jump destination address. Good.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the capacity of the first module that operates according to the first jump instruction can be increased while the first and second jump instructions can be used. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a surplus area from being generated between modules, and it may be possible to prevent an illegal act such as inserting a malicious program in the surplus area.

  Further, the first module (for example, module 21-A shown in FIG. 300) includes at least a first instruction group (for example, an instruction group of the process CC shown in FIG. 300). The module includes at least a second instruction group (for example, an instruction group of the processing DD shown in FIG. 300), and the first address of the second instruction group (for example, 0105H) is the first instruction group. The second jump destination address is the start address of the second instruction group, and the CPU accepts the first jump instruction. The first instruction group and the second instruction group can be executed at least, and the CPU receives the second jump instruction when receiving the second jump instruction. Are those groups that can at least run, the CPU will, when receiving the second jump instruction may be one which does not execute the first instruction group.

  With such a configuration, the module including the first instruction group and the second instruction group and the module including only the second instruction group can share the second instruction group, and the ROM capacity can be reduced. In some cases, it can be reduced and effectively used for other purposes.

  Further, the CPU may be capable of executing at least a game control process. The game control process may be at least executable based on a game control program. The ROM may be capable of storing at least the game control program. Further, at least game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least game control may be provided. The microprocessor may be mounted on the game control means.

  Next, a modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A shows the integrated package 10120 of the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 5B and 5C show modified examples thereof. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the integrated package 10120, the width x2 of the central portion without terminals is narrower than the width x1 of both sides with terminals. The integrated package 10120 shown in FIG. 5B is the same as that shown in FIG. 5A in that the width x2 of the central portion without terminals is narrower than the width x1 of both sides with terminals. A notch is formed at a corner on the 10120a side, and a width x3 including the vicinity of the notch measured in the same direction as the widths x1 and x2 is shorter than the width x1 and longer than the width x2. The integrated package 10120 shown in FIG. 6C has a notch formed at the corner on the package 10120a side, and the width x3 in the vicinity of the notch measured in the same direction as the widths x1 and x2 is the width x1. The point which is shorter and longer than the width x2 is the same as that of FIG. 5B, but further, a recess is formed on the front end surface of the package 10120a, and the recess is also related to the longitudinal width orthogonal to the width x1. The width y2 of the region including the recess is shorter than the width y1 with respect to the width y1 of the region not including the notch. Further, the width y3 including the vicinity of the notch is also shorter than the width y1.

  The game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to a sealed pachinko machine or a medalless slot machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. Further, in some cases, the contents described in one configuration among the plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game. Therefore, for example, in the description related to the reset based on WDT, the WDT timeout signal (WDT activation signal) may be replaced with the out-of-designated area travel prohibition signal.

The present invention based on the above embodiment can also be described as follows.
<Appendix A>
<Appendix A1>
CPU,

  A random number circuit capable of generating at least a 16-bit random number value;

  A microprocessor equipped with at least the CPU;

A random value register capable of capturing at least the random number value when a capture condition is satisfied;
A game machine equipped with at least

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The microprocessor includes at least the random number circuit.

  The random number circuit is at least controlled by a plurality of registers,

  The random value register is at least one of the plurality of registers;

  The CPU is capable of storing at least the random value stored in the random value register in a register pair when a random value storage condition is satisfied,

  The register pair is constituted at least by a combination of first and second registers that are general-purpose registers of the CPU,

  The CPU is capable of accepting at least a 16-bit load instruction;

The random value storage condition includes at least that the CPU has received the 16-bit load instruction.
A game stand characterized by that.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, “CPU” may indicate “CPU core”. The random number generated by the “random number circuit” may be a pseudo-random number (the 8-bit random number and the 16-bit random number in the above embodiment may be an 8-bit pseudo-random number or a 16-bit pseudo-random number).
<Appendix A2>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A1,

  The microprocessor includes at least a ROM storing at least a game control program;

  The microprocessor has at least a random extension function;

The random extension function is capable of randomly changing the execution start timing of the game control program.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix A3>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A2,

  The microprocessor includes at least a signal output terminal,

  The output from the signal output terminal changes from a first level to a second level higher than the first level at least at a specific timing,

The specific timing is before execution of the random extension function.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix A4>

  A game machine according to appendix A2 or A3,

  At least with security mode and user mode,

The game control program is a user program executed in the user mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix A5>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices A2 to A4,

The execution start of the game control program is performed after receiving at least one of system reset and user reset.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix B>
<Appendix B1>

  Game control means capable of executing at least control using random values;

  First random number means capable of generating at least the random number value;

A second random number means capable of generating at least the random value;
A game machine equipped with at least

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The first random number means is capable of generating at least a first random value from a first numerical range,

  The second random number means can generate at least a second random value from a second numerical range,

The update start time of the first random number means is different from the update start time of the second random number means.
Game table <Appendix B2>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B1,

  The game control includes at least a first process,

The update start time of the first random number means is after execution of the first process by the game control means,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix B3>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B2,

The update start time of the second random number means is before the execution of the first process by the game control means,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix B4>

  A gaming table according to appendix B2 or B3,

The first process is capable of changing the execution timing of the second process executed after the first process.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix B5>

  A gaming table according to any one of appendices B1 to B4,

  A third process capable of at least instructing at least one of the first random number means and the second random number means to set the numerical range;

  A fourth process capable of obtaining at least a value derived by at least one of the first random number means and the second random number means;

  The game control includes at least a fifth process capable of executing at least a determination based on the value acquired by the fourth process,

  The first numerical range is set by the third process,

  The second numerical range is set regardless of the third process,

  The game machine, wherein the first random number means can be updated when the first numerical range is set.

The “first random number means” in this case may be constituted by a random number counter by software. In addition, the “second random number means” in this case may be configured by a software-based random number counter.
<Appendix C>
<Appendix C1>
CPU,

  A random number circuit capable of generating at least a random value;

  Game control means capable of executing at least control using the random number value;

A microprocessor equipped with at least the CPU;
A game machine equipped with at least

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The microprocessor includes at least the random number circuit.

  The first channel of the random number circuit is capable of generating at least a first random value from a first numerical range;

  The second channel of the random number circuit is capable of generating at least a second random value from a second numerical range;

The update start time of the first channel is different from the update start time of the second channel.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix C2>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C1,

  The game control includes at least a first process,

The update start time of the first channel is after execution of the first process by the game control means,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix C3>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C2,

The update start time of the second channel is before execution of the first process by the game control means.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix C4>

  A gaming table according to appendix C2 or C3,

The first process is capable of changing the execution timing of the second process executed after the first process.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix C5>

  A gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C4,

  A third process capable of at least instructing the random number circuit to set the numerical range;

  A fourth process capable of obtaining at least the value derived by the random number circuit;

  The game control includes at least a fifth process capable of executing at least a determination based on the value acquired by the fourth process,

  The first numerical range is set by the third process,

  The second numerical range is set regardless of the third process,

The game machine, wherein the first channel update can be started when the first numerical range is set.
<Appendix D>
<Appendix D1>

  A microprocessor with at least a built-in watchdog timer;

Voltage monitoring means capable of outputting at least a low voltage signal when a low voltage signal output condition is satisfied;
A game machine equipped with

  The low voltage signal output condition includes at least that the voltage of the power supply line being monitored is lower than a reference voltage,

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The watchdog timer can be started at least when a start condition is established,

The watchdog timer is started after the output of the low voltage signal by the voltage monitoring means is stopped.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix D2>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix D1,

  The microprocessor includes at least a ROM storing at least a game control program,

  The microprocessor has at least a random extension function;

The random extension function is capable of randomly changing the execution start timing of the game control program.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix D3>
A game machine according to appendix D2,

  The microprocessor includes at least a signal output terminal,

  The output from the signal output terminal changes from a first level to a second level higher than the first level at least at a specific timing,

The specific timing is before execution of the random extension function.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix D4>

  A gaming machine according to appendix D2 or D3,

  At least with security mode and user mode,

The game control program is a user program executed in the user mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix D5>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices D2 to D4,

The execution start of the game control program is performed after receiving at least one of system reset and user reset.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix E>
<Appendix E1>

  A gaming machine with a microprocessor,

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The microprocessor package is a DIP package;

  The package includes at least a first region and a second region,

The game machine characterized in that the width of the second area is narrower than the width of the first area.
<Appendix E2>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E1,

The width (x1) of the first region and the width (x2) of the second region are widths in a direction perpendicular to the direction from the first region to the second region. Amusement stand.
<Appendix E3>

  A game machine according to appendix E1 or E2,

  A plurality of terminals are provided on each of the first side surface of the first region and the second side surface facing the first side surface,

The game table according to claim 1, wherein terminals are not provided on the first side surface and the second side surface of the second region.
<Appendix E4>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E3,

  The package is configured to include at least the first region, the second region, and a third region,

The game machine characterized in that the width of the second area is narrower than the width of the third area.
<Appendix E5>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E4,

The game machine characterized in that the second area is provided between the first area and the second area.
<Appendix F>
<Appendix F1>

Game control means capable of executing at least game control;
A game machine equipped with

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The game control means can acquire at least the first numerical value when the first numerical value acquisition condition is satisfied,

The game control means can acquire at least the second numerical value when the second numerical value acquisition condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix F2>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix F1,

  The game control means is capable of executing at least a success / failure determination process when a failure / notification condition is established,

The success / failure determination process is executed using at least the first numerical value and the second numerical value.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix F3>

  A gaming machine according to appendix F1 or F2,

  A clock generation circuit capable of generating at least a clock; and

  A random value updating circuit capable of at least updating a random value according to the input of the clock;

A random value register capable of capturing at least the random number value when a capture condition is satisfied;
With

At least one of the first numerical value and the second numerical value is the random number value taken into the random value register,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix F4>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix F3,

The random value is a 16-bit random number.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix F5>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices F1 to F4,

The game control means includes at least a main control microprocessor capable of executing at least a game control process.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix G>
<Appendix G1>
A given sensor;

  A CPU that executes a plurality of game control processes based on instructions indicated by the control program data;

  A random number circuit configured to update a numerical value within a predetermined numerical range and transmit the numerical value to the CPU;

A ROM storing control program data,
The random number circuit includes:

  Holds the numerical value that has been updated based on receiving the hold instruction,

The numerical value held based on receiving the transmission instruction is transmitted,
The CPU

  Each of the plurality of game control processes is executed in at least one of main control and interrupt control executed every predetermined cycle,

  A process for monitoring a signal output from the predetermined sensor, a first determination process for determining whether a history of monitoring results of the predetermined sensor matches a predetermined pattern, and the first In the interrupt control, a process of performing the holding instruction to the random number circuit based on the fact that the monitoring result history of the predetermined sensor matches the predetermined pattern by the determination process,

  The main control or the interrupt control performs a process of giving the transmission instruction to the random number circuit,

  The main control or the interrupt control is executed in the main control or the interrupt control using the numerical value transmitted from the random number circuit.

  A calculation process, a second determination process for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied using a result of the calculation process, a branch process for branching to a process according to the determination result of the second determination process, and the A branch destination process that is a process branched by the branch process is executed at least in the interrupt control,

  Based on a specific instruction that is a single instruction indicated by the control program data, the arithmetic processing, the second determination processing, and the branch processing are executed,

When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the second determination process by making the time required for the process based on the specific instruction the same, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination process A game machine characterized by starting execution of the branch destination process at the same timing in any case where the determination is not made.
<Appendix G2>
A given sensor;

  A CPU for executing a plurality of game control processes based on instructions indicated by the control program data;

  A random number circuit configured to update a numerical value within a predetermined numerical range and transmit the numerical value to the CPU;

A ROM storing the control program data,
The random number circuit includes:

The numerical value updated based on receiving the transmission instruction is transmitted,
The CPU

  Each of the plurality of game control processes is executed in at least one of main control and interrupt control executed every predetermined cycle,

  A process for monitoring a signal output from the predetermined sensor, a first determination process for determining whether or not a history of monitoring results of the predetermined sensor matches a predetermined pattern, the first determination A process for performing the transmission instruction to the random number circuit based on the fact that the monitoring result history of the predetermined sensor matches the predetermined pattern by the process is executed in the interrupt control,

  The main control or the interrupt control is executed in the main control or the interrupt control using the numerical value transmitted from the random number circuit.

  A calculation process, a second determination process for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied using a result of the calculation process, a branch process for branching to a process according to the determination result of the second determination process, and the A branch destination process that is a process branched by the branch process is executed at least in the interrupt control,

  Based on a specific instruction that is a single instruction indicated by the control program data, the arithmetic processing, the second determination processing, and the branch processing are executed,

When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the second determination process by making the time required for the process based on the specific instruction the same, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination process A game machine characterized by starting execution of the branch destination process at the same timing in any case where the determination is not made.
<Appendix H>
<Appendix H1>

  A CPU for executing a plurality of game control processes;

A random number circuit configured to update a numerical value within a predetermined numerical value range and transmit the numerical value to the CPU,
The random number circuit includes:

  The predetermined numerical range is configured to be settable,

  Set the predetermined numerical range based on receiving the update range setting instruction,

  Holds the numerical value that has been updated based on receiving the hold instruction,

The numerical value held based on receiving the transmission instruction is transmitted,
The CPU

  Each of the plurality of game control processes is executed in at least one of main control and interrupt control executed every predetermined cycle,

  In the interrupt control, a process for giving the holding instruction to the random number circuit is executed.

  The main control or the interrupt control performs a process of giving the transmission instruction to the random number circuit,

  The main control or the interrupt control is executed in the main control or the interrupt control using the numerical value transmitted from the random number circuit.

  When the plurality of game control processes are executed from the beginning, the main control performs the process of instructing the update range setting instruction to the random number circuit and the process of permitting the interrupt control.

  In a state where the interrupt control is prohibited, a process for instructing the update range setting to the random number circuit is executed,

A game machine characterized by executing a process of permitting the interrupt control after executing a process of instructing the update range setting to the random number circuit.
<Appendix H2>

  A CPU for executing a plurality of game control processes;

A random number circuit configured to update a numerical value within a predetermined numerical value range and transmit the numerical value to the CPU,
The random number circuit includes:

  The predetermined numerical range is configured to be settable,

  Set the predetermined numerical range based on receiving the update range setting instruction,

The numerical value updated based on receiving the transmission instruction is transmitted,
The CPU

  Each of the plurality of game control processes is executed in at least one of main control and interrupt control executed every predetermined cycle,

  In the interrupt control, a process for instructing the transmission to the random number circuit is performed.

  The main control or the interrupt control is executed in the main control or the interrupt control using the numerical value transmitted from the random number circuit.

  When the plurality of game control processes are executed from the beginning, the main control performs the process of instructing the update range setting instruction to the random number circuit and the process of permitting the interrupt control.

  In a state where the interrupt control is prohibited, a process for instructing the update range setting to the random number circuit is executed,

A game machine characterized by executing a process of permitting the interrupt control after executing a process of instructing the update range setting to the random number circuit.
<Appendix H3>

  A gaming machine according to appendix H1 or H2,

A reset circuit for normally returning the plurality of game control processes;
The reset circuit is

It is determined whether or not an abnormality relating to the progress of the plurality of game control processes has occurred, and a return instruction is given to the CPU based on the determination that the abnormality has occurred.
The CPU

A gaming table characterized by executing the plurality of gaming control processes from the beginning when receiving the return instruction.
<Appendix H4>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix H3,

A microprocessor having at least the CPU, the random number circuit, and the reset circuit;
The microprocessor is

A user who executes the plurality of game control processes by the CPU after staying in a security mode in which a security check is performed for a predetermined period based on at least the determination that the abnormality has occurred by the reset circuit A game table characterized by transitioning to a mode.
<Appendix I>
<Appendix I1>

  A CPU for executing a plurality of game control processes;

  A reset circuit for normally returning the plurality of game control processes;

RWM that stores data related to games, and
The RWM is

  Storing return data for normally returning the plurality of game control processes;

It has a predetermined storage area for storing power status information,
The reset circuit is

  Start measuring elapsed time based on receiving the start instruction,

  Initializing the elapsed time being measured based on receiving the restart instruction, and restarting the measurement of the elapsed time initialized,

  It is determined whether the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time,

Instructing the CPU to return based on the determination that the elapsed time has reached the predetermined time,
The CPU

  Each of the plurality of game control processes is executed in at least one of main control and interrupt control executed every predetermined cycle,

  Executing a process of storing predetermined data indicating that the power supply is cut off in the predetermined storage area when the power supply is cut off;

  When the return instruction is received, the process of storing the predetermined data in the predetermined storage area is not executed,

  When the power is turned on or when the return instruction is received, the plurality of game control processes are executed from the beginning,

  A determination process for determining whether or not the predetermined data is stored in the predetermined storage area when the plurality of game control processes are executed from the beginning;

  When it is determined by the determination process that the predetermined data is stored in the predetermined storage area, a return process using the return data can be executed.

  If it is determined by the determination process that the predetermined data is not stored in the predetermined storage area, it is impossible to execute the return process;

  The process for performing the restart instruction is executed in the interrupt control,

A game machine characterized by executing a process of giving the start instruction to the reset circuit at least after the return process is executed and before the first interrupt control is executed.
<Appendix I2>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix I1,

A microprocessor having at least the CPU, the reset circuit, and the RWM;
The microprocessor is

The plurality of game control processes are performed by the CPU after staying in a security mode in which a security check is performed for a predetermined period based on at least the reset circuit determining that the elapsed time has reached the predetermined time. A game table that shifts to a user mode in which is executed.
<Appendix I3>

  A CPU for executing a plurality of game control processes;

  A reset circuit for normally returning the plurality of game control processes;

RWM that stores data related to games, and
The RWM is

  Storing return data for normally returning the plurality of game control processes;

  It has a predetermined storage area for storing power status information,

  The reset circuit starts measuring elapsed time based on receiving a start instruction,

  Initializing the elapsed time being measured based on receiving the restart instruction, and restarting the measurement of the elapsed time initialized,

  It is determined whether the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time,

Instructing the CPU to return based on the determination that the elapsed time has reached the predetermined time,
The CPU

  Each of the plurality of game control processes is executed in at least one of main control and interrupt control executed every predetermined cycle,

  Executing a process of storing predetermined data indicating that the power supply is cut off in the predetermined storage area when the power supply is cut off;

  When the return instruction is received, the process of storing the predetermined data in the predetermined storage area is not executed,

  When the power is turned on or when the return instruction is received, the plurality of game control processes are executed from the beginning,

  A determination process for determining whether or not the predetermined data is stored in the predetermined storage area when the plurality of game control processes are executed from the beginning;

  If it is determined by the determination process that the predetermined data is stored in the predetermined storage area, a return process using the return data can be executed.

  If it is determined by the determination process that the predetermined data is not stored in the predetermined storage area, an initialization process for initializing the return data is executed,

  The process for performing the restart instruction is executed in the interrupt control,

A game machine characterized by executing a process of giving the start instruction to the reset circuit at least after the initialization process is executed and before the first interrupt control is executed. .
<Appendix J>
<Appendix J1>

  A game machine having a CPU and game control means for controlling game,

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The CPU is built in a microcomputer,

  The CPU includes at least a specific register,

Among the functions for setting a value in the specific register, the CPU has only a function for setting a value based on a direct value as a function that is performed based on receiving a load instruction.
<Appendix J2>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix J1,

The CPU has at least a function of setting a predetermined value as an initial value as a function other than that performed based on receiving a load command among the functions of setting a value in the specific register. To play.
<Appendix J3>

A gaming machine according to appendix J1 or J2,
Providing production control means for performing production control,

The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the microcomputer incorporating the CPU is not mounted on the effect control means but only on the game control means.
<Appendix J4>

A gaming machine according to appendix J1 or J2,
Production control means for performing production control;

  A payout control means for performing payout control,

The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the microcomputer incorporating the CPU is not mounted on the effect control means but is mounted on at least one of the game control means and the payout control means.
<Appendix K>
<Appendix K1>
CPU,

ROM storing a game control program;
RAM that can temporarily store data;

A game machine equipped with a microcomputer incorporating

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The CPU has at least a specific register,

  The upper byte of the start address of the RAM is larger than the upper byte of the start address of the ROM,

  Among the functions for setting a value in the specific register, the CPU has only a function for setting a value based on a direct value, as performed based on receiving a load instruction,

The CPU sets the value in the specific register other than that performed based on receiving the load instruction, and the initial value is the same value as the upper byte of the top address of the RAM. Having at least a function to set as,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix K2>
The game stand according to appendix K1,

  The microcomputer can shift to a security mode in which at least a security check for authenticating the game control program is executed after the reset signal is input and before the execution of the game control program by the CPU is started. And

The time of the security mode can be extended for a random time.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix K3>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix K2,

The gaming machine is characterized in that the initial value is set by the CPU without depending on the game control program before the execution of the game control program is started.
<Appendix K4>

  A game stand according to appendix K2 or K3,

The game machine is characterized in that execution of the game control program is performed after receiving at least one of a system reset and a user reset by inputting the reset signal.
<Appendix K5>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices K2 to K4,

  At least the security mode and the user mode,

The gaming machine, wherein the game control program is a user program executed in the user mode.
<Appendix K6>

The game stand according to any one of appendices K1 to K5,
Game control means for performing game control;

  Production control means for performing production control,

The gaming machine is characterized in that the microcomputer is not mounted on the effect control means but only on the game control means.
<Appendix K7>

The game stand according to any one of appendices K1 to K5,
Game control means for performing game control;
Production control means for performing production control;

  A payout control means for performing payout control,

The gaming machine is characterized in that the microcomputer is mounted on at least one of the game control means and the payout control means without being mounted on the effect control means.
<Appendix L>
<Appendix L1>

  ROM storing a plurality of types of data including control program data and reference data referenced based on the control program data in a storage area indicated by each of a plurality of addresses;

A CPU for executing a plurality of types of game control processes including an interrupt process executed at predetermined intervals based on the control program data and the reference data stored in the ROM;
With
The ROM is

  Instruction data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU;

  One or a plurality of the control program data, and the CPU stores supplemental data necessary for the CPU to execute the instructions,

  The command data is composed of first address data indicating first identification information which is a part of specific identification information enabling identification of a specific address, and different data different from the first address data, Specific instruction data corresponding to a specific instruction for causing the CPU to read data stored in the storage area indicated by the specific address;

  The supplementary data is composed of second address data indicating second identification information, which is information obtained by removing the first identification information from the specific identification information, and the CPU executes the specific instruction. Specific supplementary data necessary for the interrupt processing is stored so as to correspond to the instruction executed in the interrupt processing,

  Storing all of the control program data in a specific storage area readable by the CPU by execution of the specific instruction;

A game table, wherein the reference data is stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area in which all control program data is stored.
<Appendix M>
<Appendix M1>

  A CPU including at least first to fourth registers, and capable of executing processing using a register pair including an upper register and a lower register;

  A gaming machine including a ROM that stores a game control program and a microcomputer incorporating the ROM,

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The CPU is capable of executing a plurality of instructions including a first instruction and a second instruction,

  The combination of at least two of the first register and the second register is a predetermined register pair of the register pair,

  At least one of the third register and the fourth register is the upper register,

  Based on the execution of the first instruction, the first value stored in the area indicated by the first address indicated by the value stored in the predetermined register pair is set in the fourth register. The second value stored in the area indicated by the second address continuous with the first address is set in the third register, and the value of the predetermined register pair is continuous with the second address. Value indicating the address to be

  Based on the execution of the second instruction, the second value stored in the area indicated by the second address continuous with the first address indicated by the value stored in the predetermined register pair is A third value set in the fourth register and stored in an area indicated by a third address that is continuous with the second address is set in the third register, and the value of the predetermined register pair is A value indicating the third address,

  The CPU can set the value stored in the ROM in a combination of two registers, the third register and the fourth register, which are different from the register pair, with one instruction. As a predetermined function for changing the value of the register pair, the first function for setting a value based on receiving the first instruction and the value based on receiving the second instruction are set. Having at least two of the second functions to

  The CPU includes at least a specific register,

Among the functions for setting a value in the specific register, the CPU has only a function for setting a value by a direct value as a function that is performed based on receiving a load instruction.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix M2>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix M1,

2. The game table according to claim 1, wherein the register pair is a combination of two registers that can be used in a push instruction for setting a 16-bit value in a stack area.
<Appendix M3>

  A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix M1 or M2,

The CPU has at least a function of setting a predetermined value as an initial value as a function other than that performed based on receiving the load instruction among functions for setting a value in the specific register. A game stand.
<Appendix M4>

A gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M3,
Providing production control means for performing production control,

The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the microcomputer incorporating the CPU is not mounted on the effect control means but only on the game control means.
<Appendix M5>

A gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M3,
Production control means for performing production control;

  A payout control means for performing payout control,

The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the microcomputer incorporating the CPU is not mounted on the effect control means but is mounted on at least one of the game control means and the payout control means.
<Appendix N>
<Appendix N1>

  A CPU including at least first to third registers capable of storing an 8-bit value;

  The CPU includes at least a fourth register capable of storing a 16-bit value.

  The CPU can execute processing using a register pair including the first register and the second register;

  A game machine comprising a microcomputer incorporating the CPU,

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The CPU can execute a first instruction that can add the value of the third register to the value of the fourth register and set the addition result in the fourth register;

  The first instruction can add the value of the third register to the value of the register pair and set the addition result in the register pair;

  The CPU can execute a second instruction that subtracts the value of the third register from the value of the register pair and sets the subtraction result in the register pair;

  The function of adding / subtracting the 8-bit value to / from the 16-bit register pair in the CPU is realized by both the first instruction and the second instruction. The function of adding the 8-bit value to the fourth register having a bit length is realized at least by the first instruction,

  The CPU includes at least a specific register,

Among the functions for setting a value in the specific register, the CPU has only a function for setting a value by a direct value as a function that is performed based on receiving a load instruction.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix N2>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix N1,

2. The game table according to claim 1, wherein the register pair is a combination of two registers that can be used in a push instruction for setting a 16-bit value in a stack area.
<Appendix N3>

  A gaming table according to appendix N1 or N2,

The CPU has at least a function of setting a predetermined value as an initial value as a function other than that performed based on receiving the load instruction among functions for setting a value in the specific register. A game stand.
<Appendix N4>

The game stand according to any one of appendices N1 to N3,
Providing production control means for performing production control,

The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the microcomputer incorporating the CPU is not mounted on the effect control means but only on the game control means.
<Appendix N5>

The game stand according to any one of appendices N1 to N3,
Production control means for performing production control;

  A payout control means for performing payout control,

The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the microcomputer incorporating the CPU is not mounted on the effect control means but is mounted on at least one of the game control means and the payout control means.
<Appendix O>
<Appendix O1>

  ROM storing control program data;

And a CPU that executes at least one of main control and interrupt control executed at predetermined intervals based on an instruction indicated by the control program data. And
The CPU

  At least in the interrupt control, a calculation process, a determination process for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied using a result of the calculation process, a branch process for branching to a process according to the determination result of the determination process, and a branch is performed by the branch process The processing is executed in the order of the branch destination processing that is the previous processing, and based on the specific instruction that is a single instruction indicated by the control program data, the arithmetic processing, the determination processing, and the branch processing are executed.

When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination process by making the time required for the process based on the specific command the same, and when the predetermined condition is not determined by the determination unit In any case, the execution of the branch destination process is started at the same timing.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix O2>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix O1,

A detection sensor for detecting a game medium;
The CPU

In the interrupt control, processing is performed in the order of detection sensor monitoring processing for monitoring the state of the detection sensor, and predetermined processing based on the monitoring result of the detection sensor monitoring processing.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix P>
<Appendix P1>

  A gaming machine equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the game,

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The microcomputer is housed in a DIP-type package in which a plurality of terminals are provided on each of the first side surface and the second side surface facing the first side surface,

  The package is made of a non-transparent member,

  The package has a first portion in which two terminals are provided with a first gap,

  In the package, two terminals are provided with a second gap wider than the first gap, and the terminal is not provided in the second gap, so that the package is more specific than the first part. Having a second part that facilitates visual recognition of the area;

  The specific region includes a first region on the back surface of the package, a second region on the surface of the substrate facing the back surface, and a third region in the space between the back surface and the surface. At least one included

  The second portion is disposed on at least one of the first side surface and the second side surface of the package,

By forming a notch not provided with the terminal at one of the end of the first side surface or the end of the second side surface of the package, the specific region is made more than the first part. A third part is provided to facilitate visual recognition,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix P2>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix P1,

The second part is disposed in the longitudinal center portion of the first side surface and / or the longitudinal center portion of the second side surface,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix P3>

  A game machine as set forth in appendix P1 or P2,

The second part is disposed on both the first side surface and the second side surface,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix P4>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix P3,

The second part is disposed opposite to both the first side surface and the second side surface,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix Q>
<Appendix Q1>

  Random number generation means for deriving a numerical value to be updated within a predetermined numerical range, and capable of setting the predetermined numerical range;

  The numerical value range setting process for instructing the random number generation means to set the predetermined numerical range, the numerical value acquisition process for acquiring the numerical value derived by the random number generation means, and the numerical value acquisition process Game control means for performing each game control process including at least a lottery process based on a numerical value in at least one of the main control and interrupt control performed every predetermined interrupt cycle;

A process for detecting an abnormality related to the progress of the game control process is executed, and when the abnormality is detected, the game control unit is caused to perform the game control process from the beginning to return the game control process to normal. An abnormality detection means for performing a return instruction for
The game control means includes

  The main control performs an interrupt permission process for permitting the interrupt control in the numerical value range setting process and the game control process,

  The numerical value acquisition process is performed in the interrupt control,

  In the main control, after the numerical value range setting process is performed, the interrupt permission process is performed,

At least when the return instruction is received, the numerical range setting process is performed in an interrupt prohibited state in which the interrupt control is prohibited.
<Appendix Q2>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix Q1,

A microprocessor having at least the random number generation means, the game control means, and the abnormality detection means;
The microprocessor is

At least when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means, after staying in a security mode in which a security check is performed for a predetermined period, the game control means shifts to a user mode in which the game control processing is performed. A game stand characterized by being.
<Appendix Q3>

A game machine according to appendix Q1 or Q2,
The microprocessor is

  RAM for temporarily storing information related to the game;

An activation instruction means for giving an activation instruction for causing the game control means to perform the game control process from the beginning based on power-on,
The game control means includes

  When the power is cut off, including the game control process and a process executed when the power is turned off, and storing predetermined data indicating that the process has been performed in a predetermined area of the RAM Process,

  In the case where the game control process is performed from the beginning, if the predetermined data is stored, the game control process is performed, and the numerical value derived from the random number generation means is stored in the RAM area. The game control process can be restored without performing an initialization process in which the area to be initialized is at least initialized. On the other hand, when the game control process is performed from the beginning, the predetermined data is stored. If not, it is impossible to return the game control process without performing the initialization process,

The game machine characterized in that when the return instruction is received, the power interruption process is not performed.
<Appendix R>
<Appendix R1>
CPU,

  A ROM for storing at least a game control program;

A game machine equipped with a microcomputer incorporating at least

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The CPU has at least a flag register having at least a predetermined flag,

  The CPU is capable of executing at least a predetermined instruction;

  The game control program includes at least a main process, an interrupt process activated by a timer interrupt, and a plurality of sub-processes called at least from processes other than itself during execution of the interrupt process,

  The plurality of sub-processes include at least a first sub-process and a second sub-process,

  The predetermined instruction is executed at least in the second sub-process,

  If the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the predetermined instruction can be transferred from the second sub-process that executed the instruction to the first sub-process, and the predetermined change condition is If established, the instruction is at least capable of setting or clearing the predetermined flag based on execution of the instruction;

The CPU does not refer to the predetermined flag set or cleared based on the execution of the predetermined instruction in the first sub-process or the second sub-process after execution of the predetermined instruction. , Executing a process referring to the predetermined flag set or cleared based on execution of an instruction other than the predetermined instruction.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix R2>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix R1,

  The CPU has at least the flag register and a predetermined register,

The case where the predetermined transition condition is satisfied is a case where the predetermined register satisfies a predetermined condition.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix R3>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix R2,

  The instruction other than the predetermined instruction includes at least an arithmetic logic operation instruction,

  When the predetermined change condition is satisfied, when the arithmetic logic operation instruction using the predetermined register is executed, the predetermined register after execution of the arithmetic logic operation instruction satisfies the predetermined condition. If you meet

The case where the predetermined transition condition is satisfied means that when an arithmetic logic operation instruction using the predetermined register is executed, the predetermined register after the execution of the arithmetic logic operation instruction satisfies the predetermined condition. As a result, the predetermined flag is set or cleared.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix R4>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices R1 to R3,

The CPU determines a branch destination without referring to the predetermined flag set or cleared based on execution of the predetermined instruction, and sets or clears based on execution of an instruction other than the predetermined instruction A branch process for determining a branch destination with reference to the predetermined flag,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix R5>

  A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1 to R4,

The CPU performs processing that does not refer to the predetermined flag that is set or cleared based on execution of the predetermined instruction, and then changes the predetermined flag changed based on execution of an instruction other than the predetermined instruction. Continue to refer to the process,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix R6>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices R1 to R5,

The second sub-process is a process called from the first sub-process.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix R7>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices R1 to R6,

The predetermined flag is a zero flag.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix S>
<Appendix S1>

  A game machine equipped with a microcomputer including at least a CPU,

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The CPU is capable of accepting an instruction stored in a first jump destination address based on accepting a first jump instruction;

  The CPU is capable of accepting an instruction stored in a second jump destination address based on accepting a second jump instruction,

  The first jump instruction includes at least 3-bit first identification information;

  The second jump instruction includes at least 3-bit second identification information;

  The first jump destination address is an address indicated by a first value;

  The second jump destination address is an address indicated by a second value,

  The first value is eight times the first identification information,

Unlike the value eight times that of the second identification information, the second value is a value that is eight times the value that exceeds the maximum value that can be indicated by 3 bits by 1.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix S2>
A gaming machine according to appendix S1,
The second identification information is 0.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix S3>

  A game machine as set forth in appendix S1 or S2,

The first identification information is a value from 1 to 7,
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix S4>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix S3,

The second jump destination address is 64, which is a value 8 times 8 that is a value that exceeds the maximum value 7 of the first identification information by 1.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix S5>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices S1 to S4,

The CPU is also capable of accepting a jump instruction different from the first jump instruction and the second jump instruction.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix T>
<Appendix T1>

  Game control means for executing each of a plurality of types of game control processes related to a game in at least one of main control and interrupt control performed every predetermined interrupt cycle;

  Storage means for storing information about the game including return information for returning the game;

Measurement of elapsed time is started based on receiving the start instruction, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time exceeds a specified time, and the game is determined based on determining that the elapsed time exceeds a specified time A return instruction means for giving a return instruction to the control means and initializing the elapsed time based on receiving an initialization instruction from the game control means,
The storage means

A power status storage area for storing power status information;
The game control means includes

  In the main control, the first process is executed, and after the first process, a second process that is repeatedly executed is executed.

  In the interrupt control, a third process is executed,

  When the power is turned on and when the return instruction is received from the return instruction means, the execution of the first process is started,

  In the third process, when the power is shut off, a power interruption process including a process of storing predetermined data relating to the power shutdown in the power status storage area is executed.

  In the first process, when the predetermined data is stored in the power status storage area, a return process for returning to the second process can be executed based on the return information. And

  In the first process, if the predetermined data is not stored in the power status storage area, it is impossible to execute the return process,

In this gaming machine, when the return instruction is received from the return instruction means, the predetermined data is not stored in the power status storage area because the power interruption process is not performed.
The game control means includes

In the first process, after the return process is executed, the game machine is configured to execute a process of giving the start instruction to the return instruction means.
<Appendix T2>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix T1,

A microprocessor having at least the game control means, the storage means, and the return instruction means;
The microprocessor is

At least, when it is determined by the return instruction means that the elapsed time has exceeded the specific time, a security check is performed and a transition is made to the user mode in which the game control is performed after the security check. A game table, wherein at least a random extension for randomly varying the time is performed, and the user mode is entered after staying in the security mode.
<Appendix U>
<Appendix U1>

A microprocessor with a built-in CPU;
ROM,
A game machine equipped with

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The CPU is capable of executing at least a first operation when receiving a first command;

  The CPU is capable of executing at least a second operation when receiving a second command;

  The CPU is capable of executing at least a third operation when receiving a third command;

  The first bit in the flag register of the CPU is changeable according to the result of the first operation,

  The second operation is capable of at least performing an operation according to the state of the first bit,

  The ROM stores at least a program,

  At least a part of the program is a first program,

  The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept at least a first instruction group,

  A first instruction of the first instruction group is the first instruction;

  A second instruction of the first instruction group is the third instruction;

A third instruction of the first instruction group is the second instruction;
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix U2>
A game machine as set forth in Appendix U1,

The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept other instructions before the first instruction of the first instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix U3>

  A gaming machine according to appendix U1 or appendix U2,

The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept another instruction between the first instruction and the second instruction of the first instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix U4>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices U1 to U3,

The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept another instruction between the second instruction and the third instruction of the first instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix U5>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices U1 to U4,

The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept another instruction after the third instruction of the first instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix U6>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices U1 to U5,

The second program is a program that causes the CPU to accept other instructions before the first instruction of the second instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix U7>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices U1 to V6,

The second program is a program that causes the CPU to accept other instructions between the first instruction and the second instruction of the second instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix U8>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices U1 to V7,

The second program is a program that causes the CPU to accept another instruction after the second instruction of the second instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix V>
<Appendix V1>

A microprocessor with a built-in CPU;
ROM,
A game machine equipped with

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The CPU is capable of executing at least a first operation when receiving a first command;

  The CPU is capable of executing at least a second operation when receiving a second command;

  The CPU is capable of executing at least a third operation when receiving a third command;

  The first bit in the flag register of the CPU is changeable according to the result of the first operation,

  The second operation is capable of at least performing an operation according to the state of the first bit,

  The ROM stores at least a program,

  At least a part of the program is a first program,

  At least a part of the program is a second program,

  The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept at least a first instruction group,

  A first instruction of the first instruction group is the first instruction;

  A second instruction of the first instruction group is the third instruction;

  A third instruction of the first instruction group is the second instruction;

  The second program is a program that causes the CPU to accept at least a second instruction group,

  A first instruction of the second instruction group is the first instruction;

A second instruction of the second instruction group is the second instruction;
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix V2>
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix V1,

The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept other instructions before the first instruction of the first instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix V3>

  A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix V1 or Appendix V2,

The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept another instruction between the first instruction and the second instruction of the first instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix V4>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices V1 to V3,

The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept another instruction between the second instruction and the third instruction of the first instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix V5>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices V1 to V4,

The first program is a program that causes the CPU to accept another instruction after the third instruction of the first instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix V6>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices V1 to V5,

The second program is a program that causes the CPU to accept other instructions before the first instruction of the second instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix V7>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices V1 to V6,

The second program is a program that causes the CPU to accept other instructions between the first instruction and the second instruction of the second instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Appendix V8>

  The game stand according to any one of appendices V1 to V7,

The second program is a program that causes the CPU to accept another instruction after the second instruction of the second instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that.
<Ninth Embodiment>

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 306 to FIG. 376, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. In the following description, reference numerals are used for this embodiment.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310. FIG. 306 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 and the management device 620 viewed from the front side (player side), and FIG. 307 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100 and the management device 620.

  With reference to FIG. 306 and FIG. 307, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment circulates a certain number of game media (for example, game balls) enclosed in a game machine through a game media path provided in the pachinko machine 100. This is a so-called encapsulated game table in which a circulating game ball is launched by operating a ball launching handle and entered into each winning opening or starting port to play a game. In this case, there is no game ball paid out directly to the player, and the number of game balls that can be played is increased or decreased according to the state of the circulating game ball on the electronic information. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish from the number of game balls on the electronic information, the game balls circulating in the pachinko machine 100 are referred to as in-flight balls (or simply “balls”). That is, in the pachinko machine 100, a player operates a fixed number of in-flight balls that are enclosed and circulated, and on the electronic information that the player can play depending on the state of the in-flight ball (launch and winning or non-winning). Information on the number of game balls (game ball number information) changes (increases / decreases).

  In the following description, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be used for the game by the player (the number of balls that can be fired on the in-flight ball), which is managed as game ball number information, is referred to as the number of game balls. The number of game balls is stored in the storage area of the pachinko machine 100, and increases or decreases depending on the state of the game (for example, when an in-flight ball is fired or there is an acquired game ball), and is regularly updated by the pachinko machine 100. (This will be described later). In other words, the number of balls for increasing / decreasing the number of game balls (added to or subtracted from the number of game balls) is also the ball number information on the electronic information.

  The acquired game ball is also called a prize ball, and the number of acquired game balls (the number of prize balls) is the number of balls added to the number of game balls based on the fact that the in-flight ball has entered the winning opening or the starting port. The prize balls are not actually paid out, but adding the prize balls to the number of game balls may be called “paying out” the prize balls. When added to the number of game balls, the number of prize balls is 0 (zero).

  The pachinko machine 100 is connected to the management device 620 if it is provided separately from, for example, the pachinko machine 100 via an interface unit (not shown here).

  The management device 620 is an IC card unit (hereinafter also referred to as IU) that manages IC cards. For example, the management device 620 includes a card insertion slot 626 and a management device display unit 628 on the front side (player side).

  The management device 620 accesses the IC card inserted into the card insertion slot 626 to read and write predetermined information. The IC card stores information such as the amount of money (electronic money) that can be exchanged for a game ball that the player has pre-charged before playing, and the player inserts the IC card into the card slot 626. It becomes possible to play. That is, when the player inserts an IC card into the card insertion slot 626 at the start of the game, the number of game balls that can be exchanged for the amount of electronic money (hereinafter also referred to as the balance) is displayed on the management device display unit 628 or the like. For example, the player can borrow the number of game balls (added to the number of game balls stored in the pachinko machine 100) and play within the range of the number of game balls.

  In the following description, exchanging at least a part of the amount in the IC card for the number of game balls is referred to as a ball rental, and the number of ball rentals refers to the number of game balls based on an operation to request a player's ball rental This is the number of balls added to.

  Further, at least a part of the number of game balls stored in the pachinko machine 100 can be transmitted to the management device 620 and stored in the IC card. Recording at least a part of the number of game balls in the IC card by an operation requesting the player's count is called counting, and the number of balls is called counting ball number. The total number of count balls stored in the IC card (total count ball count) is referred to as storage ball. The player can add at least a part of the stored balls to the number of game balls by an operation requesting replay. That is, the case where the balance in the IC card is exchanged for a game ball and added to the game ball is rental, and the case where the stored ball is added to the game ball is replay.

  The sum of the number of counted balls stored in the IC card (stored balls) and the sum of the number of game balls exchangeable with the balance in the IC card is referred to as the memory ball number, and the game stored in the pachinko machine 100. The sum of the number of balls and the number of memory balls in the IC card is called the number of balls. The number of possessed balls is the total number of balls possessed by the player.

  The pachinko machine 100 and the management device 620 perform bidirectional communication, and transmit / receive predetermined information including information regarding the amount of game balls.

  Based on the display signal (display data) from the management device 620, the management device display unit 628 displays information indicating the number of game balls that can be exchanged (rented) with the balance in the IC card inserted into the management device 620. . In addition, the management device display unit 628 displays error information when an error relating to ball lending occurs in the pachinko machine 100 or the management device 620.

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, an inner frame 104, a front frame door 106, a ball launch handle 134, a game board 200, and a ball user interface unit (hereinafter referred to as a ball UI unit). 680 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The inner frame 104 is a member that becomes a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. Further, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the inner frame 104 when the inner frame 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 has a lock function and is attached to the front surface of the inner frame 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. It is a door member with the inside as an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and may be called a glass frame due to this configuration. A speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side of the front frame door 106. A ball number UI unit 680 is provided below the front frame door 106. On the outside (for example, the right side) of the ball number UI unit 680, a ball launching handle 134 that launches an in-flight ball guided to a launching device (not shown here) by a player's operation to the game area 124 of the game board 200. Is provided.

  The ball count UI unit 680 is an operation unit device including at least a user interface display unit (hereinafter, UI display unit) 658 and an operation unit 650. For example, the UI display unit 658 can display at least one of an image generated by the pachinko machine 100 and an image generated by the management device 620, but the UI display unit 658 can display only an image generated by the management device 620. May be displayed. Furthermore, the ball count UI unit 658 may include another display unit (here, the ball count display unit 640).

  The operation unit 650 is, for example, a touch panel type input unit. The touch panel type input unit may be a part of the UI display unit 658 or may be provided separately from the UI display unit 658. The operation unit 650 may be a switch type input unit, or may include a plurality of input units such as a touch panel type and a switch type.

  As an example, the ball number UI unit 680 of the present embodiment includes a touch panel type input operation unit 654, an operation unit 650 having a counting button 652, a UI display unit 658 having an image display unit 656 and a ball number display unit 640, This will be described later.

  The ball number UI unit 680 is also provided with a chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices (not shown here) by the player's operation, and a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light.

  The front frame door 106 is also provided with a prize ball number display part (acquired game ball number display part) 690 for displaying the number of prize balls won by winning the in-flight ball. Here, the prize ball number display unit 690 is configured by, for example, a 7-segment display device or a dot matrix display device provided separately from the ball number UI unit 680, but the prize ball number display unit 690 is not provided. The prize ball number or the like may be displayed on the image display unit 656 of the ball number UI unit 680.

  308 and 309 are views showing the pachinko machine 100 with the front frame door 106 opened, and FIG. 308 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). 309 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, illustration of the management apparatus 620 is abbreviate | omitted in these figures.

  The inner frame 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space 114 inside. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 attached to the inner frame 104. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the inner frame 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the inner frame 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the inner frame 104.

  On the upper left side of the game board 200, a launcher 622 having a launcher 622a and a launch rail 624 are provided. An in-flight ball is conveyed to the launch rail 624 via a game medium path (not shown here) inside the pachinko machine 100, and when the ball launch handle 134 is operated by the player, the launch device 622 causes the in-flight ball. Is launched into the game area 124.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the pachinko machine 100 equips the outer frame 102 grade | etc., With a nighttime monitoring apparatus, and notifies that the inner frame was open | released at night at the time of power activation. Further, when the power is turned off, the opening of the inner frame can be detected by an inner frame opening sensor (not shown).

  FIG. 310 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 306 as seen from the back side. Also in this figure, illustration of the management apparatus 620 is abbreviate | omitted.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 100, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 to perform, and a second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 constituting 500 is provided.

  Also, a ball number control board (dispensing control board) that includes an error release switch 168 that constitutes a ball number control unit 600 that performs control processing of the launching device 622 and a game medium path 610 to be described later, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk. A ball board case 172 for storing 170, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by an operation of a game store clerk and an RWM by being operated when the power is turned on A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a clear signal to the main control unit 300, a signal transmission / reception between the pachinko machine 100 and the management device 620, and the number of balls UI unit 680 and the number of balls An interface unit 606 that transmits and receives signals to and from the control unit 600 is provided. To have.

  The pachinko machine 100 also includes a game medium path 610 that circulates a certain number (for example, 50) of the in-machine balls. Thereby, while becoming a structure where a player cannot touch the in-flight ball | bowl which circulates directly, it becomes possible to omit a storage tray from the pachinko machine 100.

  The game medium path 610 is a game ball circulation device having a function of conveying in-machine balls discharged from the game area 124 below the pachinko machine 100 to the launch rail 624 one by one. Specifically, the game medium path 610 includes a ball polishing device 612, a lifting device 614, and a ball feeding device 616, and the in-machine ball discharged from the ball polishing device 612 provided at the lower back of the pachinko machine 100. Are conveyed one by one by a lifting device 614 provided at the end on the right side of the back surface, and delivered to a ball feeding device 616 provided at the upper portion of the back surface. The ball polishing device 612, the lifting device 614, the ball feeding device 616 and the launching device 622 are controlled by the ball number control unit 600.

  The ball polishing device 612 is provided at the lower part of the pachinko machine 100 and automatically polishes dirt on the in-machine balls circulating inside the pachinko machine 100. The in-flight ball discharged from the game area 124 is first guided to the ball polisher 612. The ball polishing device 612 includes a ball inlet, a ball outlet, a ball polishing device inlet sensor, a ball polishing motor, a ball polishing motor sensor, a screw, a polishing cloth, and a cloth feed motor. At the same time as polishing the ball, the polishing cloth can be automatically wound by the cloth feed gear and the cloth feed motor. When the ball polisher entrance sensor detects that the in-flight ball has entered the ball entrance, the ball polish motor is driven. The ball polishing motor is connected to a screw through a gear, and conveys the balls in the machine one by one by the rotation of the screw. The in-machine sphere is conveyed to the sphere outlet while being rubbed against a polishing cloth provided inside the sphere polishing device 612, and is thereby polished. The in-flight ball discharged from the ball outlet is delivered to the lifting device 614.

  The lifting device 614 is a device that conveys the in-machine sphere from the ball polishing device 612 to the upper part of the pachinko machine 100, and includes a ball inlet, a ball outlet, a lifting device inlet sensor, a lifting motor, and a lifting motor sensor. And a screw. When the lifting device inlet sensor detects that the in-flight ball discharged from the ball polishing device 612 has entered the ball inlet, the lifting motor is driven. The lifting motor is connected to the screw through a gear, and the balls in the machine are conveyed to the upper part of the pachinko machine 100 one by one by the rotation of the screw. The in-flight ball discharged from the ball outlet is delivered to the ball feeding device 616.

  The ball feeding device 616 is a device that conveys the in-flight ball discharged from the lifting device 614 to the launch rail 624. For example, a ball feeding solenoid and a passage (ball passage) of the in-flight ball that is rotatably connected to the ball feeding solenoid are provided. Including. When the ball number control unit 600 detects that the ball firing handle 134 is operated, the ball feeding solenoid is driven. As the ball feeding solenoid sucks the ball passage, the in-flight balls are conveyed to the firing rail 624 one by one along the ball passage. The in-flight ball sent to the firing rail 624 is launched into the game area 124 by the launching device 622 as described above. Note that a ball feeder inlet sensor is also provided at the ball inlet of the ball feeder 616.

The launcher 622 includes a launcher 622a, a launch solenoid (not shown), and the like, and the launcher 622a is rotatably attached by the launch solenoid. In the vicinity of the launching device 622, a firing rail 624 is provided. When the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, the launching rod 622a is rotated by being sucked by a launching solenoid, for example. The in-flight ball transported to the firing rail 624 via the game medium path 610 is hit at the tip of the rotating launching rod 622a and is launched from the launch rail 624 to the game area 124. In this case, the strength of the launch is controlled by changing the suction force of the launch solenoid according to the value of the launch strength sensor of the ball launch handle 134.
<Game board>

  The game board 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a schematic front view showing an example of the configuration of the game board 200.

  The game board 200 is formed with a game area 124 in which the in-flight ball can roll. In the game area 124, for example, an in-flight ball is launched from a launch rail (not shown here) provided at the upper left.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, a shielding device 246 that shields the decorative symbol display device 208 from being easily viewed by the player may be provided.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226 (226C, 226D), a normal start port 228, a first special view start port 230, and a second special view around the effect device 206. A starting port 232 and a variable winning port 234 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 (226C, 226D) are arranged on the game board 200, and the in-flight ball entering the general winning hole 226 is a predetermined ball detection sensor (illustrated here). Although omitted, which will be described in detail later), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is awarded to the player when the general winning opening 226 is won. As described above, the winning ball is not paid out of the circulating in-flight ball, but is added to the number of game balls on the electronic information held by the player (the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the pachinko machine 100). (The same shall apply hereinafter.) The in-flight ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, circulates in the game medium path 610, is transported to the launch rail 624, and is used again for the game.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. The in-flight ball that has passed through the normal start port 228 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, circulates in the game medium path 610, is conveyed to the launch rail 624, and is used again for the game. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the in-flight ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are held in the storage area of the pachinko machine 100 in order to give the player a prize ball. The number of prize balls is added to the number of game balls being played, and the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, in order to give a predetermined number (for example, four) of prize balls to the player, the number of prize balls is added to the number of game balls At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, in order to give a predetermined number (for example, 15) of prize balls to the player, the number of prize balls is added to the number of game balls.

  The in-flight balls that entered the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234 are all guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and circulate in the game medium path 610 to launch rails. It is conveyed to 624 and used again for the game.

  Furthermore, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a game nail 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the game area 124, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding the in-flight ball that has not won any prize opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then transporting it to the entrance of the game medium path 610.

  The pachinko machine 100 drives the firing solenoid of the launching device 622 with strength according to the amount of operation of the ball launching handle 134 of the player, and launches in-machine balls supplied to the launching rail 624 one by one. The game area 124 is launched by the kite 622a). Then, the ball launched into the upper portion of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, variable winning hole 234) or starting Winning the mouth (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), or winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal drawing start port 228 240 is reached.

  As described above, in this embodiment, both the in-flight ball that has entered the winning opening and the starting port, and the in-flight ball that has been discharged from the out-out port without winning a prize are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and again enter the game. used. Therefore, the amount of game balls consumed by the player due to the launch of in-flight balls is managed by subtracting the number of in-flight balls launched into the game area 124 from the number of game balls.

  In the following description, the number of in-flight balls launched into the game area 124 from the start of the game to the end of the game is referred to as the number of in-balls (the number of thrown balls). The number of in-balls is subtracted from the number of game balls each time an in-flight ball launched (injected) into the game area 124 by operating the ball launch handle 134 is detected. That is, the number of balls “1” is subtracted from the number of game balls by one launch of the in-flight ball.

  Also, the number of in-flight balls discharged from the game area 124 to the back side of the game board 200 between the start of the game and the end of the game is referred to as the number of out balls (the number of discharged balls). The number of out balls is the number of balls in which the number of in-flight balls discharged from the game area 124 is detected and counted. The pachinko machine 100 monitors the number of in-flight balls by managing the number of in-balls and the number of out-balls, which will be described later.

  FIG. 312 is a view for explaining the path of the in-machine ball 710 that circulates inside the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the drawing, each winning opening or each starting port of the game board 200 is mainly illustrated, and a game medium path 610 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 is illustrated outside the game area 124, and the game board 200 is also illustrated. The game medium internal path 700 (700A to 700J) provided on the back side of the game medium is indicated by broken lines, and the ball detection sensors 320B and 604B provided in the game medium internal path 700 (700A to 700J) are indicated by bold lines. 3A shows a case where the subtraction sensor 604Z is behind the firing rail 624, and FIG. 3B shows a case where the subtraction sensor 604Z is between the ball feeding device 616 and the firing device 622.

  When the player operates a ball launch handle (not shown here), the in-flight ball 710 is launched from the launch device 622 into the game area 124. The in-flight ball 710 that has fallen through the game area 124 and passed through the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to a game medium internal path 700A provided on the back side of the game board 200 and passes through the second special figure starting port 232. The in-flight ball 710 is guided to the game medium internal path 700B. The in-flight ball 710 passing through the general winning opening 226C is guided to the game medium internal path 700C, and the in-flight ball 710 passing through the general winning opening 226D is guided to the gaming medium internal path 700D. The game medium internal paths 700C and 700D merge into one game medium internal path 700E. The in-flight ball 710 that has passed through the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the game medium internal path 700F, and the in-flight ball 710 that has passed through the normal start port 228 is guided to the game medium internal path 700G. The plurality of game medium internal paths 700A, 700B, 700E, 700F, and 700G merge into one game medium internal path 700H.

  Further, the in-machine ball 710 discharged from the out port 240 is guided to the game medium internal path 700I. The game medium internal paths 700H and 700I merge into one game medium internal path 700J and reach the entrance of the ball polisher 612.

  The game medium internal paths 700A, 700B, 700E, 700F, and 700G are each provided with a ball detection sensor 320B corresponding to a winning opening or a starting opening (hereinafter referred to as a winning opening or the like). The ball detection sensor 320B is a sensor that detects that a ball has been entered in a prize opening or the like, and includes a general prize opening sensor 320E, a first special figure starting opening sensor 320J, a second special figure starting opening sensor 320H, a variable winning prize. It is a general term for the mouth sensor 320G and the usual start sensor 320T.

  In other words, the game medium internal path 700E after joining the general prize opening 226 (226C, 226D) is provided with the general prize opening sensor 320E, and the game medium internal path 700A to which the first special figure starting port 230 is connected. Is provided with a first special figure start port sensor 320J, a second special figure start port sensor 320H is provided in the game medium internal path 700B to which the second special figure start port 232 is connected, and a variable winning port 234 is connected thereto. The game medium internal path 700F is provided with a variable winning opening sensor 320G, and the game medium internal path 700G to which the universal start opening 228 is connected is provided with a general start opening sensor 320T. A common ball detection sensor 320B can be used for a plurality of winning holes. For example, a common general winning opening sensor 320E is provided in the general winning openings 226C and 226D having the same number of winning balls. Moreover, the structure which provides the ball | bowl detection sensor 320B to each may be sufficient even if it is the general winning opening 226C, 226D with the same number of prize balls.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a ball detection sensor 604B. The ball detection sensor 604 </ b> B is an insertion detection sensor and a discharge detection sensor that respectively detect the in-flight ball 710 launched into the game area 124 and the in-flight ball 710 discharged from the game area 124.

  The input detection sensor detects the passage of an in-flight ball 710 (an in-flight ball 710 used for a game or used for a game) that is launched from the launch rail 624 to the game area 124. The input detection sensor is, for example, a subtraction sensor 604Z. When the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710, it is determined that the player has consumed one game ball (the player's number of game balls has decreased by one). For example, the subtraction sensor 604 </ b> Z is disposed between a ball feeder entrance sensor (not shown) of the ball feeder 616 and the game area 124. The subtraction sensor 604Z is not limited to this position as long as it can detect the passage of the in-flight ball 710 that is waiting to be fired. For example, the subtraction sensor 604Z includes a game media path 610 from the ball entrance of the ball polisher 612 to the firing rail 624. It can be provided at any position. Specifically, between the ball polishing device 612 (ball polishing device inlet sensor) and the firing rail 624, between the lifting device 614 (lifting device inlet sensor) and the firing rail 624, the ball feeding device 616 (ball feeding device inlet). Sensor) and firing rail 624, between ball polisher 612 (ball polisher inlet sensor) and lifter 614 (lifter inlet sensor), or lifter 614 (lifter inlet sensor) and ball feed During device 616 (ball feeder inlet sensor), and so on.

  The discharge detection sensor detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710 discharged from the game area 124. The discharge detection sensor includes a winning detection sensor 604S that detects an in-flight ball 710 that has won a prize opening or the like, and a non-winning that detects an in-flight ball 710 that has not won any prize (such as a non-winning prize). A detection sensor 604K is included.

  For example, the winning detection sensor 604S is provided in the middle of the game medium internal path 700H, and by detecting the in-flight ball 710 passing therethrough, there has been a winning at any one of the winning openings and the game area It is detected from 124 that one in-flight ball 710 has been ejected.

  On the other hand, the in-flight ball 710 that has fallen in the game area 124 and has not won any prize opening or the like is discharged from the out opening 240 and guided to the game medium internal path 700I to reach the entrance of the ball polisher 612. The non-winning detection sensor 604K is provided, for example, in the middle of the game medium internal path 700I, and by detecting the in-vehicle ball 710 passing therethrough, there is no winning, and one in-machine from the gaming area 124 It is detected that the ball 710 has been discharged.

  In the present embodiment, in order to distinguish the in-flight ball 710 discharged from the game area 124 from the winning one and the non-winning one, the winning detection sensor 604S is placed in the game medium internal path 700H, and the non-winning detection sensor 604K is placed. Although provided in each of the game medium internal paths 700I, if only the in-vehicle ball 710 discharged from the game area 124 is detected without any distinction between winning and non-winning, one discharge is performed in the middle of the game medium internal path 700J after joining. It is good also as a structure which provides a detection sensor (discharge detection sensor).

  Although FIG. 9A shows the case where the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the in-flight ball 710 launched from the launch rail 624, the position of the subtraction sensor 604Z is not limited to this.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing other positions near the subtraction sensor 604Z, and is a diagram showing the vicinity of the ball feeding device 616 and the launching device 622. As shown in FIG. 5B, a subtraction sensor 604Z may be provided between the ball feeding device 616 and the launching device 622. In this case, the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the in-flight ball 710 sent from the ball feeding device 616 to the launching device 622.

As described above, in the enclosed pachinko machine 100, the player cannot directly touch the in-flight ball 710 by circulating the in-flight ball 710 inside the inner frame of the pachinko machine 100. It is effective for prevention. In addition, the launching device 622 is provided above the game area 124 (because it is not configured to launch the in-machine ball 710 along the rail from below), and does not generate a return ball to the launching device 622. Furthermore, since the payout to the upper plate and the lower plate of the in-flight ball 710 is not performed, the noise level is suppressed, and the replenishment of the ball to the gaming machine is unnecessary, so that the island facility is unnecessary.
<Example of connection between pachinko machine and management device>

  FIG. 313 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the management device 620. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 includes a control unit such as the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, and the ball number control unit 600, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special control unit. Display units such as the figure display device 214, the universal map display device 210, and the decorative symbol display device 208, the ball count UI unit 680, the operation units such as the chance button 136 and the error release switch 168, and the storage units such as the ROM 306 and RAM 308. And an interface unit 606. On the other hand, the management device 620 includes a control unit 620a that performs overall control, an operation unit 620b such as various buttons, a storage unit 620c such as a ROM and a RAM, a card insertion slot 626 for inserting an IC card, The management apparatus display unit 628 and an interface unit 620d that is a communication interface with the pachinko machine 100 are included.

  The ball number control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 is connected to the management device 620 via the interface unit 606 to perform bidirectional communication with the management device 620, and transmits and receives various game information including information related to the amount of game balls. For example, the ball number control unit 600 transmits / receives information regarding the amount of game balls with the management device 620 based on an input operation or the like from the ball number UI unit 680, and controls ball rental, counting control, IC card return control, and screen display. Switching control is performed.

  Information on the amount of game balls includes, for example, information on the number of game balls or information on the number of balls held, winning information including the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth, etc., the total number of winning balls, the number of counted balls, and the amount (balance) Information on the number of in-balls and out-balls, information on the amount of game balls stored in the IC card, an IC card reception or return command, and the like.

  In addition to these, game state information, information output when fraud or error is detected, and the like are also included. The management device 620 transmits at least information regarding the number of game balls to the hall computer connected to the outside. In addition, the management device 620 may transmit at least information regarding the number of possessed balls to a hall computer connected to the outside.

  The ball number control unit 60 and the management device 620 can confirm the consistency of communication data between the ball number control unit 600 and the management device 620 through encryption processing or the like by performing bidirectional communication. Unauthorized access aimed at 606 can be prevented. In addition, for example, the unique information (for example, unique ID) of the pachinko machine 100 acquired from the ball number control unit 600 is registered in the external management center or the like via the communication network of the management device 620. It is possible to authenticate the pachinko machine 100 by collating with the above information, and it becomes easy to find unauthorized modification by making a determination at the time of power-on or the like.

  Referring again to FIG. 312, the ball detection sensors 320 </ b> B provided at each winning opening and each starting port are connected to the main control unit 300. When the general winning opening sensor 320E detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710, the main control unit 300 determines that the general winning opening 226 has been won, and individually determines the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning or the number of winning balls individually. Prize ball number information (prize ball command) including corresponding information is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600. Further, when the first special figure starting port sensor 320J detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710, it is determined that the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize, and a prize ball command corresponding to the winning is sent to the ball number control unit 600. Send to. Further, when the second special figure starting port sensor 320H detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710, it is determined that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and a winning ball command corresponding to the winning is sent to the ball number control unit 600. Send to. Further, when the variable prize opening sensor 320G detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710, it is determined that the variable prize opening 234 has been won, and a prize ball command corresponding to the prize is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600. Further, when the main control unit 300 detects that the in-flight ball 710 has passed through the normal start port sensor 320T, the main control unit 300 determines that the general start port 228 has won a prize, and a prize ball command corresponding to the win is controlled by the number of balls. To the unit 600.

  The subtraction sensor 604Z, the winning detection sensor 604S, and the non-winning detection sensor 604K are connected to the ball number control unit 600.

  The number of game balls of the player is stored in a game ball number storage area provided in a RAM or the like of the ball number control unit 600. The ball number control unit 600 detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710 by the subtraction sensor 604Z. In this case, the number of game balls stored in the game ball number storage area is reduced by one.

The ball number control unit 600 detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710 with the subtraction sensor 604Z, and when one of the in-flight balls 710 is detected with any of the winning detection sensors 604S, It is determined that there has been a winning due to consumption, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning is determined based on the winning ball number information (principal ball command) transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600. Is added to the number of game balls stored in. In addition, when the number-of-balls control unit 600 detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710 with the subtraction sensor 604Z and detects the passage of one in-flight ball 710 with the non-winning detection sensor 604K, Is determined.
<Number of balls UI section>

  With reference to FIG. 314, the ball number UI unit 680 will be described. FIG. 314 is a top (front) view showing an example of the ball count UI unit 680. The ball number UI unit 680 of the present embodiment includes an input operation unit 654, an operation unit 650 having a counting button 652, and a UI display unit 658 having an image display unit 656 and a ball number display unit 640. .

  The image display unit 656 is a liquid crystal display device, for example, and displays information such as the balance and the number of stored balls stored in the IC card received from the management device 620. As will be described later, in the image display unit 656, an image generated by the first sub-control unit 400 and displayed on a display device (decorative symbol display device 208) provided in the game board 200, and a management device 620 are generated. One of the images can be switched and displayed.

  The input operation unit 654 is a plurality of buttons. Here, as an example, a touch panel system that enables operation (input) of the buttons by touching a player's finger provided in a part of the UI display unit 658. Is adopted. Examples of input by a finger include a resistance film method (analog resistance film method, matrix resistance film method), a capacitance method, an infrared method, and an ultrasonic method. Hereinafter, finger input by the player may be referred to as “touch”. Further, the input may be performed by bringing the tip of a predetermined pen into contact, and examples of this case include an analog resistance film method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an electrostatic coupling method. In this embodiment, a touch panel type liquid crystal display device 662 in which an image display unit 656 and an input operation unit 654 are integrally provided is employed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the input operation unit 654 may be a touch panel provided separately from the image display unit 656, or a push button (switch type) provided separately from the image display unit 656 similarly to the counting button 652. ) May be used for input operation. Further, an organic EL display device or a plasma display may be used for the touch panel. Furthermore, when the input operation unit 654 is configured as a separate component, the image display unit 656 may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, 7 segments Other display devices including a display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The plurality of buttons of the input operation unit 654 include, for example, a ball lending button 140 for instructing the management device 620 to lend a ball, a return button 142 for instructing the management device 620 to return the inserted IC card, and a screen. For example, a switch button 144 for instructing display switching, a replay button 146 for instructing the management device 620 to replay, and the like. The input operation unit 654 may include other operation buttons. Further, for example, the input operation unit 654 may be configured such that only one button is displayed in an initial state, and an operation menu divided into a plurality of layers is displayed by touching the button. For example, these buttons are displayed brightly (lighted) when operation (input) is possible, and are displayed dark when operation (input) is impossible.

  The count button 652 is a button that is pressed when at least a part of the number of game balls held in the game ball number storage area of the ball number control unit 600 is stored (stored) in the IC card. The number of counted balls refers to the number of balls that are subtracted from the number of game balls based on the player's operation of the count button 652 and transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the management device 620 and stored in the IC card. For example, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of counting balls is associated with a single press of the counting button 652 within a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds), and it is controlled that the number has been pressed. When the unit 600 detects it, it subtracts the counted ball number (for example, 10) from the number of game balls, transmits the counted ball number as count information to the management device 620, and displays the number of game balls after the subtraction as a ball number display unit 640. To display. The count information includes the number of game balls after subtraction and the total number of count balls (the number of stored balls) obtained by accumulating the number of count balls up to that point. While being stored in the IC card, the updated number of game balls is displayed on the ball number display unit 640.

  When the count button 652 is continuously pressed a plurality of times, the number of count balls (for example, 10 × 2 presses = 20) is multiplied by a certain amount corresponding to one press and the number of presses. You can also In addition, if the pressing is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the number of counting balls is accelerated (20, 50, 100, etc.) according to the length of the pressing time, and the pressing ends. The number of counted balls at the time may be transmitted to the management device 620. Further, when the return button 142 of the IC card is touched by the player and the counting button 652 is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds), the number of all the game balls stored in the pachinko machine 100 is counted. The count information as a number may be transmitted to the management device 620 and “0” may be displayed on the ball number display unit 640. Further, a numeric key (ten key) or a numeric key button may be arranged on the input operation unit 654, and the counting ball number may be directly input by the numeric key input after pressing the counting button 652. .

  The ball lending button 140 is a button to be touched when the player borrows a predetermined number of game balls from the balance (receives a lending ball from the balance). When the IC card is inserted into the management device 620, the balance of the electronic money in the IC card is displayed on the management device display unit 628, and information (ball count update command) such as storage and balance in the IC card is The number is transmitted to the UI unit 680. Based on this, the ball number UI unit 680 displays an image including these pieces of information on the image display unit 656. Based on the display, when the player touches the ball lending button 140, the information (ball lending operation information) is transmitted from the ball number UI unit 680 to the management device 620. As with the counting button 652, the ball lending button 140 may transmit a certain amount of ball lending as ball lending operation information with one touch for a predetermined period, or lend with a plurality of touches. The input may be an integral multiple of the number, or the input may be made such that the number of rented balls increases at an accelerated rate by a touch exceeding a predetermined period.

  The management device 620 that has received the ball lending operation information transmits the number of balls that have been instructed (ball lending request information) to the ball number control unit 600. The ball number control unit 600 adds the number of rented balls to the number of game balls and displays it on the ball number display unit 640 and stores it in the game ball number storage area so that the player can play a game with the increased number of game balls. it can. Further, the balance after renting is displayed on the image display unit 656.

  The replay button 146 is a button that is touched when the player borrows a predetermined number of game balls from the stored ball (receives a loan from the stored ball). When the IC card is inserted into the management device 620, the balance of the electronic money in the IC card is displayed on the management device display unit 628, and information (ball count update command) such as storage and balance in the IC card is The number is transmitted to the UI unit 680. Based on this, the ball number UI unit 680 displays an image including these pieces of information on the image display unit 656. For example, the replay is effective when there is a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of stored balls, and the renewal propriety information is included in the ball number update command. When the replay is possible, the ball count UI unit 680 notifies that the replay is possible by displaying the replay button 146 brightly. When the player touches the replay button 146 based on the display, the information (replay operation information) is transmitted from the ball number UI unit 680 to the management device 620. Similarly to the counting button 652, the replay button 146 may transmit a fixed amount of replay balls (similar to the number of balls lent) as replay operation information by one touch for a predetermined period. Further, an input that is an integral multiple of the number of replay balls can be made by multiple touches, or an input in which the number of replay balls can be accelerated at a touch exceeding a predetermined period may be possible.

  The management device 620 that has received the replay operation information transmits the requested replay ball number request information to the ball number control unit 600. The ball number control unit 600 adds the replayed ball number to the game ball number and displays it on the ball number display unit 640 and stores it in the game ball number storage area, so that the player plays a game with the increased number of game balls. Can do. In addition, the stored balls after lending by replay are displayed on the image display unit 656.

  The return button 142 is a button for returning the IC card when touched when the IC card is inserted in the management apparatus 620. When information (return operation information) touched by the return button 142 is transmitted from the ball number UI unit 680 to the management device 620, the ball number request information is transmitted from the management device 620 to the ball number control unit 600. Upon receiving the ball number request information, the ball number control unit 600 transmits game ball number information including the latest game ball number to the management device 620. The game ball number information includes the balance, the total number of winning balls, which is the cumulative number of winning balls, the number of stored balls (total number of counting balls), and the like. Upon receiving the game ball number information, the management device 620 stores the number of balls stored in the IC card and discharges it from the card insertion slot 626.

  The ball number display unit 640 is a game ball number display device configured by, for example, a 7-segment display device or a dot matrix display device, and information transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 or the management device 620 (game ball number or error information). Etc.). The ball number display unit 640 can display the number of game balls and the like in units of one, for example, up to six digits. For example, error information by characters such as “ERRxx” can be displayed.

For example, when the number of game balls is 100, “100” is displayed on the ball number display unit 640. If there are 15 prize balls due to winning during the game, “15” is first displayed on the prize ball number display section 690 of the glass frame (front frame door) 106, and the prize balls are given to the player (paid out). Display of the ball number control unit 600 becomes “115” and the display of the prize ball number display unit 690 becomes “0”.
<Type of design>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 315 (a) to 315 (c). The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 315 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 306 variable game is started on the condition that the first special figure start port sensor 320J detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 307 variable game is started on the condition that the second special figure start port sensor 320H detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 306 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 306” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 307 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 307” which repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 306” and “variation display of special figure 307” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 306 (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 306. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 307 (this also corresponds to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 307. Therefore, from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 306” until the stop symbol form of special figure 306 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 307”, the stop symbol form of special figure 307 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, the stop symbol mode of the special diagram 306 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the start of the “variation display of the special diagram 306 or 2”. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 315 (a) shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 315 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 315 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first special figure starting port sensor 320J detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, that is, that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230. On the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, on the condition that the second special diagram start port sensor 320H has detected that the ball has entered the second special diagram start port 232 In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” → Perform “decorative display of decorative symbols” to switch the display in the order. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 315 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 315 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the detection of the above-mentioned sphere detection sensor (common-use start opening sensor) that the sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to turn on all seven segments, The “variable display of the usual map” is performed repeatedly by lighting up one segment. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 315 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 and circulation. In accordance with the state of the in-flight ball 710, the ball number control unit 600 that mainly controls the increase / decrease of the number of game balls held by the player and controls the circulation of the in-flight ball 710, and the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 And a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supply.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). Predetermined ball detection sensor 320B (first special figure starting port sensor 320J, second special figure starting port sensor 320H, general winning port sensor 320E, variable winning port sensor 320G, A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including the start opening sensor 320T) and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; For example, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. Is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling the display of the prize-ball number display unit 690.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the first special figure start port sensor 320J detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Output to. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, game state, game ball number information, possession ball number information, etc.) is output. The information input circuit 350 is connected to the management device 620 so that bidirectional communication is possible, whereby game information is transmitted to the management device 620. Note that the information input circuit 350 and the management device 620 may be one-way communication from the management device 620 to the information input circuit 350 instead of bidirectional communication.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an interface for transmitting a command to the ball number control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the ball number control unit 600 is enabled. Note that the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 660 is bidirectional communication by parallel communication or serial communication. The main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 can confirm the consistency of communication data between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 by encryption processing or the like by performing bidirectional communication. Unauthorized access aimed at these interface parts can be prevented.

  On the other hand, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 are also configured to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  In addition, when the main control unit 300 detects the in-flight ball 710 that has won a prize port or the like by the ball detection sensor 320B, the main control unit 300 displays the number of prize balls set for each prize port or the like on the prize ball number display unit 690. In addition, the number of prize balls or prize ball number information including information corresponding to the number of prize balls is transmitted as a serial signal (command format) at regular intervals to the ball number control unit 600. That is, the main control unit 300 determines winning, displays the number of prize balls on the prize ball number display unit 690, and uses the number of prize balls given to the player as prize ball number information (prize ball command). 600. Thereby, the ball number control unit 600 adds the number of prize balls to the number of game balls and displays it on the ball number display unit 640. As described above, when a winning is made at a winning opening or the like, the number of winning balls for the winning is displayed on the winning display unit 690 (although it may be a short time), and then is displayed on the ball number control unit 640. Reflected (displayed by adding to the number of game balls).

  As will be described later, in the winning ball command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball control unit 600, the number of winning balls in one winning corresponds to one command. The main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 perform two-way communication (command transmission / reception) with respect to the payout (giving) of one prize ball, even if there are multiple wins during that time. One prize ball command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 includes only information on the number of prize balls by one winning. That is, in such a case, the prize ball number display unit 690 accumulates and displays the number of prize balls until the prize ball command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 640. For example, in a state where the number of game balls is 100 (in the state where “100” is displayed on the ball number display unit 640), the prize winning 234 (for example, the number of prize balls is “15”) is consecutively won three times. When there is, the display on the prize ball number display section 690 transitions from 15 → 30 → 45 in a short time. During this time, when the winning ball command (the winning ball number “15”) by the first winning is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600, the display of the winning ball number display unit 690 changes from 45 to 30. Then, the display on the ball number display unit 640 changes from 100 to 115. When a winning ball command (the winning ball number “15”) by the second winning is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600, the display of the winning ball number display unit 690 changes from 30 to 15, and the ball The display of the number display unit 640 changes from 115 to 130, and when a prize ball command (award ball number “15”) by the third winning is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600, the number of prize balls The display on the display unit 690 changes from 15 to 0, and the display on the ball number display unit 640 changes from 130 to 145.

  Note that, not limited to the above example, one prize ball command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 is a sum of a plurality of prize ball number information (for example, the number of prize balls of a plurality of winning prizes). Value).

  The main control unit 300 can determine whether or not there is a winning at the start opening or winning opening regardless of the presence of the in-flight ball 710 remaining in the game area 124. Here, the determination of success / failure may be other benefits given to the player, such as awarding a prize ball or starting a big hit action.

  When the main control unit 300 detects fraud, the main control unit 300 transmits the information to the ball number control unit 600 as a command. The injustice detected by the main control unit 300 is a magnet error when detecting abnormal magnetism, a radio wave error when detecting abnormal radio waves, a vibration error when detecting vibrations, and the in-flight ball 710 is variable except for a big hit. An illegal winning error or the like when winning in the winning opening 234.

  Further, the main control unit 300 enables game control regardless of whether or not an IC card is inserted in the management device 620. For example, even when the game is started with the IC card inserted into the management device 620 and the IC card is returned during the game, the game can be continued.

The connection example of the prize ball number display unit 690 is not limited to the above example. For example, the prize ball number display unit 690 is connected to the information output circuit 336 and displayed on the prize ball number display unit 690 based on data (number of prize balls) set by the main control unit 300 in the information output circuit 366. Also good. Moreover, it is good also as what connects with the sub control part (1st sub control part 400 or the 2nd sub control part 500) demonstrated below, and displays a prize ball number based on the command which a sub control part outputs.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Oh and display processor), and it is connected to the various sensors 440, the. The various sensors 440 include, for example, a front frame door open sensor and an inner frame open sensor.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540, the serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540, and the signal from the CPU 504 are stored in the ROM 506. The image data is read out, a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 536, and the image is displayed on the ball count UI unit 680. Is connected to the VDP534, the. Note that the image control means such as the VRAM 536 and the VDP 534 may share those provided in the first sub-control unit 400.
<Display device switching unit>

  The display device switching unit 670 is connected to the ball number UI unit 680 so that bidirectional communication is possible. The display device switching unit 670 is connected to the ball number control unit 600 via the interface unit 606. The display device switching unit 670 includes a display image switching circuit, and the like. The first image generated by the first sub-control unit 400 and the first image displayed on the image display unit 565 of the ball count UI unit 680 are displayed. The second image generated by a device other than the first sub-control unit 400 can be displayed by switching to at least one of the second images.

The display device switching unit 670 may switch and display either one of the first image and the second image, or the first image and the image including the first image and the second image. It may be possible to switch and display. The second image is, for example, an image generated by the management device 620 or an image generated by the second sub control unit 500.
<Ball number control unit>

  Next, the ball number control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ball number controller 600 is connected to the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K via an inner frame relay board (not shown), and connected to the subtraction sensor 604Z via a launch relay board (not shown). The passage of the ball 710 is detected, and the in-flight ball 710 that circulates is monitored (in-ball and out-ball monitoring control) and prize ball control is performed. Further, the ball number control unit 600 is connected to the ball number UI unit 680 to perform ball lending control and IC card return control. Further, the ball polishing device 612, the lifting device 614, the ball feeding device 616, the launching device 622, and the firing rail 624 are connected to control the game medium path 610. Further, the ball number control unit 600 is connected to the substrate display unit 630 and notifies an error detected by the ball number control unit 600. These will be described in detail below.

<< Monitoring control of in-ball and out-ball >>

  The ball number control unit 600 monitors the in-ball and the out-ball by detecting the in-flight ball 710 circulating in the pachinko machine 100 with the ball detection sensor 604B. That is, when the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the launch of the in-flight ball 710, it is determined that the player has consumed the number of game balls, 1 is subtracted from the number of game balls, and the number of game balls after the subtraction is displayed in the ball number display unit 640. To display. On the other hand, when the winning detection sensor 604S or the non-winning detection sensor 604K detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710, it is determined that the in-flight ball 710 is discharged from the game area 124. In this embodiment, since there is no actual payout of the in-flight ball 710 due to winning, the same number of in-flight balls 710 to be launched and in-flight balls 710 discharged from the game area 124 (one discharge per consumption of one game ball). Thus, an error of the circulating in-flight ball 710 is detected. Note that there is a case where there are a plurality of in-flight balls 710 in the game area 124 because it is not always the same timing for one throw in the game area 124 and one discharge from the game area 124. is there.

  For example, the ball number control unit 600 monitors in-balls and out-balls according to the number of in-flight balls 710 remaining in the game area 124, and performs ball number management control for notifying an error when abnormal. Here, the number of in-flight balls 710 remaining in the game area 124, that is, the difference between the number of in-balls and the number of out-balls is referred to as the number of in-area balls. For example, during the period from the start of the game to the end of the game, the number of in-flight balls 710 detected by the subtraction sensor 604Z is stored in the throw-in number (in-ball number) storage area provided in the RAM or the like of the ball number control unit 600. Memorize cumulatively. Further, during the period from the start of the game to the end of the game, the number of in-flight balls 710 that have been detected to pass by the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K is calculated as the number of discharges (out) provided in the RAM or the like of the ball number control unit 600. The number of balls is stored cumulatively in the storage area. The ball number control unit 600 obtains a difference between them (in ball number-out ball number = in-region ball number) at a predetermined timing, and stores the difference in the in-region ball number storage area provided in the RAM or the like of the ball number control unit 600. Remember. Then, the ball number control unit 600 compares the value stored in the in-region ball number storage area with the abnormality determination condition, and reports an error as an error.

  Specifically, for example, the ball number control unit 600 calculates the number of balls in the area in the periodic interruption process of the main control unit 300 or the ball number control unit 600, and stores the number of balls in the area. And the value is used to determine the abnormality. When the first abnormality determination condition is satisfied, the first abnormality is determined. When the second abnormality determination condition is satisfied, the second abnormality is determined. Is determined.

  The first abnormality determination condition is, for example, a case where the in-region sphere number becomes negative. The first abnormality determination condition may also be a case where the number of in-region spheres is less than the first abnormality determination number. The first abnormality determination number is, for example, zero, a negative number (for example, −19), or The sum of two or more predetermined numbers (for example, the sum of number A (for example, -5) and number B (for example, -7) (in this case, -12)) may be used.

  The second abnormality determination condition is, for example, a case where the number of balls in the area exceeds the number of in-flight balls 710. The second abnormality determination condition may also be a case where the number of balls in the region exceeds the second abnormality determination number. The second abnormality determination number is, for example, a positive number (for example, 19) or two or more The sum of a predetermined number (for example, the sum of number A (for example, 5) and number B (for example, 7) (in this case, 12)) may be used, and an error is notified in these cases.

  The case where the number of balls in the area falls below the first abnormality determination condition (for example, −19) is a state in which there are no in-flight balls 710 to be thrown in but there are more in-flight balls 710 to be discharged. This is a case in which it is suspected that an in-flight ball 710 that circulates due to, for example, 106 being opened is added (entering a winning opening or the like).

  The case where the number of balls in the area exceeds the second abnormality determination condition (for example, 19) means that the number of in-flight balls 710 to be thrown in is increasing, but there are no in-flight balls 710 to be discharged and the game area 124 is allowed. In-flight ball 710 that exceeds the range is present, and for example, it is suspected that clogging of in-flight ball 710 has occurred at each of the winning holes or the like, such as a hitting direction changing member 236, or a game nail 238. .

  Further, in the above example, the first abnormal state other than fraudulent behavior is caused by the following causes. For example, this is a case where at least one of the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K detects passing of one in-flight ball 710 as two passing by chattering or the like. Alternatively, the subtraction sensor 604S fails to detect the passage of the in-flight ball 710. Alternatively, this is a case where the power is turned on while the in-flight ball 710 exists in the game area 124. On the other hand, the following causes are caused for the second abnormal state other than the illegal act. For example, the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the passage of one in-flight ball 710 as two passages by chattering or the like. Alternatively, at least one of the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K fails to detect the passage of the in-flight ball 710. Even in these cases (abnormalities other than fraud), the ball number control unit 800 reports an error as an abnormality.

  In the case of detecting the number of discharged balls, instead of the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K, for example, one discharging detection sensor is provided in the game medium internal path 700J, and when passing through this, one ball is discharged. The structure which determines with having existed may be sufficient. Further, the detection of the thrown ball is not limited to the subtraction sensor 604S, but a sensor of the game medium path 610 (for example, a ball polishing device inlet sensor of the ball polishing device 612, a lifting device inlet sensor of the lifting device 614, a ball feeding device 616). The numerical value of the abnormality determination condition is an example, and is not limited to the above value.

  The number-of-balls control unit 600 compares the detection result of the winning detection sensor 604S or the non-winning detection sensor 604K with the result of winning determination (prize ball command) transmitted from the main control unit 300, and the in ball and the out ball May be monitored. As a result, not only the abnormality of the number of in-flight balls 710 inserted into the game area 124 and the number of discharges, but also whether or not the player has passed the winning detection sensor 604S when winning (if not winning, the non-winning detection sensor 604K). It is also possible to determine whether or not

Further, the ball number control unit 600 may be configured to manage the number of in-flight balls 710 necessary for circulation by an appropriate amount sensor, a full tank sensor, or the like included in the various sensors 604, and notify an error when excessive or insufficient.
<< Prize ball control >>

  The pachinko machine 100 determines the winning determination for each winning opening and the like by the ball detection sensor 320B of the main control unit 300 and the number of winning balls in the case of winning, and the ball detection sensor 604B of the ball number control unit 600 goes to the game area 124. Judgment (discharge) and discharge of the in-flight ball 710 is performed. In the following description of the prize ball control, the fact that one in-flight ball 710 is thrown into the game area 124, that is, the passage of the in-flight ball 710 is detected by the subtraction sensor 604Z and stored in the game ball number storage area. It is assumed that “1” is subtracted from the number of game balls.

  In the ball number control unit 600, when the winning detection sensor 604S detects that the in-flight ball 710 is discharged from the gaming area 124, the winning ball is awarded based on the consumption of one gaming ball. That is, in this case, the number of prize balls included in the prize ball command is added to the number of game balls based on the prize ball number information (prize ball command) transmitted by the main control unit 300.

  The winning ball command transmitted by the main control unit 300 may be transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 before the detection of the winning detection sensor 604S in the ball number control unit 600, or the ball number control unit 600. May be transmitted after detection of the winning detection sensor 604S. For example, in the latter case, the ball number control unit 600 informs the main control unit 300 of the winning ball number information (when the pass detection of the in-flight ball 710 is detected by the winning detection sensor 604S in the ball number control unit 600) A signal for requesting a prize ball command) can be transmitted. In addition, when receiving a prize ball command from the main control unit 300, the ball number control unit 600 displays the number of game balls after the addition of the prize ball number on the ball number display unit 640.

  On the other hand, if the in-game ball 710 has not won a prize (such as when the non-winning detection sensor 604K detects the passage of the in-vehicle ball 710), it is determined that one game ball is consumed, and the game ball Keep the number (no prize balls are added).

  For example, when there is a winning ball due to winning in the periodic interrupt processing of the main control unit 300 or the ball number control unit 600, the ball number control unit 600 adds the number of winning balls to the number of gaming balls and determines the number of gaming balls. Update.

  When the result of the winning determination in the main control unit 300 and the result of the ball detection sensor 604B in the ball number control unit 600 do not match, the ball number control unit 600 reports an error in the number of winnings. The number of winnings becomes abnormal when, for example, the number of winnings determined by the main control unit 300 is different from the number of passing detected by the winning detection sensor 604S in a predetermined period.

In addition to the above, in the ball number control unit 600, as an error of the in-flight ball 710, for example, the number of game balls becomes an abnormal value (a number exceeding the assumed range), and the subtraction sensor 604Z has a ball A subtraction sensor error when clogging is detected, a winning sensor error when the winning detection sensor 604S or the non-winning detection sensor 604K detects a ball clogging, and the like are detected and notified.
<< ball rental control >>

  When the IC card is inserted into the card slot 626 of the management device 620, the management device 620 provides information on the number of game balls that can be lent (ball count update command) based on the balance stored in the IC card. Transmit to the UI unit 680. When the ball number UI unit 680 illuminates the ball lending button 140 and the ball lending button 140 of the input operation unit 654 is touched by the player based on this, the ball lending operation information is received from the ball number UI unit 680 by the management device 620. Sent to. The ball number control unit 600 that has received the number information (ball lending request information) of the number of balls lent transmitted from the management device 620 based on the ball lending operation information adds the number of balls lent to the number of game balls. The number of game balls is updated as follows, for example. When the operation of the ball lending button 140 is detected, the ball number control unit 600 stores the number of balls lending in a lending number storage area provided in the RAM (when there are multiple operations, cumulative addition). In the periodic interruption process of the main control unit 300 or the ball number control unit 600, the ball number control unit 600 adds the number of lent balls stored in the lent number storage area to the number of game balls, and updates the number of game balls. To do.

The ball number control unit 600 displays the updated number of game balls on the ball number display unit 640. In addition, the balance information changed by the rental ball is received from the management device 620 and displayed on the image display unit 656. Furthermore, when an addition request for the number of rented balls is received other than when an IC card is being inserted into the management device 620, an illegal addition error is detected.
<< Replay control >>

  When the IC card is inserted into the card insertion slot 626 of the management device 620, the management device 620 transmits the stored ball information (ball number update command) stored in the IC card to the ball number UI unit 680. The ball number update command includes, for example, information on permission to replay due to the presence of a predetermined amount of balls, and the ball number UI unit 680 that has received the replay button 146 displays the replay button 146 brightly, for example. Based on this, when the replay button 146 of the input operation unit 654 is touched by the player, the replay operation information is transmitted from the ball number UI unit 680 to the management device 620. Upon receiving the replay ball number information transmitted from the management device 620 based on the replay operation information, the ball number control unit 600 adds the replay ball number to the game ball number. The number of game balls is updated as follows, for example. When the operation of the replay button 146 is detected, the ball number control unit 600 stores the replay ball number in a replay ball number storage area provided in the RAM (when there are multiple operations, cumulative addition is performed). In the periodic interrupt process of the main control unit 300 or the ball number control unit 600, the ball number control unit 600 adds the replay ball number stored in the replay ball number storage area to the game ball number, Update.

The ball number control unit 600 displays the updated number of game balls on the ball number display unit 640. In addition, the storage information changed by the replay operation is received from the management device 620 and displayed on the image display unit 656. Further, when an addition request for the number of replay balls is received other than when an IC card is being inserted into the management device 620, an illegal addition error is detected.
<< Counting control >>

  When the count button 652 is pressed, the ball number control unit 600 detects this, and subtracts a predetermined count ball number corresponding to one count button 652 press from the game ball number storage area. The number of game balls is updated as follows, for example. When the operation of the count button 652 is detected, the ball count control unit 600 stores the count ball count in a count ball count storage area provided in the RAM (when there are multiple operations, cumulative addition is performed). In the periodic interrupt process of the main control unit 300 or the ball number control unit 600, the ball number control unit 600 subtracts the count ball number stored in the count ball number storage area from the game ball number and updates the game ball number. To do. In addition, the ball number control unit 600 transmits count information to the management device 620. The management device 620 stores the number of stored balls in the IC card based on the received count information. In addition, the ball number control unit 600 displays the number of game balls after subtraction on the ball number display unit 640.

The ball number control unit 600 notifies the management device 620 of the start and end of pressing of the count button 652 as the operation status of the count button 652. In addition, the ball number control unit 600 notifies the management device 620 of a plurality of types of pressing information according to the pressing time (the time from the pressing start to the pressing end) as the operation state of the counting button 652. For example, when the number of counting balls corresponding to one pressing of the counting button 652 is determined to be 10 or the like, for example, 20 or 3 times when the number of pressing times is 2 In this case, 30 game balls are transmitted to the management device 620 as the number of counted balls. Alternatively, when the pressing time is within a predetermined time, the number of counting balls is 10, and when the pressing time is longer than the predetermined time, 20 or the total number is transmitted to the management device 620 as the counting ball number.
<< Return control >>

When an IC card is inserted into the card slot 626 of the management device 620, when the return button 142 of the input operation unit 654 is touched by the player, the information (return operation information) from the ball UI unit 680 Is transmitted to the management device 620. Receiving this, the management device 620 transmits ball number request information for requesting notification of the number of game balls (or game end request information for requesting the end of the game, the same applies hereinafter) to the ball number control unit 600. Thereby, the ball number control unit 600 detects that the return button 142 is touched. The ball number control unit 600 transmits game ball number information including the number of game balls stored in the game ball number storage area to the management device 620. The management device 620 that has received the game ball number information stores the number of balls stored in the IC card and returns it. When the count button 652 is pressed within a predetermined period after the return button 142 is operated, the ball number control unit 600 sets all the game ball numbers as the count ball number (the count ball number information or the count ball number and The game number information including the number of stored balls) is transmitted to the management device 620. In this case, the management device 620 stores the number of balls stored in the IC card. In addition, the ball number control unit 600 receives information such as the balance information in the IC card and the number of balls stored, and displays the information on the image display unit 640.
<< Control of game media path >>

  The ball number control unit 600 controls the game medium path 610 (the ball polishing device 612, the lifting device 614, the ball feeding device 616) and the launching device 622.

  The ball number control unit 600 controls, for example, a ball polishing motor connected to a polishing relay board (not shown) provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 and detects a ball polishing motor sensor. When the in-machine ball 710 enters from the ball inlet of the housing (cassette) of the ball polishing device 612, the in-vehicle ball 710 is detected by the polishing device inlet sensor, and the ball polishing motor is driven. The ball polishing motor is connected to a screw through a gear, and conveys the in-machine ball 710 as the screw rotates. A polishing cloth is enclosed in the cassette, and the polishing cloth is circulated by driving the cassette motor. The in-machine ball 710 is rubbed and polished by the polishing cloth while being conveyed by a screw. The ball polishing motor sensor detects the driving of the ball polishing motor. A cassette sensor is provided to detect whether a cassette is attached.

  The ball number control unit 600 controls, for example, a lifting motor connected to a lifting relay board (not shown) provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 100, and includes a lifting motor sensor and a lifting device inlet sensor. Detect. When the in-flight ball 710 enters from the ball entrance, this is detected by the lift device entrance sensor, and the lift motor is driven. When the lifting motor is driven, the screw rotates through the gear, whereby the in-machine ball 710 is transported and delivered to the ball feeding device 616 from the discharge port.

  The ball number control unit 600 controls the launch of the in-flight ball 710. For example, the ball launch handle 134 is provided with a touch sensor, a launch stop switch, a launch intensity sensor, etc. (not shown). The ball number control unit 600 detects whether or not the player is in contact with the ball launching handle 134 using a touch sensor. When the touch state is not detected, the launch stop switch (not shown) is pressed (when the press is detected by the launch stop sensor), the ball launch handle 134 is not rotated more than a certain angle, When the device 620 is not connected, the launch is stopped. The ball number control unit 600 detects the firing strength (the amount of operation of the ball launching handle 134) with a firing strength sensor. When detecting the touch sensor and the firing intensity sensor, the ball number control unit 600 drives the ball feeding device (ball feeding solenoid) 616 to send out the in-flight ball 710 to the one-ball firing rail 624. When the ball number controller 600 drives the firing solenoid, the launching rod 622a is sucked and rotated, and hits the in-flight ball 710 at its tip. The ball number control unit 600 controls the strength of the firing by changing the suction force of the firing solenoid according to the value of the firing strength of the ball firing handle 134. The ball number control unit 600 detects that the in-flight ball 710 has fired from the launch rail 624 by the subtraction sensor 604Z, subtracts one game ball number from the game ball number storage area, and stores it as a new game ball number.

  As described above, the various sensors 604 connected to the ball number control unit 600 include the above-described ball polishing motor sensor, ball polishing device inlet sensor, cassette sensor, cloth feed motor sensor, lifting motor sensor, lifting device inlet sensor, Information related to the operation result of the ball feeding device entrance sensor and the ball launching handle 134 (launching intensity sensor, touch sensor, firing stop sensor), subtraction sensor 604Z, winning detection sensor 604S and non-winning detection sensor 604K, ball number UI unit 680 A counting button 652, an appropriate amount sensor, a full sensor, and the like.

  In addition to the above, the ball number control unit 600 detects a communication error with the main control unit 300, an error of each sensor in the game medium path 610, and the like, and notifies the board display unit 630 of the error. The board display unit 630 is composed of LEDs or the like provided on a part of the ball number control board on the back side of the game board 200, and notifies the store clerk of various errors by lighting or blinking the LEDs in a predetermined pattern. .

  The input / output signals related to the ball number UI unit 680 may be input / output to / from the interface unit 606 via the ball number control unit 600 and input / output to / from the information input circuit 350. Note that the management device 620 and the information input circuit 350 may be one-way communication from the management device 620 to the information input circuit 350 instead of bidirectional communication.

Further, the ball number control unit 600 may not output information directly to the information input circuit 350, but may output information via the management device 620. The ball number control unit 600 is connected to the night monitoring switch 692. The night monitoring switch 692 will be described later.
<Modification of control unit>

  In addition to the above control unit, the following control unit may be provided. For example, a launch control unit that controls the launch device 622 may be provided, and the ball number control unit 600 may control the launch device 622 via the launch control unit. In this case, the launch control unit controls the launch device 622 by driving a launch solenoid, a launch motor, and the like.

  In addition, a game medium path control unit that controls a device (game medium path unit) constituting at least a part of the game medium path 610 is provided, and the ball number control unit 600 receives the game medium path via the game medium path control unit. You may control the apparatus which comprises a unit. The game medium path unit in this case is one or more or all of the ball polishing device 612, the lifting device 614, the ball feeding device 616, and the launching device 622.

Further, the launch device 622 may include a launch solenoid, launch rod, subtraction sensor 604S, ball feed solenoid, launch relay board, launch intensity sensor, launch stop switch, touch sensor, and the like. The launching device 622 can be connected to the ball outlet of the upper device 614, and the ball feeding device 616 can be omitted.
<Power control unit>

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each device such as each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. To do. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the ball number control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and a predetermined voltage is supplied from the ball number control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 and the night monitoring switch. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. The power supply control unit 660 will be described in detail later.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt, and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  In step S117, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 4 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 including the above-described various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the various sensors 320 are stored in the RAM 308. Each signal is stored in a signal state storage area provided separately. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 8 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While the in-flight ball 710 passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 4 ms is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same in-flight ball 710 has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same in-flight ball 710 has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the in-flight ball 710 starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 316, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, each ball detection sensor 320B (general winning opening sensor 320E, variable winning opening sensor 320G, first special figure starting opening sensor 320J, second special figure starting opening sensor 320H, general opening start opening) Information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the sensor 320T) is information indicating predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal before, presence of the previous detection signal, presence of the current detection signal). ), It is determined that there is a ball entering the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special figure starting opening 232, or the passing of the general drawing starting opening 228. To do. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor 320E that detects a winning at the general winning opening 226, the winning is made to the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent processing is performed. The processing branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with winning a prize to the general winning opening 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information. Note that the winning determination pattern information does not have to be the same for each winning, and may differ depending on the importance of winning determination. For example, the winning determination pattern of the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 is configured by information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times, but the winning determination pattern of the general winning port 226 is for the past two times. It may be configured by information on the presence or absence of the detection signal.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 306 random value and the special figure 307 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value in FIG. 306 and the counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 307 are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 306 display symbol update timer, a special symbol 307 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 are won, the number of times is recorded.

  In step S216, a prize ball number display process is performed. In this prize ball number display process, when there is a prize ball command before transmission in the ball number control part 600 in the main control part 300 (described later in step S219), the number of prize balls scheduled to be transmitted by the prize ball command. (If there is a plurality, the total value thereof) is displayed on the award ball number display section 690 (this will be described later).

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205. If there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is acquired from the register for processing, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 306 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 306 random number value, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 306 random number value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 307 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 307 random number value. Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 307 random number value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step S219, a prize ball command transmission process is performed. If it is determined in step S217 that any of the winning mouths has been won, output schedule information including information on the number of winning balls (for example, information on the number of winning balls, for example) is given to the player. A prize ball command). Note that the output schedule information to be output to the ball number control unit 600 is composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), and power on in bit 6 Information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 for the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 for after encryption processing The number of winning balls is shown. The data size is not limited to this, and may be 2 bytes, for example. An example of serial communication will be described later.

  As will be described later, the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600 by periodic interrupt processing. At that time, the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 perform two-way communication confirmation (communication confirmation inquiry and communication confirmation reply). For example, for each interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, 1 Two prize ball commands are sent. That is, when there are a plurality of winnings during these periods, information on a plurality of winning balls to be transmitted to the main control unit 300 is accumulated.

  In step S220, prize ball number display processing is performed. This prize ball number display process is the same as the process of step S216, but the contents displayed on the prize ball display unit 690 may be updated. Although details will be described later, for example, when there is no new prize between step S216 and this step, at least one prize ball command (number of prize balls) is transmitted in step S219. The number of prize balls displayed on the prize ball number display unit 690 is the number of prize balls of the prize ball command transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 from the number of prize balls displayed on the prize ball number display unit 690 in step S216. The value is obtained by subtracting minutes. Thereby, it may be possible to notify the player that the prize ball has been paid out. The winning ball number display process may be performed only in step S216 or only in this step, for example.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  In the normal state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time elapses (the timing when the value of the general map display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the hit flag is turned on (indicating a win, for example, “1”). If the winning flag is off, the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the winning symbol display mode is set. The 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the display pattern of the off symbol is displayed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 315 (c)) and the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 315 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual game is out of play, as will be described later, the out of figure flag is turned on (indicating out, for example, “1” is set, and so on). When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, in step S225, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 306 and the special figure 307 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 307 state update process) for the special figure 307 is performed. In the special figure 307 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 307. For example, in the special figure 307 state update process in the middle of the special figure 307 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 307 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 307 (special figure 307 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S229) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 307 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 307 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 307 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 315 (a) is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Random fluctuation Is off, and the special figure probability variation flag is off, special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H, The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on / off so that the special figure I is in the state when the 1 off flag is on and the special figure I is in the state when the second off flag is on. Turn-off drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the special figure 307 is stopped is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Note that turning on each flag means, for example, setting “1” in each flag. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 307 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 307 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 307 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, in FIG. 307, a predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S229) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the display for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 307 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 307 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 307 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 307 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The special area 307 is in operation in the setting area and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 will start. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special-purpose 307 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S229) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 307 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 307 standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the opening / closing drive solenoid 332 of the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 is opened) (until a winning of an in-flight ball 710 having a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234). A signal to be held is output, and information indicating an opening period is set in a storage area of a door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S229) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 307 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the closing period is indicated in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S229) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Moreover, in the special figure 307 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the jackpot game, a large number of the second special figure start port 232 will have a predetermined number before the in-flight ball 710 enters the ball during the jackpot game. In order to solve this problem, there is a problem that the number of in-flight balls 710 that can be acquired during the jackpot increases and the number of in-flight balls 710 increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S229) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 307 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 307 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 307 variable game is out of the way, the off-line flag is turned on (“1” is set) as will be described later. When the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 307 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 307 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 307 inactive state is set. In the special figure 307 state update process when the special figure 307 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, a special figure state update process (special figure 306 state update process) for the special figure 306 is performed. In the special figure 306 state update process, each process described in the special figure 307 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 306. Each process performed in the special figure 306 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 307” in the contents described in the special figure 307 state update process is replaced with “special figure 306”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 307 state update process and the special figure 306 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 306 and special figure 307 is performed in step S227. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 307 related lottery process) for the special figure 307 is performed first, and then the special figure related lottery process (special figure 306 related lottery process) for the special figure 306 is performed. With regard to these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 307-related lottery process before the special figure 306-related lottery process. Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 307 variable game is changing first, the special figure 306 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S229, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 306 related lottery process and the special figure 307 related to the command data stored in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 306 or special figure 307) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  Further, the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 includes information on the number of winning balls when winning a winning opening or the like and information on detecting fraud. The fraud detected by the main control unit 300 includes a magnet error when abnormal magnetism is detected, a radio wave error when abnormal radio waves are detected, and an irregularity when the in-flight ball 710 wins the variable prize opening 234 except for a big hit. It is a prize error. Note that the command transmission of the main control unit 300 is executed at regular intervals.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S231, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S233, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, the presence / absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and when an error is detected, it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Device information indicating the presence or absence of the error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information (prize ball command) set in the prize ball command transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S235, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S241, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S239.

  In step S239, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S241, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.
<Processing of first sub-control unit>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

If it is detected in step S311 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S313, when there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the movable body (for example, the shielding device 246) in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of second sub-control unit>

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Processing of the ball number control unit>

  Next, processing executed by the CPU of the ball number control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the ball number control unit 600, and FIG. 2B is a flowchart of command reception interruption of the ball number control unit 600.

  The ball number control unit 600 is provided with a reset signal output circuit that outputs a reset signal when the power is turned on. Upon receiving this reset signal, the CPU of the ball number control unit 600 starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM.

  In step S1001, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU.

  In step S1003, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit supplies from the power management unit 650 to the ball number control unit 600 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), step S1003 is repeatedly executed. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), step S1003 is performed. The process proceeds to S1005.

  In step S1005, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, settings for permitting writing to the RAM, initial settings for the I / O port, and the like are performed.

  In step S1007, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption). If the state before power interruption does not return (when the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state), step S1011 is determined. If the process returns to the state before the power interruption, the process proceeds to step S1009.

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the operation unit provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicating that there is an operation), that is, It is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S1011 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM is read, and whether the power status information is information indicating suspend. Determine whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S1011 to set the pachinko machine 100 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM is stored. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is 0 (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S1009 to return to the state before the power interruption. If the checksum result is other than 0 (checksum) If the result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S1011 in order to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1009, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, initialization of the RAM storage area to be cleared upon power recovery (the command buffer for storing commands, the storage area excluding error status for storing error status, etc.) is initialized. Etc.

  In step S1011, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM, and the like are performed.

  In step S1013, initial setting 3 is performed. In the initial setting 3, an interrupt permission is set.

  In step S1015, it is determined whether there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main control unit 300. If there is unanalyzed data, command analysis processing is performed in step S1017, and there is no unanalyzed data. Then, the process proceeds to step S1019.

  In step S1019, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. When the low voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S1015, and the low voltage signal is on. In the case of detecting a power shutdown, the process proceeds to step S1021.

  In step S1021, power interruption processing is performed. In the power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Further, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0 and stored in a checksum calculation numerical storage area. The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-mentioned numerical storage area for checksum calculation, and written to the RAM. Perform prohibited settings.

  In step S1023, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. When the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S1023 is repeatedly executed to turn off the low voltage signal. When the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process returns to step S1001 to start the main process from the beginning.

Next, a command reception interrupt of the ball number control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt is a process executed when the ball number control unit 600 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.
<Ball count control unit interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the ball number control unit interrupt process executed by the CPU of the ball number control unit 600 will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the ball number control unit interrupt.

  The ball number control unit 600 includes a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). With this timer interrupt, the ball number control unit interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle. Start.

  In step S1201, port input processing is performed. In this port input processing, the value of the I / O port is acquired, the state of the input port (signal level and edge state) is updated, and the state of various sensors 604 is detected. Specifically, various signal states input from the management device 620 via the interface unit 606, signals input from the ball polishing device 612, the lifting device 614, the ball feeding device 616, etc. (states of the various sensors 604), subtraction The signal input from the sensor 604Z, the winning detection sensor 604S, the non-winning detection sensor 604K, the signal input from the RWM clear switch 180, the signal input from the error release switch 168, the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 are connected. The status of the main control connection confirmation signal and the like are acquired. For example, an input signal provided with a flag such as “1” when the signal is detected and “0” when the signal is not detected corresponding to each signal. Store in the information storage area.

  In addition, a signal input by pressing the count button 652 is acquired, and when the signal is detected, “1” is set in the input signal information storage area for the count button 652 and the count ball number is stored.

  In this step, it is detected that the in-flight ball 710 has passed through the ball detection sensor 604B (the subtraction sensor 604Z, the winning detection sensor 604S, and the non-winning detection sensor 604K) for entering and discharging into the game area 124. In this case, the signal detection of the sphere detection sensor 604B is also performed by the method described in step S205 of the main control unit timer interrupt process (FIG. 318). That is, it is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor 604B matches the winning determination pattern information, and “1” is set in the input signal information storage area corresponding to the match. Set. Note that the winning determination pattern information may be constituted by information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past two times, or may be different for each ball detection sensor 604B (depending on the importance of determination).

  In step S1203, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated, including timers for measuring the turning on / off time of the award ball notification LED, motor driving / non-driving time, and the like.

  In step S1204, serial command management processing is performed. This will be described later.

  In step S1205, error management processing is performed. In this error management process, it is determined whether various errors have occurred or not, and information about the error is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S1207, an error release switch monitoring process is performed. That is, when the error release switch 168 is pressed and the error flag is set based on the state of the error release switch 168 acquired in the port input process of step S1201, the error flag is cleared.

  In step S1209, management device communication processing is performed. In this management device communication processing, bidirectional communication is performed with the management device 620 based on the state of various signals input from the management device 620 via the interface unit 606. For example, from the ball number control unit 600 to the management device 620. The game ball number information is transmitted, and the ball rental request information is transmitted from the management device 620 to the ball number control unit 600. When receiving the ball lending request information from the management device 620, the ball number control unit 600 adds the number of balls to the numerical value stored in the ball lending number storage area of the RAM.

  In step S1211, a game ball number setting process is performed. In this game ball number setting process, information indicating random number clock abnormality is read from the above-described error status storage area, and if any error has not occurred, the game ball number setting process is performed. If any error has occurred, the information on the number of prize balls (prize ball command) from the main control unit 300, the ball lending request information from the management device 620, and the ball number request information should not be accepted. Yes.

  In the game ball number setting process, the ball detection sensor 604B (subtraction sensor 604Z, winning detection sensor 604S, non-winning detection sensor 604K) detected in the above-described port input process (step S1201), and the main controller timer interrupted winning ball command Prize ball command transmitted from the main control unit 300 in the transmission processing step (step S219 in FIG. 318), the number of counted balls stored in the counted number of balls storage area, and the number of balls lent stored in the number of lent balls storage area The game ball number is updated according to the replay ball number stored in the replay ball number storage area, the in ball number stored in the in ball number storage area, and the like, which will be described later.

  In step S1213, LED processing is performed. In this LED processing, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, an LED for notifying the player that an error has occurred (for example, an LED disposed on the upper part of the pachinko machine 100, a game The substrate display unit 630 provided on the back side of the panel 200 is turned on, and when the error is resolved, the LED is turned off. For example, when the winning number abnormality error flag is set, the LED for notifying the player that a winning number abnormality error has occurred is turned on and the winning number abnormality error flag is cleared. The LED is turned off.

In step S1215, signal output management processing is performed. In this signal output management process, for example, an EXS signal is output to the management device 620 based on output information stored in an output signal storage area described later. Specifically, when output information of “request acknowledged” is stored in the output signal storage area, a Low signal is output as the EXS signal, and output information of “rental completion” is stored in the output signal storage area If it is, a Hi signal is output as the EXS signal. Further, the game information stored in the RAM is output to an information input circuit 652 that is separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.
<Game ball number setting process>

  Next, the game ball number setting process will be described. The number of game balls is calculated by, for example, the following formula 1.

    Number of game balls after update = number of game balls before update + number of rented balls + number of winning balls + number of replayed balls−number of in-balls−number of counted balls (Formula 1)

  The game ball number control unit 600 stores a rented ball number storage area, a prize ball number storage area, an in-ball number storage area, a counted ball number storage area, and a replay ball number storage area in the RAM of the number ball number control unit 600. Provided. The number of game balls before update is a numerical value (number of game balls) stored in the game ball number storage area before update.

  For example, when the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710 in step S1201, the flag “1 (ON)” is set in the input signal information storage area for the subtraction sensor 604Z. In the game ball number setting process, this flag is determined. When the flag is on, the value stored in the in-ball number storage area is read, 1 is added, and the original in-ball number storage area is stored.

  For example, when the winning detection sensor 604S detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710 in step S1201, the flag “1 (ON)” is set in the input signal information storage area for the winning detection sensor 604S. In the game ball number setting process, when this flag is determined and turned on, the value stored in the prize ball number storage area is read, and the number of prize balls of the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 is added to the original ball number. Is stored in the award ball number storage area.

  For example, in step S1201, when the pressing of the counting button 652 is detected, “1 (on)” is set in the input signal information storage area for the counting button 652, and the counting ball number is stored. In the game ball number setting process, when this flag is determined and turned on, the numerical value stored in the count ball number storage area is read, and the count ball number is added and stored in the original count ball number storage area.

  When the ball lending button 140 is pressed, for example, in the IU communication process in step S1209, the number of lent balls is added to the number of lent balls storage area. When the replay button 146 is pressed, for example, in the IU communication processing in step S1209, the numerical value stored in the replay number ball storage area is read, and the replay ball number is added to the original replay number. It is stored in the play ball number storage area.

  Then, using the numerical values stored in the rented ball number storage area, the winning ball number storage area, the in-ball number storage area, the counted ball number storage area, the replay ball number storage area, and the game ball number storage area, The updated number of game balls is calculated and stored in the original game ball number storage area, thereby updating the number of game balls. Further, the number of game balls (after update) in the game ball number storage area is displayed on the ball number display unit 640.

  For example, immediately after the in-flight ball 710 is fired, “1” is stored only in the in-ball number storage area when the ball UI unit 680 is not operated and no winning opening is awarded. In addition, the value stored in the number-of-balls storage area, the number of winning balls storage area, the number of counted balls storage area, and the number of replayed balls stored is “0”. When the number of game balls is updated in this state, 1 is subtracted from the number of game balls before update, and the number of game balls after update is set in the game ball number storage area and displayed on the ball number display unit 640. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the number of game balls that can be fired has decreased by one by firing one in-flight ball 710.

  After the number of game balls is updated, the number of rented balls, the number of winning balls, the number of in-balls, the number of counting balls, the number of the most played balls, and the subtraction sensor 604Z set in step S1201. "0" is set in each of the input signal information storage area for use, the input signal information storage area for the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K, and the input signal information storage area for the counting button 652 (the flag is turned off). To do.

  As for the number of winning balls, for example, a plurality of winning ball storage areas may be prepared, and a plurality of input signal information storage areas for the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K may be prepared. In one prize ball number storage area, the number of prize balls based on one prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 is stored, and a plurality of prize balls are stored in an accumulated manner. Further, a flag is set in the input signal information storage area every time it is detected by the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K. The flags are stored in an accumulative manner, for example, “ON” when detected by the winning detection sensor 604S and “OFF” when detected by the non-winning detection sensor 604K. Then, in the game ball number setting process, these are sequentially compared, and when the flag of the input signal information storage area is “ON”, the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage area is acquired and calculated according to Equation 1. It may be.

  Even if the number of balls in the area is zero, the ball number control unit 600 determines that the ball number control unit 600 is a game ball when a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600. The number may be updated.

  In addition, even after the prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600, the in-flight ball 710 is detected by the non-winning detection sensor 604K, and as a result, the number of balls in the area becomes zero. The ball number control unit 600 may update the number of game balls.

  In addition, even after the prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 and before the in-flight ball 710 is detected by the winning detection sensor 604S, the ball number control unit 600 does not change the number of game balls. May be updated.

  In addition, when the ball number control unit 600 receives a prize ball command for notifying the winning from the main control unit 300 to the start opening (the first special figure start opening 230 and the second special figure start opening 232), Even if the number is zero, the main control unit 300 may be configured to start the symbol variation game corresponding to each starting port.

  In addition, the ball number control unit 600 receives a winning ball command for notifying the winning from the main control unit 300 to the starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), and then a non-winning detection sensor. Even when the in-flight ball 710 is detected at 604K and, as a result, the number of balls in the area becomes zero, the main control unit 300 may be configured to start the symbol variation game corresponding to each start port.

  In addition, the ball number control unit 600 receives a winning ball command for notifying the winning from the main control unit 300 to the starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), and then a winning detection sensor. Even before the in-flight ball 710 is detected in 604S, the main control unit 300 may be configured to start the symbol variation game corresponding to each start port.

  In addition, when the number of balls control unit 600 receives a prize ball command for notifying the winning to the usual figure starting port 228 from the main control unit 300, the number of balls in the area is zero. You may be comprised so that a common figure variable game may be started.

  In addition, the ball number control unit 600 detects the in-flight ball 710 in the non-winning detection sensor 604K after receiving the prize ball command for notifying the winning to the general start port 228 from the main control unit 300, and as a result, Even when the number of balls becomes zero, the main control unit 300 may be configured to start the usual variable game.

  In addition, the ball number control unit 600 receives a prize ball command for notifying the winning to the normal start port 228 from the main control unit 300 and before the in-flight ball 710 is detected by the prize detection sensor 604S. The main control unit 300 may be configured to start a usual variable game.

Furthermore, although the case where the game ball number update process is performed by the ball number control unit interrupt process has been described as an example here, the game ball number update process may be performed by the main control unit interrupt process.
<Communication procedure between pachinko machine and management device>

  The ball number control unit 600 according to the present embodiment provides information regarding the amount of game balls (the number of game balls, the number of counted balls, etc.) to the management device 620 by, for example, pressing the count button of the player or touching the return button 142. When instructed to transmit, there is an in-flight ball 710 in the gaming area 124, and even before all the in-flight balls 710 in the gaming area 124 are discharged (the number of in-area balls is present). However, it is possible to transmit information regarding the amount of game balls to the management device 620.

  The information on the amount of game balls includes game ball number information and counting information. More specifically, the number of game balls, the number of counting balls, the number of possessed balls, the stored balls stored in the IC card or The balance of electronic money stored in an IC card and exchangeable for a game ball. This balance may be the balance read from the IC card or the balance stored in the IC card. The stored ball may be a stored ball read from an IC card or a stored ball stored in an IC card. The IC card may be one that can register the player's personal information as a membership card, for example.

  In addition, when the ball number control unit 600 is instructed to transmit information regarding the amount of game balls to the management device 620 by pressing the count button 652 of the player or touching the return button 142, for example, at that time It is possible to wait for the launching device 622 of the in-flight ball 710 transported to the launching rail 624 to wait, and to transmit information regarding the amount of game balls to the management device 620 after launching.

  In addition, when the player is instructed by the player to send an IC card return designation to the management device 620 (when the return button 142 is touched), the in-flight ball 710 exists in the game area 124. Even so, it is possible to transmit information regarding the amount of game balls to the management device 620.

  Specifically, for example, when the ball number control unit 600 detects that the count button 652 is pressed, at that time, regardless of the presence of the in-flight ball 710 being prepared for launch, Even if the in-flight ball 710 exists in the area 124 (even before the winning of the launched in-flight ball 710 is confirmed), the number of counted balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls, and the updated number of gaming balls and counting balls Information including the number and the like (counting information) is transmitted to the management device 620.

  Although it takes a predetermined time until all the in-flight balls 710 falling on the game area 124 are discharged, this information can be quickly recorded on the IC card. For example, returning the IC card It can be returned promptly when instructed.

  Further, when the ball number control unit 600 detects that the counting button 652 is pressed, for example, the firing of the in-flight ball 710 prepared on the firing rail 624 is completed at that time (or first after the pressing is detected). 1 is subtracted from the number of game balls after the completion of firing, and the number of counted balls is further subtracted. Information (counting information) including the number of game balls and the number of counted balls after subtraction may be transmitted to the management device 620. Also in this case, the ball number control unit 600 transmits the count information to the management device 620 even if the in-flight ball 710 exists in the game area 124 (even before the winning of the launched in-flight ball 710 is confirmed). can do.

  In this way, while the information can be quickly recorded on the IC card, the in-flight ball 710 prepared at the time of detecting the operation is reflected in the number of game balls as consumed, so an accurate game ball You can send a number.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball number control unit 600 detects that the counting button 652 has been operated, the in-flight ball 710 is completely discharged from the game area 124 (by the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K). The count information may be transmitted to the management device 620 after the passage of the in-flight ball 710 is detected. In this case, from the number of game balls at that time, the number of shots of the in-flight ball 710 at the time of operation detection (or immediately after that) and the number of counted balls are subtracted to update the number of game balls, but the in-flight remaining in the game area 124 If there is a ball 710, the counting information may be transmitted without waiting for the winning determination (without adding the number of winning balls). By detecting the number of fired in-flight balls 710 and the number of discharges thereof, it is possible to transmit the count information to the management device 620 after confirming that the circulating in-flight balls 710 are normal.

  In addition, when the ball number control unit 600 detects that the counting button 652 is operated, all the in-flight balls 710 are ejected from the game area 124, and if there is a winning game among these, the game at the time of detecting the operation is performed. Count information after subtracting the number of in-flight balls 710 minutes (one piece) from the number of balls and the number of counted balls, and giving award balls (adding the number of prize balls) corresponding to all winning holes, etc. May be transmitted to the management apparatus 620. In this way, an accurate number of game balls can be transmitted to the management device 620.

  In addition, the ball count UI unit 680 enables transmission of return operation information to the management device 620 even if the in-flight ball 710 remains in the game area 124 when the return button 142 is touched. In addition, when the management device 620 that has received the return operation information transmits the ball number request information to the ball number control unit 600, the ball number control unit 600 has an in-flight ball 710 in preparation for launch at that time. Even if the in-flight ball 710 remains in the game area 124, if there is a prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 at that time, the number of prize balls is added to the number of game balls, and the game ball number information is managed. Transmission to the device 620 is enabled. When in-flight balls 710 are present in the game area 124, it takes a predetermined time until all the in-flight balls 710 are ejected. This makes it possible to quickly return the IC card.

  Alternatively, when the management device 620 that has received the return operation information transmits the ball number request information to the ball number control unit 600, the ball number control unit 600 may start the firing rail 624 at that time (or first after detecting the operation). And wait until the in-flight ball 710 prepared is completed, subtract 1 from the number of game balls after the completion of the launch, and if there is a prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 at that time, the number of prize balls May be added to the number of game balls, and the number of game balls information may be transmitted to the management device 620. In this case, even if the in-flight ball 710 remains in the game area 124 (even before the winning of the launched in-flight ball 710 is confirmed), the game ball number information can be transmitted to the management device 620. In this way, the IC card can be returned promptly, and an accurate number of game balls can be transmitted.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the ball number control unit 600 detects that the ball number UI unit 680 has been operated, the in-flight ball 710 is completely discharged from the game area 124 (winning detection sensor 604S, non-winning detection sensor). After the detection of the passing of the in-flight ball 710 by 604K), the number of game balls may be transmitted to the management device 620. In this case, the subtraction of the last in-flight ball 710 emitted from the number of game balls and If there is a prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 at that time, the number of prize balls is added to update the number of game balls. If there are in-flight balls 710 remaining in the game area 124, It is also possible to transmit the number of game balls without waiting for the winning determination (without adding the number of prize balls). By detecting the number of fired in-flight balls 710 and the number of discharged in-flight balls 710, it is possible to transmit game ball number information to the management device 620 after confirming that the circulating in-flight balls 710 are normal.

  In addition, when the ball number control unit 600 detects that the ball number UI unit 680 is operated, the ball number 710 is subtracted from the number of game balls at the time of detecting the operation, and the ball 710 is played in the game area 124. If there is a prize that has been won from all of these, a prize ball corresponding to all the prize-winning holes or the like is given, and the game ball number information may be transmitted to the management device 620. In this way, an accurate number of game balls can be transmitted to the management device 620.

  In addition, when the count button 652 is operated within a predetermined time after the return button 142 is operated, the ball count control unit 600 counts all the game balls in the game ball count storage area as the count balls. Information (or game ball number information including count information) is notified to the management device 620 (the number of game balls in the game ball number storage area is 0), and the management device 620 stores the number of stored balls, etc. in the IC card, It is good also as a structure which returns an IC card.

  In addition, when the return button 142 is operated after the count button 654 is operated, the ball number control unit 600 calculates the new game ball number obtained by subtracting the count ball number from the current game ball number and the count ball number as the game ball number. Information may be transmitted to the management device 620 as information. The management device 620 returns the IC card after storing the number of counted balls (the number of stored balls) in the game ball number information in the IC card.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which returns another IC card different from the IC card which the player inserted. For example, a predetermined number of game balls is stored in the game ball number storage area of the ball number control unit 600 when a player inserts a first IC card storing a predetermined number of memory balls into the management device 620 and plays a game. When the return of the IC card is designated without pressing the counting button 654 in a state where is stored, a second IC card different from this may be returned. The second IC card may be a new IC card provided in the management device 620, for example, or may be an IC card inserted into the management device 620 separately from the first IC card (after insertion of the first IC card). . The second IC card in this case may be an IC card possessed by a player or an IC card possessed by a third party.

  An example is as follows. The number of memory balls stored in the first IC card in the management device 620 at the start of the game is fifteen. The player touches the ball lending button 140 and receives, for example, 10 ball lending. The number of game balls stored in the game ball number storage area of the ball number control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 is 10 (0 at the start of the game), and the number of storage balls in the IC card is 5. When the player touches the return button 142 without pressing the counting button 652, the first IC card in which five memory balls are stored is returned. In addition to the first IC card, the player has a second IC card that stores 20 memory balls, inserts it into the management device 620, presses the count button 652, Ten counting operations are performed. As a result, the number of storage balls of the second IC card inserted in the management device 620 is thirty. When the player touches the return button 142, the second IC card is returned.

  Further, for example, a first IC card in which a predetermined number of possessed balls is stored is inserted into the management device 620 by the player, a game is played, and a predetermined game ball is stored in the game ball number storage area of the ball number control unit 600. If the return of the IC card is designated without pressing the counting button 654 in the state where the number is stored, the first IC card is returned and another second IC card is returned. It is good also as a structure which memorize | stores and returns the present number of game balls. The second IC card may be a new IC card provided in the management device 620, for example, or may be an IC card inserted into the management device 620 separately from the first IC card (after insertion of the first IC card). . The second IC card in this case may be an IC card possessed by a player or an IC card possessed by a third party.

  An example is as follows. The number of memory balls stored in the first IC card in the management device 620 at the start of the game is fifteen. The player touches the ball lending button 140 and receives, for example, 10 ball lending. The number of game balls stored in the game ball number storage area of the ball number control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 is 10 (0 at the start of the game), and the number of storage balls in the IC card is 5. When the player touches the return button 142 without pressing the counting button 652, the first IC card in which five memory balls are stored is returned. The player presses the counting button 652 without inserting an IC card into the management device 620, and performs, for example, 10 counting operations. Thereby, ten storage balls are memorize | stored in the new 2nd IC card with which the management apparatus 620 is equipped, and the said 2nd IC card is returned.

<Specific example of communication procedure between pachinko machine and management device>

  With reference to FIGS. 323 to 327, a specific example of a communication procedure between the ball number control unit 600 and the ball number UI unit 680 of the pachinko machine 100 and the management device 620 will be described.

  First, FIG. 323 is a sequence chart showing a communication procedure between the pachinko machine 100 and the management device 620 when an IC card is inserted into the management device 620 and a ball lending operation is performed, such as at the start of a game.

  When an IC card charged with electronic money is inserted into the management device 620 (1), the management device 620 calculates the number of game balls (upper limit of the number of rented balls, for example, 500) that can be exchanged for a charge amount (balance). Then, the game ball number is transmitted to the ball number UI unit 680 as a ball number update command (2). Based on the ball number update command, the ball number UI unit 680 displays on the image display unit 656 an image for reporting the number of stored balls and the balance, and brightens operable buttons (ball lending button 140, return button 142, etc.). Prompt the player for input by displaying it. When detecting that the player has touched the ball lending button 140 of the input operation unit 654, for example (3), the number of balls UI unit 680 rents information according to the number of times the ball lending button 140 is pressed or the time it is pressed. (Ball lending operation information) is transmitted to the management device 620 (4). Upon receiving the ball lending operation information, the management device 620 lends the requested number of lending (for example, 100) from the number of stored balls or the balance stored in the IC card (ball lending request information). (5). Upon receiving the ball lending request information, the ball number controller 600 adds the requested number of balls to the number of game balls and displays it on the ball number display unit 640. At the start of the game, the number of game balls in the game ball number storage area of the ball number control unit 600 is initialized, and the number of balls requested by the first ball lending operation is the game ball number of the ball number control unit 600 as the number of game balls. It is stored in the number storage area. The management device 620 transmits various information related to the number of game balls (for example, the number of stored balls and the balance) that has been changed by the ball lending operation as a ball number update command to the ball number UI unit 680 (6). The ball number UI unit 680 displays each information on the image display unit 656 based on the ball number update command.

  FIG. 324 shows a communication procedure between the pachinko machine 100 and the management device 620 when an instruction to transmit information regarding the number of game balls is received from the player to the management device 620 in a state where the IC card is inserted into the management device 620. It is a sequence chart, and shows a case where the information regarding the number of game balls is an IC card return instruction.

  When the pachinko machine 100 receives an IC card return instruction from a player, that is, when the IC card is returned, the pachinko machine 100 determines the number of game balls (game ball number information) in the game ball number storage area of the ball number control unit 600. When an instruction (ball number request information) to be transmitted to the management device 620 is accepted, the game ball number information is transmitted to the management device 620 regardless of the presence of the in-flight ball 710 remaining in the game area 124, and the IC card is returned. Make it possible. Here, as an example, the game ball number information is a delay process that waits for a sufficient time to complete the launch of the in-flight ball 710 prepared on the launch rail 624 when (or immediately after) the return operation is performed. The timing chart in the case of transmitting to the management apparatus 620 after performing is shown.

  The ball number UI unit 680 is configured such that an IC card is inserted into the management device 620 (not shown), and the management device 620 transmits a ball number update command to the ball number UI unit 680 (not shown). When the unit 680 detects that the return button 142 has been touched (1), the return operation information is transmitted to the management device 620 (2), and the management device 620 obtains the latest information on the number of game balls. The number request information is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (3). Here, the ball number request information may be game end request information, and the same applies to the following description. The ball number control unit 600 receives the ball number request information by a delay process using a timer or the like (or first after reception) until the in-flight ball 710 prepared on the launch rail 624 is completed. After the game has determined that a sufficient amount of time has elapsed (for example, the longest time until the fired in-flight ball 710 is ejected from the game area 124), the updated game is obtained by subtracting one shot from the number of game balls. The number of balls is transmitted to the management device 620 as game ball number information (5).

  On the other hand, the ball number control unit 600 can transmit the game ball number information to the management device 620 regardless of the presence or absence of the in-area ball number of the game area 124 (4) (5). Receiving the game ball number information, the management device 620 stores the number of balls stored in the IC card and returns it (6). In addition, the management device 620 transmits information regarding the updated number of game balls to the ball number UI unit 680 as a ball number update command (7). The number-of-balls UI unit 680 displays information regarding the updated number of game balls on the image display unit 656.

  For example, when the return button 142 is operated, the game ball number information is transmitted to the management device 620 after completing the launch of the in-flight ball 710 prepared on the launch rail, and the IC card is returned. If the player does not operate the ball launch handle 134 even though the return button 142 is touched, the IC card may not be returned. In such a case, after the elapse of the longest time that the in-flight ball 710 is fired and discharged from the game area 124, it is considered that the ball has been fired even if there is no actual fire, and the number of game balls is decremented by one. By sending the information to the management device 620, the IC card can be returned.

  FIG. 325 shows the pachinko machine 100 and the management apparatus in the case where an instruction to transmit information related to the number of game balls from the player to the management apparatus 620 is received in a state where the IC card is inserted into the management apparatus 620, as in FIG. 620 is a sequence chart showing a communication procedure of 620, in which the information regarding the number of game balls is a ball lending operation instruction and an IC card return instruction.

  In this case as well, the ball number control unit 600 that has received the ball number request information shows an example in which the game ball number information is transmitted to the management device 620 after the game ball that has been prepared for launching has been launched. The case where the completion is detected by the subtraction sensor 604Z instead of the delay processing shown in FIG. 324 will be described.

  For example, when an IC card is inserted into the management device 620 (1), the management device 620 transmits a ball number update command including information on the number of game balls that can be lent to the ball number UI unit 680 (2). Based on the ball number update command, the number of stored balls and the like are displayed on the image display unit 656, and the ball number UI unit 680 that has received the ball number update command displays a button that can be operated brightly. Prompt for input. When detecting that the player has touched the ball lending button 140 of the input operation unit 654 (3), the ball number UI unit 680 detects ball lending operation information including information on the number of balls lending corresponding to the ball lending button 140. Is transmitted to the management apparatus 620 (4). The management device 620 that has received the ball lending operation information transmits ball lending request information including information on the number of balls lending to the ball number control unit 600 (5). The ball number control unit 600 that has received the ball lending request information adds the number of balls lending to the number of game balls. In addition, the management device 620 transmits information regarding the number of game balls updated by renting a ball to the ball number UI unit 680 as a ball number update command (6).

  For example, when a player who has received a ball rental wants to switch the display image of the ball number UI unit 680 (image display unit 658) to the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the game area 124 at the start of the game, The switch button 144 of the number UI unit 680 is touched. When the ball number control unit 600 detects this (7), for example, the second sub-control unit 500 and the management device 620 control the display device switching unit 670 to switch the image of the image display unit 658.

  When the player starts playing and the ball launch handle 134 is operated, the in-flight ball 710 is launched into the game area. This is detected by the subtraction sensor 604Z (8), and the game is continued thereafter. When the ball UI unit 680 detects that the player touches the return button 142 during the game (9), the ball UI unit 680 sends an instruction (return operation information) to return the IC card to the management device 620. (10). The management device 620 that has received the return operation information transmits the ball number request information to the ball number control unit 600 (11). Upon receiving the ball number request information, the ball number control unit 600 waits for the launch of the in-flight ball 710 prepared on the launch rail 624 (or first prepared on the launch rail 624 after that). That is, the ball number controller 600 detects the launch of one in-flight ball 710 that is ready for launch (detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710 by the subtraction sensor 604Z). (12) 1 from the number of game balls The number of game balls is subtracted and the updated number of game balls is transmitted to the management device 620 as game ball number information (13). On the other hand, the ball number control unit 600 can transmit the game ball number information to the management device 620 regardless of the presence or absence of the number of balls in the area. Receiving the game ball number information, the management device 620 stores the number of balls stored in the IC card and returns it (14). In addition, the management device 620 transmits information regarding the updated number of game balls to the ball number UI unit 680 as a ball number update command (15). The number-of-balls UI unit 680 displays information regarding the updated number of game balls on the image display unit 656.

  FIG. 326 shows the pachinko machine 100 and the management apparatus 620 when an IC card is inserted into the management apparatus 620 and a command (for example, pressing of the counting button 652) for transmitting information related to the number of game balls from the player is received to the management apparatus 620 is received. It is a sequence chart which shows the communication procedure.

  Even if the pachinko machine 100 accepts the pressing of the counting button 652 as a command related to the number of game balls transmitted from the player to the management device 620, the pachinko machine 100 does not depend on the presence of the number of balls in the area or the presence of the ball 710 waiting for launch. First, information related to the number of game balls can be transmitted to the management device 620.

  Specifically, when the IC card is inserted into the management device 620 and the game is started, for example, when the ball number control unit 600 detects pressing of the counting button 652 (1), the number of pressing of the counting button 652 And the number of counting balls corresponding to the pressing time is transmitted to the management device 620 as counting information (2). At this time, the ball number control unit 600 subtracts the counted ball number from the number of game balls regardless of the presence of the in-flight ball 710 remaining in the game area 124, and obtains count information including the counted ball number and the number of game balls after subtraction. It transmits to the management apparatus 620. The management device 620 that has received the count information stores the number of stored balls, the balance, and the like in the IC card, and transmits information regarding the updated number of game balls to the ball number UI unit 680 as a ball number update command (3). The number-of-balls UI unit 680 displays information regarding the updated number of game balls on the image display unit 656.

  FIG. 327 is a sequence chart illustrating a communication procedure between the pachinko machine 100 and the management apparatus 620 for explaining another mode when the counting button 652 is pressed.

  When transmitting the count information to the management device 620, the ball number control unit 600 waits until the in-flight ball 710 prepared on the launch rail 624 is completely fired when the count button 652 is operated (first after the operation). It may be transmitted later.

  For example, when the IC card is inserted into the management device 620 (1), the management device 620 transmits a ball number update command to the ball number UI unit 680 (2). The number of stored balls is displayed on the image display unit 656 based on the ball number update command, and the ball number UI unit 680 that has received the ball number update command displays the operable buttons brightly to input to the player. Prompt. When detecting that the player has touched the ball lending button 140 of the input operation unit 654 (3), the ball number UI unit 680 transmits ball lending operation information to the management device 620 (4). The management device 620 that has received the ball lending operation information transmits the ball lending request information to the ball number control unit 600 (5). Upon receiving this, the ball number control unit 600 adds the number of rented balls to the number of game balls. The management device 620 transmits information regarding the number of game balls after the addition to the ball number UI unit 680 as a ball number update command (6). The player who has received the rented ball, for example, presses the switch button 144 of the input operation unit 654 (7) at the start of the game, and displays an image to be displayed on the image display unit 656 as a display image on the decorative symbol display device 208. Switch to the same image as. When the player operates the ball launch button 134, the in-flight ball 710 is launched into the game area 124, which is detected by the subtraction sensor 604Z (8), and the game is performed thereafter.

  When the ball number control unit 600 detects that the count button 652 has been operated during the game (9), the ball number control unit 600 subtracts the count ball number from the game ball number, and this information is managed by the management device 620. Here, after the count button 652 is operated, the in-flight ball 710 is awaited to be launched, and information such as the number of counted balls is transmitted to the management device 620.

  In other words, the firing of the in-flight ball 710 that is prepared on the firing rail 624 when it is detected that the counting button 652 is operated, or is first prepared after the detection of the operation is subtracted. After being detected by the sensor 604Z, the number of game balls (one) launched from the number of game balls is subtracted from the number of counted balls, and the management device 620 uses the number of game balls and the number of counted balls after the subtraction as game ball number information. (11). The management device 620 stores the number of stored balls in the IC card.

  Alternatively, when it is detected that the counting button 652 has been operated, a sufficient time until the firing of the in-flight ball 710 prepared on the firing rail 624 is completed (for example, the fired in-flight ball 710 is removed from the gaming area 124). After determining that the longest time until discharge has elapsed (after performing a delay process using a timer or the like), the number of in-flight balls 710 (1) fired from the number of game balls in the game ball number storage area The number of counted balls may be subtracted, and the number of game balls after the subtraction and the number of game balls including the counted number of balls may be transmitted (11) to the management device 620.

  Receiving the game ball number information, the management device 620 transmits information regarding the updated game ball number to the ball number UI unit 680 as a ball number update command. On the other hand, the ball number control unit 600 can transmit the game ball number information to the management device 620 regardless of the presence or absence of remaining balls in the game area 124 (10).

Although not shown, in FIG. 325 or FIG. 327, the ball number controller 600 indicates that the in-flight ball 710 has been completely discharged from the game area 124 (after being detected by the winning detection sensor 604S and the non-winning detection sensor 604K). The count information may be transmitted to the management device 620 after the detection. Further, when it is detected that all the in-flight balls 710 have been ejected from the game area 124 and there has been a prize, awarding of the prize balls corresponding to all the prize-winning ports and the like (adding the number of prize balls to the number of game balls) ), The count ball number may be subtracted from the game ball number, and the count information may be transmitted to the management device 620.
<Display image switching process>

  Next, switching of images displayed on the image display unit 656 of the ball count UI unit 680 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 328 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the pachinko machine 100 in a normal state in which information in the IC card is displayed on the image display unit 656, FIG. 328 (a) is a front view, and FIG. 328 (b) is a diagram. 4 is an example of a display image of an image display unit 656.

  Referring to FIG. 5A, in the decoration display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in the game, for example, in the effect display area 208d, the first sub-control unit 400 generated according to the state of the game. The images (for example, background images and effect images) 822 are displayed.

  On the other hand, in the ball count UI unit 680, the switch button 144, the return button 142, the ball lending button 140, and the like are displayed on the touch panel (input operation unit 654), and the image display unit 656 generates the first generated by the management device 620. Two images 820a and 820b are displayed. The second images 820a and 820b are images (information notification images) for notifying information about game balls such as stored balls and balances, for example. When the switch button 144 is pressed in this state, the image displayed on the image display unit 656 can be switched to the first image 822.

  329 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the pachinko machine 100 after switching, FIG. 329 (a) is a front view, and FIG. 329 (b) is an example of a display image of the ball count UI unit 680.

  When the switch button 144 is pressed, for example, the management device 620 and the second sub-control unit 500 control the switching circuit of the display device switching unit 670, and the second generated by the management device 620 and received from the management device 620. Instead of the images 820a and 820b, the image is switched to the first image generated by the first sub-control unit 400 and received from the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, the second image is also displayed together with the first image.

  More specifically, the image display unit 656 of the ball count UI unit 680 is normally managed (just after the game is started) by a process similar to the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 319 (d). Second images 820 a and 820 b for notifying information on the storage balls and balance transmitted from the device 620 are generated by, for example, the image control unit of the management device 620 and displayed on the image display unit 656.

  In this case, when the switch button 144 is pressed, the switching circuit of the display device switching unit 670 stores the image data transferred (generated) in the process of step S601 (image transfer instruction) in FIG. Data of the first image 822 generated by the first sub-control unit 400 for display on the decorative symbol display device 208 from the data of the second images 820a and 820b for reporting the balance and the balance (for example, the background image and Switch to effect image data). Thereby, the same first image 822 as the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the image display unit 656. By doing in this way, various productions are possible and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  The management device 620 may switch the image by controlling the switching circuit of the display device switching unit 670, and the management device 620 and the display device switching unit 670 switch the image. The display device switching unit 670 may switch images. In addition, the second image may be an image generated by the second sub control unit 500.

  Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 5B, the information display image such as the input operation unit 654, the stored ball, and the balance may be displayed by changing the arrangement.

  FIG. 330 is a diagram showing another form of the image display unit 656 after switching. The image display unit 656 after switching may be larger than the display area (for example, the effect display area 208d) of the decorative symbol display device 208 and may be displayed in a wide range. In addition, the second images 280a and 280b, which are information notification images, and a part of the input operation unit 654 are displayed at the same time as the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed every time the switch button 144 is touched. The information notification image and the input operation unit 654 may be switched.

  Moreover, you may display other related images instead of the same image as the decorative design display apparatus 208. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, an image prepared for the switching image may be displayed instead of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  For example, the display device switching unit 670 transmits the information A (for example, operation of the replay button 146) input from the input operation unit 654 to both the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 and the control unit 620a of the management device 620. To do. When the display device switching unit 670 displays the first image 822 (for example, effect image) generated by the first sub-control unit 400 on the image display device 565 of the ball number UI unit 680, the control unit Processing using information A (for example, display of a game image) is performed. On the other hand, when the display device switching unit 670 displays the second images 820a and 820b (for example, information notification images) generated by the management device 620 on the image display device 565, processing using the information A It is good also as a structure which ignores.

  Further, when the display device switching unit 670 transmits the information A (for example, operation of the counting button 652) to both the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 and the control unit 620a of the management device 620, the display device switching is performed. The unit 670 uses either the first image 822 (for example, effect image) generated by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second image 820a, 820b (for example, information notification image) generated by the management device 620 as a sphere. Regardless of whether or not the image is displayed on the image display device 565 of the number UI unit 680, processing using the control unit and the information A may be performed.

  Alternatively, the display device switching unit 670 may transmit the information A (for example, operation of the switching button 144) input from the input operation unit 654 to either the pachinko machine 100 or the management device 620. In such a configuration, the display device switching unit 670 causes the first image 820 (for example, effect image) generated by the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 to be displayed on the image display device 565 of the ball count UI unit 680. If displayed, information A is transmitted to the control unit. On the other hand, when the display device switching unit 670 displays the second images 820a and 820b (for example, information notification images) generated by the management device 620 on the image display device 565, the information A is managed by the management device 620. It is good also as what is transmitted to.

Furthermore, the display device switching unit 670 displays an image to be displayed on the image display unit 565 of the ball count UI unit 680, for example, any of an image generated by the first sub control unit 400 and an image generated by the management device 620. It is possible to switch between a state in which one of the images is displayed and a state in which any image is displayed.
<Modification of display switching>

  With reference to FIG. 331, another embodiment of display switching will be described. FIG. 331 is a circuit block diagram for explaining a pachinko machine 100 and a management device 620 according to another embodiment of display switching.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the ball number UI unit 680 is bidirectionally connected to the ball number control unit 600 via the interface unit 606, and the pachinko machine 100 includes a frame side display device, for example, on a part of the front frame door 106. The frame side display device 682 is connected to the image control unit (VDP 534, VRAM 536, etc.) of the second sub control unit 500. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the ninth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the ball count UI unit 680 cannot display an image (for example, a background image or an effect image) generated by the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100. For example, the management device 620 Information including image data transmitted from a provided image control unit (VDP, VRAM, etc.) (such as a notification information image generated by the management device 620) can be displayed. On the other hand, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 can display an image (for example, a background image or an effect image) generated by the first sub control unit 400 on the frame side display device 682.

  In this case, the information A (for example, operation of the counting button 652) input from the input operation unit 654 of the ball count UI unit 680 is not transmitted to the pachinko machine 100 but is transmitted to the management device 620.

<Serial communication between main controller and ball controller>

  Hereinafter, serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 332 to 345. Hereinafter, a case where the position of the subtraction sensor 604Z is between the ball feeding device 616 and the launching device 622 as shown in FIG. 312 (b) will be described as an example.

  FIG. 332 is a block diagram illustrating serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 332 (a) is a schematic block diagram of a serial communication circuit, and FIG. ) Is a block diagram illustrating a register relating to serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600. FIG. 332 (c) is a block diagram illustrating the flow of serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600.

  Referring to FIG. 2A, the pachinko machine 100 constitutes a main controller microcomputer 760 mounted on a main board 156 constituting the main controller 300, and a ball number controller 600. It has a sphere number control unit microcomputer 770 mounted on the sphere number control board 170. The main control unit microcomputer 760 and the ball number control unit microcomputer 770 include serial communication circuits 750 and 752, respectively, and can transmit and receive signals (for example, prize ball commands) by serial communication.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 have four-channel (Ch0, Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3) circuits. All channels are functionally independent, and there are channels that can transmit and receive by having a transmitter and a receiver, and channels that can only transmit by having only a transmitter. For serial communication between the main control unit microcomputer 760 and the ball number control unit microcomputer 770, a channel (Ch0) capable of transmission and reception is used. The serial communication circuits 750 and 752 operate in the FIFO mode. 64 bytes for transmission and 8 bytes for reception can be used as a FIFO.

  Referring again to FIG. 5A, the main control unit microcomputer 760 includes, for example, a status register 762, a reception data register 764, a transmission data register 766, and other registers 768 as serial communication registers. In addition, the ball count control microcomputer 770 includes, for example, a status register 772, a reception data register 774, a transmission data register 776, and other registers 778 as serial communication registers.

  For example, when the main control unit microcomputer 760 performs data transmission, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main control unit microcomputer 760 to indicate that “transmission is possible”. In this case, data is set in the transmission data register 766. The serial communication circuit 750 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 766.

  For example, when the ball number control unit microcomputer 770 receives data, the received data is written in the reception data register 774 of the serial communication circuit 752 built in the ball number control unit microcomputer 770. The CPU of the ball number control unit 600 reads the reception data from the reception data register 774 when “reception completion” is made with reference to the status register.

  For example, when the ball number control unit microcomputer 770 performs data transmission, the CPU of the ball number control unit 600 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 752 incorporated in the ball number control unit microcomputer 770 to “transmit”. In the case of “possible”, data is set in the transmission data register 776. The serial communication circuit 752 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 776.

  For example, when the main controller microcomputer 760 receives data, the received data is written into the reception data register 764 of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main controller microcomputer 760. The CPU of the main control unit 300 reads the reception data from the reception data register 764 when “reception is completed” with reference to the status register.

  Further, when transmitting data, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 can detect the transmission state (data transmission completion, etc.) with reference to the status registers 762 and 772 of the serial communication circuits 750 and 752. The serial communication circuits 750 and 752 refer to the status registers 762 and 772 when receiving data, and read data from the reception data registers 764 and 774 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, by referring to the status registers 762 and 772, whether there is data in which noise is detected in the received data, whether there is data including a break code, a framing error, and a parity error, or overrun detection The presence or absence can be confirmed.

  With reference to FIG. 332 (c), the flow of serial communication processing of the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 will be described. First, a first communication confirmation command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 (1). The ball number control unit 600 receives the first communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 (2). Upon receiving the first communication confirmation command, the ball number control unit 600 transmits a second communication confirmation command (a reply command to the first communication confirmation command) to the main control unit 300 (3). The main control unit 300 that has received the second communication confirmation command transmits a prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600 (4).

  Processes (1) to (3) are in a state where communication is being confirmed. In this state, the main control unit 300 does not transmit a prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600. When the process (3) is completed, the communication confirmation is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600. For example, considering the influence of noise and the like, the process (1) is performed a plurality of times, and a communication error state is set when a command indicating completion of communication confirmation of the process (3) is not obtained a predetermined number of times. Even when this communication error occurs, the main control unit 300 does not transmit a prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600. Further, in order to notify an error, a signal is output to a device connected to the outside. Note that signal output to an externally connected device may not be performed.

The process (1) is executed once every predetermined number of interrupt processes, for example, once during the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 25 times (50 times,...). Process (2) and process (3) may be executed by the same interrupt process, or may be executed by different interrupt processes. Further, the control state of the ball number control unit 600 may be transmitted by the same interrupt process as the process (3). The control state of the ball number control unit 600 may be transmitted only when there is a change (for example, when it changes from a normal state to an abnormal state (in the case of an error)). Hereinafter, the flow of these processes will be described for the main control unit 300 side and the ball number control unit 600 side.
<Communication processing in the main control unit>

With reference to FIG. 333, an outline of communication processing in the main control unit 300 will be described. This figure is a flowchart in which processing mainly related to communication with the ball count control unit 600 is extracted from the processing performed in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. FIG. 333 (a) is a flowchart showing a main process flow performed in the winning prize counter updating process (step S215 in FIG. 318). FIG. 333 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command management processing performed in the prize ball command transmission processing (step S219 in FIG. 318), and FIG. 333 (c) shows the flow of serial command reception processing. FIG. 333 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command transmission processing. FIG. 333 (e) is a flowchart showing the flow of the winning ball number display process (step S216 or step S220 in FIG. 318).
<Winning mouth counter update process>

  With reference to FIG. 333 (a), the main processing flow of the winning opening counter updating process will be described.

  In step S1301, based on the detection result of the ball detection sensor 320B, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the winning ports 226, 234 or the starting ports 230, 232, 228. If there is a win, the process proceeds to step S1603, and if not, the process ends.

In step S1303, the number of times (the number of times a prize ball is requested from the ball number control unit 600) is stored when the winning holes 226, 234 and the start holes 230, 232, 228 are won. That is, the value of the winning number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is read into the RAM 308, 1 is added, and the original winning number storage area is set. When a common ball detection sensor 320B is used for a plurality of winning holes (for example, when a common ball detection sensor 320B is provided for a winning hole having the same number of winning balls), each ball is detected. The value of the winning number storage area provided for each sensor 320 is read, and 1 is added to set the original winning number storage area.
<Serial command management processing>

  With reference to FIGS. 333 (b) to 333 (d), serial command management processing performed in the prize ball command transmission processing will be described.

  The outline of the serial command management process will be described with reference to FIG. 333 (b).

  In step S1401, serial command reception processing is performed. In step S1403, serial command transmission processing is performed. As described above, data is transmitted and received by setting data in the built-in registers (the reception data register 764 and the transmission data register 766) of the serial communication circuit 750.

  An overview of serial command reception processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1501, it is determined whether a communication confirmation command is received from the ball number control unit 600. If a communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1503. If not, the process ends. In step S1503, the setting for completing the communication confirmation is performed, and in step S1505, the communication error is canceled.

  With reference to FIG. 333 (d), the outline of the serial command transmission processing will be described.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether a transmission condition for the communication confirmation command is satisfied. If the transmission condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1603. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1611.

  In step S1603, a communication confirmation command is set. In step S1605, setting during communication confirmation is performed.

  In step S1607, it is determined whether or not a communication error condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1609; otherwise, the process ends. In step S1609, a communication error is set.

  In step S1611, it is determined whether or not a condition for sending a prize ball command is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1613, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S1613, data of a predetermined winning opening counter is updated, and in step S1615, a winning ball command is set.

  With reference to FIG. 333 (e), the outline of the winning ball number display process will be described.

  The winning ball number display process displays the number of winning balls on the winning ball number display unit 690 when each winning port is won. That is, in step S1710, based on a predetermined winning opening counter, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is displayed. The prize ball number display unit 690 displays the number of prize balls before the prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600.

  Each process shown in FIG. 333 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 334 to 338.

  First, FIG. 334 is a diagram for explaining the details of the winning opening counter updating process of FIG. 333 (a), FIG. 334 (a) is a reprint of the flowchart of FIG. 333 (a), and FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a winning prize counter provided in the RAM of the main control unit 300. FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 334 (a), when it is determined in step S1301 of the winning opening counter updating process that there is a winning such as a winning opening, data is set in a predetermined winning opening counter in step S1303. For example, as shown in FIG. 334 (b), the winning opening counter is, for example, a 1-byte winning number storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 for each winning opening or for each start opening. This makes it possible to store the number of winnings from 0 to 255 (the number of times a winning has been won). In the drawings to be referred to in the following description, when the winning numbers stored in the winning number storage area are shown, these are binary numbers.

  In the case where a common ball detection sensor 320B is used for a plurality of winning holes, etc., a winning number storage area may be provided for each ball detection sensor 320. For example, in the present embodiment, the general winning ports 226C and 226D having the same number of winning balls are detected by one ball detecting sensor 320E. Therefore, here, a case where one winning number storage area is used as these winning opening counters will be described as an example. Specifically, in the RAM 308, the variable prize opening number-of-wins storage area 780, the first special figure start-out prize number storage area 782, the second special figure start-out prize number storage area 784, and the general prize-winning prize-winning area. A number storage area 786 is provided. If it is determined in step S1301 of FIG. 334 (a) that there is a prize at the variable prize opening 234 (when a prize is detected by the ball detection sensor 320G), the value in the variable prize slot prize storage area is set. 1 is added. Similarly, when a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 (when the winning is detected by the ball detection sensor 320J), 1 is added to the first special figure starting port winning number storage area 782, and the second special figure starting port 230 is obtained. When there is a prize at the start opening 232 (when a prize is detected by the ball detection sensor 320H), 1 is added to the value in the second special figure start opening winning number storage area 784, and the general winning opening 226 (226C, 226C, 1 is added to the winning prize number storage area 786 for the general winning opening when the winning is found in any of 226D (when the winning is detected by the ball detection sensor 320E).

  As will be described in detail later, these winning counters are added to the respective areas every time it is determined that a winning is received, but when the main control unit 300 transmits a winning ball command to the ball number control unit 600. Is subtracted. For example, if there is a prize at the variable prize slot 234 and “1” is stored in the variable prize slot storage area 780, and there is a prize at the variable prize slot 234, the variable prize slot prize number is stored. 1 is added to the value “1” in the area 780 to store “2”. On the other hand, when “1” is stored in the variable prize opening number-of-wins storage area 780 and the corresponding prize ball command is transmitted, the variable prize-out prize number storage area 780 is set to “0”. Updated.

  For example, since the ball detection sensor 320G for detecting the winning of the variable winning opening 234 and the ball detecting sensor 320J for detecting the winning of the first special figure starting opening 230 are provided separately, these are (almost) simultaneously awarded. If detected, data in a plurality of winning number storage areas (variable winning opening winning number storing area 780 and first special figure starting opening winning number storing area 782) may be updated at one time.

  In addition, as described above, when determining whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times coincides with the winning determination pattern information in each of the ball detection sensors 320B, The value in the winning number storage area (for example, the first special figure start port winning number storage area 782) is incremented by one, and the winning number is not changed from "0" to "2" by one update, for example.

  On the other hand, for example, there are a plurality of winning holes having the same number of winning balls (for example, the general winning holes 226 (226C, 226D) of the present embodiment or the second special figure start by being provided on the back side of the game board 200). (For example, when there are a plurality of mouths 232), each has a ball detection sensor 320B. However, when the winning number storage area is common, if there is a winning at almost the same time, the common The value in the winning number storage area may be updated to the total number of winning numbers (for example, the winning number “0” → “2”) at a time.

  FIG. 335 is a diagram for explaining the details of the serial command reception process of the serial command management process shown in FIGS. 333 (b) and (c), and FIG. 335 (a) is a reprint of the flowchart of FIG. 333 (b). FIG. 335 (b) is a detailed flowchart showing the main processing of the serial command reception processing.

  The serial communication circuits 750 and 752 can operate in the FIFO mode as described above, and by setting the communication setting register to a predetermined value (for example, “1”) in the serial command management process shown in FIG. , The FIFO mode is selected.

  Referring to FIG. 335 (b), in the serial command reception process, first, in step S15001, it is determined whether or not a communication confirmation command is received from the ball number control unit 600. If there is reception, the process proceeds to step S15003, and if not, the process proceeds to step S15009.

  In step S15003, various data are initialized when the communication confirmation command is received from the ball number control unit 600. For example, when the serial command status flag indicating whether or not the prize ball command can be transmitted is “0”, it indicates that the prize ball command can be transmitted. When the serial command status flag is “1”, it indicates that the prize ball command cannot be transmitted. Here, “0” is set to the serial command status flag.

  In step S15005, a communication confirmation command transmission counter is initialized. When transmitting a communication confirmation command (first communication confirmation command (see FIG. 332 (c))) from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600, the communication confirmation command transmission counter is, for example, the command continuously several times. This is a counter for causing a communication error when a communication confirmation command (second communication confirmation command) is not transmitted from the ball number control unit 600 even if is transmitted. Here, as an example, “10” is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter in order to make a communication error when the communication confirmation command is not transmitted from the ball number control unit 600 ten times consecutively.

  In step S 15007, the serial command communication error flag is initialized (cancelled). The serial command communication error flag indicates a communication error state in which there is no communication confirmation reply (second communication confirmation command) from the ball number control unit 600. For example, in the case of “1”, the communication error state is indicated. Yes, "0" indicates normal. Here, “0” is set to the serial command communication error flag. In this step, when a communication confirmation command (second communication confirmation command) is received from the ball number control unit 600, the error state is canceled (serial command communication error flag initialization). The release method is not limited to this. For example, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, or after receiving a communication confirmation command (second communication confirmation command) from the number control unit 600 and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed, etc. It is good.

  In step S15009, other serial command reception processing is performed.

  FIG. 336 is a diagram for explaining the serial command transmission processing. FIG. 336 (a) is a detailed flowchart showing the main processing of the serial command transmission processing of the serial command management processing shown in FIG. 333 (d). 336 (b) and (c) are schematic views of the winning prize counter.

  In step S16001, the communication confirmation command transmission timer is updated. The communication confirmation command transmission timer is a timer for managing the transmission timing of the communication confirmation command output from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600. In this example, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission timer. As will be described later, for example, “25” is set as an initial value in the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and the communication confirmation command transmission timer is subtracted by this step every time the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 is executed. When the timer reaches “0”, a communication confirmation command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600.

  In step S16003, the value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer is determined. If the communication confirmation command transmission timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S16005; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S16019.

  In step S16005, an initial value is set in the communication confirmation command transmission timer. In this embodiment, as an example, a communication confirmation command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 at a timing of once every 100 ms. If the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 is executed every 4 ms, for example, a communication confirmation command is transmitted at a timing of 25 interrupt processes. Therefore, in this step, “25” is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer. In step S16001, the communication confirmation command transmission timer is decremented by “1” for each timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, and the communication confirmation command transmission timer becomes “0” (at a timing of once every 100 ms). A confirmation command is sent.

  In step S16007, “1” is set to the serial command status flag. The serial command status indicates whether or not a prize ball command can be sent. If the serial command status flag is set to “1”, the prize ball command is not sent. When “0” is set, a prize ball command transmission is possible.

  In step S16009, a communication confirmation command (first communication confirmation command) is set. When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets a communication confirmation command (first communication confirmation command) in the transmission data register 766 of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the microcomputer 760 for the main control unit, the serial communication circuit 750 transmits the transmission data. The communication confirmation command set in the register 766 is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (ball number control unit microcomputer 770).

  In step S16011, the communication confirmation command transmission counter is updated. In this step, “1” is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission counter.

  In step S16013, the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter is determined. If the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S16015, and if not, the process proceeds to step S16025. This step is a determination process for transmitting a communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 ten times in succession and setting a communication error when a reply communication confirmation command is not transmitted from the ball number control unit 600. It is.

  In step S16015, a communication confirmation command transmission counter is initialized. That is, “10” is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter here.

  In step S16017, a serial command communication error flag is set. The serial command communication error flag is a flag indicating a communication error state in which no communication command is returned from the ball number control unit 600. In this case, “1” is set.

  In step S16019, it is determined whether a winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S16021. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S16025. The prize ball command transmission condition here is that the communication confirmation command transmission timer is other than “0” as a result of the determination in step S 16003, that is, not the timing of transmitting the communication confirmation command, and corresponding to each winning mouth, etc. This is a case where it is determined by the provided ball detection sensor 320B that the in-flight ball 710 has passed. Alternatively, the transmission condition may be satisfied when the value of the winning number storage area is determined in order from the top and data is set in this area (a value other than “0”).

  In step S16021, the data of a predetermined winning opening counter is updated. The value in the winning storage area is determined in order from the top, and if there is a winning in any of the winning openings in step S16019 (the value stored in the winning number storage area corresponding to the winning is other than “0”). In this case, “1” is subtracted from the value and stored in the original winning number storage area.

  In step S16023, a winning ball command set corresponding to the subtracted winning number storage area is set. When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets a prize ball command in the transmission data register 766 of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the microcomputer 760 for the main control unit, the serial communication circuit 750 confirms the communication set in the transmission data register 766. The command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (ball number control unit microcomputer 770).

  In step S16025, other serial command transmission processing is performed.

  This will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 336 (b) and (c). FIG. 336 (b) is an example of values stored in each winning number storage area after the determination in step S16019, and FIG. 336 (c) is stored in each winning number storage area after the data update in step S16021. It is an example of a value.

  First, after the determination in S16019, the value of the least significant bit in the general winning opening winning amount storage area 786 and the first special figure starting opening winning number storage area 782 is “1”, respectively. All are “0” ((b) in the figure). In this case, for example, if the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied in step S16019 due to winning of the first special figure starting port 230, “1” is subtracted from the value of the first special figure starting port winning number storage area 782. That is, the number of winnings in the first special figure starting port 230 is “0”, and the lowest bit of the first special figure starting port winning number storage area 782 is “0” ((c) in the figure).

  The main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command after confirming communication with the ball number control unit 600, and a prize may be generated at each prize opening or the like during that time. In particular, when one winning ball command is transmitted by one interruption of the main control unit 300, the main control unit 300 determines that a winning number is stored in the winning number storage area corresponding to each winning opening and the like. The number of winnings before being transmitted to the number control unit 600 as a winning ball command is accumulated.

  In step S16023, a prize ball command is set. When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets a prize ball command in the transmission data register 766 of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the microcomputer 760 for the main control unit, the serial communication circuit 750 receives the prize ball set in the transmission data register 766. The command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (ball number control unit microcomputer 770).

  As described above, in the serial command transmission process of the present embodiment, when a communication confirmation command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, a prize ball command is not transmitted, and when a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, a communication confirmation is performed. The configuration does not transmit a command. With this configuration, in a predetermined case, even when the player operates the ball launch handle 134, it is possible to delay the timing of launching the in-flight ball 710, which will be described later.

  With reference to FIG. 337, a specific example of the winning number storage area update processing and the winning ball command set processing shown in steps S16021 and S16023 of FIG. 336 will be described.

  FIGS. 337 (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing an example of each winning number storage area. FIG. 337 (a) shows one interrupt of timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300 following FIG. 336 (c). The state of each winning number storage area of the eye is shown, FIG. 10B shows the state of each winning number storage area of the second interrupt of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, and FIG. The state of each winning number storage area at the third interrupt of the 300 timer interrupt process is shown. FIG. 4D is a diagram showing an example of a winning ball command to be set. In the following description, decimal numbers are expressed in angle brackets “N”, and numbers shown in binary numbers in each winning number storage area in the drawings are expressed in square brackets [n].

  In FIG. 336 (c), [10] (winning number “2”) is stored in the lower 2 bits of the first special figure starting port winning number storage area, and the least significant bit of the winning number storage area for the general winning opening is stored. [1] When the winning ball command set process in step S16023 is executed at the first interrupt after the state where the (winning number “1”) is stored, the main control unit 300, for example, stores the winning number storage area. Moves in ascending order (from top to bottom in the figure) from the address with the smallest address, reads the value, updates (subtracts) the data in the winning number storage area other than “0”, and wins a ball command corresponding to the winning slot Is set in the transmission data register. In other words, in the case of FIG. 337 (a), the value of the winning number storage area for the variable winning opening is “0”, and the value “2” of the first special figure starting opening winning number storage area (the lower 2 bits are “10”). Therefore, 1 is subtracted from this, and the value of the winning number storage area is updated to “1” (the lower 2 bits are “01”). Then, a prize ball command (03H) corresponding to the first special figure starting port of FIG. As a result, a prize ball command (03H) is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600.

  Subsequently, when the winning ball command set process of step S16023 is executed at the second interrupt, the main control unit 300, for example, moves the addresses of the winning number storage area in ascending order, and wins number winning areas other than “0”, That is, 1 is subtracted from the value “1” (the lower 2 bits are “01”) in the first special figure start opening winning number storage area, and the value in the winning number storage area is “0” (the lower 2 bits are “00”). ). Then, a prize ball command (03H) corresponding to the first special figure starting port of FIG. As a result, a prize ball command (03H) is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600.

  Further, when the winning ball command set process in step S16023 is executed at the third interrupt, the main control unit 300 moves, for example, the addresses of the winning number storage area in ascending order, and the winning number storage area other than “0” is stored. That is, “1” is subtracted from the value “1” (the lower 2 bits are “01”) of the general winning award winning number storage area, and the value of the winning number storage area is “0” (the lower 2 bits are “00”). ). Then, a winning ball command (0AH) corresponding to the general winning opening in FIG. 4D is set in the transmission data register. As a result, a prize ball command (0AH) is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600.

  In this way, the number of winnings in the winning number storage area is subtracted by transmitting one winning ball command.

  Here, one prize ball command is transmitted by one timer interruption process of the main control unit 300. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to transmit a plurality of (all) winning ball commands corresponding to the winning number storage areas by the same timer interrupt processing, and if the winning number is “2” or more, the value May be added repeatedly until a predetermined number (for example, 255) is reached and transmitted as a single prize ball command. In the case of summing up, it may be performed for each winning mouth, or the number of winnings of all winning mouths may be summed up. On the other hand, only one prize ball command may be transmitted in one timer interruption process of the main control unit 300.

  Further, the winning number storage area may be arranged so that the address corresponding to the winning opening with a large number of winning balls is an address of a small address (upper in the figure), or a lottery (for example, the first) Or you may arrange | position so that a 2nd special figure starting port etc. may become a small address.

  Here, the format of the winning ball command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 may be a number format for transmitting the number information of the winning ball number itself, or a command for transmitting an identifier different from the number information. Any of the formats may be used. Further, as a method of transmitting in one interrupt process, in addition to a method of transmitting prize ball commands one by one, a method of transmitting all prize ball commands accumulated at the transmission timing, or a prize corresponding to winning There is a method of transmitting the total value (after converting the number of balls into number information). The total value in this case is determined according to the size of the winning number storage area, and is, for example, within 255 here. The combination of the format of the prize ball command and the transmission method can be variously combined.

  With reference to FIG. 338, the award ball number display process (steps S216 and S220 in FIG. 318) in the main controller timer interrupt process will be described. (A) is a reprint of FIG. 333 (e), FIG. (B) shows the state of each winning number storage area before sending a prize ball command, and (c) shows one prize. The state of each winning number storage area after the ball command transmission is shown.

  In the prize ball number display process, if there is a prize ball before the prize ball command transmission in the ball number control part 600 in the main control part 300, the prize ball number (the total value of the prize balls if there are plural) is displayed as the prize ball number. Displayed on part 690.

  Here, as an example, the prize ball number display process is performed twice before and after the prize ball command transmission process (step S219) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. That is, the first prize ball number display process (step S216) is performed between the winning opening counter update process (step S215) and the prize ball command transmission process (step S219), and the second prize ball number display process (step S220). Is performed after the prize ball command transmission process (step S219). The processing contents of the winning ball number display processing are the same, and as shown in FIG. 338 (a), the winning ball number is displayed based on a predetermined winning counter.

  An example of a specific winning counter (winning number storage area) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In FIG. 10B, [10] (winning number “2”) is stored in the lower 2 bits of the first special figure starting port winning number storage area 782, and the lowest order of the general winning opening winning number storage area 786. [1] (winning number “1”) is stored in the bit. These are the numbers of winning balls that are stored before the number-of-balls control unit 600 is requested to pay out the winning balls (that is, before the winning ball command is transmitted) and are not added to the number of gaming balls.

  For example, in the first prize ball number display process (FIG. 318, step S216), the main control unit 300 moves, for example, in ascending order (from top to bottom in the figure) from the smallest address in the winning number storage area. , Read the value of the winning number storage area other than “0”, and add the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning number storage area, for example, based on the number of winning balls associated with the winning ball command in FIG. And displayed on the award ball number display section 690.

  In this case, since the winning number “2” is stored in the first special figure starting port winning number storage area 782, the main control unit 300 determines the number of winning balls “6” by winning the first special figure starting port 230. ”(= The number of winning balls“ 3 ”× the number of winnings“ 2 ”) and the number of winning balls“ 10 ”(= the number of winning balls“ 10 ”× the number of winnings“ 1 ”) by winning the general winning opening 226, that is, The number of winning balls “16” is displayed on the winning ball number display section 690. In this case, if the number of game balls is “100”, the ball number control unit 600 displays “100” on the ball number display unit 640.

  Thereafter, in the prize ball command transmission process (FIG. 318, step S219), the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600. Referring to FIG. 338 (c), in this case, the main control unit 300 transmits a winning ball command by winning the first special figure starting port 230 based on the value of each winning number storage area, and the first special figure starting port. The number of winnings in the prize winning number storage area is updated to “1”.

  Thereafter, in the second winning ball number display process (FIG. 318, step S220), the main control unit 300 stores the winning number “1” in the first special figure starting port winning number storage area 782. The number of winning balls “3” (= the number of winning balls “3” × the number of winnings “1”) at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of winning balls “10” (= the winning ball) of the general winning port 226. (The number “10” × the number of winnings “1”), that is, the number of winning balls “13” is displayed on the winning ball number display section 690. In this case, the ball number control unit 600 that has received the winning ball command for winning the first special figure starting port 230 adds the number of winning balls “3” to the number of gaming balls “100”, and the ball number display unit 640 displays “ 103 "is displayed.

  Thus, for example, when there is no new winning between step S216 and step S220 of the main control unit timer interruption process, it is displayed on the award ball number display unit 690 after the award ball command transmission process (step S219). The number of prize balls is obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls of the prize ball command transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 from the number of prize balls displayed on the prize ball number display unit 690 in the first prize ball number display process. Value. Thereby, the player may be able to visually recognize that the numerical value of the prize ball number display section 690 has decreased due to the transmission of the prize ball command.

  If there is a winning in each winning opening etc. before executing the winning ball number display processing (step S216 and step 220), and the value of the winning number storage area corresponding to it has been updated, the main control unit 300 In the prize ball number display process (step S216 and step 220), the number of prize balls such as each winning opening is added and displayed on the prize ball display unit 690.

  Here, the first prize ball number display process (step S216) is performed between the winning prize counter updating process (step S215) and the winning acceptance process (step S217), and the prize ball command transmission process (step S219) The case where the second prize ball number display process (step S220) is performed during the state update process (step S221) has been described as an example, but the execution procedure of the first and second prize ball number display processes is at this position. Not exclusively. In other words, the first prize ball number display process (step S216) may be between the winning prize counter update process (step S215) and the prize ball command transmission process (step S219), and the prize acceptance process (step S217). It may be executed first.

  Further, the second prize ball number display process (step S220) may be executed after, for example, the normal state update process (step S221) after the prize ball command transmission process (step S219). Good.

  The prize ball display process may be executed in either step S216 or step 220. For example, when it is performed only in step S216, the display modes of the winning ball display unit 690 and the ball number display unit 640 are as follows. If the state of each winning storage area is the state shown in FIG. 338 (b) before the winning ball number display process is executed, “16” is displayed on the winning ball display unit 690, and “100” is displayed on the ball number display unit 640, for example. Is displayed. When the prize ball command transmission process (step S219) is executed, the display of only the ball number display unit 640 is updated to “103”, and the display of the prize ball display unit 690 is maintained at “16”. If there is no winning until the next interruption processing, the state of each winning storage area becomes the state of FIG. 338 (c), and the display of the winning ball display unit 690 is updated to “13” in step S216. At this time, the number display unit 640 maintains the display of “103”.

  For example, when it is performed only in step S220, the display modes of the prize ball display unit 690 and the ball number display unit 640 are as follows. If the winning storage area is in the state shown in FIG. 338 at the time of executing the winning ball command transmission process (step S219), “16” is displayed on the winning ball display section 690, and the number of balls display section 640 is displayed. For example, “100” is displayed. When the prize ball command transmission process (step S219) is executed and the prize ball display process is executed, the prize ball display unit 690 is updated to “13”, and the ball number display unit 640 displays “103”. (Fig. 3C). In the meantime, for example, if there is a prize at the variable prize opening 234, the value in the prize winning number storage area 780 for variable prize opening is updated to “1” in the prize opening counter update process (step S215). For example, when this is the timing at which the prize ball command can be transmitted in the prize ball command transmission process, in the prize ball number display process, “10” is displayed on the prize ball display unit 690 based on the value in the prize winning number storage area 786 for the general prize opening. The display of the ball number display unit 640 is “118” by adding the number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 234. That is, at such timing, the number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 234 is not reflected on the winning ball display unit 690. If the prize ball command resulting from winning the variable prize slot 234 is not at a timing that can be transmitted by the prize ball command transmission process, the prize ball number display process also adds up the number of prize balls in the variable prize slot 234 to obtain the prize ball. “25” is displayed on the display unit 690.

  Also, when the state changes from (b) to (c) in the same figure, when the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710 in the same interrupt process as the interrupt process that transmitted the prize ball command. When the prize ball display process is executed, the prize ball display unit 690 is updated to “13”, the number of game balls is decremented by “1”, and the display of the ball number display unit 640 is updated to “102”. The

In the above description, the case where the winning number storage area is configured by 1 byte has been described as an example, but it may be configured by a 2-byte area.
<Communication processing in the ball number control unit>

  With reference to FIG. 339, an outline of communication processing in the ball number control unit 600 will be described. This figure is a flowchart in which processing mainly related to communication with the main control unit 300 is extracted from the processing performed in the ball number control unit interruption processing shown in FIG. FIG. 339 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of main control communication error management processing performed in error management processing (step S1205 in FIG. 322). FIG. 7B is a flowchart showing the flow of the game ball number subtraction process performed in the game ball number setting process (step S1211 in FIG. 322). FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game ball number display process performed in step S1211).

  Referring to FIG. 339 (a), in the main control communication error management process, if the ball number control unit 600 does not receive a communication confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 for a predetermined period, it is determined as a communication error.

  In step S1701, 1 is subtracted from the main control communication monitoring timer. The main control communication monitoring timer is a timer that monitors a period during which no communication command is received from the main control unit 300. In the present embodiment, as an example, the ball number control unit interrupt process (FIG. 322) is executed in a cycle of 2 ms, and a predetermined period for which an error occurs when a communication command from the main control unit 300 is not received is, for example, 1000 ms. To do. The main control communication monitoring timer is set to “500 (1000 ms / 2 ms)” as an initial value in other processing described later.

  In step S1703, the value of the main control communication monitoring timer is determined. If “0”, the process proceeds to step S1705, and if not, the process ends. The main control communication monitoring timer is “0” when 1000 ms elapses during which no communication command is received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S1705, “1” is set to the main control communication error flag. The main control communication error flag is a flag for setting a main control communication error state. For example, “1” is abnormal, and “0” is normal.

  With reference to FIG. 339 (b), the flow of the game ball number subtraction process will be described. The game ball number subtraction process is a process of subtracting the player's game ball number (the number of balls that can be fired on the electronic information of the in-flight ball 710) in response to the launch of the in-flight ball 710. This process is executed as a part of the process (step S1211 in FIG. 322).

  In step S1801, it is determined whether the subtraction condition is satisfied. If the subtraction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1803. If the subtraction condition is not satisfied, the process ends. The subtraction condition is, for example, a case where the subtraction sensor 604Z detects passage of the in-flight ball 710. In addition to the subtraction sensor 604Z, various sensors of the game medium path 610 (for example, a ball polishing device inlet sensor of the ball polishing device 612, a lifting device inlet sensor of the lifting device 614, a ball feeding device inlet of the ball feeding device 616) It may be a case where the passage of the in-flight ball 710 is detected by a sensor or the like.

  In step S1803, “1” is subtracted from the number of game balls, assuming that one game ball is consumed by firing one in-flight ball 710. In FIG. 5B, the flow of subtracting the number of game balls due to the firing of the in-flight ball 710 is extracted, but in this embodiment, as described above, the number of prize balls, the number of rented balls and In addition to adding the number of replayed balls and subtracting the number of counted balls, subtract the number of game balls consumed by launching the in-flight ball 710 (the number of in-flight balls 710 thrown into the game area 124 = the number of in-balls). Yes. For this reason, in this step, the value of the in-ball number storage area of the RAM in which the number of balls thrown into the game area 124 is stored is read, and “1” is added to this value in the original in-ball number storage area. Remember. Thereby, one subtraction of the number of game balls is performed in response to one launch of the in-flight ball 710.

  FIG. 339 (c) performs a game ball number display process. The game ball number display process is a process of displaying the number of game balls subtracted (updated) in the game ball number subtraction process on the ball number display unit 640, and the game ball number setting process (step S1211 in FIG. 322) described above. It is a process executed as a part.

  In step S1901, the updated game ball number is displayed on the ball number display unit 640 based on the other game ball number subtraction process and the game ball number setting process in FIG. In other words, not only the number of in-balls in the game ball number subtraction process is subtracted from the number of game balls, but the number of rented balls, the number of winning balls, the number of replayed balls and the number of counted balls are subtracted, and the updated game The number of balls is displayed on the ball number display unit 640.

  With reference to FIG. 340, the serial command management process (step S1204) executed in the ball number control unit interrupt process (FIG. 322) will be described. FIG. 340 (a) is a flowchart showing an outline of the serial command management process, FIG. 340 (b) is a flowchart showing a main process flow in the serial command reception process, and FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the flow of the main processes in a process.

  The outline of the serial command management process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S2001, serial command reception processing is performed. In step S2003, serial command transmission processing is performed. As described above, data is transmitted and received by setting data in the built-in registers (the reception data register 774 and the transmission data register 776) of the serial communication circuit 752.

  With reference to FIG. 340 (b), the outline of the serial command reception process will be described.

  In step S <b> 2101, it is determined whether a communication confirmation command is received from the main control unit 300. If a communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2103, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2109.

  In step S2103, the main control communication monitoring timer is initialized. As described in the main control communication error management process of FIG. 339 (a), the main control communication monitoring timer has a period from when the communication confirmation command is received from the main control unit 300 until the next communication confirmation command is received. It is a timer for setting a main control communication error when a predetermined period (for example, 1000 ms) is exceeded, and when the ball number control unit interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 ms, for example, 500 "is set.

  In step S2105, the main control communication error flag is initialized. Here, “0” is set in the error flag.

  In step S2107, a communication confirmation command reception flag is set. The communication confirmation command reception flag is a flag for notifying (replying) that the communication confirmation command has been received by the main control unit 300, for example, “1” (or ON) means returning to the main control unit 300, “0” (or off) means no reply. Here, “1” is set to the communication confirmation command reception flag.

  In step S2109, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command is received from the main control unit 300. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2113.

  In step S2111, based on the received prize ball command, the number of prize balls is added to the value of the prize ball number storage area of the RAM. That is, the value stored in the prize ball number storage area is read, the prize ball number is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is stored. Thereby, in the game ball number setting process (step S1211) of the ball number control unit interruption process (FIG. 322), the prize ball is combined with the addition of the number of rented balls and the number of replayed balls, and the subtraction of the number of in-balls and the number of counted balls. The number is added and the number of game balls is updated.

  In step S2113, other serial command reception processing is performed.

  In addition, when a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 and the ball number control unit 600 receives the command, the ball number control unit 600 notifies that the prize ball command has been received. (Reply command for the prize ball command) may be transmitted to the main control unit 300. In that case, the reply command is transmitted in step S2113 of FIG. Alternatively, a flag for transmitting the reply command may be set, and the reply command may be transmitted to the main control unit 300 together with a communication confirmation command for serial command transmission processing.

  In this case, the prize ball number display process performed in the main controller timer interrupt process is to update the display when a reply command for receiving a prize ball command is transmitted from the ball number controller 600 to the main controller 300. Also good.

  The outline of the serial command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. 340 (c).

  In step S2201, a communication confirmation command reception flag is determined. If the communication confirmation command reception flag is “1” (ON), the process proceeds to step S2203; otherwise, the process ends.

  In step S2203, a communication confirmation command (second communication confirmation command) is set. When the CPU of the ball number control unit 600 sets a prize ball command in the transmission data register 776 of the serial communication circuit 752 incorporated in the ball number control unit microcomputer 770, the serial communication circuit 752 is set in the transmission data register 776. A communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 (main control unit microcomputer 760). Thereby, notification (return) of reception of the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is performed.

  In step S2205, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to “0” (or off).

  In step S2207, other serial command transmission processing is performed. In other serial command transmission processing, information (for example, error information) other than the communication confirmation command is transmitted. Here, when a reply of communication confirmation command reception (second communication confirmation command) is transmitted from the ball number control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, other error information is also transmitted. Such processing can be performed only in a configuration in which a command (first communication confirmation command or prize ball command) that leads communication is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600.

  FIG. 4D is a flowchart showing another form of serial command transmission processing. In this case, if the communication confirmation command reception flag is determined in step S2201 and the flag is “0” (or off), that is, if a communication confirmation command reception reply is not transmitted to the main control unit 300, an error other than the communication confirmation command Information or the like is transmitted in the other serial command transmission processing in step S2207. For example, a main control communication error can be transmitted by this transmission process. Other than this, it is the same as FIG.

  In FIG. 340, a flowchart of serial command reception processing and serial command transmission processing is shown separately. For this reason, the communication confirmation command reception flag is used, and in step S2107 of the serial command reception process (FIG. 5B), the flag is set to “1” (ON), and the serial command transmission process (FIG. 5C). In step S2201, the flag is determined. In subsequent step S2203, a communication confirmation command is set (transmitted). However, if the main control communication error flag is “0” (normal) in step S2105 of the serial command reception process ((b) in the figure) without using the communication confirmation command reception flag, in the subsequent step S2107. A communication confirmation command may be set (transmitted) in the transmission data register.

  In the above example, the case where the serial command management process of the ball number control unit 600 is executed between the timer update process (step S1203) and the error management process (step S1205) of the ball number control unit interrupt process will be described as an example. However, for example, it may be executed between the error management process (step S1205) and the error release switch monitoring process (step S1207).

  FIG. 341 to FIG. 345 show an example of a timing chart of communication processing between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600.

  In FIG. 341 to FIG. 345, the scales on the time axis (horizontal axis) of the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 indicate the period of each periodic interrupt process. The time axis represents the passage of time from left to right. As described above, the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 occurs at a cycle of 4 ms, for example, and the timer interrupt process of the ball number control unit 600 occurs at a cycle of 2 ms, for example. The contents of the serial command communication error flag, serial command status flag, communication confirmation command transmission counter, and communication confirmation command transmission timer are also shown in accordance with the interrupt processing timing of the main control unit 300. Moreover, in each figure, a solid line arrow is a communication confirmation command, and a broken line is a prize ball command.

  FIG. 341 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of communication processing that can occur in normal operation, and FIG. 341 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of communication processing in the case of a main control communication error.

  Referring to FIG. 341 (a), first, in the first block (1), the communication confirmation command transmission timer (hereinafter referred to as TM) is changed from “1” to “0”, and the main control unit 300 changes the ball every 100 ms. When it is time to transmit a communication confirmation command to the number control unit 600, the main control unit 300 transmits a communication confirmation command (first communication confirmation command) to the ball number control unit 600. In this case, the initial value “25” is set to TM, and is subtracted for each interrupt process of the main control unit 300, and when it becomes “0”, the initial value “25” is set (the same applies hereinafter). The communication confirmation command transmission counter (hereinafter referred to as CT) is updated from “10” to “9”. In this case, since the prize ball command cannot be transmitted simultaneously (see FIG. 336 (a)), the serial command status flag (hereinafter, ST) is set to “1”. The serial command communication error flag (hereinafter referred to as ER) is “0” in this state.

  The ball number control unit 600 that has received the communication confirmation command transmits (replies) a communication confirmation command (second communication confirmation command) to the main control unit 300 at the timing of the next interrupt processing. Accordingly, CT is updated from “9” to “10”, and ST is updated from “1” to “0” (because a prize ball command can be transmitted). Thereafter, for example, at the fourth interrupt of the main control unit 300, a prize ball command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600.

  In the second block (2), a communication confirmation command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 at a timing when TM is “0” (for example, after 100 ms has elapsed from the communication confirmation command of the first block). At this time, CT is updated from “10” to “9”, and ST is updated from “0” to “1”. When a communication confirmation command is transmitted (returned) from the ball number control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, ST is updated to “1” and CT is updated to “10”. When a plurality of winnings are established during this period, for example, at the timing when TM becomes “23” and “22”, a winning ball command is continuously transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600. .

  In the third block (3), for example, an interrupt for transmitting a communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 (interrupt that causes TM to be “0”) and the previous main control unit 300 If the cause of winning ball command (winning) is established between the interrupt and the interrupt, even if ST is “0”, if the next interrupt of the main controller 300 is an interrupt with TM “0”, the main A prize confirmation command cannot be transmitted until after the communication confirmation command is transmitted from the control unit 300 (TM is “25”) and the communication confirmation command is transmitted from the ball number control unit 600. Therefore, the prize ball command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 in the next interruption process (TM is “24”).

  In the fourth block (4), a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 with an interruption of TM “1” and ST “0”. At this time, since only one winning ball command can be transmitted in one interruption process, if there is another (simultaneously) winning, the transmission is waited until the next interruption of the main control unit 300. However, as shown in the fourth block, when the next interruption of the main control unit 300 after the transmission of the previous prize ball command is the timing when TM is “0”, the main control unit 300 transmits a communication confirmation command. The prize ball command cannot be transmitted (ST becomes “1”). The main control unit 300 receives the prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600 by an interrupt after receiving the communication confirmation command from the ball number control unit 600 (TM is “0” interrupt, and ST is “0” at this time). Can be sent. That is, in this case, a plurality of winnings have been established, but the interruption of the main control unit 300 after transmitting one winning ball command has executed a process of transmitting a communication confirmation command every 100 ms. This is a case where transmission of other prize ball commands is in a standby state until after a few interruptions).

  The fifth block (5) is a state in which only transmission / reception of a communication confirmation command is performed.

  An example of communication processing in the case of a main control communication error will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the first block (1) indicates a normal operation state, and at the timing when TM is “0”, the main control unit 300 transmits a communication confirmation command (ST is “1”). A communication confirmation command is transmitted. In the next interrupt of the main control unit 300 (TM is “0”), if ST is “0” and the transmission condition of the prize ball command is satisfied, the prize ball command can be transmitted.

  In the second block (2), the communication confirmation command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 at the transmission timing of the next communication confirmation command (TM is “0”). A communication confirmation command (reply) is not transmitted to the control unit 300. Since no communication confirmation command is returned, ST is maintained at “1” and CT is also maintained at “9”.

  The third block (3) sends eight communication confirmation commands from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 after the predetermined period from the second block. Indicates that no communication confirmation command has been sent. The main control unit 300 transmits a ninth communication confirmation command to the ball number control unit 600 when the TM becomes “0”. As a result, CT becomes “1”, and the value is maintained because no communication confirmation command is transmitted from the ball number control unit 600.

  In the fourth block (4), the main control unit 300 transmits the tenth communication confirmation command in the interrupt process with TM “0”. CT becomes “0”, and when there is no reply of the communication confirmation command from the ball number control unit 600, “1” is set to ER based on this, and a communication error state of the main control unit is set. Based on the fact that CT becomes “0”, the values of various flags are set to predetermined values (for example, CT is set to an initial value “10”).

  The fifth block (5) shows a case where the normal operation is restored. In response to the communication confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the communication confirmation command is transmitted from the ball number control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Various flags and counters are initialized. That is, in this case, ER is set to “0”, ST is set to “0”, CT is set to “10”, and TM is set to “24”.

  Here, as an example, when both the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 receive a command, a case where a signal corresponding to the command is output is described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a flag corresponding to the command may be provided, the flag may be set when a command is received, and the flag may be determined at the next interrupt to output a signal.

  342 to 345 are more detailed timing charts of the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600. FIG. In these figures, illustration of ER, ST, CT, and TM is omitted, and the winnings generated on the respective timing charts and the timing of each process performed by the main control unit 300 or the ball number control unit 600 are indicated by broken lines. Yes. Timings A and I are timings at which the main control unit 300 detects the entrance to each winning opening, etc. Timings B and J are performed by the main control unit 300 when the winning pattern is matched. The timings C and K are timings when a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600, and timings D, G, and L are the number of prize balls displayed by the main control unit 300. Timing E is the timing at which the number of prize balls is displayed on the device 690, and timing E is the timing at which the ball number control unit 600 displays the number of game balls on the ball number display unit 640. Timing F is a timing for transmitting a communication confirmation command, and timing H is a timing for transmitting a communication confirmation command from the ball number control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. In addition, the main controller 300 shown in FIGS. 342 to 345 does not perform the first prize ball number display process (step S216) in the main controller timer interrupt process (FIG. 318), but displays the second prize ball number display. An example in which only the process (step S220) is performed will be described. Further, the update of the number of game balls other than those shown (updates by the number of in-balls, the number of rented balls, the number of replayed balls, the number of counted balls) will be omitted.

  FIG. 342 is a timing chart corresponding to a part of FIG. 341 (a). FIG. 342 (a) shows a case where a prize ball command is transmitted normally and at a normal timing (first block in FIG. 341 (a)). Is a timing chart). For example, when there is a ball (winning) at any one of the winning ports (for example, the general winning port 226) for the first time after the game is started (timing A), the main control unit 300 receives a winning acceptance process for timer interrupt processing (FIG. 318). Step S217) is performed (timing B). For example, if transmission / reception of a communication confirmation command between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 is normally performed in an interrupt process between timing A and timing B, the main control unit 300 Immediately after the winning ball command transmission process (step S219 in FIG. 318), the winning ball command including the number of winning balls (for example, 10) corresponding to winning is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (timing C). The main control unit 300 executes a prize ball number display process (step S220) for the number of unsent prize balls only after the prize ball command transmission process (step S219). That is, after one prize ball command is transmitted at the timing C, all the values stored in the winning number storage area are “0”, and therefore the display of the prize ball number display section 690 is also maintained at “0”. (Timing D). Thereafter, the ball number control unit 600 that has received the prize ball command, based on this, in the game ball number setting process (step S1211) of the ball number control unit interrupt process (FIG. 322), the number of prize balls (10) And the updated number of game balls is displayed on the ball number display unit 640. For example, when the number of game balls at the start of the game is “10”, the display of the ball number display unit 600 is “20” (timing E). Thus, there is a slight difference between the display timings of the prize ball display unit 690 that displays the number of prize balls that have not been transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 and the ball number display unit 640 that displays the number of game balls. In particular, in the configuration in which the prize ball number display process (step S220) of the main control unit 300 is performed only after the prize ball command transmission process (step S219), the obtained prize ball number is not displayed on the prize ball display unit 690. There is also.

  FIG. 342 (b) is an example of a timing chart in the case where the transmission timing of the prize ball command and the transmission timing of the communication confirmation command overlap (corresponding to the third block in FIG. 341 (a)).

  For example, at the beginning of the game, for example, there is a winning (winning) at the general winning opening 226 (timing A), for example, and the main control unit 300 performs a winning acceptance process of a timer interruption process (timing B). Thereafter, a prize ball command transmission process (step S219) is performed. When the communication confirmation command transmission timer (TM) is “0” in the serial command management process, the main control unit 300 performs the (first) communication. A confirmation command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (timing F). After that, the main control unit 300 performs a winning ball number display process (step S220), and based on the value of the winning number storage area for the general winning opening (winning number “1”), the number of winning balls “10” is the number of winning balls. It is displayed on the display unit 690 (timing G). The transmission of the winning ball command is awaited by the transmission of the communication confirmation command at the timing F, and since a value other than “0” is stored in the winning number storage area for the general winning opening, the winning ball number display section 690 is based on this value. Displays the number of prize balls. Upon receiving the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300, the ball number control unit 600 confirms (second) communication confirmation with the main control unit 300 in the serial command management process (step S1204) of the ball number control unit interrupt process (FIG. 322). A command is transmitted (timing H). Thereafter, the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600 in the next interrupt process of the interrupt process that transmitted the communication confirmation command (timing F) (timing C). The main control unit 300 performs the winning ball number display process (step S220), but the value of the winning number storage area for the general winning mouth and the other winning storage areas are “0” due to the transmission of the winning ball command. “0” is displayed on the winning ball number display section 690 (timing D). Upon receiving the winning ball command, the ball number control unit 600 adds the number of winning balls (10) to the number of game balls in the game ball number setting process (step S1211) of the ball number control unit interrupt process (FIG. 322). Then, the updated number of game balls is displayed on the ball number display unit 640. For example, when the number of game balls at the start of the game is “10”, the display of the ball number display unit 600 is “20” (timing E). As described above, when the winning acceptance (timing B) and the communication confirmation command transmission (timing F) overlap in one interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the winning ball command transmission (timing C) During the interruption process of the control unit 300, during this time, the transmission of a prize ball command, the addition of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls, and the display of the number of game balls on the number of balls control unit 640 are on standby. On the other hand, the number of prize balls displayed on the prize ball number display unit 690 can be performed within the same interrupt process as the communication confirmation command transmission process of the main control unit 300 since no prize ball command is transmitted. In this case, the number of prize balls is displayed on the prize ball number display device 690.

  FIG. 343 is a timing chart corresponding to the second block of FIG. 341 (a), and shows an example in the case where there are a plurality of winning acceptances (simultaneously) in the interrupt processing of the same main control unit 300. FIG. For example, at the beginning of the game, for example, when there is a ball (winning) at the first special figure starting port 230 (timing I), and then there is a ball winning (winning) at the general winning port 226 (timing A), The controller 300 simultaneously accepts a plurality of (two in this case) prizes in the same timer interrupt process (step S217 in FIG. 318) (timing B, J). For example, if transmission / reception of a communication confirmation command between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 is normally performed in an interrupt process between timing A and timing B, the main control unit 300 Immediately after the winning ball command transmission process (step S219 in FIG. 318), the winning ball command including the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (timing C). In the case of a specification in which only one winning ball command is transmitted per interrupt process, the winning ball command transmitted at timing C is one of two winning winning winnings. The priority order in this case is determined by the arrangement of the winning number storage area provided in the RAM. For example, when each winning number storage area is arranged as shown in FIG. 334 (b), values are acquired in order from the address with the smallest address, so at timing C, it corresponds to the first special figure starting port 230. A prize ball command (number of prize balls is “3”) is transmitted. In the subsequent winning ball number display process (step S220), the number of winning balls (for example, “10”) corresponding to the other winning ball (general winning port 226) for which no winning ball command has been transmitted is the winning ball number display section 690. Is displayed. Is also maintained at “0” (timing D). Thereafter, the ball number control unit 600 that has received the prize ball command, based on this, sets the first special figure start port 230 to the number of game balls in the game ball number setting process (step S1211) of the ball number control unit interrupt process (FIG. 322). The number of prize balls corresponding to (3) is added, and the updated number of game balls is displayed on the ball number display unit 640. For example, when the number of game balls at the start of the game is “10”, the display of the ball number display unit 600 is “13”. The prize ball command for winning the general prize opening 226 is transmitted in the prize ball command transmission process of the next interrupt process of the main control unit 300 (timing K). As a result, the values in each winning number storage area are all “0”, and “0” is displayed on the winning ball number display section 690 in the subsequent winning ball number display process (timing L). Although not shown, the ball number control unit 600 that has received the prize ball command adds the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening 226 to the number of game balls in the game ball number setting process (step S1211). Then, the updated number of game balls is displayed on the ball number display unit 640. For example, when the number of game balls at the start of the game is “13”, the display of the ball number display unit 600 is “23”.

  As described above, even when a plurality of winnings are accepted in the same interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the prize ball command is transmitted in the subsequent interrupt process, and is transmitted once for each interrupt process. It becomes.

  FIG. 344 shows an example of another timing chart of the ball number control unit 600, which is transmitted from the main control unit 300 in the serial command reception process of the ball number control unit 600 shown in FIG. 340 (b). This is an example in the case of notifying (replying) a prize ball command reception for the prize ball command. Timing M is a timing at which notification (reply) of receiving a prize ball command is sent from the ball number control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  For example, at the beginning of the game, for example, there is a winning (winning) at the general winning opening 226 (timing A), for example, and the main control unit 300 performs a winning acceptance process of a timer interruption process (timing B). Thereafter, a prize ball command transmission process (step S219) is performed. When the communication confirmation command transmission timer (TM) is “0” in the serial command management process, the main control unit 300 performs the (first) communication. A confirmation command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (timing F). After that, the main control unit 300 performs a winning ball number display process (step S220), and based on the value of the winning number storage area for the general winning opening (winning number “1”), the number of winning balls “10” is the number of winning balls. It is displayed on the display unit 690 (timing G). The transmission of the winning ball command is awaited by the transmission of the communication confirmation command at the timing F, and since a value other than “0” is stored in the winning number storage area for the general winning opening, the winning ball number display section 690 is based on this value. Displays the number of prize balls. Upon receiving the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300, the ball number control unit 600 confirms (second) communication confirmation with the main control unit 300 in the serial command management process (step S1204) of the ball number control unit interrupt process (FIG. 322). A command is transmitted (timing H). Thereafter, the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600 in the next interrupt process of the interrupt process that transmitted the communication confirmation command (timing F) (timing C). The main control unit 300 performs the winning ball number display process (step S220), but the value of the winning number storage area for the general winning mouth and the other winning storage areas are “0” due to the transmission of the winning ball command. “0” is displayed on the winning ball number display section 690 (timing D). Upon receiving the prize ball command, the ball number control unit 600 transmits a command (reply) for receiving the prize ball command to the main control unit 300 in the serial command reception process (step S2113 in FIG. 340 (b)) of the ball number control unit 600. (Timing M). In addition, the ball number control unit 600 adds the number of prize balls (10) to the number of game balls in the game ball number setting process (step S1211) and displays the updated number of game balls on the ball number display unit 640. For example, when the number of game balls at the start of the game is “10”, the display of the ball number display unit 600 is “20” (timing E).

  FIG. 345 is a more detailed timing chart of FIG. During the game, not only the addition of the number of game balls (addition of the number of prize balls), but also the number of game balls may be subtracted when there is no winning or when a counting operation is performed. In the enclosed pachinko machine 100, the in-flight ball 710 has a fixed amount. Therefore, when the number of game balls that a player can play is exceeded, for example, the circulation of the in-flight ball 710 is controlled to prevent launching or feeding. It needs to be possible. In FIG. 345, the case where the number of game balls may be 0 will be described.

  FIG. 345 (a) is an enlarged view of the portion from timing B to timing E in FIG. 342 (a). Mainly, a prize ball display section 690 for displaying the number of prize balls and a ball for displaying the number of game balls. The display timing of the number display unit 640 will be described.

  When a prize ball command including a prize ball number (for example, 10) is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (timing C), “0” is displayed on the prize ball number display unit 690 in the subsequent prize ball number display process ( Maintained) (timing D). Thereafter, the ball number control unit 600 performs serial command management processing (step S1204) in the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 322 (timing O). The ball number control unit 600 that has received the prize ball command in the serial command management process adds the prize ball number (10) to the game ball number in the subsequent game ball number setting process (step S1211). Then, the updated number of game balls is displayed on the ball number display unit 640 (timing E). However, if the player fires the in-flight balls 710 between timing O and timing E and these are non-winning or the operation of the counting button 652 is performed, the number of game balls is equal to the number of winning balls. In addition to the addition, the number of in balls and the number of counted balls are also subtracted and updated. That is, during the period from timing O to timing E, the number of game balls (the number of game balls in the game ball number storage area) may be “0”, and “0” may be displayed on the ball number display unit 640. Then, “0” is displayed on both the winning ball display unit 690 and the ball number display unit 640, and the number of game balls (number of game balls that can be fired) does not exist at this timing. In such a case, since it is not desirable that the in-flight ball 710 can be fired and fed, it is possible to drive the ball feeding and firing P for a predetermined period (for example, until the next interrupt processing timing of the ball number control unit 600). It is better to wait for the timing to perform.

  Actually, there is a slight difference between the timing D and the timing E. For example, the period during which “0” is displayed is very short, but it waits for a predetermined period, and the number of winning balls is reflected in the number of gaming balls. After that, it is preferable to perform the driving process P for firing and ball feeding (when the display of the ball number display unit 640 becomes “1” or more). The driving process P for ball feeding and firing may be performed in a step after the game ball number setting process (step S1211) of the ball number control unit interrupt process.

  FIG. 345 (b) is an enlarged view of the portion from timing B to timing E in FIG. 342 (b). As shown in FIG. 345 (a), the number of game balls (the game balls stored in the game ball number storage area). In the case where the number) is “0”, an example in which the driving process P for launching or ball feeding is limited as a game is impossible will be described.

  For example, it is assumed that the number of game balls is “0” (the display of the ball number display unit 640 is “0”), but the number of balls in the area has won a general winning opening 226, for example. In this case, the main control unit 300 performs a winning acceptance process for the general winning opening 226 (timing B), and the main control unit 300 transmits a (first) communication confirmation command to the ball number control unit 600 (timing F). Thereafter, the main control unit 300 displays the number of winning balls “10” of the general winning opening 226 on the winning ball number display unit 690 in the winning ball number display process (timing G). Thereafter, the ball number control unit 600 transmits a (second) communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 in the serial command management process of the interrupt process (timing H). Thereafter, the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the ball number control unit 600 (timing C). “0” is displayed on the award ball number display unit 690 by the award ball number display process of the main control unit 300 (timing D). Upon receiving the prize ball command, the ball number control unit 600 adds the number of prize balls (10) to the number of game balls in the game ball number setting process, and displays the updated number of game balls on the ball number display unit 640. In this case, the display of the ball number display unit 600 at time B is “0”, and the display of the updated ball number display unit 600 is “10” (timing E).

  In such a case, even if the display on the ball number display unit 640 is “0” at the timing B, the prize ball number “10” is displayed on the prize ball number display unit 690 at the timing G, and the player can fire. The number of na (substantial) game balls is “1” or more. However, the number of game balls in the game ball number storage area remains “0” depending on the timing of game ball number update (the timing of serial command management processing in the game ball number setting process). During this time, the number of game balls is not fired or the ball feed driving process is not performed, and there is a case where the game cannot be performed.

  As described above, if a prize is awarded when the number of game balls is small (in the case of “0”), data may not be immediately updated due to a time lag due to transmission / reception of a communication confirmation command. Thereby, even if the player operates the ball launch handle 134 continuously, the firing interval of the in-flight ball 710 may not be constant.

That is, the game ball number update process is closely related to the in-flight ball 710 launch control and ball feed control. Hereinafter, launch control and ball feed control will be described.
<Ball feed control process and launch control process>

  With reference to FIGS. 346 to 357, the firing control process and the ball feed control process of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  FIG. 346 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration relating to the ball feed control process and the firing control process. The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, a touch sensor 806, a firing intensity sensor 808, a firing stop switch 810, a ball feeding device 616, and a firing device 622. The touch sensor 806, the launch intensity sensor 808, and the launch stop switch 810 are connected to the launch controller (launch control circuit) 800 via the operation unit relay board 802. The ball feeder 616 and the launcher 622 are connected to the launch controller 800 via the launch relay board 804. The firing control unit 800 is a launch control circuit provided in the ball number control unit 600 as an example here, but may be configured separately from the ball number control unit 600.

  The touch sensor 806, the firing intensity sensor 808, and the firing stop switch 810 are provided on the ball launching handle 134, for example, and detect the operation of the ball launching handle 134 by the player. Specifically, the touch sensor 806 detects whether or not the player is in contact with the ball launch handle 134. The launch intensity sensor detects the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and thereby adjusts the launch intensity of the in-flight ball 710 to the game area 124. The operation amount of the ball launching handle 134 is the rotation angle of the ball launching handle 134 and is also referred to as a handle volume. The firing stop switch 810 stops the firing of the in-flight ball 710 when pressed (by detecting the pressing with a firing stop sensor). Touch sensor 806, firing intensity sensor 808, and firing stop switch 810 are included in various sensors for ball feed control.

  The ball feeding device 616 includes, for example, a ball feeding driving device 812 and a ball passage (not shown), and includes a firing device 612, for example, a firing driving device 814 and a launching rod 622a. Here, the ball feeding drive device 812 and the firing drive device 814 will be described using a solenoid as an example, but the present invention is not limited to the solenoid, and may be other actuators such as a motor and a power cylinder.

  When the ball number control unit 600 (launch control unit 800) detects the touch sensor 806 and the launch intensity sensor 808 and detects that the ball launch handle 134 is operated by the player, the ball feed driving device ( A ball feed solenoid) 812 is driven. The ball feed solenoid 812 supports the ball passage in a rotatable manner, and moves along the ball passage in which the in-flight ball 710 rotates by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 812 (for example, suction of the ball passage) and is conveyed to the firing rail 624. Is done. When the in-flight ball 710 stops at the firing rail 624, the ball number control unit 600 drives a firing drive device (launch solenoid) 814. The launch solenoid 814 supports the launch rod 622a in a pivotable manner, and the launch rod 622a is rotated by driving the launch solenoid 814 (for example, suction) to launch the in-flight ball 710 on the launch rail 624 into the game area 124. The strength of the launch is controlled by changing the drive amount (suction amount) of the launch solenoid 814 according to the operation amount (handle volume) of the ball launch handle 134 detected by the launch intensity sensor 808. As described above, when the subtraction sensor 604Z detects that the in-flight ball 710 is fired from the firing rail 624, the number of game balls is decremented by one.

  When the touch state of the ball launch handle 134 is not detected, the ball number control unit 600 (launch control unit 800), when the launch stop switch is pressed, when the ball launch handle 134 is not rotated more than a certain angle, When the management device 620 is not connected, the firing of the in-flight ball 710 (the driving of at least one of the ball feed solenoid 812 and the firing solenoid 814) is stopped.

  Further, the ball number control unit 600 has a main control communication error in the ball number control unit interrupt process, that is, a main control communication error is set in the main control communication error management process shown in FIG. 339 (a). Alternatively, the driving of at least one of the ball feed solenoid 812 and the firing solenoid 814 can be stopped.

  Furthermore, the ball number control unit 600 can control the driving and stopping of the ball feeding solenoid 812 and the firing solenoid 814 with reference to the number of game balls. For example, when the number of game balls is “0 (zero)”, driving of at least one of the ball feed solenoid 812 and the firing solenoid 814 is stopped, and the in-flight ball 710 cannot be fired.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the number of in-flight balls 710 that can be fired in one minute is determined to be a predetermined number or less, and even when the ball launching handle 134 is continuously operated, the shortest time of the firing interval of the in-flight balls 710 is constant. Become. As an example, the number of in-flight balls 710 that can be fired in one minute is 100 or less, whereby the firing interval of the in-flight balls 710 is 600 ms at the shortest. When the number of game balls is low (for example, 10 balls or less, 5 balls or less, etc.), the ball number control unit 600 sets the firing interval of the in-flight ball 710 to the normal firing interval (when the number of game balls is a certain amount or more). It is also possible to perform control such that the firing interval is longer than 600 ms.

  With reference to FIGS. 347 to 350, an example of the ball feed control process and the launch control process of the pachinko machine 100 will be specifically described.

  FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the flow of the ball feed control process (ball feed device control process) for sending the in-flight ball 710 to the firing rail 624. FIG. 347 (a) shows the presence / absence of the number of game balls as the condition of the ball feed control. FIG. 347 (b) is a flowchart in the case where the presence / absence of the number of game balls is not used as the condition for the ball feed control. In either case, the timer management of the shortest firing interval (here, 600 ms) of the in-flight ball 710 is performed by launch control.

  Referring to FIG. 347 (a), in step S2301, the state of various sensors for ball feed control is detected, and it is determined whether or not a ball feed control execution condition is satisfied. The state of the various sensors for ball feeding can be determined by, for example, a touch sensor flag, a volume switch flag, a firing stop flag, a communication error flag, or the like. For example, when the touch sensor 806 detects that the player is touching the ball operation handle 134, the touch sensor flag provided in the RAM is turned on (or, for example, “1” is set). When the operation of the ball launching handle 134 can be digitally determined, for example, when the launch intensity sensor 808 detects that the handle volume is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (the operation amount of the ball launching handle 134 is greater than or equal to a predetermined angle). The volume switch flag provided in the RAM is turned on (or, for example, “1” is set). If the firing stop switch 810 is not pressed, the firing stop flag provided in the RAM is turned off (or, for example, “0” is set). If the main control unit communication error is not determined, the communication error flag is turned off (or, for example, “0” is set).

  In this step, these flags are determined, and if the touch sensor flag is on, the volume switch flag is on, the firing stop flag is off, and the communication error flag is off, the process proceeds to step S2303; The process ends.

  In step S2303, the number of game balls stored in the game ball number storage area is acquired, and the presence or absence is determined. If there is a game ball number, the process proceeds to step S2305, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S2305, the ball feed flag is determined. The ball feed flag is a flag for determining whether or not ball feed (conveyance of the in-vehicle ball 710 to the firing rail 624) has been performed after the previous in-flight ball 710 was fired. The ball feed flag is off (or set to “0”). ) Indicates that the ball is not being fed, and if the ball feed flag is on (or “1” is set), it indicates that the ball is being fed. If the ball feed flag is off, the process proceeds to step S2307; otherwise, the process ends. In order to perform a timer management process for limiting the number of in-flight balls 710 to be shot within 100 per minute in the launch control process, the ball feed flag is determined and set in the ball feed control process. The ball feed flag is initialized (OFF is set) in the launch control process described later, and its timing is 600 ms at the shortest. The ball feed flag setting process and the ball feed flag determination process (this step) in the ball feed control process are necessary for the pachinko machine 100 having a predetermined configuration, which will be described later.

  In step S2307, the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven. As a result, one in-flight ball 710 is conveyed to the firing rail 624.

  In step S2309, the ball feed flag indicating that the ball feed has been performed is turned on.

  In this ball feed control process, ball feed is performed when there is a game ball number, while ball feed is not performed when there is no game ball number.

  With reference to FIG. 4B, a ball feed control process capable of controlling the ball feed regardless of the number of game balls will be described. The various sensors for ball feed control, the state detection thereof, and the ball feed flag are the same as those in FIG.

  In step S2401, the state of various sensors for ball feed control is detected, and it is determined whether or not a ball feed control execution condition is satisfied. For example, if the touch sensor flag is all on, the volume switch flag is on, and the firing stop flag is all off, the process proceeds to step S2403. If not, the process ends.

  In step S2403, the ball feed flag is determined. If the ball feed flag is off, the process proceeds to step S2405. If not, the process ends. In step S2405, the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven. As a result, one in-flight ball 710 is conveyed to the firing rail 624. In step S2407, the ball feed flag indicating that the ball feed has been performed is turned on.

  In this ball feed control process, ball feed is possible even if the number of game balls is “0”. In the ball feed control process of the pachinko machine 100, either (a) or (b) in the figure can be adopted.

  With reference to FIG. 348, the launch control process (launching device control process) for firing the in-flight ball 710 to the game area 124 will be described. This figure is an example of a flowchart for explaining the flow of the firing control process. In these launch control processes, timer management of the shortest launch interval (here, 600 ms) of the in-flight ball 710 is performed, and can be employed together with, for example, any one of the ball feed control processes shown in FIG. Further, in the launch control process shown in the figure, the state detection of the various sensors for ball feed control and the setting of the ball feed flag are the same as in the case of the ball feed control process shown in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 5A, in step S2501, the state of various sensors for ball feed control is detected, and it is determined whether or not a ball feed control execution condition is satisfied. Even if the ball feed control execution conditions of the various sensors for ball feed control are satisfied at the time of determination of the ball feed control process, they may not be satisfied at the timing of the firing control process, so the determination is performed again in this step. When the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied, for example, when the touch sensor flag is all on, the volume switch flag is on, and the firing stop flag is all off, the process proceeds to step S2503. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2513.

  Alternatively, as indicated by the dashed arrow, the processing may be terminated when the ball feed control execution condition is not satisfied. Thereby, for example, when the player once releases the ball operation handle 134 during the 600 ms period of the shortest firing interval, it is possible to perform processing for temporarily stopping the firing interval timer.

  In step S2503, “1” is subtracted from the firing interval timer. The firing interval timer is a timer for maintaining the shortest firing interval of the in-flight ball 710 at 600 ms, and is set to “300” as an initial value (when the timer interrupt processing cycle of the ball number control unit 600 is 2 ms). Yes.

  In step S2505, it is determined whether or not the firing interval timer is “0”. If the firing interval timer is “0” (indicating that 600 ms has elapsed since the previous launch), the process proceeds to step S2507, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S2507, the ball feed flag is determined. If the ball feed flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2509. If not, the process ends. When the ball feed flag set in the ball feed control process of FIG. 347 is off, the ball of the in-flight ball 710 is not being carried out, and therefore the firing renoid 814 does not have to be driven in the firing control process. On the other hand, when the state of the various sensors for ball feed control satisfies the ball feed control execution condition, there is a possibility that the place to be fired has not been fired. Therefore, the ball feed flag is determined in this step, and the driving of the firing solenoid 814 is determined.

  In step S2509, the firing solenoid 814 is driven. If the result of the determination in the previous step S2507 is that the ball feed flag is on, the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied and the ball feed is also being performed, so the firing solenoid 814 is driven.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 100, the ball feed solenoid 812 and the launch solenoid 814 are driven in conjunction with each other, and the ball feed solenoid 812 and the launch solenoid 814 are stopped when the number of game balls reaches “0”. When the number of game balls becomes “0” after the ball has been fed (after the last game ball has been fed), the driving solenoid is allowed to be driven only once. It is necessary to set and determine the ball feed flag in the ball feed control process and to determine the ball feed flag in the launch control process. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above, there is a possibility that an in-flight ball 710 may not be fired from the firing rail 624 after the last number of game balls has been fed (the ball feed flag is on). However, a ball feed flag is provided (the flag is set and determined in the ball feed control process), and by referring to this in the launch control process, an in-flight ball 710 that is not fired even though the ball is fed (the last game) Sphere) can be launched.

  In step S2511, the ball feed flag is turned off (or “0” is set). In step S2513, an initial value is set in the firing interval timer. The initial value here is “300” (= 600 ms / 2 ms). If the ball feed control execution condition is not satisfied in step S2501, that is, OFF indicating that the touch sensor is not detected (or “0” is set), ON indicating that the stop switch is detected (or “1” is set), volume If the switch flag is off (or “0” is set) indicating no operation or the main control unit communication error is on (or “1” is set), the initial value “ 300 "is set. After releasing the flags of the various sensors for ball feeding that do not satisfy the ball feeding condition (after initialization), the in-flight ball 710 can be fired after 600 ms at the shortest.

  FIG. 5B is a flowchart showing the flow of the firing control process that constantly updates the firing interval timer regardless of the ball feed control execution condition.

  In step S2601, “1” is subtracted from the firing interval timer. The firing interval timer is the same as that in FIG. In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the firing interval timer is “0”. If the firing interval timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2505. If not, the process ends.

  In step S2605, the ball feed flag is determined. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2607, and if not, the process ends. The reason for determining the ball feed flag is the same as in FIG.

  In step S2607, the state of various sensors for ball feed control is detected, and it is determined whether or not the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied. If the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2609; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2613.

  In step S2609, the firing solenoid 814 is driven. In step S2611, the ball feed flag is turned off (or “0” is set). In step S2613, an initial value is set in the firing interval timer. The initial value here is “300” (= 600 ms / 2 ms).

  FIG. 349 is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the ball feed control process and the launch control process when timer management of the shortest firing interval (here, 600 ms) of the in-flight ball 710 is performed by the ball feed control process. FIG. 4A is a flowchart of a ball feed control process (ball feed device control process), and FIG. 4B is a flowchart of a launch control process (launch device control process). Note that the detection of the state of the various sensors for ball feed control and the setting of the ball feed flag in the same figure are the same as in the case of the ball feed control process shown in FIG.

  In step S2701, “1” is subtracted from the ball feed interval timer. The ball feeding interval timer is a timer for maintaining the shortest ball feeding interval of the in-flight ball 710 at 600 ms, and is set to “300” as an initial value (when the timer interrupt processing cycle of the ball number control unit 600 is 2 ms). Has been. By limiting the shortest ball feeding interval to 600 ms, the shortest firing interval is also limited to 600 ms.

  In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the ball feeding interval timer is “0”. If the ball feed interval timer is “0” (indicating that 600 ms has elapsed since the previous ball feed), the process proceeds to step S2705; otherwise, the process ends.

  In step S2705, an initial value is set in the ball feeding interval timer. The initial value here is “300” (= 600 ms / 2 ms).

  In step S2707, the state of various sensors for ball feed control is detected, and it is determined whether or not the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied. If the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied, for example, if the touch sensor flag is all on, the volume switch flag is on, and the firing stop flag is all off, the process proceeds to step S2709; otherwise, the process ends.

  In step S2709, the number of game balls stored in the game ball number storage area is acquired, and the presence or absence is determined. If there is a game ball number, the process proceeds to step S2711. If not, the process ends.

  In step S2711, the ball feed flag is determined. If the ball feed flag is off, the process proceeds to step S2713. If not, the process ends.

  In step S2713, the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven, and one in-flight ball 710 is conveyed to the firing rail 624. In step S2715, the ball feed flag indicating that the ball feed has been performed is turned on.

  In this ball feed control process, the game ball 710 is sent to the firing rail 624 at a constant cycle (600 ms) regardless of the number of game balls. In this case, even if the number of game balls is increased by award balls, rental balls, etc. immediately after the final number of game balls is launched (when the number of game balls is changed from “0” to “10”), After the number is updated (increased), ball feeding is not performed immediately, but ball feeding is performed at a constant cycle according to the updated ball feeding interval timer (regardless of the number of game balls).

  The flow of the firing control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S2801, the state of various sensors for ball feed control is detected, and it is determined whether or not a ball feed control execution condition is satisfied. If the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied, for example, if the touch sensor flag is all on, the volume switch flag is on, and the firing stop flag is all off, the process proceeds to step S2803. If not, the process ends.

  In step S2803, the ball feed flag is determined. If the ball feed flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2805; otherwise, the process ends.

  In step S2805, firing solenoid 814 is driven. In step S2807, the ball feed flag is set to OFF.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the launch control process, the ball feed permission flag may be set to ON (or “1”) after the launch (after the firing solenoid is driven in step S2805) using the ball feed permission flag. Good. When the flag is on, it indicates that ball feeding is permitted. In that case, in the ball feed process of FIG. 9A, the ball feed permission flag is determined before the ball feed solenoid drive process (step S2713). When the flag is on, the ball feed solenoid is driven and driven. Later, the ball feed permission flag is set to off (or “0”). Further, instead of the ball feed solenoid driving condition, the ball feed permission flag may be turned off under other conditions. Another condition is, for example, detection by the subtraction sensor 604Z. Alternatively, the ball feed permission flag may be set to OFF by the logical product of the ball feed solenoid driving condition and other conditions. For example, when the ball feed solenoid is driven and the subtraction sensor 604Z correctly detects the in-flight ball 710. The ball feed permission flag may be set off.

  With reference to FIG. 350, the other form of a ball | bowl feed control process (ball | bowl feeder control apparatus) and a firing control process (launching apparatus control process) is demonstrated. FIG. 350 shows an example of a flowchart in the case of performing a series of processes without separating the ball feed control process and the firing control process.

  In this case, the ball feed solenoid 812 and the firing solenoid 814 are driven based on the value of a common timer (for example, a firing interval timer) that manages the shortest interval between the firing and the ball feeding. That is, the ball feed solenoid 812 and the launch solenoid are alternately driven at regular intervals (for example, every 300 ms), and the ball 710 is fed and fired. The state detection of various sensors for ball feed control is the same as the processing described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In step S2901, the state of various sensors for ball feed control is detected, and it is determined whether or not a ball feed control execution condition is satisfied. If the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2903; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2913.

  In step S2903, “1” is subtracted from the firing interval timer. The firing interval timer is the same as the above-described firing interval timer, but the ball feeding interval is also managed here.

  In step S2905, it is determined whether or not the firing interval timer is a predetermined value (here, “150”). When the shortest firing interval is 600 ms, the initial value of the firing interval timer is set to “300”. In this process, since the ball is fed at regular intervals during the shortest firing interval, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing interval timer is “150”. If “150”, the process proceeds to step S2907; In the case, the process proceeds to step S2909. In step S2907, the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven.

  In step S2909, it is determined whether or not the firing interval timer is “0”. If the firing interval timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2911, and if not, the process ends. In step S2911, the firing solenoid 814 is driven.

  In step S2913, the value of the firing interval timer is set to the initial value “300”.

  In this process as well, the above-described ball feed flag may be provided and determined. Alternatively, the number of game balls may be determined before the ball feed solenoid driving process in step S2907, and the ball feed solenoid 812 may be driven only when there is a game ball number.

  In this processing, for example, the state of various sensors for ball feed control is detected in step S2901, and it is determined whether or not the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, for example, if the player releases his hand from the ball launching handle 134 in the middle of 600 ms, the in-flight ball 710 cannot be fired until 600 ms have elapsed since the time when the ball launching handle 134 was operated thereafter. Furthermore, if the hand is released from the ball launch handle 134 within 300 ms after the ball is fed, the ball is fed again even though the ball has already been fed (before launch). In order to avoid this, there is a method of using a ball feed flag or the like to not initialize the firing interval timer even when the touch sensor is not detected (when non-contact is detected) at least after ball feeding. .

  FIGS. 351 to 353 are timing charts showing examples of driving states of the ball feed solenoid 812 and the firing solenoid 814. An example of a change in the number of game balls by driving the ball feed solenoid 812 (change in the number of game balls due to the detection of the in-flight ball 710 by the subtraction sensor 604Z) is also shown.

  In FIG. 351 (a), whether or not ball feeding is possible is limited depending on the number of game balls (for example, ball feeding control processing in FIG. 347 (a)), and the shortest firing interval is managed on the firing control side. The timing chart of (when the number of game balls decreases gradually) is shown. The ball number controller 600 drives the ball feed solenoid 812, and the ball feed flag is turned on when the in-flight ball 710 is conveyed to the firing rail 624. Since the ball feed flag is on, the firing solenoid 814 is driven to fire the in-flight ball 710 and turn off the ball feed flag. When the in-flight ball 710 is sent from the ball feed solenoid 812 to the launching device 622, this is detected by the subtraction sensor 604Z, and the number of game balls is updated. After a slight time lag, since the ball feed flag is off, the ball number control unit 600 drives the ball feed solenoid 812. Thereafter, the process proceeds in the same manner. The firing interval of the firing solenoid is 600 ms at the shortest. When the number of game balls is changed from “1” to “0”, for example, even when the ball launching handle 134 is operated and the ball feed control execution condition is satisfied, the ball number control unit 600 is indicated by a broken line. Thus, since the ball feed solenoid 812 is not driven and the ball feed flag is off, the firing solenoid 814 is not driven either. The firing solenoid 814 stops indirectly when the number of game balls reaches “0”.

  FIG. 351 (b) is a timing chart when the processing is the same as that of FIG. 351 (a), but the driving interval of the ball feed solenoid 812 is within 600 ms.

  For example, when the in-flight ball 710 is fired by driving the launch solenoid 814 for the third time and the number of game balls becomes “0”, the next ball feed solenoid stops as shown by a broken line. Immediately thereafter, when the number of game balls increases to “10” due to a prize ball or the like, the ball number control unit 600 immediately drives the ball feed solenoid 812. By driving the ball feed solenoid 812, the ball number control unit 600 drives the firing solenoid 814 again after elapse of 600 ms from the previous driving of the firing solenoid 814, and fires the in-flight ball 710. When the ball feed flag is turned off, the ball number control unit 600 drives the ball feed solenoid 812 thereafter. The firing interval timer is managed in the launch control process, and the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven when the ball feed flag is turned off. Therefore, from the driving of the ball feed solenoid 812 when the number of game balls increases. The interval t1 until the next driving of the ball feed solenoid 812 may be within 600 ms, but the firing interval of the firing solenoid 814 is managed at 600 ms.

  FIG. 351 (c) is a timing chart showing an example when the driving interval of the ball feed solenoid 812 exceeds 600 ms. The ball feed control process is, for example, a timing chart when the same process as the process shown in FIG. 348 (a) is performed, but the presence or absence of a game ball is also determined in the driving condition of the firing solenoid 814 in step S2501. .

  For example, when the in-flight ball 710 is fired by driving the launch solenoid 814 for the third time and the number of game balls becomes “0”, the next ball feed solenoid stops as shown by a broken line. Immediately thereafter, when the number of game balls increases to “10” due to a prize ball or the like, the ball number control unit 600 immediately drives the ball feed solenoid 812. When the driving condition of the firing solenoid 814 includes “the number of game balls is present”, the firing solenoid 814 is driven after 600 ms from the restart of the ball feeding solenoid 812, and then the next ball feeding solenoid 812. Drive. Therefore, in this case, the interval t2 from the ball feed solenoid 812 to the next ball feed solenoid 812 after the number of game balls has increased may be 600 ms or more.

  FIG. 352 (a) is a timing chart immediately after the touch sensor 806 of the ball launch handle 134 is detected. When the ball number controller 600 detects that the touch sensor 806 is turned on, the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven. As a result, the in-flight ball 710 is conveyed to the firing rail 624, but the ball number control unit 600 drives the firing solenoid 814 600 ms after the detection by the touch sensor 806.

  FIG. 352 (b) is an example of a timing chart shown in FIG. 349 when the shortest interval of ball feeding is managed to 600 ms in the ball feeding control processing. The ball feed solenoid 812 is driven at 600 ms intervals to perform ball feed. On the other hand, since the firing solenoid 814 is driven by the ball number solenoid 600 when the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven (when the ball feed flag is on), a relatively short time t3 has elapsed after the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven. May be driven later. When the number of game balls reaches “0”, the ball number control unit 600 stops any driving.

  FIG. 352 (c) is an example of a time chart of the ball feeding and firing control process shown in FIG. In this case, the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven at intervals of 600 ms, and the firing solenoid 814 is driven when 300 ms elapses after the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven. The driving interval of the ball feed solenoid 812 and the driving interval of the firing solenoid 814 are both 600 ms. When the number of game balls reaches “0”, the ball number control unit 600 stops any driving.

FIG. 353 is a time chart showing another form of the firing control process. Even when the number of game balls becomes “0” and the driving of the ball feed solenoid 812 is stopped, the ball number control unit 600 may continue to drive the firing solenoid 814. If the ball feeding solenoid 812 is stopped and the ball feeding is not performed, the increase or decrease in the number of game balls is not affected even if the firing solenoid 814 is driven.
<Modification of game media path>

  With reference to FIGS. 354 to 356, another form of the game medium path 610A will be described.

  FIG. 354 is a front view of the gaming area 124. The same components as those shown in FIG. 312 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In this case as well, the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the in-flight ball 710 sent from the ball feeder 616 to the launcher 622.

  The game medium path 610 </ b> A includes a ball polishing device 612, a lifting device 614, and a ball feeding device 616, for example, a storage unit 830 for an in-flight ball 710 between the lifting device 614 and the ball feeding device 616. The storage unit 830 includes, for example, a first storage unit 832 and a second storage unit 834, and the inboard ball 710 discharged from the lifting device 614 is temporarily stored in the first storage unit 832. In the second storage unit 834, a part or all of the in-flight sphere 710 stored in the first storage unit 832 is stored. The number of in-flight balls 710 in the second storage unit 834 is an amount corresponding to a part or all of the number of game balls. The in-flight ball 710 stored in the second storage unit 834 is conveyed to the firing rail 624 by the ball feeder 616.

  More specifically, as an example, the second storage unit 834 can store up to 100 (maximum storage number) in-flight balls 710. For example, all of the in-flight balls 710 can be stored in the first storage unit 832. When the number of game balls is 100 or more (for example, 2000), 100 in-flight balls 710 are sent from the first storage unit 832 to the second storage unit 834. When one in-flight ball 710 is launched, the number of stored in the second storage unit 834 is 99, and when passage is detected by the subtraction sensor 604Z, one is subtracted from the number of gaming balls, and the number of gaming balls is 1999. Become a piece. Since the number of game balls is greater than the maximum storage number (100) of the second storage unit 834 and the number of storages (99) of the second storage unit 834 is less than the maximum storage number (100), the first storage unit 832 Is sent to the second reservoir 834, and the number of reservoirs in the second reservoir 834 is 100. On the other hand, when the number of game balls is less than the number of storages (100) in the second storage unit 834, even when the in-flight ball 710 is fired, the in-flight ball 710 is transferred from the first storage unit 832 to the second storage unit 834. do not send. In this way, the increase or decrease of the number of game balls can be managed by the in-flight ball 710 that actually circulates.

  In such a configuration, the ball feed solenoid 812 and the firing solenoid 814 can be driven regardless of the number of game balls. In the case of the enclosed pachinko machine 100, when there is no game ball number on the electronic information, the in-flight ball 710 can be circulated, so that the ball feed solenoid 812 and the launch solenoid 814 are driven when there is no game ball number. Is a problem.

  According to such a configuration, when there is no game ball number, the in-flight ball 710 is not stored in the storage unit 830, and thus such a problem does not occur.

  With reference to FIG. 355, the stored ball number management process in the storage unit 830 of the game medium path 610 shown in FIG. 354 will be described. FIG. 355 is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the stored ball number management process.

  In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the in-flight ball 710 has passed through the subtraction sensor 604. If it is determined that it has passed through the subtraction sensor 604Z, the process proceeds to step S3003, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S3003, “1” is subtracted from the number of game balls, assuming that the number of game balls consumed by passing the in-flight ball 710.

  In step S3005, the number of game balls is compared with the maximum number (for example, 100) of the second storage unit 834. If the number of game balls is larger than the maximum stored number, the process proceeds to step S3007, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S3007, the second storage unit 834 storage number is compared with the maximum storage number. If it is stored but less than the maximum storage number, the process proceeds to step S3009, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S3009, the number of shot balls is subtracted from the maximum storable amount, and the difference is sent from the first storage unit 832 to the second storage unit 834.

  In step S3011, the number of shot balls is initialized (cleared).

  In addition, this flowchart extracts and demonstrates the main processes of management of the storage number in the storage part 830, and may not be performed in order of the process shown in figure depending on the timing which performs this process. This processing is executed at the time of updating the number of game balls. For example, the same processing can be performed when the number of game balls is set by periodic interruption processing, serial command management processing, or when the replay button 146 is operated for the lending button 144. Further, for example, the above-mentioned number of in-balls can be used as the number of shot balls, but a processing flow that is appropriately updated is selected in consideration of the timing of initialization or the like.

  FIG. 356 is a timing chart of the ball feed solenoid 812 and the launch solenoid 814 in the modified example of the game medium path 610, and the number of game balls is also shown.

  The ball number control unit 600 drives the ball feed solenoid 812 at, for example, 600 ms intervals, and drives the firing solenoid 814 after a predetermined time has elapsed after the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven. For example, when the number of game balls becomes “0” by driving the launch solenoid 814 for the third time, the number of in-flight balls 710 stored in the second storage unit 834 is also zero. Accordingly, in this case, even if the ball feed solenoid 812 and the firing solenoid 814 continue to drive, the in-flight ball 710 is not launched into the game area 124.

  FIG. 357 is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the communication process between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 and the timing of the firing control process and the ball feed control process.

  The timing chart of the main control unit 300 and the number-of-balls control unit 600 in this figure is the same as that shown in FIG. 342 (b), and shows a state in which a winning acceptance is received at the timing B after the number of game balls reaches “0”. Show. For example, when the firing solenoid 814 is driven at an interval of 600 ms, the next drive may be at the position of timing F (timing G, H, C or the same between them). At timing G, the number of winning balls “10” to be the number of gaming balls is displayed on the winning ball number display section 690, but the number of gaming balls is not updated (executed between timing C and timing D). Therefore, the number of game balls remains “0” at the original drive timing of the firing solenoid 814. For this reason, the driving of the firing solenoid 814 (or the ball feed solenoid 812) is limited. Alternatively, since the number of stored balls in the second storage unit 834 shown in FIG. 354 is 0, even when the firing solenoid 814 (or the ball feed solenoid 812) is driven, the firing of the in-flight ball 710 is restricted. That is, in this case, even if the player operates the ball launch handle 134, the in-flight ball 710 is not launched, and the in-flight ball 710 is launched after the timing D. The timing of driving the firing solenoid 814 (launching the in-flight ball 710) is delayed from 600 ms (position of timing F) which is the shortest firing interval, and the firing interval becomes longer.

  In this way, when the number of game balls is small (when winning in the case of “0”, data may not be updated immediately due to a communication time lag, and the firing interval becomes non-constant. That is, the number of game balls has decreased. In some cases, even if the ball launch handle 134 is continuously operated so that the in-flight ball 710 is fired at the shortest interval, the timing of the in-flight ball 710 firing is not constant and can be longer than the shortest launch interval. Since the firing interval gradually increases as the number of game balls decreases, the player recognizes that the number of game balls is decreasing even if the player does not watch the ball number display unit 640, for example. In addition, it will be possible to rent or replay and replenish the number of game balls before the number of game balls is exhausted. It is possible to enjoy during the game. In addition, in the gaming shop side can increase the operation of the gaming table.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the main control unit 300 transmits a command (for example, the first communication confirmation command and the winning ball command) that leads the communication process to the ball number control unit 600 has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a command (for example, a first communication confirmation command and a command for requesting the main control unit 300 to transmit a prize ball command) led by the ball number control unit 600 is transmitted to the main control unit 300. It may be configured to.

  In the present embodiment, the case where one prize ball command is transmitted per interrupt process of the main control unit 300 has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a plurality of prize ball commands are transmitted for one interrupt process of the main control unit 300, or a predetermined group (a group such as each prize opening or the same number of prize balls) is possible. ) May be configured to transmit in units, or may be configured to transmit a plurality of commands collectively within a range not exceeding 255 commands, for example.

  Further, the serial command management process of the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 has been described as an example in which each of the timer interrupt processes is executed, but the serial command management process of the main control unit 300 is the main control. In the main part process, the serial command management process of the ball number control unit 600 may be performed by the main process of the ball number control unit.

  Further, various transmission processes and output processes other than the serial command management process of the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 may be performed in the main processes of the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600, for example, Configuration that performs all transmission and output processing by main processing, configuration that performs all transmission and output processing by respective timer interrupt processing, part of transmission and output processing by main processing, and other processing by timer interrupt processing It may be a configuration or the like.

  The communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500 may be serial communication or parallel communication.

  Further, the game ball number updating process (game ball number setting process) is performed by the interrupt process of the ball number control unit, but the execution timing is not limited to that illustrated in the figure. For example, depending on the timing of the timer interrupt process, the game ball number may be updated by the same interrupt process after receiving the prize ball command, or the game ball number may be updated by the next interrupt process after receiving the prize ball command. Good.

  Similarly, the update timing of various flags and statuses is not limited to the illustrated timing.

  Further, the communication confirmation command transmission process between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 is periodically performed, but may be transmitted only before the prize ball command is transmitted. That is, the communication confirmation command 1 transmission may be performed for each prize ball command 1 transmission. In addition, when regularly transmitting and receiving a communication confirmation command, the ball number control unit 600 may transmit information on the state of the device or the like at the transmission timing of the communication confirmation command. If these pieces of information are transmitted / received by sending / receiving a prize ball command, the amount of communication may increase. However, if the communication confirmation command is transmitted, the influence can be reduced even if the amount of communication increases. Furthermore, when a communication confirmation command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600, a prize ball command may be transmitted together. Such a configuration is also possible by appropriately performing retransmission processing and the like.

  Also, the winning number storage area may be provided for each number of winning balls, for example, a common area for the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 for each ball detection sensor 320B. Good.

  Further, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 may have different numbers of winning balls, for example, three and one.

  The ball feed control execution condition may include a case where the number of in-balls and the number of out-balls do not match.

In addition, after the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven and before the firing solenoid 814 is driven, the firing solenoid 814 is attracted when the ball feed solenoid 812 is driven. Accordingly, even if the handle volume is set to “0” for the purpose of stopping the firing, the in-flight ball 710 is fired, and the firing cannot be stopped.
<Ball count control process during power interruption / power recovery>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 358 to FIG. 361, the ball number management control process at the time of power interruption / power recovery of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  FIG. 358 and FIG. 359 are schematic diagrams for explaining the ball number management control process when the pachinko machine 100 is disconnected or restored. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 determines the number of in-balls, the number of out-balls, and the number of balls in the area by the insertion detection sensor (subtraction sensor 604Z) and the discharge detection sensor (winning detection sensor 60S and non-winning detection sensor 604K). The number management control is performed to update and store at the timing (for example, by the number control unit timer process) and monitor the presence or absence of abnormality of these values. When the power supply is cut off (power cut off) during the game and power is restored thereafter, the number of in balls, the number of out balls, and the number of balls in the region are initialized even if the number of balls in the region exists.

  More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 358 (a), there are three in-region balls in the game (for example, the value stored in the in-region ball number storage area is “+3”). If there is a power interruption due to a power failure or the like, the value stored in the in-sphere storage area as shown in FIG. “0” is stored in the inner ball number storage area), and ball number management control is newly started.

  If the information on the number of in-balls, out-balls, and in-area balls remains in the respective storage areas of the RAM at the time of power recovery after the power interruption, the pachinko machine 100 is associated with, for example, a new game being started. In some cases, it is determined that the in-flight ball 710 remains in the game area 124 and is notified as an error. A player who has newly started a game cannot play an appropriate game and may be suspected of fraud. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the time of power recovery after the power interruption, for example, the value stored in the in-region ball number storage area in the initialization process of the ball number control unit main process or the like is cleared, and the number of in balls at the time of power interruption, Regardless of the information on the number of out balls and the number of balls in the area, the ball number management control is newly started. As a result, the player can play an appropriate game.

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of balls in the area before power interruption, the storage area for the abnormality information (error information) is not initialized and is maintained until power is restored.

  This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 359 (a), during the game, the number of in-region balls (for example, 20) in the in-region ball number storage area exceeds the abnormality determination condition and is determined to be abnormal, and the in-region ball number error flag is turned on ( Or, when the power is cut off in a state where “1” indicating an abnormality is set, at the time of power recovery, the ball number control unit 600 stores the ball number storage area, the ball number storage area, and the ball number storage area in the area. While the stored value is cleared, the value of the in-region ball number error flag is not cleared at the time of power recovery, and the information is maintained ((b) in the figure), and the quantity management process is newly performed.

In this way, information that an abnormality has occurred is maintained even after power interruption / recovery, so it is possible to transmit an abnormal state to an external device or the like after power recovery or to notify the abnormality, for example. .
<Power control unit>

  The power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 360 is a block diagram of the power control unit 660 and the control unit connected thereto. In the following description, DC represents direct current, AC represents alternating current, and VBB represents a battery backed up voltage.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC100V power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, and supplies the direct current to the ball number control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400. The ball number control unit 600 supplies power to the main control unit 300 and the night monitoring switch 692, and the first sub control unit 400 supplies power to the second sub control unit 500.

  The power supply control unit 660 includes a first rectifying / smoothing circuit (rectifying circuit 1 / smoothing circuit 1) 660A, a first + 24V generating circuit (+ 24V generating circuit 1) 660B, and a first + 12V generating circuit (+ 12V generating circuit). 1) 660C, first + 5V generation circuit (+ 5V generation circuit 1) 660D, first power cutoff detection circuit (power cutoff detection circuit 1) 660E, and second power cutoff detection circuit (power cutoff detection circuit 2) ) 660F, a RAM clear switch circuit 660G, a first backup power supply generation circuit (backup power supply generation circuit 1) 660H, a second backup power supply generation circuit (backup power supply generation circuit 2) 660I, and a third backup power supply Generation circuit (backup power supply generation circuit 3) 660J, second rectifier circuit and smoothing circuit (rectifier circuit 2 / smoothing circuit 2) 660 When, a second + 24V generating circuit (+ 24V generating circuit 2) 660 L, a second + 12V generating circuit (+ 12V generating circuit 2) 660M, a second + 5V generation circuit (+ 5V generating circuit 2) 660N.

  The power supply control unit 600 generates a power supply rectified and smoothed from a single-phase AC 100V supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 as a first power supply system (DC24V-1, DC12V-1, DC5V-1) by a switching method. Moreover, it produces | generates as a 2nd power supply system (DC24V-2, DC12V-2, DC5V-2) from the single phase alternating current 100V by the switching system using the power supply by the rectification smoothing different from the above.

  The uses of power and signals in the ball number control unit 600 are as follows. DC24V-1 is a polishing motor power supply, DC12V-1 is a power supply for various sensors 604, a lifting motor power supply, a launch solenoid power supply and a ball feed solenoid power supply, DC5V-1 is an IC power supply, and VBB-2 is As a RAM backup power source, the power shutdown 1 is used as a power shutdown detection signal, and the RAM clear is used as a RAM clear switch signal.

  The uses of power and signals in the main control unit 300 are as follows. DC24V-1 is a power supply for various motors and solenoids, DC12V-1 is a power supply for various sensors, motors and solenoids, DC5V-1 is an IC power supply, VBB-1 is a power supply for RAM backup, and power shutoff 2 is a power shutoff As a detection signal, RAM clear is used as a RAM clear switch signal. In the night monitoring switch 692, VBB-3 is used as a backup power source.

The uses of power and signals in the second sub-control unit 500 are as follows. DC24V-2 is used as a power source for generating illumination, motors and other power sources, DC12V-1 is used as a power source for generating electrical devices, motors and other power sources, and DC5V-2 is used as a power source for IC power sources and other power sources. Used as
<Operation principle of backup power supply>

  The operation principle of the backup power supply is as follows. The main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 store the gaming state at the time of power interruption in the RAM by power-off processing in order to restore the gaming state at the time of power interruption / power recovery (for example, at the time of power failure recovery) The contents of RAM are held by a backup power source.

  The backup function configuration of the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a backup power supply unit, a power supply monitoring circuit, and a RAM clear switch (not shown). Three backup power supplies are generated from 5 V, and the ball number control unit 600 and the main control unit are provided. 300 and the night monitoring switch 692. In addition, the power supply is monitored, and two power-off signals are generated at the time of power-off and are output to the ball number control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  A RAM clear switch is mounted for the function of initializing the backed-up RAM data, and is output to the ball number control unit 600 and the main control unit 300. The generated power source / signal is supplied to the ball number control unit 600, and the power source / signal is supplied to the main control unit 300 via the ball number control unit 600.

  Items to be backed up by the main control unit 300 include, for example, a jackpot state (including the number of rounds), a high probability / short time state, a random number value of a reserved memory (special symbol, normal symbol), an error state, an unsent command, a movable member ( The operation state of the ordinary electric accessory and the first type special electric accessory). The backup items of the ball number control unit 600 include, for example, the number of game balls, an error state, an unsent command, game information, game table information, (IC) card information, and the like. The gaming table information includes, for example, the unique ID of the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, the unique ID of the CPU of the ball number control unit 600, the manufacturer code of the gaming table, the security chip manufacturer code, the format code of the gaming table, and the distribution code. The card information is a card ID or the like.

  FIG. 361 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of items stored in each storage area provided in the RAM in the power shutdown process.

  In each storage area, for example, in order from the smallest address (7F00H), for example, the number of game balls (value of the game ball number storage area), the number of rented balls (value of the rented ball number storage area), the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls stored) Area value), in-area ball number abnormal state (in-area ball number error flag value), number of times of inner frame opening during power interruption (described later), number of times of glass frame opening during power interruption (described later), unsent command, The game table information, the card information, the RWM checksum value, the program activation state flag, the power supply state information, the number of balls in the area (value of the number of balls in the area) are stored. Hereinafter, these areas may be referred to as backup areas.

  Then, in the initialization process in which the power interruption is not detected (for example, step S113 in FIG. 317 and step S1011 in FIG. 321), all of these storage areas are initialized (cleared), and the power recovery process at the time of recovery start In step S111 in FIG. 317 and step S1009 in FIG. 321, only some of them are initialized (cleared). That is, there is a first area composed of storage areas from a predetermined address address to a predetermined address address, and a second area composed of address addresses after that. In the initialization process, the first area and The second area is cleared, and in the power recovery process, only the second area in the latter half is cleared.

  In the present embodiment, the in-region ball number abnormal state (the value of the in-region ball number error flag) is stored in the storage region of the first region, and the in-region ball number (the value of the in-region ball number storage region) is It is stored in the storage area of the second area. Thereby, at the time of power recovery after power interruption, the ball number control unit 600 clears the value stored in the in-region ball number storage area, while the value of the in-region ball number error flag is not cleared at the time of power recovery. The information can be maintained and notified.

  Further, since the first area is not cleared at the time of recovery start, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM when the recovery condition is satisfied (power recovery process). That is, the number of playable balls, the number of rented balls, and the number of prize balls in the backup area are set in the game ball number storage area, the number of rented balls storage area, and the number of prize balls stored in the RAM at the time of power recovery.

  In addition, you may memorize | store another error state in the backup area | region of an in-area ball number abnormal state. Further, the in-ball number (value of the in-ball number storage area) and the out-ball number (value of the out-ball number storage area) may be backed up in the second area.

In this way, the ball number control unit 600 performs error management processing such as monitoring and notification of various errors, and various processing associated therewith. This will be described below.
<Error management processing>

  With reference to FIGS. 362 to 366, error management processing mainly performed by the ball number control unit 600 will be described. FIGS. 362 to 366 are flowcharts for explaining the flow of processing performed by the ball number control unit 600. Here, the main flow of error management processing will be mainly described. In the flowcharts of FIG. 362 to FIG. 366, an example in which the process of transmitting a communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 to the ball number control unit 600 (the above-described serial command management process) is performed in the ball number control unit main process. In this respect, it can be said that this is another form of the above-described ball number control unit 600 (see FIGS. 321, 322, and 340) that performs serial command management processing by ball number control unit timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 362 is a diagram for explaining the processing executed by the CPU of the ball number control unit 600. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the ball number control unit 600, and FIG. These are the flowcharts of command reception interruption of the ball number control part 600. FIG. Note that detailed description of processing similar to the processing (step) already described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 321 is omitted.

  Steps S3101 to S3113 are the same as steps S1001 to S1013 in FIG. In the power recovery process in step S3109, the storage area for various information stored in the power shutdown process is cleared to a smaller extent (only the storage area in the second area) than in the initialization process in step S311.

  In step S3115, it is determined whether there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main control unit 300. If there is unanalyzed data, the process proceeds to step S3117. If there is no unanalyzed data, step S3119 is performed. Proceed to In step S3117, command analysis processing is performed. This will be described in detail later.

  In step S3119, it is determined whether there is an untransmitted command. If there is an unsent command, the process proceeds to step S3121, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3123.

  In step S3121, command output processing is performed. In the command output process, the command set in the command analysis process in step S3117 is output.

  Steps S3123 to S3127 are the same as steps S1019 to S1023 in FIG. The power interruption process in step S3125 will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interruption of the ball number control unit 600, which is the same as FIG. 321B. In step S3201, the received command is stored.

  FIG. 363 is a flowchart for explaining the flow of the command analysis process (step S3121) and the power interruption process (step S3125) of FIG.

  The command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S3301, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command is received. If received, the process proceeds to step S3303. If not, the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In step S3303, processing upon receiving a prize ball command is performed. In this process, for example, the value of the prize ball number storage area is read, and the prize ball number of the received command is added and stored in the original prize ball number storage area. Also, the value of the prize ball number storage area is added to the value of the game ball number storage area to clear the value of the prize ball number storage area.

  In step S3305, it is determined whether a communication confirmation command (hereinafter referred to as a main control communication confirmation command) from the main control unit 300 is received. This main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 by the serial command transmission process of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 333 (d). If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3307, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S3307, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the first main control communication confirmation command after power-on. If it is the first main control communication confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S3309; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3313. The main control communication confirmation command also includes information on whether the main control unit 300 is at the initial start or the return start.

  In step S3309, a main control communication confirmation command received flag is set. For example, when the flag is set to ON (or “1”), it means that it has been received, and when the flag is turned ON in a later process, the ball number control unit timer interrupt process is executed.

  In addition, when the main control communication confirmation command includes information indicating the initial activation and the activation method of the ball number control unit 600 is the return activation, the activation method of the ball number control unit 600 is the initial activation, A predetermined area of the RAM storage area may be initialized. In the case of return activation, only a part of the storage area (second area) shown in FIG. 361 is initialized, but the main control unit 300 indicates the initial activation state and the ball number control unit When 600 is a recovery start, all the backup areas (the first area and the second area) may be initialized.

  In step S3311, it is determined whether there is a nighttime frame opening error, and error information is set in the backup area of the RAM. The nighttime frame opening error is determined as follows. A counter IC (inner frame opening counter) is provided that counts every time the inner frame 104 is opened (every time the inner frame opening sensor detects opening), and counts the number of times the inner frame 104 is opened. The number of times the inner frame 104 is opened can be counted by the counter IC even when the power is cut off (at night). The value of the inner frame opening counter at the time of power interruption is stored in the storage area of the number of times of opening the inner frame at the time of power interruption in the backup area. When the first main control communication confirmation command is received, the number of times that the inner frame is released when the backup area is interrupted is compared with the value of the inner frame release counter (current number of times the inner frame is released). While determining as an error, the number of differences is stored in the RAM as error information. Similarly, regarding the number of times of opening the glass frame 106, the number of times of opening is counted by a counter IC (glass frame opening counter) that is counted every time the glass frame 106 is opened. It is stored in the storage area of the number of times of opening the glass frame at the time of power interruption, and monitoring is performed in the same manner.

  In step S3313, processing upon reception of the main control communication confirmation command is performed. Here, an initial value (for example, “500”) is set in a timer area (main control monitoring timer) for monitoring a communication error (main control communication error) with the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 340 (b)).

  The power interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S3401, interrupt prohibition setting processing is performed. In step S3403, clear data is output to all output ports. In step S3405, suspend information is set.

  In step S3407, the value of the inner frame opening counter is stored in the backup area of the number of times of opening of the inner frame at the time of power interruption.

  In step S3409, the value of the glass frame opening counter is stored in the backup area of the number of times of opening the glass frame at power interruption.

  In step S3411, a checksum is calculated. For example, the checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0.

  In step S3413, the calculation result is set in the RWM checksum area, and in step S3415, the built-in RAM access is prohibited.

  With reference to FIG. 364, the ball number control unit interruption process when the ball number control unit main process of FIG. 362 is executed will be described. This figure is a flowchart of another form of the ball number control unit interrupt process shown in FIG. 322, and detailed description of the same processes (steps) as those described in FIG. 322 will be omitted.

  In step S3501, the register value is saved, in step S3503, the interrupt flag is cleared, and in step S3505, WDT clear and restart are performed.

  In step S3507, a received command is processed. In this process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 300 (for example, a prize ball command is received), and if received, the received command data is set in the reception command buffer area.

  In step S3509, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S3511; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3529. Since the main control unit 300 is supplied with power from the ball number control unit 600 (see FIG. 360), its activation is delayed from the ball number control unit 600. For this reason, in this step, until the main control unit 300 is activated, determination processing is performed in order to wait for the processing in subsequent steps S3511 to S3527.

  Step S3511 to step S3517 are the same as step S1201, step S1203, step S1205, and step S1209 in FIG. 322, respectively. The error management process in step S3515 will be described in detail later.

  In step S3519, a game medium path management process is performed. In step S3521, a game ball number management process is performed. In step S3523, an in-area ball number management process is performed. These processes (steps S3519 to S3523) will be described later.

  In step S3525, signal output processing is performed. In the signal output process, for example, every time a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, a winning ball generation signal is output to the management device 620 for a predetermined time (for example, 128 ms). Further, a door open signal is output to the management device 620 while the open state of the inner frame 104 or the glass frame 106 is detected. Note that these signals may be output as external terminal board signals. Furthermore, this step can be omitted when these signals are output in the IU communication processing in step S3517.

  In step S3527, transmission command setting processing is performed. In the transmission command setting process, a communication confirmation command, an error command, and a winning ball signal command to be transmitted from the ball number control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 are set.

  In step S3529, the register value is restored, and in step S3531, interrupt permission is set.

<Error management process, game ball number management process, in-area ball number management process>

  With reference to FIG. 365, the error management process, the game ball number management process, and the in-region ball number management process will be described. FIG. 365 (a) is an example of a flowchart for explaining the flow of error management processing, FIG. 365 (b) is an example of a flowchart for explaining the flow of gaming ball number management processing, and FIG. It is an example of the flowchart explaining the flow of the number-of-spheres management process in an area | region.

  The error management process will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S3601, the presence / absence of opening of the inner frame 104 is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S3603, whether or not the glass frame 106 is opened is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S3605, the presence or absence of a main control communication error is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. The main control communication error is an error when the reception interval of the communication confirmation command (main control communication confirmation command) from the main control unit 300 exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 1000 ms).

  In step S3607, the presence / absence of a management device unconnected error is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. The management device non-connection error is an error when the connection signal with the management device 620 is detected to be off and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 16 ms).

  In step S3609, the presence / absence of a management apparatus communication error is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. The management device communication error is an error when an illegal input is detected in communication with the management device 620. For example, an error occurs when the ball lending operation information and the ball lending request information do not match.

  In step S3611, the presence / absence of an in-area ball count error is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. This is an error when the number of balls in the region exceeds a predetermined range (for example, -20 to +20).

  In step S3613, the presence or absence of a sphere detection sensor error is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. This is an error when the ball detection sensor 604B (subtraction sensor 604Z, winning detection sensor 604S, non-winning detection sensor 604K) detected by the ball number control unit 600 is continuously detected for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second or longer).

  In step S3615, the presence / absence of a cassette error is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. The cassette error is an error when it is detected that the cassette of the ball polishing device 612 is not attached.

  In step S3617, the presence or absence of a motor sensor error is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. For example, an error occurs when a ball polishing motor sensor, a lifting motor sensor, or a cloth feed motor sensor in the game medium path 610 detects an abnormality.

  In step S3619, the presence or absence of other errors is stored in an error status storage area provided in the RAM. For example, when there is an authentication abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 when the power is turned on, or when there is an addition instruction other than during card insertion, the ball detection sensor 320B of the main control unit 300 and the discharge detection sensor of the ball number control unit 600 are allowed to pass. This is the case, for example, when the number of winnings is inconsistent.

  In step S3621, the current value of the inner frame opening counter (0 to 15) updated every time the inner frame 104 is opened is set.

  In step S3623, the current value of the glass frame opening counter (0 to 15) updated every time the glass frame 106 is opened is set.

  In step S3625, an error release switch monitoring process is performed. When the error cancel switch 168 is pressed, the error reset setting is made for all error status storage areas of the ball number control unit 600.

  In step S3627, an error display setting process is performed. In the error display setting process, the LED display of the board display unit 630 provided on the back side of the game board 200 is updated according to the error state.

  With reference to FIG. 365 (b), the game ball number management process will be described.

  In step S3701, it is determined whether or not the game ball number update condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3703. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3705. The update condition of the number of game balls is when there is a ball lending request (when ball lending request information by touching the ball lending button 140 is transmitted from the management device 620 to the ball number control unit 600), when there is a prize ball (award) When the ball command is received by the ball number control unit 600), when the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710, when the operation of the counting button 652 is detected, when the replay button 146 is operated, the return button It is at least one of cases where 142 is operated.

  In step S3703, a game ball number update process is performed. In the game ball number update process, the value stored in the game ball number storage area (number of game balls), the value of the number of ball rental storage area (number of balls lent), the value of the prize ball number storage area (number of prize balls) In the case of a ball rental request, the value of the in-ball number storage area (number of in-balls), the value of the count ball number storage area (count ball number), and the value of the re-play ball number storage area (re-play ball number) are read out respectively. Is added to the number of gaming balls, if there is a prize ball, the number of prize balls is added to the number of gaming balls, if the subtraction sensor 604Z is detected, the number of in-balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls, Detection is subtracted from the number of game balls. If there is an operation of the replay button 146, it is added to the number of game balls. If there is an operation of the return button 142, it is subtracted from the number of game balls. Store in the game ball number storage area.

  In step S3705, a game ball number display update process is performed. In the game ball number display update process, the updated game ball number is displayed on the ball number display unit 640.

  With reference to FIG. 365 (c), the in-region ball number management process will be described.

  In step S3801, it is determined whether or not the in-region ball number update condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3803. If not, the process ends. The update condition of the in-area ball number is that when the subtraction sensor 604Z detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710, when the winning detection sensor 604S detects the passage of the in-flight ball 710, the non-winning detection sensor 604K determines whether the in-flight ball 710 At least one of the cases detected.

In step S3803, the in-region ball number update process is performed. In the in-region ball number update process, the value stored in the in-region ball number storage area (the number of in-region balls), the value in the in-ball number storage area (in-ball number), and the value in the out-ball number storage area (out The number of balls is read out, and if the subtraction sensor 604Z is detected, the number of in-spheres is added to the number of balls in the area. The number is subtracted, and the updated in-region ball number is stored in the original in-region ball number storage area.
<Game media route management processing>

  The game medium route management process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 366 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the game medium path management process, FIG. 366 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the polishing apparatus control process, and FIG. 366 (c) is the lifting apparatus control. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process.

  With reference to FIG. 366 (a), the game medium path management process will be described.

  In step S3901, a polishing apparatus control process (described later) is performed, and in step S3903, a lifting apparatus control process (described later) is performed.

  In step S3905, a ball feeder control process is performed. Since the ball feeder control process is the same as the process described with reference to FIGS. 347 and 349 (a), the description thereof is omitted.

  In step S3907, a launcher control process is performed. Since the launching device control process is the same as the process described with reference to FIGS. 348 and 349 (b), the description thereof is omitted. The ball feeder control process and the launcher control process may be performed as one continuous process as shown in FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 366 (b), the ball polisher control process will be described.

  In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the driving condition for the ball polisher 612 is satisfied. If established, the process proceeds to step S4003, and if not, the process ends. The driving condition of the ball polishing device 612 is when the ball feeding device entrance sensor does not detect the game ball (when it is in a non-full state), and any of the cassette sensor, the polishing motor sensor, and the cloth feeding motor sensor Is normal.

  In step S4003, a ball polisher driving process is performed. When the ball number controller 600 detects that the in-flight ball 710 has entered the ball entrance by the ball polisher entrance sensor, the ball polisher motor is driven. The ball polishing motor is connected to a screw through a gear, and conveys the in-machine ball 710 to the ball outlet while being polished with a polishing cloth by the rotation of the screw. The in-flight ball discharged from the ball outlet is delivered to the lifting device 614.

  With reference to FIG. 366 (c), the lifting device control process will be described.

  In step S4101, it is determined whether the driving condition for the lifting device 614 is satisfied. If established, the process proceeds to step S4103, and if not, the process ends. The driving condition of the lifting device 614 is when the ball feeding device entrance sensor does not detect a game ball (when the ball is not full) and when the lifting motor sensor is normal.

  In step S4103, a lifting device driving process is performed. The ball number control unit 600 drives the lifting motor when it is detected by the lifting device entrance sensor that the in-flight ball 710 has entered the ball entrance. The lifting motor is connected to the screw through a gear, and the balls in the machine are conveyed to the upper part of the pachinko machine 100 one by one by the rotation of the screw. The in-flight ball discharged from the ball outlet is delivered to the ball feeding device 616.

  FIG. 367 shows a ball detection sensor 604B (subtraction sensor 604Z, winning detection sensor 604S and non-winning detection sensor 604K) in the gaming ball number management process of FIG. 365 (b) and the in-area ball number management process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the state (passing) determination of the in-flight ball 710 by detection of. These sphere detection sensors 604B determination method is the same as the determination method by the sphere detection sensor 320B of the main controller 300 described above, but the I / O input port state and the level of each sensor 604Z, 604S, 604K based on it. A state is demonstrated using a schematic diagram.

  The ball number control unit 600 inputs detection signals from the subtraction sensor 604Z, the winning detection sensor 604S, and the non-winning detection sensor 604K via the I / O input port, monitors the presence or absence of the detection signal, and stores various sensors in the RAM. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of 604Z, 604S, and 604K320. The detection interval is a period (2 ms) of timer interrupt processing of the ball number control unit 600.

  If the detection signal of the subtraction sensor 604Z is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the previous detection signal in the RAM. This information is read from the area, this information is stored in the detection signal storage area provided in the RAM, and the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the previous timer interruption process (about 2 ms before) is stored in the RAM. It reads from the provided current detection signal storage area and stores this information in the previous detection signal storage area. Further, the detection signal of the subtraction sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  The information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of the subtraction sensor 604Z stored in each of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times It is determined whether (the current level state, the previous level state, and the last time level state) match the winning determination pattern information. Each time the in-flight ball 710 passes through one subtraction sensor 604Z, the same in-flight ball 710 passes through the same subtraction sensor 604Z each time the ball number control unit timer interrupt processing is started at a very short interval of about 2 ms. A detection signal (level state) indicating that this has occurred is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same in-flight ball 710 has passed through the same subtraction sensor 604Z is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the in-flight ball 710 starts to pass through the subtraction sensor 604Z, the detection signal is not detected twice (level state “0”), the previous detection signal is present (level state “1”), and the current detection signal is present (level state “1”). (State (3)). In this case, it is determined that there is a passage. That is, the past three level states shown in FIG. 367 coincide with predetermined passage determination pattern information (in this embodiment, the level state “0”, the previous level state “1”, and the current level state “1”). In the case (state (3)), it is determined that the in-flight ball 710 has passed through the subtraction sensor 604Z (up edge state). Note that the passage determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, the level state “1”, the previous level state “1”, and the current level state “0”) is stored in the ROM of the ball number control unit 600. After determining that there has been one pass, it is not determined that there has been a pass until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three in the subtraction sensor 604Z matches the pass determination clear pattern information (in state (5)). If the up-edge state “0”) matches the passage determination clear pattern information, it is determined whether or not it matches the passage determination pattern information. The same applies to the winning detection sensor 604K and the non-winning detection sensor 604S.

  With reference to FIG. 368, an example of a notification mode when an error occurs will be described.

  The error (abnormality) to be notified is, for example, at the time of magnetic sensor detection, radio wave sensor detection, vibration sensor detection, authentication error, communication error, winning number error, glass frame 106 / inner frame 104 opening, addition error, proximity sensor Such as abnormalities, abnormal number of balls in the area, or when the nighttime frame is open. The main control unit 300 detects the magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, and vibration sensor. The ball number control unit 600 detects an authentication error, a communication error, a winning number error, an opening of the glass frame 106 / inner frame 104, an addition error, a proximity sensor error, an in-region ball number error, and a nighttime frame opening. Circles in the figure indicate notification. The notification mode includes a game stop that skips a predetermined process of the main control unit 300, a stop of the launch that stops the firing of the in-flight ball 710, a voice output that notifies with a predetermined sound, a lamp lighting that causes the lamp to emit light in a predetermined pattern, a predetermined Liquid crystal display for displaying images (characters) on a liquid crystal display device, UI display for displaying on a ball count UI unit 680 (image display unit 656), and external output for outputting information to an external device (such as a management device 620 or a hall computer) , Etc. The notification by the game stop is controlled by the main control unit 300, the notification by the firing stop is controlled by the ball number control unit 600, and the notification by voice output, lamp lighting and liquid crystal display is performed by the sub control unit (the first sub control unit 400 or the first control unit). 2 sub-control unit 500), the ball number UI unit 680 controls notification by UI display, and the management device 620 controls notification by external output.

  For example, in the notification by the game stop, the magnetic sensor detection, the authentication error, the communication abnormality, the prize number abnormality, for example, between the production random number update process (step S211) and the timer update process (step S213) of the main control unit timer interruption process. If any of them is abnormal, the process proceeds to the power interruption detection determination (step S235). By skipping the processes from the timer update process (step S213) to the device monitoring process (step S233), the game is stopped. The combination of the error type and the notification mode is not limited to the illustrated one. Further, other errors may be notified.

<First Error Notification Mode Using Liquid Crystal Display>

  FIG. 369 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a notification mode of error information using the liquid crystal display device. In the present embodiment, for example, a first notification mode in which various error information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device (decorative symbol display device 208) by the first sub-control unit 400, and the liquid crystal display of the ball count UI unit 680 by the management device 620. It can alert | report in the 2nd alerting | reporting aspect displayed on an apparatus (information display part 656).

  For example, the ball number control unit 600 sends a first command including first error information (for example, night frame opening error information) to a transmission command setting process (see FIG. 364) of the ball number control unit interrupt process. It is set in step S33527), and is output to the main control unit 300, and a second command including the first error information is output to the management device 620 by IU communication processing (step S3517 in FIG. 364). The main control unit 300 that has received the first command instructs the first sub control unit 400 to notify the error, and the first sub control unit 400 generates an image including the error information, and sends it to the decorative symbol display device 208. indicate.

  In addition, the management device 620 that has received the second command generates an image based on the error information and instructs the ball count UI unit 680 to display an error. The ball count UI unit 680 displays the image on the image display unit 656.

  FIG. 370 shows an example of a time chart until the decorative symbol display device 208 and the ball count UI unit 680 notify the error information detected by the ball count control unit 600 (for example, information on the nighttime opening error), for example. Time elapses from top to bottom in the direction of the vertical axis of the drawing.

  For example, when the power is shut off after the store is closed (1), the ball number control unit 600 stores the number of times of opening the inner frame and the number of times of opening the glass frame as a power interruption process (2). When the frame opens after power interruption (nighttime) (3), the number of times the frame is opened is added by the counter IC (4). When the store is opened, such as the next morning (5) and the main control unit 300 is activated, the first main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (6). Even when the ball number control unit 600 is activated before the main control unit 300, it waits for error management processing, command transmission processing, etc. until the main control communication confirmation command is received (ball number control unit). Command analysis processing of the main processing (FIG. 363 (a)) and ball number control unit interrupt processing (FIG. 364)). Upon receiving the main control communication confirmation command, the ball number control unit 600 transmits the communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 (7). Thereafter, for example, a nighttime frame opening error is detected by error management processing, and a first command (error command) including the error information is transmitted to the main control unit 300 (8). The second command (error command) including the error information is transmitted to the management apparatus 620 (9). The main control unit 300 that has received the first command instructs the sub control unit (first sub control unit 400) to notify the error based on the error information included in the first command (10). The first sub-control unit 400 generates an error notification image and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 208 (11).

  On the other hand, the management device 620 that has received the second command generates an error notification image based on the error information included therein, and instructs the ball count UI unit 680 to display the error notification image (12).

  FIG. 371 shows a display example of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (FIG. 7A) and a display example of the image displayed on the ball count UI unit 680 (FIG. 7B).

  For example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as an image indicating error information, a character indicating an error detection “night open error” and a character indicating the detailed content of an error “the inner frame has been opened five times at night” Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 has a large display area, can display a large amount of information, and can display various and conspicuous images.

  On the other hand, in the image display unit 656 of the ball count UI unit 680, only a character indicating error detection “night opening error” as an image indicating error information is displayed together with an information notification image 802 for notifying information on a game ball that is normally displayed. Is displayed in a simple display mode as compared with the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. By doing so, it is possible to provide diversity in error notification.

<Second Error Notification Mode Using Liquid Crystal Display Device>

  The pachinko machine 100 can display error information on the ball number UI unit 680 earlier than the error information image on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the power is turned on at the time of opening the store. This will be described below.

  Since the main control unit 300 is supplied with power from the ball number control unit 600 as described above (see FIG. 360), the activation thereof is delayed from the ball number control unit 600. Further, the main control unit 300 is activated by performing predetermined delay processing (for example, security mode fixed extension processing, random extension processing, low voltage signal determination processing (step S105), sub-control unit activation waiting processing, etc.). Is delayed from the ball number control unit 600. Therefore, in the processing of the ball number control unit 600 shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 362 to 364 that is notified in the first error notification mode, the main control unit 300 is activated and receives the first main control communication confirmation command. Up to this point, it waits for error management processing and command transmission processing of the ball number control unit 600.

  In the second error notification mode, error information is displayed on the ball count UI unit 680 prior to the error information image on the decorative symbol display device 208. Regarding the processing of the ball count control unit 600 for realizing this, explain.

  FIG. 372 and FIG. 373 are flowcharts showing the main processing flow of the ball number control unit 600 that can be notified in the second error notification mode. FIG. 372 (a) shows a command analysis process, FIG. 372 (b) shows a power interruption process, and FIG. 373 shows a ball number control unit interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow. The content of each step in each flowchart is the same as in the case of the first error notification mode (FIGS. 363 and 364), and a description thereof will be omitted. Note that the corresponding steps in FIGS. 363 and 364 are indicated in parentheses.

  The command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S4201, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (step S3301). If received, the process proceeds to step S4203. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4205.

  In step S4203, processing upon receiving a prize ball command is performed (step S3303). In step S4205, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command has been received (step S3305). If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4207, and if not, the process ends.

  In step 4207, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the first main control communication confirmation command after power-on (step S3307). If it is the first main control communication confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S4209; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4211.

  In step S4211, main control communication confirmation command reception processing is performed (step S3313).

  The power interruption process will be described with reference to FIG. 372 (b). In step S4301, interrupt prohibition setting processing (step S3401) is performed. In step S4303, clear data is output to all output ports (step S3403). In step S4305, suspend information is set (step S3405).

  In step S4307, an initial value of the startup information output flag is set in the backup area of the RAM. The startup information output flag is, for example, a flag indicating whether information is displayed on the ball UI unit 680 when the pachinko machine 100 is started up (when the power is turned on). For example, the startup information output flag is on (or “1”). Indicates that information is to be displayed.

  In step S4309, the value of the inner frame opening counter is stored in the backup area of the number of opening of the inner frame at the time of power interruption (step S3407).

  In step S4311, the value of the glass frame opening counter is stored in the backup area of the number of times of opening the glass frame at power interruption (step S3409).

  In step S4313, a checksum is calculated (step S3411).

  In step S4315, the calculation result is set in the RWM checksum area (step S3413), and in step S4317, the built-in RAM access is prohibited (step S3415).

  With reference to FIG. 373, the ball number control unit interrupt process will be described.

  In step S4401, the register value is saved (step S3501). In step S4403, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S3503). In step S44405, WDT clear and restart are performed (step S3505). In step S4407, the received command is processed (step S3507).

  In step S4409, the startup time information output flag is determined. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S4411, and if not (off or “0”), the process proceeds to step S4417. In the first ball number control unit interruption process after the power is turned on, the initial value “ON” is set (see FIG. 373 (b)).

  In step S4411, the startup information output flag is set to off (or “0”).

  In step S4413, it is determined whether there is a nighttime frame opening error, and error information is set in the RAM backup area (step S3311).

  In step S4415, a transmission command setting process is performed (step S3527). Thereby, the ball number control unit 600 can transmit a predetermined command (for example, a command including night opening error information) to the management device 620 without waiting for the main control unit 300 to start after starting. .

  In step S4417, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command has been received (step S3509). If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S4419; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4437.

  The subsequent processing from step S4419 to step S4439 is the same as that from step S3511 to step S3531.

  FIG. 374 is based on the second error notification mode until the error information detected by the ball number control unit 600 (for example, information on the nighttime opening error) is notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the ball number UI unit 680, for example. An example of a time chart is shown. Time elapses from top to bottom in the direction of the vertical axis of the drawing.

  For example, when the power is shut off after the store is closed (1), the ball number control unit 600 stores the number of times the frame has been opened and the number of times the glass frame has been opened as the power interruption process (2). When the frame opens after power interruption (nighttime) (3), the number of times the frame is opened is added by the counter IC (4). When power is turned on at the time of opening the store such as the next morning (5), first, the ball number control unit 600 to which power is directly supplied from the power control unit 600 is activated. The start time information flag is turned on after the power is turned on (see FIG. 372 (b)), and the ball number control unit 600 detects a nighttime frame opening error and a second command (error command) including the error information. Is transmitted to the management apparatus 620 (6).

The management device 620 that has received the second command generates an error notification image based on the error information included therein, and instructs the ball count UI unit 680 to display the error notification image (7).

  After the ball number control unit 600 is activated, when the main control unit 300 is activated upon receiving power supply from the ball number control unit 600, an initial main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the ball number control unit 600 (8). When the main control communication confirmation command is received, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 (9). Thereafter, a first command (error command) including error information is transmitted to the main control unit 300 (10). The main control unit 300 that has received the first command instructs the sub control unit (first sub control unit 400) to notify the error based on the error information included therein (11). The first sub-control unit 400 generates an image for notifying an error and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 208 (12).

  By such processing, error information is displayed on the ball number UI unit 680 when the power is turned on, and after that, the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 are activated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is activated. Error information is displayed.

  FIG. 375 shows a display example of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (same figure (a)) and a display example of the image displayed on the ball number UI unit 680 (same figure (b)).

  For example, as soon as the ball number UI unit 680 is activated, an error message “night opening error” is displayed as an image indicating error information together with an information notification image 802 that notifies information related to a game ball that is normally displayed on the image display unit 656 after power-on. Display only characters indicating detection. Even before the decorative symbol display device 208 is activated or in preparation for activation, error information can be promptly reported. The ball number UI unit 680 displays an image including error information in a simple display mode as compared with an image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, since the ball number display unit 640 of the ball number UI unit 680 is controlled by the ball number control unit 600, information indicating an error (for example, ERRxx or E9999) may be displayed thereon.

<Third error notification mode using liquid crystal display device>

  FIG. 376 is a diagram illustrating a third error notification mode using the liquid crystal display device, and is a top (front) view of the ball count UI unit 680.

  FIG. 375 (a) is a display example of an error display image generated by the management apparatus 620. FIG. In this case, an image indicating error information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be displayed on the image display unit 656 of the ball count UI unit 680 by touching the switching button 144.

  FIG. 375 (b) is a display example after switching. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 generates a character indicating an error detection “night opening error” and “the inner frame is opened five times at night”. Can be displayed to indicate the detailed contents of the error. In this case, only the switch button 144 may be displayed (at the same position) on the touch panel 654, and the other buttons may not be displayed, thereby ensuring a large error information display area.

  Further, since the detailed information on the error (for example, the number of opening of the inner frame 104) is managed by the ball number control unit 600, the information is transmitted to the management device 620, and the image shown in FIG. It may be generated at 620. Immediately after the power is turned on, the error information shown in FIG. 6A is reported immediately, and the information shown in FIG. 5B generated by the management device 620 is displayed by touching the switch button 144. Thereby, even when the decorative symbol display device 208 is preparing for activation, it is possible to display detailed information on the error.

  Regarding the in-region ball number management process for managing the number of in-balls and out-balls, a new in-region ball number management process is performed when the power is turned on even if there is an in-region ball number when power interruption occurs. You may go.

  Even if the number of balls in the area is other than “0 (zero)” when power interruption occurs, a new number of balls in the area may be managed when the power is turned on.

  Further, the storage area of the in-area ball number information (in-area ball number) in the RAM (backup area) may be cleared when the power is turned on.

  Even when the return activation process is performed when the power is turned on, the area for storing the number of balls in the area of the RAM (backup area) may be cleared.

  Also, a predetermined value (for example, 0) may be set in an area for storing the number of balls in the RAM (backup area) when the power is turned on.

  Moreover, you may provide the abnormality determination means which determines with abnormality having generate | occur | produced when the number of balls in a area | region becomes predetermined value (for example, -20 or less or 20 or more).

  The predetermined value may have a negative natural number less than a positive natural number (for example, −1 or less or 20 or more).

  In addition, storage means capable of storing first information (the number of spheres in the area) that is updated when the update condition (pass of the sphere detection sensor 604B) is satisfied, and when the first information becomes a predetermined value And determining means for determining that an abnormality has occurred, and when the determining means determines that the abnormality has occurred, the storage means stores second information (in-region ball number error information). May be.

  Further, the address of the storage unit storing the second information may be smaller than the address of the storage unit storing the first information.

  Further, the address of the storage means storing the second information may be larger than the address of the storage means storing the player's profit information.

  Further, the number of balls in the area may be output to an external device. Moreover, you may alert | report the number of balls in a area | region with an alerting | reporting means. In addition, the number of balls in the area may be notified by the ball number display unit 640. Further, the number of balls in the area may be notified by a display device controlled by the sub control unit (the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500). Moreover, you may alert | report with the display apparatus which an external apparatus controls the number of balls in an area | region. Further, the in-region ball number error information may be output to an external device. Further, the in-region ball number error information may be notified by the notification means. Further, the in-region ball number error information may be notified by the ball number display unit 640. Further, the in-region ball number error information may be notified by a display device controlled by the sub-control unit. Further, the in-region ball number error information may be notified by a display device controlled by an external device.

  In addition, the ball number control unit 600 is in a non-game state (when the card is not inserted, when the number of game balls is “0”, when the touch sensor of the ball launch handle 134 is off, or any one of them. In the case where a predetermined time has elapsed since entering the state), a power saving request command is output to the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 outputs a power saving request command to the sub control unit. The control unit may shift to a power saving state when a power saving request command is input.

  Further, the value of the upper byte of the address of the storage means storing the first information may be a specific value stored in the first register (T register).

  Further, the value of the upper byte of the address of the storage means storing the second information may be a specific value stored in the first register (T register).

  The return control condition is that even if the second signal is input to the control means at night and the first signal is input to the control means the next morning, if the backup power source remains, May hold.

  The time lag from when the second signal is input to the control means until the first signal is input to the control means is extremely short (for example, several nanoseconds, several microseconds, several milliseconds, etc.) Various times can be considered for a long time (for example, several hours, half a day, one day, several days, etc.).

  Further, if the backup power source remains, a long time lag can be allowed.

  The first control unit may be the ball number control unit 600, and the second control unit may be the main control unit 300. Further, the first control unit may be the ball number control unit 600, and the second control unit may be the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. Further, the first control unit may be the ball number control unit 600, and the second control unit may be the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500. Further, the first control unit may be the ball number control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, and the second control unit may be the first sub control unit 400. Further, the first control unit may be the ball number control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, and the second control unit may be the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  The second control means may be composed of a plurality of sub-control means, and each sub-control means of the plurality of sub-control means may be provided on a separate substrate.

  The first control unit is configured to turn on the abnormality occurrence flag when the determination result by the abnormality determination unit is a specific determination result, and the first signal output condition is that the abnormality is occurring. It may include at least that the flag is on.

  The first control means is configured to turn on the abnormality occurrence flag when the determination result by the abnormality determination means is a specific determination result, and the second signal output condition is that the abnormality is occurring. It may include at least that the flag is on.

  The specific determination results included in the first and second signal output conditions may be the same.

  The abnormality occurrence flag included in the first and second signal output conditions may be the same.

  As described above, the ninth embodiment has been described. However, some or all of the functions (for example, serial communication circuit, serial communication processing) in the enclosed game machine according to the ninth embodiment are applied to the game machines described in the second and later embodiments. It can also be applied. For example, the serial communication process between the main control unit 300 and the ball number control unit 600 in the ninth embodiment is applied to the communication process between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 in the second and later embodiments described below. Is possible.

  In addition, a part or all of the configurations provided in the gaming machines described in the first and subsequent embodiments (for example, the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the slot machine 1100 according to the second embodiment), Part or all of the processing to be executed can also be applied to the enclosed game machine (pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment.

  For example, the ROM 306, RAM 308, built-in register, memory space, I / O space, LD instruction, CALL instruction, EXESUB instruction, special instruction, second special instruction, third special instruction, and the like included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment Part or all of the configuration such as the 4 special instructions may be included in the enclosed game machine according to the present embodiment.

  In addition, the main control unit main process, main control unit timer interrupt process, initialization process, T register check process, special figure state update process, general figure state update process, special symbol executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment The enclosed game machine according to the present embodiment may execute part or all of various processes such as a variable time lottery process and an initial setting process.

  In addition, the main control unit main process, main control unit timer interrupt process, process when power is reset, power interruption process, special figure winning random number, and normal figure winning random number executed by the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment The enclosed game machine according to the present embodiment may execute part or all of various processes such as a process to be acquired.

  The CPU 304, ROM 306, RAM 308, external bus control circuit 3110, parallel input port 3102, address decoding circuit 3103, timer circuit 311, counter circuit 312, reset control circuit 314, interrupt control circuit 3100 provided in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. A part or all of the configuration of the clock circuit 3200, the random number generation circuit 318, and the like may be included in the enclosed game machine according to this embodiment.

  For example, the fifth special instruction (WARU instruction) included in the pachinko machine according to another embodiment or the third embodiment, a package, an IC socket, a connection unit, a socket terminal, a wiring pattern, a substrate, or the like according to the seventh embodiment. In this embodiment, all or part of the main control unit main process, main control unit timer interrupt process, fixed extension process, random extension process, timer update process, etc. executed by the game machine are executed. The enclosed game stand according to may be provided.

  In addition, the enclosed game machine according to the present embodiment may execute some or all of various processes such as the random number acquisition determination / acquisition process executed by the pachinko machine according to the sixth embodiment.

  In addition, the configuration of a random number circuit included in the pachinko machine according to the sixth embodiment and part or all of the processing such as the random number acquisition process executed by the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment are included in the enclosed game machine according to the present embodiment. May have.

  In addition, a part or all of processing such as hard latch, soft latch, random number acquisition processing, winning pattern determination processing in the input port state update processing executed by the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment is included in the enclosed game machine according to the present embodiment. May be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game in which at least a control means (for example, a control unit) connected to an external device (for example, the management device 620) and a game medium (for example, an in-vehicle ball 710) can roll. An area (for example, a game area 124), a launching means (for example, a launching device 622) capable of firing at least the game medium into the game area, and the game medium that has left the game area can be supplied to the launching means. A game medium-enclosed game machine including at least a game medium path (for example, a game medium path 610), wherein the control means is capable of detecting at least the game medium entering the game area. The control means is connected to a detection means (for example, an input detection sensor), and the control means at least reduces the game medium that has left the game area. The control means accepts an instruction to transmit possession medium information (eg, game ball number information) to the external device. In this case, even when there is a remaining medium in the gaming area, it is possible to transmit at least a signal including the possessed medium information to the external device, and the control means includes the first The presence or absence of the remaining medium can be determined at least using the detection result by the second detection means, and the control means can determine the holding according to the detection results by the first and second detection means. The medium information can be updated at least.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where maintenance performance relating to management of game media can be improved, and processing after transmission of information relating to the amount of game media (for example, storage of the information in a storage medium or In some cases, the storage medium can be returned quickly).

  When the control means receives a command to transmit possessed medium information to the external device, the control means does not determine whether or not there is a remaining medium in the game area, and outputs a signal including the retained medium information. It may be capable of transmitting at least to an external device.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has at least a control means (for example, a control unit) capable of executing game control and a game area (for example, game) in which a game medium (for example, the in-flight ball 710) can roll at least. Area 124), launching means (for example, launching means 622) capable of firing at least the game medium into the game area, and game medium path capable of supplying at least the game medium discharged from the game area to the launching means. (E.g., a game medium path 610), and the control means includes a management device (e.g., a management device 620) capable of managing at least the amount of the game medium. The control means is connected to a first detection means (for example, a subtraction sensor 6) for detecting the passage of the game medium launched into the game area. 4Z) and second detection means (for example, a winning detection sensor 604S and a non-winning detection sensor 604K) for detecting the passage of the game medium ejected from the gaming area, A first quantity (for example, the number of in-balls) of the game medium that has passed the detection means, and a second quantity (for example, the number of out-balls) of the game medium that has passed the second detection means. Subtracting the second quantity from the one quantity to calculate the in-area quantity of the game medium (for example, the number of balls in the area), and the control means manages the information about the quantity of the game medium by the player When a command to be transmitted to the apparatus is accepted, the information can be transmitted to the management apparatus at least even if the in-area quantity exists.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game in which at least a control means (for example, a control unit) connected to an external device (for example, the management device 620) and a game medium (for example, an in-vehicle ball 710) can roll. An area (for example, a game area 124), a launching means (for example, a launching device 622) capable of firing at least the game medium into the game area, and the game medium that has left the game area can be supplied to the launching means. A game medium-enclosed game table including at least a game medium path (for example, game medium path 610), wherein the control means can detect at least the game medium entering the game area. Connected to a detection means (for example, a detection sensor), and the control means reduces the number of the game media that have left the game area. Is connected to a second detection means (for example, a discharge detection sensor) that can also detect, and the control means accepts a command to transmit possession medium information (for example, game ball number information) to the external device. When the game medium is released by the launching means, it is possible to transmit at least a signal including the possessed medium information to the external device. The presence / absence of the remaining medium can be determined at least using the detection result of the second detection means, and the control means determines the possessed medium information according to the detection results of the first and second detection means. Is at least updatable.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where maintenance performance relating to management of game media can be improved, and processing after transmission of possessed media information (for example, storage of the information in a storage medium, or storage of the information) In some cases, media can be returned quickly. Furthermore, since the game medium that has been prepared for launching when it is instructed to transmit the possessed medium information to the management device is reflected in the possessed medium information as consumed, the retained medium information is stored in the storage medium. In some cases, it may be possible to store it as an accurate amount.

  In addition, when the control unit receives an instruction to transmit the ball information to the external device, the control unit performs the standby process (for example, a process for delaying transmission) and then transmits the ball information to the external device. The transmission may be performed after the standby process is performed only when the transmission unit is at least capable of transmitting and the launching unit is ready to launch. Further, if the launching unit is not in the launch ready state, the transmission may be performed without performing the standby process. Here, the launch preparation state may correspond to any state. For example, when the launching unit has started the launching operation, the launching unit may be in the launch ready state, or the launching unit The launching unit may be in a launch ready state except when the launching unit is completely stopped, and before the launching unit starts its operation, the launching unit is in a state other than the state where the start prohibiting operation is possible The launching unit may be in a firing preparation state, or may be in the firing unit firing preparation state if there is a sphere to be supplied to the launching unit. Regardless of whether or not the launching means is in a firing ready state, the standby process may be performed until the firing means returns to the standby state next time. The standby state here may be a state in which the launching rod 622a is stationary at the standby position. The standby position is a period from when the launching unit performs the launch operation until the launch ball is supplied to the launch position. It is good also as what shows the position which the launching rod 622a is controlling.

  In addition, when the control unit receives a command to transmit possessed medium information to the external device, the control unit does not determine whether or not there is a remaining medium in the game area, and includes a signal including the retained medium information. May be transmitted to at least the external device.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has at least a control means (for example, a control unit) capable of executing game control and a game area (for example, game) in which a game medium (for example, the in-flight ball 710) can roll at least. Area 124), launching means (for example, launching device 622) capable of firing at least the game medium into the game area, and game medium path capable of supplying at least the game medium discharged from the game area to the launching means. (E.g., a game medium path 610), and the control means includes a management device (e.g., a management device 620) capable of managing at least the amount of the game medium. And when the control means accepts a command to send information on the amount of the game medium by the player to the management device, Waiting for firing by the firing means of the game media preparation is firing upon receiving the serial command, it is intended that at least possible to transmit the information to the management device.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game in which at least a control means (for example, a control unit) connected to an external device (for example, the management device 620) and a game medium (for example, an in-vehicle ball 710) can roll. An area (for example, a game area 124), a launching means (for example, a launching device 622) capable of firing at least the game media into the game area, and the game medium that has left the game area can be supplied to the launching means. A game medium-enclosed game table including at least a game medium path (for example, game medium path 610), wherein the control means can detect at least the game medium entering the game area. Connected to a detection means (for example, a detection sensor), and the control means at least reduces the game medium that has been withdrawn from the game area. It is connected to a second detection means (for example, a discharge detection sensor) that can be detected, and when the control means accepts a command to send IC card return information to the external device, The IC card return information can be transmitted at least to the external device even when there is a remaining medium, and the control means detects the detection results by the first and second detection means. Can be used to at least determine the presence or absence of the remaining medium.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where maintenance for game media management may be improved, and it is not necessary to wait for the game media to fall in the game area and to be discharged from the game area. It may be possible to return the media promptly.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has at least a control means (for example, a control unit) capable of executing game control and a game area (for example, game) in which a game medium (for example, the in-flight ball 710) can roll at least. Area 124), launching means (for example, launching device 622) capable of firing at least the game medium into the game area, and game medium path capable of supplying at least the game medium discharged from the game area to the launching means. (E.g., a game medium path 610), and the control means includes a management device (e.g., a management device 620) capable of managing at least the amount of the game medium. The control means is connected to a first detection means (for example, a subtraction sensor 6) for detecting the passage of the game medium launched into the game area. 4Z) and second detection means (for example, a winning detection sensor 604S and a non-winning detection sensor 604K) for detecting the passage of the game medium ejected from the gaming area, A first quantity (for example, the number of in-balls) of the game medium that has passed the detection means, and a second quantity (for example, the number of out-balls) of the game medium that has passed the second detection means. Subtracting the second quantity from the one quantity to calculate the in-area quantity of the game medium (for example, the number of balls in the area), and the control means is a memory capable of storing the amount of the game medium by the player When an instruction to transmit a medium return designation to the management apparatus is received, the information can at least be transmitted to the management apparatus even if the in-area quantity exists.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game in which at least a control means (for example, a control unit) connected to an external device (for example, the management device 620) and a game medium (for example, an in-vehicle ball 710) can roll. An area (for example, a game area 124), a launching means (for example, a launching device 622) capable of firing at least the game media into the game area, and the game medium that has left the game area can be supplied to the launching means. A game medium-enclosed game machine including at least a game medium path (for example, game medium path 610), wherein the control means can transmit at least IC card return information to the external device A display means (for example, a ball count UI unit 680), wherein the display means is capable of displaying information on the IC card. There, the display means is capable of displaying a representation display to produce a game.

  With such a configuration, there may be a case where maintenance performance relating to management of game media can be improved, and a variety of effects can be provided by the display means, which can enhance the interest of the player. .

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has at least a control means (for example, a control unit) capable of executing game control and a game area (for example, game) in which a game medium (for example, the in-flight ball 710) can roll at least. Area 124), launching means (for example, launching device 622) capable of firing at least the game medium into the game area, and game medium path capable of supplying at least the game medium discharged from the game area to the launching means. (For example, a game medium path 610) and a display means capable of displaying information (for example, a frame-side display device 658). It is connected to a management device (for example, the management device 620) capable of managing at least the amount of media, and the display means displays information on the amount of game media. Are those shown possible, the display means may be capable displays an effect display to produce a game.

  The control means (for example, the control unit) includes a first control means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing the game control, and a second control means capable of at least control regarding the possessed medium information. (For example, the ball number control unit 600), and the second control means and the management device (for example, the management device 620) may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the consistency of communication data between the second control unit and the management apparatus by encryption processing or the like, and to prevent unauthorized access aimed at these interface units. There is a case. Also, for example, the unique information (such as unique ID) of the gaming machine acquired from the second control means is collated with the unique information of the gaming machine registered in an external management center or the like via the communication network of the management device. Thus, it is possible to authenticate the gaming machine, and it may be easy to find unauthorized modification by making a determination at the time of power-on.

  The first control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) and the second control unit (for example, the ball number control unit 600) may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the consistency of communication data between the first control means and the second control means by encryption processing or the like, and prevent unauthorized access aimed at these interface units. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the management device (for example, the management device 620) can access the storage contents stored in a portable storage medium (for example, an IC card), and the possessed medium information is stored in the storage medium. It may be a balance of money that can be exchanged with a stored medium (for example, the number of game balls).

  With such a configuration, for example, possession medium information can be stored in a storage medium, and the management of a balance exchangeable for a possession medium held by a player may be facilitated.

  Further, the management device (for example, the management device 620) can access the storage contents stored in a portable storage medium (for example, an IC card), and the possessed medium information is stored in the storage medium. It may be the number of stored game balls.

  With such a configuration, for example, possessed medium information can be stored in a storage medium, and management of the possessed medium held by the player may be facilitated.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least game control and a second control unit (for example, capable of performing at least control for giving a prize). A game table including at least a ball number control unit 600, a payout control unit 600, and the like, and a prize granting unit (for example, a game ball number setting process, a sprocket, etc.) capable of at least giving a prize, The first control means includes at least a serial communication circuit (for example, serial communication circuit 750), and the first control means has a first command (for example, prize ball command) transmission condition established. The first command can be transmitted to the second control means, and the first control means transmits a second command (for example, a first communication confirmation command) transmission condition. When established, the second command can be transmitted to the second control means, and the first and second commands are transmitted via the serial communication circuit, The second control means can execute at least control for giving the prize giving means a prize having a magnitude corresponding to prize information, and the first command includes at least the prize information.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve maintainability related to management of game media, and even if the first control means makes a winning determination or the like, the player is determined by the winning determination. In some cases, information on the profit given to the second control means can be transmitted to the second control means. Further, since transmission can be performed in a serial format, the number of signal lines may be reduced.

  The second control means (for example, the ball number control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600) includes at least a second serial communication circuit (for example, a serial communication circuit 752), and the second control. The means is capable of transmitting a third command to the first control means when a third command (for example, second communication confirmation command) transmission condition is established, The command may be transmitted via the second serial communication circuit.

  The third command (for example, second communication confirmation command) transmission condition includes at least that the second control unit has received the second command (for example, the first communication confirmation command). It may be a thing.

  By doing so, the first command transmitted from the first control means can be transmitted to the second command for confirming that the second control means has received, so that the communication reliability is improved. There is.

  Further, the first control means (for example, main control unit 300) includes a first control microprocessor (for example, main control unit microcomputer 760, game control microcomputer) capable of executing at least a game control process. It may be included at least.

  The second control means (for example, the ball number control unit 600, the payout control unit 600) is a second control microprocessor (for example, a ball number control unit micro) capable of executing at least a control process for giving a prize. A computer 770 and a payout control microcomputer).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least game control and a second control unit (for example, capable of performing at least control for giving a prize). A game table including at least a ball control unit 600) and a prize giving means (for example, a game ball number setting process) capable of at least giving a prize, wherein the first control means includes serial communication. A circuit (for example, serial communication circuit 750), and the first control means outputs the first command when a first command (for example, prize ball command) transmission condition is established. The second control means can transmit to the second control means, and the first control means sends a second command when a second command (for example, first communication confirmation command) transmission condition is established. Before The first control means can be transmitted to the second control means, and the first and second commands are transmitted via the serial communication circuit, and the second control means corresponds to the prize information. At least control for giving a prize of magnitude to the prize giving means can be executed, and the first command includes at least the prize information.

  The second control means (for example, the ball number control unit 600) includes at least a second serial communication circuit (for example, a serial communication circuit 752), and the second control means includes a third serial communication circuit. Command (for example, the second communication confirmation command) can be transmitted to the first control means when the transmission condition is satisfied, and the third command It may be transmitted via a second serial communication circuit.

  The third command (for example, second communication confirmation command) transmission condition includes at least that the second control unit has received the second command (for example, the first communication confirmation command). It may be a thing.

  The first control means (for example, the main control unit 300) may include at least a first control microprocessor (for example, a main control unit microcomputer 760) capable of executing at least a game control process. .

  The second control means (for example, the ball number control unit 600) includes at least a second control microprocessor (for example, the ball number control unit microcomputer 770) capable of executing at least a control process for giving a prize. It may be included.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least game control and a second control unit (for example, capable of performing at least control for giving a prize). A game machine including at least a payout control unit 600 and a prize awarding means (for example, a sprocket) capable of at least awarding a prize, wherein the first control means includes a serial communication circuit (for example, a sprocket). Serial communication circuit 750), and when the first command (for example, prize ball command) transmission condition is satisfied, the first control means sends the first command to the second The first control means can transmit a second command when a second command (for example, a first communication confirmation command) transmission condition is satisfied. The second control means can be transmitted, the first and second commands are transmitted via the serial communication circuit, and the second control means corresponds to prize information. The prize giving means can give at least the control for giving the prize of the size to be given, and the first command includes at least the prize information.

  The second control means (for example, the payout control unit 600) includes at least a second serial communication circuit (for example, a serial communication circuit 752), and the second control means includes a third serial communication circuit. When a command (for example, second communication confirmation command) transmission condition is satisfied, a third command can be transmitted to the first control means, and the third command It may be transmitted via the serial communication circuit.

  The third command (for example, second communication confirmation command) transmission condition includes at least that the second control unit has received the second command (for example, the first communication confirmation command). It may be a thing.

  The first control means (for example, the main control unit 300) may include at least a first control microprocessor (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing at least a game control process.

  The second control means (for example, the payout control unit 600) may include at least a second control microprocessor (for example, a payout control microcomputer) capable of executing at least a control process for giving a prize. Good.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a game control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least game control and a payout control unit (for example, the payout control unit 600) capable of executing at least payout control. ) And a payout means (for example, sprocket) capable of paying out at least an award medium, wherein the game control means includes at least a serial communication circuit (for example, a serial communication circuit 750). And the game control means is capable of transmitting the first command to the payout control means when a first command (for example, a prize ball command) transmission condition is established, and the game control means Is capable of transmitting the second command to the payout control means when the second command (for example, the first communication confirmation command) transmission condition is satisfied. Yes, the first and second commands are transmitted via the serial communication circuit, and the payout control means controls the payout means to pay out the number of prize media corresponding to the prize medium information. The first command includes at least the prize medium information.

  The payout control means (eg, the payout control unit 600 includes at least a second serial communication circuit (eg, serial communication circuit 752), and the payout control means includes a third command (eg, a first command). Second communication confirmation command) When a transmission condition is satisfied, a third command can be transmitted to the game control means, and the third command is transmitted via the second serial communication circuit. It may be transmitted.

  Further, the third command (second communication confirmation command) transmission condition may include at least that the payout control unit receives the second command (first communication confirmation command).

  The game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) may include at least a main control microprocessor (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing at least a game control process.

  The payout control means (for example, the payout control unit 600) may include at least a payout control microprocessor (for example, a payout control microcomputer) capable of executing at least a payout control process.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs control based on the game area (for example, the game area 124) in which the game medium (for example, the in-flight ball 710) can roll at least and the first signal is input. A gaming machine comprising at least control means that can be started (for example, a control unit) and storage means that is at least updated by the control means, wherein the control means satisfies a return control condition In addition, it is possible to execute at least the return control for returning to the control state when the second signal is input, and the return control condition is that after the second signal is input to the control means, The control means includes at least the input of the first signal, and the control means enters the game medium into the game area and the game medium from the game area. When there is at least one of the outputs, the first value (for example, the number of balls in the area) can be updated at least, and the first value is a value stored in the storage means, In the return control, the control means can set at least a third value, not a second value, to the first value, and the second value is determined by the second signal The first value when input to the control means, and the third value is an initial value.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where maintenance for game media management can be improved, and information on the number of in-balls and out-balls remains when the power is turned on after power interruption. In some cases, it can be determined that the in-flight ball remains illegally in the game area, and notification as an error can be avoided, and an appropriate game can be played without the player being suspected of fraud.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is controlled based on a game area (for example, the game area 124) in which a game medium (for example, the in-flight ball 710) can roll and a first signal is input. A game machine comprising at least a control means (for example, a control unit) capable of starting at least a storage means updated by the control means, wherein the control means satisfies a return control condition. In this case, at least the return control for returning to the control state when the second signal is input can be executed, and the return control condition is obtained after the second signal is input to the control means. The control means includes at least the input of the first signal, and the control means enters the game area into the game area and the game medium from the game area. The first value (for example, the number of balls in the area) can be updated at least when there is at least one of the exits, and the first value is a value stored in the storage means The control means can set at least a third value instead of a second value as the first value in the return control, and the second value is the second signal. Is the first value when the control means is input, the third value is an initial value, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the first value is the fourth value. A gaming machine comprising an abnormality determining means for performing the above.

  With such a configuration, there may be a case where maintenance performance relating to management of game media can be improved, and there is a case where an appropriate game can be performed without a player being suspected of fraud. Also, since the first quantity information and the abnormal state of the second quantity information are stored in a storage area that is not initialized after power recovery, for example, an abnormal state is transmitted to an external device or the like after power recovery or an abnormality is notified. May be possible.

  In addition, the control means includes first detection means (for example, an input detection sensor) capable of detecting at least the game medium (for example, the in-flight ball 710) entering the game area (for example, the game area 124), The first value may be at least updatable based on the detection result of the first detection means.

  By doing so, the game medium can be detected at the time of launching into the game area, and the first quantity information can be updated based on the detected game medium, so that the quantity of the game medium can be reliably managed.

  In addition, the control means comprises second detection means (for example, a discharge detection sensor) capable of detecting at least the game medium (for example, the in-flight ball 710) that has left the game area (for example, the game area 124), The first value may be at least updatable based on the detection result of the second detection means.

  By doing so, the game medium can be detected at the time when it is ejected from the game area, and the second quantity information can be updated based on this, so that the quantity of the game medium can be reliably managed.

  The control means (for example, the control unit) includes a first control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least game control, and a second control capable of at least control relating to the amount of the game medium. Means (for example, the ball number control unit 600), and the second control means can execute control relating to the amount of the game medium when a third signal is input from the first control means. It may be a thing.

  By doing in this way, control of the 2nd control means can be performed according to control of the 1st control means, and an appropriate game may be able to be performed.

  The first control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) and the second control unit (for example, the ball number control unit 600) may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the consistency of communication data between the first control means and the second control means by encryption processing or the like, and prevent unauthorized access aimed at these interface units. There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first control unit (for example, a ball number control unit 600) that can execute at least control and a second control unit (for example, a main control unit) that can execute at least control. 300) and an abnormality determining means (for example, error management processing) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred, wherein the first control means satisfies the first signal output condition. A first signal (for example, an error command) can be output at least to the second control means, and the second control means can output the first signal when the notification condition is satisfied. The notification condition includes at least the reception of the first signal, and the first control means satisfies the second signal output condition. If the second signal (e.g. -Command) can be output at least to an external device (for example, the management device 620), and the second signal is output to cause the external device to at least perform the second notification, The first signal output condition includes at least that the determination result by the abnormality determination unit is a specific determination result, and the second signal output condition is specified by the determination result by the abnormality determination unit That is, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are different from each other.

  By doing in this way, the maintainability regarding management of a game medium may be able to be improved, and there may be a variety of error notifications.

  The first control means (for example, the ball number control unit 600) may be capable of at least control related to the amount of the game medium.

  By doing in this way, there are cases where it is possible to give diversity to the notification of error information related to information relating to the amount of game media.

  The gaming machine is characterized in that the first control means (for example, the number-of-balls control unit 600) and the external device (for example, the management device) are capable of bidirectional communication.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to check the consistency of communication data between the first control unit and the external device by encryption processing or the like, and to prevent unauthorized access aimed at these interface units. There is a case.

  The second control means (for example, the main control unit 300) may be capable of at least controlling the progress of the game. By doing so, there are cases in which a variety of notifications such as electrical, magnetic or mechanical error information related to game control can be provided.

  The first control unit (for example, the ball number control unit 300) and the second control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) may be capable of bidirectional communication.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the consistency of communication data between the first control means and the second control means by encryption processing or the like, and prevent unauthorized access aimed at these interface units. There are cases where it is possible.
<Embodiment 10>

Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 377 to 417. Note that FIGS. 377 to 417 are used only for the description in the tenth embodiment.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment 10 of the present invention will be described using FIG. 377. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 378 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 377 as viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor 602 (see FIG. 380), a sprocket, and a payout sensor 604 (see FIG. 380). The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor 602. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor 604 is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. By doing so, the game balls that are temporarily retained are sent out one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor 604 is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is not passing, either the high or low signal is passed. Outputs either the high signal or the low signal to the payout controller 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor 604 passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 The ball is paid out to the player according to the configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power management unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 379 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the usual figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the usual figure variable game by the usual figure display device.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. And the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 has a wing that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and the sphere cannot be entered while the wing is closed. When stopped, the blades open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the second special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 has a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member is closed, and the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. In this case, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (First special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal drawing start port 228, out port 136 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. May be able to be shielded.

In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316 as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a signal output from various sensors 320 including a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and receiving an amplification result and a reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the comparison result to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp) 18, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, and the like) and a solenoid 332 that opens and closes the second special figure starting port 232, the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 318 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 16, the sensor circuit 320 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 316 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 316 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 128, the counter circuit 316 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled.

Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. It is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to (details will be described later).
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 110. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  <Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Note that communication between the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300 is not limited to one-way communication, and may be serial two-way communication, for example.

  An external terminal board 609 is connected to the payout control section 600, and the payout control section 600 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the external terminal board 609. On the other hand, various information included in the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is output (details will be described later). Here, an example in which the external terminal board 609 is separated from the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 has been shown, but it may be incorporated in the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, or other configurations May be adopted.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power management unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<External terminal board signal>

Next, an external terminal board signal output to the outside through the above-described external terminal board 609 will be described with reference to FIGS. 381 and 382. FIG. 381 is a diagram showing a connection example of the main board 156, the payout board 170, the external terminal board 609, and the external device (hall computer) 670. FIG. 382 (a) shows an external output from the main board 156. FIG. 382 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the terminal board signal, and FIG. 382 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the external terminal board signal output from the payout board 170. FIG.
<External terminal board signals 3 to 10>

  The main board 156 is configured to be capable of outputting eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 shown in FIG. The external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) is a signal that outputs a voltage of a predetermined level (for example, high level) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) when power is turned on or when an abnormality is detected. Here, “when power is turned on”, which is the output start condition of the security information signal, means that the low voltage signal input to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300 is turned off (from the main control unit 660 to the main control). When the activation time of the first sub-control unit 400 has elapsed after the voltage value of the power source supplied to the unit 300 reaches a predetermined value (9V) (sub-control unit activation counted by the main control unit 300) An example is when the wait counter becomes 0).

  Also, “when abnormality is detected”, which is the output start condition of the security information signal, is an error related to winning (for example, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field, etc.) among errors monitored by the device monitoring process of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later. An example is a case where an abnormality (abnormal error) or an abnormality relating to a switch (for example, a switch level abnormality error or a switch disconnection error) is detected.

  The external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) is a signal indicating the number of game balls to be paid out (details will be described later), and the external terminal board signals 5 to 8 (big hit information 1 to 4 signals) It is a signal indicating information related to the game success / failure determination result, and the external terminal board signal 4 (starting port information signal) is a signal indicating information regarding the starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232). The external terminal board signal 3 (design fixed number information signal) is a signal indicating information related to the symbol variation of the ordinary diagram or special diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 381, eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 pass through the payout board 170 and the external terminal board 609 to the external device 670. The information is input to an information input circuit 350 included in (for example, a hall computer). Thereby, the external device 670 can acquire various types of information that the main board 157 has. In this example, the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 are output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156, but information corresponding to the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 is described above. A control command may be output from the main board 156 to the payout board 170 via the output interface.

Further, as shown in FIG. 382 (a), the main control unit 300 provides a storage area for external output signal information having a length of 1 byte in the RAM 308. Bits 0 to Bit 7 of the external output signal information include external terminals. Information corresponding to the plate signals 3 to 10 is assigned. For example, when the value of the external output signal information is 10000000B (B is a binary number), the security information corresponding to the external terminal board signal 10 is 1, the symbol fixed number information corresponding to the other external terminal board signals 3 to 9, the start The mouth information, jackpot information 1 to 4 and the payout schedule information are 0.
<External terminal board signals 1 and 2>

  The payout board 170 is configured to be capable of outputting eight types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2, a CR gaming machine READY signal, a CR gaming machine lending completion signal, and payout error LEDs 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 382 (b). . The external terminal board signal 1 (payout signal) is a signal indicating the number of paid out game balls (payout completion number) (details will be described later), and the external terminal board signal 2 (door open signal) is the opening of the front frame door 106. The CR gaming machine READY signal is a signal indicating whether or not a game is possible, and the CR gaming machine lending completion signal is an EXS signal which will be described later, and payout errors LED1 to LED4. The signal is a signal indicating a lighting / extinguishing state of a payout notification LED described later.

  As shown in FIG. 381, two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are connected to an external device 670 (for example, a hall) via the external terminal board 609. The information is input to an information input circuit 350 included in the computer. Thereby, the external device 670 can acquire various types of information that the payout board 170 has.

Further, as shown in FIG. 382 (b), the payout control unit 600 provides a storage area for external output signal information having a 1-byte length in the RAM, and Bits 0 to Bit 7 of the external output signal information include external terminals. Information corresponding to the board signals 1 to 2, the CR gaming machine READY signal, the CR gaming machine lending completion signal, and the payout error LED 1 to 4 signals are respectively assigned. For example, when the value of the external output signal information is 00000001B (B is a binary number), the payout information corresponding to the external terminal board signal 1 is 1, the door opening information corresponding to the other external terminal board signal 2, the CR gaming machine READY The information corresponding to the signal, the information corresponding to the CR gaming machine lending completion signal, and the information corresponding to the payout error LEDs 1 to 4 are 0.
<Other connection example of external terminal board signal>

  Next, another connection example of the external terminal board signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 383 (a) is a connection example in which the arrangement of the main board and the payout board is reversed with respect to the connection example shown in FIG. 381. In this example, two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are information included in the external device 670 via the main board 156 and the external terminal board 609. Input to the input circuit 350. The eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 are sent via the external terminal board 609 (without going through the payout board 170) to the external device 670. Is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the.

  With such a configuration, even if some abnormality occurs in the payout board 170, it is possible to output eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 from the main board 156 to the external device 670 without passing through the payout board 170. It is. Therefore, for example, even if the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) cannot be output to the external device 670 due to an abnormality in the payout board 170, if the main board 156 is operating normally, the main board 156 Thus, the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) can be output to the external device 670, and information relating to the number of game media payouts can be reliably transmitted to the external device 670.

  FIG. 383 (b) shows a connection example in which both the main board 156 and the payout board 170 are directly connected to the external terminal board 609. In this example, two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are externally transmitted via the external terminal board 609 (without the main board 156). The information is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the device 670. The eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 are sent via the external terminal board 609 (without going through the payout board 170) to the external device 670. Is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the.

  With such a configuration, even if some abnormality occurs in the payout board 170, it is possible to output eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 from the main board 156 to the external device 670 without passing through the payout board 170. In addition, even when some abnormality occurs in the main board 156, it is possible to output two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 from the payout board 170 to the external device 670 without passing through the main board 156.

  Therefore, for example, even if the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) cannot be output to the external device 670 due to an abnormality in the payout board 170, if the main board 156 is operating normally, the main board 156 Can output the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) to the external apparatus 670, and output the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) to the external apparatus 670 due to an abnormality of the main board 156. Even if the payout board 170 is operating normally, the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) can be output from the payout board 170 to the external device 670 if the payout board 170 is operating normally. Can be reliably transmitted to the external device 670.

  <Serial communication between main controller 300 and payout controller 600>

  Next, serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a block diagram showing a connection mode between the main side microcomputer and the payout side microcomputer.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication. In this embodiment, the basic circuit 302 (main-side microcomputer) of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are configured. Are connected by a serial communication line 612. One of the serial communication lines 612 is connected to a transmission terminal of the main control unit 300 and a reception terminal of the payout control unit 600, and the main control unit 300 transmits a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. It is a communication line used for this purpose. The other communication line 612b of the serial communication lines 612 is connected to the reception terminal of the main control unit 300 and the transmission terminal of the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 sends a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. It is a communication line used for transmission.

  The main-side microcomputer 302 and the payout-side microcomputer 610 are each provided with a serial communication circuit for performing asynchronous serial communication with an external I / O, and the serial communication circuit on the main control unit 300 side can transmit and receive 1 Two transmission / reception channels and three reception-only channels that can only be received are prepared. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 realizes asynchronous serial communication with the payout control unit 600 using a transmission / reception channel of the four channels. The communication format between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is not limited to asynchronous serial communication. For example, a communication format such as asynchronous serial communication or clock synchronous serial communication is applied. Alternatively, a communication format other than serial communication, such as parallel communication, may be applied.

  The main side microcomputer 302 and the payout side microcomputer 610 include serial communication related registers 302a and 610a including a status register, a reception data register, a transmission register, and the like. The sending-side microcomputer can send data to the receiving-side microcomputer by setting the data to be sent in the sending data register.After sending, the data is sent by referring to the sending completion flag contained in the status register. It is possible to detect whether transmission is in progress or data transmission is completed.

In addition, the receiving side microcomputer refers to the status register in response to a reception interrupt or the like, and when the reception bit included in the status register is ON, the data is received from the reception data register so that the data is received from the transmission side microcomputer. It can be received. In this embodiment, the serial communication circuits of the main microcomputer 302 and the payout microcomputer 610 are provided with a transmission FIFO (maximum 64 bytes) and a reception FIFO (maximum 8 bytes). The transmission FIFO has a predetermined number of bytes. When transmission data is set, the transmission data is transmitted to the receiving side microcomputer, and when reception data of at least 1 byte is set in the reception FIFO, the reception data can be received.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process shown in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in the WDT 314, and an initial value (for example, 11111111B (FFH)) is set as mask information provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 25 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 100 ms) is set as an initial value of a communication confirmation command to be described later.

  In step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, When the voltage is less than 9V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process of step S103 is repeatedly executed. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected the power supply is cut off). ) Proceeds to step S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process of step S103 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S105, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 (eg, a test output port) , A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S115).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S115 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not.

  If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S115 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S109 to delay the subsequent processing, and then the state before power interruption is established. Proceed to step S111 to return. If the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S115 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S115.

  In step S109, a delay process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this delay processing, processing for waiting for activation of the first sub-control unit 400 is performed. In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, time measurement by the WDT 314 is started. In step S115, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S115) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S117, the same delay process as in step S109 is executed (details will be described later). In step S119, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is started.

  In step S121, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. In step S121, in addition to the basic random number initial value updating process, a basic random number updating process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number updating process may be performed.

In step S123, command transmission processing is performed. In this command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S121 and S123 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Delay processing>

  Next, delay processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of delay processing in the main processing of the main control unit.

  In step S131, processing for transmitting a clear signal from a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 is executed. In step S133, a sub-control unit activation wait counter that determines a cycle of waiting for activation of the first sub-control unit 400 is initialized (for example, 90 is set). In step S135, the interrupt function limited counter is initialized (for example, 250 is set). The interrupt function limited counter is subtracted by timer interrupt processing every 4 ms.

  In step S137, a basic random number initial value update process is executed (details will be described later). In step S137, in addition to the basic random number initial value update process, a basic random number update process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number update process may be performed. In step S139, command transmission processing is performed, whereby various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S141, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limit counter is 0. If the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S137. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limit counter is 0, that is, if 250 is set in the interrupt function limit counter in step S135 and is subtracted by the timer interrupt process every 4 ms and 1000 ms = 1 second elapses, the process proceeds to step S143.

In step S143, the sub-control unit activation waiting counter is decremented by 1. In step S145, it is determined whether or not the sub control unit activation wait counter is 0. If the sub control unit activation wait counter is other than 0, the process returns to step S135. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit activation wait counter is 0, that is, 90 is set in the sub-control unit activation wait counter in step S133 and 90 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S147. In step S147, other processing is executed.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 4 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 4 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S212, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation counter is 0. If the interrupt function limitation counter is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S213. On the other hand, if the interrupt function limitation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S214. In step S213, the interrupt function limitation counter is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S239 without performing the processes in steps S215 to S235.

  In step S214, it is determined whether or not a specific abnormality detection flag (details will be described later) is ON. If the specific abnormality detection flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S239 without performing steps S215 to S235. On the other hand, if the specific abnormality detection flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S215.

  In step S215, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S216, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226 and 234 and starting holes 230, 232 and 228 have been won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read and 1 is added to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this winning acceptance process, whether or not there has been a winning at the general winning opening 226, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the ordinary drawing starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234. If there is a prize, the corresponding number of prize balls is stored in the RAM 308 in a prize ball number storage area provided for each prize opening and start opening. In step S219, serial command management processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command management process, serial communication with the payout control unit 600 is managed.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of either the winning symbol (ordinary symbol A) or the off symbol (general symbol B). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, a special figure prefetch control process is performed. In this special figure prefetch control process, prefetch such as a special figure winning random number is performed. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation Special flag A, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure B, 2R big hit If the flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on When the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag Special figure F when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H when the first small hit flag is on FIG. I, when the second off flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to have the respective modes of the special figure I, and the setting area of the RAM 308 Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S232, device monitoring processing is executed. Although details will be described later, in this device monitoring processing, processing for detecting the presence or absence of errors in various devices is performed. Here, the errors monitored in this device monitoring process are: tray pan full error (bottom pan full tank error), payout device error, payout excess error, illegal payout error, payout number switch error, main control communication error, CR unit not yet Examples include connection error, CR unit communication error, magnetic error error, external clock error error, magnetic field error error, switch level error error, frame opening error (front frame door opening error), switch non-connection error, and impact sensor error.

  The bottom pan full tank error is when the on state of the bottom pan full switch signal is read from the main when the timer interrupt is read once by the predetermined input port of the main board (when switching from the off state to the on state). It is output for payout. The payout device error means that the payout number (count number of the payout number switch) is a payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor has finished driving the number of payout requests (actually + brake period + non-excitation period has elapsed). When the number is smaller than the number, the occurrence of a payout device error is detected. When the retry process of paying out the game balls one by one is completed, the error state is canceled.

  The payout excess error is to stop the payout operation when ten game balls actually paid out with respect to the payout request number are detected. This payout excess error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180. The illegal payout error is to stop the payout operation when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch is counted) in a state where no payout request is generated. This illegal payout error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168, and the error state is canceled by operating the error cancel switch 168 or by initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM clear switch 180.

  The payout number switch error is an error of the payout number switch (not shown) of the game ball controlled by the payout board 170, and stops the payout operation when an abnormal connection of the payout number switch is detected (regardless of the main board). To do. This payout number switch error is an error to be canceled by the error cancel switch 168. After confirming whether the switch is connected correctly, the error cancel switch 168 is operated, or the RAM clear switch 180 is initialized (RAM clear). The error state is released. The main control communication error is an error that occurs when the main control connection confirmation signal OFF state is detected or when the main control operation confirmation signal ON state is detected continuously for two interrupts. Reception is impossible. However, if the number of payout requests remains, the payout is made up to that amount. When the ON state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected, and when the OFF state of the main control operation confirmation signal is detected continuously for two interrupts, the error state is canceled.

  The CR unit unconnected error occurs when the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is off when the CR unit unconnected error is released and continues for 16 ms. There is no effect on the payout of the ball). When the ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected and continued for 16 ms, the error state is canceled. After the error is released, communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

  Here, the connection signal relationship between the CR unit and the interface will be described. When various signals are transmitted from the CR unit to the payout board via the interface, the CR unit connection signal is a VL signal composed of a + 18V power source in the CR unit. The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal that conveys that the CR unit is being lent. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal for transmitting 25 lending requests and lending instructions for the basic unit.

  The CR unit communication error occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the lending request is generated (although there are other conditions, they are omitted because they are not particularly related here). After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error state is canceled by turning off the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal.

  The magnetic abnormality error is to stop the main control operation when a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The external clock error is an error that occurs when an error is detected in the random number update clock. The magnetic field abnormality error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The switch level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a winning switch is detected and continued for 1 second. The frame opening error is an error that occurs when the opening of the glass frame or the inner frame is detected. The switch non-connection error is an error of a winning switch (not shown), and is an error that occurs when an abnormal connection of a winning switch is detected. The impact sensor error is an error notification that continues until the power is turned off when the impact sensor detects an impact exceeding a predetermined amount.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands (for example, a signal indicating a specific abnormality when there is a specific abnormality in the device monitoring process in step S232) are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM (registered trademark) clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this external output signal setting process, a process of outputting the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed. As described above, the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 may be output to the external terminal board 609 without going through the payout board 170.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.
<Prize acceptance process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 388, the winning acceptance process (step S217) in the above-described main control timer interruption process will be described. FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of the winning acceptance process, and FIG. 4B shows a configuration example of the winning ball number storage areas 308a to 308d provided for each winning opening and starting opening. FIG.

  In step S151, the result of determination as to whether or not the winning determination pattern information in step S203 (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, the previous detection signal is present, and the current detection signal is present) is used. When it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the general prize opening 226, the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232, the ordinary figure start opening 228, and the variable prize opening 234 In step S152, if there is no winning, the process ends. In step S152, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning ball number storage area 308a to 308d provided for each winning opening and starting port is stored, and various random values are acquired as necessary.

  For example, when there is a winning at the general winning opening 226, the general winning opening 226 is stored in the general winning opening winning ball number storage area 308d of a predetermined byte (1 byte in this example) corresponding to the general winning opening 226. The number of prize balls corresponding to (for example, 10) is stored. Further, when a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of first special figure starting port prize balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 (1 byte in this example). The number of prize balls (for example, 4) corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 is stored in the storage area 308b. Further, when the reserved number storage area corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 is not full, the value is acquired from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 as the special figure 1 winning random number value and A value is acquired as a special figure 1 random value from a random number counter for numerical value generation and stored in a corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made at the second special figure starting port 232, the number of second special figure starting port winning balls corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 (1 byte in this example). The number of prize balls (for example, 4) corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is stored in the storage area 308c. If the reserved number storage area corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is not full, the value is acquired from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 as a special figure 2 winning random number value and A value is obtained as a special figure 2 random value from a random number counter for numerical value generation and stored in a corresponding random value storage area.

  Also, if there is a winning at the general chart start opening 228 and the reserved number storage area corresponding to the general chart start opening 228 is not full, the value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value is displayed. Obtained as a random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the predetermined winning byte storage area 308a for a predetermined winning byte (1 byte in this example) corresponding to the variable winning opening 234. The number of prize balls corresponding to (for example, 15) is stored.

Note that the number of winning prize openings and start openings is not limited to the example of the present embodiment. For example, when a plurality of variable prize winning openings are provided, the same process as the above process is performed for each variable winning prize opening Can be done. In addition, the ball detection sensor may be provided for each winning a prize opening or one starting opening, or may be provided for each of a plurality of winning prize openings or a plurality of starting openings. For example, in the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning ports 226 are provided, but a ball detection sensor may be provided for each of the general winning ports 226, or one ball detection sensor is provided for the plurality of general winning ports 226. May be. In addition, when a ball detection sensor is provided for each of a plurality of winning ports or a plurality of starting ports, a winning ball number storage area may be provided for each of the plurality of winning ports or each of a plurality of starting ports. The prize ball number storage area may be an area larger than 1 byte length (0 to 15), for example, an area of 2 bytes length (0 to 255).
<Serial command management processing>

  Next, the serial command management process (step S219) in the above-described main control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command management processing.

  As described above, in this serial command management process, when it is determined in step S212 that the interrupt function limit counter is other than 0 (when the timer interrupt function is limited), or in step S214, the specific abnormality is detected. This process is not executed when it is determined that the detection flag is ON (when there is specific abnormality information such as a magnetic abnormality error or a magnetic field abnormality error). The serial command management process may be executed when the timer interrupt function is limited, and the serial command management process may be executed when there is specific abnormality information. May be.

In step S155 of the serial command management process, a serial command reception process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command reception process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the payout control unit 600. When a command is received, a process corresponding to the command is performed. In step S156, serial command transmission processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this serial command transmission process, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600 is performed.
<Serial command reception processing>

  Next, the serial command reception process (step S155) in the above-described serial command management process will be described using FIG. 389 (b). FIG. 5B is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command reception processing.

  In step S161, it is determined whether or not a communication confirmation command has been received from the payout control unit 600. If the command is received, various types of information are initialized by executing the processing in steps S162 to S164, and the command If NO is received, the process proceeds to step S165. In step S165, the processing is terminated after other serial command reception processing is performed.

  In step S162, an initial value (0 in this example) is set to the serial command status stored in the RAM 308. In the next step S163, an initial value (in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter stored in the RAM 308. Then, 10) is set. Here, the serial command status is information indicating whether or not a prize ball command can be transmitted. When the information is a numerical value of 0, the prize command can be transmitted. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that the prize ball command cannot be transmitted.

  The communication confirmation command transmission counter is a counter that is decremented by one every time a communication confirmation command is transmitted once in step S177 of the serial command transmission process described later, and the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 is normal. It is used to determine whether or not it has been received. When 10 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission command, the main control unit 300 determines that the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 in step S178 of serial command transmission processing described later. This is when the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 has not been received even once during the period of 10 transmissions.

In step S164, the serial command communication error flag stored in the RAM 308 is set to 0, and in the next step S165, other serial command reception processing is performed, and then the processing ends. Here, the serial command communication error flag is information indicating whether or not an abnormality has occurred in serial communication. When the information is a numerical value of 0, it indicates that serial communication is normal. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that an abnormality has occurred in serial communication.
<Serial command transmission processing>

  Next, the serial command transmission process (step S156) in the serial command management process described above will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command transmission processing.

  In step S171, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S172, whether or not the communication confirmation command transmission timer is 0 (a predetermined time after transmitting the communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600). (In this embodiment, whether or not 100 ms has elapsed) is determined, and if 0 (when a predetermined time has elapsed), the processing from step S174 is performed, and if other than 0 (the predetermined time has elapsed) If so, the process proceeds to step S173. In step S173, a prize ball command setting process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this prize ball command setting process, a prize ball command transmission preparation process is executed when a prize ball command transmission condition is satisfied.

  In step S174, an initial value (25 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S175, 1 (a state in which a prize ball command cannot be transmitted) is set in the serial command status. The communication confirmation command transmission timer is a counter that is decremented by 1 every main control unit timer interrupt processing cycle (about 4 ms in this embodiment) in step S171, and transmits a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600. Then, it is used to determine whether or not a predetermined time has passed. When 25 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer, the communication confirmation command transmission timer is determined to be 0 in step S172 after about 100 ms (= 4 ms × 25) has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, the serial command status is set to 1 in step S175, so that the prize control command cannot be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the timing of transmitting the communication confirmation command. However, it may be configured such that a prize ball command can be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the same timing.

  In step S176, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register. In step S177, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission counter. In the next step S178, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 (whether the communication confirmation command has been transmitted 10 times) or not. In the case (when transmitted 10 times), the processing from step S179 is performed, and when it is other than 0 (when not transmitted 10 times), the process proceeds to step S181.

In step S179, an initial value (10 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter. In next step S180, an initial value (0 in this example) is set in the serial command status, and then the process proceeds to step S181. . In step S181, after the other serial command transmission process is performed, the process ends.
<Prize ball command setting process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, the prize ball command setting process (step S173) in the serial command transmission process described above will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing the flow of a prize ball command setting process.

  In step S191, it is determined whether or not the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S192. If not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S198. Here, “when the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied” means that in the above-described winning acceptance process (step S216), the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary figure starting port 228, Or, it is determined that there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234 and the serial command status indicates 0 (a state in which a winning ball command can be transmitted).

  In step S192, the above-mentioned variable prize opening prize ball number storage area 308a, first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b, second special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308c, and general winning opening The number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308d is updated. In the present embodiment, every time the winning ball command setting process is executed (each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed once), the variable winning prize winning ball number storage area 308a → the first special figure starting port. Award ball number storage area 308b → second special figure starting opening prize ball number storage area 308c → general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d In order of each prize ball number storage area, the number of winning balls It is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the storage area is 1 or more. When the number of prize balls is 1 or more, the prize ball number is updated by subtracting 1 from the number of prize balls, and the prize ball command corresponding to the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d being referred to is designated as the prize ball command. Get from table.

  In step S193, a numerical value corresponding to the prize ball command acquired in step S192 is set in the transmission data register, so that the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612.

  FIGS. 392 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of changes in the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d, and FIG. (D) shows an example of the prize ball command table. FIG. In this example, in the Nth (N is a positive integer) prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is 2 (00000010B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b, and the number of prize balls is updated from 2 (00000010B) to 1 (00000001B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 4D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the referenced first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is obtained. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure starting port is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  In the (N + 1) th prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308b for the first special figure start port is 1 (00000001B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage area 308b, and the number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (00000000B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 4D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the referenced first special figure start opening prize ball number storage area 308b is obtained. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure starting port is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  In the (N + 2) -th prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d is 1 (00000001B). 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls, and the number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (00000000B). Also, a general winning opening prize ball command (0AH) corresponding to the referenced general winning opening prize ball number storage area 308d is acquired from the winning ball command table shown in FIG. The prize ball command (0AH) for mouth is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

  Although an example in which one prize ball number is subtracted by one prize ball command setting process is shown here, two or more prize balls may be subtracted by one prize ball command setting process. In this case, the number of winning balls of the same type of winning opening (or starting opening) may be subtracted, or the number of winning balls of different types of winning opening (or starting opening) may be subtracted. Further, the order of referring to the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d is not limited. For example, the prize ball number storage area 308a to 308d may be referred to first in descending order of the number of prize balls. You may refer previously from the opening | mouth 213 and the 2nd special figure starting opening | mouth 214). The number of prize ball commands transmitted in one prize ball command setting process is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  Returning to FIG. 391, in step S194, the values in the winning ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are read, the values stored in the respective winning ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are added, and the total number of winning balls provided in the RAM 308 is obtained. Store in the storage area. In step S195, it is determined whether or not the value (total prize ball number) in the total prize ball number storage area calculated in step S194 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in this example). If not, go to step S198.

  In step S196, 10 is subtracted from the value of the total number of winning balls, and in the next step S197, 1 is added to the number of output requests provided in the RAM 308, and then the process returns to step S195. In step S198, after other prize ball command setting processing is performed, the processing is terminated.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S195 that the total number of winning balls is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process returns to the determination in step S195 after performing the processing in steps S196 and S197. When the number of winning balls is 25, the processing of steps S196 and S197 is performed twice, and as a result, 2 is set as the number of output requests. However, the present invention is not limited to such processing. For example, after performing the processing of steps S196 and S197, the prize ball command setting process is once ended, and the remaining output in the next prize ball command setting process is performed. It is good also as a structure which adds the number of requests.

In such a configuration, in the previous example, the total number of winning balls is subtracted from 25 to 15 in step S196, and in the subsequent step S197, the number of output requests is set to 1, and the next winning ball command setting processing step is performed. In S196, the total number of winning balls is subtracted from 15 to 5, and in the subsequent step S197, 1 is set as the output request number.
<Device monitoring processing>

  Next, device monitoring processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing in the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  In step S251, device information indicating the presence or absence of the error is initialized. In step S253, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read, the presence or absence of the above-described error is monitored, and if the error is detected, the process proceeds to step S255. On the other hand, if the above error is not detected, the device monitoring process is terminated. In step S255, abnormality information (device information) indicating the error detected in step S253 is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S257, it is determined whether or not there is specific abnormality information in the abnormality information set in step S255. If there is specific abnormality information, the process proceeds to step S257. On the other hand, if there is no specific abnormality information, the process proceeds to step S261. The specific abnormality information is abnormality information of one or a plurality of errors set in advance from the above-described abnormality information regarding errors. In the present embodiment, the abnormality information of the magnetic abnormality error and the magnetic field abnormality error is set in advance as the specific abnormality information, but is not limited to this. In step S259, the specific abnormality detection flag is turned on. In step S261, a device command transmission request is set.
<External output signal setting process>

  Next, the external output signal setting process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the external output signal setting process in the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S301, based on each information corresponding to the above-mentioned external output signal information (excluding payout schedule information, symbol fixed number information, start port information, jackpot information 1 to 4, and security information) Update the value. For example, when the security information is 1 and the other information is 0, the value of the external output signal information is updated to 10000000B.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of output requests is 1 or more, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S303, and if not, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S303, 1 is set in Bit 6 (payout schedule information) of the external output signal information. For example, in the previous example, the value of the external output signal information is updated from 10000000B to 11000000B. In step S304, 1 is subtracted from the number of output requests, and the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S306, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S307. In step S306, mask processing of external output information provided in the RAM 308 is performed.

  FIG. 395 is a diagram for describing an example of masking processing of external output signal information in step S306. In this example, the value of the external output signal information before the mask processing is 1100010001B, that is, the security information, the payout schedule information, and the symbol determination frequency information are 1, the other jackpot information 1 to 4, and the start port information is 0. Is shown. Further, it is indicated that the value of the mask information used for the mask processing is 10000000B.

  Here, “mask information” is the same 1-byte length information as the external output signal information, and Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the mask information correspond to Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the external output signal information, respectively. The mask process in step S306 is configured to compulsorily set (mask) a part of the external output signal information to 0 by calculating the logical product (AND) of the mask information and the external output signal information. Yes.

  The main control unit 300 sets the mask information to 11111111B (initial value) in the initial setting, but if it is determined that the specific abnormality detection flag is on in step S305 of the external output signal setting process (when there is specific abnormality information). Then, any one of bits 0 to 7 of the mask information is updated from 1 to 0. In this embodiment, when a magnetic abnormality error or a magnetic field abnormality error has occurred, the mask information is set to 10000000B by updating Bits 0 to 6 of the mask information from 1 to 0 as shown in FIG. , Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information are forcibly set to 0 (masked) by mask processing.

  Thereby, when 1 is set to any of Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information, that is, 1 is set to any one of the symbol determination number information, the start opening information, the jackpot information 1 to 4 and the payout schedule information. Even when the information is set, all the information is masked (set) to 0, and a low level signal is output from the signal corresponding to each information.

  Returning to FIG. 394, in step S307, for example, processing for outputting the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed based on the external output signal information. Specifically, when Bit 0 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 3 (design determination number information signal). The signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  Similarly, when 1 is set in Bit 1 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 4 (starting port information signal) for a predetermined period ( For example, a period of 500 ms) is output. When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 2 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 5 (big hit information 1 signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 3 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 6 (big hit information 2 signal) for a predetermined period (for example, , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  When 1 is set in Bit 4 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 7 (big hit information 3 signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When 1 is set in Bit 5 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 8 (big hit information 4 signal). , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

When Bit 6 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) , For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 7 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) for a predetermined period (for example, For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. The “predetermined period (output time of each signal)” in this example is not limited to a period of 500 ms, and may be a period of less than 500 ms or a period of more than 500 ms.
<Variation 1 of external output signal setting processing>

  FIG. 396 is a diagram showing a first modification of the external output signal setting process. In the external output signal setting process according to Modification 1, the processes of steps S305, S401, and S402 are applied instead of the processes of steps S305 to S306 of the external output signal setting process shown in FIG.

  Specifically, in step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off. If the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S401 to perform the first masking process of the external output signal. Proceeding to S402, second mask processing of the external output signal is performed. In the first mask process, the same process as the mask process in step S306 is performed. In the second mask process, mask information (first mask information) different from the mask information (first mask information) used in the first mask process is used. Mask processing is performed using the second mask information. Here, in this embodiment, the first mask information is provided in the storage area of the RAM 308 and the contents can be rewritten. On the other hand, the second mask information is provided in the storage area of the ROM 306 and the contents can be rewritten. It is impossible.

  For example, in the first mask processing, the mask information is updated from 1111111B to 10000000B by updating Bit 0 to 6 of the mask information from 1 to 0, and Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information are changed by the mask processing. Forcibly set to 0 (mask). On the other hand, in the second mask processing, the initial value 11111111B is used as it is as mask information, and Bits 0 to 7 of the external output signal information are not forcibly set (masked) by mask processing.

With such a configuration, mask processing can be used properly according to conditions (for example, depending on whether there is a specific abnormality), and an external signal suitable for the conditions may be output in some cases.
<Modification 2 of External Output Signal Setting Process>

  FIG. 397 shows a second modification of the external output signal setting process. In the external output signal setting process according to the second modification, the order of the process of step S305 of the external output signal setting process shown in FIG. 394 and the process of steps S302 to S304 are switched.

  Specifically, in step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S306 to perform mask processing, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S302 and subsequent steps. It is configured.

With this configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an external signal can be prevented from being output (or the external signal is delayed). For example, when there is a specific abnormality May be able to prevent external signals from being output (or to delay external signals). For this reason, an external signal may be output at an appropriate timing.
<Processing of payout control unit 600>

  Next, processing executed by the CPU of the ball number control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of the payout control unit 600, and FIG. 2B is a flowchart of command reception interruption of the payout control unit 600.

  The payout control unit 600 is provided with a reset signal output circuit that outputs a reset signal when the power is turned on. The CPU of the payout control unit 600 to which this reset signal is input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes processing according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM.

  In the present embodiment, after the payout control unit 600 starts reset (starts up), the main control unit 300 that receives power supply from the payout control unit 600 starts reset (starts up) later than the payout control unit 600. It is configured. The payout control unit 600 to be activated first performs various initial settings in the payout control unit main process, and then waits for reception of a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 in a command analysis process described later. When the payout control unit 600 receives the first main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300, the payout control unit 600 performs an activation process, which will be described later, and until the main control communication confirmation command is received in the payout control part interrupt process. Starts execution of some processes whose execution is restricted (details will be described later).

  In step S401, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 650 to the payout control unit 600 by the voltage monitoring circuit is a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). ), It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), step S402 is repeatedly executed. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), step S402 is performed. The process proceeds to S403.

  In step S403, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, settings for permitting writing to the RAM, initial settings for the I / O port, and the like are performed. In step S404, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state), step S405 is performed. If the process returns to the state before power interruption, the process proceeds to step S406.

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the operation unit provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicating that there is an operation), that is, It is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S405 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM is read, and whether the power status information is information indicating suspend. Determine whether or not.

  If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S405 to set the pachinko machine 100 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM is stored. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is 0 (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S406 to return to the state before the power interruption. If the checksum result is other than 0 (checksum) If the result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S405 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S405.

  In step S405, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM, and the like are performed. In step S406, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, initialization of the RAM storage area to be cleared upon power recovery (the command buffer for storing commands, the storage area excluding error status for storing error status, etc.) is initialized. Etc.

  In step S407, initial setting 3 is performed. In this initial setting 3, among the error statuses stored in the error status storage area provided in the RAM, an illegal payout error (an error based on a payout being detected in a state where a payout payout request has not occurred) and payout Information other than excess error (error based on paying out more than the expected number of payouts, such as when a payout exceeding the specified number of game balls to be paid out based on winning a prize at the winning slot is detected) Clear the interrupt or enable interrupts.

  In step S408, it is determined whether or not there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main control unit 300. If there is unanalyzed data, command analysis processing is performed in step S409, and there is no unanalyzed data. Then, the process proceeds to step S410.

  In step S410, the presence / absence of an unsent command is determined. If there is an unsent command, the process proceeds to step S411, and if not, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S411, command output processing is performed. In this command output process, the command set in the command analysis process in step S409 is output. In step S412, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. If the low voltage signal is off (when no power-off is detected), the process returns to step S408, and the low voltage signal is on. In the case of detecting a power shutdown, the process proceeds to step S413.

  In step S413, a power interruption process is performed. In the power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Further, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0 and stored in a checksum calculation numerical storage area. The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-mentioned numerical storage area for checksum calculation, and written to the RAM. Perform prohibited settings.

  In step S414, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. When the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S414 is repeatedly executed to turn off the low voltage signal. When the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply is not detected to be cut off), the process returns to step S401 to start the main process from the beginning.

Next, a command reception interrupt of the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt is a process executed when the payout control unit 600 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S451 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.
<Command analysis processing>

  Next, the command analysis process (step S409) in the payout control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 398 (a). FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of command analysis processing.

  In step S501, it is determined whether or not the processing command is a main control communication confirmation command (a communication confirmation command received from the main control unit 300) by referring to an unprocessed command stored in the command storage area. As a result of the determination, if the unprocessed command is a main control communication confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S502, the main control communication confirmation command reception process (details will be described later) is terminated, and the process ends. Advances to step S503 to perform the process upon receiving a prize ball command and ends the process.

  <Process when receiving main control communication confirmation command>

  Next, the main control unit communication confirmation command reception process (step S502) in the command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 398 (b). FIG. 7B is a flowchart showing the flow of processing upon reception of the main control communication confirmation command.

  In step S551, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the first main control communication confirmation command received after activation of the payout control unit 500. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S552, and does not apply. In that case, the process proceeds to step S554. In step S552, after the main control unit communication confirmation command received flag provided in the RAM is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S553 to execute start-up processing (details will be described later).

In step S554, an initial value (500 in this example) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, and in the next step S555, the main control communication error flag is set to OFF. In step S556, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to ON, and the process ends.
<Startup process>

  Next, the activation process (step S553) in the main control unit communication confirmation command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. 399 (c). FIG. 3C is a flowchart showing the flow of activation processing.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is an initial activation. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S602, and if not, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the payout control unit 600 is a return start (start to return to the state before power interruption). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S603, and if not, the process proceeds to step S604. . In step S603, the process ends after the RAM is initialized. In step S604, the process ends after prohibiting all interrupts including a timer interrupt for starting the payout control unit interrupt process.
<Discharge control unit interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 400, payout control unit interrupt processing executed by the payout control unit 600 will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit interrupt process. The payout control unit 600 includes a counter / timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing of the payout control unit at a predetermined cycle is triggered by this timer interrupt. Start.

  In step S701, the register value is saved, in step S702, the interrupt flag is cleared, and in step S703, WDT clear and restart are performed. In step S704, a received command is processed. In this process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 300 (for example, a prize ball command is received), and if received, the received command data is set in the reception command buffer area.

  In step S705, it is determined whether a main control communication confirmation command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not, the process proceeds to step S714. As described above, since the main control unit 300 is supplied with power from the payout control unit 600, its activation is delayed from the payout control unit 600. For this reason, in this step, until the main control unit 300 is activated, determination processing is performed in order to wait for the processing in subsequent steps S706 to S713.

  In step S706, port input processing is performed. In this port input process, the value of the I / O port is acquired and the state of various sensors is detected. Specifically, the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606, the ball payout signal input from the payout sensor 604, the signal input from the lower plate sensor, the state of the signal input from the error release switch, etc. Is stored in an input signal information storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S707, timer update processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this timer update process, the main control communication monitoring timer, the lending request waiting timer and lending instruction waiting timer provided in the RAM, the turning on / off time of the payout notification LED, the motor driving / non-driving time Various timers are updated, including timers for timing etc.

  In step S708, error management processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this error management process, whether or not there is an abnormality in communication with the main control unit 300 is monitored, whether or not various errors have occurred, and an error status provided in the RAM is determined. Information about errors is stored in the storage area.

  In step S709, CR unit communication processing is performed. In this CR unit communication process, communication with the card unit 608 is performed based on the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606. For example, when a game ball lending request signal is received from the card unit 608, the number of lending requests included in the lending request signal is added to the number of payouts in the lending number of payout storage unit described later.

  In step S710, a payout management process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this payout management process, the payout device 552 is controlled. In step S1708, signal output processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this signal output process, a signal output from the external terminal board 609 to the outside is controlled.

  In step S712, transmission command setting processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this transmission command setting process, a process for setting various commands to be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 is performed. In step S713, port output processing is performed. In this port output process, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, an LED for notifying the player that an error has occurred (for example, an LED disposed on the upper part of the pachinko machine 100) ) And when the error is resolved, the LED is turned off. For example, when the payout excess error flag provided in the RAM is set, the LED for notifying the player that a payout excess error has occurred is turned on, and the payout excess error flag is cleared. In that case, the LED is turned off. In addition, when the lower plate full tank error flag provided in the RAM is set, the LED for notifying the player that the lower plate full tank error has occurred is turned on, and the lower plate full tank error is set. When the flag is cleared, the LED is turned off.

In step S714, the register value is restored. In step S715, the interrupt is set, and the process ends.
<Timer update processing>

  Next, the timer update process (step S707) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 401 (a). FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of timer update processing.

  In step S751, it is determined whether or not the main control communication monitoring timer is other than 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S752, and 1 is subtracted from the main control communication monitoring timer, and then the process proceeds to step S753. Then, the process proceeds to step S753. In the present embodiment, the period of the payout control unit timer interrupt process is about 2 ms, and 500 is set as the initial value of the main control communication monitoring timer in the main control communication confirmation command reception process, so step S751 The main control communication monitoring timer is determined to be 0 when about 1000 ms (= about 2 ms × 500) has elapsed since the communication confirmation command was received from the main control unit 300.

In step S753, after other timer update processing is performed, the processing ends. As other timer update processing, for example, update processing of the lending request waiting timer and the lending instruction waiting timer provided in the RAM, lighting / extinguishing time of the payout notification LED, motor driving / non-driving time, etc. are counted. For example, timer update processing.
<Error management processing>

  Next, the timer update process (step S708) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 401 (b). FIG. 2B is a flowchart showing the flow of timer update processing.

  In step S801, it is determined whether or not the main control communication monitoring timer is 0. If it is 0 (as described above, a predetermined time after receiving the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 (in this embodiment, about 1000 ms). ) Has passed), the process proceeds to step S802, the main control communication error flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S803. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S803.

In step S803, after other error management processing is performed, the processing ends. Other error management processes include, for example, a process for determining whether various errors have occurred and storing information on the error in an error status storage area provided in the RAM, or a main control unit communication error flag in step S802. For example, a process for stopping the launching of the ball by the launching device 110 when is set to ON.
<Discharge management process>

  Next, the payout management process (step S710) in the payout control unit interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout management process.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not a ball payout signal is input from the payout sensor 604. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information stored in the loan payout number storage unit provided in the RAM is larger than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S903, and if not, the process proceeds to step S904. . In step S903, the value of the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is decremented (subtracted by 1).

  In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is larger than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S905, and if not, the process proceeds to step S910. In step S905, the value of the payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is decremented (subtracted by 1). In step S906, the payout amount information in the payout external output payout storage unit provided in the RAM is incremented (added by 1).

  In step S907, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information in the payout number output unit for payout is 10 or more. If yes, the process proceeds to step S908. If not, the process proceeds to step S911. . In step S908, the value of the payout external device output count provided in the RAM is incremented (added by one). In step S909, 10 is subtracted from the value of the payout amount information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout, and the subtraction result is stored in the payout amount information. In step S910, it is determined that there is an excessive payout error state, the information is stored in the RAM, and then the process proceeds to step S911.

  In step S911, whether or not it is in a payout prohibition state, that is, during a payout excess error, receiving tray full sensor detection, not connected to main control unit, not connected to card unit 608, abnormal communication with card unit 608, etc. It is determined whether it corresponds to. If it is not in the payout prohibition state, the process proceeds to step S912. If it is in the payout prohibition state, the process ends.

  Even during detection of the pan full sensor, the payout control is performed so that the payout operation is stopped when the ball is full up to the passage connecting the payout device and the lower pan, and the payout device cannot physically pay out. You may comprise. Moreover, you may comprise so that the sub-control part 400 may alert | report a dish full tank based on the detection of a dish full tank sensor.

In step S912, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is greater than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S914, and if not, the process proceeds to step S913. In step S913, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout amount information in the payout payout number storage unit is greater than 0. If so, the process proceeds to step S914, and if not, the process ends. In step S914, the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 is driven to pay out the game ball.
<Signal output processing>

  Next, the signal output process (step S711) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of signal output processing.

  In step S951, it is determined whether or not the payout external device output counter is greater than 0. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S952, and if not, the process proceeds to step S954. In step S952, a signal indicating the payout amount information (payout signal indicating the number of game balls to be paid out) is output to the external terminal board 609. In step S953, the value of the external device output counter is decremented (one). Subtract).

  More specifically, the payout control unit 600 receives the above-described output schedule information and the payout request information from the main control unit 300, and then pays out the payout external output payout number storage unit in step S907 of the payout management process. If the value of the number information is 10 or more, the payout external device output counter is incremented in the next step S908. Accordingly, the payout control unit 600 outputs a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 609 in step S952 of the signal output process (interrupt process). That is, the payout control unit 600 outputs a payout information signal indicating the payout completion number of game balls to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 609 after starting the payout of the ball in the payout process.

  In step S952, as other signal output processing, for example, based on the external output signal information, the external terminal board signals 1 and 2 toward the external terminal board 609, the CR gaming machine READY signal, the CR gaming machine rental completion signal, and Processing for outputting payout error LEDs 1 to 4 is performed. Specifically, when 1 is set in Bit 0 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) for a predetermined period. (For example, a period of 500 ms) is output. When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  Similarly, when 1 is set in Bit 1 of the external output signal information, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 2 (door opening information signal) for a predetermined period ( For example, a period of 500 ms) is output. When 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 2 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as a CR gaming machine READY signal (PRDY signal) for a predetermined period (for example, 500 ms). And a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output when 0 is set. When Bit 3 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal) as a CR gaming machine lending completion signal (EXS signal). For a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

  When Bit 4 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED1 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 5 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED2 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

When Bit 6 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED3 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 7 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is output as a payout error LED4 signal for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms). If 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.
<Send command processing>

  Next, the transmission command process (step S712) in the above-described payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of transmission command processing.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is on, the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 is executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1002, a communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register.

  In step S1003, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to OFF. In the next step S1004, after other error command set processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S1005. As another error command set process executed in step S1004, for example, both a communication confirmation command and a second command other than the main control communication error command (for example, a command for notifying the occurrence of a payout error) are transmitted. For example, a process for determining whether it is necessary and transmitting a second command following the communication confirmation command when it is necessary corresponds.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off. If it is on, the process of step S1006 is executed, and if it is off, the process ends. In step S1006, a main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register.
<Error in payout control unit 600>

  Next, an error in the payout control unit 600 will be described. Errors in the payout control unit 600 are roughly classified into errors related to payout of prize balls (or lending), errors related to communication with the main control unit 300, errors related to the game frame state, and errors related to the CR unit (card unit) 608. be able to.

  <Errors regarding payout of prize balls (or loans)>

  There are four types of errors related to payout of prize balls (or lending): a tray full tank error, a payout device error, a payout excess error, and an illegal payout error. The occurrence condition of the bottom pan full tank error is when the bottom pan full tank switch signal is turned on and the state continues for 100 ms, and the release condition is that the bottom pan full tank switch signal is off and the state Is for 100 ms. In the lower tray full tank error, the driving of the dispensing motor is stopped until the release condition is satisfied after the generation condition is satisfied.

  The occurrence condition of the payout device error is when the shortage of payout number is confirmed after the payout operation is completed, or when the difference between the payout motor drive number and the actual payout number reaches 5 during the payout operation. The condition is when the passing of a game ball to the payout number switch is detected during the retry process. In the payout device error, the retry process is repeatedly executed until the release condition is satisfied after the occurrence condition is satisfied.

  The payout excess error is when 10 excess payouts are detected. The release condition is when the error clear switch signal is turned on or when the RAM clear switch signal is turned on when the power is turned on. is there. In the payout excess error, the drive of the payout motor is stopped until the release condition is satisfied after the occurrence condition is satisfied.

  An illegal payout error is detected when the passing of a game ball to the payout number switch is detected when no payout request has occurred, or when the error cancel switch signal is turned ON, or when the RAM clear switch signal is turned ON when the power is turned on. This is the case. In the case of an unauthorized payout error, the drive of the payout motor is stopped until the release condition is satisfied after the occurrence condition is satisfied.

  <Errors related to communication with main controller 300>

Errors related to communication with the main control unit 300 include main control communication errors. The generation condition of the main control communication error is when the reception interval of the main control communication command from the main control unit 300 exceeds 1000 ms, and the cancellation condition is when the main control communication command from the main control unit 300 is received It is. In the case of a main control communication error, the game ball is stopped from being emitted until the release condition is satisfied after the generation condition is satisfied.
<Errors related to game frame status>

An error relating to the game frame state includes a payout number switch error. The occurrence condition of the payout number switch error is when the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF and the ON state of the payout number switch operation confirmation signal is detected and the state continues for 16 ms. The release condition is the error release switch signal. Is detected, or the RAM clear switch signal is turned on when the power is turned on. In the payout number switch error, the drive of the payout motor is stopped until the release condition is satisfied after the generation condition is satisfied.
<Errors related to CR unit>

  There are two types of errors related to CR units: CR unit unconnected errors and CR unit communication errors. The occurrence condition of the CR unit unconnected error is when the CR unit connection signal OFF is detected and the state continues for 16 ms, and the release condition is that the CR unit connection signal is ON and the state continues for 16 ms. This is the case. In the CR unit unconnected error, the game ball is stopped from being fired until the release condition is satisfied after the generation condition is satisfied. If the number of lending requests is other than 0, the lending payout operation is performed until the number of lending requests becomes 0.

The CR unit communication error is generated when an illegal input of the CR unit READY signal (or the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal) is detected during monitoring of the input signal from the lending device such as a game ball. The condition is when a communication abnormality is notified to a lending device such as a game ball and then OFF of the CR unit READY signal (or CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal) is detected. In the CR unit communication error, the CR gaming machine READY signal and the CR gaming machine lending completion signal are output from the occurrence condition to the release condition, and the input signal from the lending device such as a gaming ball is abnormal. Notify that.
<Variation 1 of transmission command processing>

  FIG. 405 is a diagram illustrating a first modification of the transmission command process, and FIG. 406 is a diagram illustrating an example of a command transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  In the transmission command process shown in FIG. 405, the processes in steps S1005 and S1006 of the transmission command process shown in FIG. 404 are executed when the determination in step S1051 is NO, and the processes in steps S1507 to 1513 are added. .

  In step S1051, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off. If it is on, the processing of steps S1054 to S1056 is executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1052. In step S1054, a transmission request for the communication confirmation command (10H) shown in FIG. 406 is set by setting 1 to Bit0 of the transmission command output request information of 1 byte length stored in the RAM.

  In step S1055, another command transmission request is set. Here, when a prize ball signal output request command (20H) is transmitted, by setting 1 to Bit 1 of the transmission command output request information, a transmission request for the prize ball signal output request command (20H) shown in FIG. When the error 1 command (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H) is transmitted, by setting Bit 2 of the transmission command output request information to 1, the error 1 command (30H, 30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H).

  Further, when transmitting an error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H), by setting 1 to Bit 3 of the transmission command output request information, the error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H) is set, and when a payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) is sent, the payout shown in FIG. A transmission request for the display LED notification command (50H, 51H) is set.

  In step S1056, other command output information is set. Here, when notifying the error release state or the completion of the prize ball payout operation as error information, 0 is set to Bit 0 of the output information of 1 byte length provided in the RAM, the occurrence of the payout number switch error, the full of the saucer When notifying the occurrence of a tan error or a prize ball payout operation, 1 is set to Bit0 of the output information. Further, when notifying the occurrence of an illegal payout error or a payout device error, 1 is set in the output information Bit1, and when notifying the occurrence of a payout excess error or a main control communication error, the output information Bit2 is set. When 1 is set and notification of the occurrence of a door opening error or CR unit non-connection error is made, 1 is set in Bit 3 of the output information.

  In step S1052, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off. If it is on, the process of step S1053 is executed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1057. In step S1053, a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command is set in the transmission data register to transmit the main control communication error command to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612. Then, the process proceeds to step S1057.

  In step S1057, it is determined whether or not a winning ball signal command transmission request setting condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1058, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1059. In step S1059, after setting a transmission request for a prize ball signal command, the process proceeds to step S1059. In step S1059, after 5 is set in the transmission command setting counter stored in the RAM, the process proceeds to step S1060.

  In step S1060, it is determined whether or not a transmission command setting process execution condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1061, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1062. In step S1061, a transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, the least significant bit (Bit0) of the transmission command output request information set in step S1055 is referred to. When 1 is set, a numerical value (indicated by the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register) In this example, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting 10H).

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1056 and the error 1 command are supported. By combining the numerical value to be transmitted (30H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (in this example, 30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, or 38H) in the transmission data register, the serial communication line 612 is set. An error 1 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via this.

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1056 and the error 2 command are supported. By combining the numerical value (40H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, or 48H in this example) in the transmission data register, the serial communication line 612 is set. An error 2 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via

  Subsequently, the transmission command output request information is shifted by 1 bit to the right, and then the lowest bit (Bit 0) is referred to. When 1 is set, the output information set in step S1056 and the payout display LED are supported. By combining the numerical value (50H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (in this example, either 50H or 51H) in the transmission data register, the main control unit 300 is connected via the serial communication line 612. The payout display LED notification command is transmitted to

  In step S1062, after subtracting 1 from the transmission command setting counter, the process proceeds to step S1063. In step S1063, it is determined whether or not the transmission command setting counter is 0. If the transmission command setting counter is 0, the process ends. If not, the process returns to step S1060 to continue the command transmission process.

  <Communication example 1 between main controller 300 and payout controller 600>

  Next, communication example 1 between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows a timing chart of communication example 1 of main control unit 300 and payout control unit 600 and an example of changes in variables at a predetermined timing.

  The main control unit 300 subtracts 1 from the communication confirmation command transmission timer in the serial command transmission process of the N (N is a positive integer) main control unit timer interrupt process, and the communication confirmation command transmission timer is set to 0. At that time, the communication confirmation command transmission timer is set to an initial value of 25 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 100 ms), and the serial command status is set to 1 (a numerical value indicating that a prize ball command cannot be transmitted). Set. At the same timing, by setting a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612, and then the communication confirmation command transmission counter 1 For example, when the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 10, it is updated to 9.

  On the other hand, when the payout control unit 600 receives a main control communication confirmation command in the command analysis process, the payout control unit 600 executes a main control unit communication confirmation command reception process. In this main control unit communication confirmation command reception process, the main control communication monitoring timer is set to an initial value of 500 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 1000 ms), the main control communication error flag is set to OFF, and communication is performed. Set the confirmation command reception flag to ON.

  Subsequently, since the payout control unit 600 determines that the communication confirmation command reception flag is on in step S1001 of the transmission command process, it sets the numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register, thereby enabling serial communication. After transmitting the communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 via the line 612, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to OFF.

  Further, the main control unit 300 determines that the communication confirmation command has been received from the payout control unit 600 in the serial command reception process of the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process. 0 (a numerical value indicating that a prize ball command can be transmitted) is set, an initial value of 10 is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter, and 0 is set in the serial command communication error flag. Further, in the serial command transmission process of the N + 1th main control unit interrupt process, the value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer is updated from 25 to 24 by subtracting 1 from the communication confirmation command transmission timer.

  Subsequently, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not a prize ball command transmission condition is established in the prize ball command setting process of the N + 2 and subsequent main control unit timer interrupt processing. By setting a numerical value corresponding to the ball command in the transmission data register, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612.

  <Example of prize ball command transmission timing>

  For example, in the period indicated by t1 in the figure, the main control unit 300 receives a communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process and the serial command status becomes 0 ( Since the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied once (after the winning ball command is ready to be sent), the winning ball command is sent to the payout control unit 600 in the N + 3th main control unit timer interruption process. Sending once.

  In the period indicated by t2 in the figure, after the communication confirmation command is received from the payout control unit 600 in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process and the serial command status becomes 0 (the prize ball command can be transmitted). Since the award ball command transmission condition is satisfied twice, the award ball command is issued once to the payout control unit 600 in the N + 2 and N + 3 main control unit timer interruption processes. Is sending.

  Also, during the period indicated by t3 in the figure, the main control unit 300 receives the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process and before the serial command status becomes 0 ( Since the winning ball command transmission condition is satisfied once (before the winning ball command can be sent), the sending of the winning ball command is temporarily suspended. Then, in the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process, after waiting for a communication confirmation command to be received from the payout control unit 600 (waiting for the award ball command to be transmitted), the N + 1th main control unit timer interruption process. In the control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 once.

  FIG. 408 (a) is an enlarged view of a time chart when a prize ball command is transmitted. In this example, a ball enters the start opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a symbol A, and then enters the starting opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a reference B in the N-th main control unit timer interruption process. Sphere is detected. In addition, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600 at the same timing indicated by the reference C in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, FIG. 408 (b) is an enlarged view of the time chart of the period indicated by t3 in FIG. In this example, a ball enters the start opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a symbol A, and then enters the starting opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a reference B in the N-th main control unit timer interruption process. Sphere is detected. In addition, at the timing indicated by the symbol F of the same N-th main controller timer interrupt process, it is determined that the winning pattern at the start opening or winning opening matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information. In the example, since the timing for transmitting the communication confirmation command has arrived at the same time, the communication confirmation command is transmitted in preference to the prize ball command at the timing indicated by the symbol F (the prize ball command transmission is temporarily suspended). ing).

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at the timing indicated by the symbol H of the M + 1 (M is a positive integer) number of payout control unit main processes. In addition, the main control unit 300 confirms reception of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 at the timing indicated by the symbol C of the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process, and then holds the payout control unit 600 on hold. The prize ball command that was being sent is sent once.

Returning to FIG. 407, during the period indicated by t <b> 4 in FIG. 407, the main controller 300 determines that the award ball command transmission condition has been satisfied twice before the N-th main controller timer interruption process. In the main control unit timer interruption process, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600, but immediately after that, the timing for transmitting a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600 has arrived. Therefore, the serial command status is set to 1 (the prize ball command cannot be transmitted). For this reason, the transmission of the prize ball command is temporarily suspended, and it waits for reception of a communication confirmation command from the payout control part 600 in the N + 2th main control part timer interruption process (a state in which the prize ball command can be sent). In the N + 2 main control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600.
<Example of serial communication error>

  In the period indicated by t6 in the figure, the main control unit 300 transmits a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600 in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, and then the Nth and subsequent main control unit timer interrupt processes. Since the response of the payout control unit 600 to the communication confirmation command has not been received, the serial command status is held at 1.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 300 waits for the response of the payout control unit 600 to the communication confirmation command until the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter becomes 10 to 0. If there is still no response, as shown in t8 in FIG. The serial communication error flag is changed from 0 to 1. If there is a response from the payout control unit 600 thereafter, the serial communication error flag is changed from 1 to 0 and the serial communication is restarted, as shown at t9 in FIG.

  <When multiple winnings are detected at the start opening or winning opening>

  FIG. 409 (a) is an example of a time chart in the case where a plurality of winnings at the start opening or winning opening are detected in one main control unit timer interruption process. In this example, the balls enter the start opening or the winning opening at the timings indicated by reference signs A and I, respectively, and then start at the timing indicated by reference signs B and J in the Nth main control unit timer interruption process. A ball entering the mouth or winning a prize is detected. In addition, at the same timing indicated by reference C in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600, and the subsequent N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt process is performed. At the timing indicated by the symbol K, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600.

  <Modification of Communication Confirmation Command from Payment Control Unit 600>

  FIG. 409 (b) is a time chart showing a modified example of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600. In this example, a ball enters the start opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a symbol A, and then enters the starting opening or a winning opening at a timing indicated by a reference B in the N-th main control unit timer interruption process. Sphere is detected. In addition, at the timing indicated by the symbol F of the same N-th main controller timer interrupt process, it is determined that the winning pattern at the start opening or winning opening matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information. In the example, since the timing for transmitting the communication confirmation command has arrived at the same time, the communication confirmation command is transmitted in preference to the prize ball command at the timing indicated by the symbol F (the prize ball command transmission is temporarily suspended). ing).

On the other hand, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at the timing indicated by the symbol H of the M + 1 (M is a positive integer) number of payout control unit main processes. Further, the main control unit 300 confirms the reception of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 at the timing indicated by the symbol C of the (N + 1) th main control unit timer interrupt process, and then receives a prize ball for the payout control unit 600. Sending the command once. In response to this prize ball command, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at a timing indicated by a symbol M of the M + 3th payout control unit main process.
<External terminal board signal output example>

Next, an output example of the external terminal board signal will be described with reference to FIGS. 410 to 417. Note that “prize ball” in the drawing indicates the timing of winning detection by the main control unit 300 and the number of winning balls (the number of payout requests), and “payout” indicates the timing of game ball payout by the payout control unit 600. The number of payouts is shown. The “payout schedule information signal” indicates the waveform of the payout schedule information signal (external terminal board signal 9) output by the main controller 300, and the “payout information signal” is output by the payout controller 600. The waveform of the payout information signal (external terminal board signal 1) is shown.
<External terminal board signal output example 1>

  FIG. 410 is a time chart showing an output example 1 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the main controller 300 detects the number of winning balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the winning port counter updating process (step S216) by detecting the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. While storing 3 as the number of prize balls in the storage area, a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= number of prize balls 3) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 in the serial command management process (step S219).

  Further, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is a predetermined number 10 or more in the serial command management process (step S219), and subtracts 10 from the total number of winning balls if applicable. Although 1 is added to the number of output requests, since the total number of winning balls is 3, processing for adding 1 to the number of output requests is not performed. Further, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more, but here the number of output requests is 0. The process of outputting the payout schedule information signal is not performed.

  Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 pays out the number of payout requests (3 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception process (step S503) of the command analysis process. The payout amount information in the payout number storage unit (in this example, initial value 0) and the payout number information in the payout external output payout number storage unit (in this example, initial value 0) are respectively added to payout for payout The payout number information in the number storage unit is updated to 3, and the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 3. In addition, after the payout control unit 600 pays out the game ball by driving the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout amount information in the payout payout number storage unit in the payout management process (step S710). The payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is subtracted by the payout number. Here, since the payout number information in the payout amount storage unit is 3, after paying out three game balls, The number-of-payout information in the amount-of-payout storage unit for payout is updated to 0 (= 3-3).

  Subsequently, in the signal output process (step S711), the payout control unit 600 outputs an external number when the value of the payout number information in the payout number output unit for payout is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). Processing for outputting a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the terminal board 609 is performed. Here, since the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is 3, the payout information signal is Processing for output is not performed.

  Subsequently, when the main control unit 300 detects a winning at the variable winning opening 234, the main control section 300 stores the number of winning balls in the winning ball number storage area corresponding to the variable winning opening 234 in the winning opening counter updating process (step S216). 15 and a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= 15 prize balls) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 in the serial command management process (step S219). Further, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is a predetermined number 10 or more in the serial command management process (step S219), and subtracts 10 from the total number of winning balls if applicable. Then, 1 is added to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of winning balls is 15 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total number of winning balls 15 to update the total number of winning balls to 5, and the number of output requests is updated to 1. The number of output requests is updated to 1.

  Subsequently, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more. In this example, the number of output requests is 1. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), a high level signal is output over a predetermined period Ta as the first payout schedule information signal.

  Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 uses the payout request number (15 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception process of the command analysis process (step S503). The number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit is added to the number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit (0 in this example) and the number-of-payout information in the payout number storage unit for external output (3 in this example). 15, the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 18. Further, the payout control unit 600 drives the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout management process (step S710) and the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit to pay out the game ball. The payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is subtracted by the payout number. Here, since the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is 15, the payout is made after paying out 15 game balls. The payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is updated to 0 (= 15-15).

  Also, the payout control unit 600, in the signal output process (step S711), if the value of the payout number information in the payout number output unit for payout at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) or more, Processing for outputting a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the board 609 is performed. Here, since the payout number information in the payout number storage unit at the time of payout is 18, the value of the payout number information The payout information signal is output once at a timing when it is determined that is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). In this example, a high level signal is output over the period Tb as the payout information signal.

Here, the high-level period Ta of the payout schedule information signal output by the main control unit 300 and the high-level period Tb of the payout information signal output by the payout control unit 600 are not particularly limited. Ta is set longer than the period Tb (the shortest period is 800 ms). With such a configuration, the external device may be able to easily distinguish between the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal depending on the difference in pulse width.
<External terminal board signal output example 2>

  FIG. 411 is a time chart illustrating an output example 2 of the external terminal board signal. As described above, in the serial command management process (step S219), the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number 10, and if applicable, calculates 10 from the total number of winning balls. Subtract and add 1 to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of winning balls is 24 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total number of winning balls 24 to update the total number of winning balls to 14, and the number of output requests is updated to 1. After that, since the total number of winning balls after subtraction is 14, which is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is again subtracted from the total number of winning balls 14, and the total number of winning balls is updated to 4. Has been updated.

  Subsequently, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more. In this example, the number of output requests is 2. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process, a high level signal is output for a predetermined period as the first payout schedule information signal, and then in the subsequent external output signal setting process, the low level signal is once In the external output signal setting process thereafter, a high level signal is output over a predetermined period as the second payout schedule information signal.

  Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 uses the payout request number (15 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception process of the command analysis process (step S503). The number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit is added to the number-of-payout information in the payout-number storage unit (0 in this example) and the number-of-payout information in the payout number storage unit for external output (9 in this example). 15, the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 24. In addition, after the payout control unit 600 pays out the game ball by driving the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout amount information in the payout payout number storage unit in the payout management process (step S710). The payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is subtracted by the payout number. Here, since the payout number information in the payout payout number storage unit is 15, after paying out 15 game balls, The payout amount information in the payout amount storage unit is updated to 0 (= 15-15).

  Also, the payout control unit 600, in the signal output process (step S711), if the value of the payout number information in the payout number output part for external output at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in this example) or more, the external terminal board The processing for outputting a payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via 609 is performed, but here, the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is 24, which is a predetermined number 10 or more. While outputting the information signal once, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the payout number information 24 in the payout number output unit for payout external output, and the payout number information in the payout number storage unit for payout is updated to 14. Yes. Further, the payout control unit 600 outputs the payout information signal once again and outputs the payout information signal once again because the payout number information in the payout number output unit for payout after payout after subtraction is 14 or more. The predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the payout number information 14 in the output payout number storage unit, and the payout number information in the payout number output unit at the time of payout is updated to 4. In this example, as the first payout information signal, a high level signal is output over a predetermined period, and then a low level signal is output once over a period Td, and then the second payout information signal. As a result, a high level signal is output over a predetermined period.

  In this example, the output of the payout schedule information signal by the main control unit 300 and the output of the payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 are performed twice each, and the first payout schedule information signal by the main control unit 300 is performed. The output period of the high level signal and the output period of the high level signal of the first payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 overlap. With such a configuration, the external device can detect the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal at the same time, and can acquire new information that has not been obtained by calculating the logical sum or logical product of the two. There is a case.

  Further, the first payout information signal and the second payout information signal output by the payout control unit 600 are larger than the interval Tc between the first payout schedule information signal and the second payout schedule information signal output by the main control unit 300. The interval Td is set longer. With such a configuration, the external device may be able to easily distinguish between the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal depending on the difference between the output interval of the payout schedule information signal and the output interval of the payout information signal.

  In this example, in the serial command management process, the main control unit 300 subtracts the predetermined number 10 from the total number of winning balls 24 by subtracting the predetermined number 10 because the total number of winning balls is 24 and the predetermined number 10 or more. Is updated to 14, and the number of output requests is updated to 1. After the subtraction, the total number of winning balls is 14, which is equal to or more than the predetermined number 10. Therefore, the predetermined number 10 is again subtracted from the total number 14 of winning balls. Although the number of winning balls is updated to 4 and the number of output requests is updated to 2, it is not limited to this example.

  Therefore, for example, in the N (N is a positive integer) serial command management process, the main control unit 300 subtracts the predetermined number 10 from the total number of winning balls 24 to update the total number of winning balls to 14, and outputs it. After updating the number of requests to 1, once the serial command management process is completed, the first payout information signal is output in the external output signal setting process, and then in the N + 1th and subsequent serial command management processes, the total number of winning balls The predetermined number 10 is subtracted from 14 to update the total number of winning balls to 4 and the output request number is updated to 1, and then the second payout information signal may be output in the external output signal setting process. That is, instead of updating all the output request numbers in one serial command management process, the output request number may be updated in a plurality of serial command management processes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the processing time of the serial command management process varies depending on the number of winning balls, the output timing of the payout information signal is not delayed, and stable. In some cases, game control can be performed.
<External terminal board signal output example 3>

  FIG. 412 is a time chart showing an output example 3 of the external terminal board signal. Here, the “symbol-related signal” in the figure indicates the waveform of the symbol determination frequency information signal (external terminal board signal 3) output by the main control unit 300, but other start port information signals (external terminal board signal). Signal 4) and jackpot information 1 to 4 signals (external terminal board signals 5 to 8) can be replaced (considered in the example described below).

  In this example, the main control unit 300 outputs a high-level signal as a payout schedule information signal and a high-level signal as a symbol-related signal in the N (N is a positive integer) external output signal setting process. Output. Thereafter, in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processing, a low level signal is output as the payout schedule information signal, and a high level signal is output as the symbol related signal. That is, the high level signal is output for the same period as the payout schedule information signal and the symbol related signal.

With this configuration, the external device can simultaneously detect the payout schedule information signal and the symbol-related signal, and can acquire new information that has not been obtained by calculating the logical sum or logical product of the two. There is a case.
<External terminal board signal output example 4>

  FIG. 413 is a time chart illustrating an output example 4 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, in the N (N is a positive integer) number of external output signal setting processes, the main control unit 300 has an output request count of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag is turned on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected). In this case, the payout schedule information signal is output by outputting the payout schedule information signal in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processes without outputting the payout schedule information signal in the Nth external output signal setting process. The output is delayed by a predetermined period from the first external output signal setting process.

  On the other hand, when the number of output requests is 1 or more and the specific abnormality detection flag is on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected) in the N-th external output signal setting process, the main control unit 300 performs the external output signal setting process. In this case, the symbol-related signal is not output, and the symbol-related signal is not output in the (N + 1) th and subsequent external output signal setting processes.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the outside that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 100, and it may be possible to prevent fraud. In this example, the symbol related signal is not output when the specific abnormality detection flag is on. However, as with the payout schedule information signal, the output is delayed with respect to the original output timing. However, there are cases where the same effect can be obtained.
<External terminal board signal output example 5>

  FIG. 414 is a time chart illustrating an output example 5 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the number of winning balls by winning the variable winning opening 234 is set to 10.

  In this example, the main control unit 300 detects the number of winning balls in the variable winning slot 234 in the winning slot counter updating process (step S216) by detecting winning in the variable winning slot 234. 10 is stored, and in the serial command management process (step S219), a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= 10 prize balls) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600. Further, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls is a predetermined number 10 or more in the serial command management process (step S219), and subtracts 10 from the total number of winning balls if applicable. Then, 1 is added to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of winning balls is 10 and the predetermined number 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total winning ball number 10 to update the total winning ball number to 0, and the output request number is updated to 1. .

  Subsequently, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more. In this example, the number of output requests is 1. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), a high level signal is output over a predetermined period as the payout schedule information signal.

  In other words, in this example, the number of winning balls (10 in this example) by winning the variable winning opening 234 and the threshold value (10 in this example) as a condition for adding the number of output requests are set to be the same. The number of output requests is updated to 1 in one serial command management process, and a high level signal is output as a payout schedule information signal in the subsequent external output signal setting process.

In this way, if the configuration is such that the number of winning balls for winning a specific winning opening and the threshold value that is the condition for adding the number of output requests are set to be the same, each time a specific winning opening is won, the payout is made. Since the schedule information signal can be output once, it is possible to estimate the number of winnings for a specific winning opening. For example, when the number of winnings per unit time exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined as abnormal. Appropriate processing (for example, error notification) may be performed.
<External terminal board signal output example 6>

  FIG. 415 is a time chart showing an output example 6 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the main control unit 300 detects the winning to the variable winning opening 234 twice, and therefore, as the first payout schedule information signal in the N (N is a positive integer) external output signal setting process. After outputting a high level signal for a predetermined period Ta, a high level signal is output for a predetermined period as the second payout schedule information signal in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processing after the elapse of the predetermined period Tc. .

  On the other hand, at the timing when the payout control unit 600 determines in the signal output process (step S711) that the value of the payout number information in the payout number output unit at the time of payout is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in this example). The payout information signal is output once for a predetermined period Tb.

In this example, the output period of the high-level signal of the second payout schedule information signal by the main control unit 300 and the output period of the high-level signal of the first payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 overlap. . With such a configuration, the external device can detect the second payout schedule information signal and the first payout information signal at the same time. New information may be obtained.
<External terminal board signal output example 7>

  FIG. 416 is a time chart showing an output example 7 of the external terminal plate signal. FIG. 416 (a) is a partial extraction of the time chart of FIG. 411, and FIG. It is a time chart at the time of determining with specific abnormality detection flag ON in the example shown to a).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 300 has an output request number of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag is turned on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected) in the external output signal setting process. In such a case, the payout schedule information signal is not output. With such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the outside that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 100, and it may be possible to prevent fraud.
<External terminal board signal output example 8>

  FIG. 417 is a time chart showing an output example 8 of the external terminal board signal. FIG. 417 shows a part of the time chart in the normal state, and FIG. It is a time chart.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 300 has an output request number of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag is turned on (for example, a magnetic abnormality is detected) in the external output signal setting process. In this case, the payout schedule information signal is not output, but the security information signal is output. On the other hand, at the timing when the payout control unit 600 determines in the signal output process (step S1708) that the value of the payout number information in the payout external output payout number storage unit is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (10 in this example). A payout information signal is output.

  With this configuration, even when the security information signal cannot be output to the external device due to disconnection or the like, the external device can issue the payout schedule information signal from the main control unit 300 and the payout information signal from the payout control unit 600. Based on the information, it may be possible to determine whether there is an abnormality related to payout. In addition, the external device can detect the security signal and the payout information signal at the same time, and can sometimes obtain new information that has not been obtained by calculating the logical sum or logical product of the two. When the security information signal is output, the payout schedule information signal may be output at a timing delayed by a predetermined time from the output timing of the payout schedule information signal when the security information signal is not output.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has the first control means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least the gaming control and the control for giving a prize (for example, Hereinafter, the gaming machine includes at least a second control unit (for example, a payout control unit 600) capable of executing at least “prize award control”), the first control unit and the second control unit. The control means is at least electrically connected via a serial communication line (for example, serial communication line 612), and the first control means is provided when the first command transmission condition is satisfied. (For example, if a first time (for example, 100 ms) has elapsed since the first command was sent to the payout control unit 600, an error relating to payout has occurred, and a second time has elapsed after the power is turned on. If the main control communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 is never received during the third time, the first command (for example, communication confirmation command) is sent to the second control means. When the second command transmission condition is satisfied (for example, the first control means receives a main control communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600, and the first control means If the command transmission condition is not satisfied, the transmission of the second command is suspended because the first command transmission condition is satisfied, etc.), the second command (for example, a prize ball command) is The second control unit can transmit at least the second control unit, and the second control unit receives a first command from the main control unit 300 when a third command transmission condition is satisfied. If a communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 cannot be received even during the fourth time, an error relating to payout occurs, etc., a third command (for example, a main control communication confirmation command) ) At least to the first control means, the first command is at least transmitted via the serial communication line, and the second command is the serial communication line And the third command is transmitted at least via the serial communication line, and the third command transmission condition is the first command received. The first control means is capable of transmitting the second command in the first period. And the first period is a period from when the third command is transmitted by the second control means to when the first command is transmitted by the first control means. It is a game stand characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the frequency of serial communication can be lowered. For this reason, the control burden can be reduced in both the first and second control means, and stable game control may be performed. In addition, by dropping the frequency of serial communication, it is possible to prevent a command from being missed and to perform stable game control in some cases.

  The third command transmission condition may not include a condition that the second command (for example, a prize ball command) is received from the first control unit.

  With this configuration, the second control unit does not need to transmit the third command in response to the second command, and the first control unit does not need to receive the third command. Therefore, the frequency of serial communication can be reduced. For this reason, the control burden can be reduced in both the first and second control means, and stable game control may be performed. In addition, it is possible to prevent a command from being missed by reducing the frequency of serial communication, and in this case, stable game control may be performed.

  Further, the second command may include at least a command (for example, a prize ball command) instructing to give the prize.

  With such a configuration, a prize can be quickly given by the second control means, and there is a case where no disadvantage is given to the player.

  The first control means may include at least a first control microprocessor (for example, the basic circuit 320 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least the game control. The second control means may include at least a second control microprocessor (for example, a basic circuit of the payout control unit 600) capable of executing at least the prize giving control.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the present embodiment. For example, the roles of the main control unit and the payout control unit in serial communication are reversed, and the payout control unit first You may comprise so that a communication confirmation command may be sent to a main control part. Further, the transmission / reception process of serial communication in the main control unit and the payout control unit may be performed in the main process or may be performed in the timer interrupt process. A serial communication interrupt may be used for transmission / reception of serial data.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where the communication confirmation command is periodically transmitted / received. For example, when the prize ball command needs to be transmitted, the communication confirmation command may be configured to be transmitted / received only before and after the prize ball command. Further, other information such as a gaming state and an error state may be transmitted / received in accordance with the transmission / reception timing of the communication confirmation command. Further, the prize ball command may be transmitted in accordance with the transmission timing of the communication confirmation command. The transmission / reception timing is not limited to the timer interruption period, and may be a period corresponding to a plurality of timer interruptions, or a plurality of transmissions / receptions may be executed by one timer interruption.

  In addition, the number of winning balls when entering the starting opening or winning opening is not particularly limited. For example, the number of winning balls at the first special figure starting opening and the second special drawing starting opening may be different (for example, 3 and 1). Further, since the prize ball command is an important command related to the prize ball, the command may be encrypted.

  Further, commands other than the first command, the second command, and the third command may be transmitted / received. For example, when the first control means satisfies the fourth command transmission condition, In addition, the fourth command may be transmitted at least to the second control means, and the second control means may send the fifth command when the fifth command transmission condition is satisfied. It may be possible to transmit at least to the first control means.

  In addition, communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 has been exemplified. However, communication between other control units, for example, communication between the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit, payout control, and the like. The present invention can also be applied to communication between the unit 600 and the launch control unit 630.

  In the above embodiment, the case of an IC card as an example of a portable storage medium has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the portable storage medium includes an IC chip that can be used for electronic money services, for example. It may be a mobile electronic terminal (for example, a mobile phone terminal) or the like.

  Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

In the above-described embodiment, an example of the enclosed pachinko machine 100 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals may be used. In this case, the game medium includes computerized data corresponding to medals, and the insertion of the game medium includes inputting the computerized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Yes, the payout of the game medium includes outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Further, the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine using game balls (for example, pachinko balls) as game media.
Furthermore, the present invention may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, and a pinball machine. In addition, the present invention is applied to a gaming machine (for example, a casino machine or a video game machine) that can be played when a gaming medium is inserted, and a gaming machine (for example, a medal dropping game machine) that uses the gaming medium itself for a game. May be. Here, “inserting game media” means “betting”, and “bet” is also agreed. “Input of game media” includes “input of currency” and “input of electronic money”. A casino machine is a casino in which a game can be started by inserting a currency, and when a lottery result is won, a symbol set in association with the corresponding selection result is stopped, and a payout as a bonus to a player is performed. Machine.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The game machine of the present invention can be used particularly in the field of game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (such as a pachinko machine).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 140 Ball lending button 142 Return button 144 Switching button 208 Decorative symbol display device 208d Effect display area 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 230 First special figure start port 232 Second special figure starting port 2321 Blade member 234 Variable prize opening 2341 Door member 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
310 I / O
311 Timer circuit 312 Counter circuit 314 Reset control circuit 318 Random number generation circuit 400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 Second sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit (ball number control unit)
610 Game medium path 612 Ball polishing device 614 Lifting device 616 Ball feeding device 622 Launching device 620 Management device 640 Ball number display unit 680 Ball number UI unit 652 Count button 654 Input operation unit 656 Image display unit 1100 Slot machine 1300 Main control unit 1304 CPU
1306 ROM
1308 RAM
1310 I / O
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1400 1st sub-control part 1500 2nd control part 5100 Pachinko machine 5102 Game board 5104 Game area 5110 Decorative design display device 5112 General-purpose display device 5114 Special-purpose display device 5122 General winning opening 5124 General-purpose start port 5126 First special-image start Port 5128 Second special drawing start port 5130 Variable winning port 5300 Main control unit 5302 Basic circuit 5400, 500 Sub-control unit 5680 Package 5680a Easy-to-view part 5680b Non-viewable part 5850 IC socket

The present invention provides a gaming table having a microprocessor, said game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, the microprocessor is to at least built-in CPU, the microprocessor, the ROM When the first jump instruction is received, the CPU executes at least an operation of receiving the instruction stored in the first jump destination address next to the first jump instruction. When the CPU accepts a second jump instruction, the CPU can execute at least an operation of accepting an instruction stored in the second jump destination address next to the second jump instruction. be such, wherein the CPU, when receiving the third jump instruction, stored in the third jump destination address The ROM can execute at least the operation of receiving the instruction next to the third jump instruction, the ROM stores at least the first instruction code, and the ROM stores the third jump instruction. An instruction code is stored at least, the first instruction code is a 1-byte instruction code indicating the first jump instruction, and the third instruction code is the third jump instruction The first instruction code includes at least 3-bit first identification information, and the third instruction code includes 3-bit third identification information. The first jump destination address is a value eight times that of the first identification information, and the third jump destination address is a value eight times that of the third identification information. The third jump destination address is a value that is eight times the value that exceeds the maximum value that can be indicated by 3 bits by 1, and the third jump destination address is the first jump destination address. The third instruction code is smaller than the first instruction code, and the ROM stores at least a first module having the first jump destination address as a head address. The gaming machine is characterized in that the last address of the first module is larger than the second jump destination address.

In step S8233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands (for example, a signal indicating a specific abnormality when there is a specific abnormality in the device monitoring process in step S8232) are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, commands such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM (registered trademark) clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

The present invention is a gaming machine including a microprocessor, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, the microprocessor is a processor including at least a CPU , and the microprocessor includes at least a ROM. a processor for built-in, wherein the CPU, when receiving the first jump instruction, the instruction stored in the first jump target address, at least executable operations of accepting the next jump instruction of the first And when the second jump instruction is received, the CPU can execute at least an operation of receiving the instruction stored in the second jump destination address next to the second jump instruction, When the CPU receives the third jump instruction, the CPU stores the third jump instruction in the third jump destination address. Instructions are, at least capable of executing operations for accepting the next jump instruction said third, said ROM comprises a first instruction code is at least stored, the ROM, the third instruction code is at least stored, The first instruction code is a 1-byte instruction code indicating the first jump instruction, the third instruction code is a 1-byte instruction code indicating the third jump instruction, and the first One instruction code is an instruction code including at least 3-bit first identification information , and the third instruction code is an instruction code including at least 3-bit third identification information. The jump destination address is a value that is eight times that of the first identification information, and the third jump destination address is a value that is different from the value that is eight times that of the third identification information. The jump destination address is a value that is eight times the value that exceeds the maximum value that can be indicated by 3 bits by 1, and the third jump destination address is larger than the first jump destination address, The third instruction code is smaller than the first instruction code, and the ROM stores at least a first module having the first jump destination address as a head address, and the ROM stores the second instruction code . At least a second module having a jump destination address as a head address is stored, the last address of the first module is the same address as the last address of the second module, and the ROM One instruction code is stored at least, and the first jump destination address is smaller than the second jump destination address. It is a game stand.

In addition, communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 has been exemplified. However, communication between other control units, for example, communication between the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit, payout control, and the like. The present invention can also be applied to communication between the unit 600 and the launch control unit 630.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a microprocessor (for example, microprocessor 3000), and the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, The processor is a processor containing at least a CPU (eg, CPU 304), the microprocessor is a processor containing at least a ROM (eg, ROM 306), and the CPU executes a first jump instruction (eg, FIG. 293). When the RST 18H RST instruction (a) is received, the instruction stored in the first jump destination address (for example, 0018H in FIG. 293 (a)) is placed next to the first jump instruction. The CPU can execute at least an accepting operation, and the CPU (For example, when the RST 20H RST instruction in FIG. 293 (a) is received), the instruction stored in the second jump destination address (for example, 0020H in FIG. 293 (b)) is changed to the second The CPU can execute at least an operation to be received after the jump instruction, and the CPU can receive a third jump destination address (for example, when the third jump instruction (for example, RST 40H in FIG. 293 (a)) is received. It is possible to execute at least an operation of receiving the instruction stored in 0040H) of FIG. 293 (b) next to the third jump instruction, and the ROM stores at least a first instruction code, and the ROM Stores at least a third instruction code, and the first instruction code is a 1-byte instruction code indicating the first jump instruction (for example, FIG. 64). DFH RST instruction), and the third instruction code is a 1-byte instruction code indicating the third jump instruction (for example, the RST instruction of instruction data C7H in FIG. 64), and the first instruction The code is an instruction code including at least 3-bit first identification information (for example, 3 bits within a thick frame of the instruction data of the RST instruction in FIG. 64), and the third instruction code is a 3-bit first code. Is an instruction code including at least three pieces of identification information (for example, three bits within the thick frame of the instruction data of the RST instruction in FIG. 64), and the first jump destination address is eight times the first identification information. The third jump destination address is a value different from eight times the third identification information, and the third jump destination address is a maximum value that can be represented by 3 bits. Exceeded by 1 The third jump destination address is larger than the first jump destination address, the third instruction code is smaller than the first instruction code, and the ROM is , A first module (for example, a continuous module from module 03 to module 08 in FIG. 293 (b), or a module having the first jump destination address (for example, 0018H in FIG. 293 (b)), or FIG. 294. (B) Module 04-1) when the other call instruction is an RST 18H RST instruction is stored at least, and the ROM stores the second jump destination address (for example, 0020H in FIG. 293 (b)). Is the second module (for example, a continuous module of modules 04 to 08 in FIG. 293 (b) or FIG. 294 (b) ) Module 04) is stored at least, the last address of the first module is the same address as the last address of the second module, and the ROM stores at least the first instruction code The first jump destination address (for example, 0018H in FIG. 293 (b)) is smaller than the second jump destination address (for example, 0020H in FIG. 293 (b)). It is a game stand.
According to such a configuration, when called by the first jump instruction (for example, the RST 18H RST instruction), the first process (starting from the first jump destination address and configured from the first half and the second half ( For example, the module 03 to the module 08 of FIG. 293 (b), or the module 04-1) when the other call instruction of FIG. 294 (b) is the RST 18H RST instruction is called, and the second When called with a jump instruction (for example, an RST 20H RST instruction), it starts with a second jump destination address larger than the first jump destination address, and has the same end address as the last address of the first module. The second process having an address (that is, a process composed only of the latter half (for example, 0020H in FIG. 293 (b)) Since the second module to be dressed (for example, the modules 04 to 08 in FIG. 293 (b) or the module 04 in FIG. 294 (b)) can be called, it can be called with a small instruction code. While effectively using the instruction (RST instruction), large processing (for example, module 03 to module 08 in FIG. 293 (b) (processing having a size from address 0018H to 0040H), or FIG. 294 (b) Module 04-1 (processing of a size from address 0018H to 0027H) may be possible.
The first identification information is any value from 1 to 7, the third identification information is 0, and the CPU can accept seven types of the first jump instructions. Yes, the CPU can accept one type of the third jump instruction, and each of the seven types of first jump instructions is a jump instruction having different first identification information, Each of the first jump instructions is a jump instruction indicated by any one of the seven kinds of the first instruction codes, and the first instruction code is a 3-bit first code. And a 5-bit second code, the first code is the first identification information, and the second code is 5 bits other than the first code. Structured core The third instruction code is an instruction code composed of a 3-bit third code and a 5-bit fourth code, and the third code is the third identification information. The fourth code is a code composed of 5 bits other than the third code, and each of the seven types of first instruction codes has the same value as the fourth code. An instruction code including a second code may be used.
Further, the third jump destination address may be 64, which is a value 8 times 8 which is a value exceeding 1 which is 7 which is the maximum value of the first identification information.
In addition, the CPU can accept a jump instruction (for example, an unconditional jump instruction, a CPJR instruction, etc.) different from the first jump instruction, the second jump instruction, and the third jump instruction. There may be.
Further, “when the first jump instruction is received” according to claim 1 is “when the CPU reads the first instruction code”, and “the first jump instruction” according to claim 1. The “when the second jump instruction is received” means “when the CPU reads the second instruction code”, and the “when the third jump instruction is received” according to claim 1. , “When the CPU reads the third instruction code”.

Claims (7)

A game machine including a microprocessor including at least a CPU and a ROM,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
The CPU is capable of executing at least an operation of receiving the instruction stored in the first jump destination address next to the first jump instruction when the first jump instruction is received;
When the CPU receives a second jump instruction, it can execute at least an operation of receiving an instruction stored in a second jump destination address next to the second jump instruction;
The ROM stores at least a first module whose first address is the first jump destination address;
The last address of the first module is larger than the second jump destination address.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first module includes at least a first instruction group;
The first module includes at least a second instruction group;
The start address of the second instruction group is larger than the last address of the first instruction group,
The second jump destination address is a head address of the second instruction group,
The CPU can execute at least both the first instruction group and the second instruction group when the first jump instruction is received;
The CPU is capable of executing at least the second instruction group when receiving the second jump instruction;
When the CPU receives the second jump instruction, the CPU does not execute the first instruction group.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The CPU is capable of executing at least a game control process.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The game control process is at least executable based on a game control program.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 4,
The ROM is capable of storing at least the game control program.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
Comprising at least game control means capable of executing at least game control;
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 6,
The microprocessor is mounted on the game control means.
A game stand characterized by that.